To our customers, Old Company Name in Catalogs and Other Documents On April 1st, 2010, NEC Electronics Corporation merged with Renesas Technology Corporation, and Renesas Electronics Corporation took over all the business of both companies. Therefore, although the old company name remains in this document, it is a valid Renesas Electronics document. We appreciate your understanding. Renesas Electronics website: http://www.renesas.com April 1st, 2010 Renesas Electronics Corporation Issued by: Renesas Electronics Corporation (http://www.renesas.com) Send any inquiries to http://www.renesas.com/inquiry. Notice 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. All information included in this document is current as of the date this document is issued. Such information, however, is subject to change without any prior notice. Before purchasing or using any Renesas Electronics products listed herein, please confirm the latest product information with a Renesas Electronics sales office. Also, please pay regular and careful attention to additional and different information to be disclosed by Renesas Electronics such as that disclosed through our website. Renesas Electronics does not assume any liability for infringement of patents, copyrights, or other intellectual property rights of third parties by or arising from the use of Renesas Electronics products or technical information described in this document. No license, express, implied or otherwise, is granted hereby under any patents, copyrights or other intellectual property rights of Renesas Electronics or others. You should not alter, modify, copy, or otherwise misappropriate any Renesas Electronics product, whether in whole or in part. Descriptions of circuits, software and other related information in this document are provided only to illustrate the operation of semiconductor products and application examples. You are fully responsible for the incorporation of these circuits, software, and information in the design of your equipment. Renesas Electronics assumes no responsibility for any losses incurred by you or third parties arising from the use of these circuits, software, or information. When exporting the products or technology described in this document, you should comply with the applicable export control laws and regulations and follow the procedures required by such laws and regulations. You should not use Renesas Electronics products or the technology described in this document for any purpose relating to military applications or use by the military, including but not limited to the development of weapons of mass destruction. Renesas Electronics products and technology may not be used for or incorporated into any products or systems whose manufacture, use, or sale is prohibited under any applicable domestic or foreign laws or regulations. Renesas Electronics has used reasonable care in preparing the information included in this document, but Renesas Electronics does not warrant that such information is error free. Renesas Electronics assumes no liability whatsoever for any damages incurred by you resulting from errors in or omissions from the information included herein. Renesas Electronics products are classified according to the following three quality grades: "Standard", "High Quality", and "Specific". The recommended applications for each Renesas Electronics product depends on the product's quality grade, as indicated below. You must check the quality grade of each Renesas Electronics product before using it in a particular application. You may not use any Renesas Electronics product for any application categorized as "Specific" without the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics. Further, you may not use any Renesas Electronics product for any application for which it is not intended without the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics. Renesas Electronics shall not be in any way liable for any damages or losses incurred by you or third parties arising from the use of any Renesas Electronics product for an application categorized as "Specific" or for which the product is not intended where you have failed to obtain the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics. The quality grade of each Renesas Electronics product is "Standard" unless otherwise expressly specified in a Renesas Electronics data sheets or data books, etc. "Standard": 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. Computers; office equipment; communications equipment; test and measurement equipment; audio and visual equipment; home electronic appliances; machine tools; personal electronic equipment; and industrial robots. "High Quality": Transportation equipment (automobiles, trains, ships, etc.); traffic control systems; anti-disaster systems; anticrime systems; safety equipment; and medical equipment not specifically designed for life support. "Specific": Aircraft; aerospace equipment; submersible repeaters; nuclear reactor control systems; medical equipment or systems for life support (e.g. artificial life support devices or systems), surgical implantations, or healthcare intervention (e.g. excision, etc.), and any other applications or purposes that pose a direct threat to human life. You should use the Renesas Electronics products described in this document within the range specified by Renesas Electronics, especially with respect to the maximum rating, operating supply voltage range, movement power voltage range, heat radiation characteristics, installation and other product characteristics. Renesas Electronics shall have no liability for malfunctions or damages arising out of the use of Renesas Electronics products beyond such specified ranges. Although Renesas Electronics endeavors to improve the quality and reliability of its products, semiconductor products have specific characteristics such as the occurrence of failure at a certain rate and malfunctions under certain use conditions. Further, Renesas Electronics products are not subject to radiation resistance design. Please be sure to implement safety measures to guard them against the possibility of physical injury, and injury or damage caused by fire in the event of the failure of a Renesas Electronics product, such as safety design for hardware and software including but not limited to redundancy, fire control and malfunction prevention, appropriate treatment for aging degradation or any other appropriate measures. Because the evaluation of microcomputer software alone is very difficult, please evaluate the safety of the final products or system manufactured by you. Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office for details as to environmental matters such as the environmental compatibility of each Renesas Electronics product. Please use Renesas Electronics products in compliance with all applicable laws and regulations that regulate the inclusion or use of controlled substances, including without limitation, the EU RoHS Directive. Renesas Electronics assumes no liability for damages or losses occurring as a result of your noncompliance with applicable laws and regulations. This document may not be reproduced or duplicated, in any form, in whole or in part, without prior written consent of Renesas Electronics. Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office if you have any questions regarding the information contained in this document or Renesas Electronics products, or if you have any other inquiries. (Note 1) "Renesas Electronics" as used in this document means Renesas Electronics Corporation and also includes its majorityowned subsidiaries. (Note 2) "Renesas Electronics product(s)" means any product developed or manufactured by or for Renesas Electronics. User's Manual V850ES/KF1 32-bit Single-Chip Microcontrollers Hardware PD703208 PD703208(A) PD703208(A1) PD703208(A2) PD703208Y PD703208Y(A) PD703208Y(A1) PD703208Y(A2) PD703209 PD703209(A) PD703209(A1) PD703209(A2) PD703209Y PD703209Y(A) PD703209Y(A1) PD703209Y(A2) PD703210 PD703210(A) PD703210(A1) PD703210(A2) PD703210Y PD703210Y(A) PD703210Y(A1) PD703210Y(A2) PD703211 PD703211Y Document No. U16891EJ2V0UD00 (2nd edition) Date Published September 2006 N CP(K) 2004 Printed in Japan PD70F3210 PD70F3210(A) PD70F3210Y PD70F3210Y(A) PD70F3210H PD70F3210HY PD70F3211H PD70F3211HY [MEMO] 2 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD NOTES FOR CMOS DEVICES 1 VOLTAGE APPLICATION WAVEFORM AT INPUT PIN Waveform distortion due to input noise or a reflected wave may cause malfunction. If the input of the CMOS device stays in the area between VIL (MAX) and VIH (MIN) due to noise, etc., the device may malfunction. Take care to prevent chattering noise from entering the device when the input level is fixed, and also in the transition period when the input level passes through the area between VIL (MAX) and VIH (MIN). 2 HANDLING OF UNUSED INPUT PINS Unconnected CMOS device inputs can be cause of malfunction. If an input pin is unconnected, it is possible that an internal input level may be generated due to noise, etc., causing malfunction. CMOS devices behave differently than Bipolar or NMOS devices. Input levels of CMOS devices must be fixed high or low by using pull-up or pull-down circuitry. Each unused pin should be connected to VDD or GND via a resistor if there is a possibility that it will be an output pin. All handling related to unused pins must be judged separately for each device and according to related specifications governing the device. 3 PRECAUTION AGAINST ESD A strong electric field, when exposed to a MOS device, can cause destruction of the gate oxide and ultimately degrade the device operation. Steps must be taken to stop generation of static electricity as much as possible, and quickly dissipate it when it has occurred. Environmental control must be adequate. When it is dry, a humidifier should be used. It is recommended to avoid using insulators that easily build up static electricity. Semiconductor devices must be stored and transported in an anti-static container, static shielding bag or conductive material. All test and measurement tools including work benches and floors should be grounded. The operator should be grounded using a wrist strap. Semiconductor devices must not be touched with bare hands. Similar precautions need to be taken for PW boards with mounted semiconductor devices. 4 STATUS BEFORE INITIALIZATION Power-on does not necessarily define the initial status of a MOS device. Immediately after the power source is turned ON, devices with reset functions have not yet been initialized. Hence, power-on does not guarantee output pin levels, I/O settings or contents of registers. A device is not initialized until the reset signal is received. A reset operation must be executed immediately after power-on for devices with reset functions. 5 POWER ON/OFF SEQUENCE In the case of a device that uses different power supplies for the internal operation and external interface, as a rule, switch on the external power supply after switching on the internal power supply. When switching the power supply off, as a rule, switch off the external power supply and then the internal power supply. Use of the reverse power on/off sequences may result in the application of an overvoltage to the internal elements of the device, causing malfunction and degradation of internal elements due to the passage of an abnormal current. The correct power on/off sequence must be judged separately for each device and according to related specifications governing the device. 6 INPUT OF SIGNAL DURING POWER OFF STATE Do not input signals or an I/O pull-up power supply while the device is not powered. The current injection that results from input of such a signal or I/O pull-up power supply may cause malfunction and the abnormal current that passes in the device at this time may cause degradation of internal elements. Input of signals during the power off state must be judged separately for each device and according to related specifications governing the device. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 3 Caution: PD70F3210H, 70F3210HY, 70F3211H, and 70F3211HY use SuperFlash (R) technology licensed from Silicon Storage Technology, Inc. IECUBE is a registered trademark of NEC Electronics Corporation in Japan and Germany. MINICUBE is a registered trademark of NEC Electronics Corporation in Japan and Germany or a trademark in the United States of America. EEPROM is a trademark of NEC Electronics Corporation. Windows and Windows NT are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. PC/AT is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. SPARCstation is a trademark of SPARC International, Inc. Solaris and SunOS are trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. SuperFlash is a registered trademark of Silicon Storage Technology, Inc. in several countries including the United States and Japan. 4 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD These commodities, technology or software, must be exported in accordance with the export administration regulations of the exporting country. Diversion contrary to the law of that country is prohibited. * The information in this document is current as of April, 2006. The information is subject to change without notice. For actual design-in, refer to the latest publications of NEC Electronics data sheets or data books, etc., for the most up-to-date specifications of NEC Electronics products. Not all products and/or types are available in every country. Please check with an NEC Electronics sales representative for availability and additional information. * No part of this document may be copied or reproduced in any form or by any means without the prior written consent of NEC Electronics. NEC Electronics assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document. * NEC Electronics does not assume any liability for infringement of patents, copyrights or other intellectual property rights of third parties by or arising from the use of NEC Electronics products listed in this document or any other liability arising from the use of such products. No license, express, implied or otherwise, is granted under any patents, copyrights or other intellectual property rights of NEC Electronics or others. * Descriptions of circuits, software and other related information in this document are provided for illustrative purposes in semiconductor product operation and application examples. The incorporation of these circuits, software and information in the design of a customer's equipment shall be done under the full responsibility of the customer. NEC Electronics assumes no responsibility for any losses incurred by customers or third parties arising from the use of these circuits, software and information. * While NEC Electronics endeavors to enhance the quality, reliability and safety of NEC Electronics products, customers agree and acknowledge that the possibility of defects thereof cannot be eliminated entirely. To minimize risks of damage to property or injury (including death) to persons arising from defects in NEC Electronics products, customers must incorporate sufficient safety measures in their design, such as redundancy, fire-containment and anti-failure features. * NEC Electronics products are classified into the following three quality grades: "Standard", "Special" and "Specific". The "Specific" quality grade applies only to NEC Electronics products developed based on a customerdesignated "quality assurance program" for a specific application. The recommended applications of an NEC Electronics product depend on its quality grade, as indicated below. Customers must check the quality grade of each NEC Electronics product before using it in a particular application. "Standard": Computers, office equipment, communications equipment, test and measurement equipment, audio and visual equipment, home electronic appliances, machine tools, personal electronic equipment and industrial robots. "Special": Transportation equipment (automobiles, trains, ships, etc.), traffic control systems, anti-disaster systems, anti-crime systems, safety equipment and medical equipment (not specifically designed for life support). "Specific": Aircraft, aerospace equipment, submersible repeaters, nuclear reactor control systems, life support systems and medical equipment for life support, etc. The quality grade of NEC Electronics products is "Standard" unless otherwise expressly specified in NEC Electronics data sheets or data books, etc. If customers wish to use NEC Electronics products in applications not intended by NEC Electronics, they must contact an NEC Electronics sales representative in advance to determine NEC Electronics' willingness to support a given application. (Note) (1) "NEC Electronics" as used in this statement means NEC Electronics Corporation and also includes its majority-owned subsidiaries. (2) "NEC Electronics products" means any product developed or manufactured by or for NEC Electronics (as defined above). M8E 02. 11-1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 5 PREFACE Readers This manual is intended for users who wish to understand the functions of the V850ES/KF1 and design application systems using these products. The target products are as follows. * Standard products: PD703208, 703208Y, 703209, 703209Y, 703210, 703210Y, 703211, 703211Y, 70F3210, 70F3210H, 70F3210HY, 70F3210Y, 70F3211H, 70F3211HY * Special products: PD703208(A), 703208Y(A), 703209(A), 703209Y(A), 703210(A), 703210Y(A), 70F3210(A), 70F3210Y(A), 703208(A1), 703208Y(A1), 703209(A1), 703209Y(A1), 703210(A1), 703210Y(A1), 703208(A2), 703208Y(A2), 703209(A2), 703209Y(A2), 703210(A2), 703210Y(A2) Purpose This manual is intended to give users an understanding of the hardware functions of the V850ES/KF1 shown in the Organization below. Organization This manual is divided into two parts: Hardware (this manual) and Architecture (V850ES Architecture User's Manual). Hardware Architecture * Pin functions * Data types * CPU function * Register set * On-chip peripheral functions * Instruction format and instruction set * Flash memory programming * Interrupts and exceptions * Electrical specifications * Pipeline operation How to Read This Manual It is assumed that the readers of this manual have general knowledge in the fields of electrical engineering, logic circuits, and microcontrollers. Cautions 1. The application examples in this manual apply to "standard" quality grade products for general electronic systems. When using an example in this manual for an application that requires a "special" quality grade product, thoroughly evaluate the component and circuit to be actually used to see if they satisfy the special quality grade. 2. When using this manual as a manual for a special grade product, read the part numbers as follows. PD703208 PD703208Y PD703209 PD703209Y PD703210 PD703210Y PD70F3210 PD70F3210Y 6 PD703208(A), 703208(A1), 703208(A2) PD703208Y(A), 703208Y(A1), 703208Y(A2) PD703209(A), 703209(A1), 703209(A2) PD703209Y(A), 703209Y(A1), 703209Y(A2) PD703210(A), 703210(A1), 703210(A2) PD703210Y(A), 703210Y(A1), 703210Y(A2) PD70F3210(A) PD70F3210Y(A) User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD To find the details of a register where the name is known Refer to APPENDIX C REGISTER INDEX. To understand the details of an instruction function Refer to the V850ES Architecture User's Manual. Register format The name of the bit whose number is in angle brackets (<>) in the figure of the register format of each register is defined as a reserved word in the device file. To understand the overall functions of the V850ES/KF1 Read this manual according to the CONTENTS. To know the electrical specifications of the V850ES/KF1 Refer to CHAPTER 28 VERSION, ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (256 KB MASK ROM SINGLE-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION), CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS (MASK ROM VERSION OF 128 KB OR LESS AND TWO-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION), (A) GRADE PRODUCTS), CHAPTER 30 PRODUCTS), and CHAPTER 31 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A1) GRADE ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS). In this manual, "yyy bit of xxx register" is expressed as "xxx.yyy bit". Note however, that even if "xxx.yyy" is described in a program, the compiler/assembler cannot correctly recognize it. The mark <R> shows major revised points. The revised points can be easily searched by copying an "<R>" in the PDF file and specifying it in the "Find what:" field. Conventions Data significance: Higher digits on the left and lower digits on the right Active low representation: xxx (overscore over pin or signal name) Memory map address: Higher addresses on the top and lower addresses on the bottom Note: Footnote for item marked with Note in the text Caution: Information requiring particular attention Remark: Supplementary information Numeric representation: Binary ... xxxx or xxxxB Decimal ... xxxx Hexadecimal ... xxxxH Prefix indicating power of 2 (address space, memory capacity): K (kilo): 210 = 1,024 M (mega): 220 = 1,0242 G (giga): 230 = 1,0243 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 7 Related Documents The related documents indicated in this publication may include preliminary versions. However, preliminary versions are not marked as such. Documents related to V850ES/KF1 Document Name Document No. V850ES Architecture User's Manual U15943E V850ES/KF1 Hardware User's Manual This manual Documents related to development tools (user's manuals) Document Name Document No. IE-V850ES-G1 (In-Circuit Emulator) U16313E IE-703217-G1-EM1 (In-Circuit Emulator Option Board) U16594E QB-V850MINI (On-Chip Debug Emulator) U17638E QB-V850ESKX1H (In-Circuit Emulator) U17214E CA850 Ver. 3.00 C Compiler Package Operation U17293E C Language U17291E Assembly Language U17292E Link Directives U17294E PM+ Ver. 6.00 Project Manager U17178E ID850 Ver. 3.00 Integrated Debugger Operation U17358E ID850QB Ver. 3.10 Integrated Debugger Operation U17435E SM850 Ver. 2.50 System Simulator Operation U16218E SM850 Ver. 2.00 or Later System Simulator External Part User Open U14873E Interface Specification RX850 Ver. 3.20 Real-Time OS RX850 Pro Ver. 3.20 Real-Time OS RD850 Ver. 3.01 Task Debugger 8 Basics U13430E Installation U13410E Technical U13431E Task Debugger U17420E Basics U13773E Installation U13774E Technical U13772E Task Debugger U17422E U13737E RD850 Pro Ver. 3.01 Task Debugger U13916E AZ850 Ver. 3.30 System Performance Analyzer U17423E PG-FP3 Flash Memory Programmer U13502E PG-FP4 Flash Memory Programmer U15260E User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................................18 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 K1 Series Product Lineup ......................................................................................................... 18 1.1.1 V850ES/Kx1+, V850ES/Kx1 products lineup..................................................................................18 1.1.2 78K0/Kx1+, 78K0/Kx1 products lineup ...........................................................................................21 Features ...................................................................................................................................... 24 Applications................................................................................................................................ 25 Ordering Information ................................................................................................................. 26 Pin Configuration (Top View).................................................................................................... 30 Function Block Configuration .................................................................................................. 33 Overview of Functions .............................................................................................................. 37 CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS ................................................................................................................38 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 List of Pin Functions ................................................................................................................. 39 Pin Status.................................................................................................................................... 44 Pin I/O Circuits and Recommended Connection of Unused Pins......................................... 45 Pin I/O Circuits ........................................................................................................................... 47 CHAPTER 3 CPU FUNCTIONS ..............................................................................................................49 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 Features ...................................................................................................................................... 49 CPU Register Set ....................................................................................................................... 50 3.2.1 Program register set .......................................................................................................................51 3.2.2 System register set.........................................................................................................................52 Operating Modes........................................................................................................................ 58 Address Space ........................................................................................................................... 59 3.4.1 CPU address space........................................................................................................................59 3.4.2 Wraparound of CPU address space ...............................................................................................60 3.4.3 Memory map...................................................................................................................................61 3.4.4 Areas ..............................................................................................................................................63 3.4.5 Recommended use of address space ............................................................................................68 3.4.6 Peripheral I/O registers...................................................................................................................71 3.4.7 Special registers .............................................................................................................................79 3.4.8 Cautions .........................................................................................................................................82 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS............................................................................................................86 4.1 4.2 4.3 Features ...................................................................................................................................... 86 Basic Port Configuration........................................................................................................... 86 Port Configuration ..................................................................................................................... 87 4.3.1 Port 0..............................................................................................................................................93 4.3.2 Port 3..............................................................................................................................................95 4.3.3 Port 4............................................................................................................................................100 4.3.4 Port 5............................................................................................................................................102 4.3.5 Port 7............................................................................................................................................105 4.3.6 Port 9............................................................................................................................................106 4.3.7 Port CM ........................................................................................................................................112 4.3.8 Port CS.........................................................................................................................................114 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 9 4.3.9 Port CT ........................................................................................................................................ 115 4.3.10 Port DL......................................................................................................................................... 117 4.4 4.5 4.6 Block Diagrams ........................................................................................................................ 120 Port Register Setting When Alternate Function Is Used...................................................... 144 Cautions .................................................................................................................................... 149 4.6.1 Cautions on bit manipulation instruction for port n register (Pn) .................................................. 149 4.6.2 Hysteresis characteristics ............................................................................................................ 150 CHAPTER 5 BUS CONTROL FUNCTION .......................................................................................... 151 5.1 5.2 Features .................................................................................................................................... 151 Bus Control Pins ...................................................................................................................... 152 5.2.1 Pin status when internal ROM, internal RAM, or on-chip peripheral I/O is accessed................... 152 5.2.2 Pin status in each operation mode............................................................................................... 152 5.3 Memory Block Function .......................................................................................................... 153 5.4 Bus Access ............................................................................................................................... 155 5.3.1 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8 5.9 5.10 Chip select control function.......................................................................................................... 154 5.4.1 Number of clocks for access........................................................................................................ 155 5.4.2 Bus size setting function .............................................................................................................. 155 5.4.3 Access by bus size ...................................................................................................................... 156 Wait Function............................................................................................................................ 163 5.5.1 Programmable wait function ........................................................................................................ 163 5.5.2 External wait function................................................................................................................... 164 5.5.3 Relationship between programmable wait and external wait ....................................................... 164 5.5.4 Programmable address wait function........................................................................................... 165 Idle State Insertion Function................................................................................................... 166 Bus Hold Function ................................................................................................................... 167 5.7.1 Functional outline......................................................................................................................... 167 5.7.2 Bus hold procedure...................................................................................................................... 168 5.7.3 Operation in power save mode .................................................................................................... 168 Bus Priority ............................................................................................................................... 169 Bus Timing................................................................................................................................ 170 Cautions .................................................................................................................................... 173 CHAPTER 6 CLOCK GENERATION FUNCTION............................................................................... 174 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 174 Configuration............................................................................................................................ 175 Registers ................................................................................................................................... 177 Operation .................................................................................................................................. 181 6.4.1 Operation of each clock ............................................................................................................... 181 6.4.2 Clock output function ................................................................................................................... 181 6.4.3 External clock input function ........................................................................................................ 181 PLL Function ............................................................................................................................ 182 6.5.1 Overview...................................................................................................................................... 182 6.5.2 Register ....................................................................................................................................... 182 6.5.3 Usage .......................................................................................................................................... 183 CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP)................................................................. 184 7.1 10 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 184 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 7.6 7.7 Functions .................................................................................................................................. 184 Configuration............................................................................................................................ 185 Registers................................................................................................................................... 187 Operation .................................................................................................................................. 198 7.5.1 Interval timer mode (TP0MD2 to TP0MD0 bits = 000)..................................................................199 7.5.2 External event count mode (TP0MD2 to TP0MD0 bits = 001)......................................................209 7.5.3 External trigger pulse output mode (TP0MD2 to TP0MD0 bits = 010)..........................................217 7.5.4 One-shot pulse output mode (TP0MD2 to TP0MD0 bits = 011) ...................................................229 7.5.5 PWM output mode (TP0MD2 to TP0MD0 bits = 100)...................................................................236 7.5.6 Free-running timer mode (TP0MD2 to TP0MD0 bits = 101) .........................................................245 7.5.7 Pulse width measurement mode (TP0MD2 to TP0MD0 bits = 110) .............................................262 7.5.8 Timer output operations................................................................................................................268 Eliminating Noise on Capture Trigger Input Pin (TIP0a)...................................................... 269 Cautions.................................................................................................................................... 271 CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0..............................................................................272 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6 Functions .................................................................................................................................. 272 Configuration............................................................................................................................ 273 Registers................................................................................................................................... 278 Operation .................................................................................................................................. 285 8.4.1 Interval timer operation.................................................................................................................285 8.4.2 Square wave output operation......................................................................................................288 8.4.3 External event counter operation..................................................................................................291 8.4.4 Operation in clear & start mode entered by TI0n0 pin valid edge input ........................................294 8.4.5 Free-running timer operation ........................................................................................................307 8.4.6 PPG output operation ...................................................................................................................316 8.4.7 One-shot pulse output operation ..................................................................................................319 8.4.8 Pulse width measurement operation ............................................................................................324 Special Use of TM0n ................................................................................................................ 332 8.5.1 Rewriting CR0n1 register during TM0n operation.........................................................................332 8.5.2 Setting LVS0n and LVR0n bits .....................................................................................................332 Cautions.................................................................................................................................... 334 CHAPTER 9 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 5................................................................................341 9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 Functions .................................................................................................................................. 341 Configuration............................................................................................................................ 342 Registers................................................................................................................................... 345 Operation .................................................................................................................................. 348 9.4.1 Operation as interval timer ...........................................................................................................348 9.4.2 Operation as external event counter.............................................................................................350 9.4.3 Square-wave output operation......................................................................................................351 9.4.4 8-bit PWM output operation ..........................................................................................................353 9.4.5 Operation as interval timer (16 bits)..............................................................................................356 9.4.6 Operation as external event counter (16 bits)...............................................................................358 9.4.7 Square-wave output operation (16-bit resolution).........................................................................359 9.4.8 Cautions .......................................................................................................................................360 CHAPTER 10 8-BIT TIMER H ..............................................................................................................361 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 11 10.1 10.2 10.3 10.4 Functions .................................................................................................................................. 361 Configuration............................................................................................................................ 361 Registers ................................................................................................................................... 364 Operation .................................................................................................................................. 368 10.4.1 Operation as interval timer/square wave output........................................................................... 368 10.4.2 PWM output mode operation ....................................................................................................... 371 10.4.3 Carrier generator mode operation................................................................................................ 377 CHAPTER 11 INTERVAL TIMER, WATCH TIMER ........................................................................... 384 11.1 Interval Timer BRG................................................................................................................... 384 11.1.1 Functions ..................................................................................................................................... 384 11.1.2 Configuration ............................................................................................................................... 384 11.1.3 Registers...................................................................................................................................... 386 11.1.4 Operation ..................................................................................................................................... 388 11.2 Watch Timer.............................................................................................................................. 389 11.2.1 Functions ..................................................................................................................................... 389 11.2.2 Configuration ............................................................................................................................... 389 11.2.3 Registers...................................................................................................................................... 390 11.2.4 Operation ..................................................................................................................................... 392 11.3 Cautions .................................................................................................................................... 393 CHAPTER 12 WATCHDOG TIMER FUNCTIONS .............................................................................. 395 12.1 Watchdog Timer 1 .................................................................................................................... 395 12.1.1 Functions ..................................................................................................................................... 395 12.1.2 Configuration ............................................................................................................................... 397 12.1.3 Registers...................................................................................................................................... 397 12.1.4 Operation ..................................................................................................................................... 399 12.2 Watchdog Timer 2 .................................................................................................................... 401 12.2.1 Functions ..................................................................................................................................... 401 12.2.2 Configuration ............................................................................................................................... 402 12.2.3 Registers...................................................................................................................................... 402 12.2.4 Operation ..................................................................................................................................... 404 CHAPTER 13 REAL-TIME OUTPUT FUNCTION (RTO) ................................................................... 405 13.1 13.2 13.3 13.4 13.5 13.6 13.7 Function .................................................................................................................................... 405 Configuration............................................................................................................................ 406 Registers ................................................................................................................................... 407 Operation .................................................................................................................................. 409 Usage......................................................................................................................................... 410 Cautions .................................................................................................................................... 410 Security Function ..................................................................................................................... 411 CHAPTER 14 A/D CONVERTER ......................................................................................................... 413 14.1 14.2 14.3 14.4 Function .................................................................................................................................... 413 Configuration............................................................................................................................ 414 Registers ................................................................................................................................... 416 Operation .................................................................................................................................. 423 14.4.1 Basic operation ............................................................................................................................ 423 12 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 14.4.2 A/D conversion operation .............................................................................................................424 14.4.3 Power fail monitoring function.......................................................................................................424 14.4.4 Setting procedure .........................................................................................................................425 14.5 14.6 Cautions.................................................................................................................................... 426 How to Read A/D Converter Characteristics Table .............................................................. 432 CHAPTER 15 ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL INTERFACE (UART) .....................................................436 15.1 15.2 15.3 15.4 15.5 Features .................................................................................................................................... 436 Configuration............................................................................................................................ 437 Registers................................................................................................................................... 439 Interrupt Requests ................................................................................................................... 445 Operation .................................................................................................................................. 446 15.5.1 Data format...................................................................................................................................446 15.5.2 Transmit operation........................................................................................................................447 15.5.3 Continuous transmission operation ..............................................................................................449 15.5.4 Receive operation.........................................................................................................................453 15.5.5 Reception error.............................................................................................................................454 15.5.6 Parity types and corresponding operation ....................................................................................456 15.5.7 Receive data noise filter ...............................................................................................................457 15.6 Dedicated Baud Rate Generator n (BRGn)............................................................................ 458 15.6.1 Baud rate generator n (BRGn) configuration ................................................................................458 15.6.2 Serial clock generation .................................................................................................................459 15.6.3 Baud rate setting example ............................................................................................................462 15.6.4 Allowable baud rate range during reception .................................................................................463 15.6.5 Transfer rate during continuous transmission...............................................................................465 15.7 Cautions.................................................................................................................................... 465 CHAPTER 16 CLOCKED SERIAL INTERFACE 0 (CSI0).................................................................466 16.1 16.2 16.3 16.4 Features .................................................................................................................................... 466 Configuration............................................................................................................................ 467 Registers................................................................................................................................... 470 Operation .................................................................................................................................. 479 16.4.1 Transmission/reception completion interrupt request signal (INTCSI0n)......................................479 16.4.2 Single transfer mode ....................................................................................................................481 16.4.3 Continuous transfer mode ............................................................................................................484 16.5 Output Pins............................................................................................................................... 492 CHAPTER 17 CLOCKED SERIAL INTERFACE A (CSIA) WITH AUTOMATIC TRANSMIT/RECEIVE FUNCTION.................................................................................493 17.1 17.2 17.3 17.4 Functions .................................................................................................................................. 493 Configuration............................................................................................................................ 494 Registers................................................................................................................................... 496 Operation .................................................................................................................................. 504 17.4.1 3-wire serial I/O mode ..................................................................................................................504 17.4.2 3-wire serial I/O mode with automatic transmit/receive function ...................................................508 CHAPTER 18 I2C BUS...........................................................................................................................524 18.1 Features .................................................................................................................................... 524 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 13 18.2 18.3 18.4 Configuration............................................................................................................................ 527 Registers ................................................................................................................................... 529 Functions .................................................................................................................................. 543 18.4.1 Pin configuration .......................................................................................................................... 543 18.5 I2C Bus Definitions and Control Methods .............................................................................. 544 18.5.1 Start condition.............................................................................................................................. 544 18.5.2 Addresses.................................................................................................................................... 545 18.5.3 Transfer direction specification .................................................................................................... 546 18.5.4 ACK ............................................................................................................................................. 547 18.5.5 Stop condition .............................................................................................................................. 548 <R> 18.6 18.5.6 Wait state..................................................................................................................................... 549 18.5.7 Wait state cancellation method .................................................................................................... 551 2 I C Interrupt Request Signals (INTIIC0) .................................................................................. 552 18.6.1 Master device operation............................................................................................................... 553 18.6.2 Slave device operation (when receiving slave address data (address match))............................ 556 18.6.3 Slave device operation (when receiving extension code) ............................................................ 560 18.6.4 Operation without communication................................................................................................ 564 18.6.5 Arbitration loss operation (operation as slave after arbitration loss) ............................................ 565 18.6.6 Operation when arbitration loss occurs (no communication after arbitration loss) ....................... 567 18.7 18.8 18.9 18.10 18.11 18.12 18.13 Interrupt Request Signal (INTIIC0) Generation Timing and Wait Control........................... 574 Address Match Detection Method .......................................................................................... 575 Error Detection ......................................................................................................................... 575 Extension Code ........................................................................................................................ 576 Arbitration ................................................................................................................................. 577 Wakeup Function ..................................................................................................................... 578 Communication Reservation .................................................................................................. 579 18.13.1 When communication reservation function is enabled (IICF0.IICRSV0 bit = 0) ........................... 579 18.13.2 When communication reservation function is disabled (IICF0.IICRSV0 bit = 1) .......................... 582 18.14 Cautions .................................................................................................................................... 583 18.15 Communication Operations .................................................................................................... 584 18.15.1 Master operation in single master system.................................................................................... 585 18.15.2 Master operation in multimaster system ...................................................................................... 586 18.15.3 Slave operation............................................................................................................................ 589 18.16 Timing of Data Communication .............................................................................................. 592 CHAPTER 19 INTERRUPT/EXCEPTION PROCESSING FUNCTION............................................... 599 19.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 599 19.1.1 19.2 Features....................................................................................................................................... 599 Non-Maskable Interrupts ......................................................................................................... 602 19.2.1 Operation ..................................................................................................................................... 605 19.3 19.2.2 Restore ........................................................................................................................................ 606 19.2.3 NP flag ......................................................................................................................................... 607 Maskable Interrupts ................................................................................................................. 608 19.3.1 Operation ..................................................................................................................................... 608 19.3.2 Restore ........................................................................................................................................ 610 19.3.3 Priorities of maskable interrupts................................................................................................... 611 19.3.4 Interrupt control register (xxlCn) .................................................................................................. 615 19.3.5 Interrupt mask registers 0, 1, 3 (IMR0, IMR1, IMR3) ................................................................... 617 14 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 19.3.6 In-service priority register (ISPR)..................................................................................................618 19.3.7 ID flag ...........................................................................................................................................619 19.3.8 Watchdog timer mode register 1 (WDTM1) ..................................................................................620 19.4 External Interrupt Request Input Pins (NMI, INTP0 to INTP6) ............................................. 621 19.4.1 Noise elimination ..........................................................................................................................621 19.4.2 19.5 Edge detection..............................................................................................................................621 Software Exceptions................................................................................................................ 624 19.5.1 Operation......................................................................................................................................624 19.6 19.5.2 Restore .........................................................................................................................................625 19.5.3 EP flag..........................................................................................................................................626 Exception Trap ......................................................................................................................... 627 19.6.1 Illegal opcode ...............................................................................................................................627 19.6.2 Debug trap....................................................................................................................................629 19.7 19.8 19.9 19.10 Multiple Interrupt Servicing Control ...................................................................................... 631 Interrupt Response Time......................................................................................................... 633 Periods in Which Interrupts Are Not Acknowledged by CPU ............................................. 634 Cautions.................................................................................................................................... 634 CHAPTER 20 KEY INTERRUPT FUNCTION ......................................................................................635 20.1 20.2 Function .................................................................................................................................... 635 Register..................................................................................................................................... 636 CHAPTER 21 STANDBY FUNCTION...................................................................................................637 21.1 21.2 21.3 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 637 Registers................................................................................................................................... 640 HALT Mode ............................................................................................................................... 643 21.3.1 Setting and operation status .........................................................................................................643 21.3.2 Releasing HALT mode .................................................................................................................643 21.4 IDLE Mode................................................................................................................................. 645 21.4.1 Setting and operation status .........................................................................................................645 21.4.2 Releasing IDLE mode...................................................................................................................646 21.5 STOP Mode ............................................................................................................................... 648 21.5.1 Setting and operation status .........................................................................................................648 21.5.2 Releasing STOP mode.................................................................................................................649 21.5.3 Securing oscillation stabilization time when STOP mode is released...........................................651 21.6 Subclock Operation Mode....................................................................................................... 652 21.6.1 Setting and operation status .........................................................................................................652 21.6.2 21.7 Releasing subclock operation mode.............................................................................................652 Sub-IDLE Mode......................................................................................................................... 654 21.7.1 Setting and operation status .........................................................................................................654 21.7.2 Releasing sub-IDLE mode............................................................................................................655 CHAPTER 22 RESET FUNCTION ........................................................................................................657 22.1 22.2 22.3 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 657 Configuration............................................................................................................................ 657 Operation .................................................................................................................................. 658 CHAPTER 23 REGULATOR ..................................................................................................................662 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 15 23.1 23.2 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 662 Operation .................................................................................................................................. 662 CHAPTER 24 ROM CORRECTION FUNCTION................................................................................. 664 24.1 24.2 24.3 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 664 Registers ................................................................................................................................... 665 ROM Correction Operation and Program Flow ..................................................................... 666 CHAPTER 25 FLASH MEMORY (SINGLE POWER) ........................................................................ 668 25.1 25.2 25.3 25.4 Features .................................................................................................................................... 668 Memory Configuration ............................................................................................................. 669 Functional Outline.................................................................................................................... 670 Rewriting by Dedicated Flash Programmer .......................................................................... 674 25.4.1 Programming environment........................................................................................................... 674 25.4.2 Communication mode .................................................................................................................. 675 25.4.3 Flash memory control .................................................................................................................. 680 25.4.4 Selection of communication mode ............................................................................................... 681 25.4.5 Communication commands ......................................................................................................... 682 25.4.6 Pin connection ............................................................................................................................. 683 25.5 Rewriting by Self Programming.............................................................................................. 688 25.5.1 Overview...................................................................................................................................... 688 25.5.2 Features....................................................................................................................................... 689 25.5.3 Standard self programming flow .................................................................................................. 690 25.5.4 Flash functions............................................................................................................................. 691 25.5.5 Pin processing ............................................................................................................................. 691 25.5.6 Internal resources used ............................................................................................................... 692 CHAPTER 26 FLASH MEMORY (TWO POWER) ............................................................................. 693 26.1 26.2 26.3 26.4 26.5 Features .................................................................................................................................... 693 Writing with Flash Programmer.............................................................................................. 694 Programming Environment..................................................................................................... 697 Communication Mode.............................................................................................................. 697 Pin Processing ......................................................................................................................... 700 26.5.1 VPP pin ......................................................................................................................................... 700 26.5.2 Serial interface pins ..................................................................................................................... 701 26.5.3 RESET pin ................................................................................................................................... 703 26.5.4 Port pins....................................................................................................................................... 703 26.5.5 Other signal pins.......................................................................................................................... 703 26.5.6 Power supply ............................................................................................................................... 703 26.6 Programming Method .............................................................................................................. 704 26.6.1 Controlling flash memory ............................................................................................................. 704 26.6.2 Flash memory programming mode .............................................................................................. 705 26.6.3 Selecting communication mode ................................................................................................... 705 26.6.4 Communication commands ......................................................................................................... 706 <R> CHAPTER 27 ON-CHIP DEBUG FUNCTION ..................................................................................... 707 27.1 ROM Security Function ........................................................................................................... 707 27.1.1 16 Security ID ................................................................................................................................... 707 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 27.1.2 27.2 Setting ..........................................................................................................................................708 Cautions.................................................................................................................................... 709 CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (256 KB MASK ROM VERSION, SINGLEPOWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION) .......................................................................710 CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS (MASK ROM VERSION OF 128 KB OR LESS AND TWO-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION), (A) GRADE PRODUCTS).........................................................................747 CHAPTER 30 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A1) GRADE PRODUCTS).................................782 CHAPTER 31 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS).................................802 CHAPTER 32 PACKAGE DRAWINGS.................................................................................................822 CHAPTER 33 RECOMMENDED SOLDERING CONDITIONS............................................................824 APPENDIX A DEVELOPMENT TOOLS ...............................................................................................831 A.1 A.2 A.3 A.4 <R> A.5 A.6 A.7 Software Package .................................................................................................................... 834 Language Processing Software ............................................................................................. 834 Control Software ...................................................................................................................... 834 Debugging Tools (Hardware).................................................................................................. 835 A.4.1 When using in-circuit emulator IE-V850ES-G1.............................................................................835 A.4.2 When using in-circuit emulator IE-V850ESK1-ET.........................................................................835 A.4.3 When using IECUBE QB-V850ESKX1H ......................................................................................836 A.4.4 When using MINICUBE QB-V850MINI .........................................................................................838 Debugging Tools (Software) ................................................................................................... 840 Embedded Software ................................................................................................................ 841 Flash Memory Writing Tools................................................................................................... 841 APPENDIX B INSTRUCTION SET LIST..............................................................................................842 B.1 B.2 Conventions ............................................................................................................................. 842 Instruction Set (in Alphabetical Order).................................................................................. 845 APPENDIX C REGISTER INDEX..........................................................................................................852 APPENDIX D REVISION HISTORY ......................................................................................................858 D.1 Major Revisions in This Edition ................................................................................................. 858 D.2 Modifications from Document Number U15862EJ4V1UD00 ................................................... 861 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 17 CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION 1.1 K1 Series Product Lineup 1.1.1 V850ES/Kx1+, V850ES/Kx1 products lineup * 64-pin plastic LQFP (10 x 10 mm, 0.5 mm pitch) * 64-pin plastic TQFP (12 x 12 mm, 0.65 mm pitch) V850ES/KE1 PD70F3207HY PD70F3207H Single-power flash: 128 KB, RAM: 4 KB V850ES/KE1+ PD703207Y PD703207 Mask ROM: 128 KB, RAM: 4 KB PD70F3302Y PD70F3302 Single-power flash: 128 KB, RAM: 4 KB PD703302Y PD703302 Mask ROM: 128 KB, RAM: 4 KB * 80-pin plastic TQFP (12 x 12 mm, 0.5 mm pitch) * 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14 mm, 0.65 mm pitch) V850ES/KF1 PD70F3211HY PD70F3211H Single-power flash: 256 KB, RAM: 12 KB PD70F3210HY PD70F3210H Single-power flash: 128 KB, RAM: 6 KB PD70F3210Y PD70F3210 Two-power flash: 128 KB, RAM: 6 KB V850ES/KF1+ PD703211Y PD703211 Mask ROM: 256 KB, RAM: 12 KB PD703210Y PD703210 Mask ROM: 128 KB, RAM: 6 KB PD703209Y PD70F3308Y PD70F3308 Single-power flash: 256 KB, RAM: 12 KB PD703308Y PD703308 Mask ROM: 256 KB, RAM: 12 KB PD70F3306Y PD70F3306 Single-power flash: 128 KB, RAM: 6 KB PD703209 Mask ROM: 96 KB, RAM: 4 KB PD703208Y PD703208 Mask ROM: 64 KB, RAM: 4 KB * 100-pin plastic LQFP (14 x 14 mm, 0.5 mm pitch) * 100-pin plastic QFP (14 x 20 mm, 0.65 mm pitch) V850ES/KG1 PD70F3215HY PD70F3215H Single-power flash: 256 KB, RAM: 16 KB PD70F3214HY PD70F3214H Single-power flash: 128 KB, RAM: 6 KB PD70F3214Y PD70F3214 Two-power flash: 128 KB, RAM: 6 KB PD703215Y PD703215 Mask ROM: 256 KB, RAM: 16 KB PD703214Y PD703214 Mask ROM: 128 KB, RAM: 6 KB PD703213Y V850ES/KG1+ PD70F3313Y PD70F3313 Single-power flash: 256 KB, RAM: 16 KB PD70F3311Y PD70F3311 Single-power flash: 128 KB, RAM: 6 KB PD703213 Mask ROM: 96 KB, RAM: 4 KB PD703212Y PD703212 Mask ROM: 64 KB, RAM: 4 KB * 144-pin plastic LQFP (20 x 20 mm, 0.5 mm pitch) V850ES/KJ1 PD70F3218HY PD70F3218H PD70F3318Y PD70F3318 Single-power flash: 256 KB, RAM: 16 KB PD70F3217HY PD70F3217H Single-power flash: 128 KB, RAM: 6 KB PD70F3217Y PD70F3217 Two-power flash: 128 KB, RAM: 6 KB 18 V850ES/KJ1+ Single-power flash: 256 KB, RAM: 16 KB PD703217Y PD703217 Mask ROM: 128 KB, RAM: 6 KB PD703216Y PD70F3316Y PD70F3316 Single-power flash: 128 KB, RAM: 6 KB PD703216 Mask ROM: 96 KB, RAM: 6 KB User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD PD703313Y PD703313 Mask ROM: 256 KB, RAM: 16 KB CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION The function list of the V850ES/Kx1+ is shown below. Product Name V850ES/KE1+ Number of pins Internal memory (KB) 64 pins Mask ROM - - 256 - - - - 128 128 - 256 128 - 256 128 256 6 16 RAM 4 50 ns @20 MHz Clock 2 to 10 MHz Subclock 32.768 kHz Internal oscillation 240 kHz (TYP.) 12 6 16 8 8 8 16 CMOS I/O 41 (4)Note 1 57 (6)Note 1 72 (8)Note 1 106 (12)Note 1 N-ch open-drain I/O 2 2 4 6 16-bit (TMP) 1 ch 1 ch 1 ch 1 ch 16-bit (TM0) 1 ch 2 ch 4 ch 6 ch 8-bit (TM5) 2 ch 2 ch 2 ch 2 ch 8-bit (TMH) 2 ch 2 ch 2 ch 2 ch Interval timer 1 ch 1 ch 1 ch 1 ch Watch 1 ch 1 ch 1 ch 1 ch WDT1 1 ch 1 ch 1 ch 1 ch WDT2 1 ch 1 ch 1 ch 1 ch 6 bits x 1 ch 6 bits x 1 ch 6 bits x 1 ch 6 bits x 2 ch CSI 2 ch - Automatic transmit/receive 3-wire CSI UART 1 ch 2 ch 2 ch 3 ch 1 ch 2 ch 2 ch 1 ch 2 ch 2 ch UART supporting LIN-bus 1 ch 1 ch 1 ch 1 ch I2CNote 2 1 ch 1 ch 1 ch 2 ch Address space - 128 KB 3 MB 15 MB Address bus - 16 bits 22 bits 24 bits Mode - Multiplex only - - DMA controller 10-bit A/D converter 8 ch 8 ch - 8-bit D/A converter Interrupt 6 CMOS input RTO External bus 144 pins 256 Minimum instruction execution time Serial interface 100 pins - 2.7 to 5.5 V Timer 80 pins V850ES/KJ1+ - Flash memory X1 input V850ES/KG1+ 128 Supply voltage Port V850ES/KF1+ - Multiplex/separate 4 ch 4 ch 8 ch 16 ch 2 ch 2 ch External 9 9 9 9 Internal 26/27Note 2 29/30Note 2 41/42Note 2 46/48Note 2 Key return input 8 ch 8 ch 8 ch 8 ch Reset Provided RESET pin POC 2.7 V or less fixed LVI 3.1 V/3.3 V 0.15 V or 3.5 V/3.7 V/3.9 V/4.1 V/4.3 V 0.2 V (selectable by software) Clock monitor Provided (monitor by internal oscillator) WDT1 Provided WDT2 Provided ROM correction 4 Regulator None None Standby function HALT/IDLE/STOP/sub-IDLE mode Operating ambient temperature TA = -40 to +85C Provided Notes 1. Figures in parentheses indicate the number of pins for which the N-ch open-drain output can be selected by software. 2. Only in products with an I2C bus (Y products) User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 19 CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION The function list of the V850ES/Kx1 is shown below. Product Name V850ES/KE1 Number of pins Internal memory (KB) V850ES/KF1 64 pins Mask ROM 80 pins 128 - - 128 Flash memory RAM 4 Supply voltage 2.7 to 5.5 V Minimum instruction execution time 50 ns @20 MHz Clock X1 input 2 to 10 MHz Subclock 32.768 kHz V850ES/KG1 64/ 128 96 - - 4 100 pins - 256 - 128 - 256 6 Timer 4 - 96/128 - - 128 - 256 - 128 256 6 16 6 8 16 CMOS I/O 41 (4)Note 1 57 (6)Note 1 72 (8)Note 1 106 (12)Note 1 2 N-ch open-drain I/O 2 16-bit (TMP) 1 ch 16-bit (TM0) 1 ch 2 ch 4 ch 6 ch 8-bit (TM5) 2 ch 2 ch 2 ch 2 ch 8-bit (TMH) 2 ch 2 ch 2 ch 2 ch Interval timer 1 ch 1 ch 1 ch 1 ch Watch 1 ch 1 ch 1 ch 1 ch WDT1 1 ch 1 ch 1 ch 1 ch CSI 4 - 6 - 1 ch - 1 ch 1 ch 1 ch 1 ch 1 ch 6 bits x 1 ch 6 bits x 1 ch 6 bits x 2 ch 2 ch - 2 ch 2 ch 2 ch 3 ch 1 ch 2 ch 2 ch 2 ch - UART supporting LIN-bus 2 ch - 1 ch 3 ch - - 1 ch 1 ch 2 ch Address space - 128 KB 3 MB 15 MB Address bus - 16 bits 22 bits 24 bits Mode - Multiplex only Multiplex/separate - - DMA controller 10-bit A/D converter 8 ch 8 8 Internal 25/26Note 2 25/26Note 2 Key return input 8 ch 8 ch Reset Provided None LVI None Clock monitor None WDT1 Provided WDT2 ROM correction - 8 ch - External POC - 8 ch - 8-bit D/A converter RESET pin 1 ch 6 bits x 1 ch Automatic transmit/receive 3-wire CSI I2CNote 2 16 - 8 UART Interrupt - 256 8 WDT2 External bus - 144 pins - CMOS input RTO Serial interface 64/ 128 96 12 Internal oscillation Port V850ES/KJ1 28/29Note 2 16 ch 2 ch 2 ch 8 8 30/31Note 2 8 ch 33/34Note 2 38/40Note 2 41/43Note 2 8 ch Provided 4 Regulator None Standby function HALT/IDLE/STOP/sub-IDLE mode Provided Operating ambient temperature TA = -40 to +85C Notes 1. Figures in parentheses indicate the number of pins for which the N-ch open-drain output can be selected by software. 2. Only in products with an I2C bus (Y products) 20 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION 1.1.2 78K0/Kx1+, 78K0/Kx1 products lineup 30-pin SSOP (7.62 mm 0.65 mm pitch) 78K0/KB1 PD78F0103 Two-power flash: 24 KB, RAM: 768 B PD780102 Mask ROM: 16 KB, RAM: 768 B PD78F0102H Single-power flash: 16 KB, RAM: 768 B PD780101 44-pin LQFP (10 x 10 mm 0.8 mm pitch) 78K0/KC1 Two-power flash: 32 KB, RAM: 1 KB PD78F0103H Single-power flash: 24 KB, RAM: 768 B Mask ROM: 8 KB, RAM: 512 B PD78F0114 78K0/KB1+ PD780103 Mask ROM: 24 KB, RAM: 768 B PD780114 Mask ROM: 32 KB, RAM: 1 KB PD780113 Mask ROM: 24 KB, RAM: 1 KB PD780112 Mask ROM: 16 KB, RAM: 512 B PD78F0101H Single-power flash: 8 KB, RAM: 512 B 78K0/KC1+ PD78F0114H/HDNote Single-power flash: 32 KB, RAM: 1 KB PD78F0113H Single-power flash: 24 KB, RAM: 1 KB PD78F0112H Single-power flash: 16 KB, RAM: 512 B PD780111 Mask ROM: 8 KB, RAM: 512 B 52-pin LQFP (10 x 10 mm 0.65 mm pitch) 78K0/KD1 PD78F0124 Two-power flash: 32 KB, RAM: 1 KB PD780124 Mask ROM: 32 KB, RAM: 1 KB PD780123 78K0/KD1+ PD78F0124H/HDNote Single-power flash: 32 KB, RAM: 1 KB PD78F0123H Mask ROM: 24 KB, RAM: 1 KB Single-power flash: 24 KB, RAM: 1 KB PD780122 Mask ROM: 16 KB, RAM: 512 B PD78F0122H Single-power flash: 16 KB, RAM: 512 B PD780121 Mask ROM: 8 KB, RAM: 512 B 64-pin LQFP, TQFP (10 x 10 mm 0.5 mm pitch, 12 x 12 mm 0.65 mm pitch, 14 x 14 mm 0.8 mm pitch) 78K0/KE1 78K0/KE1+ PD78F0138 Flash memory: 60 KB, RAM: 2 KB PD78F0134 Flash memory: 32 KB, RAM: 1 KB PD780138 Mask ROM: 60 KB, RAM: 2 KB PD78F0138H/HDNote Single-power flash: 60 KB, RAM: 2 KB PD780136 Mask ROM: 48 KB, RAM: 2 KB PD78F0136H Single-power flash: 48 KB, RAM: 2 KB PD780134 PD78F0134H Mask ROM: 32 KB, RAM: 1 KB Single-power flash: 32 KB, RAM: 1 KB PD780133 Mask ROM: 24 KB, RAM: 1 KB PD78F0133H Single-power flash: 24 KB, RAM: 1 KB PD780132 Mask ROM: 16 KB, RAM: 512 B PD78F0132H Single-power flash: 16 KB, RAM: 512 B PD780131 Mask ROM: 8 KB, RAM: 512 B 80-pin TQFP, QFP (12 x 12 mm 0.5 mm pitch, 14 x 14 mm 0.65 mm pitch) 78K0/KF1 78K0/KF1+ PD78F0148 Flash memory: 60 KB, RAM: 2 KB PD780148 Mask ROM: 60 KB, RAM: 2 KB PD78F0148H/HDNote Single-power flash: 60 KB, RAM: 2 KB PD780146 Mask ROM: 48 KB, RAM: 2 KB PD780144 Mask ROM: 32 KB, RAM: 1 KB PD780143 Mask ROM: 24 KB, RAM: 1 KB Note Products with an on-chip function User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 21 CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION The list of functions in the 78K0/Kx1 is shown below. Part Number 78K0/KB1 78K0/KC1 78K0/KD1 78K0/KE1 78K0/KF1 Item Number of pins Internal memory (KB) 30 pins Mask ROM 8 - Flash memory RAM 16/ 24 44 pins - 8/ 16 - 24 0.5 0.75 52 pins - 24/ 32 8/ 16 - 32 0.5 1 Minimum instruction execution time Clock 1 0.166 s (when 12 MHz, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V) 0.2 s (when 10 MHz, VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V) 0.238 s (when 8.38 MHz, VDD = 3.0 to 5.5 V) 0.4 s (when 5 MHz, VDD = 2.5 to 5.5 V) X1 input 32 - 1 - 24/ 32 - 48/ 60 - 60 2 60 1 2 Notes 1, 2 32.768 kHz 240 kHz (TYP.) CMOS I/O 17 CMOS input 4 19 26 38 54 8 1 - N-ch open-drain I/O 4 16 bits (TM0) 1 ch 8 bits (TM5) 1 ch 2 ch 1 ch 2 ch 1 ch 2 ch 2 ch 8 bits (TMH) 2 ch - For watch 1 ch WDT 1 ch Note 3 3-wire CSI Serial interface Automatic transmit/ receive 3-wire CSI Note 3 UART 1 ch - 1 ch UART supporting LIN-bus 1 ch 4 ch External Internal Key return input 8 ch 6 11 7 12 8 - Standby function Operating ambient temperature 17 20 Provided 2.85 V 0.15 V/3.5 V 0.20 V (selectable by mask option) 2.85 V/3.1 V/3.3 V 0.15 V/3.5 V/3.7 V/3.9 V/4.1 V/4.3 V 0.2 V (selectable by software) Provided WDT ROM correction 9 19 8 ch Clock monitor Multiplier/divider 16 4 ch POC Clock output/buzzer output 9 15 RESET pin LVI 2 ch 1 ch - 10-bit A/D converter Reset 48/ 60 2 to 12 MHz - CMOS output Interrupt - 80 pins - <Connect REGC pin to VDD> 0.166 s (when 12 MHz, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V) 0.2 s (when 10 MHz, VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V) 0.238 s (when 8.38 MHz, VDD = 3.0 to 5.5 V) 0.4 s (when 5 MHz, VDD = 2.5 to 5.5 V) Internal oscillation Timer 24/ 32 0.5 VDD = 2.5 to 5.5 V Subclock Port 8/ 16 32 0.5 Power supply voltage 64 pins - 24/ 32 Provided - Provided Clock output only 16 bits x 16 bits, 32 bits / 16 bits - - Provided - HALT/STOP mode Standard and special (A) grade products: -40 to +85C Special (A1) grade products: -40 to +110C (mask ROM version), -40 to +105C (flash memory version) Special (A2) grade products: -40 to +125C (mask ROM version) Notes 1. If the POC circuit detection voltage (VPOC) is used with 2.85 V 0.15 V, then use the products in the voltage range of 3.0 to 5.5 V. 2. If the POC circuit detection voltage (VPOC) is used with 3.5 V 0.2 V, then use the products in the voltage range of 3.7 to 5.5 V. 3. Select either of the functions of these alternate-function pins. 22 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION The list of functions in the 78K0/Kx1+ is shown below. Part Number 78K0/KB1+ 78K0/KC1+ 78K0/KD1+ 78K0/KE1+ 78K0/KF1+ 64 pins 80 pins Item Number of pins Internal memory (KB) 30 pins Flash memory RAM 52 pins 16/24 16 24/32 16 24/32 16 24/32 48/60 60 0.5 0.75 0.5 1 0.5 1 0.5 1 2 2 Power supply voltage VDD = 2.5 to 5.5 V (with internal oscillation clock or subclock: VDD = 2.0 to 5.5 V Crystal/ceramic - 3 to 4 MHz - Subclock 32.768 kHz Internal oscillation 240 kHz (TYP.) CMOS I/O 17 CMOS input 4 19 26 54 1 - N-ch open-drain I/O 4 16 bits (TM0) 1 ch 8 bits (TM5) 2 ch 1 ch 2 ch 8 bits (TMH) 2 ch - For watch 1 ch WDT 1 ch Note 2 Serial 3-wire CSI interface Automatic transmit/ receive 3-wire CSI Note 2 UART 1 ch 2 ch - 1 ch - 1 ch UART supporting LIN-bus 1 ch 10-bit A/D converter 4 ch Interrupts External 6 Internal Key return input Reset 38 8 CMOS output Timer 11 8 ch 7 12 8 16 Provided 2.1 V 0.1 V (detection voltage is fixed) 2.35 V/2.6 V/2.85 V/3.1 V/3.3 V 0.15 V/3.5 V/3.7 V/3.9 V/4.1 V/4.3 V 0.2 V (selectable by software) Provided WDT Provided - Clock output only ROM correction Provided - External bus interface Multiplier/divider 20 8 ch Clock monitor Clock output/buzzer output 9 19 4 ch POC LVI 9 15 - RESET pin Provided 16 bits x 16 bits, 32 bits / 16 bits - - Provided Self-programming function Provided Product with on-chip debug function PD78F0114HD, 78F0124HD, 78F0138HD, 78F0148HD Standby function HALT/STOP mode Operating ambient temperature TA = -40 to +85C Notes 1. ) 2 to 16 MHz RC Ports Note 1 0.125 s (when 16 MHz, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V), 0.2 s (when 10 MHz, VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V), 0.238 s (when 8.38 MHz, VDD = 3.0 to 5.5 V), 0.4 s (when 5 MHz, VDD = 2.5 to 5.5 V) Minimum instruction execution time Clock 44 pins 8 - Because the POC circuit detection voltage (VPOC) is 2.1 V 0.1 V, use the products in the voltage range of 2.2 to 5.5 V. 2. Select either of the functions of these alternate-function pins. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 23 CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION 1.2 Features { Minimum instruction execution time: 50 ns (operation at main clock (fXX) = 20 MHz) { General-purpose registers: 32 bits x 32 registers { CPU features: Signed multiplication (16 x 16 32): 1 to 2 clocks (Instructions without creating register hazards can be continuously executed in parallel) Saturated operations (overflow and underflow detection functions are included) 32-bit shift instruction: 1 clock Bit manipulation instructions Load/store instructions with long/short format { Memory space: 64 MB of linear address space Memory block division function: 64 KB, 64 KB (Total of 2 blocks) * Internal memory PD703208, 703208Y (Mask ROM: 64 KB/RAM: 4 KB) PD703209, 703209Y (Mask ROM: 96 KB/RAM: 4 KB) PD703210, 703210Y (Mask ROM: 128 KB/RAM: 6 KB) PD703211, 703211Y (Mask ROM: 256 KB/RAM: 12 KB) PD70F3210, 70F3210Y, 70F3210H, 70F3210HY (Flash memory: 128 KB/RAM: 6 KB) PD70F3211H, 70F3211HY (Flash memory: 256 KB/RAM: 12 KB) * External bus interface Multiplex bus output 8-/16-bit data bus sizing function Wait function * Programmable wait function * External wait function Idle state function Bus hold function { Interrupts and exceptions Non-maskable interrupts: 3 sources 30 sources (PD703208, 703209, 703210, 70F3210, 70F3210H) Maskable interrupts: 31 sources (PD703208Y, 703209Y, 703210Y, 70F3210Y, 70F3210HY) 33 sources (PD703211, 70F3211H) 34 sources (PD703211Y, 70F3211HY) { I/O lines: Software exceptions: 32 sources Exception trap: 1 source Total: 67 { Key interrupt function { Timer function 16-bit timer/event counter P: 1 channel (PD703211, 703211Y, 70F3211H, 70F3211HY only) 16-bit timer/event counter 0: 2 channels 8-bit timer/event counter 5: 2 channels 8-bit timer H: 2 channels 8-bit interval timer BRG: 1 channel Watch timer/interval timer: 1 channel Watchdog timers Watchdog timer 1 (also usable as oscillation stabilization timer): 1 channel Watchdog timer 2: 24 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 1 channel CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION { Serial interface Asynchronous serial interface (UART): 2 channels 3-wire serial I/O (CSI0): 2 channels 3-wire serial I/O (with automatic transmit/receive function) (CSIA): 1 channel I2C bus interface (I2C): 1 channel (PD703208Y, 703209Y, 703210Y, 703211Y, 70F3210Y, 70F3210HY, 70F3211HY) { A/D converter: 10-bit resolution x 8 channels { Real-time output port: 6 bits x 1 channel { Standby functions: HALT/IDLE/STOP modes, subclock/sub-IDLE modes { ROM correction: 4 correction addresses specifiable { Clock generator Main clock oscillation (fX)/subclock oscillation (fXT) CPU clock (fCPU) 7 steps (fXX, fXX/2, fXX/4, fXX/8, fXX/16, fXX/32, fXT) Clock-through mode/PLL mode selectable { Reset * Reset by RESET pin * Reset by overflow of watchdog timer 1 (WDTRES1) * Reset by overflow of watchdog timer 2 (WDTRES2) { Package: 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) 1.3 Applications { Automotive * System control of body electrical system (power windows, keyless entry reception, etc.) * Submicrocontroller of control system { Home audio, car audio { AV equipment { PC peripheral devices (keyboards, etc.) { Household appliances * Outdoor units of air conditioners * Microwave ovens, rice cookers { Industrial devices * Pumps * Vending machines * FA User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 25 CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION <R> 1.4 Ordering Information (1) Standard products (1/2) Part Number PD703208GC-xxx-8BT PD703208GC-xxx-8BT-A PD703208YGC-xxx-8BT PD703208YGC-xxx-8BT-A PD703208GK-xxx-9EU PD703208GK-xxx-9EU-A PD703208YGK-xxx-9EU PD703208YGK-xxx-9EU-A PD703209GC-xxx-8BT PD703209GC-xxx-8BT-A PD703209YGC-xxx-8BT PD703209YGC-xxx-8BT-A PD703209GK-xxx-9EU PD703209GK-xxx-9EU-A PD703209YGK-xxx-9EU PD703209YGK-xxx-9EU-A PD703210GC-xxx-8BT PD703210GC-xxx-8BT-A PD703210YGC-xxx-8BT PD703210YGC-xxx-8BT-A PD703210GK-xxx-9EU PD703210GK-xxx-9EU-A PD703210YGK-xxx-9EU PD703210YGK-xxx-9EU-A PD703211GC-xxx-8BT-ANote PD703211YGC-xxx-8BT-ANote PD703211GK-xxx-9EU-ANote PD703211YGK-xxx-9EU-ANote Package Quality Grade 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) Standard 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) Standard 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) Standard 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) Standard 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) Standard 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) Standard 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) Standard 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) Standard 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) Standard 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) Standard 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) Standard 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) Standard 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) Standard 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) Standard 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) Standard 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) Standard 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) Standard 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) Standard 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) Standard 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) Standard 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) Standard 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) Standard 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) Standard 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) Standard 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) Standard 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) Standard 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) Standard 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) Standard Note Under development Remarks 1. xxx indicates ROM code suffix. 2. Products with -A at the end of the part number are lead-free products. Please refer to "Quality Grades on NEC Semiconductor Devices" (Document No. C11531E) published by NEC Electronics Corporation to know the specification of the quality grade on the device and its recommended applications. 26 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION (1) Standard products (2/2) Part Number PD70F3210GC-8BT PD70F3210GC-8BT-A PD70F3210YGC-8BT PD70F3210YGC-8BT-A PD70F3210GK-9EU PD70F3210GK-9EU-A PD70F3210YGK-9EU PD70F3210YGK-9EU-A PD70F3210HGC-8BT-A PD70F3210HYGC-8BT-A PD70F3210HGK-9EU-A PD70F3210HYGK-9EU-A PD70F3211HGC-8BT-A PD70F3211HYGC-8BT-A PD70F3211HGK-9EU-A PD70F3211HYGK-9EU-A Remark Package Quality Grade 80-pin plasticQFP (14 x 14) Standard 80-pin plasticQFP (14 x 14) Standard 80-pin plasticQFP (14 x 14) Standard 80-pin plasticQFP (14 x 14) Standard 80-pin plasticTQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) Standard 80-pin plasticTQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) Standard 80-pin plasticTQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) Standard 80-pin plasticTQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) Standard 80-pin plasticQFP (14 x 14) Standard 80-pin plasticQFP (14 x 14) Standard 80-pin plasticTQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) Standard 80-pin plasticTQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) Standard 80-pin plasticQFP (14 x 14) Standard 80-pin plasticQFP (14 x 14) Standard 80-pin plasticTQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) Standard 80-pin plasticTQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) Standard Products with -A at the end of the part number are lead-free products. Please refer to "Quality Grades on NEC Semiconductor Devices" (Document No. C11531E) published by NEC Electronics Corporation to know the specification of the quality grade on the device and its recommended applications. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 27 CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION (2) (A) grade products Part Number PD703208GC(A)-xxx-8BT PD703208GC(A)-xxx-8BT-A PD703208YGC(A)-xxx-8BT PD703208YGC(A)-xxx-8BT-A PD703208GK(A)-xxx-9EU PD703208GK(A)-xxx-9EU-A PD703208YGK(A)-xxx-9EU PD703208YGK(A)-xxx-9EU-A PD703209GC(A)-xxx-8BT PD703209GC(A)-xxx-8BT-A PD703209YGC(A)-xxx-8BT PD703209YGC(A)-xxx-8BT-A PD703209GK(A)-xxx-9EU PD703209GK(A)-xxx-9EU-A PD703209YGK(A)-xxx-9EU PD703209YGK(A)-xxx-9EU-A PD703210GC(A)-xxx-8BT PD703210GC(A)-xxx-8BT-A PD703210YGC(A)-xxx-8BT PD703210YGC(A)-xxx-8BT-A PD703210GK(A)-xxx-9EU PD703210GK(A)-xxx-9EU-A PD703210YGK(A)-xxx-9EU PD703210YGK(A)-xxx-9EU-A PD70F3210GC(A)-8BT PD70F3210GC(A)-8BT-A PD70F3210YGC(A)-8BT PD70F3210YGC(A)-8BT-A PD70F3210GK(A)-9EU PD70F3210GK(A)-9EU-A PD70F3210YGK(A)-9EU* PD70F3210YGK(A)-9EU-A Package Quality Grade 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) Special 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) Special 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) Special 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) Special 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) Special 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) Special 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) Special 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) Special 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) Special 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) Special 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) Special 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) Special 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) Special 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) Special 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) Special 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) Special 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) Special 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) Special 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) Special 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) Special 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) Special 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) Special 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) Special 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) Special 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) Special 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) Special 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) Special 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) Special 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) Special 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) Special 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) Special 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) Special Remarks 1. xxx indicates ROM code suffix. 2. Products with -A at the end of the part number are lead-free products. Please refer to "Quality Grades on NEC Semiconductor Devices" (Document No. C11531E) published by NEC Electronics Corporation to know the specification of the quality grade on the device and its recommended applications. 28 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION (3) (A1) grade products, (A2) grade products Part Number PD703208GC(A1)-xxx-8BT PD703208YGC(A1)-xxx-8BT PD703208GK(A1)-xxx-9EU PD703208YGK(A1)-xxx-9EU PD703209GC(A1)-xxx-8BT PD703209YGC(A1)-xxx-8BT PD703209GK(A1)-xxx-9EU PD703209YGK(A1)-xxx-9EU PD703210GC(A1)-xxx-8BT PD703210YGC(A1)-xxx-8BT PD703210GK(A1)-xxx-9EU PD703210YGK(A1)-xxx-9EU PD703208GC(A2)-xxx-8BT PD703208YGC(A2)-xxx-8BT PD703208GK(A2)-xxx-9EU PD703208YGK(A2)-xxx-9EU PD703209GC(A2)-xxx-8BT PD703209YGC(A2)-xxx-8BT PD703209GK(A2)-xxx-9EU PD703209YGK(A2)-xxx-9EU PD703210GC(A2)-xxx-8BT PD703210YGC(A2)-xxx-8BT PD703210GK(A2)-xxx-9EU PD703210YGK(A2)-xxx-9EU Remark Package Quality Grade 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) Special 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) Special 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) Special 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) Special 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) Special 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) Special 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) Special 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) Special 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) Special 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) Special 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) Special 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) Special 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) Special 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) Special 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) Special 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) Special 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) Special 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) Special 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) Special 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) Special 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) Special 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) Special 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) Special 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) Special Products with -A at the end of the part number are lead-free products. Please refer to "Quality Grades on NEC Semiconductor Devices" (Document No. C11531E) published by NEC Electronics Corporation to know the specification of the quality grade on the device and its recommended applications. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 29 CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION 1.5 Pin Configuration (Top View) 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) PD703208GC-xxx-8BT PD703208GC-xxx-8BT-A PD703208YGC-xxx-8BT PD703208YGC-xxx-8BT-A PD703208GK-xxx-9EU PD703208GK-xxx-9EU-A PD703208YGK-xxx-9EU PD703208YGK-xxx-9EU-A PD703209GC-xxx-8BT PD703209GC-xxx-8BT-A PD703209YGC-xxx-8BT PD703209YGC-xxx-8BT-A PD703209GK-xxx-9EU PD703209GK-xxx-9EU-A PD703209YGK-xxx-9EU PD703209YGK-xxx-9EU-A PD703210GC-xxx-8BT PD703210GC-xxx-8BT-A PD703210YGC-xxx-8BT PD703210YGC-xxx-8BT-A PD703210GK-xxx-9EU PD703210GK-xxx-9EU-A PD703210YGK-xxx-9EU PD703210YGK-xxx-9EU-A PD703211GC-xxx-8BT-A PD703211YGC-xxx-8BT-A PD703211GK-xxx-9EU-A PD703211YGK-xxx-9EU-A PD70F3210GC-8BT PD70F3210GC-8BT-A PD70F3210YGC-8BT PD70F3210YGC-8BT-A PD70F3210GK-9EU PD70F3210GK-9EU-A 30 PD70F3210YGK-9EU PD70F3210YGK-9EU-A PD70F3210HGC-8BT-A PD70F3210HYGC-8BT-A PD70F3210HGK-9EU-A PD70F3210HYGK-9EU-A PD70F3211HGC-8BT-A PD70F3211HYGC-8BT-A PD70F3211HGK-9EU-A PD70F3211HYGK-9EU-A PD703208GC(A)-xxx-8BT PD703208GC(A)-xxx-8BT-A PD703208YGC(A)-xxx-8BT PD703208YGC(A)-xxx-8BT-A PD703208GK(A)-xxx-9EU PD703208GK(A)-xxx-9EU-A PD703208YGK(A)-xxx-9EU PD703208YGK(A)-xxx-9EU-A PD703209GC(A)-xxx-8BT PD703209GC(A)-xxx-8BT-A PD703209YGC(A)-xxx-8BT PD703209YGC(A)-xxx-8BT-A PD703209GK(A)-xxx-9EU PD703209GK(A)-xxx-9EU-A PD703209YGK(A)-xxx-9EU PD703209YGK(A)-xxx-9EU-A PD703210GC(A)-xxx-8BT PD703210GC(A)-xxx-8BT-A PD703210YGC(A)-xxx-8BT PD703210YGC(A)-xxx-8BT-A PD703210GK(A)-xxx-9EU PD703210GK(A)-xxx-9EU-A PD703210YGK(A)-xxx-9EU User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD PD703210YGK(A)-xxx-9EU-A PD70F3210GC(A)-8BT PD70F3210GC(A)-8BT-A PD70F3210YGC(A)-8BT PD70F3210YGC(A)-8BT-A PD70F3210GK(A)-9EU PD70F3210GK(A)-9EU-A PD70F3210YGK(A)-9EU PD70F3210YGK(A)-9EU-A PD703208GC(A1)-xxx-8BT PD703208YGC(A1)-xxx-8BT PD703208GK(A1)-xxx-9EU PD703208YGK(A1)-xxx-9EU PD703209GC(A1)-xxx-8BT PD703209YGC(A1)-xxx-8BT PD703209GK(A1)-xxx-9EU PD703209YGK(A1)-xxx-9EU PD703210GC(A1)-xxx-8BT PD703210YGC(A1)-xxx-8BT PD703210GK(A1)-xxx-9EU PD703210YGK(A1)-xxx-9EU PD703208GC(A2)-xxx-8BT PD703208YGC(A2)-xxx-8BT PD703208GK(A2)-xxx-9EU PD703208YGK(A2)-xxx-9EU PD703209GC(A2)-xxx-8BT PD703209YGC(A2)-xxx-8BT PD703209GK(A2)-xxx-9EU PD703209YGK(A2)-xxx-9EU PD703210GC(A2)-xxx-8BT PD703210YGC(A2)-xxx-8BT PD703210GK(A2)-xxx-9EU PD703210YGK(A2)-xxx-9EU PDL4/AD4 PDL5/AD5/FLMD1Note 1 PDL6/AD6 PDL7/AD7 PDL8/AD8 PDL9/AD9 PDL10/AD10 PDL11/AD11 PDL12/AD12 PDL13/AD13 PDL14/AD14 PDL15/AD15 P77/ANI7 P76/ANI6 P75/ANI5 P74/ANI4 P73/ANI3 P72/ANI2 P71/ANI1 P70/ANI0 CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 AVREF0 1 60 PDL3/AD3 AVss 2 59 PDL2/AD2 P00/TOH0 3 58 PDL1/AD1 P01/TOH1 4 57 PDL0/AD0 P02/NMI 5 56 PCT6/ASTB P03/INTP0 6 55 PCT4/RD P04/INTP1 7 54 PCT1/WR1 VPPNote 1/ICNote 1/FLMD0Note 1 8 53 PCT0/WR0 VDD 9 52 PCM3/HLDRQ REGCNote 2 10 51 PCM2/HLDAK VSS 11 50 PCM1/CLKOUT X1 12 49 PCM0/WAIT X2 13 48 PCS1/CS1 RESET 14 47 PCS0/CS0 XT1 15 46 P915/INTP6 XT2 16 45 P914/INTP5 P05/INTP2 17 44 P913/INTP4 P06/INTP3 18 43 P99/SCK01 P40/SI00 19 42 P98/SO01 P97/SI01 P96/TI51/TO51 P91/RXD1/KR7 P90/TXD1/KR6 P55/SCKA0/RTP05/KR5 P54/SOA0/RTP04/KR4 P53/SIA0/RTP03/KR3 P52/TO50/RTP02/KR2 P51/TI50/RTP01/KR1 P50/TI011/RTP00/KR0 EVDD EVSS P39/SCL0Note 4 P38/SDA0Note 4 P35/TI010/TO01 P34/TI001/TIP01Note 3/TOP01Note 3 P33/TI000/TO00/TIP00Note 3/TOP00Note 3 P32/ASCK0 P31/RXD0 P30/TXD0 41 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 P42/SCK00 P41/SO00 Connect directly to VSS (PD703208, 703208Y, 703209, 703209Y, 703210, 703210Y, 703211, 703211Y). VPP pin: Connect to VSS in normal operation mode (PD70F3210, 70F3210Y). FLMD0 pin: Connect to VSS in normal operation mode (PD70F3210H, 70F3210HY, 70F3211H, 70F3211HY). FLMD1 pin: Used only in the PD70F3210H, 70F3210HY, 70F3211H, and 70F3211HY. 2. When using a regulator, connect the REGC pin to VSS via a 10 F capacitor. When not using a regulator, connect the REGC pin directly to VDD. 3. The TIP00, TOP00, TIP01, and TOP01 pins can be used only in the PD703211, 703211Y, 70F3211H, and 70F3211HY. 4. The SCL0 and SDA0 pins can be used only in the PD703208Y, 703209Y, 703210Y, 703211Y, 70F3210Y, 70F3210HY, and 70F3211HY. Notes 1. IC pin: Caution Make EVDD the same potential as VDD. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 31 CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION Pin identification AD0 to AD15: Address/data bus REGC: Regulator control ANI0 to ANI7: Analog input RESET: Reset ASCK0: Asynchronous serial clock RTP00 to RTP05: Real-time output port ASTB: Address strobe RXD0, RXD1: Receive data AVREF0: Analog reference voltage SCK00, SCK01, AVSS: Ground for analog SCKA0: Serial clock CLKOUT: Clock output SCL0: Serial clock CS0, CS1: Chip select SDA0: Serial data EVDD: Power supply for port SI00, SI01, EVSS: Ground for port SIA0: FLMD0, FLMD1 Flash programming mode SO00, SO01, HLDAK: Hold acknowledge SOA0: HLDRQ: Hold request TI000, TI001, IC: Internally connected TI010, TI011, INTP0 to INTP6: External interrupt input TI50, TI51, KR0 to KR7: Key return TIP00, TIP01: NMI: Non-maskable interrupt request TO00 to TO01, P00 to P06: Port 0 TO50, TO51, P30 to P35, P38, P39: Port 3 TOH0, TOH1, P40 to P42: Port 4 TOP00, TOP01: Timer output P50 to P55: Port 5 TXD0, TXD1: Transmit data P70 to P77: Port 7 VDD: Power supply Serial input Serial output Timer input VPP: Programming power supply P913 to P915: Port 9 VSS: Ground PCM0 to PCM3: Port CM WAIT: Wait PCS0, PCS1: Port CS WR0: Lower byte write strobe P90, P91, P96 to P99, WR1: Upper byte write strobe PCT4, PCT6: Port CT X1, X2: Crystal for main clock PDL0 to PDL15: Port DL XT1, XT2: Crystal for subclock RD: Read strobe PCT0, PCT1, 32 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION 1.6 Function Block Configuration (1) Internal block diagram RD WAIT General-purpose registers 32 bits x 32 ROM correction WR0, WR1 CS0, CS1 AD0 to AD15 8-bit timer H: 2 ch CSIA: 1 ch I2CNote 4: 1 ch SCL0 UART: 2 ch Watchdog timer: 2 ch Port Key interrupt function A/D converter CLKOUT PLL CG Regulator KR0 to KR7 X1 X2 XT1 XT2 AVREF0 AVSS ANI0 to ANI7 CSI0: 2 ch Note 4 TXD0, TXD1 RXD0, RXD1 ASCK0 ASTB ALU P00 to P06 SDA0Note 4 HLDAK BCU REGC SOA0 SIA0 SCKA0 System registers P40 to P42 SO00, SO01 SI00, SI01 SCK00, SCK01 Note 2 HLDRQ Multiplier 16 x 16 32 P30 to P35, P38, P39 TOH0, TOH1 32-bit barrel shifter P50 to P55 TO50, TO51 8-bit timer/event counter 5: 2 ch RAM P70 to P77 TI50, TI51 PC P90, P91, P96 to P99, P913 to P915 TOP00, TOP01Note 3 16-bit timer/ event counter PNote 3: 1 ch Instruction queue Note 1 PCS0, PCS1 TIP00, TIP01Note 3 16-bit timer/event counter 0: 2 ch CPU PCM0 to PCM3 TO00, TO01 ROM PDL0 to PDL15 TI000, TI001, TI010, TI011 INTC PCT0, PCT1, PCT4, PCT6 NMI INTP0 to INTP6 VDD VPPNote 5/ICNote 5/FLMD0Note 5 FLMD1Note 5 EVDD RTP00 to RTP05 RTO: 1 ch Notes 1. PD703208, 703208Y: 2. 3. 4. 5. EVSS Watch timer VSS 64 KB (mask ROM) PD703209, 703209Y: 96 KB (mask ROM) PD703210, 703210Y: 128 KB (mask ROM) PD703211, 703211Y: 256 KB (mask ROM) PD70F3210, 70F3210Y, 70F3210H, 70F3210HY: 128 KB (flash memory) PD70F3211H, 70F3211HY: 256 KB (flash memory) PD703208, 703208Y, 703209, 703209Y: 4 KB PD703210, 703210Y, 70F3210, 70F3210Y, 70F3210H, 70F3210HY: 6 KB PD703211, 703211Y, 70F3211H, 70F3211HY: 12 KB Only in the PD703211, 703211Y, 70F3211H, 70F3211HY Only in the PD703208Y, 703209Y, 703210Y, 703211Y, 70F3210Y, 70F3210HY, 70F3211HY PD703208, 703208Y, 703209, 703209Y, 703210, 703210Y, 703211, 703211Y IC: VPP: PD70F3210, 70F3210Y FLMD0, FLMD1: PD70F3210H, 70F3210HY, 70F3211H, 70F3211HY User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 33 CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION (2) Internal units (a) CPU The CPU uses five-stage pipeline control to enable single-clock execution of address calculations, arithmetic logic operations, data transfers, and almost all other types of instruction processing. Other dedicated on-chip hardware, such as a multiplier (16 bits x 16 bits 32 bits) and a barrel shifter (32 bits) help accelerate complex processing. (b) Bus control unit (BCU) The BCU starts a required external bus cycle based on the physical address obtained by the CPU. When an instruction is fetched from external memory space and the CPU does not send a bus cycle start request, the BCU generates a prefetch address and prefetches the instruction code. The prefetched instruction code is stored in an internal instruction queue. (c) ROM This consists of a 256 KB, 128 KB, 96 KB, or 64 KB mask ROM or flash memory mapped to the address spaces from 0000000H to 003FFFFH, 0000000H to 001FFFFH, 0000000H to 0017FFFH, or 0000000H to 000FFFFH, respectively. ROM can be accessed by the CPU in one clock cycle during instruction fetch. (d) RAM This consists of a 12 KB, 6 KB, or 4 KB RAM mapped to the address spaces from 3FFC000H to 3FFEFFFH, 3FFD800H to 3FFEFFFH, or 3FFE000H to 3FFEFFFH, respectively. RAM can be accessed by the CPU in one clock cycle during data access. (e) Interrupt controller (INTC) This controller handles hardware interrupt requests (NMI, INTP0 to INTP6) from on-chip peripheral hardware and external hardware. Eight levels of interrupt priorities can be specified for these interrupt requests, and multiplexed servicing control can be performed. (f) Clock generator (CG) A main clock oscillator and subclock oscillator are provided and generate the main clock oscillation frequency (fX) and subclock frequency (fXT), respectively. There are two modes: In the clock-through mode, fX is used as the main clock frequency (fXX) as is. In the PLL mode, fX is used multiplied by 4. The CPU clock frequency (fCPU) can be selected from among fXX, fXX/2, fXX/4, fXX/8, fXX/16, fXX/32, and fXT. (g) Timer/counter Two 16-bit timer/event counter 0 channels, one 16-bit timer/event counter P channelNote, and two 8-bit timer/event counter 5 channels are incorporated, enabling measurement of pulse intervals and frequency as well as programmable pulse output. Two 8-bit timer/event counter 5 channels can be connected in cascade to configure a 16-bit timer. Two 8-bit timer H channels enabling programmable pulse output are provided on chip. Note PD703211, 703211Y, 70F3211H, 70F3211HY only 34 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION (h) Watch timer This timer counts the reference time (0.5 seconds) for counting the clock from the subclock (32.768 kHz) or fBRG (32.768 kHz) from the clock generator. At the same time, the watch timer can be used as an interval timer. (i) Watchdog timer Two watchdog timer channels are provided on chip to detect program loops and system abnormalities. Watchdog timer 1 can be used as an interval timer. When used as a watchdog timer, it generates a nonmaskable interrupt request signal (INTWDT1) or system reset signal (WDTRES1) after an overflow occurs. When used as an interval timer, it generates a maskable interrupt request signal (INTWDTM1) after an overflow occurs. Watchdog timer 2 operates by default following reset release. It generates a non-maskable interrupt request signal (INTWDT2) or system reset signal (WDTRES2) after an overflow occurs. (j) Serial interface (SIO) The V850ES/KF1 includes four kinds of serial interfaces: an asynchronous serial interface (UARTn), a clocked serial interface (CSI0n), a clocked serial interface with an automatic transmit/receive function (CSIA0), and an I2C bus interface (I2C0). The PD703208, 703209, 703210, 703211, 70F3210, 70F3210H, and 70F3211H can simultaneously use up to five channels, and the PD703208Y, 703209Y, 703210Y, 703211Y, 70F3210Y, 70F3210HY, and 70F3211HY up to six channels. For UARTn, data is transferred via the TXDn and RXDn pins. For CSI0n, data is transferred via the SO0n, SI0n, and SCK0n pins. For CSIA0, data is transferred via the SOA0, SIA0, and SCKA0 pins. For I2C0, data is transferred via the SDA0 and SCL0 pins. I2C0 is provided only in the PD703208Y, 703209Y, 703210Y, 703211Y, 70F3210Y, 70F3210HY, and 70F3211HY. Remark n = 0, 1 (k) A/D converter This high-speed, high-resolution 10-bit A/D converter includes 8 analog input pins. Conversion is performed using the successive approximation method. (l) ROM correction This function is used to replace part of a program in the mask ROM with that contained in the internal RAM. Up to four correction addresses can be specified. (m) Key interrupt function A key interrupt request signal (INTKR) can be generated by inputting a falling edge to the eight key input pins. (n) Real-time output function This function transfers 6-bit data set beforehand to output latches upon occurrence of a timer compare register match signal. A 1-channel 6-bit data real-time output function is provided on chip. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 35 CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION (o) Ports As shown below, the following ports have general-purpose port functions and control pin functions. Port 36 I/O Alternate Function P0 7-bit I/O NMI, external interrupt, timer output P3 8-bit I/O Serial interface, timer I/O P4 3-bit I/O Serial interface P5 6-bit I/O Serial interface, timer I/O, key interrupt function, real-time output function P7 8-bit input A/D converter analog input P9 9-bit I/O Serial interface, timer I/O, external interrupt, key interrupt function PCM 4-bit I/O External bus control signal PCS 2-bit I/O Chip select output PCT 4-bit I/O External bus control signal PDL 16-bit I/O External address/data bus User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION 1.7 Overview of Functions Part Number PD703208/ PD703208Y PD703209/ PD703209Y PD703210/ PD703210Y ROM 64 KB 96 KB 128 KB Internal memory High-speed RAM 128 KB (two-power flash memory) 4 KB 128 KB (single-power flash memory) PD703211/ PD703211Y PD70F3211H/ PD70F3211HY 256 KB 256 KB (single-power flash memory) 6 KB Buffer RAM Memory space PD70F3210/ PD70F3210H/ PD70F3210Y PD70F3210HY 12 KB 32 bytes Logical space 64 MB External memory area 128 KB External bus interface Address bus: 16 bits Data bus: 8/16 bits Multiplex bus mode 32 bits x 32 registers General-purpose registers Main clock (oscillation frequency) Ceramic/crystal/external clock When PLL not used When PLL used 2 to 10 MHz: 2.7 to 5.5 V REGC pin connected directly to VDD Standard products, (A) grade products: 2 to 5 MHz: 4.5 to 5.5 V, 2 to 4 MHz: 4.0 to 5.5 V, 2 to 2.5 MHz: 2.7 to 5.5 V (A1) grade products: 2 to 5 MHz: 4.5 to 5.5 V, 2 to 4 MHz: 4.0 to 5.5 V, 2 to 3 MHz: 3.5 to 5.5 V (A2) grade products: 2 to 4 MHz: 4.0 to 5.5 V, 2 to 3 MHz: 3.5 to 5.5 V 10 F capacitor connected to REGC pin Standard products, (A) grade products, (A1) grade products, (A2) grade products: 2 to 4 MHz: 4.0 to 5.5 V Subclock (oscillation frequency) Minimum instruction execution time Crystal/external clock (32.768 kHz) 50 ns (When main clock operated at (fXX) = 20 MHz) 32 x 32 = 64: 200 to 250 ns (at 20 MHz) 32 x 32 + 32 = 32: 300 ns (at 20 MHz) 16 x 16 = 32: 50 to 100 ns (at 20 MHz) 16 x 16 + 32 = 32: 150 ns (at 20 MHz) DSP function I/O ports 67 * Input: 8 * I/O: 59 (among these, N-ch open-drain output selectable: 6, fixed to N-ch open-drain output: 2) Timer 16-bit timer/event counter 0: 2 channels 8-bit timer/event counter 5: 2 channels (16-bit timer/event counter: usable as 1 channel) 8-bit timer H: 2 channels Watch timer: 1 channel 8-bit interval timer: 1 channel Watchdog timer: 2 channels 16-bit timer/event counter P: 1 channel 4 bits x 1, 2 bits x 1, or 6 bits x 1 Real-time output port 10-bit resolution x 8 channels A/D converter Serial interface CSI: 2 channels CSIA (with automatic transmit/receive function): 1 channel UART: 2 channels I2C bus: 1 channelNote 2 Dedicated baud rate generator: 2 channels Interrupt sources External: 9 (9)Note 3, internal: 25/26Note 2 Power save function Operating supply voltage External: 9 (9)Note 3, internal: 28/29Note 2 STOP/IDLE/HALT Standard products, (A) grade products: 4.5 to 5.5 V (at 20 MHz)/4.0 to 5.5 V (at 16 MHz)/2.7 to 5.5 V (at 10 MHz) (A1) grade products (mask version only): 4.5 to 5.5 V (at 20 MHz)/4.0 to 5.5 V (at 16 MHz)/3.5 to 5.5 V (at 12 MHz) (A2) grade products (mask version only): 4.0 to 5.5 V (at 16 MHz)/3.5 to 5.5 V (at 12 MHz) 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14 mm) 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12 mm) Package Notes 1. Only in products with an I2C bus (Y products). 2. The figure in parentheses indicates the number of external interrupts for which STOP mode can be released. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 37 CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS The names and functions of the pins of the V850ES/KF1 are described below, divided into port pins and non-port pins. The pin I/O buffer power supplies are divided into two systems; AVREF0 and EVDD. The relationship between these power supplies and the pins is shown below. Table 2-1. Pin I/O Buffer Power Supplies Power Supply 38 Corresponding Pins AVREF0 Port 7 EVDD RESET, ports 0, 3 to 5, 9, CM, CS, CT, DL User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS 2.1 List of Pin Functions (1) Port pins (1/2) Pin Name Pin No. On-Chip I/O Function Alternate Function Pull-up Resistor P00 P01 3 I/O Yes Port 0 I/O port 4 Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units. TOH0 TOH1 P02 5 P03 6 INTP0 P04 7 INTP1 P05 17 INTP2 P06 18 INTP3 P30 22 P31 I/O Yes I/O port 23 P32 24 P33 25 Port 3 Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units. P38 and P39 are fixed to N-ch open-drain output. NMI TXD0 RXD0 ASCK0 Note 2 TI000/TO00/TIP00 TOP00 P34 26 P35 27 P38 28 P39 29 P40 19 P41 P42 / Note 2 Note 2 TI001/TIP01 /TOP01 Note 2 TI010/TO01 Note 1 Note 3 No SDA0 SCL0 I/O Yes Port 4 I/O port 20 Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units. 21 P41 and P42 can be specified as N-ch open- Note 3 SI00 SO00 SCK00 drain output in 1-bit units. P50 P51 32 I/O Yes Port 5 I/O port 33 Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units. TI011/RTP00/KR0 TI50/RTP01/KR1 P52 34 P53 35 P54 36 SOA0/RTP04/KR4 P55 37 SCKA0/RTP05/KR5 P70 80 P54 and P55 can be specified as N-ch opendrain output in 1-bit units. Input No Port 7 Input port TO50/RTP02/KR2 SIA0/RTP03/KR3 ANI0 P71 79 ANI1 P72 78 ANI2 P73 77 ANI3 P74 76 ANI4 P75 75 ANI5 P76 74 ANI6 P77 73 ANI7 Notes 1. An on-chip pull-up resistor can be provided by a mask option (only in the mask ROM versions). 2. Only in the PD703211, 703211Y, 70F3211H, 70F3211HY 3. Only in products with an I2C bus (Y products) User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 39 CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS (2/2) Pin Name Pin No. On-Chip I/O Function Alternate Function Pull-up Resistor I/O Yes Port 9 I/O port Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units. P98 and P99 can be specified as N-ch opendrain output in 1-bit units. P90 38 P91 39 P96 40 P97 41 P98 42 SO01 P99 43 SCK01 P913 44 INTP4 P914 45 INTP5 P915 46 INTP6 PCM0 49 PCM1 50 PCM2 51 PCM3 52 PCS0 47 PCS1 48 PCT0 53 PCT1 54 PCT4 55 PCT6 56 PDL0 57 PDL1 58 I/O No Port CM I/O port Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units. TXD1/KR6 RXD1/KR7 TI51/TO51 SI01 WAIT CLKOUT HLDAK HLDRQ I/O I/O No No Port CS I/O port Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units. CS1 Port CT WR0 I/O port Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units. CS0 WR1 RD ASTB I/O No Port DL I/O port Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units. AD0 AD1 PDL2 59 PDL3 60 AD3 PDL4 61 AD4 PDL5 62 AD5/FLMD1 PDL6 63 AD6 PDL7 64 AD7 PDL8 65 AD8 PDL9 66 AD9 PDL10 67 AD10 PDL11 68 AD11 PDL12 69 AD12 PDL13 70 AD13 PDL14 71 AD14 PDL15 72 AD15 Note Only in the PD70F3210H, 70F3210HY, 70F3211H, 70F3211HY 40 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD AD2 Note CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS (2) Non-port pins (1/3) Pin Name Pin No. I/O On-Chip Function Alternate Function Pull-up Resistor I/O No Address/data bus for external memory AD0 57 PDL0 AD1 58 PDL1 AD2 59 PDL2 AD3 60 PDL3 AD4 61 PDL4 AD5 62 PDL5/FLMD1 AD6 63 PDL6 AD7 64 PDL7 AD8 65 PDL8 AD9 66 PDL9 AD10 67 PDL10 AD11 68 PDL11 AD12 69 PDL12 AD13 70 PDL13 AD14 71 PDL14 Note 1 AD15 72 ANI0 80 PDL15 ANI1 79 P71 ANI2 78 P72 ANI3 77 P73 ANI4 76 P74 ANI5 75 P75 ANI6 74 P76 ANI7 73 P77 ASCK0 24 Input Yes UART0 serial clock input P32 ASTB 56 Output No Address strobe signal output for external PCT6 Input No Analog voltage input for A/D converter P70 memory AVREF0 1 - - Reference voltage for A/D converter and positive - power supply for alternate-function ports AVSS 2 - - Ground potential for A/D converter - CLKOUT 50 Output No Internal system clock output PCM1 CS0 47 Output No Chip select output PCS0 CS1 48 PCS1 EVDD 31 - - Positive power supply for external - EVSS 30 - - Ground potential for external - FLMD0 Note 1 8 - - Flash programming mode setting pin - FLMD1 Note 1 62 PDL5/AD5 HLDAK 51 Output No Bus hold acknowledge output PCM2 HLDRQ 52 Input No Bus hold request input PCM3 Note 2 IC 8 - - Internally connected - Notes 1. Only in the PD70F3210H, 70F3210HY, 70F3211H, 70F3211HY 2. Only in the mask ROM versions User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 41 CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS (2/3) Pin Name Pin No. On-Chip I/O Function Alternate Function Pull-up Resistor INTP0 6 Input Yes External interrupt request input P03 (maskable, analog noise elimination) P04 INTP1 7 INTP2 17 P05 INTP3 18 P06 INTP4 44 P913 INTP5 45 P914 INTP6 46 P915 KR0 32 KR1 33 P51/TI50/RTP01 KR2 34 P52/TO50/RTP02 KR3 35 P53/SIA0/RTP03 KR4 36 P54/SOA0/RTP04 KR5 37 P55/SCKA0/RTP05 KR6 38 P90/TXD1 KR7 39 P91/RXD1 NMI 5 Input Input Yes Key return input P50/TI011/RTP00 External interrupt input Yes P02 (non-maskable, analog noise elimination) RD 55 Output REGC 10 - No Read strobe signal output for external memory PCT4 Connecting capacitor for regulator output - - stabilization RESET 14 Input RTP00 32 Output RTP01 33 P51/TI50/KR1 RTP02 34 P52/TO50/KR2 RTP03 35 P53/SIA0/KR3 RTP04 36 P54/SOA0/KR4 RTP05 37 P55/SCKA0/KR5 RXD0 23 RXD1 39 SCK00 21 SCK01 SCKA0 SCL0 Note 1 Input I/O - System reset input Yes Real-time output port Yes Yes 43 P50/TI011/KR0 Serial receive data input for UART0 P31 Serial receive data input for UART1 P91/KR7 Serial clock I/O for CSI00, CSI01, CSIA0 P42 N-ch open-drain output can be specified in 1- P99 bit units. 42 29 - I/O P55/RTP05/KR5 2 Note 2 Serial clock I/O for I C0 No P39 Fixed to N-ch open-drain output Note 1 SDA0 28 I/O 2 Note 2 Serial transmit/receive data I/O for I C0 No P38 Fixed to N-ch open-drain output SI00 19 SI01 41 SIA0 35 Input Yes Serial receive data input for CSI00 P40 Serial receive data input for CSI01 P97 Serial receive data input for CSIA0 P53/RTP03/KR3 2 Notes 1. Only in products with an I C bus (Y products) 2. An on-chip pull-up resistor can be provided by a mask option (only in the mask ROM versions). 42 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS (3/3) Pin Name Pin No. On-Chip I/O Function Alternate Function Pull-up Resistor SO00 20 SO01 Output Yes 42 Serial transmit data output for CSI00, CSI01, P41 CSIA0 P98 N-ch open-drain output can be specified in 1- SOA0 36 TI000 25 TI001 26 Capture trigger input for TM00 TI010 27 Capture trigger input/external event input for TM01 P35/TO01 TI011 32 Capture trigger input for TM01 P50/RTP00/KR0 TI50 33 External event input for TM50 P51/RTP01/KR1 TI51 40 External event input for TM51 P96/TO51 25 Capture trigger input/external event P33/TI000/TO00/TOP00 TIP00 Note 1 TIP01 Note 1 bit units. Input Yes P54/RTP04/KR4 Capture trigger input/external event input for TM00 P33/TO00/TIP00 P34/TIP01 Note 1 Note 1 /TOP00 Note 1 /TOP01 Note 1 Note 1 input/external clock input for TMP0 26 Output Yes Note 1 Capture trigger input P34/TI001/TOP01 Timer output for TM00 P33/TI000/TIP00 Note 1 TO00 25 TO01 27 Timer output for TM01 P35/TI010 TO50 34 Timer output for TM50 P52/RTP02/KR2 TO51 40 Timer output for TM51 P96/TI51 TOH0 3 Timer output for TMH0 P00 TOH1 4 Timer output for TMH1 P01 TOP00 Note 1 25 Timer output for TMP0 P33/TI000/TO00/TIP00 TOP01 Note 1 26 P34/TI001/TIP01 TXD0 22 TXD1 38 VDD 9 - - Positive power supply pin for internal - 8 - - High-voltage application pin for program - Note 2 VPP Output Yes Serial transmit data output for UART0 P30 Serial transmit data output for UART1 P90/KR6 Note 1 /TOP00 Note 1 Note 1 write/verify VSS 11 - WAIT 49 Input No External wait input PCM0 WR0 53 Output No Write strobe for external memory (lower 8 bits) PCT0 WR1 54 Write strobe for external memory (higher 8 bits) PCT1 X1 12 X2 13 XT1 15 XT2 16 Input - Input - - No Ground potential for internal Connecting resonator for main clock No No - - - Connecting resonator for subclock No - - Notes 1. Only in the PD703211, 703211Y, 70F3211H, 70F3211HY 2. Only in the PD70F3210, 70F3210Y User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 43 CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS 2.2 Pin Status The address bus becomes undefined during accesses to the internal RAM and ROM. The data bus goes into the high-impedance state without data output. The external bus control signal becomes inactive. During peripheral I/O access, the address bus outputs the addresses of the on-chip peripheral I/Os that are accessed. The data bus goes into the high-impedance state without data output. The external bus control signal becomes inactive. Table 2-2. Pin Operation Status in Operation Modes Operating Status Note 1 Reset HALT Mode IDLE Mode/ Idle State Note 2 Bus Hold STOP Mode Pin AD0 to AD15 (PDL0 to PDL15) Hi-Z Undefined Hi-Z Held Hi-Z WAIT (PCM0) Hi-Z - - - - CLKOUT (PCM1) Hi-Z Operating L Operating Operating CS0, CS1 (PCS0, PCS1) Hi-Z H H Held Hi-Z WR0, WR1 (PCT0, PCT1) Hi-Z H H H Hi-Z RD (PCT4) Hi-Z H H H Hi-Z ASTB (PCT6) Hi-Z H H H Hi-Z HLDAK (PCM2) Hi-Z Operating H H L HLDRQ (PCM3) Hi-Z Operating - - Operating Notes 1. Since the bus control pin is also used as a port pin, it is initialized to the port mode (input) after reset. 2. The pin statuses in the idle state inserted after the T3 state are listed. Remark 44 Hi-Z: High impedance H: High-level output L: Low-level output -: Input without sampling (input acknowledgment not possible) User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS 2.3 Pin I/O Circuits and Recommended Connection of Unused Pins (1/2) Pin Alternate Function Pin No. 3 I/O Circuit Type Recommended Connection 5-A Input: Independently connect to EVDD or EVSS via a resistor. Output: Leave open. P00 TOH0 P01 TOH1 4 P02 NMI 5 P03 to P06 INTP0 to INTP3 6, 7, 17, 18 P30 TXD0 22 5-A P31 RXD0 23 5-W P32 ASCK0 5-W 24 P33 TI000/TO00/TIP00 P34 TI001/TIP01 P35 TI010/TO01 P38 SDA0 Note 1 /TOP00 Note 1 /TOP01 Note 2 Note 1 Note 1 25 26 27 28 13-AE Note 3 Note 4 13-AD <R> P39 SCL0 Note 2 29 13-AE Note 3 Note 4 13-AD <R> P40 SI00 19 5-W P41 P42 SO00 20 10-E SCK00 21 10-F P50 TI011/RTP00/KR0 32 8-A P51 TI50/RTP01/KR1 33 P52 TO50/RTP02/KR2 34 P53 SIA0/RTP03/KR3 35 P54 SOA0/RTP04/KR4 36 P55 SCKA0/RTP05/KR5 37 P70 to P77 ANI0 to ANI7 80 to 73 9-C Connect to AVREF0 or AVSS. P90 TXD1/KR6 38 8-A P91 RXD1/KR7 39 P96 TI51/TO51 40 8-A Input: Independently connect to EVDD or EVSS via a resistor. Output: Leave open. P97 SI01 41 5-W P98 SO01 42 10-E P99 SCK01 43 10-F P913 to P915 INTP4 to INTP6 44 to 46 5-W PCM0 WAIT 49 PCM1 CLKOUT 50 PCM2 HLDAK 51 PCM3 HLDRQ 52 PCS0, PCS1 CS0, CS1 47, 48 5 PCT0, PCT1 WR0, WR1 53, 54 5 PCT4 RD 55 PCT6 ASTB 56 10-A 5 Notes 1. Only in the PD703211, 703211Y, 70F3211H, 70F3211HY 2. Only in products with an I2C bus (Y products) 3. Mask ROM version 4. Flash memory version User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 45 CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS (2/2) Pin Alternate Function PDL0 to PDL4 PDL5 AD0 to AD4 AD5/FLMD1 Pin No. 57 to 61 Note 1 I/O Circuit Type Recommended Connection 5 Input: Independently connect to EVDD or EVSS via a resistor. 62 PDL6 to PDL15 AD6 to AD15 Output: Leave open. 63 to 72 AVREF0 - 1 - Directly connect to VDD. AVSS - 2 - - EVDD - 31 - - - 30 - - - 8 - Connect to VSS in normal operation mode. - 8 - Directly connect to EVSS or VSS or pull down EVSS FLMD0 Note 1 Note 2 IC with a 10 k resistor. RESET Note 3 VPP - 14 2 - 8 - - Directly connect to EVSS or VSS or pull down with a 10 k resistor. VDD - 9 - - VSS - 11 - - X1 - 12 - - X2 - 13 - - XT1 - 15 16 Directly connect to VSS XT2 - 16 16 Leave open. Note 4 . Notes 1. Only in the PD70F3210H, 70F3210HY, 70F3211H, 70F3211HY 2. Only in the PD703208, 703208Y, 703209, 703209Y, 703210, 703210Y, 703211, 703211Y 3. Only in the PD70F3210, 70F3210Y 4. Be sure to set the PSMR.XTSTP bit to 1 when this pin is not used. 46 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS 2.4 Pin I/O Circuits (1/2) Type 2 Type 8-A VDD Pull-up enable P-ch VDD IN Data P-ch IN/OUT Output disable Schmitt-triggered input with hysteresis characteristics Type 5 N-ch Type 9-C VDD P-ch Data P-ch IN Output disable Comparator + IN/OUT N-ch N-ch - AVREF0 (threshold voltage) Input enable Input enable Type 5-A Pull-up enable Pull-up enable P-ch P-ch VDD VDD Data VDD Type 10-A VDD Data P-ch P-ch IN/OUT Output disable IN/OUT Open drain Output disable N-ch N-ch Input enable VDD Type 5-W Pull-up enable P-ch Pull-up enable P-ch VDD VDD Data Data Input enable P-ch P-ch IN/OUT Output disable N-ch VDD Type 10-E IN/OUT Open drain Output disable N-ch Input enable User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 47 CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS (2/2) VDD Type 10-F Pull-up enable Type 13-AE VDD P-ch Mask option VDD Data IN/OUT Open drain Output disable IN/OUT Data P-ch Output disable N-ch N-ch VSS Input enable Input enable Type 13-AD <R> Type 16 Feedback cut-off IN/OUT Data Output disable P-ch N-ch VSS Input enable Remark 48 XT1 Read VDD as EVDD. Also, read VSS as EVSS. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD XT2 CHAPTER 3 CPU FUNCTIONS The CPU of the V850ES/KF1 is based on the RISC architecture and executes most instructions in one clock cycle by using 5-stage pipeline control. 3.1 Features { Number of instructions: 83 { Minimum instruction execution time: 50.0 ns (@ 20 MHz operation: 4.5 to 5.5 V, REGC = VDD) 62.5 ns (@ 16 MHz operation: 4.0 to 5.5 V, REGC = 10 F) 100 ns (@ 10 MHz operation: 2.7 to 5.5 V, REGC = VDD) { Memory space Program (physical address) space: 64 MB linear Data (logical address) space: 4 GB linear * Memory block division function: 64 KB, 64 KB/Total of 2 blocks { General-purpose registers: 32 bits x 32 { Internal 32-bit architecture { 5-stage pipeline control { Multiply/divide instructions { Saturated operation instructions { 32-bit shift instruction: 1 clock { Load/store instruction with long/short format { Four types of bit manipulation instructions * SET1 * CLR1 * NOT1 * TST1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 49 CHAPTER 3 CPU FUNCTIONS 3.2 CPU Register Set The CPU registers of the V850ES/KF1 can be classified into two categories: a general-purpose program register set and a dedicated system register set. All the registers have 32-bit width. For details, refer to the V850ES Architecture User's Manual. (1) Program register set 31 r0 (2) System register set 0 31 0 (Zero register) EIPC (Interrupt status saving register) (Assembler-reserved register) EIPSW (Interrupt status saving register) r3 (Stack pointer (SP)) FEPC (NMI status saving register) r4 (Global pointer (GP)) FEPSW (NMI status saving register) r5 (Text pointer (TP)) ECR (Interrupt source register) PSW (Program status word) CTPC (CALLT execution status saving register) CTPSW (CALLT execution status saving register) DBPC (Exception/debug trap status saving register) DBPSW (Exception/debug trap status saving register) CTBP (CALLT base pointer) r1 r2 r6 r7 r8 r9 r10 r11 r12 r13 r14 r15 r16 r17 r18 r19 r20 r21 r22 r23 r24 r25 r26 r27 r28 r29 r30 (Element pointer (EP)) r31 (Link pointer (LP)) 31 PC 50 0 (Program counter) User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 3 CPU FUNCTIONS 3.2.1 Program register set The program register set includes general-purpose registers and a program counter. (1) General-purpose registers (r0 to r31) Thirty-two general-purpose registers, r0 to r31, are available. All of these registers can be used as a data variable or address variable. However, r0 and r30 are implicitly used by instructions and care must be exercised when using these registers. r0 always holds 0 and is used for operations that use 0 and offset 0 addressing. r30 is used as a base pointer when performing memory access with the SLD and SST instructions. Also, r1, r3 to r5, and r31 are implicitly used by the assembler and C compiler. Therefore, before using these registers, their contents must be saved so that they are not lost, and they must be restored to the registers after the registers have been used. There are cases when r2 is used by the real-time OS. If r2 is not used by the real-time OS, r2 can be used as a variable register. Table 3-1. Program Registers Name Usage Operation r0 Zero register Always holds 0 r1 Assembler-reserved register Working register for generating 32-bit immediate r2 Address/data variable register (when r2 is not used by the real-time OS to be used) r3 Stack pointer Used to generate stack frame when function is called r4 Global pointer Used to access global variable in data area r5 Text pointer Register to indicate the start of the text area (area for placing program code) r6 to r29 Address/data variable register r30 Element pointer Base pointer when memory is accessed r31 Link pointer Used by compiler when calling function PC Program counter Holds instruction address during program execution (2) Program counter (PC) This register holds the address of the instruction under execution. The lower 26 bits of this register are valid, and bits 31 to 26 are fixed to 0. If a carry occurs from bit 25 to bit 26, it is ignored. Bit 0 is fixed to 0, and branching to an odd address cannot be performed. 31 PC 26 25 Fixed to 0 1 0 Instruction address under execution User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 0 After reset 00000000H 51 CHAPTER 3 CPU FUNCTIONS 3.2.2 System register set System registers control the status of the CPU and hold interrupt information. Read from and write to system registers are performed by setting the system register numbers shown below with the system register load/store instructions (LDSR, STSR instructions). Table 3-2. System Register Numbers System System Register Name Register No. Note 1 0 Interrupt status saving register (EIPC) Note 1 1 Interrupt status saving register (EIPSW) Note 1 2 NMI status saving register (FEPC) Note 1 Operand Specification Enabled LDSR STSR Instruction Instruction Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 3 NMI status saving register (FEPSW) 4 Interrupt source register (ECR) No Yes 5 Program status word (PSW) Yes Yes Reserved numbers for future function expansion (The operation is not guaranteed No No 6 to 15 if accessed.) 16 CALLT execution status saving register (CTPC) Yes Yes 17 CALLT execution status saving register (CTPSW) Yes Yes <R> 18 Exception/debug trap status saving register (DBPC) Yes Note 2 <R> 19 Exception/debug trap status saving register (DBPSW) Yes Note 2 20 CALLT base pointer (CTBP) Yes Yes Reserved numbers for future function expansion (The operation is not guaranteed No No 21 to 31 Note 2 Yes Yes Note 2 if accessed.) Notes 1. Since only one set of these registers is available, the contents of this register must be saved by the program when multiple interrupt servicing is enabled. 2. These registers can be accessed only during the interval between the execution of the DBTRAP instruction or illegal opcode and the DBRET instruction. Caution Even if bit 0 of EIPC, FEPC, or CTPC is set (1) by the LDSR instruction, bit 0 is ignored during return with the RETI instruction following interrupt servicing (because bit 0 of PC is fixed to 0). When setting a value to EIPC, FEPC, and CTPC, set an even number (bit 0 = 0). 52 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 3 CPU FUNCTIONS (1) Interrupt status saving registers (EIPC, EIPSW) There are two interrupt status saving registers, EIPC and EIPSW. Upon occurrence of a software exception or a maskable interrupt, the contents of the program counter (PC) are saved to EIPC and the contents of the program status word (PSW) are saved to EIPSW (upon occurrence of a non-maskable interrupt (NMI), the contents are saved to the NMI status saving registers (FEPC, FEPSW)). The address of the next instruction following the instruction executed when a software exception or maskable interrupt occurs is saved to EIPC, except for some instructions (refer to 21.9 Period in Which Interrupts Are Not Acknowledged by CPU). The current PSW contents are saved to EIPSW. Since there is only one set of interrupt status saving registers, the contents of these registers must be saved by the program when multiple interrupt servicing is enabled. Bits 31 to 26 of EIPC and bits 31 to 8 of EIPSW are reserved (fixed to 0) for future function expansion. When the RETI instruction is executed, the values in EIPC and EIPSW are restored to the PC and PSW, respectively. 31 EIPC 0 26 25 0 0 0 0 0 0 31 EIPSW After reset 0xxxxxxxH (x: Undefined) (PC contents saved) 8 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (PSW contents saved) User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD After reset 000000xxH (x: Undefined) 53 CHAPTER 3 CPU FUNCTIONS (2) NMI status saving registers (FEPC, FEPSW) There are two NMI status saving registers, FEPC and FEPSW. Upon occurrence of a non-maskable interrupt (NMI), the contents of the program counter (PC) are saved to FEPC and the contents of the program status word (PSW) are saved to FEPSW. The address of the next instruction following the instruction executed when a non-maskable interrupt occurs is saved to FEPC, except for some instructions. The current PSW contents are saved to FEPSW. Since there is only one set of NMI status saving registers, the contents of these registers must be saved by the program when multiple interrupt servicing is performed. Bits 31 to 26 of FEPC and bits 31 to 8 of FEPSW are reserved (fixed to 0) for future function expansion. 31 FEPC 0 26 25 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 7 31 FEPSW After reset 0xxxxxxxH (x: Undefined) (PC contents saved) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (PSW contents saved) After reset 000000xxH (x: Undefined) (3) Interrupt source register (ECR) Upon occurrence of an interrupt or an exception, the interrupt source register (ECR) holds the source of an interrupt or an exception. The value held by ECR is the exception code coded for each interrupt source. This register is a read-only register, and thus data cannot be written to it using the LDSR instruction. 31 16 15 ECR Bit position 54 0 FECC Bit name EICC Description 31 to 16 FECC Non-maskable interrupt (NMI) exception code 15 to 0 EICC Exception, maskable interrupt exception code User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD After reset 00000000H CHAPTER 3 CPU FUNCTIONS (4) Program status word (PSW) The program status word (PSW) is a collection of flags that indicate the program status (instruction execution result) and the CPU status. When the contents of this register are changed using the LDSR instruction, the new contents become valid immediately following completion of LDSR instruction execution. Interrupt request acknowledgment is held pending while a write to the PSW is being executed by the LDSR instruction. Bits 31 to 8 are reserved (fixed to 0) for future function expansion. (1/2) 31 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PSW NP EP ID SAT CY OV S Z RFU After reset 00000020H Bit position Flag name Description 31 to 8 RFU Reserved field. Fixed to 0. 7 NP Indicates that non-maskable interrupt (NMI) servicing is in progress. This flag is set to 1 when an NMI request is acknowledged, and disables multiple interrupts. 0: NMI servicing not in progress 1: NMI servicing in progress 6 Indicates that exception processing is in progress. This flag is set to 1 when an exception EP occurs. Moreover, interrupt requests can be acknowledged even when this bit is set. 0: Exception processing not in progress 1: Exception processing in progress 5 Indicates whether maskable interrupt request acknowledgment is enabled. ID 0: Interrupt enabled 1: Interrupt disabled 4 Note SAT Indicates that the result of executing a saturated operation instruction has overflowed and that the calculation result is saturated. Since this is a cumulative flag, it is set to 1 when the result of a saturated operation instruction becomes saturated, and it is not cleared to 0 even if the operation results of successive instructions do not become saturated. This flag is neither set nor cleared when arithmetic operation instructions are executed. 0: Not saturated 1: Saturated 3 Indicates whether carry or borrow occurred as the result of an operation. CY 0: No carry or borrow occurred 1: Carry or borrow occurred 2 OV Note Indicates whether overflow occurred during an operation. 0: No overflow occurred 1: Overflow occurred. 1 S Note Indicates whether the result of an operation is negative. 0: Operation result is positive or 0. 1: Operation result is negative. 0 Z Indicates whether operation result is 0. 0: Operation result is not 0. 1: Operation result is 0. Remark Note is explained on the following page. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 55 CHAPTER 3 CPU FUNCTIONS (2/2) Note During saturated operation, the saturated operation results are determined by the contents of the OV flag and S flag. The SAT flag is set (to 1) only when the OV flag is set (to 1) during saturated operation. Operation result status Flag status Saturated OV operation result SAT Maximum positive value exceeded 1 1 S 0 7FFFFFFFH Maximum negative value exceeded 1 1 1 80000000H Positive (maximum value not exceeded) Holds value 0 0 Actual operation Negative (maximum value not exceeded) before operation 1 result (5) CALLT execution status saving registers (CTPC, CTPSW) There are two CALLT execution status saving registers, CTPC and CTPSW. When the CALLT instruction is executed, the contents of the program counter (PC) are saved to CTPC, and the program status word (PSW) contents are saved to CTPSW. The contents saved to CTPC consist of the address of the next instruction after the CALLT instruction. The current PSW contents are saved to CTPSW. Bits 31 to 26 of CTPC and bits 31 to 8 of CTPSW are reserved (fixed to 0) for future function expansion. 31 CTPC 0 26 25 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 7 31 CTPSW 56 After reset 0xxxxxxxH (x: Undefined) (PC contents saved) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (PSW contents saved) User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD After reset 000000xxH (x: Undefined) CHAPTER 3 CPU FUNCTIONS (6) Exception/debug trap status saving registers (DBPC, DBPSW) There are two exception/debug trap status saving registers, DBPC and DBPSW. Upon occurrence of an exception trap or debug trap, the contents of the program counter (PC) are saved to DBPC, and the program status word (PSW) contents are saved to DBPSW. The contents saved to DBPC consist of the address of the next instruction after the instruction executed when an exception trap or debug trap occurs. The current PSW contents are saved to DBPSW. Bits 31 to 26 of DBPC and bits 31 to 8 of DBPSW are reserved (fixed to 0) for future function expansion. 31 DBPC 0 26 25 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 7 31 DBPSW After reset 0xxxxxxxH (x: Undefined) (PC contents saved) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (PSW contents saved) After reset 000000xxH (x: Undefined) (7) CALLT base pointer (CTBP) The CALLT base pointer (CTBP) is used to specify table addresses and generate target addresses (bit 0 is fixed to 0). Bits 31 to 26 are reserved (fixed to 0) for future function expansion. 31 CTBP 0 26 25 0 0 0 0 0 0 (Base address) User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 0 After reset 0xxxxxxxH (x: Undefined) 57 CHAPTER 3 CPU FUNCTIONS 3.3 Operating Modes The V850ES/KF1 has the following operating modes. (1) Normal operating mode After the system has been released from the reset state, the pins related to the bus interface are set to the port mode, execution branches to the reset entry address of the internal ROM, and instruction processing is started. (2) Flash memory programming mode This mode is valid only in flash memory versions (PD70F3210, 70F3210Y, 70F3210H, 70F3210HY, 70F3211H, and 70F3211HY). When this mode is specified, the internal flash memory can be programmed by using a flash programmer. (a) Specifying operating mode (i) PD70F3210, 70F3210Y The internal flash memory can be written or erased when 10 V 0.3 V is applied to the VPP pin. VPP Operating Mode 0 Normal operating mode 10 V 0.3 V Flash memory programming mode VDD Setting prohibited (ii) PD70F3210H, 70F3210HY, 70F3211H, 70F3211HY The operating mode is specified according to the status (input level) of the FLMD0 and FLMD1 pins. In the normal operating mode, input a low level to the FLMD0 pin during the reset period. A high level is input to the FLMD0 pin by the flash programmer in the flash memory programming mode if a flash programmer is connected. In the self-programming mode, input a high level to this pin from an external circuit. Fix the specification of these pins in the application system and do not change the setting of these pins during operation. FLMD0 FLMD1 Operating Mode L x Normal operating mode H L Flash memory programming mode H H Setting prohibited Remark H: High level L: Low level x: don't care 58 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 3 CPU FUNCTIONS 3.4 Address Space 3.4.1 CPU address space For instruction addressing, up to a combined total of 16 MB of external memory area and internal ROM area, plus an internal RAM area, are supported in a linear address space (program space) of up to 64 MB. For operand addressing (data access), up to 4 GB of a linear address space (data space) is supported. The 4 GB address space, however, is viewed as 64 images of a 64 MB physical address space. This means that the same 64 MB physical address space is accessed regardless of the value of bits 31 to 26. Figure 3-1. Address Space Image Image 63 4 GB * * * Data space On-chip peripheral I/O area Program space Image 1 Reserved area Internal RAM area Internal RAM area Access-prohibited area 64 MB Access-prohibited area 64 MB Image 0 External memory area External memory area Internal ROM area (external memory) 16 MB Internal ROM area (external memory) User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 59 CHAPTER 3 CPU FUNCTIONS 3.4.2 Wraparound of CPU address space (1) Program space Of the 32 bits of the program counter (PC), the higher 6 bits are fixed to 0 and only the lower 26 bits are valid. Even if a carry or borrow occurs from bit 25 to bit 26 as a result of branch address calculation, the higher 6 bits ignore this and remain 0. Therefore, the lower-limit address of the program space, 00000000H, and the upper-limit address, 03FFFFFFH, are contiguous addresses, and the program space is wrapped around at the boundary of these addresses. Caution No instructions can be fetched from the 4 KB area of 03FFF000H to 03FFFFFFH because this area is an on-chip peripheral I/O area. Therefore, do not execute any branch operation instructions in which the destination address will reside in any part of this area. 00000001H Program space 00000000H (+) direction (-) direction 03FFFFFFH 03FFFFFEH Program space (2) Data space The result of an operand address calculation that exceeds 32 bits is ignored. Therefore, the lower-limit address of the data space, address 00000000H, and the upper-limit address, FFFFFFFFH, are contiguous addresses, and the data space is wrapped around at the boundary of these addresses. 00000001H Data space 00000000H (+) direction FFFFFFFFH FFFFFFFEH Data space 60 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD (-) direction CHAPTER 3 CPU FUNCTIONS 3.4.3 Memory map The V850ES/KF1 has reserved areas as shown below. Figure 3-2. Data Memory Map (Physical Addresses) 3FFFFFFH On-chip peripheral I/O area (4 KB) (80 KB) 3FFFFFFH 3FFF000H 3FFEFFFH 3FEC000H 3FEBFFFH Internal RAM area (60 KB) 3FFF000H 3FFEFFFH Use-prohibited area 3FEC000H Use-prohibited area 0210000H 020FFFFH 0200000H 01FFFFFH Use-prohibited area External memory area (64 KB) CS1 External memory area (64 KB) (2 MB) CS0 Internal ROM areaNote (1 MB) 01FFFFFH 0110000H 010FFFFH 0100000H 00FFFFFH 0000000H 0000000H Note Fetch access and read access to addresses 0000000H to 00FFFFFH is performed for the internal ROM area, but in the case of data write access, it is performed for an external memory area. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 61 CHAPTER 3 CPU FUNCTIONS Figure 3-3. Program Memory Map 03FFFFFFH 03FFF000H 03FFEFFFH Use-prohibited area (Program fetch disabled area) Internal RAM area (60 KB) 03FF0000H 03FEFFFFH Use-prohibited area (Program fetch disabled area) 00210000H 0020FFFFH 00200000H 001FFFFFH 00110000H 0010FFFFH 00100000H 000FFFFFH 00000000H 62 External memory area (64 KB) CS1 Use-prohibited area (Program fetch disabled area) External memory area (64 KB) Internal ROM area (1 MB) User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CS0 CHAPTER 3 CPU FUNCTIONS 3.4.4 Areas (1) Internal ROM area An area of 1 MB from 0000000H to 00FFFFFH is reserved for the internal ROM area. (a) Internal ROM (256 KB) A 256 KB area from 0000000H to 003FFFFH is provided in the following products. Addresses 0040000H to 00FFFFFH are an access-prohibited area. * PD703211, 703211Y, 70F3211H, 70F3211HY Figure 3-4. Internal ROM Area (256 KB) 00FFFFFH Access-prohibited area 0040000H 003FFFFH Internal ROM area (256 KB) 0000000H (b) Internal ROM (128 KB) A 128 KB area from 0000000H to 001FFFFH is provided in the following products. Addresses 0020000H to 00FFFFFH are an access-prohibited area. * PD703210, 703210Y, 70F3210, 70F3210Y, 70F3210H, 70F3210HY Figure 3-5. Internal ROM Area (128 KB) 00FFFFFH Access-prohibited area 0020000H 001FFFFH Internal ROM area (128 KB) 0000000H User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 63 CHAPTER 3 CPU FUNCTIONS (c) Internal ROM (96 KB) A 96 KB area from 0000000H to 0017FFFH is provided in the following products. Addresses 0018000H to 00FFFFFH are an access-prohibited area. * PD703209, 703209Y Figure 3-6. Internal ROM Area (96 KB) 00FFFFFH Access-prohibited area 0018000H 0017FFFH Internal ROM area (96 KB) 0000000H (d) Internal ROM (64 KB) A 64 KB area from 0000000H to 000FFFFH is provided in the following products. Addresses 0010000H to 00FFFFFH are an access-prohibited area. * PD703208, 703208Y Figure 3-7. Internal ROM Area (64 KB) 00FFFFFH Access-prohibited area 0010000H 000FFFFH Internal ROM area (64 KB) 0000000H 64 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 3 CPU FUNCTIONS (2) Internal RAM area An area of 60 KB maximum from 3FF0000H to 3FFEFFFH is reserved for the internal RAM area. (a) Internal RAM (12 KB) A 12 KB area from 3FFC000H to 3FFEFFFH is provided as physical internal RAM in the following products. Addresses 3FF0000H to 3FFBFFFH are an access-prohibited area. * PD703211, 703211Y, 70F3211H, 70F3211HY Figure 3-8. Internal RAM Area (12 KB) Physical address space Logical address space 3FFEFFFH FFFEFFFH Internal RAM area (12 KB) 3FFC000H 3FFBFFFH FFFC000H FFFBFFFH Access-prohibited area 3FF0000H FFF0000H (b) Internal RAM (6 KB) A 6 KB area from 3FFD800H to 3FFEFFFH is provided as physical internal RAM in the following products. Addresses 3FF0000H to 3FFD7FFH are an access-prohibited area. * PD703210, 703210Y, 70F3210, 70F3210Y, 70F3210H, 70F3210HY Figure 3-9. Internal RAM Area (6 KB) Logical address space Physical address space FFFEFFFH 3FFEFFFH Internal RAM area (6 KB) FFFD800H FFFD7FFH 3FFD800H 3FFD7FFH Access-prohibited area FFF0000H 3FF0000H User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 65 CHAPTER 3 CPU FUNCTIONS (c) Internal RAM (4 KB) A 4 KB area from 3FFE000H to 3FFEFFFH is provided as physical internal RAM in the following products. Addresses 3FF0000H to 3FFD7FFH are an access-prohibited area. * PD703208, 703208Y, 703209, 703209Y Figure 3-10. Internal RAM Area (4 KB) Logical address space Physical address space FFFEFFFH 3FFEFFFH Internal RAM area (4 KB) FFFE000H FFFDFFFH 3FFE000H 3FFDFFFH Access-prohibited area FFF0000H 3FF0000H 66 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 3 CPU FUNCTIONS (3) On-chip peripheral I/O area A 4 KB area from 3FFF000H to 3FFFFFFH is reserved as the on-chip peripheral I/O area. Figure 3-11. On-Chip Peripheral I/O Area Logical address space Physical address space FFFFFFFH 3FFFFFFH On-chip peripheral I/O area (4 KB) FFFF000H 3FFF000H Peripheral I/O registers assigned with functions such as on-chip peripheral I/O operation mode specification and state monitoring are mapped to the on-chip peripheral I/O area. Program fetches are not allowed in this area. Cautions 1. If word access of a register is attempted, halfword access to the word area is performed twice, first for the lower bits, then for the higher bits, ignoring the lower 2 address bits. 2. If a register that can be accessed in byte units is accessed in halfword units, the higher 8 bits become undefined if the access is a read operation. If a write access is performed, only the data in the lower 8 bits is written to the register. 3. Addresses that are not defined as registers are reserved for future expansion. If these addresses are accessed, the operation is undefined and not guaranteed. (4) External memory area 128 KB (0100000H to 010FFFFH/0200000H to 020FFFFH) are provided as the external memory area. For details, refer to CHAPTER 5 BUS CONTROL FUNCTION. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 67 CHAPTER 3 CPU FUNCTIONS 3.4.5 Recommended use of address space The architecture of the V850ES/KF1 requires that a register that serves as a pointer be secured for address generation when operand data in the data space is accessed. The address stored in this pointer 32 KB can be directly accessed by an instruction for operand data. Because the number of general-purpose registers that can be used as a pointer is limited, however, by keeping the performance from dropping during address calculation when a pointer value is changed, as many general-purpose registers as possible can be secured for variables, and the program size can be reduced. (1) Program space Of the 32 bits of the PC (program counter), the higher 6 bits are fixed to 0, and only the lower 26 bits are valid. Regarding the program space, therefore, a 64 MB space of contiguous addresses starting from 00000000H unconditionally corresponds to the memory map. To use the internal RAM area as the program space, access following addresses. RAM Size 4 KB 68 Access Address 3FFE000H to 3FFEFFFH 6 KB 3FFD800H to 3FFEFFFH 12 KB 3FFC000H to 3FFEFFFH User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 3 CPU FUNCTIONS (2) Data space With the V850ES/KF1, it seems that there are sixty-four 64 MB address spaces on the 4 GB CPU address space. Therefore, the least significant bit (bit 25) of a 26-bit address is sign-extended to 32 bits and allocated as an address. (a) Application example of wraparound If R = r0 (zero register) is specified for the LD/ST disp16 [R] instruction, a range of addresses 00000000H 32 KB can be addressed by sign-extended disp16. All the resources, including the internal hardware, can be addressed by one pointer. The zero register (r0) is a register fixed to 0 by hardware, and practically eliminates the need for registers dedicated to pointers. Example: PD703210, 703210Y 0001FFFFH 00007FFFH Internal ROM area 32 KB FFFFF000H On-chip peripheral I/O area 4 KB FFFFEFFFH FFFFD800H Internal RAM area 6 KB (R = ) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 H FFFFD7FFH 22 KB Access-prohibited area FFFF8000H User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 69 CHAPTER 3 CPU FUNCTIONS Figure 3-12. Recommended Memory Map Program space Data space FFFFFFFFH On-chip peripheral I/O FFFFF000H FFFFEFFFH Internal RAM xFFFFFFFH FFFF0000H FFFEFFFFH On-chip peripheral I/O xFFFF000H xFFFEFFFH Internal RAM 04000000H 03FFFFFFH 03FFF000H 03FFEFFFH xFFFD800H xFFFD7FFH xFFF0000H xFFEFFFFH On-chip peripheral I/ONote Internal RAM 03FFD800H 03FFD7FFH 03FF0000H 03FEFFFFH Program space 64 MB Reserved x0210000H x020FFFFH External memory x 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 H x01FFFFFH Reserved x0110000H External memory x 0 1 0 F F F F H x0100000H x00FFFFFH Internal ROM x0000000H Reserved 00210000H 0020FFFFH 00200000H 001FFFFFH 00110000H 0010FFFFH 00100000H 000FFFFFH 00020000H 0001FFFFH 00000000H External memory Reserved External memory Internal ROM Internal ROM Note Access to this area is prohibited. To access the on-chip peripheral I/O in this area, specify addresses FFFF000H to FFFFFFFH. Remarks 1. indicates the recommended area. 2. This figure is the recommended memory map of the PD703210 and 703210Y. 70 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 3 CPU FUNCTIONS 3.4.6 Peripheral I/O registers (1/8) Address Function Register Name Symbol R/W Operable Bit Unit After Reset 1 FFFFF004H 8 16 Note 1 Port DL register PDL R/W FFFFF004H Port DL register L PDLL R/W 00H FFFFF005H Port DL register H PDLH R/W 00H FFFFF008H Port CS register PCS R/W 00H FFFFF00AH Port CT register PCT R/W 00H FFFFF00CH Port CM register PCM R/W 00H FFFFF024H Port DL mode register PMDL R/W Port DL mode register L PMDLL R/W FFH FFFFF024H 0000H Note 1 Note 1 Note 1 Note 1 Note 1 FFFFH Port DL mode register H PMDLH R/W FFH FFFFF028H Port CS mode register PMCS R/W FFH FFFFF02AH Port CT mode register PMCT R/W FFH FFFFF02CH Port CM mode register PMCM R/W FFFFF044H Port DL mode control register PMCDL R/W Port DL mode control register L PMCDLL R/W 00H FFFFF025H FFFFF044H FFH 0000H P ort DL mode control register H PMCDLH R/W 00H FFFFF048H Port CS mode control register PMCCS R/W 00H FFFFF04AH Port CT mode control register PMCCT R/W 00H FFFFF04CH Port CM mode control register PMCCM R/W 00H FFFFF066H Bus size configuration register BSC R/W FFFFF06EH System wait control register VSWC R/W FFFFF100H Interrupt mask register 0 IMR0 R/W FFFFF100H Interrupt mask register 0L IMR0L R/W FFH FFFFF101H Interrupt mask register 0H IMR0H R/W FFH Interrupt mask register 1 IMR1 R/W FFFFF102H Interrupt mask register 1L IMR1L R/W FFH FFFFF103H Interrupt mask register 1H IMR1H R/W FFH FFFFF045H FFFFF102H FFFFF106H Interrupt mask register 3 IMR3 Note 2 R/W 5555H 77H FFFFH FFFFH FFFFH Interrupt mask register 3L IMR3L R/W FFH FFFFF110H Interrupt control register WDT1IC R/W 47H FFFFF112H Interrupt control register PIC0 R/W 47H FFFFF114H Interrupt control register PIC1 R/W 47H FFFFF116H Interrupt control register PIC2 R/W 47H FFFFF118H Interrupt control register PIC3 R/W 47H FFFFF11AH Interrupt control register PIC4 R/W 47H FFFFF106H Note 2 FFFFF11CH Interrupt control register PIC5 R/W 47H FFFFF11EH Interrupt control register PIC6 R/W 47H FFFFF120H Interrupt control register TM0IC00 R/W 47H FFFFF122H Interrupt control register TM0IC01 R/W 47H FFFFF124H Interrupt control register TM0IC10 R/W 47H FFFFF126H Interrupt control register TM0IC11 R/W 47H Notes 1. The output latch is 00H or 0000H. When input, the pin status is read. 2. Only in the PD703211, 703211Y, 70F3211H, 70F3211HY User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 71 CHAPTER 3 CPU FUNCTIONS (2/8) Address Function Register Name Symbol R/W Operable Bit Unit After Reset 1 8 16 FFFFF128H Interrupt control register TM5IC0 R/W 47H FFFFF12AH Interrupt control register TM5IC1 R/W 47H FFFFF12CH Interrupt control register CSI0IC0 R/W 47H FFFFF12EH Interrupt control register CSI0IC1 R/W 47H FFFFF130H Interrupt control register SREIC0 R/W 47H FFFFF132H Interrupt control register SRIC0 R/W 47H FFFFF134H Interrupt control register STIC0 R/W 47H FFFFF136H Interrupt control register SREIC1 R/W 47H FFFFF138H Interrupt control register SRIC1 R/W 47H FFFFF13AH Interrupt control register STIC1 R/W 47H FFFFF13CH Interrupt control register TMHIC0 R/W 47H FFFFF13EH Interrupt control register TMHIC1 R/W 47H FFFFF140H Interrupt control register CSIAIC0 R/W 47H FFFFF142H Interrupt control register IICIC0 R/W 47H FFFFF144H Interrupt control register ADIC R/W 47H FFFFF146H Interrupt control register KRIC R/W 47H FFFFF148H Interrupt control register WTIIC R/W 47H FFFFF14AH Interrupt control register WTIC R/W 47H FFFFF14CH Interrupt control register BRGIC R/W 47H Note 1 FFFFF174H Interrupt control register TP0OVIC R/W 47H FFFFF176H Interrupt control register TP0CCIC0 Note 2 R/W 47H FFFFF178H Interrupt control register TP0CCIC1 Note 2 R/W 47H FFFFF1FAH In-service priority register ISPR R 00H FFFFF1FCH Command register PRCMD W Undefined FFFFF1FEH Power save control register PSC R/W 00H FFFFF200H A/D converter mode register ADM R/W 00H 00H 00H 00H Note 2 FFFFF201H Analog input channel specification register ADS R/W FFFFF202H Power fail comparison mode register PFM R/W FFFFF203H Power fail comparison threshold register PFT R/W FFFFF204H A/D conversion result register ADCR R A/D conversion result register H ADCRH R FFFFF300H Key return mode register KRM R/W FFFFF400H Port 0 register P0 R/W FFFFF406H Port 3 register P3 R/W FFFFF406H Port 3 register L P3L R/W 00H FFFFF407H Port 3 register H P3H R/W 00H FFFFF408H Port 4 register P4 R/W 00H FFFFF40AH Port 5 register P5 R/W 00H FFFFF40EH Port 7 register P7 R Undefined FFFFF205H 2 Notes 1. Only in products with an I C bus (Y products) 2. Only in the PD703211, 703211Y, 70F3211H, 70F3211HY 3. The output latch is 00H or 0000H. When input, the pin status is read. 72 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD Undefined Undefined 00H 00H Note 3 Note 3 0000H Note 3 Note 3 Note 3 Note 3 CHAPTER 3 CPU FUNCTIONS (3/8) Address Function Register Name Symbol R/W Operable Bit Unit After Reset 1 FFFFF412H Port 9 register P9 8 16 R/W Note 1 0000H FFFFF412H Port 9 register L P9L R/W 00H FFFFF413H Port 9 register H P9H R/W 00H FFFFF420H Port 0 mode register PM0 R/W FFFFF426H Port 3 mode register PM3 R/W Port 3 mode register L PM3L R/W FFH FFFFF426H Note 1 Note 1 FFH FFFFH Port 3 mode register H PM3H R/W FFH FFFFF428H Port 4 mode register PM4 R/W FFH FFFFF42AH Port 5 mode register PM5 R/W FFH FFFFF432H Port 9 mode register PM9 R/W FFFFF427H FFFFH FFFFF432H Port 9 mode register L PM9L R/W FFH FFFFF433H Port 9 mode register H PM9H R/W FFH FFFFF440H Port 0 mode control register PMC0 R/W 00H FFFFF446H Port 3 mode control register PMC3 R/W FFFFF446H Port 3 mode control register L PMC3L R/W 00H FFFFF447H Port 3 mode control register H PMC3H R/W 00H FFFFF448H Port 4 mode control register PMC4 R/W 00H FFFFF44AH Port 5 mode control register PMC5 R/W 00H FFFFF452H Port 9 mode control register PMC9 R/W 0000H 0000H FFFFF452H Port 9 mode control register L PMC9L R/W 00H FFFFF453H Port 9 mode control register H PMC9H R/W 00H FFFFF466H Port 3 function control register PFC3 R/W 00H FFFFF46AH Port 5 function control register PFC5 R/W FFFFF472H Port 9 function control register PFC9 R/W FFFFF472H Port 9 function control register L PFC9L R/W 00H FFFFF473H Port 9 function control register H PFC9H R/W 00H FFFFF484H Data wait control register 0 DWC0 R/W 7777H FFFFF488H Address wait control register AWC R/W FFFFH FFFFF48AH Bus cycle control register BCC R/W AAAAH FFFFF580H 8-bit timer H mode register 0 TMHMD0 R/W 00H FFFFF581H 8-bit timer H carrier control register 0 TMCYC0 R/W 00H FFFFF582H 8-bit timer H compare register 00 CMP00 R/W 00H 00H 0000H FFFFF583H 8-bit timer H compare register 01 CMP01 R/W 00H FFFFF590H 8-bit timer H mode register 1 TMHMD1 R/W 00H FFFFF591H 8-bit timer H carrier control register 1 TMCYC1 R/W 00H FFFFF592H 8-bit timer H compare register 10 CMP10 R/W 00H FFFFF593H 8-bit timer H compare register 11 CMP11 R/W 00H 00H FFFFF5A0H TMP0 control register 0 TP0CTL0 Note 2 R/W Note 2 R/W 00H Note 2 R/W 00H Note 2 R/W 00H FFFFF5A1H TMP0 control register 1 TP0CTL1 FFFFF5A2H TMP0 I/O control register 0 TP0IOC0 FFFFF5A3H TMP0 I/O control register 1 TP0IOC1 Notes 1. The output latch is 00H or 0000H. When input, the pin status is read. 2. Only in the PD703211, 703211Y, 70F3211H, 70F3211HY User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 73 CHAPTER 3 CPU FUNCTIONS (4/8) Address Function Register Name Symbol 8 16 R/W 00H R/W 00H TP0CCR0 Note R/W Note R/W 0000H R 0000H 0000H TMP0 I/O control register 2 TP0IOC2 FFFFF5A5H TMP0 option register 0 TP0OPT0 TMP0 capture/compare register 0 1 Note Note FFFFF5A4H FFFFF5A6H R/W Operable Bit Unit After Reset 0000H FFFFF5A8H TMP0 capture/compare register 1 TP0CCR1 FFFFF5AAH TMP0 counter read buffer register TP0CNT FFFFF5C0H 16-bit timer counter 5 TM5 R FFFFF5C0H 8-bit timer counter 50 TM50 R 00H FFFFF5C1H 8-bit timer counter 51 TM51 R 00H 16-bit timer compare register 5 CR5 R/W 8-bit timer compare register 50 CR50 R/W FFFFF5C2H FFFFF5C2H FFFFF5C3H Note 8-bit timer compare register 51 CR51 R/W Timer clock selection register 5 TCL5 R/W FFFFF5C4H Timer clock selection register 50 TCL50 R/W FFFFF5C5H Timer clock selection register 51 TCL51 R/W 16-bit timer mode control register 5 TMC5 R/W 8-bit timer mode control register 50 TMC50 R/W FFFFF5C4H FFFFF5C6H FFFFF5C6H FFFFF5C7H 0000H 00H 00H 0000H 00H 00H 0000H 00H 8-bit timer mode control register 51 TMC51 R/W FFFFF600H 16-bit timer counter 00 TM00 R 00H 0000H FFFFF602H 16-bit timer capture/compare register 000 CR000 R/W 0000H FFFFF604H 16-bit timer capture/compare register 001 CR001 R/W FFFFF606H 16-bit timer mode control register 00 TMC00 R/W 00H FFFFF607H Prescaler mode register 00 PRM00 R/W 00H FFFFF608H Capture/compare control register 00 CRC00 R/W 00H FFFFF609H 16-bit timer output control register 00 TOC00 R/W 00H FFFFF610H 16-bit timer counter 01 TM01 R 0000H FFFFF612H 16-bit timer capture/compare register 010 CR010 R/W 0000H FFFFF614H 16-bit timer capture/compare register 011 CR011 R/W FFFFF616H 16-bit timer mode control register 01 TMC01 R/W 00H FFFFF617H Prescaler mode register 01 PRM01 R/W 00H FFFFF618H Capture/compare control register 01 CRC01 R/W 00H FFFFF619H 16-bit timer output control register 01 TOC01 R/W 00H FFFFF680H Watch timer operation mode register WTM R/W 00H FFFFF6C0H Oscillation stabilization time select register OSTS R/W 01H FFFFF6C1H Watchdog timer clock selection register WDCS R/W 00H FFFFF6C2H Watchdog timer mode register 1 WDTM1 R/W 00H 0000H 0000H FFFFF6D0H Watchdog timer mode register 2 WDTM2 R/W 67H FFFFF6D1H Watchdog timer enable register WDTE R/W 9AH FFFFF6E0H Real-time output buffer register L0 RTBL0 R/W 00H FFFFF6E2H Real-time output buffer register H0 RTBH0 R/W 00H FFFFF6E4H Real-time output port mode register 0 RTPM0 R/W 00H FFFFF6E5H Real-time output port control register 0 RTPC0 R/W 00H Note 74 Only in the PD703211, 703211Y, 70F3211H, 70F3211HY User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 3 CPU FUNCTIONS (5/8) Address Function Register Name Symbol R/W Operable Bit Unit 1 8 16 After Reset 32 FFFFF706H Port 3 function control expansion register PFCE3 R/W 00H FFFFF802H System status register SYS R/W 00H FFFFF806H PLL control register PLLCTL R/W 01H FFFFF820H Power save mode register PSMR R/W 00H FFFFF828H Processor clock control register PCC R/W 03H FFFFF840H Correction address register 0 CORAD0 R/W FFFFF840H Correction address register 0L CORAD0L R/W 0000H FFFFF842H Correction address register 0H CORAD0H R/W 0000H Correction address register 1 CORAD1 R/W Correction address register 1L CORAD1L R/W FFFFF844H FFFFF844H FFFFF846H Note Correction address register 1H CORAD1H R/W Correction address register 2 CORAD2 R/W FFFFF848H Correction address register 2L CORAD2L R/W FFFFF84AH Correction address register 2H CORAD2H R/W Correction address register 3 CORAD3 R/W FFFFF84CH Correction address register 3L CORAD3L R/W FFFFF84EH FFFFF848H FFFFF84CH Correction address register 3H CORAD3H R/W FFFFF880H Correction control register CORCN R/W FFFFF8B0H Interval timer BRG mode register PRSM R/W FFFFF8B1H Interval timer BRG compare register PRSCM R/W FFFFFA00H Asynchronous serial interface mode register 0 ASIM0 R/W FFFFFA02H Receive buffer register 0 RXB0 FFFFFA03H Asynchronous serial interface status register 0 FFFFFA04H Transmit buffer register 0 Asynchronous serial interface transmission status ASIF0 R Clock selection register 0 CKSR0 R/W FFFFFA07H Baud rate generator control register 0 BRGC0 R/W FFFFFA10H Asynchronous serial interface mode register 1 ASIM1 R/W FFFFFA12H Receive buffer register 1 RXB1 FFFFFA13H Asynchronous serial interface status register 1 FFFFFA14H Transmit buffer register 1 Asynchronous serial interface transmission status ASIF1 R FFFFFA05H 0000H 00000000H 0000H 0000H 00000000H 0000H 00000000H 00000000H 0000H 0000H 00H 00H 00H 01H R FFH ASIS0 R 00H TXB0 R/W FFH 00H 00H register 0 FFFFFA06H FFFFFA15H FFH 01H R FFH ASIS1 R 00H TXB1 R/W FFH 00H register 1 FFFFFA16H Clock selection register 1 CKSR1 R/W 00H FFFFFA17H Baud rate generator control register 1 BRGC1 R/W FFH 00H FFFFFB00H TIP00 noise elimination control register Note R/W Note P0NFC FFFFFB04H TIP01 noise elimination control register P1NFC R/W 00H FFFFFC00H External interrupt falling edge specification register 0 INTF0 R/W 00H FFFFFC13H External interrupt falling edge specification register 9H INTF9H R/W 00H FFFFFC20H External interrupt rising edge specification register 0 INTR0 R/W 00H FFFFFC33H External interrupt rising edge specification register 9H INTR9H R/W 00H Note Only in the PD703211, 703211Y, 70F3211H, 70F3211HY User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 75 CHAPTER 3 CPU FUNCTIONS (6/8) Address Function Register Name Symbol R/W Operable Bit Unit After Reset 1 8 16 FFFFFC40H Pull-up resistor option register 0 PU0 R/W 00H FFFFFC46H Pull-up resistor option register 3 PU3 R/W 00H FFFFFC48H Pull-up resistor option register 4 PU4 R/W 00H FFFFFC4AH Pull-up resistor option register 5 PU5 R/W FFFFFC52H Pull-up resistor option register 9 PU9 R/W Pull-up resistor option register 9L PU9L R/W 00H FFFFFC52H 00H 0000H Pull-up resistor option register 9H PU9H R/W 00H FFFFFC67H Port 3 function register H PF3H R/W 00H FFFFFC68H Port 4 function register PF4 R/W 00H FFFFFC6AH Port 5 function register PF5 R/W 00H FFFFFC53H FFFFFC73H Port 9 function register H PF9H R/W 00H FFFFFD00H Clocked serial interface mode register 00 CSIM00 R/W 00H FFFFFD01H Clocked serial interface clock selection register 0 CSIC0 R/W 00H FFFFFD02H Clocked serial interface receive buffer register 0 SIRB0 R Clocked serial interface receive buffer register 0L SIRB0L R Clocked serial interface transmit buffer register 0 SOTB0 R/W Clocked serial interface transmit buffer register 0L SOTB0L R/W Clocked serial interface read-only receive buffer register 0 SIRBE0 R Clocked serial interface read-only receive buffer register 0L SIRBE0L R Clocked serial interface first-stage transmit buffer register 0 SOTBF0 R/W FFFFFD02H FFFFFD04H FFFFFD04H FFFFFD06H FFFFFD06H FFFFFD08H FFFFFD08H FFFFFD0AH Clocked serial interface first-stage transmit buffer register 0L SOTBF0L R/W Serial I/O shift register 0 SIO00 R/W 0000H 00H 0000H 00H 0000H 00H 0000H 00H 00H Serial I/O shift register 0L SIO00L R/W 0000H FFFFFD10H Clocked serial interface mode register 01 CSIM01 R/W 00H FFFFFD11H Clocked serial interface clock selection register 1 CSIC1 R/W 00H FFFFFD12H Clocked serial interface receive buffer register 1 SIRB1 R Clocked serial interface receive buffer register 1L SIRB1L R Clocked serial interface transmit buffer register 1 SOTB1 R/W Clocked serial interface transmit buffer register 1L SOTB1L R/W Clocked serial interface read-only receive buffer register 1 SIRBE1 R Clocked serial interface read-only receive buffer register 1L SIRBE1L R Clocked serial interface first-stage transmit buffer register 1 SOTBF1 R/W FFFFFD0AH FFFFFD12H FFFFFD14H FFFFFD14H FFFFFD16H FFFFFD16H FFFFFD18H FFFFFD18H Clocked serial interface first-stage transmit buffer register 1L SOTBF1L R/W Serial I/O shift register 1 SIO01 R/W Serial I/O shift register 1L SIO1L R/W FFFFFD40H Serial operation mode specification register 0 CSIMA0 R/W FFFFFD41H Serial status register 0 CSIS0 R/W FFFFFD42H Serial trigger register 0 CSIT0 R/W FFFFFD43H Division value selection register 0 BRGCA0 FFFFFD44H Automatic data transfer address point specification register 0 ADTP0 FFFFFD45H Automatic data transfer interval specification register 0 ADTI0 R/W FFFFFD46H Serial I/O shift register A0 SIOA0 R/W FFFFFD1AH FFFFFD1AH 76 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 0000H 00H 0000H 00H 0000H 00H 0000H 00H 00H 0000H 00H 00H 00H R/W 03H R/W 00H 00H 00H CHAPTER 3 CPU FUNCTIONS (7/8) Address Function Register Name Symbol R/W Operable Bit Unit After Reset 1 FFFFFD47H Automatic data transfer address count register 0 ADTC0 FFFFFD80H IIC shift register 0 IIC0 FFFFFD82H IIC control register 0 IICC0 Note 00H 00H 00H 00H R/W 00H R/W 00H R/W Note R/W Note R/W FFFFFD83H Slave address register 0 SVA0 FFFFFD84H IIC clock selection register 0 IICCL0 FFFFFD85H IIC function expansion register 0 IICX0 Note Note Note R 00H Note R/W 00H FFFFFD86H IIC status register 0 IICS0 FFFFFD8AH IIC flag register 0 IICF0 FFFFFE00H CSIA0 buffer RAM 0 CSIA0B0 R/W CSIA0 buffer RAM 0L CSIA0B0L R/W FFFFFE00H FFFFFE01H FFFFFE02H FFFFFE02H FFFFFE03H FFFFFE04H FFFFFE04H FFFFFE05H FFFFFE06H FFFFFE06H FFFFFE07H FFFFFE08H FFFFFE08H FFFFFE09H 16 R 8 CSIA0 buffer RAM 0H CSIA0B0H R/W CSIA0 buffer RAM 1 CSIA0B1 R/W CSIA0 buffer RAM 1L CSIA0B1L R/W Undefined Undefined CSIA0 buffer RAM 1H CSIA0B1H R/W CSIA0 buffer RAM 2 CSIA0B2 R/W CSIA0 buffer RAM 2L CSIA0B2L R/W CSIA0 buffer RAM 2H CSIA0B2H R/W CSIA0B3 R/W CSIA0 buffer RAM 3L CSIA0B3L R/W Undefined CSIA0 buffer RAM 3H CSIA0B3H R/W CSIA0B4 R/W CSIA0 buffer RAM 4L CSIA0B4L R/W Undefined Undefined Undefined CSIA0 buffer RAM 4 Undefined Undefined CSIA0 buffer RAM 3 Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined CSIA0 buffer RAM 4H CSIA0B4H R/W CSIA0 buffer RAM 5 CSIA0B5 R/W FFFFFE0AH CSIA0 buffer RAM 5L CSIA0B5L R/W Undefined FFFFFE0BH CSIA0 buffer RAM 5H CSIA0B5H R/W Undefined FFFFFE0AH FFFFFE0CH Undefined Undefined CSIA0 buffer RAM 6 CSIA0B6 R/W FFFFFE0CH CSIA0 buffer RAM 6L CSIA0B6L R/W Undefined FFFFFE0DH CSIA0 buffer RAM 6H CSIA0B6H R/W Undefined FFFFFE0EH Undefined CSIA0 buffer RAM 7 CSIA0B7 R/W FFFFFE0EH CSIA0 buffer RAM 7L CSIA0B7L R/W Undefined FFFFFE0FH CSIA0 buffer RAM 7H CSIA0B7H R/W Undefined FFFFFE10H Undefined CSIA0 buffer RAM 8 CSIA0B8 R/W FFFFFE10H CSIA0 buffer RAM 8L CSIA0B8L R/W Undefined FFFFFE11H CSIA0 buffer RAM 8H CSIA0B8H R/W Undefined FFFFFE12H Undefined CSIA0 buffer RAM 9 CSIA0B9 R/W FFFFFE12H CSIA0 buffer RAM 9L CSIA0B9L R/W Undefined FFFFFE13H CSIA0 buffer RAM 9H CSIA0B9H R/W Undefined FFFFFE14H Undefined CSIA0 buffer RAM A CSIA0BA R/W FFFFFE14H CSIA0 buffer RAM AL CSIA0BAL R/W Undefined Undefined FFFFFE15H CSIA0 buffer RAM AH CSIA0BAH R/W Undefined 2 Note Only in products with an I C bus (Y products) User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 77 CHAPTER 3 CPU FUNCTIONS (8/8) Address Function Register Name Symbol R/W Operable Bit Unit After Reset 1 FFFFFE16H 8 16 CSIA0 buffer RAM B CSIA0BB R/W FFFFFE16H CSIA0 buffer RAM BL CSIA0BBL R/W Undefined FFFFFE17H CSIA0 buffer RAM BH CSIA0BBH R/W Undefined CSIA0 buffer RAM C CSIA0BC R/W FFFFFE18H CSIA0 buffer RAM CL CSIA0BCL R/W Undefined FFFFFE19H CSIA0 buffer RAM CH CSIA0BCH R/W Undefined CSIA0 buffer RAM D CSIA0BD R/W FFFFFE1AH CSIA0 buffer RAM DL CSIA0BDL R/W Undefined FFFFFE1BH CSIA0 buffer RAM DH CSIA0BDH R/W Undefined CSIA0 buffer RAM E CSIA0BE R/W FFFFFE1CH CSIA0 buffer RAM EL CSIA0BEL R/W Undefined FFFFFE1DH CSIA0 buffer RAM EH CSIA0BEH R/W Undefined CSIA0 buffer RAM F CSIA0BF R/W FFFFFE1EH CSIA0 buffer RAM FL CSIA0BFL R/W Undefined FFFFFE1FH CSIA0 buffer RAM FH CSIA0BFH R/W Undefined FFFFFE18H FFFFFE1AH FFFFFE1CH FFFFFE1EH 78 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined CHAPTER 3 CPU FUNCTIONS 3.4.7 Special registers Special registers are registers that prevent invalid data from being written when an inadvertent program loop occurs. The V850ES/KF1 has the following three special registers. * Power save control register (PSC) * Processor clock control register (PCC) * Watchdog timer mode register (WDTM1) Moreover, there is also the PRCMD register, which is a protection register for write operations to the special registers that prevents the application system from unexpectedly stopping due to an inadvertent program loop. Write access to the special registers is performed with a special sequence and illegal store operations are notified to the SYS register. (1) Setting data to special registers Setting data to a special registers is done in the following sequence. <1> Prepare the data to be set to the special register in a general-purpose register. <2> Write the data prepared in step <1> to the PRCMD register. <3> Write the setting data to the special register (using following instructions). * Store instruction (ST/SST instruction) * Bit manipulation instruction (SET1/CLR1/NOT1 instruction) <4> to <8> Insert NOP instructions (5 instructions)Note. [Description Example] When using PSC register (standby mode setting) ST.B r11,PSMR[r0] ; PSMR register setting (IDLE, STOP mode setting) <1> MOV 0x02,r10 <2> ST.B r10,PRCMD[r0] ; PRCMD register write <3> ST.B r10,PSC[r0] ; PSC register setting <4> NOPNote ; Dummy instruction Note <5> NOP ; Dummy instruction <6> NOPNote ; Dummy instruction Note <7> NOP ; Dummy instruction <8> NOPNote ; Dummy instruction (next instruction) No special sequence is required to read special registers. Note When switching to the IDLE mode or the STOP mode (PSC.STP bit = 1), 5 NOP instructions must be inserted immediately after switching is performed. Cautions 1. Interrupts are not acknowledged for the store instruction for the PRCMD register. This is because continuous execution of store instructions by the program in steps <2> and <3> above is assumed. If another instruction is placed between step <2> and <3>, the above sequence may not be realized when an interrupt is acknowledged for that instruction, which may cause malfunction. 2. The data written to the PRCMD register is dummy data, but use the same register as the general-purpose register used for setting data to the special register (step <3>) when writing to the PRCMD register (step <2>). The same applies to when using a generalpurpose register for addressing. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 79 CHAPTER 3 CPU FUNCTIONS (2) Command register (PRCMD) The PRCMD register is an 8-bit register used to prevent data from being written to registers that may have a large influence on the system, possibly causing the application system to unexpectedly stop, when an inadvertent program loop occurs. Only the first write operation to the special register following the execution of a previously executed write operation to the PRCMD register, is valid. As a result, register values can be overwritten only using a preset sequence, preventing invalid write operations. This register can only be written in 8-bit units (if it is read, an undefined value is returned). After reset: Undefined PRCMD W Address: FFFFF1FCH 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 REG7 REG6 REG5 REG4 REG3 REG2 REG1 REG0 (3) System status register (SYS) This register is allocated with status flags showing the operating state of the entire system. This register can be read or written in 8-bit or 1-bit units. After reset: 00H R/W Address: FFFFF802H < > SYS 0 PRERR 80 0 0 0 0 0 Detection of protection error 0 Protection error has not occurred 1 Protection error has occurred User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 0 PRERR CHAPTER 3 CPU FUNCTIONS The operation conditions of the PRERR flag are described below. (a) Set conditions (PRERR = 1) (i) When a write operation to the special register takes place without write operation being performed to the PRCMD register (when step <3> is performed without performing step <2> as described in 3.4.7 (1) Setting data to special registers). (ii) When a write operation (including bit manipulation instruction) to an on-chip peripheral I/O register other than a special register is performed following write to the PRCMD register (when <3> in 3.4.7 (1) Setting data to special registers is not a special register). Remark Regarding the special registers other than the WDTM register (PCC and PSC registers), even if on-chip peripheral I/O register read (except bit manipulation instruction) (internal RAM access, etc.) is performed in between write to the PRCMD register and write to a special register, the PRERR flag is not set and setting data can be written to the special register. (b) Clear conditions (PRERR = 0) (i) When 0 is written to the PRERR flag (ii) When system reset is performed Cautions 1. If 0 is written to the PRERR bit of the SYS register that is not a special register immediately following write to the PRCMD register, the PRERR bit becomes 0 (write priority). 2. If data is written to the PRCMD register that is not a special register immediately following write to the PRCMD register, the PRERR bit becomes 1. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 81 CHAPTER 3 CPU FUNCTIONS 3.4.8 Cautions (1) Waits on register access Be sure to set the following register before using the V850ES/KF1. * System wait control register (VSWC) After setting the VSWC register, set the other registers as required. When using an external bus, set the VSWC register and then set the various pins to the control mode by setting the port-related registers. (a) System wait control register (VSWC) The VSWC register controls the bus access wait time for the on-chip peripheral I/O registers. Access to the on-chip peripheral I/O register lasts 3 clocks (during no wait), but in the V850ES/KF1, waits are required according to the internal system clock frequency. Set the values shown below to the VSWC register according to the internal system clock frequency that is used. This register can be read or written in 8-bit units (Address: FFFFF06EH, After reset: 77H). <R> Operation Conditions Internal System Clock VSWC Register Setting Number of Waits 32 kHz fCLK < 16.6 MHz 00H 0 (no waits) 16.6 MHz fCLK 20 MHz 01H 1 4.0 V REGC = VDD < 4.5 V 32 kHz fCLK 16 MHz 00H 0 (no waits) REGC = 10 F, 32 kHz fCLK < 8.3 MHz 00H 0 (no waits) 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 8.3 MHz fCLK 16 MHz 01H 1 2.7 V REGC = VDD < 4.0 V 32 kHz fCLK < 8.3 MHz 00H 0 (no waits) 8.3 MHz fCLK 10 MHz 01H 1 Frequency (fCLK) 4.5 V REGC = VDD 5.5 V (b) Access to special on-chip peripheral I/O register This product has two types of internal system buses. One type is for the CPU bus and the other is for the peripheral bus to interface with low-speed peripheral hardware. Since the CPU bus clock and peripheral bus clock are asynchronous, if a conflict occurs during access between the CPU and peripheral hardware, illegal data may be passed unexpectedly. Therefore, when accessing peripheral hardware that may cause a conflict, the number of access cycles is changed so that the data is received/passed correctly in the CPU. As a result, the CPU does not shift to the next instruction processing and enters the wait status. When this wait status occurs, the number of execution clocks of the instruction is increased by the number of wait clocks. Note this with caution when performing real-time processing. When accessing a special on-chip peripheral I/O register, additional waits may be required further to the waits set by the VSWC register. The access conditions at that time and the method to calculate the number of waits to be inserted (number of CPU clocks) are shown below. Number of waits to be inserted = (2 + m) x k (clocks) Number of accesses to specific on-chip peripheral I/O register = 3 + m + (2 + m) x k (clocks) 82 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 3 CPU FUNCTIONS Peripheral Function Watchdog timer 1 (WDT1) Register Name WDTM1 Access Write k 1 to 5 Note 1 <Calculation of number of waits > k = {(1/fX) x 2/((2 + m)/fCPU)} + 1 fX: Main clock oscillation frequency Watchdog timer 2 (WDT2) WDTM2 Write 3 (fixed) 16-bit timer/event counter P0 TP0CCR0, TP0CCR1, Read 1 (TMP0) Note 2 TP0CNT Note 1 <Calculation of number of waits > k = {(1/fXX)/((2 + m)/fCPU)} + 1 TP0CCR0, TP0CCR1 Write 0 to 2 Note 1 <Calculation of number of waits > k = {(1/fXX) x 5/((2 + m)/fCPU)} A wait occurs when performing continuous write to same register 16-bit timer/event counters 00, 01 TMC00, TMC01 Read-modify-write (TM00, TM01) Clocked serial interface 0 with 1 (fixed) A wait occurs during write CSIA0B0 to CSIA0BF Write 0 to 18 (when performing continuous write via write automatic transmit/receive function instruction) (CSIA0) Note 1 <Calculation of number of waits > k = {(1/fSCKA) x 5 - (4 + m)/fCPU)}/{((2 + m)/fCPU)} However, 1 wait if fCPU = fXX if the CSISn.CKSAn1 and CSISn.CKSAn0 bits are 00. fSCKA: CSIA selection clock frequency CSIA0B0 to CSIA0BF Write 0 to 20 (when conflict occurs between write instruction and write via receive operation) Note 1 <Calculation of number of waits > k = {((1/fSCKA) x 5)/((2 + m)/fCPU)} fSCKA: CSIA selection clock frequency 2 I C0 Note 3 IICS0 Read 1 (fixed) ASIS0, ASIS1 Read 1 (fixed) Real-time output functions 0 and 1 RTBL0 Write (when RTPC0.RTPOE0 1 (RTO0, RTO1) RTBH0 bit = 0) A/D converter ADM, ADS, PFM, PFT Write 1 to 5 (1 or 2) ADCR, ADCRH Read 1 to 5 (1 or 2) Asynchronous serial interfaces 0, 1 (UART0, UART1) <R> <R> Note 4 Note 4 Note 1 <Calculation of number of waits {(1/fAD) x 2/[(2 + m)/fCPU]} + 1 > Note 5 fAD: A/D selection clock frequency User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 83 CHAPTER 3 CPU FUNCTIONS Notes 1. In the calculation of number of waits, the fractional part of its result must be multiplied by (1/fCPU) and rounded down if (1/fCPU)/(2 + m) or lower, and rounded up if (1/fCPU)/(2 + m) is exceeded. 2. PD703211, 703211Y, 70F3211H, and 70F3211HY only 3. I2C0 is available only in products with an I2C bus (Y products). 4. Values in parentheses are available only in the PD703211, 703211Y, 70F3210H, 70F3210HY, 70F3211H, and 70F3211HY 5. In the PD703211, 703211Y, 70F3210H, 70F3210HY, 70F3211H, and 70F3211HY, the calculation is as shown below. {(1/fXX) x 2/[(2 + m)/fCPU]} + 1 Cautions 1. If fetched from the internal ROM or internal RAM, the number of waits is as shown above. If fetched from the external memory, the number of waits may be decreased below these. The effect of the external memory access cycles varies depending on the wait settings and the like. However, the number of waits shown above is the maximum value, so no higher value is generated. 2. When the CPU operates on the subclock and no clock is input to the X1 pin, do not access a register in which a wait occurs. If a wait occurs, it can only be released by a reset. Remarks 1. In the calculation for the number of waits: fCPU: CPU clock frequency fXX: Main clock frequency m: Set value of bits 2 to 0 of the VSWC register When the VSWC register = 00H: m = 0 When the VSWC register = 01H: m = 1 2. n = 0, 1 84 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 3 CPU FUNCTIONS (2) Restriction on conflict between sld instruction and interrupt request (a) Description If a conflict occurs between the decode operation of an instruction in <2> immediately before the sld instruction following an instruction in <1> and an interrupt request before the instruction in <1> is complete, the execution result of the instruction in <1> may not be stored in a register. Instruction <1> * ld instruction: ld.b, ld.h, ld.w, ld.bu, ld.hu * sld instruction: sld.b, sld.h, sld.w, sld.bu, sld.hu * Multiplication instruction: mul, mulh, mulhi, mulu Instruction <2> mov reg1, reg2 not reg1, reg2 satsubr reg1, reg2 satsub reg1, reg2 satadd reg1, reg2 satadd imm5, reg2 or reg1, reg2 xor reg1, reg2 and reg1, reg2 tst reg1, reg2 subr reg1, reg2 sub reg1, reg2 add reg1, reg2 add imm5, reg2 cmp reg1, reg2 cmp imm5, reg2 mulh reg1, reg2 shr imm5, reg2 sar imm5, reg2 shl imm5, reg2 <Example> <i> ld.w [r11], r10 * * * If the decode operation of the mov instruction <ii> immediately before the sld instruction <iii> and an interrupt request conflict before execution of the ld instruction <i> is complete, the execution result of instruction <i> may not be stored in a register. <ii> mov r10, r28 <iii> sld.w 0x28, r10 (b) Countermeasure <R> <1> When compiler (CA850) is used Use CA850 Ver. 2.61 or later because generation of the corresponding instruction sequence can be automatically suppressed. <2> Countermeasure by assembler When executing the sld instruction immediately after instruction <ii>, avoid the above operation using either of the following methods. * Insert a nop instruction immediately before the sld instruction. * Do not use the same register as the sld instruction destination register in the above instruction <ii> executed immediately before the sld instruction. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 85 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.1 Features { Input-only ports: 8 pins { I/O ports: 59 pins * Fixed to N-ch open-drain output: 2 * Switchable to N-ch open-drain output: 6 { Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units 4.2 Basic Port Configuration The V850ES/KF1 incorporates a total of 67 I/O port pins consisting of ports 0, 3 to 5, 7, 9, CM, CS, CT, and DL (including 8 input-only port pins). The port configuration is shown below. P90 P00 Port 0 P91 P06 P96 P30 Port 3 P99 P35 Port 9 P913 P38 P915 P39 PCM0 P40 Port CM Port 4 PCM3 P42 PCS0 P50 PCS1 Port 5 P55 PCT0 P70 PCT1 Port 7 PCT4 P77 Port CS Port CT PCT6 PDL0 Port DL PDL15 Table 4-1. Pin I/O Buffer Power Supplies Power Supply Corresponding Pins AVREF0 Port 7 EVDD RESET, ports 0, 3 to 5, 9, CM, CS, CT, DL 86 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.3 Port Configuration Table 4-2. Port Configuration Item Control registers Configuration Port n register (Pn: n = 0, 3 to 5, 7, 9, CM, CS, CT, DL) Port n mode register (PMn: n = 0, 3 to 5, 9, CM, CS, CT, DL) Port n mode control register (PMCn: n = 0, 3 to 5, 9, CM, CS, CT, DL) Port n function control register (PFCn: n = 3, 5, 9) Port 3 function control expansion register (PFCE3) Port n function register (PFn: n = 3 to 5, 9) Pull-up resistor option register (PUn: n = 0, 3 to 5, 9) Ports Input only: 8 Pull-up resistors Software control: 31 I/O: 59 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 87 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS (1) Port n register (Pn) Data I/O with external devices is performed by writing to and reading from the Pn register. The Pn register is configured of a port latch that retains the output data and a circuit that reads the pin status. Each bit of the Pn register corresponds to one pin of port n and can be read or written in 1-bit units. After reset: 00HNote (output latch) Pn R/W 7 6 5 7 3 2 1 0 Pn7 Pn6 Pn5 Pn4 Pn3 Pn2 Pn1 Pn0 Pnm Control of output data (in output mode) 0 0 is output 1 1 is output Note Input-only port pins are undefined. Writing to and reading from the Pn register are executed as follows depending on the setting of each register. <R> Table 4-3. Reading to/Writing from Pn Register Setting of PMCn Register Setting of PMn Register Port mode Output mode (PMCnm bit = 0) (PMnm bit = 0) Writing to Pn Register Write to the output latch Note . The contents of the output latch are output Reading from Pn Register The value of the output latch is read. from the pin. Input mode (PMnm bit = 1) Alternate-function mode Output mode (PMCnm bit = 1) (PMnm bit = 0) Write to the output latch Note . The pin status is read. The status of the pin is not affected. Write to the output latch Note . The status of the pin is not affected. * When alternate function is output The pin operates as an alternate-function The output status of the pin. alternate function is read. * When alternate function is input The output latch value is read. Input mode (PMnm bit = 1) Write to the output latch Note . The pin status is read. The status of the pin is not affected. The pin operates as an alternate-function pin. Note The value written to the output latch is retained until a new value is written to the output latch. 88 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS (2) Port n mode register (PMn) PMn specifies the input mode/output mode of the port. Each bit of the PMn register corresponds to one pin of port n and can be specified in 1-bit units. After reset: FFH PMn PMn7 R/W PMn6 PMn5 PMn4 PMnm PMn3 PMn2 PMn1 PMn0 Control of I/O mode 0 Output mode 1 Input mode (3) Port n mode control register (PMCn) PMCn specifies the port mode/alternate function. Each bit of the PMCn register corresponds to one pin of port n and can be specified in 1-bit units. After reset: 00H PMCn PMCn7 R/W PMCn6 PMCn5 PMCnm PMCn4 PMCn3 PMCn2 PMCn1 PMCn0 Specification of operation mode 0 Port mode 1 Alternate function mode (4) Port n function control register (PFCn) PFCn is a register that specifies the alternate function to be used when one pin has two or more alternate functions. Each bit of the PFCn register corresponds to one pin of port n and can be specified in 1-bit units. After reset: 00H PFCn PFCn7 R/W PFCn6 PFCn5 PFCnm PFCn4 PFCn3 PFCn2 PFCn1 PFCn0 Specification of alternate function 0 Alternate function 1 1 Alternate function 2 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 89 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS (5) Port n function control expansion register (PFCEn) PFCEn is a register that specifies the alternate function to be used when one pin has three or more alternate functions. Each bit of the PFCEn register corresponds to one pin of port n and can be specified in 1-bit units. After reset: 00H PFCEn PFCn R/W PFCEn7 PFCEn6 PFCEn5 PFCEn4 PFCEn3 PFCEn2 PFCEn1 PFCEn0 PFCn7 PFCn6 PFCn5 PFCn3 PFCn1 PFCn0 PFCEnm PFCnm 0 0 Alternate function 1 0 1 Alternate function 2 1 0 Alternate function 3 1 1 Alternate function 4 PFCn4 PFCn2 Specification of alternate function (6) Port n function register (PFn) PFn is a register that specifies normal output/N-ch open-drain output. Each bit of the PFn register corresponds to one pin of port n and can be specified in 1-bit units. After reset: 00H PFn PFn7 PFnmNote R/W PFn6 PFn5 PFn4 PFn3 PFn2 PFn1 PFn0 Control of normal output/N-ch open-drain output 0 Normal output (CMOS output) 1 N-ch open-drain output Note The PFnm bit is valid only when the PMn.PMnm bit is 0 (output mode) regardless of the setting of the PMCn register. When the PMnm bit is 1 (input mode), the set value in the PFn register is invalid. Example <1> When the value of the PFn register is valid PFnm bit = 1 ... N-ch open-drain output is specified. PMnm bit = 0 ... Output mode is specified. PMCnm bit = 0 or 1 <2> When the value of the PFn register is invalid PFnm bit = 0 ... N-ch open-drain output is specified. PMnm bit = 1 ... Input mode is specified. PMCnm bit = 0 or 1 90 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS (7) Pull-up resistor option register (PUn) PUn is a register that specifies the connection of an on-chip pull-up resistor. Each bit of the PUn register corresponds to one pin of port n and can be specified in 1-bit units. After reset: 00H PUn PUn7 R/W PUn6 PUn5 PUnm PUn4 PUn3 PUn2 PUn1 PUn0 Control of on-chip pull-up resistor connection 0 Not connected 1 Connected User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 91 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS (8) Port settings Set the ports as follows. Figure 4-1. Register Settings and Pin Functions Port mode Output mode "0" Input mode "1" PMn register Alternate function (when two alternate functions are available) "0" Alternate function 1 "0" PFCn register Alternate function 2 PMCn register "1" Alternate function (when three or more alternate functions are available) "1" Alternate function 1 (a) Alternate function 2 (b) PFCn register (c) PFCEn register Alternate function 3 (d) Alternate function 4 Remark (a) (b) (c) (d) PFCEnm PFCnm 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Switch to the alternate function using the following procedure. <1> Set the PFCn and PFCEn registers. <2> Set the PMCn register. <3> Set the INTRn or INTFn register (to specify an external interrupt pin). If the PMCn register is set first, an unintended function may be set while the PFCn and PFCEn registers are being set. 92 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.3.1 Port 0 Port 0 is a 7-bit I/O port for which I/O settings can be controlled in 1-bit units. Port 0 includes the following alternate functions. Table 4-4. Alternate-Function Pins of Port 0 Pin Name Pin No. Alternate Function I/O Output PULL Note Yes Remark Block Type - D-2 P00 3 TOH0 P01 4 TOH1 Output P02 5 NMI Input P03 6 INTP0 Input H-1 P04 7 INTP1 Input H-1 P05 17 INTP2 Input H-1 P06 18 INTP3 Input H-1 D-2 Analog noise elimination H-1 Note Software pull-up function Caution P02 to P06 have hysteresis characteristics when the alternate function is input, but not in the port mode. (1) Port 0 register (P0) After reset: 00H (output latch) P0 0 R/W P06 P05 P0n Address: FFFFF400H P04 P03 P02 P01 P00 Control of output data (in output mode) (n = 0 to 6) 0 0 is output 1 1 is output (2) Port 0 mode register (PM0) After reset: FFH PM0 1 R/W Address: FFFFF420H PM06 PM05 PM0n PM04 PM03 PM02 PM01 PM00 Control of I/O mode (n = 0 to 6) 0 Output mode 1 Input mode User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 93 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS (3) Port 0 mode control register (PMC0) After reset: 00H PMC0 0 R/W Address: FFFFF440H PMC06 PMC05 PMC06 PMC04 PMC03 PMC02 PMC01 PMC00 Specification of P06 pin operation mode 0 I/O port 1 INTP3 input PMC05 Specification of P05 pin operation mode 0 I/O port 1 INTP2 input PMC04 Specification of P04 pin operation mode 0 I/O port 1 INTP1 input PMC03 Specification of P03 pin operation mode 0 I/O port 1 INTP0 input PMC02 Specification of P02 pin operation mode 0 I/O port 1 NMI input PMC01 Specification of P01 pin operation mode 0 I/O port 1 TOH1 output PMC00 Specification of P00 pin operation mode 0 I/O port 1 TOH0 output (4) Pull-up resistor option register 0 (PU0) After reset: 00H PU0 0 PU0n 94 R/W Address: FFFFFC40H PU06 PU05 PU04 PU03 PU02 PU01 Control of on-chip pull-up resistor connection (n = 0 to 6) 0 Not connected 1 Connected User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD PU00 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.3.2 Port 3 Port 3 is an 8-bit I/O port for which I/O settings can be controlled in 1-bit units. Port 3 includes the following alternate functions. Table 4-5. Alternate-Function Pins of Port 3 Pin Name Pin No. Alternate Function I/O Output PULL Note 1 Remark Block Type - D-2 P30 22 TXD0 P31 23 RXD0 Input D-1-1 P32 24 ASCK0 Input D-1-2 P33 25 TI000/TO00/TIP00 TOP00 P34 26 P35 P38 P39 27 28 29 Note 3 / Note 2 G-7-1 Note 2 / D-1-2 I/O Note 3 G-7-2 I/O Note 4 I/O Note 4 I/O SDA0 E-6 I/O Note 2 TI010/TO01 SCL0 / Note 2 TI001/TIP01 TOP01 Note 2 Yes / Note 2 E-6 No Note 5 N-ch open-drain output K K Notes 1. Software pull-up function 2. Only in the PD703211, 703211Y, 70F3211H, 70F3211HY 3. Only in the PD703208, 703208Y, 703209, 703209Y, 703210, 703210Y, 70F3210, 70F3210Y, 70F3210H, 70F3210HY 4. Only in products with an I2C bus (Y products) 5. An on-chip pull-up resistor can be provided by a mask option (only in the mask ROM versions). Caution P31 to P35, P38, and P39 have hysteresis characteristics when the alternate function is input, but not in the port mode. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 95 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS (1) Port 3 register (P3) After reset: 00H (output latch) R/W Address: P3 FFFFF406H, P3L FFFFF406H, P3H FFFFF407H 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 P3 (P3HNote) 0 0 0 0 0 0 P39 P38 (P3L) 0 0 P35 P34 P33 P32 P31 P30 P3n Control of output data (in output mode) (n = 0 to 5, 8, 9) 0 0 is output 1 1 is output Note When reading from or writing to bits 8 to 15 of the P3 register in 8-bit or 1-bit units, specify these bits as bits 0 to 7 of the P3H register. Remark The P3 register can be read or written in 16-bit units. However, when the higher 8 bits and the lower 8 bits of the P3 register are used as the P3H register and as the P3L register, respectively, this register can be read or written in 8-bit or 1-bit units. (2) Port 3 mode register (PM3) After reset: FFFFH R/W Address: PM3 FFFFF426H, PM3L FFFFF426H, PM3H FFFFF427H 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 ) 1 1 1 1 1 1 PM39 PM38 (PM3L) 1 1 PM35 PM34 PM33 PM32 PM31 PM30 PM3 (PM3H Note PM3n Control of I/O mode (n = 0 to 5, 8, 9) 0 Output mode 1 Input mode Note When reading from or writing to bits 8 to 15 of the PM3 register in 8-bit or 1-bit units, specify these bits as bits 0 to 7 of the PM3H register. Remark The PM3 register can be read or written in 16-bit units. When the higher 8 bits and the lower 8 bits of the PM3 register are used as the PM3H register and as the PM3L register, respectively, this register can be read or written in 8-bit or 1-bit units. 96 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS (3) Port 3 mode control register (PMC3) After reset: 0000H R/W Address: PMC3 FFFFF446H, PMC3L FFFFF446H, PMC3H FFFFF447H 15 14 13 12 11 10 PMC3 (PMC3HNote 1) 0 0 0 0 0 0 (PMC3L) 0 0 PMC35 PMC34 PMC33 PMC32 PMC39 9 8 PMC39Note 2 PMC38Note 2 PMC31 PMC30 Specification of P39 pin operation mode 0 I/O port 1 SCL0 I/O PMC38 Specification of P38 pin operation mode 0 I/O port 1 SDA0 I/O PMC35 Specification of P35 pin operation mode 0 I/O port 1 TI010 input/TO01 output PMC34 Specification of P34 pin operation mode 0 I/O port 1 TI001 input/TIP01 inputNote 3/TOP01 outputNote 3 PMC33 Specification of P33 pin operation mode 0 I/O port 1 TI000 input/TO00 output/TIP00 inputNote 3/TOP00 outputNote 3 PMC32 Specification of P32 pin operation mode 0 I/O port 1 ASCK0 input PMC31 Specification of P31 pin operation mode 0 I/O port 1 RXD0 input PMC30 Specification of P30 pin operation mode 0 I/O port 1 TXD0 output Notes 1. When reading from or writing to bits 8 to 15 of the PMC3 register in 8-bit or 1-bit units, specify these bits as bits 0 to 7 of the PMC3H register. 2. Valid only in products with an I2C bus (Y products). In all other products, set this bit to 0. 3. Only in the PD703211, 703211Y, 70F3211H, 70F3211HY Remark The PMC3 register can be read or written in 16-bit units. When the higher 8 bits and the lower 8 bits of the PMC3 register are used as the PMC3H register and as the PMC3L register, respectively, this register can be read or written in 8-bit or 1-bit units. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 97 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS (4) Port 3 function register H (PF3H) After reset: 00H PF3H 0 R/W Address: FFFFFC67H 0 PF3n 0 0 0 0 PF39 PF38 Specification of normal port/alternate function (n = 8, 9) 0 When used as normal port (N-ch open-drain output) 1 When used as alternate-function (N-ch open-drain output) Caution When using P38 and P39 as N-ch open-drain-output alternate-function pins, set in the following sequence. Be sure to set the port latch to 1 before setting the pin to N-ch open-drain output. P3n bit = 1 PF3n bit = 1 PMC3n bit = 1 (5) Port 3 function control register (PFC3) (a) PD703208, 703208Y, 703209, 703209Y, 703210, 703210Y, 70F3210, 70F3210Y, 70F3210H, 70F3210HY After reset: 00H PFC3 0 R/W Address: FFFFF466H 0 PFC35 PFC35 0 PFC33 0 0 0 Specification of alternate-function pin of P35 pin 0 TI010 input 1 TO01 output PFC33 Specification of alternate-function pin of P33 pin 0 TI000 input 1 TO00 output Caution Always clear bits 0 to 2, 4, 6, and 7 of the PFC3 register to 0. (b) PD703211, 703211Y, 70F3211H, 70F3211HY After reset: 00H PFC3 0 R/W 0 Address: FFFFF466H PFC35 PFC34 PFC33 0 0 0 Caution Always clear bits 0 to 2, 6, and 7 of the PFC3 register to 0. Remark For details of specification of alternate-function pins, refer to 4.3.2 (8) Specifying alternate-function pins of port 3. 98 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS (6) Port 3 function control expansion register (PFCE3)Note Note Only in the PD703211, 703211Y, 70F3211H, 70F3211HY After reset: 00H PFCE3 R/W 0 Address: FFFFF706H 0 0 PFCE34 PFCE33 0 0 0 Remark For details of specification of alternate-function pins, refer to 4.3.2 (8) Specifying alternate-function pins of port 3. (7) Pull-up resistor option register 3 (PU3) After reset: 00H PU3 0 R/W Address: FFFFFC46H 0 PU3n PU35 PU34 PU33 PU32 PU31 PU30 Control of on-chip pull-up resistor connection (n = 0 to 5) 0 Not connected 1 Connected Caution An on-chip pull-up resistor can be provided for P38 and P39 by a mask option (only in the mask ROM versions). (8) Specifying alternate-function pins of port 3Note Note Only in the PD703211, 703211Y, 70F3211H, 70F3211HY PFC35 Specification of Alternate-Function Pin of P35 Pin 0 TI010 input 1 TO01 output PFCE34 PFC34 0 0 TI001 input Specification of Alternate-Function Pin of P34 Pin 0 1 Setting prohibited 1 0 TIP01 input 1 1 TOP01 output PFCE33 PFC33 Specification of Alternate-Function Pin of P33 Pin 0 0 TI000 input 0 1 TO00 output 1 0 TIP00 input 1 1 TOP00 output User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 99 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.3.3 Port 4 Port 4 is a 3-bit I/O port for which I/O settings can be controlled in 1-bit units. Port 4 includes the following alternate functions. Table 4-6. Alternate-Function Pins of Port 4 Pin Name Pin No. Alternate Function I/O Input PULL Note Remark Block Type - D-1-2 Yes P40 19 SI00 P41 20 SO00 Output N-ch open-drain output can F-1 P42 21 SCK00 I/O be selected. F-2 Note Software pull-up function Caution P40 and P42 have hysteresis characteristics when the alternate function is input, but not in the port mode. (1) Port 4 register (P4) After reset: 00H (output latch) P4 0 R/W 0 0 P4n Address: FFFFF408H 0 0 P42 P41 P40 Control of output data (in output mode) (n = 0 to 2) 0 0 is output 1 1 is output (2) Port 4 mode register (PM4) After reset: FFH PM4 1 R/W Address: FFFFF428H 1 1 PM4n 100 1 1 PM42 Control of I/O mode (n = 0 to 2) 0 Output mode 1 Input mode User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD PM41 PM40 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS (3) Port 4 mode control register (PMC4) After reset: 00H PMC4 R/W 0 Address: FFFFF448H 0 0 PMC42 0 0 PMC42 PMC41 PMC40 Specification of P42 pin operation mode 0 I/O port 1 SCK00 I/O PMC41 Specification of P41 pin operation mode 0 I/O port 1 SO00 output PMC40 Specification of P40 pin operation mode 0 I/O port 1 SI00 input (4) Port 4 function register (PF4) After reset: 00H PF4 0 R/W Address: FFFFFC68H 0 0 PF4n 0 0 PF42 PF41 0 Control of normal output/N-ch open-drain output 0 Normal output 1 N-ch open-drain output Caution When using P41 and P42 as N-ch open-drain-output alternate-function pins, set in the following sequence. Be sure to set the port latch to 1 before setting the pin to N-ch open-drain output. P4n bit = 1 PF4n bit = 1 PMC4n bit = 1 (5) Pull-up resistor option register 4 (PU4) After reset: 00H PU4 0 PU4n R/W Address: FFFFFC48H 0 0 0 0 PU42 PU41 PU40 Control of on-chip pull-up resistor connection (n = 0 to 2) 0 Not connected 1 Connected User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 101 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.3.4 Port 5 Port 5 is a 6-bit I/O port for which I/O settings can be controlled in 1-bit units. Port 5 includes the following alternate functions. Table 4-7. Alternate-Function Pins of Port 5 Pin Name P50 Pin No. Alternate Function 32 I/O TI011/RTP00/KR0 I/O PULL Note Remark Block Type - E-5 Yes P51 33 TI50/RTP01/KR1 I/O E-5 P52 34 TO50/RTP02/KR2 I/O E-4 P53 35 SIA0/RTP03/KR3 I/O E-5 P54 36 SOA0/RTP04/KR4 I/O N-ch open-drain output can G-1 I/O be selected. G-2 P55 37 SCKA0/RTP05/KR5 Note Software pull-up function (1) Port 5 register (P5) After reset: 00H (output latch) P5 0 R/W 0 P55 P5n Address: FFFFF40AH P54 P53 P52 P51 P50 Control of output data (in output mode) (n = 0 to 5) 0 0 is output 1 1 is output (2) Port 5 mode register (PM5) After reset: FFH PM5 1 R/W Address: FFFFF42AH 1 PM55 PM5n 102 PM54 PM53 PM52 Control of I/O mode (n = 0 to 5) 0 Output mode 1 Input mode User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD PM51 PM50 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS (3) Port 5 mode control register (PMC5) After reset: 00H PMC5 0 R/W 0 Address: FFFFF44AH PMC55 PMC55 PMC54 PMC53 PMC52 PMC51 PMC50 Specification of P55 pin operation mode 0 I/O port/KR5 input 1 SCKA0 I/O/RTP05 output PMC54 Specification of P54 pin operation mode 0 I/O port/KR4 input 1 SOA0 output/RTP04 output PMC53 Specification of P53 pin operation mode 0 I/O port/KR3 input 1 SIA0 input/RTP03 output PMC52 Specification of P52 pin operation mode 0 I/O port/KR2 input 1 TO50 output/RTP02 output PMC51 Specification of P51 pin operation mode 0 I/O port/KR1 input 1 TI50 input/RTP01 output PMC50 Specification of P50 pin operation mode 0 I/O port/KR0 input 1 TI011 input/RTP00 output (4) Port 5 function register 5 (PF5) After reset: 00H PF5 0 PF5n R/W 0 Address: FFFFFC6AH PF55 PF54 0 0 0 0 Control of normal output/N-ch open-drain output (n = 4, 5) 0 Normal output 1 N-ch open-drain output Cautions 1. Always set bits 0 to 3, 6, and 7 of the PF5 register to 0. 2. When using P54 and P55 as N-ch open-drain-output alternate-function pins, set in the following sequence. Be sure to set the port latch to 1 before setting the pin to N-ch open-drain output. P5n bit = 1 PF5n bit = 1 PMC5n bit = 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 103 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS (5) Port 5 function control register (PFC5) After reset: 00H PFC5 0 R/W Address: FFFFF46AH 0 PFC55 PFC55 PFC54 PFC53 PFC52 PFC51 PFC50 Specification of alternate-function pin of P55 pin 0 SCKA0 I/O 1 RTP05 output PFC54 Specification of alternate-function pin of P54 pin 0 SOA0 output 1 RTP04 output PFC53 Specification of alternate-function pin of P53 pin 0 SIA0 input 1 RTP03 output PFC52 Specification of alternate-function pin of P52 pin 0 TO50 output 1 RTP02 output PFC51 Specification of alternate-function pin of P51 pin 0 TI50 input 1 RTP01 output PFC50 Specification of alternate-function pin of P50 pin 0 TI011 input 1 RTP00 output (6) Pull-up resistor option register 5 (PU5) After reset: 00H PU5 0 PU5n 104 R/W Address: FFFFFC4AH 0 PU55 PU54 PU53 PU52 PU51 Control of on-chip pull-up resistor connection (n = 0 to 5) 0 Not connected 1 Connected User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD PU50 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.3.5 Port 7 Port 7 is an 8-bit input-only port for which all the pins are fixed to input. Port 7 includes the following alternate functions. Table 4-8. Alternate-Function Pins of Port 7 Pin Name Pin No. Alternate Function I/O PULL Note No Remark Block Type - A-1 P70 80 ANI0 Input P71 79 ANI1 Input A-1 P72 78 ANI2 Input A-1 P73 77 ANI3 Input A-1 P74 76 ANI4 Input A-1 P77 75 ANI5 Input A-1 P76 74 ANI6 Input A-1 P77 73 ANI7 Input A-1 Note Software pull-up function (1) Port 7 register (P7) After reset: Undefined P7 P77 R P76 Address: FFFFF40EH P75 P7n P74 P73 P72 P71 P70 Input data read (n = 0 to 7) 0 Input low level 1 Input high level User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 105 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.3.6 Port 9 Port 9 is a 9-bit I/O port for which I/O settings can be controlled in 1-bit units. Port 9 includes the following alternate functions. Table 4-9. Alternate-Function Pins of Port 9 Pin Name P90 Pin No. 38 Alternate Function TXD1/KR6 I/O I/O PULL Note Remark Block Type - E-9 Yes P91 39 RXD1/KR7 Input E-7 P96 40 TI51/TO51 I/O E-9 P97 41 SI01 Input E-8 P98 42 SO01 Output N-ch open-drain output can G-9 G-8 H-3 P99 43 SCK01 I/O be specified. P913 44 INTP4 Input Analog noise elimination P914 45 INTP5 Input H-3 P915 46 INTP6 Input H-3 Note Software pull-up function Caution P97, P99, and P913 to P915 have hysteresis characteristics when the alternate function is input, but not in the port mode. 106 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS (1) Port 9 register (P9) After reset: 00H (output latch) R/W Address: P9H FFFFF412H, P9L FFFFF412H, P9H FFFFF413H 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 ) P915 P914 P913 0 0 0 P99 P98 (P9L) P97 P96 0 0 0 0 P91 P90 Note P9 (P9H P9n Control of output data (in output mode) (n = 0, 1, 6 to 9, 13 to 15) 0 0 is output 1 1 is output Note When reading from or writing to bits 8 to 15 of the P9 register in 8-bit or 1-bit units, specify these bits as bits 0 to 7 of the P9H register. Remark The P9 register can be read or written in 16-bit units. However, when the higher 8 bits and the lower 8 bits of the P9 register are used as the P9H register and as the P9L register, respectively, these registers can be read or written in 8-bit or 1-bit units. (2) Port 9 mode register (PM9) After reset: FFFFH PM9 (PM9HNote) (PM9L) R/W Address: PM9 FFFFF432H, PM9L FFFFF432H, PM9H FFFFF433H 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 PM915 PM914 PM913 0 0 0 PM99 PM98 PM97 PM96 0 0 0 0 PM91 PM90 PM9n Control of I/O mode (n = 0, 1, 6 to 9, 13 to 5) 0 Output mode 1 Input mode Note When reading from or writing to bits 8 to 15 of the PM9 register in 8-bit or 1-bit units, specify these bits as bits 0 to 7 of the PM9H register. Remark The PM9 register can be read or written in 16-bit units. However, when the higher 8 bits and the lower 8 bits of the PM9 register are used as the PM9H register and as the PM9L register, respectively, this register can be read or written in 8-bit or 1-bit units. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 107 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS (3) Port 9 mode control register (PMC9) After reset: 0000H 15 PMC9 (PMC9HNote) (PMC9L) R/W Address: PMC9 FFFFF452H, PMC9L FFFFF452H, PMC9H FFFFF453H 12 11 10 9 8 PMC915 PMC914 PMC913 14 0 0 0 PMC99 PMC98 PMC97 0 0 0 PMC91 PMC90 PMC96 PMC915 13 0 Specification of P915 pin operation mode 0 I/O port 1 INTP6 input PMC914 Specification of P914 pin operation mode 0 I/O port 1 INTP5 input PMC913 Specification of P913 pin operation mode 0 I/O port 1 INTP4 input PMC99 Specification of P99 pin operation mode 0 I/O port 1 SCK01 I/O PMC98 Specification of P98 pin operation mode 0 I/O port 1 SO01 output PMC97 Specification of P97 pin operation mode 0 I/O port 1 SI01 input PMC96 Specification of P96 pin operation mode 0 I/O port/TI51 input 1 TO51 output PMC91 Specification of P91 pin operation mode 0 I/O port/KR7 input 1 RXD1 input PMC90 Specification of P90 pin operation mode 0 I/O port/KR6 input 1 TXD1 output Note When reading from or writing to bits 8 to 15 of the PMC9 register in 8-bit or 1-bit units, specify these bits as bits 0 to 7 of the PMC9H register. Remark The PMC9 register can be read or written in 16-bit units. However, when the higher 8 bits and the lower 8 bits of the PMC9 register are used as the PMC9H register and as the PMC9L register, respectively, these registers can be read or written in 8-bit or 1-bit units. 108 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS (4) Port 9 function register H (PF9H) After reset: 00H PF9H R/W 0 Address: FFFFFC73H 0 PF9n 0 0 0 0 PF99 PF98 Control of normal output/N-ch open-drain output (n = 8, 9) 0 Normal output 1 N-ch open-drain output Caution When using P98 and P99 as N-ch open-drain-output alternate-function pins, set in the following sequence. Be sure to set the port latch to 1 before setting the pin to N-ch open-drain output. P9n bit = 1 PFC9n bit = 0/1 PF9n bit = 1 PMC9n bit = 1 (5) Port 9 function control register (PFC9) Caution When port 9 is set to its alternate function by the PMC9.PMC9n bit with the PFC9n bit maintaining the initial value (0), output becomes undefined. Therefore, to specify port 9 to alternate function 2, set the PFC9n bit to 1 first and then set the PMC9n bit to 1 (n = 0, 1, 6 to 9, 13 to 15). User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 109 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS After reset: 0000H R/W Address: PFC9 FFFFF472H, PFC9L FFFFF472H, PFC9H FFFFF473H PFC9 (PFC9H Note ) (PFC9L) 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 PFC910 PFC910 PFC910 0 0 0 PFC99 PFC98 PFC97 PFC96 0 0 0 0 PFC91 PFC90 PFC915 1 Specification of alternate-function pin of P915 pin INTP6 input PFC914 1 Specification of alternate-function pin of P914 pin INTP5 input PFC913 1 Specification of alternate-function pin of P913 pin INTP4 input PFC99 1 Specification of alternate-function pin of P99 pin SCK01 I/O PFC98 1 Specification of alternate-function pin of P98 pin SO01 output PFC97 1 Specification of alternate-function pin of P97 pin SI01 input PFC96 1 Specification of alternate-function pin of P96 pin TO51 output PFC91 1 Specification of alternate-function pin of P91 pin RXD1 input PFC90 1 Specification of alternate-function pin of P90 pin TXD1 output Note When reading from or writing to bits 8 to 15 of the PFC9 register in 8-bit or 1-bit units, specify these bits as bits 0 to 7 of the PFC9H register. Remark The PFC9 register can be read or written in 16-bit units only. However, when the higher 8 bits and the lower 8 bits of the PFC9 register are used as the PFC9H register and as the PFC9L register, respectively, these registers can be read or written in 8-bit or 1-bit units. 110 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS (6) Pull-up resistor option register 9 (PU9) After reset: 0000H PU9 (PU9H Note ) (PU9L) R/W Address: PU9 FFFFFC52H, PU9L FFFFFC52H, PU9H FFFFFC53H 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 PU915 PU914 PU913 0 0 0 PU99 PU98 PU97 PU96 0 0 0 0 PU91 PU90 PU9n Control of on-chip pull-up resistor connection (n = 0, 1, 6 to 9, 13 to 15) 0 Not connected 1 Connected Note When reading from or writing to bits 8 to 15 of the PU9 register in 8-bit or 1-bit units, specify these bits as bits 0 to 7 of the PU9H register. Remark The PU9 register can be read or written in 16-bit units. However, when the higher 8 bits and the lower 8 bits of the PU9 register are used as the PU9H register and as the PU9L register, respectively, these registers can be read or written in 8-bit or 1-bit units. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 111 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.3.7 Port CM Port CM is a 4-bit I/O port for which I/O settings can be controlled in 1-bit units. Port CM includes the following alternate functions. Table 4-10. Alternate-Function Pins of Port CM Pin Name Pin No. Alternate Function I/O Input PULL Note Remark Block Type - C-1 PCM0 49 WAIT PCM1 50 CLKOUT Output C-2 PCM2 51 HLDAK Output C-2 PCM3 52 HLDRQ Input C-1 No Note Software pull-up function (1) Port CM register (PCM) After reset: 00H (output latch) PCM 0 R/W 0 0 PCMn Address: FFFFF00CH 0 PCM3 PCM2 PCM1 PCM0 Control of output data (in output mode) (n = 0 to 3) 0 0 is output 1 1 is output (2) Port CM mode register (PMCM) After reset: FFH PMCM 1 R/W Address: FFFFF02CH 1 1 PMCMn 112 1 PMCM3 PMCM2 Control of I/O mode (n = 0 to 3) 0 Output mode 1 Input mode User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD PMCM1 PMCM0 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS (3) Port CM mode control register (PMCCM) After reset: 00H PMCCM 0 R/W Address: FFFFF04CH 0 0 PMCCM3 0 PMCCM3 PMCCM2 PMCCM1 PMCCM0 Specification of PCM3 pin operation mode 0 I/O port 1 HLDRQ input PMCCM2 Specification of PCM2 pin operation mode 0 I/O port 1 HLDAK output PMCCM1 Specification of PCM1 pin operation mode 0 I/O port 1 CLKOUT output PMCCM0 Specification of PCM0 pin operation mode 0 I/O port 1 WAIT input User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 113 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.3.8 Port CS Port CS is a 2-bit I/O port for which I/O settings can be controlled in 1-bit units. Port CS includes the following alternate functions. Table 4-11. Alternate-Function Pins of Port CS Pin Name Pin No. Alternate Function I/O PCS0 47 CS0 Output PCS1 48 CS1 Output PULL Note No Remark Block Type - C-3 C-3 Note Software pull-up function (1) Port CS register (PCS) After reset: 00H (output latch) PCS 0 R/W 0 0 PCSn Address: FFFFF008H 0 0 0 PCS1 PCS0 Control of output data (in output mode) (n = 0, 1) 0 0 is output 1 1 is output (2) Port CS mode register (PMCS) After reset: FFH PMCS 1 R/W Address: FFFFF028H 1 1 PMCSn 1 1 1 PMCS1 PMCS0 Control of I/O mode (n = 0, 1) 0 Output mode 1 Input mode (3) Port CS mode control register (PMCCS) After reset: 00H PMCCS 0 R/W Address: FFFFF048H 0 0 PMCCSn 114 0 0 0 PMCCS1 PMCCS0 Specification of PCSn pin operation mode (n = 0, 1) 0 I/O port 1 CSn output User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.3.9 Port CT Port CT is a 4-bit I/O port for which I/O settings can be controlled in 1-bit units. Port CT includes the following alternate functions. Table 4-12. Alternate-Function Pins of Port CT Pin Name PCT0 Pin No. 53 Alternate Function I/O WR0 Output PULL Note No Remark Block Type - C-3 PCT1 54 WR1 Output C-3 PCT4 55 RD Output C-3 PCT6 56 ASTB Output C-3 Note Software pull-up function (1) Port CT register (PCT) After reset: 00H (output latch) PCT 0 R/W PCT6 PCTn 0 Address: FFFFF00AH PCT4 0 0 PCT1 PCT0 Control of output data (in output mode) (n = 0, 1, 4, 6) 0 0 is output 1 1 is output (2) Port CT mode register (PMCT) After reset: FFH PMCT 1 R/W Address: FFFFF02AH PMCT6 1 PMCTn PMCT4 1 1 PMCT1 PMCT0 Control of I/O mode (n = 0, 1, 4, 6) 0 Output mode 1 Input mode User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 115 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS (3) Port CT mode control register (PMCCT) After reset: 00H PMCCT 0 R/W Address: FFFFF04AH PMCCT6 PMCCT6 PMCCT4 0 0 PMCCT1 PMCCT0 Specification of PCT6 pin operation mode 0 I/O port 1 ASTB output PMCCT4 Specification of PCT4 pin operation mode 0 I/O port 1 RD output PMCCT1 Specification of PCT1 pin operation mode 0 I/O port 1 WR1 output PMCCT0 116 0 Specification of PCT0 pin operation mode 0 I/O port 1 WR0 output User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.3.10 Port DL Port DL is a 16-bit I/O port for which I/O settings can be controlled in 1-bit units. Port DL includes the following alternate functions. Table 4-13. Alternate-Function Pins of Port DL Pin Name Pin No. Alternate Function I/O PULL Note No Remark Block Type - C-4 PDL0 57 AD0 I/O PDL1 58 AD1 I/O C-4 PDL2 59 AD2 I/O C-4 PDL3 60 AD3 I/O C-4 PDL4 61 AD4 I/O C-4 PDL5 62 AD5 I/O C-4 PDL6 63 AD6 I/O C-4 PDL7 64 AD7 I/O C-4 PDL8 65 AD8 I/O C-4 PDL9 66 AD9 I/O C-4 PDL10 67 AD10 I/O C-4 PDL11 68 AD11 I/O C-4 PDL12 69 AD12 I/O C-4 PDL13 70 AD13 I/O C-4 PDL14 71 AD14 I/O C-4 PDL15 72 AD15 I/O C-4 Note Software pull-up function User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 117 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS (1) Port DL register (PDL) After reset: 00H (output latch) R/W Address: PDL FFFFF004H, PDLL FFFFF004H, PDLH FFFFF005H 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 ) PDL15 PDL14 PDL13 PDL12 PDL11 PDL10 PDL9 PDL8 (PDLL) PDL7 PDL6 PDL5 PDL4 PDL3 PDL2 PDL1 PDL0 PDL (PDLH Note PDLn Control of output data (in output mode) (n = 0 to 15) 0 0 is output 1 1 is output Note When reading from or writing to bits 8 to 15 of the PDL register in 8-bit or 1-bit units, specify these bits as bits 0 to 7 of the PDLH register. Remark The PDL register can be read or written in 16-bit units. However, when the higher 8 bits and the lower 8 bits of the PDL register are used as the PDLH register and as the PDLL register, respectively, these registers can be read or written in 8-bit or 1-bit units. (2) Port DL mode register (PMDL) After reset: FFFFH 15 PMDL (PMDLH Note ) (PMDLL) R/W Address: PMDL FFFFF024H, PMDLL FFFFF024H, PMDLH FFFFF025H 14 9 8 PMDL15 PMDL14 PMDL13 PMDL12 PMDL11 PMDL10 PMDL9 PMDL8 PMDL7 PMDL1 PMDL0 PMDL6 13 PMDL5 PMDLn 12 PMDL4 11 PMDL3 10 PMDL2 Control of I/O mode (n = 0 to 15) 0 Output mode 1 Input mode Note When reading from or writing to bits 8 to 15 of the PMDL register in 8-bit or 1-bit units, specify these bits as bits 0 to 7 of the PMDLH register. Remark The PMDL register can be read or written in 16-bit units. However, when the higher 8 bits and the lower 8 bits of the PMDL register are used as the PMDLH register and as the PMDLL register, respectively, these registers can be read or written in 8-bit or 1-bit units. 118 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS (3) Port DL mode control register (PMCDL) After reset: 0000H R/W Address: PMCDL FFFFF044H, PMCDLL FFFFF044H, PMCDLH FFFFF045H 15 Note PMCDL (PMCDLH 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 ) PMCDL15 PMCDL14 PMCDL13 PMCDL12 PMCDL11PMCDL10 PMCDL9 PMCDL8 (PMCDLL) PMCDL7 PMCDL6 PMCDL5 PMCDL4 PMCDL3 PMCDL2 PMCDL1 PMCDL0 PMCDLn Specification of PDLn pin operation mode (n = 0 to 15) 0 I/O port 1 ADn I/O (address/data bus I/O) Note When reading from or writing to bits 8 to 15 of the PMCDL register in 8-bit or 1-bit units, specify these bits as bits 0 to 7 of the PMCDLH register. Caution When specifying the port/alternate function for each bit, pay careful attention to the operation of the alternate functions. Remark The PMCDL register can be read or written in 16-bit units. However, when the higher 8 bits and the lower 8 bits of the PMCDL register are used as the PMCDLH register and as the PMCDLL register, respectively, these registers can be read or written in 8-bit or 1-bit units. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 119 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.4 Block Diagrams Internal bus Figure 4-2. Block Diagram of Type A-1 Pmn P-ch RD A/D input signal N-ch Figure 4-3. Block Diagram of Type C-1 WRPMC PMCmn WRPM Internal bus PMmn WRPORT Pmn Selector Selector Output latch (Pmn) Address RD 120 Input signal of alternate-function 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-4. Block Diagram of Type C-2 WRPMC PMCmn WRPM Selector WRPORT Output signal of alternate-function 1 Pmn Selector Output latch (Pmn) Selector Internal bus PMmn Address RD User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 121 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-5. Block Diagram of Type C-3 Output buffer off signal WRPMC PMCmn WRPM WRPORT Output signal of alternate-function 1 Selector Internal bus PMmn Selector Selector Output latch (Pmn) Pmn Address RD Remark 122 Output buffer off signal: Signal that is asserted in the IDLE or STOP mode, or when the bus is held. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-6. Block Diagram of Type C-4 WRPMC Output buffer off signal Output enable signal of alternate-function 1 PMCmn WRPM WRPORT Output signal of alternate-function 1 Selector Internal bus PMmn Pmn Selector Selector Output latch (Pmn) Address Input enable signal of alternate-function 1 RD Remark Input signal of alternate-function 1 Output buffer off signal: Signal that is asserted in the IDLE or STOP mode, or when the bus is held. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 123 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-7. Block Diagram of Type D-1-1 EVDD WRPU P-ch PUmn WRPMC PMCmn WRPM Internal bus PMmn WRPORT Pmn Selector Selector Output latch (Pmn) Address RD Input signal of alternate-function 1 Note There are no hysteresis characteristics in the port mode. 124 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD Note CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-8. Block Diagram of Type D-1-2 EVDD WRPU P-ch PUmn WRPMC PMCmn Internal bus WRPM PMmn WRPORT Pmn Selector Selector Output latch (Pmn) Note Address RD Input signal of alternate-function 1 Note There are no hysteresis characteristics in the port mode. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 125 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-9. Block Diagram of Type D-2 EVDD WRPU P-ch PUmn WRPMC PMCmn WRPM WRPORT Output signal of alternate-function 1 Selector Internal bus PMmn Selector Selector Output latch (Pmn) Address RD 126 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD Pmn CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-10. Block Diagram of Type E-4 EVDD WRPU P-ch PUmn WRPFC PFCmn WRPMC PMCmn Internal bus WRPM Selector WRPORT Output signal of alternate-function 2 Output signal of alternate-function 1 RD Address Pmn Selector Selector Output latch (Pmn) Selector PMmn Alternate-function input signal in port mode User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 127 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-11. Block Diagram of Type E-5 EVDD WRPU P-ch PUmn WRPFC PFCmn WRPMC PMCmn Internal bus WRPM PMmn Selector Output signal of WRPORT alternate-function 2 RD Selector Selector Output latch (Pmn) Address Input signal of alternate-function 1 Alternate-function input signal in port mode 128 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD Pmn CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-12. Block Diagram of Type E-6 EVDD WRPU P-ch PUmn WRPFC PFCmn WRPMC PMCmn Internal bus WRPM PMmn Output signal of alternate-function 2 Selector WRPORT Selector Selector Output latch (Pmn) Pmn Note Address RD Input signal of alternate-function 1 Note There are no hysteresis characteristics in the port mode. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 129 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-13. Block Diagram of Type E-7 EVDD WRPU P-ch PUmn WRPFC PFCmn WRPMC Internal bus PMCmn WRPM PMmn WRPORT Output latch (Pmn) Selector Selector Pmn RD Address Input signal of alternate-function 2 Alternate-function input signal in port mode 130 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-14. Block Diagram of Type E-8 EVDD WRPU P-ch PUmn WRPFC PFCmn WRPMC Internal bus PMCmn WRPM PMmn WRPORT Pmn Selector Selector Output latch (Pmn) Note RD Address Input signal of alternate-function 2 Note There are no hysteresis characteristics in the port mode. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 131 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-15. Block Diagram of Type E-9 EVDD WRPU P-ch PUmn WRPFC PFCmn WRPMC Internal bus PMCmn WRPM PMmn Selector Output signal of alternate-function 2 WRPORT RD Address 132 Selector Selector Output latch (Pmn) Alternate-function input signal in port mode User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD Pmn CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-16. Block Diagram of Type F-1 EVDD WRPU P-ch PUmn WRPF PFmn WRPMC WRPM PMmn Output signal of alternate-function 1 Selector WRPORT EVDD Output latch (Pmn) P-ch Pmn Selector N-ch Selector Internal bus PMCmn EVSS Address RD User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 133 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-17. Block Diagram of Type F-2 EVDD WRPU P-ch PUmn WRPF PFmn WRPMC Output enable signal of alternate-function 1 PMCmn WRPM Internal bus PMmn EVDD Output signal of alternate-function 1 Selector WRPORT Output latch (Pmn) P-ch Pmn Address RD Selector Selector N-ch Output enable signal of alternate-function 1 Input signal of alternate-function 1 Note There are no hysteresis characteristics in the port mode. 134 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD Note EVSS CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-18. Block Diagram of Type G-1 EVDD WRPU P-ch PUmn WRPF PFmn WRPFC PFCmn WRPMC WRPM PMmn WRPORT Selector Output signal of alternate-function 2 Output signal of alternate-function 1 Output latch (Pmn) Selector EVDD P-ch Pmn RD Selector N-ch Selector Internal bus PMCmn EVSS Address Alternate-function input signal in port mode User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 135 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-19. Block Diagram of Type G-2 EVDD WRPU P-ch PUmn WRPF PFmn WRPFC Output enable signal of alternate-function 1 PFCmn Internal bus WRPMC PMCmn WRPM PMmn Selector Output signal of alternate-function 2 WRPORT Output signal of alternate-function 1 Output latch (Pmn) Selector EVDD P-ch Pmn RD Selector Selector N-ch Address Output enable signal of alternate-function 1 Input signal of alternate-function 1 Alternate-function input signal in port mode 136 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD EVSS CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-20. Block Diagram of Type G-7-1 EVDD WRPU P-ch PUmn WRPFCE PFCEmn WRPFC PFCmn WRPMC WRPM PMmn WRPORT Selector Output signal of alternate-function 4 Output signal of alternate-function 2 Selector Selector Output latch (Pmn) Selector Internal bus PMCmn Pmn Note Address RD Input signal of alternate-function 1 Input signal of alternate-function 3 Note There are no hysteresis characteristics in the port mode. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 137 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-21. Block Diagram of Type G-7-2 EVDD WRPU P-ch PUmn WRPFCE PFCEmn WRPFC PFCmn WRPMC WRPM PMmn WRPORT Output signal of alternate-function 4 Selector Internal bus PMCmn Selector Selector Output latch (Pmn) Address RD Input signal of alternate-function 1 Input signal of alternate-function 3 Note There are no hysteresis characteristics in the port mode. 138 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD Pmn Note CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-22. Block Diagram of Type G-8 EVDD WRPU P-ch PUmn WRPF PFmn Output enable signal of alternate-function 2 WRPFC PFCmn Internal bus WRPMC PMCmn WRPM PMmn EVDD Selector Output signal of WRPORT alternate-function 2 Output latch (Pmn) P-ch Pmn EVSS Selector Selector N-ch Note Address Output enable signal of alternate-function 2 RD Input signal of alternate-function 2 Note There are no hysteresis characteristics in the port mode. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 139 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-23. Block Diagram of Type G-9 EVDD WRPU P-ch PUmn WRPF PFmn WRPFC PFCmn WRPMC PMCmn Internal bus WRPM PMmn EVDD Selector Output signal of WRPORT alternate-function 2 Output latch (Pmn) P-ch Pmn Selector Selector N-ch Address RD 140 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD EVSS CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-24. Block Diagram of Type H-1 EVDD WRPU P-ch PUmn WRINTR INTRmnNote 1 WRINTF INTFmnNote 1 Internal bus WRPMC PMCmn WRPM PMmn WRPORT Output latch (Pmn) Selector Selector Pmn Note 2 Address RD Input signal of alternate-function 1 Noise elimination Edge detection Notes 1. Refer to 19.4 External Interrupt Request Input Pins (NMI, INTP0 to INTP6). 2. There are no hysteresis characteristics in the port mode. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 141 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-25. Block Diagram of Type H-3 EVDD WRPU P-ch PUmn WRINTR INTRmnNote 1 WRINTF INTFmnNote 1 WRPFC Internal bus PFCmn WRPMC PMCmn WRPM PMmn WRPORT Output latch (Pmn) Selector Selector Pmn Note 2 Address RD Input signal of alternate-function 2 Noise elimination Edge detection Notes 1. Refer to 19.4 External Interrupt Request Input Pins (NMI, INTP0 to INTP6). 2. There are no hysteresis characteristics in the port mode. 142 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-26. Block Diagram of Type K WRPF PFmn WRPMC PMCmn WRPM PMmn Mask Option Pmn WRPORT Output signal of alternate-function 1 Selector Internal bus EVDD Output latch (Pmn) N-ch Selector Selector EVSS Note Address RD Input signal of alternate-function 1 Note There are no hysteresis characteristics in the port mode. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 143 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.5 Port Register Setting When Alternate Function Is Used Table 4-14 shows the port register settings when each port is used for an alternate function. When using a port pin as an alternate-function pin, refer to description of each pin. 144 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD Table 4-14. Settings When Port Pins Are Used for Alternate Functions (1/4) Pin Name Alternate Function Function Name Pnx Bit of Pn Register PMnx Bit of PMn Register PMCnx Bit of PFCnx Bit of PFCn Register Other Bits (Registers) PMCn Register I/O TOH0 Output P00 = Setting not required PM00 = Setting not required PMC00 = 1 - - P01 TOH1 Output P01 = Setting not required PM01 = Setting not required PMC01 = 1 - - P02 NMI Input P02 = Setting not required PM02 = Setting not required PMC02 = 1 - - P03 INTP0 Input P03 = Setting not required PM03 = Setting not required PMC03 = 1 - - P04 INTP1 Input P04 = Setting not required PM04 = Setting not required PMC04 = 1 - - P05 INTP2 Input P05 = Setting not required PM05 = Setting not required PMC05 = 1 - - P06 INTP3 Input P06 = Setting not required PM06 = Setting not required PMC06 = 1 - - P30 TXD0 Output P30 = Setting not required PM30 = Setting not required PMC30 = 1 - - P31 RXD0 Input P31 = Setting not required PM31 = Setting not required PMC31 = 1 - - P32 ASCK0 Input P32 = Setting not required PM32 = Setting not required PMC32 = 1 - - P33 TI000 Input P33 = Setting not required PM33 = Setting not required PMC33 = 1 PFC33 = 0 PFCE33 (PFCE3) = 0 TO00 Output P33 = Setting not required PM33 = Setting not required PMC33 = 1 PFC33 = 1 PFCE33 (PFCE3) = 0 TIP00 Note 1 TOP00 P34 TI001 TIP01 Note 1 TOP01 P35 Note 1 Note 1 TI010 TO01 P38 SDA0 Note 2 Note 1 Note 1 Input P33 = Setting not required PM33 = Setting not required PMC33 = 1 PFC33 = 0 PFCE33 (PFCE3) = 1 Output P33 = Setting not required PM33 = Setting not required PMC33 = 1 PFC33 = 1 PFCE33 (PFCE3) = 1 Input P34 = Setting not required PM34 = Setting not required PMC34 = 1 PFC34 = 0 PFCE34 (PFCE3) = 0 Input P34 = Setting not required PM34 = Setting not required PMC34 = 1 PFC34 = 0 PFCE34 (PFCE3) = 1 Output P34 = Setting not required PM34 = Setting not required PMC34 = 1 PFC34 = 1 PFCE34 (PFCE3) = 1 Input P35 = Setting not required PM35 = Setting not required PMC35 = 1 PFC35 = 0 - Output P35 = Setting not required PM35 = Setting not required PMC35 = 1 PFC35 = 1 - I/O P38 = 1 PM38 = Setting not required PMC38 = 1 - PF38 (PF3H) = 1 PF39 (PF3H) = 1 Note 1 Note 1 P39 SCL0 I/O P39 = 1 PM39 = Setting not required PMC39 = 1 - P40 SI00 Input P40 = Setting not required PM40 = Setting not required PMC40 = 1 - P41 SO00 Output P41 = Setting not required PM41 = Setting not required PMC41 = 1 - PF41 (PF4) = Don't care P42 SCK00 I/O P42 = Setting not required PM42 = Setting not required PMC42 = 1 - PF42 (PF4) = Don't care Note 2 Notes 1. Only in the PD703211, 703211Y, 70F3211H, 70F3211HY 2. Only in products with an I2C bus (Y products) - CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD P00 145 146 Table 4-14. Settings When Port Pins Are Used for Alternate Functions (2/4) Pin Name Alternate Function Function Name P50 P51 Pnx Bit of Pn Register PMnx Bit of PMn Register PMCnx Bit of PFCnx Bit of PFCn Register Other Bits (Registers) PMCn Register I/O TI011 Input P50 = Setting not required PM50 = Setting not required PMC50 = 1 PFC50 = 0 - RTP00 Output P50 = Setting not required PM50 = Setting not required PMC50 = 1 PFC50 = 1 - KR0 Input P50 = Setting not required PM50 = 1 PMC50 = 0 PFC50 = Setting not required TI50 Input P51 = Setting not required PM51 = Setting not required PMC51 = 1 PFC51 = 0 KRM0 (KRM) = 1 - - RTP01 Output P51 = Setting not required PM51 = Setting not required PMC51 = 1 PFC51 = 1 KR1 Input P51 = Setting not required PM51 = 1 PMC51 = 0 PFC51 = Setting not required TO50 Output P52 = Setting not required PM52 = Setting not required PMC52 = 1 PFC52 = 0 - RTP02 Output P52 = Setting not required PM52 = Setting not required PMC52 = 1 PFC52 = 1 - KR2 Input P52 = Setting not required PM52 = 1 PMC52 = 0 PFC52 = Setting not required SIA0 Input P53 = Setting not required PM53 = Setting not required PMC53 = 1 PFC53 = 0 - RTP03 Output P53 = Setting not required PM53 = Setting not required PMC53 = 1 PFC53 = 1 - KR3 Input P53 = Setting not required PM53 = 1 PMC53 = 0 PFC53 = Setting not required KRM3 (KRM) = 1 SOA0 Output P54 = Setting not required PM54 = Setting not required PMC54 = 1 PFC54 = 0 PF54 (PF5) = Don't care RTP04 Output P54 = Setting not required PM54 = Setting not required PMC54 = 1 PFC54 = 1 PF54 (PF5) = 0 KR4 Input P54 = Setting not required PM54 = 1 PMC54 = 0 PFC54 = Setting not required PF54 (PF5) = 0, KRM4 (KRM) = 1 SCKA0 I/O P55 = Setting not required PM55 = Setting not required PMC55 = 1 PFC55 = 0 PF55 (PF5) = Don't care RTP05 Output P55 = Setting not required PM55 = Setting not required PMC55 = 1 PFC55 = 1 PF55 (PF5) = 0 KR5 Input P55 = Setting not required PM55 = 1 PMC55 = 0 PFC55 = Setting not required PF55 (PF5) = 0, KRM5 (KRM) = 1 P70 ANI0 Input P70 = Setting not required - - - - P71 ANI1 Input P71 = Setting not required - - - - P72 ANI2 Input P72 = Setting not required - - - - P73 ANI3 Input P73 = Setting not required - - - - P74 ANI4 Input P74 = Setting not required - - - - P75 ANI5 Input P75 = Setting not required - - - - P76 ANI6 Input P76 = Setting not required - - - - P77 ANI7 Input P77 = Setting not required - - - - User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD P53 P54 P55 KRM2 (KRM) = 1 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS P52 KRM1 (KRM) = 1 Table 4-14. Settings When Port Pins Are Used for Alternate Functions (3/4) Pin Name Alternate Function Function Name P90 P91 Pnx Bit of Pn Register PMnx Bit of PMn Register PMCnx Bit of PFCnx Bit of PFCn Register Other Bits (Registers) PMCn Register I/O - TXD1 Output P90 = Setting not required PM90 = Setting not required PMC90 = 1 PFC90 = 1 KR6 Input P90 = Setting not required PM90 = 1 PMC90 = 0 PFC90 = Setting not required RXD1 Input P91 = Setting not required PM91 = Setting not required PMC91 = 1 PFC91 = 1 KR7 Input P91 = Setting not required PM91 = 1 PMC91 = 0 PFC91 = Setting not required KRM6 (KRM) = 1 - KRM7 (KRM) = 1 Input P96 = Setting not required PM96 = 1 PMC96 = 0 PFC96 = 0 - Output P96 = Setting not required PM96 = Setting not required PMC96 = 1 PFC96 = 1 - P97 SI01 Input P97 = Setting not required PM97 = Setting not required PMC97 = 1 PFC97 = 1 - P98 SO01 Output P98 = Setting not required PM98 = Setting not required PMC98 = 1 PFC98 = 1 PF98 (PF9) = Don't care P99 SCK01 I/O P99 = Setting not required PM99 = Setting not required PMC99 = 1 PFC99 = 1 PF98 (PF9) = Don't care P913 INTP4 Input P913 = Setting not required PM913 = Setting not required PMC913 = 1 PFC913 = 1 - P914 INTP5 Input P914 = Setting not required PM914 = Setting not required PMC914 = 1 PFC914 = 1 - P915 INTP6 Input P915 = Setting not required PM915 = Setting not required PMC915 = 1 PFC915 = 1 - PCM0 WAIT Input PCM0 = Setting not required PMCM0 = Setting not required PMCCM0 = 1 - - PCM1 CLKOUT Output PCM1 = Setting not required PMCM1 = Setting not required PMCCM1 = 1 - - PCM2 HLDAK Output PCM2 = Setting not required PMCM2 = Setting not required PMCCM2 = 1 - - PCM3 HLDRQ Input PCM3 = Setting not required PMCM3 = Setting not required PMCCM3 = 1 - - PCS0 CS0 Output PCS0 = Setting not required PMCS0 = Setting not required PMCCS0 = 1 - - PCS1 CS1 Output PCS1 = Setting not required PMCS1 = Setting not required PMCCS1 = 1 - - PCT0 WR0 Output PCT0 = Setting not required PMCT0 = Setting not required PMCCT0 = 1 - - PCT1 WR1 Output PCT1 = Setting not required PMCT1 = Setting not required PMCCT1 = 1 - - PCT4 RD Output PCT4 = Setting not required PMCT4 = Setting not required PMCCT4 = 1 - - PCT6 ASTB Output PCT6 = Setting not required PMCT6 = Setting not required PMCCT6 = 1 - - User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS TI51 TO51 P96 147 148 Table 4-14. Settings When Port Pins Are Used for Alternate Functions (4/4) Pin Name Alternate Function Function Name Pnx Bit of Pn Register PMnx Bit of PMn Register PMCnx Bit of PFCnx Bit of PFCn Register Other Bits (Registers) PMCn Register I/O AD0 I/O PDL0 = Setting not required PMDL0 = Setting not required PMCDL0 = 1 - - PDL1 AD1 I/O PDL1 = Setting not required PMDL1 = Setting not required PMCDL1 = 1 - - PDL2 AD2 I/O PDL2 = Setting not required PMDL2 = Setting not required PMCDL2 = 1 - - PDL3 AD3 I/O PDL3 = Setting not required PMDL3 = Setting not required PMCDL3 = 1 - - PDL4 AD4 I/O PDL4 = Setting not required PMDL4 = Setting not required PMCDL4 = 1 - - PDL5 AD5 I/O PDL5 = Setting not required PMDL5 = Setting not required PMCDL5 = 1 - - PDL6 AD6 I/O PDL6 = Setting not required PMDL6 = Setting not required PMCDL6 = 1 - - PDL7 AD7 I/O PDL7 = Setting not required PMDL7 = Setting not required PMCDL7 = 1 - - PDL8 AD8 I/O PDL8 = Setting not required PMDL8 = Setting not required PMCDL8 = 1 - - PDL9 AD9 I/O PDL9 = Setting not required PMDL9 = Setting not required PMCDL9 = 1 - - PDL10 AD10 I/O PDL10 = Setting not required PMDL10 = Setting not required PMCDL10 = 1 - - PDL11 AD11 I/O PDL11 = Setting not required PMDL11 = Setting not required PMCDL11 = 1 - - PDL12 AD12 I/O PDL12 = Setting not required PMDL12 = Setting not required PMCDL12 = 1 - - PDL13 AD13 I/O PDL13 = Setting not required PMDL13 = Setting not required PMCDL13 = 1 - - PDL14 AD14 I/O PDL14 = Setting not required PMDL14 = Setting not required PMCDL14 = 1 - - PDL15 AD15 I/O PDL15 = Setting not required PMDL15 = Setting not required PMCDL15 = 1 - - CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD PDL0 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.6 Cautions 4.6.1 Cautions on bit manipulation instruction for port n register (Pn) When a 1-bit manipulation instruction is executed on a port that provides both input and output functions, the value of the output latch of an input port that is not subject to manipulation may be written in addition to the targeted bit. Therefore, it is recommended to rewrite the output latch when switching a port from input mode to output mode. <Example> When PDL0 is an output port, PDL1 to PDL7 are input ports (all pin statuses are high level), and the value of the port latch is 00H, if the output of output port PDL0 is changed from low level to high level via a bit manipulation instruction, the value of the port latch is FFH. Explanation: The targets of writing to and reading from the Pn register of a port whose PMnm bit is 1 are the output latch and pin status, respectively. A bit manipulation instruction is executed in the following order in the V850ES/KF1. <1> The Pn register is read in 8-bit units. <2> The targeted one bit is manipulated. <3> The Pn register is written in 8-bit units. In step <1>, the value of the output latch (0) of PDL0, which is an output port, is read, while the pin statuses of PDL1 to PDL7, which are input ports, are read. If the pin statuses of PDL1 to PDL7 are high level at this time, the read value is FEH. The value is changed to FFH by the manipulation in <2>. FFH is written to the output latch by the manipulation in <3>. Figure 4-27. Bit Manipulation Instruction (PDL0) Bit manipulation instruction (set1 0, PDLL[r0]) is executed for PDL0 bit. PDL0 Low-level output PDL1 to PDL7 PDL0 Low-level output PDL1 to PDL7 Pin status: High level Port DLL latch 0 0 0 Pin status: High level Port DLL latch 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bit manipulation instruction for PDL0 bit <1> The PDLL register is read in 8-bit units. * In the case of PDL0, an output port, the value of the port latch (0) is read. * In the case of PDL1 to PDL7, input ports, the pin status (1) is read. <2> Set PDL0 bit to 1. <3> Write the results of <2> to the output latch of the PDLL register in 8 bit units. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 149 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.6.2 Hysteresis characteristics In port mode, the following ports do not have hysteresis characteristics. P02 to P06 P31 to P35, P38, P39 P40, P42 P97, P99, P913 to P915 150 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 5 BUS CONTROL FUNCTION The V850ES/KF1 is provided with an external bus interface function by which external memories such as ROM and RAM, and I/O can be connected. 5.1 Features { 16-bit data bus { Multiplex bus output with a minimum of 3 bus cycles { Chip select function for up to 2 spaces { 8-bit/16-bit data bus selectable (for each area selected by chip select function) { Wait function * Programmable wait function of up to 7 states (selectable for each area selected by chip select function) * External wait function using WAIT pin { Idle state function { Bus hold function { Can be connected to the external device with port alternate-function pins. { Misalign access possible User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 151 CHAPTER 5 BUS CONTROL FUNCTION 5.2 Bus Control Pins The pins used to connect an external device are listed in the table below. Table 5-1. Bus Control Pins Bus Control Pin Alternate-Function Pin I/O Function Register to Switch Between Port Mode/ Alternate-Function Mode AD0 to AD15 PDL0 to PDL15 I/O Address/data bus PMCDL register WAIT PCM0 Input External wait control PMCCM register CLKOUT PCM1 Output Internal system clock output PMCCM register CS0, CS1 PCS0, PCS1 Output Chip select PMCCS register WR0, WR1 PCT0, PCT1 Output Write strobe signal PMCCT register RD PCT4 Output Read strobe signal PMCCT register ASTB PCT6 Output Address strobe signal PMCCT register HLDRQ PCM3 Input Bus hold control PMCCM register HLDAK PCM2 Output 5.2.1 Pin status when internal ROM, internal RAM, or on-chip peripheral I/O is accessed When the internal ROM, internal RAM, or on-chip peripheral I/O are accessed, the status of each pin is as follows. Table 5-2. Pin Statuses When Internal ROM, Internal RAM, or On-Chip Peripheral I/O Is Accessed Address/data bus (AD15 to AD0) Undefined Control signal Inactive Caution When a write access is performed to the internal ROM area, address, data, and control signals are activated in the same way as access to the external memory area. 5.2.2 Pin status in each operation mode For the pin status of the V850ES/KF1 in each operation mode, refer to 2.2 Pin Status. 152 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 5 BUS CONTROL FUNCTION 5.3 Memory Block Function The 64 MB memory space is divided into chip select areas of (lower) 64 KB and 64 KB. The programmable wait function and bus cycle operation mode for each of these chip select areas can be independently controlled. Figure 5-1. Data Memory Map: Physical Address 3FFFFFFH On-chip peripheral I/O area (4 KB) (80 KB) Use-prohibited area 3FEC000H 3FEBFFFH 3FFFFFFH 3FFF000H 3FFEFFFH 3FFD800H 3FFD7FFH Internal RAM area (6 KBNote 1) 3FFC000H 3FFBFFFH Use-prohibited area 3FEC000H Use-prohibited area 0210000H 020FFFFH 0200000H 01FFFFFH Setting prohibited External memory area (64 KB) CS1 External memory area (64 KB) (2 MB) CS0 Internal ROM areaNote 2 (1 MB) 01FFFFFH 0110000H 010FFFFH 0100000H 00FFFFFH 0000000H 0000000H Notes 1. Only in the PD703210, 703210Y, 70F3210, 70F3210Y, 70F3210H, and 70F3210HY. PD703208, 703208Y, 703209, 703209Y: 4 KB (3FFE000H to 3FFEFFFH) PD703211, 703211Y, 70F3211H, 70F3211HY: 12 KB (3FFC000H to 3FFEFFFH) 2. This area is an external memory area in the case of a data write access. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 153 CHAPTER 5 BUS CONTROL FUNCTION 5.3.1 Chip select control function Of the 64 MB (linear) address space, two 64 KB spaces (0100000H to 010FFFFH/0200000H to 020FFFFH) include two chip select control functions, CS0 and CS1. The areas that can be selected by CS0 and CS1 are fixed. By using these chip select control functions, the memory space can be used effectively. The allocation of the chip select areas is shown in the table below. 154 CS0 0100000H to 010FFFFH (64 KB) CS1 0200000H to 020FFFFH (64 KB) User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 5 BUS CONTROL FUNCTION 5.4 Bus Access 5.4.1 Number of clocks for access The following table shows the number of base clocks required for accessing each resource. Area (Bus Width) Internal ROM Internal RAM External Memory On-Chip Peripheral I/O (32 Bits) (32 Bits) (16 Bits) (16 Bits) 1 Note 1 3+n - 2 Note 1 3+n Bus Cycle Type Instruction fetch (normal access) 1 Instruction fetch (branch) 2 Operand data access 3 1 - Note 2 3+n 3 Notes 1. If the access conflicts with a data access, the number of clock is increased by 1. 2. This value varies depending on the setting of the VSWC register. Remark Unit: Clocks/access 5.4.2 Bus size setting function The bus size of each external memory area selected by CSn can be set to 8 bits or 16 bits by using the BSC register. The external memory area of the V850ES/KF1 is selected by CS0 and CS1. (1) Bus size configuration register (BSC) This register can be read or written in 16-bit units. Reset sets BSC to 5555H. Caution Write to the BSC register after reset, and then do not change the set values. Also, do not access an external memory area until the initial settings of the BSC register are complete. After reset: 5555H BSC R/W Address: FFFFF066H 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 BS10 0 BS00 0 0/1 Note 0 0/1 Note CSn signal CS1 CS0 Data bus width of CSn space (n = 0, 1) BSn0 0 8 bits 1 16 bits Note Changing the value does not affect the operation. Caution Be sure to set bits 14, 12, 10, and 8 to "1", and clear bits 15, 13, 11, 9, 7, 5, 3, and 1 to "0". User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 155 CHAPTER 5 BUS CONTROL FUNCTION 5.4.3 Access by bus size The V850ES/KF1 accesses the on-chip peripheral I/O and external memory in 8-bit, 16-bit, or 32-bit units. The bus size is as follows. * The bus size of the on-chip peripheral I/O is fixed to 16 bits. * The bus size of the external memory is selectable from 8 bits or 16 bits (by using the BSC register). The operation when each of the above is accessed is described below. All data is accessed starting from the lower side. The V850ES/KF1 supports only the little endian format. Figure 5-2. Little Endian Address in Word 31 24 23 16 15 8 7 0 000BH 000AH 0009H 0008H 0007H 0006H 0005H 0004H 0003H 0002H 0001H 0000H (1) Data space The V850ES/KF1 has an address misalign function. With this function, data can be placed at all addresses, regardless of the format of the data (word data or halfword data). However, if the word data or halfword data is not aligned at the boundary, a bus cycle is generated at least twice, causing the bus efficiency to drop. (a) Halfword-length data access A byte-length bus cycle is generated twice if the least significant bit of the address is 1. (b) Word-length data access (i) A byte-length bus cycle, halfword-length bus cycle, and byte-length bus cycle are generated in that order if the least significant bit of the address is 1. (ii) A halfword-length bus cycle is generated twice if the lower 2 bits of the address are 10. 156 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 5 BUS CONTROL FUNCTION (2) Byte access (8 bits) (a) 16-bit data bus width <1> Access to even address (2n) <2> Access to odd address (2n + 1) Address Address 15 15 7 8 7 7 8 7 0 0 0 0 Byte data External data bus 2n + 1 2n Byte data External data bus (b) 8-bit data bus width <1> Access to even address (2n) <2> Access to odd address (2n + 1) Address Address 7 7 0 0 0 External data bus Byte data External data bus 7 7 0 Byte data 2n + 1 2n User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 157 CHAPTER 5 BUS CONTROL FUNCTION (3) Halfword access (16 bits) (a) With 16-bit data bus width <1> Access to even address (2n) <2> Access to odd address (2n + 1) First access Address Address 15 15 8 7 8 7 0 0 External data bus Halfword data 15 15 8 7 8 7 0 Halfword data Second access Address 15 15 8 7 8 7 0 0 0 External data bus Halfword data External data bus 2n + 1 2n + 1 2n 2n + 2 2n (b) 8-bit data bus width <1> Access to even address (2n) First access 15 Second access 15 Address 8 7 7 0 158 First access 15 Address 8 7 7 0 0 0 External data bus Halfword data External data bus Second access 15 Address 8 7 7 0 Address 8 7 7 0 0 0 External data bus Halfword data External data bus 2n + 1 2n Halfword data <2> Access to odd address (2n + 1) 2n + 2 2n + 1 Halfword data User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 5 BUS CONTROL FUNCTION (4) Word access (32 bits) (a) 16-bit data bus width (1/2) <1> Access to address (4n) First access Second access 31 31 24 23 24 23 Address 16 15 15 8 7 8 7 0 Word data Address 16 15 15 8 7 8 7 0 0 0 External data bus Word data External data bus 4n + 1 4n + 3 4n 4n + 2 <2> Access to address (4n + 1) First access Second access Third access 31 31 31 24 23 24 23 24 23 Address 16 15 15 8 7 0 Address 16 15 15 8 7 8 7 8 7 0 0 0 4n + 1 Address 16 15 15 8 7 8 7 0 0 4n + 3 4n + 2 Word data External data bus Word data External data bus User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 4n + 4 Word data External data bus 159 CHAPTER 5 BUS CONTROL FUNCTION (a) 16-bit data bus width (2/2) <3> Access to address (4n + 2) First access Second access 31 31 24 23 24 23 Address 16 15 15 8 7 8 7 0 Address 16 15 15 8 7 8 7 0 0 0 External data bus Word data External data bus 4n + 3 4n + 5 4n + 2 Word data 4n + 4 <4> Access to address (4n + 3) First access Second access Third access 31 31 31 24 23 24 23 24 23 16 15 Address 15 16 15 Address 15 4n + 3 8 7 8 7 Address 16 15 15 8 7 8 7 4n + 5 8 7 8 7 4n + 4 0 Word data 160 0 External data bus 0 Word data 0 External data bus User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 4n + 6 0 Word data 0 External data bus CHAPTER 5 BUS CONTROL FUNCTION (b) 8-bit data bus width (1/2) <1> Access to address (4n) First access Second access Third access Fourth access 31 31 31 31 24 23 24 23 24 23 24 23 16 15 16 15 16 15 16 15 Address 8 7 7 0 0 Address 8 7 7 0 0 4n Word data External data bus Address 8 7 7 0 0 4n + 1 Word data External data bus Address 8 7 7 4n + 2 Word data External data bus 0 Word data 4n + 3 0 External data bus <2> Access to address (4n + 1) First access Second access Third access Fourth access 31 31 31 31 24 23 24 23 24 23 24 23 16 15 16 15 16 15 16 15 8 7 7 0 0 Address 8 7 7 0 0 4n + 1 Word data External data bus Address 8 7 7 0 0 4n + 2 Word data External data bus Address 8 7 7 0 0 4n + 3 Word data User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD External data bus Address 4n + 4 Word data External data bus 161 CHAPTER 5 BUS CONTROL FUNCTION (b) 8-bit data bus width (2/2) <3> Access to address (4n + 2) First access Second access Third access Fourth access 31 31 31 31 24 23 24 23 24 23 24 23 16 15 16 15 16 15 16 15 Address 8 7 7 0 0 Address 8 7 7 0 0 4n + 2 Word data External data bus Address 8 7 7 0 0 4n + 3 Word data External data bus Address 8 7 7 0 Word data 4n + 5 0 External data bus 4n + 4 Word data External data bus <4> Access to address (4n + 3) First access Second access Third access Fourth access 31 31 31 31 24 23 24 23 24 23 24 23 16 15 16 15 16 15 16 15 Address 8 7 7 0 0 Address 8 7 7 0 0 4n + 3 Word data 162 External data bus Address 8 7 7 0 0 4n + 4 Word data External data bus Address 8 7 7 0 0 4n + 5 Word data User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD External data bus 4n + 6 Word data External data bus CHAPTER 5 BUS CONTROL FUNCTION 5.5 Wait Function 5.5.1 Programmable wait function (1) Data wait control register 0 (DWC0) To realize interfacing with a low-speed memory or I/O, up to seven data wait states can be inserted in the bus cycle that is executed for each CS space. The number of wait states can be programmed by using the DWC0 register. Immediately after system reset, 7 data wait states are inserted for all the chip select areas. The DWC0 register can be read or written in 16-bit units. Reset sets DWC0 to 7777H. Cautions 1. The internal ROM and internal RAM areas are not subject to programmable wait, and are always accessed without a wait state. The on-chip peripheral I/O area is also not subject to programmable wait, and only wait control from each peripheral function is performed. 2. Write to the DWC0 register after reset, and then do not change the set values. Also, do not access an external memory area until the initial settings of the DWC0 register are complete. After reset: 7777H 15 DWC0 R/W 14 Note Address: FFFFF484H 13 Note 0 0/1 7 6 5 0 DW12 DW11 0/1 12 0/1 Note 11 10 Note 0/1 Note 8 0/1Note 0 0/1 4 3 2 1 0 DW10 0 DW02 DW01 DW00 CS0 CS1 CSn signal 9 Number of wait states inserted in CSn space (n = 0, 1) DWn2 DWn1 DWn0 0 0 0 None 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 2 0 1 1 3 1 0 0 4 1 0 1 5 1 1 0 6 1 1 1 7 Note Changing the value does not affect the operation. Caution Be sure to clear bits 15, 11, 7, and 3 to "0". User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 163 CHAPTER 5 BUS CONTROL FUNCTION 5.5.2 External wait function To synchronize an extremely slow memory, I/O, or asynchronous system, any number of wait states can be inserted in the bus cycle by using the external wait pin (WAIT). Access to each area of the internal ROM, internal RAM, and on-chip peripheral I/O is not subject to control by the external wait function, in the same manner as the programmable wait function. The WAIT signal can be input asynchronously to CLKOUT, and is sampled at the falling edge of the clock in the T2 and TW states of the bus cycle. If the setup/hold time of the sampling timing is not satisfied, a wait state is inserted in the next state, or not inserted at all. 5.5.3 Relationship between programmable wait and external wait Wait cycles are inserted as the result of an OR operation between the wait cycles specified by the set value of the programmable wait and the wait cycles controlled by the WAIT pin. Programmable wait Wait control Wait via WAIT pin For example, if the timing of the programmable wait and the WAIT pin signal is as illustrated below, three wait states will be inserted in the bus cycle. Figure 5-3. Example of Inserting Wait States T1 T2 TW CLKOUT WAIT pin Wait via WAIT pin Programmable wait Wait control Remark 164 The circles indicate the sampling timing. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD TW TW T3 CHAPTER 5 BUS CONTROL FUNCTION 5.5.4 Programmable address wait function Address-setup or address-hold waits to be inserted in each bus cycle can be set by using the AWC register. Address wait insertion is set for each chip select area (CS0 and CS1). If an address setup wait is inserted, it seems that the high-clock period of T1 state is extended by 1 clock. If an address hold wait is inserted, it seems that the low-clock period of T1 state is extended by 1 clock. (1) Address wait control register (AWC) This register can be read or written in 16-bit units. Reset sets AWC to FFFFH. Cautions 1. The internal ROM, internal RAM, and on-chip peripheral I/O areas are not subject to address setup wait or address hold wait insertion. 2. Write the AWC register after reset, and then do not change the set values. Also, do not access an external memory area until the initial settings of the AWC register are complete. After reset: FFFFH AWC R/W Address: FFFFF488H 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 AHW1 ASW1 AHW0 ASW0 Note 0/1 Note 0/1 Note 0/1 Note 0/1 CSn signal CS1 CS0 Specifies insertion of address hold wait (n = 0, 1) AHWn 0 Not inserted 1 Inserted Specifies insertion of address setup wait (n = 0, 1) ASWn 0 Not inserted 1 Inserted Note Changing the value does not affect the operation. Caution Be sure to set bits 15 to 8 to "1". User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 165 CHAPTER 5 BUS CONTROL FUNCTION 5.6 Idle State Insertion Function To facilitate interfacing with low-speed memories, one idle state (TI) can be inserted after the T3 state in the bus cycle that is executed for each space selected by CSn. By inserting idle states, the data output float delay time of the memory can be secured during read access (an idle state cannot be inserted during write access). Whether the idle state is to be inserted can be programmed by using the BCC register. An idle state is inserted for all the areas immediately after system reset. (1) Bus cycle control register (BCC) This register can be read or written in 16-bit units. Reset sets BCC to AAAAH. Cautions 1. The internal ROM, internal RAM, and on-chip peripheral I/O areas are not subject to idle state insertion. 2. Write to the BCC register after reset, and then do not change the set values. Also, do not access an external memory area until the initial settings of the BCC register are complete. After reset: AAAAH BCC R/W Address: FFFFF48AH 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 BC11 0 BC01 0 Note 0/1 0 0/1 Note CSn signal CS1 CS0 Specifies insertion of idle state (n = 0, 1) BCn1 0 Not inserted 1 Inserted Note Changing the value does not affect the operation. Caution Be sure to set bits 15, 13, 11, and 9 to "1", and clear bits 14, 12, 10, 8, 6, 4, 2, and 0 to "0". 166 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 5 BUS CONTROL FUNCTION 5.7 Bus Hold Function 5.7.1 Functional outline The HLDRQ and HLDAK functions are valid if the PCM2 and PCM3 pins are set to their alternate functions. When the HLDRQ pin is asserted (low level), indicating that another bus master has requested bus mastership, the external address/data bus goes into a high-impedance state and is released (bus hold status). If the request for the bus mastership is cleared and the HLDRQ pin is deasserted (high level), driving these pins is started again. During the bus hold period, execution of the program in the internal ROM and internal RAM is continued until a peripheral I/O register or the external memory is accessed. The bus hold status is indicated by assertion (low level) of the HLDAK pin. The bus hold function enables the configuration of multi-processor type systems in which two or more bus masters exist. Note that the bus hold request is not acknowledged during a multiple-access cycle initiated by the bus sizing function or a bit manipulation instruction. Status Data Bus Access Type Width CPU bus lock 16 bits Timing in Which Bus Hold Request Not Acknowledged Word access to even address Word access to odd address Between first and second access Between first and second access Between second and third access 8 bits Halfword access to odd address Between first and second access Word access Between first and second access Between second and third access Between third and fourth access Halfword access Read-modify-write access of bit - Between first and second access - Between read access and write access manipulation instruction User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 167 CHAPTER 5 BUS CONTROL FUNCTION 5.7.2 Bus hold procedure The bus hold status transition procedure is shown below. <1> Low-level input to HLDRQ pin acknowledged <2> All bus cycle start requests inhibited Normal status <3> End of current bus cycle <4> Shift to bus idle status. <5> Output low level from HLDAK pin Bus hold status <6> High-level input to HLDRQ pin acknowledged <7> Output high level from HLDAK pin <8> Bus cycle start request inhibition released <9> Bus cycle starts Normal status HLDRQ (input) HLDAK (output) <1> <2> <3><4> <5> <6> <7><8><9> 5.7.3 Operation in power save mode Because the internal system clock is stopped in the STOP and IDLE modes, the bus hold status is not entered even if the HLDRQ pin is asserted. In the HALT mode, the HLDAK pin is asserted as soon as the HLDRQ pin has been asserted, and the bus hold status is entered. When the HLDRQ pin is later deasserted, the HLDAK pin is also deasserted, and the bus hold status is cleared. 168 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 5 BUS CONTROL FUNCTION 5.8 Bus Priority Bus hold, instruction fetch (branch), instruction fetch (successive), and operand data access are executed in the external bus cycle. Bus hold has the highest priority, followed by operand data access, instruction fetch (branch), and instruction fetch (successive). An instruction fetch may be inserted between the read access and write access in a read-modify-write access. If an instruction is executed for two or more accesses, an instruction fetch and bus hold are not inserted between accesses due to bus size limitations. Table 5-3. Bus Priority Priority High Low External Bus Cycle Bus hold Bus Master External device Operand data access CPU Instruction fetch (branch) CPU Instruction fetch (successive) CPU User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 169 CHAPTER 5 BUS CONTROL FUNCTION 5.9 Bus Timing Figure 5-4. Read Timing (Bus Size: 16 Bits, 16-bit Access) T1 T2 A1 D1 T3 T1 T2 TW TW T3 TI T1 CLKOUT ASTB CS1, CS0 WAIT AD15 to AD0 A2 D2 A3 RD Idle state Programmable External wait wait 8-bit access Odd address Even address AD15 to AD8 Active Hi-Z Hi-Z Active AD7 to AD0 Remark The broken lines indicate high impedance. Figure 5-5. Read Timing (Bus Size: 8 Bits) T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 TW TW T3 TI T1 CLKOUT A1 AD15 to AD8 A2 A3 D2 A3 ASTB CS1, CS0 WAIT AD7 to AD0 A1 D1 A2 RD Programmable External wait wait Remark 170 The broken lines indicate high impedance. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD Idle state CHAPTER 5 BUS CONTROL FUNCTION Figure 5-6. Write Timing (Bus Size: 16 Bits, 16-bit Access) T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 TW TW T3 T1 CLKOUT ASTB CS1, CS0 WAIT AD15 to AD0 WR1, WR0 A1 11 D1 00 A2 11 D2 11 A3 00 11 Programmable External wait wait 8-bit access Odd address Even address Active Undefined Undefined Active AD15 to AD8 AD7 to AD0 01 WR1, WR0 10 Figure 5-7. Write Timing (Bus Size: 8 Bits) T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 TW TW T3 T1 CLKOUT A1 AD15 to AD8 A2 A3 D2 A3 ASTB CS1, CS0 WAIT AD7 to AD0 WR1, WR0 A1 11 D1 10 A2 11 11 10 11 Programmable External wait wait User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 171 CHAPTER 5 BUS CONTROL FUNCTION Figure 5-8. Bus Hold Timing (Bus Size: 16 Bits, 16-bit Access) T1 T2 A1 D1 T3 TINote TINote T1 T2 Undefined Undefined A2 D2 11 11 TH TH TH TH T3 CLKOUT HLDRQ HLDAK AD15 to AD0 ASTB RD CS1, CS0 Note This idle state (TI) does not depend on the BCC register settings. Remarks 1. Refer to Table 2-2 Pin Operation Status in Operation Modes for the pin statuses in the bus hold mode. 2. The broken lines indicate high impedance. Figure 5-9. Address Wait Timing (Bus Size: 16 Bits, 16-bit Access) T1 T2 TASW CLKOUT CLKOUT ASTB ASTB CS1, CS0 CS1, CS0 WAIT WAIT AD15 to AD0 A1 D1 AD15 to AD0 RD T1 TAHW A1 RD Remarks 1. TASW (address setup wait): Image of high-level width of T1 state expanded. 2. TAHW (address hold wait): Image of low-level width of T1 state expanded. 3. The broken lines indicate high impedance. 172 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD T2 D1 CHAPTER 5 BUS CONTROL FUNCTION 5.10 Cautions With the external bus function, signals may not be output at the correct timing under the following conditions. <Operating conditions> * CLKOUT asynchronous (2.7 V VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 < 4.0 V) When 1/fCPU < 84 ns <Countermeasure> When used under the above conditions, be sure to insert an address setup/hold wait using the AWC register (n = 0, 1). * 70 ns < 1/fCPU < 84 ns Set an address setup wait (ASWn bit = 1). * 62.5 ns < 1/fCPU < 70 ns Set an address setup wait (ASWn bit = 1) and address hold wait (AHWn bit = 1). User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 173 CHAPTER 6 CLOCK GENERATION FUNCTION 6.1 Overview The following clock generation functions are available. { Main clock oscillator <In PLL (x4) mode> * fX = 2 to 5 MHz (fXX = 8 to 20 MHz: 4.5 V VDD 5.5 V, REGC = VDD) * fX = 2 to 4 MHz (fXX = 8 to 16 MHz: 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V, REGC = VDD) * fX = 2 to 4 MHz (fXX = 8 to 16 MHz: 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V, REGC = 10 F) * fX = 2 to 2.5 MHz (fXX = 8 to 10 MHz: 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V, REGC = VDD) <In clock through mode> * fX = 2 to 10 MHz (fXX = 2 to 10 MHz: 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V, REGC = VDD) * fX = 2 to 10 MHz (fXX = 2 to 10 MHz: 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V, REGC = 10 F) { Subclock oscillator * fXT = 32.768 kHz { Multiplication (x4) function by PLL (Phase Locked Loop) * Clock-through mode/PLL mode selectable * Usable voltage: VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V { Internal system clock generation * 7 steps (fXX, fXX/2, fXX/4, fXX/8, fXX/16, fXX/32, fXT) { Peripheral clock generation { Clock output function Remark fX: Main clock oscillation frequency fXX: Main clock frequency fXT: Subclock frequency 174 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 6 CLOCK GENERATION FUNCTION 6.2 Configuration Figure 6-1. Clock Generator FRC bit XT1 XT2 Subclock oscillator fXT fXT fBRG = fX/2 to fX/212 Interval timer BRG IDLE mode PLLON bit IDLE control Main clock oscillator stop control fX PLL IDLE fXX control fXX/32 fXX/16 fXX/8 fXX/4 fXX/2 STOP mode SELPLL bit Prescaler 1 IDLE control Remark HALT mode HALT fCPU control fCLK fXX IDLE mode CLKOUT CLS bit, CK3 bit Prescaler 2 Selector X2 Main clock oscillator Selector CK2 to CK0 bits X1 Watch timer clock IDLE mode Selector MCK MFRC bit bit Watch timer clock, watchdog timer clock CPU clock Internal system clock fXX to fXX/1024 Peripheral clock, watchdog timer 2 clock fXW Watchdog timer 1 clock Port CM fX: Main clock oscillation frequency fXX: Main clock frequency fCLK: Internal system clock frequency fXT: Subclock frequency fCPU: CPU clock frequency fBRG: Watch timer clock frequency fXW: Watchdog timer 1 clock frequency User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 175 CHAPTER 6 CLOCK GENERATION FUNCTION (1) Main clock oscillator The main clock oscillator oscillates the following frequencies (fX): * fX = 2 to 5 MHz (REGC = VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V, in PLL mode) * fX = 2 to 4 MHz (REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, in PLL mode) * fX = 2 to 4 MHz (REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, in PLL mode) * fX = 2 to 2.5 MHz (REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V, in PLL mode) * fX = 2 to 10 MHz (REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V, in clock through mode) * fX = 2 to 10 MHz (REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, in clock through mode) (2) Subclock oscillator The subclock oscillator oscillates a frequency of 32.768 kHz (fXT). (3) Main clock oscillator stop control This circuit generates a control signal that stops oscillation of the main clock oscillator. Oscillation of the main clock oscillator is stopped in the STOP mode or when the PCC.MCK bit = 1 (valid only when the PCC.CLS bit = 1). (4) Prescaler 1 This prescaler generates the clock (fXX to fXX/1024) to be supplied to the following on-chip peripheral functions: Note 1 TMP0 , TM00, TM01, TM50, TM51, TMH0, TMH1, CSI00, CSI01, CSIA0, UART0, UART1, I2C0Note 2, ADC, and WDT2 Notes 1. Only in the PD703211, 703211Y, 70F3211H, and 70F3211HY 2. I2C0 is available only in products with an I2C bus (Y products). (5) Prescaler 2 This circuit divides the main clock (fXX). The clock generated by prescaler 2 (fXX to fXX/32) is supplied to the selector that generates the CPU clock (fCPU) and internal system clock (fCLK). fCLK is the clock supplied to the INTC, ROM correction, ROM, and RAM blocks, and can be output from the CLKOUT pin. (6) Interval timer BRG This circuit divides the clock (fX) generated by the main clock oscillator to a specific frequency (32.768 kHz) and supplies that clock to the watch timer block. For details, refer to CHAPTER 11 INTERVAL TIMER, WATCH TIMER. (7) PLL This circuit multiplies the clock (fX) generated by the main clock oscillator. It operates in two modes: clock-through mode in which fX is output as is, and PLL mode in which a multiplied clock is output. These modes can be selected by using the PLLCTL.SELPLL bit. Operation of the PLL can be started or stopped by the PLLCTL.PLLON bit. 176 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 6 CLOCK GENERATION FUNCTION 6.3 Registers (1) Processor clock control register (PCC) The PCC register is a special register. Data can be written to this register only in combination of specific sequences (refer to 3.4.7 Special registers). This register can be read or written in 8-bit or 1-bit units. Reset sets this register to 03H. (1/2) After reset: 03H R/W After reset: FFFFF828H < > PCC FRC MCK FRC < > MFRC Note CLS < > CK3 CK2 CK1 CK0 Use of subclock on-chip feedback resistor 0 Used 1 Not used MCK Control of main clock oscillator 0 Oscillation enabled 1 Oscillation stopped * Even if the MCK bit is set to 1 while the system is operating with the main clock as the CPU clock, the operation of the main clock does not stop. It stops after the CPU clock has been changed to the subclock. * When the main clock is stopped and the device is operating on the subclock, clear the MCK bit to 0 and wait until the oscillation stabilization time has been secured by the program before switching back to the main clock. MFRC Use of main clock on-chip feedback resistor 0 Used 1 Not used CLSNote Status of CPU clock (fCPU) 0 Main clock operation 1 Subclock operation Note The CLS bit is a read-only bit. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 177 CHAPTER 6 CLOCK GENERATION FUNCTION (2/2) CK3 CK2 CK1 CK0 0 0 0 0 fXX Clock selection (fCLK/fCPU) 0 0 0 1 fXX/2 0 0 1 0 fXX/4 0 0 1 1 fXX/8 (default value) 0 1 0 0 fXX/16 0 1 0 1 fXX/32 0 1 1 x Setting prohibited 1 x x x fXT Cautions 1. Do not change the CPU clock (by using the CK3 to CK0 bits) while CLKOUT is being output. 2. Use a bit manipulation instruction to manipulate the CK3 bit. When using an 8-bit manipulation instruction, do not change the set values of the CK2 to CK0 bits. 3. When the CPU operates on the subclock and no clock is input to the X1 pin, do not access a register in which a wait occurs (refer to 3.4.8 (1) (b) Access to special on-chip peripheral I/O register for details of the access methods). If a wait occurs, it can only be released by a reset. Remark 178 x: don't care User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 6 CLOCK GENERATION FUNCTION (a) Example of setting main clock operation subclock operation <1> CK3 bit 1: Use of a bit manipulation instruction is recommended. Do not change the CK2 to CK0 bits. <2> Subclock operation: Read the CLS bit to check if subclock operation has started. It takes the following time after the CK3 bit is set until subclock operation is started. Max.: 1/fXT (1/subclock frequency) <3> MCK bit 1: Set the MCK bit to 1 only when stopping the main clock. Cautions 1. When stopping the main clock, stop the PLL. 2. If the following conditions are not satisfied, change the CK2 to CK0 bits so that the conditions are satisfied, then change to the subclock operation mode. Internal system clock (fCLK) > Subclock (fXT: 32.768 kHz) x 4 Remark Internal system clock (fCLK): Clock generated from the main clock (fXX) by setting bits CK2 to CK0 [Description example] <1> _SET_SUB_RUN : st.b r0, PRCMD[r0] set1 3, PCC[r0] -- CK3 bit 1 <2> _CHECK_CLS : tst1 4, PCC[r0] bz _CHECK_CLS -- Wait until subclock operation starts. <3> _STOP_MAIN_CLOCK : st.b r0, PRCMD[r0] set1 6, PCC[r0] Remark -- MCK bit 1, main clock is stopped The above description is an example. Note with caution that the CLS bit is read in a closed loop in <2>. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 179 CHAPTER 6 CLOCK GENERATION FUNCTION (b) Example of setting subclock operation main clock operation <1> MCK bit 0: Main clock starts oscillating <2> Insert waits by the program and wait until the oscillation stabilization time of the main clock elapses. <3> CK3 bit 0: Use of a bit manipulation instruction is recommended. Do not change the CK2 to CK0 bits. <4> Main clock operation: It takes the following time after the CK3 bit is set until main clock operation is started. Max.: 1/fXT (1/subclock frequency) Therefore, insert one NOP instruction immediately after setting the CK3 bit to 0 or read the CLS bit to check if main clock operation has started. [Description example] <1> _START_MAIN_OSC : st.b r0, PRCMD[r0] -- Release of protection of special registers clr1 6, PCC[r0] -- Main clock starts oscillating 0x55, r0, r11 -- Wait for oscillation stabilization time <2> movea _WAIT_OST : nop nop nop addi -1, r11, r11 mp r0, r11 bne _PROGRAM_WAIT <3> st.b clr1 r0, PRCMD[r0] 3, PCC[r0] -- CK3 0 <4> _CHECK_CLS : tst1 4, PCC[r0] bnz _CHECK_CLS Remark -- Wait until main clock operation starts The above description is an example. Note with caution that the CLS bit is read in a closed loop in <4>. 180 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 6 CLOCK GENERATION FUNCTION 6.4 Operation 6.4.1 Operation of each clock The following table shows the operation status of each clock. Table 6-1. Operation Status of Each Clock Register Setting and PCC Register Operation Status CLS bit = 0, CLS bit = 1, CLS bit = 1, MCK bit = 0 MCK bit = 0 MCK bit = 1 HALT IDLE STOP reset During oscillation stabilization time count mode mode mode mode mode mode mode Main clock oscillator (fX) x { { { x { { x x Subclock oscillator (fXT) { { { { { { { { { CPU clock (fCPU) x x x x x { x { x Internal system clock (fCLK) x x { x x { x { x Peripheral clock (fXX to fXX/1024) x x { x x { x x x WT clock (main) x { { { x { { x x WT clock (sub) { { { { { { { { { WDT1 clock (fXW) x { { { x { { x x WDT2 clock (main) x x { x x { x x x WDT2 clock (sub) { { { { { { { { { During Target Clock Remark Subclock Sub-IDLE Subclock Sub-IDLE O: Operable x: Stopped 6.4.2 Clock output function The clock output function is used to output the internal system clock (fCLK) from the CLKOUT pin. The internal system clock (fCLK) is selected by using the PCC.CK3 to PCC.CK0 bits. The CLKOUT pin functions alternately as the PCM1 pin and functions as a clock output pin if so specified by the control register of port CM. The status of the CLKOUT pin is the same as the internal system clock in Table 6-1 and the pin can output the clock when it is in the operable status. It outputs a low level in the stopped status. However, the port mode (PCM1: input mode) is selected until the CLKOUT pin output is set after reset. Consequently, the CLKOUT pin goes into a high-impedance state. 6.4.3 External clock input function An external clock can be directly input to the oscillator. Input the clock to the X1 pin and its inverse signal to the X2 pin. Set the PCC.MFRC bit to 1 (on-chip feedback resistor not used). Note, however, that oscillation stabilization time is inserted even in the external clock mode. Connect VDD directly to the REGC pin. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 181 CHAPTER 6 CLOCK GENERATION FUNCTION 6.5 PLL Function 6.5.1 Overview The PLL function is used to output the operating clock of the CPU and on-chip peripheral function at a frequency 4 times higher than the oscillation frequency, and select the clock-through mode. When PLL function is used: Input clock = 2 to 5 MHz (fXX: 8 to 20 MHz) Clock-through mode: Input clock = 2 to 10 MHz (fXX: 2 to 10 MHz) 6.5.2 Register (1) PLL control register (PLLCTL) The PLLCTL register is an 8-bit register that controls the security function of PLL and RTO. This register can be read or written in 8-bit or 1-bit units. Reset sets this register to 01H. After reset: 01H R/W Address: FFFFF806H < > PLLCTL 0 0 0 PLLON 0 0 Note RTOST0 < > < > SELPLL PLLON PLL operation control 0 PLL stopped 1 PLL operating SELPLL PLL clock selection 0 Clock-through operation 1 PLL operation Note For the RTOST0 bit, refer to CHAPTER 13 REAL-TIME OUTPUT FUNCTION (RTO). Caution Be sure to clear bits 4 to 7 to "0". Changing bit 3 does not affect the operation. 182 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 6 CLOCK GENERATION FUNCTION 6.5.3 Usage (1) When PLL is used * After reset has been released, the PLL operates (PLLCTL.PLLON bit = 1), but because the default mode is the clock-through mode (PLLCTL.SELPLL bit = 0), select the PLL mode (SELPLL bit = 1). * To set the STOP mode in which the main clock is stopped, or to set the IDLE mode, first select the clockthrough mode and then stop the PLL. To return from the IDLE or STOP mode, first enable PLL operation (PLLON bit = 1), and then select the PLL mode (SELPLL bit = 1). * To enable the PLL operation, first set the PLLON bit to 1, wait for 200 s, and then set the SELPLL bit to 1. To stop the PLL, first select the clock-through mode (SELPLL bit = 0), wait for 8 clocks or more, and then stop the PLL (PLLON bit = 0). (2) When PLL is not used * The clock-through mode (SELPLL bit = 0) is selected after reset has been released, but the PLL is operating (PLLON bit = 1) and must therefore be stopped (PLLON bit = 0). Remark The PLL is operable in the IDLE mode. To realize low power consumption, stop the PLL. Be sure to stop the PLL when shifting to the STOP mode. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 183 CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) Timer P (TMP) is a 16-bit timer/event counter. The following products of the V850ES/KF1 have TMP0. PD703211, 703211Y, 70F3211H, 70F3211HY 7.1 Overview An outline of TMP0 is shown below. * Clock selection: 8 ways * Capture trigger input pins: 2 * External event count input pins: 1 * External trigger input pins: 1 * Timer/counters: 1 * Capture/compare registers: 2 * Capture/compare match interrupt request signals: 2 * Timer output pins: 2 7.2 Functions TMP0 has the following functions. * Interval timer * External event counter * External trigger pulse output * One-shot pulse output * PWM output * Free-running timer * Pulse width measurement 184 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) 7.3 Configuration TMP0 includes the following hardware. Table 7-1. Configuration of TMP0 Item Configuration Timer register 16-bit counter Registers TMP0 capture/compare registers 0, 1 (TP0CCR0, TP0CCR1) TMP0 counter read buffer register (TP0CNT) CCR0, CCR1 buffer registers Note Timer inputs 2 (TIP00 , TIP01 pins) Timer outputs 2 (TOP00, TOP01 pins) Control registers TMP0 control registers 0, 1 (TP0CTL0, TP0CTL1) TMP0 I/O control registers 0 to 2 (TP0IOC0 to TP0IOC2) TMP0 option register 0 (TP0OPT0) Note The TIP00 pin functions alternately as a capture trigger input signal, external event count input signal, and external trigger input signal. Figure 7-1. Block Diagram of TMP0 Internal bus TP0CNT Selector TIP00 TIP01 Digital noise eliminator Clear CCR0 buffer register Edge detector Edge detector INTTP0OV 16-bit counter Output controller Selector fXX fXX/2 fXX/4 fXX/8 fXX/16 fXX/32 fXX/64 fXX/128 CCR1 buffer register TOP00 TOP01 INTTP0CC0 INTTP0CC1 TP0CCR0 TP0CCR1 Internal bus Remark fXX: Main clock frequency User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 185 CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) (1) 16-bit counter This 16-bit counter can count internal clocks or external events. The count value of this counter can be read by using the TP0CNT register. When the TP0CTL0.TP0CE bit = 0, the value of the 16-bit counter is FFFFH. If the TP0CNT register is read at this time, 0000H is read. Reset sets the TP0CE bit to 0. Therefore, the 16-bit counter is set to FFFFH. (2) CCR0 buffer register This is a 16-bit compare register that compares the count value of the 16-bit counter. When the TP0CCR0 register is used as a compare register, the value written to the TP0CCR0 register is transferred to the CCR0 buffer register. When the count value of the 16-bit counter matches the value of the CCR0 buffer register, a compare match interrupt request signal (INTTP0CC0) is generated. The CCR0 buffer register cannot be read or written directly. The CCR0 buffer register is cleared to 0000H after reset, as the TP0CCR0 register is cleared to 0000H. (3) CCR1 buffer register This is a 16-bit compare register that compares the count value of the 16-bit counter. When the TP0CCR1 register is used as a compare register, the value written to the TP0CCR1 register is transferred to the CCR1 buffer register. When the count value of the 16-bit counter matches the value of the CCR1 buffer register, a compare match interrupt request signal (INTTP0CC1) is generated. The CCR1 buffer register cannot be read or written directly. The CCR1 buffer register is cleared to 0000H after reset, as the TP0CCR1 register is cleared to 0000H. (4) Edge detector This circuit detects the valid edges input to the TIP00 and TIP01 pins. No edge, rising edge, falling edge, or both the rising and falling edges can be selected as the valid edge by using the TP0IOC1 and TP0IOC2 registers. (5) Output controller This circuit controls the output of the TOP00 and TOP01 pins. The output controller is controlled by the TP0IOC0 register. (6) Selector This selector selects the count clock for the 16-bit counter. Eight types of internal clocks or an external event can be selected as the count clock. (7) Digital noise eliminator This circuit is valid only when the TIP0a pin is used as a capture trigger input pin. This circuit is controlled by the TIP0a noise elimination register (PaNFC). Remark 186 a = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) 7.4 Registers (1) TMP0 control register 0 (TP0CTL0) The TP0CTL0 register is an 8-bit register that controls the operation of TMP0. This register can be read or written in 8-bit or 1-bit units. Reset sets this register to 00H. The same value can always be written to the TP0CTL0 register by software. After reset: 00H TP0CTL0 R/W Address: FFFFF5A0H <7> 6 5 4 3 TP0CE 0 0 0 0 TP0CE 2 1 0 TP0CKS2 TP0CKS1 TP0CKS0 TMP0 operation control 0 TMP0 operation disabled (TMP0 reset asynchronouslyNote). 1 TMP0 operation enabled. TMP0 operation started. TP0CKS2 TP0CKS1 TP0CKS0 Internal count clock selection 0 0 0 fXX 0 0 1 fXX/2 0 1 0 fXX/4 0 1 1 fXX/8 1 0 0 fXX/16 1 0 1 fXX/32 1 1 0 fXX/64 1 1 1 fXX/128 Note TP0OPT0.TP0OVF bit, 16-bit counter, timer output (TOP00, TOP01 pins) Cautions 1. Set the TP0CKS2 to TP0CKS0 bits when the TP0CE bit = 0. When the value of the TP0CE bit is changed from 0 to 1, the TP0CKS2 to TP0CKS0 bits can be set simultaneously. 2. Be sure to clear bits 3 to 6 to "0". Remark fXX: Main clock frequency User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 187 CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) (2) TMP0 control register 1 (TP0CTL1) The TP0CTL1 register is an 8-bit register that controls the operation of TMP0. This register can be read or written in 8-bit or 1-bit units. Reset sets this register to 00H. After reset: 00H TP0CTL1 R/W Address: FFFFF5A1H 7 <6> <5> 4 3 0 TP0EST TP0EEE 0 0 TP0EST 2 1 0 TP0MD2 TP0MD1 TP0MD0 Software trigger control 0 - 1 Generate a valid signal for external trigger input. * In one-shot pulse output mode: A one-shot pulse is output with writing 1 to the TP0EST bit as the trigger. * In external trigger pulse output mode: A PWM waveform is output with writing 1 to the TP0EST bit as the trigger. TP0EEE Count clock selection 0 Disable operation with external event count input. (Perform counting with the count clock selected by the TP0CTL0.TP0CK0 to TP0CTL0.TP0CK2 bits.) 1 Enable operation with external event count input. (Perform counting at the valid edge of the external event count input signal.) The TP0EEE bit selects whether counting is performed with the internal count clock or the valid edge of the external event count input. TP0MD2 TP0MD1 TP0MD0 Timer mode selection 0 0 0 Interval timer mode 0 0 1 External event count mode 0 1 0 External trigger pulse output mode 0 1 1 One-shot pulse output mode 1 0 0 PWM output mode 1 0 1 Free-running timer mode 1 1 0 Pulse width measurement mode 1 1 1 Setting prohibited Cautions 1. The TP0EST bit is valid only in the external trigger pulse output mode or one-shot pulse output mode. In any other mode, writing 1 to this bit is ignored. 2. External event count input is selected in the external event count mode regardless of the value of the TP0EEE bit. 3. Set the TP0EEE and TP0MD2 to TP0MD0 bits when the TP0CTL0.TP0CE bit = 0. (The same value can be written when the TP0CE bit = 1.) The operation is not guaranteed when rewriting is performed with the TP0CE bit = 1. If rewriting was mistakenly performed, clear the TP0CE bit to 0 and then set the bits again. 4. Be sure to clear bits 3, 4, and 7 to "0". 188 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) (3) TMP0 I/O control register 0 (TP0IOC0) The TP0IOC0 register is an 8-bit register that controls the timer output (TOP00, TOP01 pins). This register can be read or written in 8-bit or 1-bit units. Reset sets this register to 00H. After reset: 00H TP0IOC0 R/W Address: FFFFF5A2H 7 6 5 4 0 0 0 0 3 <2> TP0OL1 TP0OE1 1 <0> TP0OL0 TP0OE0 TOP01 pin output level settingNote TP0OL1 0 TOP01 pin starts output at high level. 1 TOP01 pin starts output at low level. TP0OE1 TOP01 pin output setting 0 Timer output disabled * When TP0OL1 bit = 0: Low level is output from the TOP01 pin * When TP0OL1 bit = 1: High level is output from the TOP01 pin 1 Timer output enabled (a square wave is output from the TOP01 pin). TOP00 pin output level settingNote TP0OL0 0 TOP00 pin starts output at high level. 1 TOP00 pin starts output at low level. TP0OE0 TOP00 pin output setting 0 Timer output disabled * When TP0OL0 bit = 0: Low level is output from the TOP00 pin * When TP0OL0 bit = 1: High level is output from the TOP00 pin 1 Timer output enabled (a square wave is output from the TOP00 pin). Note The output level of the timer output pin (TOP0n) specified by the TP0OLn bit is shown below (n = 0, 1). * When TP0OLn bit = 0 * When TP0OLn bit = 1 16-bit counter 16-bit counter TP0CE bit TP0CE bit TOP0n output pin TOP0n output pin Cautions 1. Rewrite the TP0OL1, TP0OE1, TP0OL0, and TP0OE0 bits when the TP0CTL0.TP0CE bit = 0. (The same value can be written when the TP0CE bit = 1.) If rewriting was mistakenly performed, clear the TP0CE bit to 0 and then set the bits again. 2. Even if the TP0OLa bit is manipulated when the TP0CE and TP0OEa bits are 0, the TOP0a pin output level varies (a = 0, 1). User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 189 CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) (4) TMP0 I/O control register 1 (TP0IOC1) The TP0IOC1 register is an 8-bit register that controls the valid edge of the capture trigger input signals (TIP00, TIP01 pins). This register can be read or written in 8-bit or 1-bit units. Reset sets this register to 00H. After reset: 00H TP0IOC1 R/W Address: FFFFF5A3H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 TP0IS3 TP0IS2 TP0IS1 TP0IS0 TP0IS3 TP0IS2 0 0 No edge detection (capture operation invalid) 0 1 Detection of rising edge 1 0 Detection of falling edge 1 1 Detection of both edges TP0IS1 TP0IS0 0 0 No edge detection (capture operation invalid) 0 1 Detection of rising edge 1 0 Detection of falling edge 1 1 Detection of both edges Capture trigger input signal (TIP01 pin) valid edge setting Capture trigger input signal (TIP00 pin) valid edge setting Cautions 1. Rewrite the TP0IS3 to TP0IS0 bits when the TP0CTL0.TP0CE bit = 0. (The same value can be written when the TP0CE bit = 1.) If rewriting was mistakenly performed, clear the TP0CE bit to 0 and then set the bits again. 2. The TP0IS3 to TP0IS0 bits are valid only in the freerunning timer mode and the pulse width measurement mode. In all other modes, a capture operation is not possible. 190 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) (5) TMP0 I/O control register 2 (TP0IOC2) The TP0IOC2 register is an 8-bit register that controls the valid edge of the external event count input signal (TIP00 pin) and external trigger input signal (TIP00 pin). This register can be read or written in 8-bit or 1-bit units. Reset sets this register to 00H. After reset: 00H TP0IOC2 R/W Address: FFFFF5A4H 7 6 5 4 0 0 0 0 3 2 1 0 TP0EES1 TP0EES0 TP0ETS1 TP0ETS0 TP0EES1 TP0EES0 External event count input signal (TIP00 pin) valid edge setting 0 0 No edge detection (external event count invalid) 0 1 Detection of rising edge 1 0 Detection of falling edge 1 1 Detection of both edges TP0ETS1 TP0ETS0 External trigger input signal (TIP00 pin) valid edge setting 0 0 No edge detection (external trigger invalid) 0 1 Detection of rising edge 1 0 Detection of falling edge 1 1 Detection of both edges Cautions 1. Rewrite the TP0EES1, TP0EES0, TP0ETS1, and TP0ETS0 bits when the TP0CTL0.TP0CE bit = 0. (The same value can be written when the TP0CE bit = 1.) If rewriting was mistakenly performed, clear the TP0CE bit to 0 and then set the bits again. 2. The TP0EES1 and TP0EES0 bits are valid only when the TP0CTL1.TP0EEE bit = 1 or when the external event count mode (TP0CTL1.TP0MD2 to TP0CTL1.TP0MD0 bits = 001) has been set. <R> 3. The TP0ETS1 and TP0ETS0 bits are valid only when the external trigger pulse output mode (TP0MD2 to TP0MD0 bits = 010) or the one-shot pulse output mode (TP0MD2 to TP0MD0 bits = 011) is set. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 191 CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) (6) TMP0 option register 0 (TP0OPT0) The TP0OPT0 register is an 8-bit register used to set the capture/compare operation and detect an overflow. This register can be read or written in 8-bit or 1-bit units. Reset sets this register to 00H. After reset: 00H TP0OPT0 R/W 7 6 0 0 TP0CCS1 Address: FFFFF5A5H 5 4 TP0CCS1 TP0CCS0 3 2 1 <0> 0 0 0 TP0OVF TP0CCR1 register capture/compare selection 0 Compare register selected 1 Capture register selected The TP0CCS1 bit setting is valid only in the free-running timer mode. TP0CCS0 TP0CCR0 register capture/compare selection 0 Compare register selected 1 Capture register selected The TP0CCS0 bit setting is valid only in the free-running timer mode. TP0OVF TMP0 overflow detection flag Set (1) Overflow occurred Reset (0) TP0OVF bit 0 written or TP0CTL0.TP0CE bit = 0 * The TP0OVF bit is set when the 16-bit counter count value overflows from FFFFH to 0000H in the free-running timer mode or the pulse width measurement mode. * An interrupt request signal (INTTP0OV) is generated at the same time that the TP0OVF bit is set to 1. The INTTP0OV signal is not generated in modes other than the free-running timer mode and the pulse width measurement mode. * The TP0OVF bit is not cleared even when the TP0OVF bit or the TP0OPT0 register are read when the TP0OVF bit = 1. * The TP0OVF bit can be both read and written, but the TP0OVF bit cannot be set to 1 by software. Writing 1 has no influence on the operation of TMP0. Cautions 1. Rewrite the TP0CCS1 and TP0CCS0 bits when the TP0CE bit = 0. (The same value can be written when the TP0CE bit = 1.) If rewriting was mistakenly performed, clear the TP0CE bit to 0 and then set the bits again. 2. Be sure to clear bits 1 to 3, 6, and 7 to "0". 192 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) (7) TMP0 capture/compare register 0 (TP0CCR0) The TP0CCR0 register can be used as a capture register or a compare register depending on the mode. This register can be used as a capture register or a compare register only in the free-running timer mode, depending on the setting of the TP0OPT0.TP0CCS0 bit. In the pulse width measurement mode, the TP0CCR0 register can be used only as a capture register. In any other mode, this register can be used only as a compare register. The TP0CCR0 register can be read or written during operation. This register can be read or written in 16-bit units. Reset sets this register to 0000H. Caution Accessing the TP0CCR0 register is disabled during subclock operation with the main clock stopped. For details, refer to 3.4.8 (1) (b). After reset: 0000H 15 14 R/W 13 12 Address: FFFFF5A6H 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TP0CCR0 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 193 CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) (a) Function as compare register The TP0CCR0 register can be rewritten even when the TP0CTL0.TP0CE bit = 1. The set value of the TP0CCR0 register is transferred to the CCR0 buffer register. When the value of the 16-bit counter matches the value of the CCR0 buffer register, a compare match interrupt request signal (INTTP0CC0) is generated. If TOP00 pin output is enabled at this time, the output of the TOP00 pin is inverted. When the TP0CCR0 register is used as a cycle register in the interval timer mode, external event count mode, external trigger pulse output mode, one-shot pulse output mode, or PWM output mode, the value of the 16-bit counter is cleared (0000H) if its count value matches the value of the CCR0 buffer register. (b) Function as capture register When the TP0CCR0 register is used as a capture register in the free-running timer mode, the count value of the 16-bit counter is stored in the TP0CCR0 register if the valid edge of the capture trigger input pin (TIP00 pin) is detected. In the pulse width measurement mode, the count value of the 16-bit counter is stored in the TP0CCR0 register and the 16-bit counter is cleared (0000H) if the valid edge of the capture trigger input pin (TIP00 pin) is detected. Even if the capture operation and reading the TP0CCR0 register conflict, the correct value of the TP0CCR0 register can be read. The following table shows the functions of the capture/compare register in each mode, and how to write data to the compare register. Table 7-2. Function of Capture/Compare Register in Each Mode and How to Write Compare Register Operation Mode 194 Capture/Compare Register How to Write Compare Register Interval timer Compare register Anytime write External event counter Compare register Anytime write External trigger pulse output Compare register Batch write One-shot pulse output Compare register Anytime write PWM output Compare register Batch write Free-running timer Capture/compare register Anytime write Pulse width measurement Capture register User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD - CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) (8) TMP0 capture/compare register 1 (TP0CCR1) The TP0CCR1 register can be used as a capture register or a compare register depending on the mode. This register can be used as a capture register or a compare register only in the free-running timer mode, depending on the setting of the TP0OPT0.TP0CCS1 bit. In the pulse width measurement mode, the TP0CCR1 register can be used only as a capture register. In any other mode, this register can be used only as a compare register. The TP0CCR1 register can be read or written during operation. This register can be read or written in 16-bit units. Reset sets this register to 0000H. Caution Accessing the TP0CCR1 register is disabled during subclock operation with the main clock stopped. For details, refer to 3.4.8 (1) (b). After reset: 0000H 15 14 R/W 13 12 Address: FFFFF5A8H 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TP0CCR1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 195 CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) (a) Function as compare register The TP0CCR1 register can be rewritten even when the TP0CTL0.TP0CE bit = 1. The set value of the TP0CCR1 register is transferred to the CCR1 buffer register. When the value of the 16-bit counter matches the value of the CCR1 buffer register, a compare match interrupt request signal (INTTP0CC1) is generated. If TOP01 pin output is enabled at this time, the output of the TOP01 pin is inverted. (b) Function as capture register When the TP0CCR1 register is used as a capture register in the free-running timer mode, the count value of the 16-bit counter is stored in the TP0CCR1 register if the valid edge of the capture trigger input pin (TIP01 pin) is detected. In the pulse width measurement mode, the count value of the 16-bit counter is stored in the TP0CCR1 register and the 16-bit counter is cleared (0000H) if the valid edge of the capture trigger input pin (TIP01 pin) is detected. Even if the capture operation and reading the TP0CCR1 register conflict, the correct value of the TP0CCR1 register can be read. The following table shows the functions of the capture/compare register in each mode, and how to write data to the compare register. Table 7-3. Function of Capture/Compare Register in Each Mode and How to Write Compare Register Operation Mode 196 Capture/Compare Register How to Write Compare Register Interval timer Compare register Anytime write External event counter Compare register Anytime write External trigger pulse output Compare register Batch write One-shot pulse output Compare register Anytime write PWM output Compare register Batch write Free-running timer Capture/compare register Anytime write Pulse width measurement Capture register User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD - CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) (9) TMP0 counter read buffer register (TP0CNT) The TP0CNT register is a read buffer register that can read the count value of the 16-bit counter. If this register is read when the TP0CTL0.TP0CE bit = 1, the count value of the 16-bit timer can be read. This register is read-only, in 16-bit units. The value of the TP0CNT register is cleared to 0000H when the TP0CE bit = 0. If the TP0CNT register is read at this time, the value of the 16-bit counter (FFFFH) is not read, but 0000H is read. The value of the TP0CNT register is cleared to 0000H after reset, as the TP0CE bit is cleared to 0. Caution Accessing the TP0CNT register is disabled during subclock operation with the main clock stopped. For details, refer to 3.4.8 (1) (b). After reset: 0000H 15 14 R 13 Address: FFFFF5AAH 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TP0CNT User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 197 CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) 7.5 Operation TMP0 can perform the following operations. TP0CTL1.TP0EST Bit Operation TIP00 Pin (Software Trigger Bit) (External Trigger Input) Interval timer mode External event count mode Invalid Note 1 Note 2 External trigger pulse output mode One-shot pulse output mode Note 2 PWM output mode Free-running timer mode Pulse width measurement mode Note 2 Capture/Compare Compare Register Register Setting Write Invalid Compare only Anytime write Invalid Invalid Compare only Anytime write Valid Valid Compare only Batch write Valid Valid Compare only Anytime write Invalid Invalid Compare only Batch write Invalid Invalid Switching enabled Anytime write Invalid Invalid Capture only Not applicable Notes 1. To use the external event count mode, specify that the valid edge of the TIP00 pin capture trigger input is not detected (by clearing the TP0IOC1.TP0IS1 and TP0IOC1.TP0IS0 bits to "00"). 2. When using the external trigger pulse output mode, one-shot pulse output mode, and pulse width measurement mode, select the internal clock as the count clock (by clearing the TP0CTL1.TP0EEE bit to 0). 198 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) 7.5.1 Interval timer mode (TP0MD2 to TP0MD0 bits = 000) In the interval timer mode, an interrupt request signal (INTTP0CC0) is generated at the specified interval if the TP0CTL0.TP0CE bit is set to 1. A square wave whose half cycle is equal to the interval can be output from the TOP00 pin. Usually, the TP0CCR1 register is not used in the interval timer mode. Figure 7-2. Configuration of Interval Timer Clear Count clock selection Output controller 16-bit counter Match signal TP0CE bit TOP00 pin INTTP0CC0 signal CCR0 buffer register TP0CCR0 register Figure 7-3. Basic Timing of Operation in Interval Timer Mode FFFFH 16-bit counter D0 D0 D0 D0 0000H TP0CE bit TP0CCR0 register D0 TOP00 pin output INTTP0CC0 signal Interval (D0 + 1) Interval (D0 + 1) Interval (D0 + 1) Interval (D0 + 1) User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 199 CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) When the TP0CE bit is set to 1, the value of the 16-bit counter is cleared from FFFFH to 0000H in synchronization with the count clock, and the counter starts counting. At this time, the output of the TOP00 pin is inverted. Additionally, the set value of the TP0CCR0 register is transferred to the CCR0 buffer register. When the count value of the 16-bit counter matches the value of the CCR0 buffer register, the 16-bit counter is cleared to 0000H, the output of the TOP00 pin is inverted, and a compare match interrupt request signal (INTTP0CC0) is generated. The interval can be calculated by the following expression. Interval = (Set value of TP0CCR0 register + 1) x Count clock cycle Figure 7-4. Register Setting for Interval Timer Mode Operation (1/2) (a) TMP0 control register 0 (TP0CTL0) TP0CE TP0CTL0 0/1 TP0CKS2 TP0CKS1 TP0CKS0 0 0 0 0 0/1 0/1 0/1 Select count clock 0: Stop counting 1: Enable counting (b) TMP0 control register 1 (TP0CTL1) TP0EST TP0EEE TP0CTL1 0 Note 0 0/1 TP0MD2 TP0MD1 TP0MD0 0 0 0 0 0 0, 0, 0: Interval timer mode 0: Operate on count clock selected by TP0CKS0 to TP0CKS2 bits 1: Count with external event count input signal (c) TMP0 I/O control register 0 (TP0IOC0) TP0OL1 TP0IOC0 0 0 0 0 0/1 TP0OE1 TP0OL0 0/1 0/1 TP0OE0 0/1 0: Disable TOP00 pin output 1: Enable TOP00 pin output Setting of output level with operation of TOP00 pin disabled 0: Low level 1: High level 0: Disable TOP01 pin output 1: Enable TOP01 pin output Setting of output level with operation of TOP01 pin disabled 0: Low level 1: High level <R> Note This bit can be set to 1 only when the interrupt request signals (INTTP0CC0 and INTTP0CC1) are masked by the interrupt mask flags (TP0CCMK0 and TP0CCMK1) and timer output (TOP01) is performed at the same time. However, set the TP0CCR0 and TP0CCR1 registers to the same value (refer to 7.5.1 (2) (d) Operation of TP0CCR1 register). 200 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) Figure 7-4. Register Setting for Interval Timer Mode Operation (2/2) (d) TMP0 counter read buffer register (TP0CNT) By reading the TP0CNT register, the count value of the 16-bit counter can be read. (e) TMP0 capture/compare register 0 (TP0CCR0) If the TP0CCR0 register is set to D0, the interval is as follows. Interval = (D0 + 1) x Count clock cycle (f) TMP0 capture/compare register 1 (TP0CCR1) Usually, the TP0CCR1 register is not used in the interval timer mode. However, the set value of the TP0CCR1 register is transferred to the CCR1 buffer register. A compare match interrupt request signal (INTTP0CC1) is generated when the count value of the 16-bit counter matches the value of the CCR1 buffer register. Therefore, mask the interrupt request by using the corresponding interrupt mask flag (TP0CCMK1). Remark TMP0 I/O control register 1 (TP0IOC1), TMP0 I/O control register 2 (TP0IOC2), and TMP0 option register 0 (TP0OPT0) are usually not used in the interval timer mode. However, set the TP0IOC2 register to use the external event count input. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 201 CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) (1) Interval timer mode operation flow Figure 7-5. Software Processing Flow in Interval Timer Mode FFFFH D0 16-bit counter D0 D0 0000H TP0CE bit TP0CCR0 register D0 TOP00 pin output INTTP0CC0 signal <1> <2> <1> Count operation start flow START Register initial setting TP0CTL0 register (TP0CKS0 to TP0CKS2 bits) TP0CTL1 register, TP0IOC0 register, TP0CCR0 register TP0CE bit = 1 Initial setting of these registers is performed before setting the TP0CE bit to 1. The TP0CKS0 to TP0CKS2 bits can be set at the same time when counting has been started (TP0CE bit = 1). <2> Count operation stop flow TP0CE bit = 0 The counter is initialized and counting is stopped by clearing the TP0CE bit to 0. STOP 202 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) (2) Interval timer mode operation timing (a) Operation if TP0CCR0 register is cleared to 0000H If the TP0CCR0 register is cleared to 0000H, the INTTP0CC0 signal is generated at each count clock, and the output of the TOP00 pin is inverted. The value of the 16-bit counter is always 0000H. Count clock 16-bit counter FFFFH 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H TP0CE bit TP0CCR0 register 0000H TOP00 pin output INTTP0CC0 signal Interval time Interval time Interval time Count clock cycle Count clock cycle Count clock cycle User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 203 CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) (b) Operation if TP0CCR0 register is set to FFFFH If the TP0CCR0 register is set to FFFFH, the 16-bit counter counts up to FFFFH. The counter is cleared to 0000H in synchronization with the next count-up timing. The INTTP0CC0 signal is generated and the output of the TOP00 pin is inverted. At this time, an overflow interrupt request signal (INTTP0OV) is not generated, nor is the overflow flag (TP0OPT0.TP0OVF bit) set to 1. FFFFH 16-bit counter 0000H TP0CE bit TP0CCR0 register FFFFH TOP00 pin output INTTP0CC0 signal Interval time Interval time Interval time 10000H x 10000H x 10000H x count clock cycle count clock cycle count clock cycle 204 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) (c) Notes on rewriting TP0CCR0 register To change the value of the TP0CCR0 register to a smaller value, stop counting once and then change the set value. If the value of the TP0CCR0 register is rewritten to a smaller value during counting, the 16-bit counter may overflow. FFFFH D1 D1 16-bit counter D2 D2 D2 0000H TP0CE bit D1 TP0CCR0 register TP0OL0 bit D2 L TOP00 pin output INTTP0CC0 signal Interval time (1) Remark Interval time (NG) Interval time (2) Interval time (1): (D1 + 1) x Count clock cycle Interval time (NG): (10000H + D2 + 1) x Count clock cycle Interval time (2): (D2 + 1) x Count clock cycle If the value of the TP0CCR0 register is changed from D1 to D2 while the count value is greater than D2 but less than D1, the count value is transferred to the CCR0 buffer register as soon as the TP0CCR0 register has been rewritten. Consequently, the value of the 16-bit counter that is compared is D2. Because the count value has already exceeded D2, however, the 16-bit counter counts up to FFFFH, overflows, and then counts up again from 0000H. When the count value matches D2, the INTTP0CC0 signal is generated and the output of the TOP00 pin is inverted. Therefore, the INTTP0CC0 signal may not be generated at the interval time "(D1 + 1) x Count clock cycle" or "(D2 + 1) x Count clock cycle" originally expected, but may be generated at an interval of "(10000H + D2 + 1) x Count clock period". User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 205 CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) (d) Operation of TP0CCR1 register Figure 7-6. Configuration of TP0CCR1 Register TP0CCR1 register CCR1 buffer register Output controller Match signal TOP01 pin INTTP0CC1 signal Clear Count clock selection 16-bit counter Match signal TP0CE bit CCR0 buffer register TP0CCR0 register 206 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD Output controller TOP00 pin INTTP0CC0 signal CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) If the set value of the TP0CCR1 register is less than the set value of the TP0CCR0 register, the INTTP0CC1 signal is generated once per cycle. At the same time, the output of the TOP01 pin is inverted. The TOP01 pin outputs a square wave with the same cycle as that output by the TOP00 pin. Figure 7-7. Timing Chart When D01 D11 FFFFH D01 16-bit counter D11 D01 D11 D01 D11 D01 D11 0000H TP0CE bit TP0CCR0 register D01 TOP00 pin output INTTP0CC0 signal TP0CCR1 register D11 TOP01 pin output INTTP0CC1 signal User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 207 CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) If the set value of the TP0CCR1 register is greater than the set value of the TP0CCR0 register, the count value of the 16-bit counter does not match the value of the TP0CCR1 register. INTTP0CC1 signal is not generated, nor is the output of the TOP01 pin changed. Figure 7-8. Timing Chart When D01 < D11 FFFFH D01 D01 D01 16-bit counter 0000H TP0CE bit TP0CCR0 register D01 TOP00 pin output INTTP0CC0 signal D11 TP0CCR1 register TOP01 pin output INTTP0CC1 signal 208 L User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD D01 Consequently, the CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) 7.5.2 External event count mode (TP0MD2 to TP0MD0 bits = 001) In the external event count mode, the valid edge of the external event count input is counted when the TP0CTL0.TP0CE bit is set to 1, and an interrupt request signal (INTTP0CC0) is generated each time the specified number of edges have been counted. The timer output (TOP00, TOP01 pins) cannot be used. Usually, the TP0CCR1 register is not used in the external event count mode. Figure 7-9. Configuration in External Event Count Mode Clear TIP00 pin (external event count input) Edge detector 16-bit counter Match signal TP0CE bit INTTP0CC0 signal CCR0 buffer register TP0CCR0 register <R> Figure 7-10. Basic Timing in External Event Count Mode FFFFH 16-bit counter D0 D0 D0 0000H 16-bit counter TP0CE bit External event count input (TIP00 pin input) TP0CCR0 register TP0CCR0 register D0 D0 0000 0001 D0 INTTP0CC0 signal INTTP0CC0 signal External event count interval (D0 + 1) Remark D0 - 1 External event count interval (D0 + 1) External event count interval (D0 + 1) This figure shows the basic timing when the rising edge is specified as the valid edge of the external event count input. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 209 CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) When the TP0CE bit is set to 1, the value of the 16-bit counter is cleared from FFFFH to 0000H. The counter counts each time the valid edge of external event count input is detected. Additionally, the set value of the TP0CCR0 register is transferred to the CCR0 buffer register. When the count value of the 16-bit counter matches the value of the CCR0 buffer register, the 16-bit counter is cleared to 0000H, and a compare match interrupt request signal (INTTP0CC0) is generated. The INTTP0CC0 signal is generated each time the valid edge of the external event count input has been detected (set value of TP0CCR0 register + 1) times. Figure 7-11. Register Setting for Operation in External Event Count Mode (1/2) (a) TMP0 control register 0 (TP0CTL0) TP0CE TP0CTL0 0/1 TP0CKS2 TP0CKS1 TP0CKS0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0: Stop counting 1: Enable counting (b) TMP0 control register 1 (TP0CTL1) TP0EST TP0EEE TP0CTL1 0 0 0 TP0MD2 TP0MD1 TP0MD0 0 0 0 0 1 0, 0, 1: External event count mode (c) TMP0 I/O control register 0 (TP0IOC0) TP0OL1 TP0IOC0 0 0 0 0 0 TP0OE1 TP0OL0 0 0 TP0OE0 0 0: Disable TOP00 pin output 0: Disable TOP01 pin output (d) TMP0 I/O control register 2 (TP0IOC2) TP0EES1 TP0EES0 TP0ETS1 TP0ETS0 TP0IOC2 0 0 0 0 0/1 0/1 0 0 Select valid edge of external event count input 210 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) Figure 7-11. Register Setting for Operation in External Event Count Mode (2/2) (e) TMP0 counter read buffer register (TP0CNT) The count value of the 16-bit counter can be read by reading the TP0CNT register. (f) TMP0 capture/compare register 0 (TP0CCR0) If D0 is set to the TP0CCR0 register, the counter is cleared and a compare match interrupt request signal (INTTP0CC0) is generated when the number of external event counts reaches (D0 + 1). (g) TMP0 capture/compare register 1 (TP0CCR1) Usually, the TP0CCR1 register is not used in the external event count mode. However, the set value of the TP0CCR1 register is transferred to the CCR1 buffer register. When the count value of the 16-bit counter matches the value of the CCR1 buffer register, a compare match interrupt request signal (INTTP0CC1) is generated. Therefore, mask the interrupt signal by using the interrupt mask flag (TP0CCMK1). Remark TMP0 I/O control register 1 (TP0IOC1) and TMP0 option register 0 (TP0OPT0) are not used in the external event count mode. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 211 CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) (1) External event count mode operation flow Figure 7-12. Flow of Software Processing in External Event Count Mode FFFFH D0 16-bit counter D0 D0 0000H TP0CE bit TP0CCR0 register D0 INTTP0CC0 signal <1> <2> <1> Count operation start flow START Register initial setting TP0CTL0 register (TP0CKS0 to TP0CKS2 bits) TP0CTL1 register, TP0IOC0 register, TP0IOC2 register, TP0CCR0 register TP0CE bit = 1 Initial setting of these registers is performed before setting the TP0CE bit to 1. The TP0CKS0 to TP0CKS2 bits can be set at the same time when counting has been started (TP0CE bit = 1). <2> Count operation stop flow TP0CE bit = 0 The counter is initialized and counting is stopped by clearing the TP0CE bit to 0. STOP 212 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) (2) Operation timing in external event count mode <R> Cautions 1. In the external event count mode, do not set the TP0CCR0 and TP0CCR1 registers to 0000H. <R> 2. In the external event count mode, use of the timer output is disabled. If performing timer output using external event count input, set the interval timer mode, and select the operation enabled by the external event count input for the count clock (TP0CTL1.TP0MD2 to TP0CTL1.TP0MD0 bits = 000, TP0CTL1.TP0EEE bit = 1). (a) Operation if TP0CCR0 register is set to FFFFH If the TP0CCR0 register is set to FFFFH, the 16-bit counter counts to FFFFH each time the valid edge of the external event count signal has been detected. The 16-bit counter is cleared to 0000H in synchronization with the next count-up timing, and the INTTP0CC0 signal is generated. At this time, the TP0OPT0.TP0OVF bit is not set. FFFFH 16-bit counter 0000H TP0CE bit TP0CCR0 register FFFFH INTTP0CC0 signal External event count signal interval External event count signal interval User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD External event count signal interval 213 CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) (b) Notes on rewriting the TP0CCR0 register To change the value of the TP0CCR0 register to a smaller value, stop counting once and then change the set value. If the value of the TP0CCR0 register is rewritten to a smaller value during counting, the 16-bit counter may overflow. FFFFH D1 16-bit counter D1 D2 D2 D2 0000H TP0CE bit TP0CCR0 register D1 D2 INTTP0CC0 signal External event count signal interval (1) (D1 + 1) External event count signal interval (NG) (10000H + D2 + 1) External event count signal interval (2) (D2 + 1) If the value of the TP0CCR0 register is changed from D1 to D2 while the count value is greater than D2 but less than D1, the count value is transferred to the CCR0 buffer register as soon as the TP0CCR0 register has been rewritten. Consequently, the value that is compared with the 16-bit counter is D2. Because the count value has already exceeded D2, however, the 16-bit counter counts up to FFFFH, overflows, and then counts up again from 0000H. When the count value matches D2, the INTTP0CC0 signal is generated. Therefore, the INTTP0CC0 signal may not be generated at the valid edge count of "(D1 + 1) times" or "(D2 + 1) times" originally expected, but may be generated at the valid edge count of "(10000H + D2 + 1) times". 214 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) (c) Operation of TP0CCR1 register Figure 7-13. Configuration of TP0CCR1 Register TP0CCR1 register CCR1 buffer register Match signal INTTP0CC1 signal Clear TIP00 pin Edge detector 16-bit counter Match signal TP0CE bit INTTP0CC0 signal CCR0 buffer register TP0CCR0 register If the set value of the TP0CCR1 register is smaller than the set value of the TP0CCR0 register, the INTTP0CC1 signal is generated once per cycle. Figure 7-14. Timing Chart When D01 D11 FFFFH D01 16-bit counter D11 D01 D11 D01 D11 D01 D11 0000H TP0CE bit TP0CCR0 register D01 INTTP0CC0 signal TP0CCR1 register D11 INTTP0CC1 signal User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 215 CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) If the set value of the TP0CCR1 register is greater than the set value of the TP0CCR0 register, the INTTP0CC1 signal is not generated because the count value of the 16-bit counter and the value of the TP0CCR1 register do not match. Figure 7-15. Timing Chart When D01 < D11 FFFFH D01 D01 D01 16-bit counter 0000H TP0CE bit TP0CCR0 register D01 INTTP0CC0 signal D11 TP0CCR1 register INTTP0CC1 signal 216 L User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD D01 CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) 7.5.3 External trigger pulse output mode (TP0MD2 to TP0MD0 bits = 010) In the external trigger pulse output mode, 16-bit timer/event counter P waits for a trigger when the TP0CTL0.TP0CE bit is set to 1. When the valid edge of an external trigger input signal is detected, 16-bit timer/event counter P starts counting, and outputs a PWM waveform from the TOP01 pin. Pulses can also be output by generating a software trigger instead of using the external trigger. When using a software trigger, a square wave that has one cycle of the PWM waveform as half its cycle can also be output from the TOP00 pin. Figure 7-16. Configuration in External Trigger Pulse Output Mode TP0CCR1 register Edge detector TIP00 pin Transfer CCR1 buffer register Software trigger generation Output S controller R (RS-FF) Match signal TOP01 pin INTTP0CC1 signal Clear Count clock selection Count start control 16-bit counter Output controller Match signal TP0CE bit TOP00 pin INTTP0CC0 signal CCR0 buffer register Transfer TP0CCR0 register User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 217 CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) Figure 7-17. Basic Timing in External Trigger Pulse Output Mode FFFFH D0 16-bit counter D1 D0 D0 D1 D1 D0 D1 0000H TP0CE bit External trigger input (TIP00 pin input) D0 TP0CCR0 register INTTP0CC0 signal TOP00 pin output (software trigger) <R> D1 TP0CCR1 register INTTP0CC1 signal TOP01 pin output Wait Active level for width (D1) trigger Cycle (D0 + 1) Active level width (D1) Cycle (D0 + 1) Active level width (D1) Cycle (D0 + 1) 16-bit timer/event counter P waits for a trigger when the TP0CE bit is set to 1. When the trigger is generated, the 16-bit counter is cleared from FFFFH to 0000H, starts counting at the same time, and outputs a PWM waveform from the TOP01 pin. If the trigger is generated again while the counter is operating, the counter is cleared to 0000H and <R> restarted. (The output of the TOP00 pin is inverted. The TOP01 pin outputs a high level regardless of the status (high/low) when a trigger occurs.) The active level width, cycle, and duty factor of the PWM waveform can be calculated as follows. Active level width = (Set value of TP0CCR1 register) x Count clock cycle Cycle = (Set value of TP0CCR0 register + 1) x Count clock cycle Duty factor = (Set value of TP0CCR1 register)/(Set value of TP0CCR0 register + 1) The compare match interrupt request signal INTTP0CC0 is generated when the 16-bit counter counts next time after its count value matches the value of the CCR0 buffer register, and the 16-bit counter is cleared to 0000H. The compare match interrupt request signal INTTP0CC1 is generated when the count value of the 16-bit counter matches the value of the CCR1 buffer register. The value set to the TP0CCRa register is transferred to the CCRa buffer register when the count value of the 16-bit counter matches the value of the CCRa buffer register and the 16-bit counter is cleared to 0000H. The valid edge of an external trigger input signal, or setting the software trigger (TP0CTL1.TP0EST bit) to 1 is used as the trigger. Remark 218 a = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) Figure 7-18. Setting of Registers in External Trigger Pulse Output Mode (1/2) (a) TMP0 control register 0 (TP0CTL0) TP0CE TP0CTL0 TP0CKS2 TP0CKS1 TP0CKS0 0/1 0 0 0 0 0/1 0/1 0/1 Select count clockNote 0: Stop counting 1: Enable counting Note The setting is invalid when the TP0CTL1.TP0EEE bit = 1. (b) TMP0 control register 1 (TP0CTL1) TP0EST TP0EEE TP0CTL1 0 0/1 0/1 TP0MD2 TP0MD1 TP0MD0 0 0 0 1 0 0, 1, 0: External trigger pulse output mode 0: Operate on count clock selected by TP0CKS0 to TP0CKS2 bits 1: Count with external event input signal Generate software trigger when 1 is written (c) TMP0 I/O control register 0 (TP0IOC0) TP0OL1 TP0IOC0 0 0 0 0 0/1 TP0OE1 TP0OL0 0/1 TP0OE0 0/1 0/1 0: Disable TOP00 pin output 1: Enable TOP00 pin output Settings of output level while operation of TOP00 pin is disabled 0: Low level 1: High level 0: Disable TOP01 pin output 1: Enable TOP01 pin output Specifies active level of TOP01 pin output 0: Active-high 1: Active-low * When TP0OL1 bit = 0 * When TP0OL1 bit = 1 16-bit counter 16-bit counter TOP01 pin output TOP01 pin output User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 219 CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) Figure 7-18. Setting of Registers in External Trigger Pulse Output Mode (2/2) (d) TMP0 I/O control register 2 (TP0IOC2) TP0EES1 TP0EES0 TP0ETS1 TP0ETS0 TP0IOC2 0 0 0 0 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 Select valid edge of external trigger input Select valid edge of external event count input (e) TMP0 counter read buffer register (TP0CNT) The value of the 16-bit counter can be read by reading the TP0CNT register. (f) TMP0 capture/compare registers 0 and 1 (TP0CCR0 and TP0CCR1) If D0 is set to the TP0CCR0 register and D1 to the TP0CCR1 register, the cycle and active level of the PWM waveform are as follows. Cycle = (D0 + 1) x Count clock cycle Active level width = D1 x Count clock cycle Remark TMP0 I/O control register 1 (TP0IOC1) and TMP0 option register 0 (TP0OPT0) are not used in the external trigger pulse output mode. 220 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) (1) Operation flow in external trigger pulse output mode Figure 7-19. Software Processing Flow in External Trigger Pulse Output Mode (1/2) FFFFH D01 16-bit counter D00 D10 D00 D10 D01 D01 D11 D10 D11 D00 D10 0000H TP0CE bit External trigger input (TIP00 pin input) TP0CCR0 register D00 CCR0 buffer register D01 D00 D00 D01 D00 INTTP0CC0 signal TOP00 pin output (software trigger) D10 TP0CCR1 register D10 D11 D10 CCR1 buffer register D10 D10 D11 D10 INTTP0CC1 signal TOP01 pin output <1> <2> <3> User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD <4> <5> 221 CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) Figure 7-19. Software Processing Flow in External Trigger Pulse Output Mode (2/2) <1> Count operation start flow <3> TP0CCR0, TP0CCR1 register setting change flow START Setting of TP0CCR1 register Register initial setting TP0CTL0 register (TP0CKS0 to TP0CKS2 bits) TP0CTL1 register, TP0IOC0 register, TP0IOC2 register, TP0CCR0 register, TP0CCR1 register TP0CE bit = 1 Initial setting of these registers is performed before setting the TP0CE bit to 1. Only writing of the TP0CCR1 register must be performed when the set duty factor is changed. When the counter is cleared after setting, the value of the TP0CCRa register is transferred to the CCRa buffer register. <4> TP0CCR0, TP0CCR1 register setting change flow The TP0CKS0 to TP0CKS2 bits can be set at the same time when counting is enabled (TP0CE bit = 1). Trigger wait status Setting of TP0CCR0 register When the counter is cleared after setting, the value of the TP0CCRa register is transferred to the CCRa buffer register. Setting of TP0CCR1 register <2> TP0CCR0 and TP0CCR1 register setting change flow Setting of TP0CCR0 register Setting of TP0CCR1 register Remark 222 <5> Count operation stop flow TP0CCR1 register write processing is necessary only when the set cycle is changed. When the counter is cleared after setting, the value of the TP0CCRa register is transferred to the CCRa buffer register. TP0CE bit = 0 STOP a = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD Counting is stopped. CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) (2) External trigger pulse output mode operation timing (a) Note on changing pulse width during operation To change the PWM waveform while the counter is operating, write the TP0CCR1 register last. Rewrite the TP0CCRa register after writing the TP0CCR1 register after the INTTP0CC0 signal is detected. FFFFH D01 16-bit counter D00 D10 D00 D10 D00 D10 D11 D01 D11 0000H TP0CE bit External trigger input (TIP00 pin input) TP0CCR0 register CCR0 buffer register D00 D01 D00 D01 INTTP0CC0 signal TOP00 pin output (software trigger) TP0CCR1 register CCR1 buffer register D10 D10 D11 D11 INTTP0CC1 signal TOP01 pin output User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 223 CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) In order to transfer data from the TP0CCRa register to the CCRa buffer register, the TP0CCR1 register must be written. To change both the cycle and active level width of the PWM waveform at this time, first set the cycle to the TP0CCR0 register and then set the active level width to the TP0CCR1 register. To change only the cycle of the PWM waveform, first set the cycle to the TP0CCR0 register, and then write the same value to the TP0CCR1 register. To change only the active level width (duty factor) of the PWM waveform, only the TP0CCR1 register has to be set. After data is written to the TP0CCR1 register, the value written to the TP0CCRa register is transferred to the CCRa buffer register in synchronization with clearing of the 16-bit counter, and is used as the value compared with the 16-bit counter. To write the TP0CCR0 or TP0CCR1 register again after writing the TP0CCR1 register once, do so after the INTTP0CC0 signal is generated. Otherwise, the value of the CCRa buffer register may become undefined because the timing of transferring data from the TP0CCRa register to the CCRa buffer register conflicts with writing the TP0CCRa register. Remark 224 a = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) (b) 0%/100% output of PWM waveform To output a 0% waveform, clear the TP0CCR1 register to 0000H. If the set value of the TP0CCR0 register is FFFFH, the INTTP0CC1 signal is generated periodically. Count clock 16-bit counter FFFF 0000 D0 - 1 D0 0000 0001 D0 - 1 D0 0000 TP0CE bit TP0CCR0 register D0 D0 D0 TP0CCR1 register 0000H 0000H 0000H INTTP0CC0 signal INTTP0CC1 signal TOP01 pin output To output a 100% waveform, set a value of (set value of TP0CCR0 register + 1) to the TP0CCR1 register. If the set value of the TP0CCR0 register is FFFFH, 100% output cannot be produced. Count clock 16-bit counter FFFF 0000 D0 - 1 D0 0000 0001 D0 - 1 D0 0000 TP0CE bit TP0CCR0 register D0 D0 D0 TP0CCR1 register D0 + 1 D0 + 1 D0 + 1 INTTP0CC0 signal INTTP0CC1 signal <R> TOP01 pin output User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 225 CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) (c) Conflict between trigger detection and match with TP0CCR1 register If the trigger is detected immediately after the INTTP0CC1 signal is generated, the 16-bit counter is immediately cleared to 0000H, the output signal of the TOP01 pin is asserted, and the counter continues counting. Consequently, the inactive period of the PWM waveform is shortened. 16-bit counter FFFF D1 - 1 0000 0000 External trigger input (TIP00 pin input) D1 TP0CCR1 register INTTP0CC1 signal TOP01 pin output Shortened If the trigger is detected immediately before the INTTP0CC1 signal is generated, the INTTP0CC1 signal is not generated, and the 16-bit counter is cleared to 0000H and continues counting. The output signal of the TOP01 pin remains active. Consequently, the active period of the PWM waveform is extended. 16-bit counter FFFF 0000 D1 - 2 0000 External trigger input (TIP00 pin input) TP0CCR1 register D1 INTTP0CC1 signal TOP01 pin output Extended 226 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 0001 D1 - 1 D1 CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) (d) Conflict between trigger detection and match with TP0CCR0 register If the trigger is detected immediately after the INTTP0CC0 signal is generated, the 16-bit counter is cleared to 0000H and continues counting up. Therefore, the active period of the TOP01 pin is extended by time from generation of the INTTP0CC0 signal to trigger detection. 16-bit counter FFFF 0000 D0 - 1 D0 0000 0000 External trigger input (TIP00 pin input) D0 TP0CCR0 register INTTP0CC0 signal TOP01 pin output Extended If the trigger is detected immediately before the INTTP0CC0 signal is generated, the INTTP0CC0 signal is not generated. The 16-bit counter is cleared to 0000H, the TOP01 pin is asserted, and the counter continues counting. Consequently, the inactive period of the PWM waveform is shortened. 16-bit counter FFFF 0000 D0 - 1 D0 0000 0001 External trigger input (TIP00 pin input) TP0CCR0 register D0 INTTP0CC0 signal TOP01 pin output Shortened User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 227 CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) (e) Generation timing of compare match interrupt request signal (INTTP0CC1) The timing of generation of the INTTP0CC1 signal in the external trigger pulse output mode differs from the timing of other INTTP0CC1 signals; the INTTP0CC1 signal is generated when the count value of the 16-bit counter matches the value of the TP0CCR1 register. Count clock 16-bit counter TP0CCR1 register D1 - 1 D1 - 1 D1 D1 + 1 D1 + 2 D1 TOP01 pin output INTTP0CC1 signal Usually, the INTTP0CC1 signal is generated in synchronization with the next count up, after the count value of the 16-bit counter matches the value of the TP0CCR1 register. In the external trigger pulse output mode, however, it is generated one clock earlier. This is because the timing is changed to match the timing of changing the output signal of the TOP01 pin. 228 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) 7.5.4 One-shot pulse output mode (TP0MD2 to TP0MD0 bits = 011) In the one-shot pulse output mode, 16-bit timer/event counter P waits for a trigger when the TP0CTL0.TP0CE bit is set to 1. When the valid edge of an external trigger input is detected, 16-bit timer/event counter P starts counting, and outputs a one-shot pulse from the TOP01 pin. Instead of the external trigger, a software trigger can also be generated to output the pulse. When the software trigger is used, the TOP00 pin outputs the active level while the 16-bit counter is counting, and the inactive level when the counter is stopped (waiting for a trigger). Figure 7-20. Configuration in One-Shot Pulse Output Mode TP0CCR1 register TIP00 pin Edge detector Transfer Output S controller R (RS-FF) CCR1 buffer register Software trigger generation Match signal TOP01 pin INTTP0CC1 signal Clear Count clock selection Count start control Output S controller R (RS-FF) 16-bit counter Match signal TP0CE bit TOP00 pin INTTP0CC0 signal CCR0 buffer register Transfer TP0CCR0 register User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 229 CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) Figure 7-21. Basic Timing in One-Shot Pulse Output Mode FFFFH D0 16-bit counter D1 D0 D1 D0 D1 0000H TP0CE bit External trigger input (TIP00 pin input) D0 TP0CCR0 register INTTP0CC0 signal TOP00 pin output (software trigger) D1 TP0CCR1 register INTTP0CC1 signal TOP01 pin output Delay (D1) Active level width (D0 - D1 + 1) Delay (D1) Delay Active level width (D1) (D0 - D1 + 1) Active level width (D0 - D1 + 1) When the TP0CE bit is set to 1, 16-bit timer/event counter P waits for a trigger. When the trigger is generated, the 16-bit counter is cleared from FFFFH to 0000H, starts counting, and outputs a one-shot pulse from the TOP01 pin. After the one-shot pulse is output, the 16-bit counter is set to FFFFH, stops counting, and waits for a trigger. If a trigger is generated again while the one-shot pulse is being output, it is ignored. The output delay period and active level width of the one-shot pulse can be calculated as follows. Output delay period = (Set value of TP0CCR1 register) x Count clock cycle Active level width = (Set value of TP0CCR0 register - Set value of TP0CCR1 register + 1) x Count clock cycle The compare match interrupt request signal INTTP0CC0 is generated when the 16-bit counter counts after its count value matches the value of the CCR0 buffer register. The compare match interrupt request signal INTTP0CC1 is generated when the count value of the 16-bit counter matches the value of the CCR1 buffer register. The valid edge of an external trigger input or setting the software trigger (TP0CTL1.TP0EST bit) to 1 is used as the trigger. 230 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) Figure 7-22. Setting of Registers in One-Shot Pulse Output Mode (1/2) (a) TMP0 control register 0 (TP0CTL0) TP0CE TP0CTL0 TP0CKS2 TP0CKS1 TP0CKS0 0/1 0 0 0 0 0/1 0/1 0/1 Select count clockNote 0: Stop counting 1: Enable counting Note The setting is invalid when the TP0CTL1.TP0EEE bit = 1. (b) TMP0 control register 1 (TP0CTL1) TP0EST TP0EEE TP0CTL1 0 0/1 0/1 TP0MD2 TP0MD1 TP0MD0 0 0 0 1 1 0, 1, 1: One-shot pulse output mode 0: Operate on count clock selected by TP0CKS0 to TP0CKS2 bits 1: Count external event input signal Generate software trigger when 1 is written (c) TMP0 I/O control register 0 (TP0IOC0) TP0OL1 TP0IOC0 0 0 0 0 0/1 TP0OE1 TP0OL0 0/1 TP0OE0 0/1 0/1 0: Disable TOP00 pin output 1: Enable TOP00 pin output Setting of output level while operation of TOP00 pin is disabled 0: Low level 1: High level 0: Disable TOP01 pin output 1: Enable TOP01 pin output Specifies active level of TOP01 pin output 0: Active-high 1: Active-low * When TP0OL1 bit = 0 * When TP0OL1 bit = 1 16-bit counter 16-bit counter TOP01 pin output TOP01 pin output User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 231 CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) Figure 7-22. Setting of Registers in One-Shot Pulse Output Mode (2/2) (d) TMP0 I/O control register 2 (TP0IOC2) TP0EES1 TP0EES0 TP0ETS1 TP0ETS0 TP0IOC2 0 0 0 0 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 Select valid edge of external trigger input Select valid edge of external event count input (e) TMP0 counter read buffer register (TP0CNT) The value of the 16-bit counter can be read by reading the TP0CNT register. (f) TMP0 capture/compare registers 0 and 1 (TP0CCR0 and TP0CCR1) If D0 is set to the TP0CCR0 register and D1 to the TP0CCR1 register, the active level width and output delay period of the one-shot pulse are as follows. Active level width = (D1 - D0 + 1) x Count clock cycle Output delay period = D1 x Count clock cycle Remark TMP0 I/O control register 1 (TP0IOC1) and TMP0 option register 0 (TP0OPT0) are not used in the one-shot pulse output mode. 232 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) (1) Operation flow in one-shot pulse output mode Figure 7-23. Software Processing Flow in One-Shot Pulse Output Mode <R> FFFFH D00 D01 16-bit counter D10 D11 0000H TP0CE bit External trigger input (TIP00 pin input) TP0CCR0 register D00 D01 D10 D11 INTTP0CC0 signal TP0CCR1 register INTTP0CC1 signal TOP01 pin output <1> <2> <1> Count operation start flow <3> <2> TP0CCR0, TP0CCR1 register setting change flow START Setting of TP0CCR0, TP0CCR1 registers Register initial setting TP0CTL0 register (TP0CKS0 to TP0CKS2 bits) TP0CTL1 register, TP0IOC0 register, TP0IOC2 register, TP0CCR0 register, TP0CCR1 register TP0CE bit = 1 Remark Initial setting of these registers is performed before setting the TP0CE bit to 1. As rewriting the TP0CCRm register immediately forwards to the CCRm buffer register, rewriting immediately after the generation of the INTTP0CCR0 signal is recommended. <3> Count operation stop flow The TP0CKS0 to TP0CKS2 bits can be set at the same time when counting has been started (TP0CE bit = 1). Trigger wait status TP0CE bit = 0 Count operation is stopped STOP m = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 233 CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) (2) Operation timing in one-shot pulse output mode (a) Note on rewriting TP0CCRa register To change the set value of the TP0CCRa register to a smaller value, stop counting once, and then change the set value. If the value of the TP0CCRa register is rewritten to a smaller value during counting, the 16-bit counter may overflow. FFFFH D00 16-bit counter D00 D10 D10 D00 D10 D01 D11 0000H TP0CE bit External trigger input (TIP00 pin input) D00 TP0CCR0 register D01 INTTP0CC0 signal TOP00 pin output (software trigger) D10 TP0CCR1 register D11 INTTP0CC1 signal TOP01 pin output Delay (D10) Delay (D10) Active level width (D00 - D10 + 1) Active level width (D00 - D10 + 1) Delay (10000H + D11) Active level width (D01 - D11 + 1) When the TP0CCR0 register is rewritten from D00 to D01 and the TP0CCR1 register from D10 to D11 where D00 > D01 and D10 > D11, if the TP0CCR1 register is rewritten when the count value of the 16-bit counter is greater than D11 and less than D10 and if the TP0CCR0 register is rewritten when the count value is greater than D01 and less than D00, each set value is reflected as soon as the register has been rewritten and compared with the count value. The counter counts up to FFFFH and then counts up again from 0000H. When the count value matches D11, the counter generates the INTTP0CC1 signal and asserts the TOP01 pin. When the count value matches D01, the counter generates the INTTP0CC0 signal, deasserts the TOP01 pin, and stops counting. Therefore, the counter may output a pulse with a delay period or active period different from that of the one-shot pulse that is originally expected. Remark 234 a = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) (b) Generation timing of compare match interrupt request signal (INTTP0CC1) The generation timing of the INTTP0CC1 signal in the one-shot pulse output mode is different from other INTTP0CC1 signals; the INTTP0CC1 signal is generated when the count value of the 16-bit counter matches the value of the TP0CCR1 register. Count clock 16-bit counter D1 - 2 D1 - 1 TP0CCR1 register D1 D1 + 1 D1 + 2 D1 TOP01 pin output INTTP0CC1 signal Usually, the INTTP0CC1 signal is generated when the 16-bit counter counts up next time after its count value matches the value of the TP0CCR1 register. In the one-shot pulse output mode, however, it is generated one clock earlier. This is because the timing is changed to match the change timing of the TOP01 pin. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 235 CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) 7.5.5 PWM output mode (TP0MD2 to TP0MD0 bits = 100) In the PWM output mode, a PWM waveform is output from the TOP01 pin when the TP0CTL0.TP0CE bit is set to 1. In addition, a pulse with one cycle of the PWM waveform as half its cycle is output from the TOP00 pin. Figure 7-24. Configuration in PWM Output Mode TP0CCR1 register Transfer Output S controller R (RS-FF) CCR1 buffer register Match signal TOP01 pin INTTP0CC1 signal Clear Count clock selection Count start control 16-bit counter Output controller Match signal TP0CE bit INTTP0CC0 signal CCR0 buffer register Transfer TP0CCR0 register 236 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD TOP00 pin CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) Figure 7-25. Basic Timing in PWM Output Mode FFFFH D01 16-bit counter D00 D10 D00 D10 D00 D10 D11 D01 D11 0000H TP0CE bit TP0CCR0 register D00 CCR0 buffer register D01 D00 D01 INTTP0CC0 signal TOP00 pin output D10 TP0CCR1 register D11 D10 CCR1 buffer register D11 INTTP0CC1 signal TOP01 pin output Active period (D10) Cycle (D00 + 1) Inactive period (D00 - D10 + 1) When the TP0CE bit is set to 1, the 16-bit counter is cleared from FFFFH to 0000H, starts counting, and outputs a PWM waveform from the TOP01 pin. The active level width, cycle, and duty factor of the PWM waveform can be calculated as follows. Active level width = (Set value of TP0CCR1 register ) x Count clock cycle Cycle = (Set value of TP0CCR0 register + 1) x Count clock cycle Duty factor = (Set value of TP0CCR1 register)/(Set value of TP0CCR0 register + 1) The PWM waveform can be changed by rewriting the TP0CCRa register while the counter is operating. The newly written value is reflected when the count value of the 16-bit counter matches the value of the CCR0 buffer register and the 16-bit counter is cleared to 0000H. The compare match interrupt request signal INTTP0CC0 is generated when the 16-bit counter counts next time after its count value matches the value of the CCR0 buffer register, and the 16-bit counter is cleared to 0000H. The compare match interrupt request signal INTTP0CC1 is generated when the count value of the 16-bit counter matches the value of the CCR1 buffer register. The value set to the TP0CCRa register is transferred to the CCRa buffer register when the count value of the 16-bit counter matches the value of the CCRa buffer register and the 16-bit counter is cleared to 0000H. Remark a = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 237 CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) Figure 7-26. Register Setting in PWM Output Mode (1/2) (a) TMP0 control register 0 (TP0CTL0) TP0CE TP0CTL0 TP0CKS2 TP0CKS1 TP0CKS0 0/1 0 0 0 0 0/1 0/1 0/1 Select count clockNote 0: Stop counting 1: Enable counting Note The setting is invalid when the TP0CTL1.TP0EEE bit = 1. (b) TMP0 control register 1 (TP0CTL1) TP0EST TP0EEE TP0CTL1 0 0 0/1 TP0MD2 TP0MD1 TP0MD0 0 0 1 0 0 1, 0, 0: PWM output mode 0: Operate on count clock selected by TP0CKS0 to TP0CKS2 bits 1: Count with external event count input signal (c) TMP0 I/O control register 0 (TP0IOC0) TP0OL1 TP0IOC0 0 0 0 0 0/1 TP0OE1 TP0OL0 0/1 TP0OE0 0/1 0/1 0: Disable TOP00 pin output 1: Enable TOP00 pin output Setting of output level while operation of TOP00 pin is disabled 0: Low level 1: High level 0: Disable TOP01 pin output 1: Enable TOP01 pin output Specifies active level of TOP01 pin output 0: Active-high 1: Active-low * When TP0OL1 bit = 0 238 * When TP0OL1 bit = 1 16-bit counter 16-bit counter TOP01 pin output TOP01 pin output User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) Figure 7-26. Register Setting in PWM Output Mode (2/2) (d) TMP0 I/O control register 2 (TP0IOC2) TP0EES1 TP0EES0 TP0ETS1 TP0ETS0 TP0IOC2 0 0 0 0 0/1 0/1 0 0 Select valid edge of external event count input. (e) TMP0 counter read buffer register (TP0CNT) The value of the 16-bit counter can be read by reading the TP0CNT register. (f) TMP0 capture/compare registers 0 and 1 (TP0CCR0 and TP0CCR1) If D0 is set to the TP0CCR0 register and D1 to the TP0CCR1 register, the cycle and active level of the PWM waveform are as follows. Cycle = (D0 + 1) x Count clock cycle Active level width = D1 x Count clock cycle Remark TMP0 I/O control register 1 (TP0IOC1) and TMP0 option register 0 (TP0OPT0) are not used in the PWM output mode. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 239 CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) (1) Operation flow in PWM output mode Figure 7-27. Software Processing Flow in PWM Output Mode (1/2) FFFFH D01 16-bit counter D00 D01 D00 D10 D10 D01 D11 D11 D10 D00 D10 0000H TP0CE bit TP0CCR0 register D00 CCR0 buffer register D01 D00 D00 D01 D00 INTTP0CC0 signal TOP00 pin output D10 TP0CCR1 register D10 D10 CCR1 buffer register D11 D10 D10 D11 D10 INTTP0CC1 signal TOP01 pin output <1> 240 <2> <3> User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD <4> <5> CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) Figure 7-27. Software Processing Flow in PWM Output Mode (2/2) <1> Count operation start flow <3> TP0CCR0, TP0CCR1 register setting change flow START Setting of TP0CCR1 register Register initial setting TP0CTL0 register (TP0CKS0 to TP0CKS2 bits) TP0CTL1 register, TP0IOC0 register, TP0IOC2 register, TP0CCR0 register, TP0CCR1 register TP0CE bit = 1 Initial setting of these registers is performed before setting the TP0CE bit to 1. Only writing of the TP0CCR1 register must be performed when the set duty factor is changed. When the counter is cleared after setting, the value of compare register a is transferred to the CCRa buffer register. <4> TP0CCR0, TP0CCR1 register setting change flow The TP0CKS0 to TP0CKS2 bits can be set at the same time when counting is enabled (TP0CE bit = 1). Setting of TP0CCR0 register When the counter is cleared after setting, the value of compare register a is transferred to the CCRa buffer register. Setting of TP0CCR1 register <2> TP0CCR0, TP0CCR1 register setting change flow Setting of TP0CCR0 register Setting of TP0CCR1 register Remark <5> Count operation stop flow TP0CCR1 write processing is necessary only when the set cycle is changed. When the counter is cleared after setting, the value of the TP0CCRa register is transferred to the CCRa buffer register. TP0CE bit = 0 Counting is stopped. STOP a = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 241 CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) (2) PWM output mode operation timing (a) Changing pulse width during operation To change the PWM waveform while the counter is operating, write the TP0CCR1 register last. Rewrite the TP0CCRa register after writing the TP0CCR1 register after the INTTP0CC1 signal is detected. FFFFH D01 16-bit counter D00 D10 D00 D10 D00 D10 D01 D11 D11 0000H TP0CE bit TP0CCR0 register D00 D01 CCR0 buffer register TP0CCR1 register CCR1 buffer register D00 D10 D01 D11 D10 D11 TOP01 pin output INTTP0CC0 signal To transfer data from the TP0CCRa register to the CCRa buffer register, the TP0CCR1 register must be written. To change both the cycle and active level of the PWM waveform at this time, first set the cycle to the TP0CCR0 register and then set the active level to the TP0CCR1 register. To change only the cycle of the PWM waveform, first set the cycle to the TP0CCR0 register, and then write the same value to the TP0CCR1 register. To change only the active level width (duty factor) of the PWM waveform, only the TP0CCR1 register has to be set. After data is written to the TP0CCR1 register, the value written to the TP0CCRa register is transferred to the CCRa buffer register in synchronization with clearing of the 16-bit counter, and is used as the value compared with the 16-bit counter. To write the TP0CCR0 or TP0CCR1 register again after writing the TP0CCR1 register once, do so after the INTTP0CC0 signal is generated. Otherwise, the value of the CCRa buffer register may become undefined because the timing of transferring data from the TP0CCRa register to the CCRa buffer register conflicts with writing the TP0CCRa register. Remark 242 a = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) (b) 0%/100% output of PWM waveform To output a 0% waveform, set the TP0CCR1 register to 0000H. If the set value of the TP0CCR0 register is FFFFH, the INTTP0CC1 signal is generated periodically. Count clock 16-bit counter FFFF 0000 D00 - 1 D00 0000 0001 D00 - 1 D00 0000 TP0CE bit TP0CCR0 register D00 D00 D00 TP0CCR1 register 0000H 0000H 0000H INTTP0CC0 signal INTTP0CC1 signal TOP01 pin output To output a 100% waveform, set a value of (set value of TP0CCR0 register + 1) to the TP0CCR1 register. If the set value of the TP0CCR0 register is FFFFH, 100% output cannot be produced. Count clock 16-bit counter FFFF 0000 D00 - 1 D00 0000 0001 D00 - 1 D00 0000 TP0CE bit TP0CCR0 register D00 D00 D00 TP0CCR1 register D00 + 1 D00 + 1 D00 + 1 INTTP0CC0 signal INTTP0CC1 signal <R> TOP01 pin output User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 243 CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) (c) Generation timing of compare match interrupt request signal (INTTP0CC1) The timing of generation of the INTTP0CC1 signal in the PWM output mode differs from the timing of other INTTP0CC1 signals; the INTTP0CC1 signal is generated when the count value of the 16-bit counter matches the value of the TP0CCR1 register. Count clock 16-bit counter TP0CCR1 register D1 - 2 D1 - 1 D1 D1 + 1 D1 + 2 D1 TOP01 pin output INTTP0CC1 signal Usually, the INTTP0CC1 signal is generated in synchronization with the next counting up after the count value of the 16-bit counter matches the value of the TP0CCR1 register. In the PWM output mode, however, it is generated one clock earlier. This is because the timing is changed to match the change timing of the output signal of the TOP01 pin. 244 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) 7.5.6 Free-running timer mode (TP0MD2 to TP0MD0 bits = 101) In the free-running timer mode, 16-bit timer/event counter P starts counting when the TP0CTL0.TP0CE bit is set to 1. At this time, the TP0CCRa register can be used as a compare register or a capture register, depending on the setting of the TP0OPT0.TP0CCS0 and TP0OPT0.TP0CCS1 bits. Figure 7-28. Configuration in Free-Running Timer Mode TP0CCR1 register (compare) TP0CCR0 register (compare) Output controller TOP01 pin output Output controller TOP00 pin output TP0CCS0, TP0CCS1 bits (capture/compare selection) Internal count clock TIP00 pin (external event count input/ capture trigger input) TIP01 pin (capture trigger input) Remark Edge detector Count clock selection 0 TP0CE bit Digital noise eliminator Digital noise eliminator INTTP0OV signal 16-bit counter INTTP0CC1 signal 1 Edge detector 0 TP0CCR0 register (capture) INTTP0CC0 signal 1 Edge detector TP0CCR1 register (capture) a = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 245 CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) When the TP0CE bit is set to 1, 16-bit timer/event counter P starts counting, and the output signals of the TOP00 and TOP01 pins are inverted. When the count value of the 16-bit counter later matches the set value of the TP0CCRa register, a compare match interrupt request signal (INTTP0CCa) is generated, and the output signal of the TOP0a pin is inverted. The 16-bit counter continues counting in synchronization with the count clock. When it counts up to FFFFH, it generates an overflow interrupt request signal (INTTP0OV) at the next clock, is cleared to 0000H, and continues counting. At this time, the overflow flag (TP0OPT0.TP0OVF bit) is also set to 1. Clear the overflow flag to 0 by executing the CLR instruction by software. The TP0CCRa register can be rewritten while the counter is operating. If it is rewritten, the new value is reflected at that time, and compared with the count value. Figure 7-29. Basic Timing in Free-Running Timer Mode (Compare Function) FFFFH D00 D00 D01 16-bit counter D10 D10 D11 D01 D11 D11 0000H TP0CE bit TP0CCR0 register D00 D01 INTTP0CC0 signal TOP00 pin output TP0CCR1 register D10 D11 INTTP0CC1 signal TOP01 pin output INTTP0OV signal TP0OVF bit Cleared to 0 by CLR instruction Remark 246 Cleared to 0 by CLR instruction a = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD Cleared to 0 by CLR instruction Cleared to 0 by CLR instruction CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) When the TP0CE bit is set to 1, the 16-bit counter starts counting. When the valid edge input to the TIP0a pin is detected, the count value of the 16-bit counter is stored in the TP0CCRa register, and a capture interrupt request signal (INTTP0CCa) is generated. The 16-bit counter continues counting in synchronization with the count clock. When it counts up to FFFFH, it generates an overflow interrupt request signal (INTTP0OV) at the next clock, is cleared to 0000H, and continues counting. At this time, the overflow flag (TP0OPT0.TP0OVF bit) is also set to 1. Clear the overflow flag to 0 by executing the CLR instruction by software. Figure 7-30. Basic Timing in Free-Running Timer Mode (Capture Function) FFFFH D10 D00 16-bit counter D11 D12 D13 D01 D02 D03 0000H TP0CE bit TIP00 pin input TP0CCR0 register D00 D01 D02 D03 INTTP0CC0 signal TIP01 pin input TP0CCR1 register D10 D11 D12 D13 INTTP0CC1 signal INTTP0OV signal TP0OVF bit Cleared to 0 by CLR instruction Cleared to 0 by CLR instruction User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD Cleared to 0 by CLR instruction 247 CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) Figure 7-31. Register Setting in Free-Running Timer Mode (1/2) (a) TMP0 control register 0 (TP0CTL0) TP0CE TP0CTL0 0/1 TP0CKS2 TP0CKS1 TP0CKS0 0 0 0 0 0/1 0/1 0/1 Select count clockNote 0: Stop counting 1: Enable counting Note The setting is invalid when the TP0CTL1.TP0EEE bit = 1 (b) TMP0 control register 1 (TP0CTL1) TP0EST TP0EEE TP0CTL1 0 0 0/1 TP0MD2 TP0MD1 TP0MD0 0 0 1 0 1 1, 0, 1: Free-running mode 0: Operate with count clock selected by TP0CKS0 to TP0CKS2 bits 1: Count on external event count input signal (c) TMP0 I/O control register 0 (TP0IOC0) TP0OL1 TP0IOC0 0 0 0 0 0/1 TP0OE1 TP0OL0 0/1 0/1 TP0OE0 0/1 0: Disable TOP00 pin output 1: Enable TOP00 pin output Setting of output level with operation of TOP00 pin disabled 0: Low level 1: High level 0: Disable TOP01 pin output 1: Enable TOP01 pin output Setting of output level with operation of TOP01 pin disabled 0: Low level 1: High level 248 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) Figure 7-31. Register Setting in Free-Running Timer Mode (2/2) (d) TMP0 I/O control register 1 (TP0IOC1) TP0IOC1 0 0 0 0 TP0IS3 TP0IS2 TP0IS1 TP0IS0 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 Select valid edge of TIP00 pin input Select valid edge of TIP01 pin input (e) TMP0 I/O control register 2 (TP0IOC2) TP0EES1 TP0EES0 TP0ETS1 TP0ETS0 TP0IOC2 0 0 0 0 0/1 0/1 0 0 Select valid edge of external event count input (f) TMP0 option register 0 (TP0OPT0) TP0CCS1 TP0CCS0 TP0OPT0 0 0 0/1 0/1 TP0OVF 0 0 0 0/1 Overflow flag Specifies if TP0CCR0 register functions as capture or compare register Specifies if TP0CCR1 register functions as capture or compare register (g) TMP0 counter read buffer register (TP0CNT) The value of the 16-bit counter can be read by reading the TP0CNT register. (h) TMP0 capture/compare registers 0 and 1 (TP0CCR0 and TP0CCR1) These registers function as capture registers or compare registers depending on the setting of the TP0OPT0.TP0CCSa bit. When the registers function as capture registers, they store the count value of the 16-bit counter when the valid edge input to the TIP0a pin is detected. When the registers function as compare registers and when Da is set to the TP0CCRa register, the INTTP0CCa signal is generated when the counter reaches (Da + 1), and the output signal of the TOP0a pin is inverted. Remark a = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 249 CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) (1) Operation flow in free-running timer mode (a) When using capture/compare register as compare register Figure 7-32. Software Processing Flow in Free-Running Timer Mode (Compare Function) (1/2) FFFFH D00 D00 D01 16-bit counter D10 D10 D11 D01 D11 D11 0000H TP0CE bit TP0CCR0 register D00 D01 INTTP0CC0 signal TOP00 pin output D10 TP0CCR1 register D11 INTTP0CC1 signal TOP01 pin output INTTP0OV signal TP0OVF bit <1> Cleared to 0 by CLR instruction <2> 250 Cleared to 0 by CLR instruction <2> User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD Cleared to 0 by CLR instruction <2> <3> CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) Figure 7-32. Software Processing Flow in Free-Running Timer Mode (Compare Function) (2/2) <1> Count operation start flow START Register initial setting TP0CTL0 register (TP0CKS0 to TP0CKS2 bits) TP0CTL1 register, TP0IOC0 register, TP0IOC2 register, TP0OPT0 register, TP0CCR0 register, TP0CCR1 register TP0CE bit = 1 Initial setting of these registers is performed before setting the TP0CE bit to 1. The TP0CKS0 to TP0CKS2 bits can be set at the same time when counting has been started (TP0CE bit = 1). <2> Overflow flag clear flow Read TP0OPT0 register (check overflow flag). TP0OVF bit = 1 NO YES Execute instruction to clear TP0OVF bit (CLR TP0OVF). <3> Count operation stop flow TP0CE bit = 0 Counter is initialized and counting is stopped by clearing TP0CE bit to 0. STOP User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 251 CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) (b) When using capture/compare register as capture register Figure 7-33. Software Processing Flow in Free-Running Timer Mode (Capture Function) (1/2) FFFFH D10 D00 D11 D12 D01 16-bit counter D02 D03 0000H TP0CE bit TIP00 pin input TP0CCR0 register 0000 D00 D01 D02 D03 0000 INTTP0CC0 signal TIP01 pin input 0000 TP0CCR1 register D10 D11 D12 0000 INTTP0CC1 signal INTTP0OV signal TP0OVF bit <1> 252 Cleared to 0 by CLR instruction Cleared to 0 by CLR instruction <2> <2> User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD <3> CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) Figure 7-33. Software Processing Flow in Free-Running Timer Mode (Capture Function) (2/2) <1> Count operation start flow START Register initial setting TP0CTL0 register (TP0CKS0 to TP0CKS2 bits) TP0CTL1 register, TP0IOC1 register, TP0OPT0 register TP0CE bit = 1 Initial setting of these registers is performed before setting the TP0CE bit to 1. The TP0CKS0 to TP0CKS2 bits can be set at the same time when counting has been started (TP0CE bit = 1). <2> Overflow flag clear flow Read TP0OPT0 register (check overflow flag). TP0OVF bit = 1 NO YES Execute instruction to clear TP0OVF bit (CLR TP0OVF). <3> Count operation stop flow TP0CE bit = 0 Counter is initialized and counting is stopped by clearing TP0CE bit to 0. STOP User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 253 CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) (2) Operation timing in free-running timer mode (a) Interval operation with compare register When 16-bit timer/event counter P is used as an interval timer with the TP0CCRa register used as a compare register, software processing is necessary for setting a comparison value to generate the next interrupt request signal each time the INTTP0CCa signal has been detected. FFFFH D02 D10 D00 D11 16-bit counter D03 D12 D01 D13 0000H D04 TP0CE bit TP0CCR0 register D00 D01 D02 D03 D04 D05 INTTP0CC0 signal TOP00 pin output Interval period Interval period Interval period Interval period Interval period (D00 + 1) (10000H + (D02 - D01) (10000H + (10000H + D01 - D00) D03 - D02) D04 - D03) TP0CCR1 register D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 INTTP0CC1 signal TOP01 pin output Interval period Interval period Interval period Interval period (D10 + 1) (10000H + (10000H + (10000H + D11 - D10) D12 - D11) D13 - D12) When performing an interval operation in the free-running timer mode, two intervals can be set with one channel. To perform the interval operation, the value of the corresponding TP0CCRa register must be re-set in the interrupt servicing that is executed when the INTTP0CCa signal is detected. The set value for re-setting the TP0CCRa register can be calculated by the following expression, where "Da" is the interval period. Compare register default value: Da - 1 Value set to compare register second and subsequent time: Previous set value + Da (If the calculation result is greater than FFFFH, subtract 10000H from the result and set this value to the register.) Remark 254 a = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) (b) Pulse width measurement with capture register When pulse width measurement is performed with the TP0CCRa register used as a capture register, software processing is necessary for reading the capture register each time the INTTP0CCa signal has been detected and for calculating an interval. FFFFH D02 D10 D00 D11 16-bit counter D03 D12 D01 D13 0000H D04 TP0CE bit TIP00 pin input TP0CCR0 register 0000H D00 D01 D02 D03 D04 INTTP0CC0 signal Pulse interval Pulse interval Pulse interval Pulse interval Pulse interval (D00) (10000H + (D02 - D01) (10000H + (10000H + D01 - D00) D03 - D02) D04 - D03) TIP01 pin input TP0CCR1 register 0000H D10 D11 D12 D13 INTTP0CC1 signal Pulse interval Pulse interval Pulse interval Pulse interval (D10) (10000H + (10000H + (10000H + D11 - D10) D12 - D11) D13 - D12) INTTP0OV signal TP0OVF bit Cleared to 0 by CLR instruction Cleared to 0 by CLR instruction Cleared to 0 by CLR instruction When executing pulse width measurement in the free-running timer mode, two pulse widths can be measured with one channel. To measure a pulse width, the pulse width can be calculated by reading the value of the TP0CCRa register in synchronization with the INTTP0CCa signal, and calculating the difference between the read value and the previously read value. Remark a = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 255 CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) (c) Processing of overflow when two capture registers are used Care must be exercised in processing the overflow flag when two capture registers are used. First, an example of incorrect processing is shown below. Example of incorrect processing when two capture registers are used FFFFH D11 D10 16-bit counter D01 D00 0000H TP0CE bit TIP00 pin input TP0CCR0 register D01 D00 TIP01 pin input D11 D10 TP0CCR1 register INTTP0OV signal TP0OVF bit <1> <2> <3> <4> The following problem may occur when two pulse widths are measured in the free-running timer mode. <1> Read the TP0CCR0 register (setting of the default value of the TIP00 pin input). <2> Read the TP0CCR1 register (setting of the default value of the TIP01 pin input). <3> Read the TP0CCR0 register. Read the overflow flag. If the overflow flag is 1, clear it to 0. Because the overflow flag is 1, the pulse width can be calculated by (10000H + D01 - D00). <4> Read the TP0CCR1 register. Read the overflow flag. Because the flag is cleared in <3>, 0 is read. Because the overflow flag is 0, the pulse width can be calculated by (D11 - D10) (incorrect). When two capture registers are used, and if the overflow flag is cleared to 0 by one capture register, the other capture register may not obtain the correct pulse width. Use software when using two capture registers. An example of how to use software is shown below. 256 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) (1/2) Example when two capture registers are used (using overflow interrupt) FFFFH D11 D10 16-bit counter D01 D00 0000H TP0CE bit INTTP0OV signal TP0OVF bit TP0OVF0 flagNote TIP00 pin input D01 D00 TP0CCR0 register TP0OVF1 flagNote TIP01 pin input D11 D10 TP0CCR1 register <1> <2> <3> <4> <5> <6> Note The TP0OVF0 and TP0OVF1 flags are set on the internal RAM by software. <1> Read the TP0CCR0 register (setting of the default value of the TIP00 pin input). <2> Read the TP0CCR1 register (setting of the default value of the TIP01 pin input). <3> An overflow occurs. Set the TP0OVF0 and TP0OVF1 flags to 1 in the overflow interrupt servicing, and clear the overflow flag to 0. <4> Read the TP0CCR0 register. Read the TP0OVF0 flag. If the TP0OVF0 flag is 1, clear it to 0. Because the TP0OVF0 flag is 1, the pulse width can be calculated by (10000H + D01 - D00). <5> Read the TP0CCR1 register. Read the TP0OVF1 flag. If the TP0OVF1 flag is 1, clear it to 0 (the TP0OVF0 flag is cleared in <4>, and the TP0OVF1 flag remains 1). Because the TP0OVF1 flag is 1, the pulse width can be calculated by (10000H + D11 - D10) (correct). <6> Same as <3> User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 257 CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) (2/2) Example when two capture registers are used (without using overflow interrupt) FFFFH D11 D10 16-bit counter D01 D00 0000H TP0CE bit INTTP0OV signal TP0OVF bit TP0OVF0 flagNote TIP00 pin input D01 D00 TP0CCR0 register TP0OVF1 flagNote TIP01 pin input D11 D10 TP0CCR1 register <1> <2> <3> <4> <5> <6> Note The TP0OVF0 and TP0OVF1 flags are set on the internal RAM by software. <1> Read the TP0CCR0 register (setting of the default value of the TIP00 pin input). <2> Read the TP0CCR1 register (setting of the default value of the TIP01 pin input). <3> An overflow occurs. Nothing is done by software. <4> Read the TP0CCR0 register. Read the overflow flag. If the overflow flag is 1, set only the TP0OVF1 flag to 1, and clear the overflow flag to 0. Because the overflow flag is 1, the pulse width can be calculated by (10000H + D01 - D00). <5> Read the TP0CCR1 register. Read the overflow flag. Because the overflow flag is cleared in <4>, 0 is read. Read the TP0OVF1 flag. If the TP0OVF1 flag is 1, clear it to 0. Because the TP0OVF1 flag is 1, the pulse width can be calculated by (10000H + D11 - D10) (correct). <6> Same as <3> 258 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) (d) Processing of overflow if capture trigger interval is long If the pulse width is greater than one cycle of the 16-bit counter, care must be exercised because an overflow may occur more than once from the first capture trigger to the next. First, an example of incorrect processing is shown below. Example of incorrect processing when capture trigger interval is long FFFFH Da0 16-bit counter Da1 0000H TP0CE bit TIP0a pin input TP0CCRa register Da0 Da1 INTTP0OV signal TP0OVF bit 1 cycle of 16-bit counter Pulse width <1> <2> <3> <4> The following problem may occur when long pulse width is measured in the free-running timer mode. <1> Read the TP0CCRa register (setting of the default value of the TIP0a pin input). <2> An overflow occurs. Nothing is done by software. <3> An overflow occurs a second time. Nothing is done by software. <4> Read the TP0CCRa register. Read the overflow flag. If the overflow flag is 1, clear it to 0. Because the overflow flag is 1, the pulse width can be calculated by (10000H + Da1 - Da0) (incorrect). Actually, the pulse width must be (20000H + Da1 - Da0) because an overflow occurs twice. If an overflow occurs twice or more when the capture trigger interval is long, the correct pulse width may not be obtained. If the capture trigger interval is long, slow the count clock to lengthen one cycle of the 16-bit counter, or use software. An example of how to use software is shown next. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 259 CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) Example when capture trigger interval is long FFFFH Da0 16-bit counter Da1 0000H TP0CE bit TIP0a pin input TP0CCRa register Da0 Da1 INTTP0OV signal TP0OVF bit Overflow counterNote 0H 1H 2H 0H 1 cycle of 16-bit counter Pulse width <1> <2> <3> <4> Note The overflow counter is set arbitrarily by software on the internal RAM. <1> Read the TP0CCRa register (setting of the default value of the TIP0a pin input). <2> An overflow occurs. Increment the overflow counter and clear the overflow flag to 0 in the overflow interrupt servicing. <3> An overflow occurs a second time. Increment (+1) the overflow counter and clear the overflow flag to 0 in the overflow interrupt servicing. <4> Read the TP0CCRa register. Read the overflow counter. When the overflow counter is "N", the pulse width can be calculated by (N x 10000H + Da1 - Da0). In this example, the pulse width is (20000H + Da1 - Da0) because an overflow occurs twice. Clear the overflow counter (0H). 260 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) (e) Clearing overflow flag The overflow flag can be cleared to 0 by clearing the TP0OVF bit to 0 with the CLR instruction and by writing 8-bit data (bit 0 is 0) to the TP0OPT0 register. To accurately detect an overflow, read the TP0OVF bit when it is 1, and then clear the overflow flag by using a bit manipulation instruction. (i) Operation to write 0 (without conflict with setting) Overflow set signal (iii) Operation to clear to 0 (without conflict with setting) Overflow set signal L L 0 write signal 0 write signal Register access signal Overflow flag (TP0OVF bit) Read Write Overflow flag (TP0OVF bit) (ii) Operation to write 0 (conflict with setting) Overflow set signal 0 write signal Overflow flag (TP0OVF bit) (iv) Operation to clear to 0 (conflict with setting) Overflow set signal 0 write signal Register access signal Overflow flag (TP0OVF bit) Read Write H To clear the overflow flag to 0, read the overflow flag to check if it is set to 1, and clear it with the CLR instruction. If 0 is written to the overflow flag without checking if the flag is 1, the set information of overflow may be erased by writing 0 ((ii) in the above chart). Therefore, software may judge that no overflow has occurred even when an overflow actually has occurred. If execution of the CLR instruction conflicts with occurrence of an overflow when the overflow flag is cleared to 0 with the CLR instruction, the overflow flag remains set even after execution of the clear instruction. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 261 CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) 7.5.7 Pulse width measurement mode (TP0MD2 to TP0MD0 bits = 110) In the pulse width measurement mode, 16-bit timer/event counter P starts counting when the TP0CTL0.TP0CE bit is set to 1. Each time the valid edge input to the TIP0a pin has been detected, the count value of the 16-bit counter is stored in the TP0CCRa register, and the 16-bit counter is cleared to 0000H. The interval of the valid edge can be measured by reading the TP0CCRa register after a capture interrupt request signal (INTTP0CCa) occurs. Select either the TIP00 or TIP01 pin as the capture trigger input pin. Specify "No edge detected" by using the TP0IOC1 register for the unused pins. When an external clock is used as the count clock, measure the pulse width of the TIP01 pin because the external clock is fixed to the TIP00 pin. At this time, clear the TP0IOC1.TP0IS1 and TP0IOC1.TP0IS0 bits to 00 (capture trigger input (TIP00 pin): No edge detected). Figure 7-34. Configuration in Pulse Width Measurement Mode Clear Internal count clock TIP00 pin (external event count input/capture trigger input) TIP01 pin (capture trigger input) Remark 262 Edge detector Count clock selection 16-bit counter INTTP0OV signal INTTP0CC0 signal TP0CE bit Digital noise eliminator Digital noise eliminator Edge detector INTTP0CC1 signal TP0CCR0 register (capture) Edge detector TP0CCR1 register (capture) a = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) Figure 7-35. Basic Timing in Pulse Width Measurement Mode FFFFH 16-bit counter 0000H TP0CE bit TIP0a pin input TP0CCRa register 0000H D0 D1 D2 D3 INTTP0CCa signal INTTP0OV signal Cleared to 0 by CLR instruction TP0OVF bit Remark a = 0, 1 When the TP0CE bit is set to 1, the 16-bit counter starts counting. When the valid edge input to the TIP0a pin is later detected, the count value of the 16-bit counter is stored in the TP0CCRa register, the 16-bit counter is cleared to 0000H, and a capture interrupt request signal (INTTP0CCa) is generated. The pulse width is calculated as follows. <R> Pulse width = Captured value x Count clock cycle If the valid edge is not input to the TIP0a pin even when the 16-bit counter counted up to FFFFH, an overflow interrupt request signal (INTTP0OV) is generated at the next count clock, and the counter is cleared to 0000H and continues counting. At this time, the overflow flag (TP0OPT0.TP0OVF bit) is also set to 1. Clear the overflow flag to 0 by executing the CLR instruction via software. If the overflow flag is set to 1, the pulse width can be calculated as follows. <R> Pulse width = (10000H x TP0OVF bit set (1) count + Captured value) x Count clock cycle Remark a = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 263 CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) Figure 7-36. Register Setting in Pulse Width Measurement Mode (1/2) (a) TMP0 control register 0 (TP0CTL0) TP0CE TP0CTL0 0/1 TP0CKS2 TP0CKS1 TP0CKS0 0 0 0 0/1 0 0/1 0/1 Select count clockNote 0: Stop counting 1: Enable counting Note Setting is invalid when the TP0EEE bit = 1. (b) TMP0 control register 1 (TP0CTL1) TP0EST TP0EEE TP0CTL1 0 0 0/1 TP0MD2 TP0MD1 TP0MD0 0 0 1 1 0 1, 1, 0: Pulse width measurement mode 0: Operate with count clock selected by TP0CKS0 to TP0CKS2 bits 1: Count external event count input signal (c) TMP0 I/O control register 1 (TP0IOC1) TP0IOC1 0 0 0 0 TP0IS3 TP0IS2 TP0IS1 TP0IS0 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 Select valid edge of TIP00 pin input Select valid edge of TIP01 pin input (d) TMP0 I/O control register 2 (TP0IOC2) TP0EES1 TP0EES0 TP0ETS1 TP0ETS0 TP0IOC2 0 0 0 0 0/1 0/1 0 0 Select valid edge of external event count input 264 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) Figure 7-36. Register Setting in Pulse Width Measurement Mode (2/2) (e) TMP0 option register 0 (TP0OPT0) TP0CCS1 TP0CCS0 TP0OPT0 0 0 0 0 TP0OVF 0 0 0 0/1 Overflow flag (f) TMP0 counter read buffer register (TP0CNT) The value of the 16-bit counter can be read by reading the TP0CNT register. (g) TMP0 capture/compare registers 0 and 1 (TP0CCR0 and TP0CCR1) These registers store the count value of the 16-bit counter when the valid edge input to the TIP0a pin is detected. Remarks 1. TMP0 I/O control register 0 (TP0IOC0) is not used in the pulse width measurement mode. 2. a = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 265 CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) (1) Operation flow in pulse width measurement mode Figure 7-37. Software Processing Flow in Pulse Width Measurement Mode FFFFH 16-bit counter 0000H TP0CE bit TIP00 pin input 0000H TP0CCR0 register D0 D1 D2 INTTP0CC0 signal <1> <2> <1> Count operation start flow START Register initial setting TP0CTL0 register (TP0CKS0 to TP0CKS2 bits), TP0CTL1 register, TP0IOC1 register, TP0IOC2 register, TP0OPT0 register Set TP0CTL0 register (TP0CE bit = 1) Initial setting of these registers is performed before setting the TP0CE bit to 1. The TP0CKS0 to TP0CKS2 bits can be set at the same time when counting has been started (TP0CE bit = 1). <2> Count operation stop flow TP0CE bit = 0 The counter is initialized and counting is stopped by clearing the TP0CE bit to 0. STOP 266 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 0000H CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) (2) Operation timing in pulse width measurement mode (a) Clearing overflow flag The overflow flag can be cleared to 0 by clearing the TP0OVF bit to 0 with the CLR instruction and by writing 8-bit data (bit 0 is 0) to the TP0OPT0 register. To accurately detect an overflow, read the TP0OVF bit when it is 1, and then clear the overflow flag by using a bit manipulation instruction. (i) Operation to write 0 (without conflict with setting) Overflow set signal (iii) Operation to clear to 0 (without conflict with setting) Overflow set signal L L 0 write signal 0 write signal Register access signal Overflow flag (TP0OVF bit) Read Write Overflow flag (TP0OVF bit) (ii) Operation to write 0 (conflict with setting) Overflow set signal 0 write signal Overflow flag (TP0OVF bit) (iv) Operation to clear to 0 (conflict with setting) Overflow set signal 0 write signal Register access signal Overflow flag (TP0OVF bit) Read Write H To clear the overflow flag to 0, read the overflow flag to check if it is set to 1, and clear it with the CLR instruction. If 0 is written to the overflow flag without checking if the flag is 1, the set information of overflow may be erased by writing 0 ((ii) in the above chart). Therefore, software may judge that no overflow has occurred even when an overflow actually has occurred. If execution of the CLR instruction conflicts with occurrence of an overflow when the overflow flag is cleared to 0 with the CLR instruction, the overflow flag remains set even after execution of the clear instruction. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 267 CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) 7.5.8 Timer output operations The following table shows the operations and output levels of the TOP00 and TOP01 pins. Table 7-4. Timer Output Control in Each Mode Operation Mode TOP01 Pin TOP00 Pin Interval timer mode Square wave output External event count mode Square wave output External trigger pulse output mode External trigger pulse output One-shot pulse output mode One-shot pulse output PWM output mode PWM output Free-running timer mode Square wave output (only when compare function is used) - Square wave output - Pulse width measurement mode Table 7-5. Truth Table of TOP00 and TOP01 Pins Under Control of Timer Output Control Bits TP0IOC0.TP0OLa Bit TP0IOC0.TP0OEa Bit TP0CTL0.TP0CE Bit Level of TOP0a Pin 0 0 x Low-level output 1 0 Low-level output 1 Low level immediately before counting, high level after counting is started 1 0 x High-level output 1 0 High-level output 1 High level immediately before counting, low level after counting is started Remark 268 a = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) 7.6 Eliminating Noise on Capture Trigger Input Pin (TIP0a) The TIP0a pin has a digital noise eliminator. However, this circuit is valid only when the pin is used as a capture trigger input pin; it is invalid when the pin is used as an external event count input pin or external trigger input pin. Digital noise can be eliminated by specifying the alternate function of the TIP0a pin using the PMC3, PFC3, and PFCE3 registers. The number of times of sampling can be selected from three or two by using the PaNFC.PaNFSTS bit. The sampling clock can be selected from fXX, fXX/2, fXX/4, fXX/16, fXX/32, or fXX/64, by using the PaNFC.PaNFC2 to PaNFC.PaNFC0 bits. (1) TIP0a noise elimination control register (PaNFC) This register is used to select the sampling clock and the number of times of sampling for eliminating digital noise. This register can be read or written in 8-bit or 1-bit units. Reset input clears this register to 00H. After reset: 00H PaNFC (a = 0, 1) 0 PaNFSTS R/W Address: P0NFC FFFFFB00H, P1NFC FFFFFB04H PaNFSTS 0 0 PaNFC2 PaNFC1 PaNFC0 Setting of number of times of sampling for eliminating digital noise 0 Number of times of sampling = 3 1 Number of times of sampling = 2 PaNFC2 PaNFC1 PaNFC0 Sampling clock selection 0 0 0 0 0 1 fXX/2 0 1 0 fXX/4 0 1 1 fXX/16 1 0 0 fXX/32 0 1 fXX/64 1 0 Other than above fXX Setting prohibited Cautions 1. Enable starting the 16-bit counter of TMP0 (TP0CTL.TP0CE bit = 1) after the lapse of the sampling clock period x number of times of sampling. 2. Be sure to clear bits 7, 5 to 3 to "0". User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 269 CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) <Setting procedure> <1> Select the number of times of sampling and the sampling clock by using the PaNFC register. <2> Select the alternate function (of the TIP0a pin) by using the PMC3, PFC3, and PFCE3 registers. <3> Set the operating mode of TMP0 (such as the capture mode or the valid edge of the capture trigger). <4> Enable the TMP0 count operation. <Noise elimination width> The digital noise elimination width (tWTIPa) is as follows, where T is the sampling clock period and M is the number of times of sampling. * tWTIPa < (M - 1)T: Accurately eliminated as noise * (M - 1)T tWTIPa < MT: Eliminated as noise or detected as valid edge * tWTIPa MT: Accurately detected as valid edge Therefore, a pulse width of MT or longer must be input so that the valid edge of the capture trigger input can be accurately detected. 270 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) 7.7 Cautions (1) Capture operation When the capture operation is used and fXX/8, fXX/16, fXX/32, fXX/64, fXX/128, or the external event counter (TP0CLT1.TP0EEE bit = 1) is selected as the count clock, FFFFH, not 0000H, may be captured in the TP0CCRn register if the capture trigger is input immediately after the TP0CE bit is set to 1. (a) Free-running timer mode FFFFH 16-bit counter 0000H Count clock Sampling clock (fXX) TP0CCR0 register 0000H FFFFH 0001H TP0CE bit TIP00 pin input Capture trigger input Capture trigger input (b) Pulse width measurement mode FFFFH 16-bit counter 0000H Count clock Sampling clock (fXX) TP0CCR0 register 0000H FFFFH 0002H TP0CE bit TIP00 pin input Capture trigger input Capture trigger input User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 271 CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 <R> In the V850ES/KF1, two channels of 16-bit timer/event counter 0 are provided. 8.1 Functions 16-bit timer/event counter 0n has the following functions (n = 0, 1). (1) Interval timer 16-bit timer/event counter 0n generates an interrupt request at the preset time interval. (2) Square-wave output 16-bit timer/event counter 0n can output a square wave with any selected frequency. (3) External event counter 16-bit timer/event counter 0n can measure the number of pulses of an externally input signal. (4) One-shot pulse output 16-bit timer/event counter 0n can output a one-shot pulse whose output pulse width can be set freely. (5) PPG output 16-bit timer/event counter 0n can output a rectangular wave whose frequency and output pulse width can be set freely. (6) Pulse width measurement 16-bit timer/event counter 0n can measure the pulse width of an externally input signal. 272 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 8.2 Configuration 16-bit timer/event counter 0n includes the following hardware. Table 8-1. Configuration of 16-bit Timer/Event Counter 0n Item Configuration Time/counter 16-bit timer counter 0n (TM0n) Register 16-bit timer capture/compare registers: 16-bit x 2 (CR0n0, CR0n1) Timer input 2 (TI0n0, TI0n1 pins) Timer output 1 (TO0n pin), output controller Note 16-bit timer mode control register 0n (TMC0n) Control registers Capture/compare control register 0n (CRC0n) 16-bit timer output control register 0n (TOC0n) Prescaler mode register 0n (PRM0n) Note To use the TI0n0, TI0n1, and TO0n pin functions, refer to Table 4-14 Settings When Port Pins Are Used for Alternate Functions. The block diagram is shown below. Figure 8-1. Block Diagram of 16-bit Timer/Event Counter 0n Internal bus Tl0n1 Selector Selector Noise eliminator Capture/compare control CRC0n2CRC0n1 CRC0n0 register 0n (CRC0n) INTTM0n0 16-bit timer capture/compare register 0n0 (CR0n0) Selector Match 16-bit timer counter 0n (TM0n) Clear Output controller TO0n Match 3 Tl0n0 16-bit timer capture/compare register 0n1 (CR0n1) Selector Noise eliminator fXX/4 Noise eliminator Count clock INTTM0n1 PRM0n1 PRM0n0 Prescaler mode register 0n (PRM0n) TMC0n3 TMC0n2 TMC0n1 OVF0n OSPT0n OSPE0n TOC0n4 LVS0n LVR0n TOC0n1 TOE0n 16-bit timer mode control register 0n (TMC0n) Timer output control register 0n (TOC0n) Internal bus Remarks 1. fXX: Main clock frequency 2. n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 273 CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 (1) 16-bit timer counter 0n (TM0n) The TM0n register is a 16-bit read-only register that counts count pulses. The counter is incremented in synchronization with the rising edge of the count clock. After reset: 0000H 15 R 12 13 14 Address: TM00 FFFFF600H, TM01 FFFFF610H 10 11 8 9 6 7 4 5 2 3 1 0 TM0n (n = 0, 1) The count value of the TM0n register can be read by reading the TM0n register when the values of the TMC0n.TMC0n3 and TMC0n.TMC0n2 bits are other than 00. The value of the TM0n register is 0000H if it is read when the TMC0n3 and TMC0n2 bits are 00. The count value is reset to 0000H in the following cases. * At reset signal generation * If the TMC0n3 and TMC0n2 bits are cleared to 00 * If the valid edge of the TI0n0 pin is input in the mode in which the clear & start occurs when inputting the valid edge to the TI0n0 pin * If the TM0n register and the CR0n0 register match in the mode in which the clear & start occurs when the TM0n register and the CR0n0 register match * The TOC0n.OSPT0n bit is set to 1 in one-shot pulse output mode Remark n = 0, 1 (2) 16-bit timer capture/compare register 0n0 (CR0n0), 16-bit timer capture/compare register 0n1 (CR0n1) The CR0n0 and CR0n1 registers are 16-bit registers that are used with a capture function or comparison function selected by using the CRC0n register. Change of the value of the CR0n0 register while the timer is operating (TMC0n.TMC0n3 and TMC0n.TMC0n2 bits = other than 00) is prohibited. The value of the CR0n1 register can be changed during operation if the value has been set in a specific way. For details, see 8.5.1 Rewriting CR0n0 register during TM0n operation. These registers can be read or written in 16-bit units. Reset sets these registers to 0000H. (a) 16-bit timer capture/compare register 0n0 (CR0n0) After reset: 0000H 15 14 R/W 13 12 Address: CR000 FFFFF602H, CR010 FFFFF612H 11 10 9 8 7 6 CR0n0 (n = 0, 1) 274 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 5 4 3 2 1 0 CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 (i) When the CR0n0 register is used as a compare register The value set in the CR0n0 register is constantly compared with the TM0n register count value, and an interrupt request signal (INTTM0n0) is generated if they match. The value is held until the CR0n0 register is rewritten. (ii) When the CR0n0 register is used as a capture register The count value of the TM0n register is captured to the CR0n0 register when a capture trigger is input. As the capture trigger, an edge of a phase reverse to that of the TI0n0 pin or the valid edge of the TI0n1 pin can be selected by using the CRC0n or PRM0n register. (b) 16-bit timer capture/compare register 0n1 (CR0n1) After reset: 0000H 15 14 R/W 13 12 Address: CR001 FFFFF604H, CR011 FFFFF614H 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 CR0n1 (n = 0, 1) (i) When using the CR0n1 register as a compare register The value set to the CR0n1 register and the count value of the TM0n register are always compared and when these values match, an interrupt request signal (INTTM0n1) is generated. (ii) When using the CR0n1 register as a capture register The TM0n register count value is captured to the CR0n1 register by inputting a capture trigger. The valid edge of the TI0n0 pin can be selected as the capture trigger. The valid edge of the TI0n0 pin is set with the PRM0n register. Cautions 1. When the P33 and P35 pins are used as the valid edges of TI000 and TI010, these pins cannot be used as timer outputs (TO00, TO01). When these pins are used as timer outputs (TO00, TO01), they cannot be used as the valid edges of TI000 and TI010. 2. If clearing of the TMC0n3 and TMC0n2 bits to 00 and input of the capture trigger conflict, then the captured data is undefined. 3. To change the mode from the capture mode to the comparison mode, first clear the TMC0n3 and TMC0n2 bits to 00, and then change the setting. A value that has been once captured remains stored in the CR0n0 and CR0n1 registers unless the device is reset. If the mode has been changed to the comparison mode, be sure to set a comparison value. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 275 CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 (c) Setting range when used as compare register When the CR0n0 or CR0n1 register is used as a compare register, set it as shown below. Operation CR0n0 Register CR0n1 Register 0000H < N FFFFH * Operation as interval timer 0000H Note M FFFFH Normally, this setting is not used. Mask the * Operation as square-wave output match interrupt signal (INTTM0n1). * Operation as external event counter * Operation in the clear & start mode 0000H Note N FFFFH Note M FFFFH Note M<N Note M FFFFH (M N) 0000H entered by TI0n0 pin valid edge input * Operation as free-running timer M < N FFFFH * Operation as PPG output Note * Operation as one-shot pulse output 0000H 0000H N FFFFH (N M) 0000H Note When 0000H is set, a match interrupt immediately after the timer operation does not occur and timer output is not changed, and the first match timing is as follows. A match interrupt occurs at the timing when the timer counter (TM0n register) is changed from 0000H to 0001H. * When the timer counter is cleared due to overflow * When the timer counter is cleared due to TI0n0 pin valid edge (when clear & start mode is entered by TI0n0 pin valid edge input) * When the timer counter is cleared due to compare match (when clear & start mode is entered by match between TM0n and CR0n0 (CR0n0 = other than 0000H, CR0n1 = 0000H)) Timer counter clear TM0n register Compare register set value (0000H) Operation Timer operation enable bit disabled (00) Operation enabled (other than 00) Interrupt request signal Interrupt signal is not generated Interrupt signal is generated Remarks 1. N: CR0n0 register set value M: CR0n1 register set value 2. For details of operation enable bits (TMC0n.TMC0n3, TMC0n.TMC0n2 bits), refer to 8.3 (1) 16-bit timer mode control register 0n (TMC0n). 276 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 Table 8-2. Capture Operation of CR0n0 and CR0n1 Registers External Input Signal TI0n0 Pin Input TI0n1 Pin Input Capture Operation Capture operation of CRC0n1 bit = 1 Set values of ESn01 and CRC0n1 bit = 0 Set values of ESn11 and CR0n0 register TI0n0 pin input ESn00 TI0n1 pin input ESn10 (reverse phase) Position of edge to be Position of edge to be captured captured 01: Rising 01: Rising 00: Falling 00: Falling 11: Both edges 11: Both edges (cannot be captured) INTTM0n0 signal is not Interrupt signal Capture operation of TI0n0 pin input CR0n1 register Note Interrupt signal INTTM0n0 signal is generated even if value generated each time is captured. value is captured. Set values of ESn01 and ESn00 Position of edge to be captured 01: Rising 00: Falling 11: Both edges Interrupt signal INTTM0n1 signal is generated each time value is captured. Note The capture operation of the CR0n1 register is not affected by the setting of the CRC0n1 bit. Caution To capture the count value of the TM0n register to the CR0n0 register by using the phase reverse to that input to the TI0n0 pin, the interrupt request signal (INTTM0n0) is not generated after the value has been captured. If the valid edge is detected on the TI0n1 pin during this operation, the capture operation is not performed but the INTTM0n0 signal is generated as an external interrupt signal. To not use the external interrupt, mask the INTTM0n0 signal. Remarks 1. CRC0n1: See 8.3 (2) Capture/compare control register 0n (CRC0n). ESn11, ESn10, ESn01, ESn00: See 8.3 (4) Prescaler mode register 0n (PRM0n). 2. n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 277 CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 8.3 Registers Registers used to control 16-bit timer/event counter 0n are shown below. * 16-bit timer mode control register 0n (TMC0n) * Capture/compare control register 0n (CRC0n) * 16-bit timer output control register 0n (TOC0n) * Prescaler mode register 0n (PRM0n) Remark To use the TI0n0, TI0n1, and TO0n pin functions, refer to Table 4-14 Settings When Port Pins Are Used for Alternate Functions. (1) 16-bit timer mode control register 0n (TMC0n) TMC0n is an 8-bit register that sets the 16-bit timer/event counter 0n operation mode, the TM0n register clear mode, and output timing, and detects an overflow. Rewriting TMC0n is prohibited during operation (when the TMC0n3 and TMC0n2 bits = other than 00). However, it can be changed when the TMC0n3 and TMC0n2 bits are cleared to 00 (stopping operation) and when the OVF0n bit is cleared to 0. This register can be read or written in 8-bit or 1-bit units. Reset sets this register to 00H. Cautions 1. 16-bit timer/event counter 0n starts operation at the moment TMC0n2 and TMC0n3 are set to values other than 00 (operation stop mode), respectively. Set TMC0n2 and TMC0n3 to 00 to stop the operation. 2. Accessing the TMC0n register is prohibited when the CPU operates on subclock and the main clock oscillation is stopped. For details, refer to 3.4.8 (1) (b) Access to special on-chip peripheral I/O register. Remark n = 0, 1 278 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 After reset: 00H TMC0n R/W Address: TMC00 FFFFF606H, TMC01 FFFFF616H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 <0> 0 0 0 0 TMC0n3 TMC0n2 0 OVF0n TMC0n3 TMC0n2 0 0 (n = 0, 1) Enable operation of 16-bit timer/event counter 0n Disables TM0n operation. Stops supplying operating clock. Clears 16-bit timer counter (TM0n). 0 1 Free-running timer mode 1 0 Clear & start mode entered by TI0n0 pin valid edge input 1 1 Clear & start mode entered upon a match between TM0n and CR0n0 OVF0n Clear (0) Set (1) Note TM0n register overflow flag Clears OVF0n to 0 or TMC0n.TMC0n3 and TMC0n.TMC0n2 = 00 Overflow occurs. OVF0n is set to 1 when the value of TM0n changes from FFFFH to 0000H in all the operation modes (free-running timer mode, clear & start mode entered by TI0n0 pin valid edge input, and clear & start mode entered upon a match between TM0n and CR0n0). It can also be set to 1 by writing 1 to the OVF0n bit. Note The TI0n0 pin valid edge is set by the PRM0n register. Caution Be sure to clear bits 7 to 4 and 1 to "0". User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 279 CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 (2) Capture/compare control register 0n (CRC0n) The CRC0n register is the register that controls the operation of the CR0n0 and CR0n1 registers. Changing the value of the CRC0n register is prohibited during operation (when the TMC0n.TMC0n3 and TMC0n.TMC0n2 bits = other than 00). This register can be read or written in 8-bit or 1-bit units. Reset sets this register to 00H. After reset: 00H CRC0n R/W Address: CRC00 FFFFF608H, CRC01 FFFFF618H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 CRC0n2 CRC0n1 CRC0n0 (n = 0, 1) CRC0n2 CR0n1 register operating mode selection 0 Operates as compare register 1 Operates as capture register CRC0n1 CR0n0 register capture trigger selection 0 Captures on valid edge of TI0n1 pin 1 Captures on valid edge of TI0n0 pin by reverse phase Note The valid edge of the TI0n1 and TI0n0 pin is set by the PRM0n register. If PRM0n.ESn01 and PRM0n.ESn00 are set to 11 (both edges) when CRC0n1 is 1, the valid edge of the TI0n0 pin cannot be detected. CRC0n0 CR0n0 register operating mode selection 0 Operates as compare register 1 Operates as capture register If TMC0n3 and TMC0n2 are set to 11 (clear & start mode entered upon a match between TM0n and CR0n0), be sure to set the CRC0n0 bit to 0. Note When the valid edge is detected at the TI0n1 pin, the capture operation is not performed but the INTTM0n0 signal is generated as an external interrupt signal. Caution To ensure that the capture operation is performed properly, the capture trigger requires a pulse two cycles longer than the count clock selected by the PRM0n register. 280 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 (3) 16-bit timer output control register 0n (TOC0n) The TOC0n register is an 8-bit register that controls the TO0n pin output. The TOC0n register can be rewritten while only the OSPT0n bit is operating (when the TMC0n.TMC0n3 and TMC0n.TMC0n2 bits = other than 00). Rewriting the other bits is prohibited during operation. However, TOC0n4 can be rewritten during timer operation as a means to rewrite the CR0n1 register (see 8.5.1 Rewriting CR0n1 register during TM0n operation). This register can be read or written in 8-bit or 1-bit units. Reset sets this register to 00H. Cautions 1. Be sure to set the TOC0n register using the following procedure. <1> Set the TOC0n4 and TOC0n1 bits to 1. <2> Set only the TOE0n bit to 1. <3> Set either the LVS0n bit or LVR0n bit to 1. 2. Restrictions are applied to the channels (TM00, TM01) in which the timer input and output share the same pin. For details, refer to 8.6 (1) Alternate functions of TI0n0/TO0n pins. (1/2) After reset: 00H R/W 7 TOC0n Address: TOC00 FFFFF609H, TOC01 FFFFF619H <6> <5> Note 0 OSPT0n Note OSPE0n 4 <3> <2> 1 <0> TOC0n4 LVS0n LVR0n TOC0n1 TOE0n (n = 0, 1) OSPT0n Note One-shot pulse output trigger via software - 0 1 One-shot pulse output The value of this bit is always "0" when it is read. If it is set to 1, TM0n is cleared and started. Note OSPE0n One-shot pulse output operation control 0 Successive pulse output 1 One-shot pulse output If it is set to 1, TM0n is cleared and started. One-shot pulse output operates correctly in the free-running timer mode or clear & start mode entered by TI0n0 pin valid edge input. The one-shot pulse cannot be output in the clear & start mode entered upon a match between the TM0n and CR0n0 registers. TOC0n4 TO0n pin output control on match between CR0n1 and TM0n registers 0 Disables inversion operation 1 Enables inversion operation The interrupt signal (INTTM0n1) is generated even when the TOC0n4 bit = 0. Note In 16-bit timer/event counters 00 and 01, since the timer input and output share the same pin, only the software trigger is valid as the one-shot pulse output. Therefore, set the TMC00.TMC001 and TMC01.TMC011 bits to 0. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 281 CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 (2/2) LVS0n LVR0n Setting of TO0n pin output status 0 0 No change 0 1 Initial value of TO0n pin output is low level (TO0n pin output is cleared to 0). 1 0 Initial value of TO0n pin output is high level (TO0n pin output is set to 1). 1 1 Setting prohibited * The LVS0n and LVR0n bits can be used to set the initial value of the output level of the TO0n pin. If the initial value does not have to be set, leave the LVS0n and LVR0n bits as 00n. * Be sure to set the LVS0n and LVR0n bits when TOE0n = 1. The LVS0n, LVR0n, and TOE0n bits being simultaneously set to 1 is prohibited. * The LVS0n and LVR0n bits are trigger bits. By setting these bits to 1, the initial value of the output level of the TO0n pin can be set. Even if these bits are cleared to 0, output of the TO0n pin is not affected. * The values of the LVS0n and LVR0n bits are always 0 when they are read. * For how to set the LVS0n and LVR0n bits, see 8.5.2 Setting LVS0n and LVR0n bits. TOC0n1 TO0n pin output control on match between CR0n0 and TM0n registers 0 Disables inversion operation 1 Enables inversion operation The interrupt signal (INTTM0n0) is generated even when the TOC0n1 bit = 0. TOE0n 282 TO0n pin output control 0 Disables output (TO0n pin output fixed to low level) 1 Enables output User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 (4) Prescaler mode register 0n (PRM0n) The PRM0n register is the register that sets the TM0n register count clock and TI0n0 and TI0n1 pin input valid edges. Rewriting the PRM0n register is prohibited during operation (when the TMC0n.TMC0n3 and TMC0n.TMC0n2 bits = other than 00). This register can be read or written in 8-bit or 1-bit units. Reset sets this register to 00H. Cautions 1. Do not apply the following setting when setting the PRM0n1 and PRM0n0 bits to 11 (to specify the valid edge of the TI0n0 pin as a count clock). * Clear & start mode entered by the TI0n0 pin valid edge * Setting the TI0n0 pin as a capture trigger 2. If the operation of the 16-bit timer/event counter 0n is enabled when the TI0n0 or TI0n1 pin is at high level and when the valid edge of the TI0n0 or TI0n1 pin is specified to be the rising edge or both edges, the high level of the TI0n0 or TI0n1 pin is detected as a rising edge. Note this when the TI0n0 or TI0n1 pin is pulled up. However, the rising edge is not detected when the timer operation has been once stopped and is then enabled again. 3. When the P33 and P35 pins are used as the valid edges of TI000 and TI010, these pins cannot be used as timer outputs (TO00, TO01). When these pins are used as timer outputs (TO00, TO01), they cannot be used as the valid edges of TI000 and TI010. After reset: 00H PRM0n R/W Address: 7 6 PRM00 FFFFF607H, PRM01 FFFFF617H 5 4 3 2 1 0 ESn11 ESn10 ESn01 ESn00 0 0 PRM0n1 PRM0n0 ESn11 ESn10 0 0 Falling edge 0 1 Rising edge 1 0 Setting prohibited 1 1 Both falling and rising edges ESn01 ESn00 0 0 Falling edge 0 1 Rising edge 1 0 Setting prohibited 1 1 Both falling and rising edges (n = 0, 1) Remark TI0n1 pin valid edge selection TI0n0 pin valid edge selection Refer to (a) and (b) for settings of the PRM0n1 and PRM0n0 bits. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 283 CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 (a) Count clock for 16-bit timer/event counter 00 PRM001 Bit Note 1 PRM000 Bit Selection of Count Clock Count Clock fXX = 20 MHz fXX = 16 MHz fXX = 10 MHz 0 0 fXX/2 100 ns 125 ns 200 ns 0 1 fXX/4 200 ns 250 ns 400 ns 1 0 fXX/8 400 ns 500 ns 800 ns - - - 1 Notes 1. 1 Valid edge of TI000 Note 2 When the internal clock is selected, set so as to satisfy the following conditions: VDD = REGC = 4.0 to 5.5 V: Count clock 10 MHz VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, REGC = 10 F: Count clock 5 MHz VDD = REGC = 2.7 to 4.0 V: Count clock 5 MHz 2. The external clock requires a pulse longer than two cycles of the internal clock (fXX/4). (b) Count clock for 16-bit timer/event counter 01 PRM011 Bit Note 1 PRM010 Bit Selection of Count Clock Count Clock 0 0 fXX 0 1 fXX/4 1 0 INTWT 1 Notes 1. 1 Valid edge of TI010 fXX = 20 MHz fXX = 16 MHz fXX = 10 MHz Setting prohibited Setting prohibited 100 ns 200 ns 250 ns 400 ns - - - - - - Note 2 When the internal clock is selected, set so as to satisfy the following conditions: VDD = REGC = 4.0 to 5.5 V: Count clock 10 MHz VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, REGC = 10 F: Count clock 5 MHz VDD = REGC = 2.7 to 4.0 V: Count clock 5 MHz 2. 284 The external clock requires a pulse longer than two cycles of the internal clock (fXX/4). User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 8.4 Operation 8.4.1 Interval timer operation If the TMC0n.TMC0n3 and TMC0n.TMC0n2 bits are set to 11 (clear & start mode entered upon a match between the TM0n register and the CR0n0 register), the count operation is started in synchronization with the count clock. When the value of the TM0n register later matches the value of the CR0n0 register, the TM0n register is cleared to 0000H and a match interrupt signal (INTTM0n0) is generated. This INTTM0n0 signal enables the TM0n register to operate as an interval timer. Remarks 1. For the alternate-function pin settings, refer to Table 4-14 Settings When Port Pins Are Used for Alternate Functions. 2. For enabling the INTTM0n0 interrupt, refer to CHAPTER 19 INTERRUPT/EXCEPTION PROCESSING FUNCTION. Figure 8-2. Block Diagram of Interval Timer Operation Clear Count clock 16-bit counter (TM0n) Match signal INTTM0n0 signal Operable bits TMC0n3, TMC0n2 CR0n0 register Remark n = 0, 1 Figure 8-3. Basic Timing Example of Interval Timer Operation N N N N Interval (N + 1) Interval (N + 1) TM0n register 0000H Operable bits (TMC0n3, TMC0n2) 00 11 Compare register (CR0n0) N Compare match interrupt (INTTM0n0) Interval (N + 1) Remark Interval (N + 1) n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 285 CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 Figure 8-4. Example of Register Settings for Interval Timer Operation (a) 16-bit timer mode control register 0n (TMC0n) TMC0n3 TMC0n2 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 OVF0n 0 0 Clears and starts on match between TM0n and CR0n0. (b) Capture/compare control register 0n (CRC0n) CRC0n2 CRC0n1 CRC0n0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CR0n0 used as compare register (c) 16-bit timer output control register 0n (TOC0n) OSPT0n OSPE0n TOC0n4 0 0 0 0 LVS0n LVR0n TOC0n1 TOE0n 0 0 0 0 (d) Prescaler mode register 0n (PRM0n) ESn11 ESn10 ESn01 ESn00 0 0 0 0 PRM0n1 PRM0n0 0 0 0/1 0/1 Selects count clock. (e) 16-bit timer counter 0n (TM0n) By reading the TM0n register, the count value can be read. (f) 16-bit capture/compare register 0n0 (CR0n0) If M is set to the CR0n0 register, the interval time is as follows. * Interval time = (M + 1) x Count clock cycle Setting the CR0n0 register to 0000H is prohibited. (g) 16-bit capture/compare register 0n1 (CR0n1) Usually, the CR0n1 register is not used for the interval timer function. However, a compare match interrupt (INTTM0n1) is generated when the set value of the CR0n1 register matches the value of the TM0n register. Therefore, mask the interrupt request by using the interrupt mask flag (TM0MKn1). Remark 286 n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 Figure 8-5. Example of Software Processing for Interval Timer Function N N N TM0n register 0000H Operable bits (TMC0n3, TMC0n2) 00 11 Compare register (CR0n0) 00 N Compare match interrupt (INTTM0n0) <1> <2> <1> Count operation start flow START Register initial setting PRM0n register, CRC0n register, CR0n0 register, port setting Initial setting of these registers is performed before setting the TMC0n3 and TMC0n2 bits to 11. TMC0n3, TMC0n2 bits = 11 Starts count operation <2> Count operation stop flow TMC0n3, TMC0n2 bits = 00 The counter is initialized and counting is stopped by clearing the TMC0n3 and TMC0n2 bits to 00. STOP Remark n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 287 CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 8.4.2 Square wave output operation When 16-bit timer/event counter 0n operates as an interval timer (see 8.4.1), a square wave can be output from the TO0n pin by setting the TOC0n register to 03H. When the TMC0n.TMC0n3 and TMC0n.TMC0n2 bits are set to 11 (count clear & start mode entered upon a match between the TM0n register and the CR0n0 register), the counting operation is started in synchronization with the count clock. When the value of the TM0n register later matches the value of the CR0n0 register, the TM0n register is cleared to 0000H, an interrupt signal (INTTM0n0) is generated, and output of the TO0n pin is inverted. This TO0n pin output that is inverted at fixed intervals enables TO0n to output a square wave. Remarks 1. For the alternate-function pin settings, refer to Table 4-14 Settings When Port Pins Are Used for Alternate Functions. 2. For enabling the INTTM0n0 interrupt, refer to CHAPTER 19 INTERRUPT/EXCEPTION PROCESSING FUNCTION. 3. Restrictions are applied to the channels (TM00, TM01) in which the timer input and output share the same pin. For details, refer to 8.6 (1) Alternate functions of TI0n0/TO0n pins. Figure 8-6. Block Diagram of Square Wave Output Operation Clear Count clock Output controller 16-bit counter (TM0n) Match signal TO0n pin INTTM0n0 signal Operable bits TMC0n3, TMC0n2 CR0n0 register Remark n = 0, 1 Figure 8-7. Basic Timing Example of Square Wave Output Operation N N N N Interval (N + 1) Interval (N + 1) TM0n register 0000H Operable bits (TMC0n3, TMC0n2) 00 11 Compare register (CR0n0) N TO0n pin output Compare match interrupt (INTTM0n0) Interval (N + 1) Remark 288 Interval (N + 1) n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 Figure 8-8. Example of Register Settings for Square Wave Output Operation (a) 16-bit timer mode control register 0n (TMC0n) TMC0n3 TMC0n2 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 OVF0n 0 0 Clears and starts on match between TM0n and CR0n0. (b) Capture/compare control register 0n (CRC0n) CRC0n2 CRC0n1 CRC0n0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CR0n0 used as compare register (c) 16-bit timer output control register 0n (TOC0n) OSPT0n OSPE0n TOC0n4 0 0 0 0 LVS0n LVR0n TOC0n1 TOE0n 0/1 0/1 1 1 Enables TO0n pin output. Inverts TO0n pin output on match between TM0n and CR0n0. Specifies the initial value of TO0n output F/F. (d) Prescaler mode register 0n (PRM0n) ESn11 ESn10 ESn01 ESn00 0 0 0 0 PRM0n1 PRM0n0 0 0 0/1 0/1 Selects count clock. (e) 16-bit timer counter 0n (TM0n) By reading the TM0n register, the count value can be read. (f) 16-bit capture/compare register 0n0 (CR0n0) If M is set to the CR0n0 register, the square wave frequency is as follows. 1 / [2 x (M + 1) x Count clock cycle] Setting the CR0n0 register to 0000H is prohibited. (g) 16-bit capture/compare register 0n1 (CR0n1) Usually, the CR0n1 register is not used for the square wave output function. However, a compare match interrupt (INTTM0n1) is generated when the set value of the CR0n1 register matches the value of the TM0n register. Therefore, mask the interrupt request by using the interrupt mask flag (TM0MKn1). Remark n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 289 CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 Figure 8-9. Example of Software Processing for Square Wave Output Function N N N TM0n register 0000H Operable bits (TMC0n3, TMC0n2) 00 11 Compare register (CR0n0) 00 N TO0n pin output Compare match interrupt (INTTM0n0) TO0n output control bit (TOC0n1, TOE0n) <1> <2> <1> Count operation start flow START Initial setting of these registers is performed before setting the TMC0n3 and TMC0n2 bits to 11. Register initial setting PRM0n register, CRC0n register, TOC0n registerNote, CR0n0 register, port setting TMC0n3, TMC0n2 bits = 11 Starts count operation. <2> Count operation stop flow TMC0n3, TMC0n2 bits = 00 The counter is initialized and counting is stopped by clearing the TMC0n3 and TMC0n2 bits to 00. STOP Note Care must be exercised when setting the TOC0n register. For details, see 8.3 (3) 16-bit timer output control register 0n (TOC0n). Remark 290 n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 8.4.3 External event counter operation When the PRM0n.PRM0n1 and PRM0n.PRM0n0 bits are set to 11 (for counting up with the valid edge of the TI0n0 pin) and the TMC0n.TMC0n3 and TMC0n.TMC0n2 bits are set to 11, the valid edge of an external event input is counted, and a match interrupt signal indicating matching between the TM0n register and the CR0n0 register (INTTM0n0) is generated. To input the external event, the TI0n0 pin is used. Therefore, the timer/event counter cannot be used as an external event counter in the clear & start mode entered by the TI0n0 pin valid edge input (when the TMC0n3 and TMC0n2 bits = 10). The INTTM0n0 signal is generated with the following timing. * Timing of generation of INTTM0n0 signal (second time or later) = Number of times of detection of valid edge of external event x (Set value of the CR0n0 register + 1) However, the first match interrupt immediately after the timer/event counter has started operating is generated with the following timing. * Number of times of detection of valid edge of external event input x (Set value of the CR0n0 register + 2) To detect the valid edge, the signal input to the TI0n0 pin is sampled during the clock cycle of fXX/4. The valid edge is not detected until it is detected two times in a row. Therefore, a noise with a short pulse width can be eliminated. Remarks 1. For the alternate-function pin (TI0n0) settings, refer to Table 4-14 Settings When Port Pins Are Used for Alternate Functions. 2. For enabling the INTTM0n0 interrupts, refer to CHAPTER 19 INTERRUPT/EXCEPTION PROCESSING FUNCTION. 3. Restrictions are applied to the channels (TM00, TM01) in which the timer input and output share the same pin. For details, refer to 8.6 (1) Alternate functions of TI0n0/TO0n pins. Figure 8-10. Block Diagram of External Event Counter Operation fXX/4 Clear TI0n0 pin Edge detection 16-bit counter (TM0n) Match signal Operable bits TMC0n3, TMC0n2 INTTM0n0 signal CR0n0 register Remark n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 291 CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 Figure 8-11. Example of Register Settings in External Event Counter Mode (a) 16-bit timer mode control register 0n (TMC0n) TMC0n3 TMC0n2 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 OVF0n 0 0 Clears and starts on match between TM0n and CR0n0. (b) Capture/compare control register 0n (CRC0n) CRC0n2 CRC0n1 CRC0n0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CR0n0 used as compare register (c) 16-bit timer output control register 0n (TOC0n) OSPT0n OSPE0n TOC0n4 0 0 0 0 LVS0n LVR0n TOC0n1 TOE0n 0 0 0 0 (d) Prescaler mode register 0n (PRM0n) ESn11 ESn10 ESn01 ESn00 0 0 0/1 0/1 PRM0n1 PRM0n0 0 0 1 1 Selects count clock (specifies valid edge of TI0n0). 00: Falling edge detection 01: Rising edge detection 10: Setting prohibited 11: Both edges detection (e) 16-bit timer counter 0n (TM0n) By reading the TM0n register, the count value can be read. (f) 16-bit capture/compare register 0n0 (CR0n0) If M is set to the CR0n0 register, the interrupt signal (INTTM0n0) is generated when the number of external events reaches (M + 1). Setting the CR0n0 register to 0000H is prohibited. (g) 16-bit capture/compare register 0n1 (CR0n1) When this register's value matches the count value of the TM0n register, an interrupt signal (INTTM0n1) is generated. The count value of the TM0n register is not cleared. Remark 292 n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 Figure 8-12. Example of Software Processing in External Event Counter Mode N N N TM0n register 0000H Operable bits (TMC0n3, TMC0n2) 00 11 Compare register (CR0n0) 00 N TO0n pin output Compare match interrupt (INTTM0n0) <1> <2> <1> Count operation start flow START Register initial setting PRM0n register, CRC0n register, CR0n0 register, port setting TMC0n3, TMC0n2 bits = 11 Initial setting of these registers is performed before setting the TMC0n3 and TMC0n2 bits to 11. Starts count operation. <2> Count operation stop flow TMC0n3, TMC0n2 bits = 00 The counter is initialized and counting is stopped by clearing the TMC0n3 and TMC0n2 bits to 00. STOP Remark n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 293 CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 8.4.4 Operation in clear & start mode entered by TI0n0 pin valid edge input When the TMC0n.TMC0n3 and TMC0n.TMC0n2 bits are set to 10 (clear & start mode entered by the TI0n0 pin valid edge input) and the count clock (set by the PRM0n register) is supplied to the timer/event counter, the TM0n register starts counting up. When the valid edge of the TI0n0 pin is detected during the counting operation, the TM0n register is cleared to 0000H and starts counting up again. If the valid edge of the TI0n0 pin is not detected, the TM0n register overflows and continues counting. The valid edge of the TI0n0 pin is a cause to clear the TM0n register. Starting the counter is not controlled immediately after the start of the operation. The CR0n0 and CR0n1 registers are used as compare registers and capture registers. (a) When the CR0n0 and CR0n1 registers are used as compare registers Signals INTTM0n0 and INTTM0n1 are generated when the value of the TM0n register matches the value of the CR0n0 and CR0n1 registers. (b) When the CR0n0 and CR0n1 registers are used as capture registers The count value of the TM0n register is captured to the CR0n0 register and the INTTM0n0 signal is generated when the valid edge is input to the TI0n1 pin (or when the phase reverse to that of the valid edge is input to the TI0n0 pin). When the valid edge is input to the TI0n0 pin, the count value of the TM0n register is captured to the CR0n1 register and the INTTM0n1 signal is generated. As soon as the count value has been captured, the counter is cleared to 0000H. Cautions 1. Do not set the count clock as the valid edge of the TI0n0 pin (RPM0n.PRM0n1 and RPM0n.PRM0n0 bits = 11). When the PRM0n1 and PRM0n0 bits = 11, the TM0n register is cleared. 2. Restrictions are applied to the channels (TM00, TM01) in which the timer input and output share the same pin. For details, refer to 8.6 (1) Alternate functions of TI0n0/TO0n pins. Remarks 1. For the alternate-function pin settings, refer to Table 4-14 Settings When Port Pins Are Used for Alternate Functions. 2. For enabling the INTTM0n0 interrupt, refer to CHAPTER 19 PROCESSING FUNCTION. 294 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD INTERRUPT/EXCEPTION CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 (1) Operation in clear & start mode entered by TI0n0 pin valid edge input (CR0n0 register: compare register, CR0n1 register: compare register) Figure 8-13. Block Diagram of Clear & Start Mode Entered by TI0n0 Pin Valid Edge Input (CR0n0 register: Compare Register, CR0n1 register: Compare Register) Edge detection TI0n0 pin Clear 16-bit counter (TM0n) Count clock Match signal Interrupt signal (INTTM0n0) Operable bits TMC0n3, TMC0n2 Compare register (CR0n0) Match signal Interrupt signal (INTTM0n1) Compare register (CR0n1) Remark n = 0, 1 Figure 8-14. Timing Example of Clear & Start Mode Entered by TI0n0 Pin Valid Edge Input (CR0n0 Register: Compare Register, CR0n1 Register: Compare Register) (a) TOC0n = 00H, PRM0n = 10H, CRC0n = 00H, TMC0n = 08H M TM0n register N M N M N M N 0000H Operable bits (TMC0n3, TMC0n2) 00 10 Count clear input (TI0n0 pin input) Compare register (CR0n0) Compare match interrupt (INTTM0n0) Compare register (CR0n1) M N Compare match interrupt (INTTM0n1) Remark n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 295 CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 (2) Operation in clear & start mode entered by TI0n0 pin valid edge input (CR0n0 register: compare register, CR0n1 register: capture register) Figure 8-15. Block Diagram of Clear & Start Mode Entered by TI0n0 Pin Valid Edge Input (CR0n0 Register: Compare Register, CR0n1 Register: Capture Register) TI0n0 pin Edge detector Clear 16-bit counter (TM0n) Count clock Match signal Operable bits TMC0n3, TMC0n2 Interrupt signal (INTTM0n0) Compare register (CR0n0) Capture signal Remark 296 Capture register (CR0n1) n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD Interrupt signal (INTTM0n1) CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 Figure 8-16. Timing Example of Clear & Start Mode Entered by TI0n0 Pin Valid Edge Input (CR0n0 Register: Compare Register, CR0n1 Register: Capture Register) (a) TOC0n = 00H, PRM0n = 10H, CRC0n = 04H, TMC0n = 08H, CR0n0 = 0000H M N P TM0n register Q S 0000H Operable bits (TMC0n3, TMC0n2) 10 00 Capture & count clear input (TI0n0 pin input) Compare register (CR0n0) 0000H Compare match interrupt (INTTM0n0) Capture register (CR0n1) 0000H M N S P Q Capture interrupt (INTTM0n1) The count value is captured to the CR0n1 register and the TM0n register is cleared (to 0000H) when the valid edge of the TI0n0 pin is detected. When the count value of the TM0n register is 0000H, a compare match interrupt signal (INTTM0n0) is generated. Remark n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 297 CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 (3) Operation in clear & start mode entered by TI0n0 pin valid edge input (CR0n0 register: capture register, CR0n1 register: compare register) Figure 8-17. Block Diagram of Clear & Start Mode Entered by TI0n0 Pin Valid Edge Input (CR0n0 Register: Capture Register, CR0n1 Register: Compare Register) TI0n0 pin Edge detection Clear 16-bit counter (TM0n) Count clock Match signal Operable bits TMC0n3, TMC0n2 Interrupt signal (INTTM0n1) Compare register (CR0n1) Capture signal Remark 298 Capture register (CR0n0) n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD Interrupt signal (INTTM0n0) CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 Figure 8-18. Timing Example of Clear & Start Mode Entered by TI0n0 Pin Valid Edge Input (CR0n0 Register: Capture Register, CR0n1 Register: Compare Register) (a) TOC0n = 00H, PRM0n = 10H, CRC0n = 03H, TMC0n = 08H, CR0n1 = 0000H TM0n register M P N 0000H Operable bits (TMC0n3, TMC0n2) S 00 10 Capture & count clear input (TI0n0 pin input) Capture register (CR0n0) Capture interrupt (INTTM0n0) Compare register (CR0n1) 0000H M N S P L 0000H Compare match interrupt (INTTM0n1) The TM0n register is cleared at the rising edge detection of the TI0n0 pin and it is captured to the CR0n0 register at the falling edge detection of the TI0n0 pin. When the CRC0n.CRC0n1 bit is set to 1, the count value of the TM0n register is captured to CR0n0 in the phase reverse to that of the signal input to the TI0n0 pin, but the capture interrupt signal (INTTM0n0) is not generated. However, the INTTM0n0 signal is generated when the valid edge of the TI0n1 pin is detected. Mask the INTTM0n0 signal when it is not used. Remark n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 299 CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 (4) Operation in clear & start mode entered by TI0n0 pin valid edge input (CR0n0 register: capture register, CR0n1 register: capture register) Figure 8-19. Block Diagram of Clear & Start Mode Entered by TI0n0 Pin Valid Edge Input (CR0n0 Register: Capture Register, CR0n1 Register: Capture Register) Operable bits TMC0n3, TMC0n2 Clear 16-bit counter (TM0n) Count clock TI0n0 pin Edge detection TI0n1 pin Edge detection Remark 300 Selector Capture signal Capture signal Capture register (CR0n1) Capture register (CR0n0) n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD Interrupt signal (INTTM0n1) Interrupt signal (INTTM0n0) CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 Figure 8-20. Timing Example of Clear & Start Mode Entered by TI0n0 Pin Valid Edge Input (CR0n0 Register: Capture Register, CR0n1 Register: Capture Register) (1/3) (a) TOC0n = 00H, PRM0n = 30H, CRC0n = 05H, TMC0n = 08H L TM0n register N M O Q P R S T 0000H Operable bits (TMC0n3, TMC0n2) 00 10 Capture & count clear input (TI0n0 pin input) Capture register (CR0n0) Capture interrupt (INTTM0n0) Capture register (CR0n1) 0000H L 0000H L M N O P Q R S T Capture interrupt (INTTM0n1) This is an application example where the count value is captured to the CR0n1 register, the TM0n register is cleared when the rising or falling edge of the TI0n0 pin is detected. When the edge of the TI0n1 pin is detected, an interrupt signal (INTTM0n0) is generated. Mask the INTTM0n0 signal when it is not used. Remark n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 301 CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 Figure 8-20. Timing Example of Clear & Start Mode Entered by TI0n0 Pin Valid Edge Input (CR0n0 Register: Capture Register, CR0n1 Register: Capture Register) (2/3) (b) TOC0n = 00H, PRM0n = C0H, CRC0n = 05H, TMC0n = 08H FFFFH N M 00 T Q S P 0000H Operable bits (TMC0n3, TMC0n2) R O L TM0n register 10 Capture trigger input (TI0n1 pin input) Capture register (CR0n0) 0000H L M N O P Q R S T Capture interrupt (INTTM0n0) Capture & count clear input (TI0n0) L Capture register (CR0n1) Capture interrupt (INTTM0n1) 0000H L This is a timing example where an edge is not input to the TI0n0 pin, in an application where the count value is captured to the CR0n0 register when the rising or falling edge of the TI0n1 pin is detected. Remark 302 n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 Figure 8-20. Timing Example of Clear & Start Mode Entered by TI0n0 Pin Valid Edge Input (CR0n0 Register: Capture Register, CR0n1 Register: Capture Register) (3/3) (c) TOC0n = 00H, PRM0n = 00H, CRC0n = 07H, TMC0n = 08H O M TM0n register N L Q W T R P 0000H Operable bits (TMC0n3, TMC0n2) S 10 00 Capture & count clear input (TI0n0 pin input) Capture register (CR0n0) 0000H Capture register (CR0n1) 0000H L N M P O R Q T S W Capture interrupt (INTTM0n1) Capture input (TI0n1) L Capture interrupt (INTTM0n0) L This is an application example where the pulse width of the signal input to the TI0n0 pin is measured. By setting the CRC0n register, the count value can be captured to the CR0n0 register in the phase reverse to the falling edge of the TI0n0 pin (i.e., rising edge) and to the CR0n1 register at the falling edge of the TI0n0 pin. The high- and low-level widths of the input pulse can be calculated by the following expressions. * High-level width = [CR0n1 register value] - [CR0n0 register value] x [Count clock cycle] * Low-level width = [CR0n0 register value] x [Count clock cycle] If the reverse phase of the TI0n0 pin is selected as a trigger to capture the count value to the CR0n0 register, the INTTM0n0 signal is not generated. Read the values of the CR0n0 and CR0n1 registers to measure the pulse width immediately after the INTTM0n1 signal is generated. However, if the valid edge specified by the PRM0n.ESn11 and PRM0n.ESn10 bits is input to the TI0n1 pin, the count value is not captured but the INTTM0n0 signal is generated. To measure the pulse width of the TI0n0 pin, mask the INTTM0n0 signal when it is not used. Remark n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 303 CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 Figure 8-21. Example of Register Settings in Clear & Start Mode Entered by TI0n0 Pin Valid Edge Input (1/2) (a) 16-bit timer mode control register 0n (TMC0n) TMC0n3 TMC0n2 0 0 0 0 1 0 OVF0n 0 0 Clears and starts at valid edge input of TI0n0 pin. (b) Capture/compare control register 0n (CRC0n) CRC0n2 CRC0n1 CRC0n0 0 0 0 0 0 0/1 0/1 0/1 0: CR0n0 used as compare register 1: CR0n0 used as capture register 0: TI0n1 pin is used as capture trigger of CR0n0. 1: Reverse phase of TI0n0 pin is used as capture trigger of CR0n0. 0: CR0n1 used as compare register 1: CR0n1 used as capture register (c) 16-bit timer output control register 0n (TOC0n) OSPT0n OSPE0n TOC0n4 0 0 0 0 LVS0n LVR0n TOC0n1 TOE0n 0 0 0 0 0: Disables TO0n output Remark 304 n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 Figure 8-21. Example of Register Settings in Clear & Start Mode Entered by TI0n0 Pin Valid Edge Input (2/2) (d) Prescaler mode register 0n (PRM0n) ESn11 ESn10 ESn01 ESn00 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 PRM0n1 PRM0n0 0 0 0/1 0/1 Count clock selection (setting TI0n0 valid edge is prohibited) 00: 01: 10: 11: Falling edge detection Rising edge detection Setting prohibited Both edges detection (setting prohibited when CRC0n1 = 1) 00: 01: 10: 11: Falling edge detection Rising edge detection Setting prohibited Both edges detection (e) 16-bit timer counter 0n (TM0n) By reading the TM0n register, the count value can be read. (f) 16-bit capture/compare register 0n0 (CR0n0) When this register is used as a compare register and when its value matches the count value of the TM0n register, an interrupt signal (INTTM0n0) is generated. The count value of the TM0n register is not cleared. To use this register as a capture register, select either the TI0n0 or TI0n1 pin input as a capture trigger. When the valid edge of the capture trigger is detected, the count value of the TM0n register is stored in the CR0n0 register. (g) 16-bit capture/compare register 0n1 (CR0n1) When this register is used as a compare register and when its value matches the count value of the TM0n register, an interrupt signal (INTTM0n1) is generated. The count value of the TM0n register is not cleared. When this register is used as a capture register, the TI0n0 pin input is used as a capture trigger. When the valid edge of the capture trigger is detected, the count value of the TM0n register is stored in the CR0n1 register. Remark n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 305 CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 Figure 8-22. Example of Software Processing in Clear & Start Mode Entered by TI0n0 Pin Valid Edge Input M TM0n register M N M N M N N 0000H Operable bits (TMC0n3, TMC0n2) 00 00 10 Count clear input (TI0n0 pin input) Compare register (CR0n0) M Compare match interrupt (INTTM0n0) Compare register (CR0n1) N Compare match interrupt (INTTM0n1) <1> <2> <1> Count operation start flow <2> <2> TMC0n3, TMC0n2 bits = 00 Register initial setting PRM0n register, CRC0n register, CR0n0, CR0n1 registers, TMC0n.TMC0n1 bit, port setting Initial setting of these registers is performed before setting the TMC0n3 and TMC0n2 bits to 10. TMC0n3, TMC0n2 bits = 10 Starts count operation STOP <2> TM0n register clear & start flow Remark 306 <3> <3> Count operation stop flow START Edge input to TI0n0 pin <2> When the valid edge is input to the TI0n0 pin, the value of the TM0n register is cleared. n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD The counter is initialized and counting is stopped by clearing the TMC0n3 and TMC0n2 bits to 00. CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 8.4.5 Free-running timer operation When the TMC0n.TMC0n3 and TMC0n.TMC0n2 bits are set to 01 (free-running timer mode), 16-bit timer/event counter 0n continues counting up in synchronization with the count clock. When it has counted up to FFFFH, the overflow flag (TMC0n.OVF0n bit) is set to 1 at the next clock, and the TM0n register is cleared (to 0000H) and continues counting. Clear the OVF0n bit to 0 by executing the CLR instruction via software. The following three types of free-running timer operations are available. * Both the CR0n0 and CR0n1 registers are used as compare registers. * Either the CR0n0 register or CR0n1 register is used as a compare register and the other is used as a capture register. * Both the CR0n0 and CR0n1 registers are used as capture registers. Remarks 1. For the alternate-function pin (TO0n) settings, refer to Table 4-14 Settings When Port Pins Are Used for Alternate Functions. 2. For enabling the INTTM0n0 and INTTM0n1 interrupts, refer to CHAPTER 19 INTERRUPT/ EXCEPTION PROCESSING FUNCTION. 3. Restrictions are applied to the channels (TM00, TM01) in which the timer input and output share the same pin. For details, refer to 8.6 (1) Alternate functions of TI0n0/TO0n pins. (1) Free-running timer mode operation (CR0n0 register: compare register, CR0n1 register: compare register) Figure 8-23. Block Diagram of Free-Running Timer Mode (CR0n0 Register: Compare Register, CR0n1 Register: Compare Register) Count clock 16-bit counter (TM0n) Match signal Interrupt signal (INTTM0n0) Operable bits TMC0n3, TMC0n2 Compare register (CR0n0) Match signal Output controller TO0n pin Interrupt signal (INTTM0n1) Compare register (CR0n1) Remark n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 307 CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 Figure 8-24. Timing Example of Free-Running Timer Mode (CR0n0 Register: Compare Register, CR0n1 Register: Compare Register) * TOC0n = 13H, PRM0n = 00H, CRC0n = 00H, TMC0n = 04H FFFFH N TM0n register 0000H Operable bits (TMC0n3, TMC0n2) 00 M N M N M N M 01 Compare register (CR0n0) 00 M Compare match interrupt (INTTM0n0) Compare register (CR0n1) N Compare match interrupt (INTTM0n1) TO0n pin output Overflow flag (OVF0n) 0 write clear 0 write clear 0 write clear 0 write clear This is an application example where two compare registers are used in the free-running timer mode. The output level of the TO0n pin is reversed each time the count value of the TM0n register matches the set values of the CR0n0 and CR0n1 registers. When the count value matches the register value, the INTTM0n0 or INTTM0n1 signal is generated. Remark n = 0, 1 (2) Free-running timer mode operation (CR0n0 register: compare register, CR0n1 register: capture register) Figure 8-25. Block Diagram of Free-Running Timer Mode (CR0n0 Register: Compare Register, CR0n1 Register: Capture Register) 16-bit counter (TM0n) Count clock Match signal Operable bits TMC0n3, TMC0n2 Interrupt signal (INTTM0n0) Compare register (CR0n0) TI0n0 pin Remark 308 Edge detection Capture signal Capture register (CR0n1) n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD Interrupt signal (INTTM0n1) CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 Figure 8-26. Timing Example of Free-Running Timer Mode (CR0n0 Register: Compare Register, CR0n1 Register: Capture Register) * TOC0n = 00H, PRM0n = 10H, CRC0n = 04H, TMC0n = 04H FFFFH M N TM0n register P S Q 0000H Operable bits (TMC0n3, TMC0n2) 00 01 Capture trigger input (TI0n0) Compare register (CR0n0) 0000H Compare match interrupt (INTTM0n0) Compare register (CR0n1) 0000H M N S P Q Capture interrupt (INTTM0n1) Overflow flag (OVF0n) 0 write clear 0 write clear 0 write clear 0 write clear This is an application example where a compare register and a capture register are used at the same time in the free-running timer mode. In this example, the INTTM0n0 signal is generated each time the count value of the TM0n register matches the set value of the CR0n0 register (compare register). (Because the TI0n0 and TO0n pins are alternate-function pins, the timer output (TO0n) cannot be used.) In addition, the INTTM0n1 signal is generated and the count value of the TM0n register is captured to the CR0n1 register each time the valid edge of the TI0n0 pin is detected. Remark n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 309 CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 (3) Free-running timer mode operation (CR0n0 register: capture register, CR0n1 register: capture register) Figure 8-27. Block Diagram of Free-Running Timer Mode (CR0n0 Register: Capture Register, CR0n1 Register: Capture Register) Operable bits TMC0n3, TMC0n2 16-bit counter (TM0n) Count clock TI0n0 pin Edge detection TI0n1 pin Edge detection Selector Capture signal Capture signal Capture register (CR0n1) Capture register (CR0n0) Interrupt signal (INTTM0n1) Interrupt signal (INTTM0n0) Remarks 1. If both the CR0n0 and CR0n1 registers are used as capture registers in the free-running timer mode, the TO0n pin cannot be used. 2. n = 0, 1 310 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 Figure 8-28. Timing Example of Free-Running Timer Mode (CR0n0 Register: Capture Register, CR0n1 Register: Capture Register) (1/2) (a) TOC0n = 00H, PRM0n = 0 to 50H, CRC0n = 05H, TMC0n = 04H FFFFH M N TM0n register A 0000H Operable bits (TMC0n3, TMC0n2) 00 P S C B Q D E 01 Capture trigger input (TI0n0) Capture register (CR0n1) 0000H M N S P Q Capture interrupt (INTTM0n1) Capture trigger input (TI0n1) Capture register (CR0n0) 0000H A B C D E Capture interrupt (INTTM0n0) Overflow flag (OVF0n) 0 write clear 0 write clear 0 write clear 0 write clear This is an application example where the count values that have been captured at the valid edges of separate capture trigger signals are stored in separate capture registers in the free-running timer mode. The count value is captured to the CR0n1 register when the valid edge of the TI0n0 pin input is detected and to the CR0n0 register when the valid edge of the TI0n1 pin input is detected. Remark n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 311 CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 Figure 8-28. Timing Example of Free-Running Timer Mode (CR0n0 Register: Capture Register, CR0n1 Register: Capture Register) (2/2) (b) TOC0n = 00H, PRM0n = C0H, CRC0n = 05H, TMC0n = 04H FFFFH O L 00 T Q M 0000H Operable bits (TMC0n3, TMC0n2) R N TM0n register S P 01 Capture trigger input (TI0n1) Capture register (CR0n0) 0000H L M N O P Q R S T Capture interrupt (INTTM0n0) Capture trigger input (TI0n0) L Capture register (CR0n1) Capture interrupt (INTTM0n1) 0000H L This is an application example where both the edges of the TI0n1 pin are detected and the count value is captured to the CR0n0 register in the free-running timer mode. When both the CR0n0 and CR0n1 registers are used as capture registers and when the valid edge of only the TI0n1 pin is to be detected, the count value cannot be captured to the CR0n1 register. Remark 312 n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 Figure 8-29. Example of Register Settings in Free-Running Timer Mode (1/2) (a) 16-bit timer mode control register 0n (TMC0n) TMC0n3 TMC0n2 0 0 0 0 0 1 OVF0n 0 0 Free-running timer mode (b) Capture/compare control register 0n (CRC0n) CRC0n2 CRC0n1 CRC0n0 0 0 0 0 0 0/1 0/1 0/1 0: CR0n0 used as compare register 1: CR0n0 used as capture register 0: TI0n1 pin is used as capture trigger of CR0n0. 1: Reverse phase of TI0n0 pin is used as capture trigger of CR0n0. 0: CR0n1 used as compare register 1: CR0n1 used as capture register (c) 16-bit timer output control register 0n (TOC0n)Note OSPT0n OSPE0n TOC0n4 0 0 0 0/1 LVS0n LVR0n TOC0n1 TOE0n 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0: Disables TO0n output 1: Enables TO0n output Specifies initial value of TO0n output F/F 00: Does not invert TO0n output on match between TM0n and CR0n0/CR0n1. 01: Inverts TO0n output on match between TM0n and CR0n0. 10: Inverts TO0n output on match between TM0n and CR0n1. 11: Inverts TO0n output on match between TM0n and CR0n0/CR0n1. Note When the signal is captured by the valid edge of the TI0n0 pin, the timer output (TO0n pin) cannot be used because the TI0n0 and TO0n are alternate functions. Set the TOC0n register to 00H. Remark n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 313 CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 Figure 8-29. Example of Register Settings in Free-Running Timer Mode (2/2) (d) Prescaler mode register 0n (PRM0n) ESn11 ESn10 ESn01 ESn00 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 PRM0n1 PRM0n0 0 0 0/1 0/1 Count clock selection (setting TI0n0 valid edge is prohibited) 00: 01: 10: 11: Falling edge detection Rising edge detection Setting prohibited Both edges detection (setting prohibited when CRC0n1 = 1) 00: 01: 10: 11: Falling edge detection Rising edge detection Setting prohibited Both edges detection (e) 16-bit timer counter 0n (TM0n) By reading the TM0n register, the count value can be read. (f) 16-bit capture/compare register 0n0 (CR0n0) When this register is used as a compare register and when its value matches the count value of the TM0n register, an interrupt signal (INTTM0n0) is generated. The count value of the TM0n register is not cleared. To use this register as a capture register, select either the TI0n0 or TI0n1 pin input as a capture trigger. When the valid edge of the capture trigger is detected, the count value of the TM0n register is stored in the CR0n0 register. (g) 16-bit capture/compare register 0n1 (CR0n1) When this register is used as a compare register and when its value matches the count value of the TM0n register, an interrupt signal (INTTM0n1) is generated. The count value of the TM0n register is not cleared. When this register is used as a capture register, the TI0n0 pin input is used as a capture trigger. When the valid edge of the capture trigger is detected, the count value of the TM0n register is stored in the CR0n1 register. Remark 314 n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 Figure 8-30. Example of Software Processing in Free-Running Timer Mode FFFFH M M TM0n register 0000H Operable bits (TMC0n3, TMC0n2) N N 00 M N 01 Compare register (CR0n0) N 00 M Compare match interrupt (INTTM0n0) Compare register (CR0n1) N Compare match interrupt (INTTM0n1) Timer output control bits (TOE0n, TOC0n4, TOC0n1) TO0n pin output <1> <2> <1> Count operation start flow START Register initial setting PRM0n register, CRC0n register, TOC0n registerNote, CR0n0/CR0n1 register, TMC0n.TMC0n1 bit, port setting TMC0n3, TMC0n2 bits = 0, 1 Initial setting of these registers is performed before setting the TMC0n3 and TMC0n2 bits to 01. Starts count operation <2> Count operation stop flow TMC0n3, TMC0n2 bits = 0, 0 The counter is initialized and counting is stopped by clearing the TMC0n3 and TMC0n2 bits to 00. STOP Note Care must be exercised when setting the TOC0n register. For details, see 8.3 (3) 16-bit timer output control register 0n (TOC0n). In addition, when the signal is captured by the valid edge of the TI0n0 pin, the timer output (TO0n pin) cannot be used because the TI0n0 and TO0n are alternate functions. Set the TOC0n register to 00H. Remark n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 315 CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 8.4.6 PPG output operation A rectangular wave having a pulse width set in advance by the CR0n1 register is output from the TO0n pin as a PPG (Programmable Pulse Generator) signal during a cycle set by the CR0n0 register when the TMC0n.TMC0n3 and TMC0n.TMC0n2 bits are set to 11 (clear & start upon a match between the TM0n register and the CR0n0 register). The pulse cycle and duty factor of the pulse generated as the PPG output are as follows. * Pulse cycle = (Set value of the CR0n0 register + 1) x Count clock cycle * Duty = (Set value of the CR0n1 register + 1) / (Set value of the CR0n0 register + 1) Caution To change the duty factor (value of the CR0n1 register) during operation, see 8.5.1 Rewriting CR0n1 register during TM0n operation. Remarks 1. For the alternate-function pin settings, refer to Table 4-14 Settings When Port Pins Are Used for Alternate Functions. 2. For enabling the INTTM0n0 and INTTM0n1 interrupts, refer to CHAPTER 19 INTERRUPT/ EXCEPTION PROCESSING FUNCTION. 3. Restrictions are applied to the channels (TM00, TM01) in which the timer input and output share the same pin. For details, refer to 8.6 (1) Alternate functions of TI0n0/TO0n pins. Figure 8-31. Block Diagram of PPG Output Operation Clear Count clock 16-bit counter (TM0n) Match signal Interrupt signal (INTTM0n0) Operable bits TMC0n3, TMC0n2 Compare register (CR0n0) Match signal Compare register (CR0n1) Remark 316 n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD Output controller TO0n pin Interrupt signal (INTTM0n1) CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 Figure 8-32. Example of Register Settings for PPG Output Operation (a) 16-bit timer mode control register 0n (TMC0n) TMC0n3 TMC0n2 0 0 0 0 1 OVF0n 1 0 0 Clears and starts on match between TM0n and CR0n0. (b) Capture/compare control register 0n (CRC0n) CRC0n2 CRC0n1 CRC0n0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CR0n0 used as compare register CR0n1 used as compare register (c) 16-bit timer output control register 0n (TOC0n) OSPT0n OSPE0n TOC0n4 0 0 0 1 LVS0n LVR0n TOC0n1 TOE0n 0/1 0/1 1 1 Enables TO0n output Specifies initial value of TO0n output F/F 11: Inverts TO0n output on match between TM0n and CR0n0/CR0n1. 00: Disables one-shot pulse output (d) Prescaler mode register 0n (PRM0n) ESn11 ESn10 ESn01 ESn00 0 0 0 0 PRM0n1 PRM0n0 0 0 0/1 0/1 Selects count clock (e) 16-bit timer counter 0n (TM0n) By reading the TM0n register, the count value can be read. (f) 16-bit capture/compare register 0n0 (CR0n0) An interrupt signal (INTTM0n0) is generated when the value of this register matches the count value of the TM0n register. (g) 16-bit capture/compare register 0n1 (CR0n1) An interrupt signal (INTTM0n1) is generated when the value of this register matches the count value of the TM0n register. Caution Set values to the CR0n0 and CR0n1 registers such that the condition 0000H CR0n1 < CR0n0 FFFFH is satisfied. Remark n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 317 CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 Figure 8-33. Example of Software Processing for PPG Output Operation M TM0n register M N N M N 0000H Operable bits (TMC0n3, TMC0n2) 00 00 11 Compare register (CR0n0) M Compare match interrupt (INTTM0n0) Compare register (CR0n1) N Compare match interrupt (INTTM0n1) Timer output control bits (TOE0n, TOC0n4, TOC0n1) TO0n pin output N+1 M+1 N+1 M+1 N+1 M+1 <2> <1> <2> Count operation stop flow <1> Count operation start flow TMC0n3, TMC0n2 bits = 00 START Register initial setting PRM0n register, CRC0n register, TOC0n registerNote, CR0n0, CR0n1 registers, port setting Initial setting of these registers is performed before setting the TMC0n3 and TMC0n2 bits. TMC0n3, TMC0n2 bits = 11 Starts count operation The counter is initialized and counting is stopped by clearing the TMC0n3 and TMC0n2 bits to 00. STOP Note Care must be exercised when setting the TOC0n register. For details, see 8.3 (3) 16-bit timer output control register 0n (TOC0n). Remarks 1. PPG pulse cycle = (M + 1) x Count clock cycle PPG duty = (N + 1)/(M + 1) 2. n = 0, 1 318 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 8.4.7 One-shot pulse output operation A one-shot pulse can be output by setting the TMC0n.TMC0n3 and TMC0n.TMC0n2 bits to 01 (free-running timer mode) or to 10 (clear & start mode entered by the TI0n0 pin valid edge) and setting the TOC0n.OSPE0n bit to 1. When the TOC0n.OSPT0n is set to 1 during timer operation, clearing & starting of the TM0n register is triggered, and a pulse of the difference between the values of the CR0n0 and CR0n1 registers is output only once from the TO0n pin. Cautions 1. Do not input the trigger again (setting OSPT0n to 1) while the one-shot pulse is output. To output the one-shot pulse again, generate the trigger after the current one-shot pulse output has completed. 2. Restrictions are applied to the channels (TM00 and TM01) in which the timer input and output share the same pin. For details, refer to 8.6 (1) Alternate functions of TI0n0/TO0n pins. Remarks 1. For the alternate-function pin settings, refer to Table 4-14 Settings When Port Pins Are Used for Alternate Functions. 2. For enabling the INTTM0n0 and INTTM0n1 interrupts, refer to CHAPTER 19 INTERRUPT/ EXCEPTION PROCESSING FUNCTION. Figure 8-34. Block Diagram of One-Shot Pulse Output Operation Clear OSPT0n bit OSPE0n bit Count clock 16-bit counter (TM0n) Match signal Interrupt signal (INTTM0n0) Operable bits TMC0n3, TMC0n2 Compare register (CR0n0) Match signal Output controller TO0n pin Interrupt signal (INTTM0n1) Compare register (CR0n1) Remark n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 319 CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 Figure 8-35. Example of Register Settings for One-Shot Pulse Output Operation (1/2) (a) 16-bit timer mode control register 0n (TMC0n) TMC0n3 TMC0n2 0 0 0 0 0/1 0/1 OVF0n 0 0 01: Free running timer mode 10: Clear and start mode by valid edge of TI0n0 pin. (b) Capture/compare control register 0n (CRC0n) CRC0n2 CRC0n1 CRC0n0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CR0n0 used as compare register CR0n1 used as compare register (c) 16-bit timer output control register 0n (TOC0n) OSPT0n OSPE0n TOC0n4 0 0/1 1 1 LVS0n LVR0n TOC0n1 TOE0n 0/1 0/1 1 1 Enables TO0n pin output Specifies initial value of TO0n pin output Inverts TO0n output on match between TM0n and CR0n0/CR0n1. Enables one-shot pulse output Software trigger is generated by writing 1 to this bit (operation is not affected even if 0 is written to it). (d) Prescaler mode register 0n (PRM0n) ESn11 ESn10 ESn01 ESn00 0 0 0 0 PRM0n1 PRM0n0 0 0 0/1 0/1 Selects count clock Remark 320 n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 Figure 8-35. Example of Register Settings for One-Shot Pulse Output Operation (2/2) (e) 16-bit timer counter 0n (TM0n) By reading the TM0n register, the count value can be read. (f) 16-bit capture/compare register 0n0 (CR0n0) This register is used as a compare register when a one-shot pulse is output. When the value of the TM0n register matches that of the CR0n0 register, an interrupt signal (INTTM0n0) is generated and the output level of the TO0n pin is inverted. (g) 16-bit capture/compare register 0n1 (CR0n1) This register is used as a compare register when a one-shot pulse is output. When the value of the TM0n register matches that of the CR0n1 register, an interrupt signal (INTTM0n1) is generated and the output level of the TO0n pin is inverted. Remark n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 321 CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 Figure 8-36. Example of Software Processing for One-Shot Pulse Output Operation (1/2) FFFFH N N M TM0n register N M M 0000H Operable bits (TMC0n3, TMC0n2) 00 01 or 10 00 One-shot pulse enable bit (OSPEn) One-shot pulse trigger bit (OSPTn) Overflow plug (OVF0n) Compare register (CR0n0) N Compare match interrupt (INTTM0n0) Compare register (CR0n1) M Compare match interrupt (INTTM0n1) TO0n pin output M+1 TO0n output control bits (TOE0n, TOC0n4, TOC0n1) <1> <2> N-M TO0n output level is not inverted because no oneshot trigger is input. M+1 N-M <2> * Time from when the one-shot pulse trigger is input until the one-shot pulse is output = (M + 1) x Count clock cycle * One-shot pulse output active level width = (N - M) x Count clock cycle Remark 322 n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD <3> CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 Figure 8-36. Example of Software Processing for One-Shot Pulse Output Operation (2/2) <1> Count operation start flow START Register initial setting PRM0n register, CRC0n register, TOC0n registerNote, CR0n0, CR0n1 registers, port setting TMC0n3, TMC0n2 bits = 01 or 10 Initial setting of these registers is performed before setting the TMC0n3 and TMC0n2 bits. Starts count operation <2> One-shot trigger input flow TOC0n.OSPT0n bit = 1 Write the same value to the bits other than the OSPT0n bit. <3> Count operation stop flow TMC0n3, TMC0n2 bits = 00 The counter is initialized and counting is stopped by clearing the TMC0n3 and TMC0n2 bits to 00. STOP Note Care must be exercised when setting the TOC0n register. For details, see 8.3 (3) 16-bit timer output control register 0n (TOC0n). Remark n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 323 CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 8.4.8 Pulse width measurement operation The TM0n register can be used to measure the pulse width of the signal input to the TI0n0 and TI0n1 pins. Measurement can be accomplished by operating the 16-bit timer/event counter 0n in the free-running timer mode or by restarting the timer in synchronization with the signal input to the TI0n0 pin. When an interrupt is generated, read the value of the valid capture register and measure the pulse width. Check the TMC0n.OVF0n flag. If it is set (to 1), clear it to 0 by software. Figure 8-37. Block Diagram of Pulse Width Measurement (Free-Running Timer Mode) Operable bits TMC0n3, TMC0n2 16-bit counter (TM0n) Count clock TI0n0 pin Edge detection TI0n1 pin Edge detection Remark Selector Capture signal Capture signal Capture register (CR0n1) Capture register (CR0n0) Interrupt signal (INTTM0n1) Interrupt signal (INTTM0n0) n = 0, 1 Figure 8-38. Block Diagram of Pulse Width Measurement (Clear & Start Mode Entered by TI0n0 Pin Valid Edge Input) Operable bits TMC0n3, TMC0n2 Clear 16-bit counter (TM0n) Count clock TI0n0 pin Edge detection TI0n1 pin Edge detection Remark 324 Selector Capture signal Capture signal Capture register (CR0n1) Capture register (CR0n0) n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD Interrupt signal (INTTM0n1) Interrupt signal (INTTM0n0) CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 A pulse width can be measured in the following three ways. * Measuring the pulse width by using two input signals of the TI0n0 and TI0n1 pins (free-running timer mode) * Measuring the pulse width by using one input signal of the TI0n0 pin (free-running timer mode) * Measuring the pulse width by using one input signal of the TI0n0 pin (clear & start mode entered by the TI0n0 pin valid edge input) Remarks 1. For the alternate-function pin (TO0n) settings, refer to Table 4-14 Settings When Port Pins Are Used for Alternate Functions. 2. For enabling the INTTM0n0 and INTTM0n1 interrupts, refer to CHAPTER 19 INTERRUPT/ EXCEPTION PROCESSING FUNCTION. 3. Restrictions are applied to the channels (TM00, TM01) in which the timer input and output share the same pin. For details, refer to 8.6 (1) Alternate functions of TI0n0/TO0n pins. (1) Measuring the pulse width by using two input signals of the TI0n0 and TI0n1 pins (free-running timer mode) Set the free-running timer mode (the TMC0n.TMC0n3 and TMC0n.TMC0n2 bits = 01). When the valid edge of the TI0n0 pin is detected, the count value of the TM0n register is captured to the CR0n1 register. When the valid edge of the TI0n1 pin is detected, the count value of the TM0n register is captured to the CR0n0 register. Specify detection of both the edges of the TI0n0 and TI0n1 pins. By this measurement method, the previous count value is subtracted from the count value captured by the edge of each input signal. Therefore, save the previously captured value to a separate register in advance. If an overflow occurs, the value becomes negative if the previously captured value is simply subtracted from the current captured value and, therefore, a borrow occurs (the PSW.CY bit is set to 1). If this happens, ignore CY and take the calculated value as the pulse width. In addition, clear the TMC0n.OVF0n bit to 0. Figure 8-39. Timing Example of Pulse Width Measurement (1) * TMC0n = 04H, PRM0n = F0H, CRC0n = 05H FFFFH M TM0n register N A B 0000H Operable bits (TMC0n3, TMC0n2) 00 P S C Q D E 01 Capture trigger input (TI0n0) Capture register (CR0n1) 0000H M N S P Q Capture interrupt (INTTM0n1) Capture trigger input (TI0n1) Capture register (CR0n0) 0000H A B C D E Capture interrupt (INTTM0n0) Overflow flag (OVF0n) 0 write clear Remark 0 write clear 0 write clear 0 write clear n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 325 CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 (2) Measuring the pulse width by using one input signal of the TI0n0 pin (free-running timer mode) Set the free-running timer mode (the TMC0n.TMC0n3 and TMC0n.TMC0n2 bits = 01). The count value of the TM0n register is captured to the CR0n0 register in the phase reverse to the valid edge detected on the TI0n0 pin. When the valid edge of the TI0n0 pin is detected, the count value of the TM0n register is captured to the CR0n1 register. By this measurement method, values are stored in separate capture registers when a width from one edge to another is measured. Therefore, the capture values do not have to be saved. By subtracting the value of one capture register from that of another, a high-level width, low-level width, and cycle are calculated. If an overflow occurs, the value becomes negative if one captured value is simply subtracted from another and, therefore, a borrow occurs (the PSW.CY bit is set to 1). If this happens, ignore CY and take the calculated value as the pulse width. In addition, clear the TMC0n.OVF0n bit to 0. Figure 8-40. Timing Example of Pulse Width Measurement (2) * TMC0n = 04H, PRM0n = 10H, CRC0n = 07H FFFFH M TM0n register N A B 0000H Operable bits (TMC0n3, TMC0n2) 00 P S C Q D E 01 Capture trigger input (TI0n0) Capture register (CR0n0) 0000H Capture register (CR0n1) 0000H A B M C N E D S P Q Capture interrupt (INTTM0n1) Overflow flag (OVF0n) 0 write clear Capture trigger input (TI0n1) L Capture interrupt (INTTM0n0) L Remark 326 0 write clear n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 0 write clear 0 write clear CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 (3) Measuring the pulse width by using one input signal of the TI0n0 pin (clear & start mode entered by the TI0n0 pin valid edge input) Set the clear & start mode entered by the TI0n0 pin valid edge (the TMC0n.TMC0n3 and TMC0n.TMC0n2 bits = 10). The count value of the TM0n register is captured to the CR0n0 register in the phase reverse to the valid edge of the TI0n0 pin, and the count value of the TM0n register is captured to the CR0n1 register and the TM0n register is cleared (0000H) when the valid edge of the TI0n0 pin is detected. Therefore, a cycle is stored in the CR0n1 register if the TM0n register does not overflow. If an overflow occurs, take the value that results from adding 10000H to the value stored in the CR0n1 register as a cycle. Clear the TMC0n.OVF0n bit to 0. Figure 8-41. Timing Example of Pulse Width Measurement (3) * TMC0n = 08H, PRM0n = 10H, CRC0n = 07H FFFFH TM0n register N C D S A 0000H Operable bits 00 (TMC0n3, TMC0n2) Q P B M 10 00 <1> <1> <1> <1> Capture & count clear input (TI0n0) <2> Capture register (CR0n0) 0000H Capture register (CR0n1) 0000H <3> <2> <3> A M <2> <3> B N <2> <3> C S D P Q Capture interrupt (INTTM0n1) Overflow flag (OVF0n) 0 write clear Capture trigger input (TI0n1) L Capture interrupt (INTTM0n0) L <1> Pulse cycle = (10000H x Number of times OVF0n bit is set to 1 + Captured value of the CR0n1 register) x Count clock cycle <2> High-level pulse width = (10000H x Number of times OVF0n bit is set to 1 + Captured value of the CR0n0 register) x Count clock cycle <3> Low-level pulse width = (Pulse cycle - High-level pulse width) Remark n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 327 CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 Figure 8-42. Example of Register Settings for Pulse Width Measurement (1/2) (a) 16-bit timer mode control register 0n (TMC0n) TMC0n3 TMC0n2 0 0 0 0 0/1 0/1 OVF0n 0 0 01: Free running timer mode 10: Clear and start mode entered by valid edge of TI0n0 pin. (b) Capture/compare control register 0n (CRC0n) CRC0n2 CRC0n1 CRC0n0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0/1 1 1: CR0n0 used as capture register 0: TI0n1 pin is used as capture trigger of CR0n0. 1: Reverse phase of TI0n0 pin is used as capture trigger of CR0n0. 1: CR0n1 used as capture register (c) 16-bit timer output control register 0n (TOC0n) OSPT0n OSPE0n TOC0n4 0 0 0 0 LVS0n LVR0n TOC0n1 TOE0n 0 0 0 0 (d) Prescaler mode register 0n (PRM0n) ESn11 ESn10 ESn01 ESn00 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 PRM0n1 PRM0n0 0 0 0/1 0/1 Selects count clock (setting valid edge of TI0n0 is prohibited) Remark 328 n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 00: 01: 10: 11: Falling edge detection Rising edge detection Setting prohibited Both edges detection (setting when CRC0n1 = 1 is prohibited) 00: 01: 10: 11: Falling edge detection Rising edge detection Setting prohibited Both edges detection CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 Figure 8-42. Example of Register Settings for Pulse Width Measurement (2/2) (e) 16-bit timer counter 0n (TM0n) By reading the TM0n register, the count value can be read. (f) 16-bit capture/compare register 0n0 (CR0n0) This register is used as a capture register. Either the TI0n0 or TI0n1 pin is selected as a capture trigger. When a specified edge of the capture trigger is detected, the count value of the TM0n register is stored in the CR0n0 register. (g) 16-bit capture/compare register 0n1 (CR0n1) This register is used as a capture register. The signal input to the TI0n0 pin is used as a capture trigger. When the capture trigger is detected, the count value of the TM0n register is stored in the CR0n1 register. Remark n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 329 CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 Figure 8-43. Example of Software Processing for Pulse Width Measurement (1/2) (a) Example of free-running timer mode FFFFH D10 TM0n register D11 D00 D13 D12 D01 D02 D03 D04 0000H Operable bits (TMC0n3, TMC0n2) 00 01 00 Capture trigger input (TI0n0) Capture register (CR0n1) D10 0000H D11 D12 D13 Capture interrupt (INTTM0n1) Capture trigger input (TI0n1) Capture register (CR0n0) 0000H D00 D01 D02 D03 D04 Capture interrupt (INTTM0n0) <1> <2> <2> <2> <2> <2> <2> <2> <2> <2><3> (b) Example of clear & start mode entered by TI0n0 pin valid edge FFFFH TM0n register 0000H Operable bits (TMC0n3, TMC0n2) D3 D2 D5 D0 D7 D4 D1 00 D8 D6 10 00 Capture & count clear input (TI0n0) Capture register 0000H (CR0n0) Capture interrupt (INTTM0n0) D3 D1 D5 D7 L Capture register (CR0n1) 0000H D0 D2 D4 D6 D8 Capture interrupt (INTTM0n1) <1> Remark 330 <2> <2> <2> <2> n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD <2> <2> <2> <2> <2> <3> CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 Figure 8-43. Example of Software Processing for Pulse Width Measurement (2/2) <1> Count operation start flow START Register initial setting PRM0n register, CRC0n register, port setting TMC0n3, TMC0n2 bits = 01 or 10 Initial setting of these registers is performed before setting the TMC0n3 and TMC0n2 bits. Starts count operation <2> Capture trigger input flow Edge detection of TI0n0, TI0n1 pins Stores count value to CR0n0, CR0n1 registers. Generates capture interruptNote. Calculated pulse width from capture value <3> Count operation stop flow TMC0n3, TMC0n2 bits = 00 The counter is initialized and counting is stopped by clearing the TMC0n3 and TMC0n2 bits to 00. STOP Note The capture interrupt signal (INTTM0n0) is not generated when the reverse-phase edge of the TI0n0 pin input is selected to the valid edge of the CR0n0 register. Remark n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 331 CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 8.5 Special Use of TM0n 8.5.1 Rewriting CR0n1 register during TM0n operation In principle, rewriting the CR0n0 and CR0n1 registers of the V850ES/KF1 when they are used as compare registers is prohibited while the TM0n register is operating (TMC0n.TMC0n3 and TMC0n.TMC0n2 bits = other than 00). However, the value of the CR0n1 register can be changed, even while the TM0n register is operating, using the following procedure if the CR0n1 register is used for PPG output and the duty factor is changed (change the value of the CR0n1 register immediately after its value matches the value of the TM0n register. If the value of the CR0n1 register is changed immediately before its value matches the TM0n register, an unexpected operation may be performed). Procedure for changing value of the CR0n1 register <1> Disable interrupt INTTM0n1 (TM0ICn0.TM0MKn1 bit = 1). <2> Disable reversal of the timer output when the value of the TM0n register matches that of the CR0n1 register (TOC0n.TOC0n4 bit = 0). <3> Change the value of the CR0n1 register. <4> Wait for one cycle of the count clock of the TM0n register. <5> Enable reversal of the timer output when the value of the TM0n register matches that of the CR0n1 register (TOC0n.TOC0n4 bit = 1). <6> Clear the interrupt flag of INTTM0n1 to 0 (TM0ICn0.TMIF0n1 bit = 0). <7> Enable interrupt INTTM0n1 (TM0ICn0.TM0MKn1 bit = 0). Remark For the TM0ICn0 register, see CHAPTER 19 INTERRUPT/EXCEPTION PROCESSING FUNCTION. 8.5.2 Setting LVS0n and LVR0n bits (1) Usage of the LVS0n and LVR0n bits The TOC0n.LVS0n and TOC0n.LVR0n bits are used to set the default value of the TO0n pin output and to invert the timer output without enabling the timer operation (TMC0n.TMC0n3 and TMC0n.TMC0n2 bits = 00). Clear the LVS0n and LVR0n bits to 00 (default value: low-level output) when software control is unnecessary. Remark 332 LVS0n Bit LVR0n Bit 0 0 Timer Output Status Not changed (low-level output) 0 1 Cleared (low-level output) 1 0 Set (high-level output) 1 1 Setting prohibited n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 (2) Setting the LVS0n and LVR0n bits Set the LVS0n and LVR0n bits using the following procedure. Figure 8-44. Example of Flow for Setting LVS0n and LVR0n Bits Setting TOC0n.OSPE0n, TOC0n4, TOC0n1 bits <1> Setting of timer output operation Setting TOC0n.TOE0n bit Setting TOC0n.LVS0n, LVR0n bits Setting TMC0n.TMC0n3, TMC0n2 bits <2> Setting of timer output F/F <3> Enabling timer operation Caution Be sure to set the LVS0n and LVR0n bits following steps <1>, <2>, and <3> above. Step <2> can be performed after <1> and before <3>. Remark n = 0, 1 Figure 8-45. Timing Example of LVR0n and LVS0n Bits TOC0n.LVS0n bit TOC0n.LVR0n bit Operable bits (TMC0n3, TMC0n2) 00 01, 10, or 11 TO0n pin output INTTM0n0 signal <1> <2> <1> <3> <4> <4> <4> <1> The TO0n pin output goes high when the LVS0n and LVR0n bits = 10. <2> The TO0n pin output goes low when the LVS0n and LVR0n bits = 01 (the pin output remains unchanged from the high level even if the LVS0n and LVR0n bits are cleared to 00). <3> The timer starts operating when the TMC0n3 and TMC0n2 bits are set to 01, 10, or 11. Because the LVS0n and LVR0n bits were set to 10 before the operation was started, the TO0n pin output starts from the high level. After the timer starts operating, setting the LVS0n and LVR0n bits is prohibited until the TMC0n3 and TMC0n2 bits = 00 (disabling the timer operation). <4> The output level of the TO0n pin is inverted each time an interrupt signal (INTTM0n0) is generated. Remark n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 333 CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 8.6 Cautions (1) Alternate functions of TI0n0/TO0n pins In the V850ES/KF1, the timer input and output share the same pins shown in Table 8-3. Restrictions are applied to each channel, as shown in Table 8-4. Table 8-3. Timer I/O Pins Channel TM00 TM01 Pin TI000 Alternate Function P33/TO00/TIP00 Note /TOP00 Note TI001 P34/TIP01 TO00 P33/TI000/TIP00 /TOP01 TI010 P35/TO01 TI011 P50/KR0/RTP00 TO01 P35/TI010 Note Remarks Note Shares the pin with TO00. Note Shares the pin with TI000. - Note /TOP00 Note PD703211, 703211Y, 70F3211H, and 70F3211HY only 334 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD Shares the pin with TO01. - Shares the pin with TI010. CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 Table 8-4. Restrictions for Each Channel of 16-bit Timer/Event Counter 0 Operation Restriction - Operation as interval timer Operation as square-wave Setting the TI0n0 valid edge (PRM0n.PRM0n1, PRM0n.PRM0n0 bits = 11) for the count clock is output prohibited since the TI0n0 and TO0n share the same pin (only the internal clock can be used). Operation as external event Use of the timer output (TO0n) is prohibited since the TI0n0 and TO0n share the same pin. counter Set the TOC0n register to 00H. Operation as clear & start Use of the timer output (TO0n) is prohibited since the TI0n0 and TO0n share the same pin. mode by valid edge input of Set the TOC0n register to 00H. TI0n0 pin Operation as free-running timer Use of the timer output (TO0n) is prohibited when TI0n0 valid edge (PRM0n.PRM0n1, PRM0n.PRM0n0 bits = 11) is set for the count clock, since the TI0n0 and TO0n share the same pin. When the timer output (TO0n) is used, setting the TI0n0 valid edge (PRM0n.PRM0n1, PRM0n.PRM0n0 bits = 11) for the count clock is prohibited (only the internal clock can be used). Operation as PPG output Setting the TI0n0 valid edge (PRM0n.PRM0n1, PRM0n.PRM0n0 bits = 11) for the count clock is prohibited since the TI0n0 and TO0n share the same pin (only the internal clock can be used). Operation as one-shot pulse Use of the hardware trigger by the TI0n0 pin valid edge is prohibited. output The software trigger (TOC0n.OSPT0n bit) can be used. Operation as pulse width Use of the timer output (TO0n) is prohibited since the TI0n0 and TO0n share the same pin. measurement Set the TOC0n register to 00H. Remark n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 335 CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 (2) Error on starting timer An error of up to 1 clock occurs before the match signal is generated after the timer has been started. This is because the count of the TM0n register is started asynchronously to the count pulse. Figure 8-46. Count Start Timing of TM0n Register Count pulse TM0n count value 0000H 0001H 0002H 0003H 0004H Timer start Remark n = 0, 1 (3) Setting CR0n0 and CR0n1 registers (in the mode in which clear & start occurs upon match between TM0n register and CR0n0 register) Set the CR0n0 and CR0n1 registers to a value other than 0000H (when using these registers as external event counters, one-pulse count operation is not possible). Remark 336 n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 (4) Data hold timing of capture register (a) If the valid edge of the TI0n1/TI0n0 pin is input while the CR0n0/CR0n1 register is read, the CR0n0/CR0n1 register performs capture operation, but the read value at this time is not guaranteed. However, the interrupt request signal (INTTM0n0/INTTM0n1) is generated as a result of detection of the valid edge. Figure 8-47. Data Hold Timing of Capture Register Count pulse TM0n count value N N+1 N+2 M M+1 M+2 Edge input INTTM0n1 Capture read signal Value captured to CR0n1 X N+1 Capture operation Remark Capture operation is performed but read value is not guaranteed. n = 0, 1 (b) The values of the CR0n0 and CR0n1 registers are not guaranteed after 16-bit timer/event counter 0n has stopped. (5) Setting valid edge Set the valid edge of the TI0n0 pin while the timer operation is stopped (TMC0n.TMC0n3 and TMC0n.TMC0n2 bits = 00). Set the valid edge by using the PRM0n.ESn00 and PRM0n.ESn01 bits. (6) Re-triggering one-shot pulse Make sure that the trigger is not generated while an active level is being output in the one-shot pulse output mode. Be sure to input the next trigger after the current active level is output. Remark n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 337 CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 (7) Operation of OVF0n flag (a) Setting of OVF0n flag The TMC0n.OVF0n flag is set to 1 in the following case in addition to when the TM0n register overflows. Select the mode in which clear & start occurs upon match between the TM0n register and the CR0n0 register. Set the CR0n0 register to FFFFH When the TM0n register is cleared from FFFFH to 0000H upon match with the CR0n0 register Figure 8-48. Operation Timing of OVF0n Flag Count pulse CR0n0 FFFFH TM0n FFFEH FFFFH 0000H 0001H OVF0n INTTM0n0 Remark n = 0, 1 (b) Clearing of OVF0n flag After the TM0n register overflows, clearing OVF0n flag is invalid and set (1) again even if the OVF0n flag is cleared (0) before the next count clock is counted (before TM0n register becomes 0001H). Remark 338 n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 (8) One-shot pulse output One-shot pulse output operates normally in either the free-running timer mode or the mode in which clear & start occurs on the valid edge of the TI0n0 pin. In the mode in which clear & start occurs upon match between the TM0n register and the CR0n0 register, one-shot pulse output is not possible. Remark n = 0, 1 (9) Capture operation (a) If valid edge of TI0n0 pin is specified for count clock If the valid edge of the TI0n0 pin is specified for the count clock, the capture register that specified the TI0n0 pin as the trigger does not operate normally. (b) To ensure that signals input from TI0n1 and TI0n0 pins are correctly captured To accurately capture the count value, the pulse input to the TI0n0 and TI0n1 pins as a capture trigger must be wider than two count clocks selected by the PRM0n register. (c) Interrupt signal generation Although a capture operation is performed at the falling edge of the count clock, an interrupt request signal (INTTM0n0, INTTM0n1) is generated at the rising edge of the next count clock. (d) Caution when CRC0n.CRC0n1 bit is set to 1 When the count value of the TM0n register is captured to the CR0n0 register in the phase reverse to the signal input to the TI0n0 pin, the interrupt request signal (INTTM0n0) is not generated after the count value is captured. If the valid edge is detected on the TI0n1 pin during this operation, the capture operation is not performed but the INTTM0n0 signal is generated as an external interrupt signal. Mask the INTTM0n0 signal when the external interrupt is not used. Remark n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 339 CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 (10) Edge detection (a) Specifying valid edge after reset If the operation of the 16-bit timer/event counter 0n is enabled after reset and while the TI0n0 or TI0n1 pin is at high level and when the rising edge or both the edges are specified as the valid edge of the TI0n0 or TI0n1 pin, then the high level of the TI0n0 or TI0n1 pin is detected as the rising edge. Note this when the TI0n0 or TI0n1 pin is pulled up. However, the rising edge is not detected when the operation is once stopped and then enabled again. (b) Sampling clock for noise elimination The sampling clock for noise elimination differs depending on whether the valid edge of TI0n0 is used for the count clock or as a capture trigger. In the former case, sampling is performed using fXX/4, and in the latter case, sampling is performed using the count clock selected by the PRM0n register. When the signal input to the TI0n0 pin is sampled and the valid level is detected two times in a row, the valid edge is detected. Therefore, noise having a short pulse width can be eliminated. Remarks 1. fXX: Main clock frequency 2. n = 0, 1 340 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 9 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 5 In the V850ES/KF1, two channels of 8-bit timer/event counter 5 are provided. 9.1 Functions 8-bit timer/event counter 5n has the following two modes (n = 0, 1). * Mode using 8-bit timer/event counter alone (individual mode) * Mode using cascade connection (16-bit resolution: cascade connection mode) These two modes are described below. (1) Mode using 8-bit timer/event counter alone (individual mode) 8-bit timer/event counter 5n operates as an 8-bit timer/event counter. The following functions can be used. * Interval timer * External event counter * Square-wave output * PWM output (2) Mode using cascade connection (16-bit resolution: cascade connection mode) 8-bit timer/event counter 5n operates as a 16-bit timer/event counter by connecting the TM5n register in cascade. The following functions can be used. * Interval timer with 16-bit resolution * External event counter with 16-bit resolution * Square-wave output with 16-bit resolution The block diagram of 8-bit timer/event counter 5n is shown next. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 341 CHAPTER 9 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 5 Figure 9-1. Block Diagram of 8-Bit Timer/Event Counter 5n Internal bus Mask circuit Selector Match TI5n Count clockNote 8-bit timer counter 5n (TM5n) Selector INTTM5n CSI0 serial clock S INV Q OVF R Selector 8-bit timer compare register 5n (CR5n) TO5n Clear 3 S R Selector TCL5n2 TCL5n1 TCL5n0 Q Invert level TCE5n TMC5n6 TMC5n4 LVS5n LVR5n TMC5n1 TOE5n Timer clock selection register 5n (TCL5n) 8-bit timer mode control register 5n (TMC5n) Internal bus Note The count clock is set by the TCL5n register. Remark n = 0, 1 9.2 Configuration 8-bit timer/event counter 5n includes the following hardware. Table 9-1. Configuration of 8-Bit Timer/Event Counter 5n Item Configuration 8-bit timer counter 5n (TM5n) Timer registers 16-bit timer counter 5 (TM5): Only when using cascade connection 8-bit timer compare register 5n (CR5n) Registers 16-bit timer compare register 5 (CR5): Only when using cascade connection Timer output 1 (TO5n pin) Note Control registers Timer clock selection register 5n (TCL5n) 8-bit timer mode control register 5n (TMC5n) 16-bit timer mode control register 5 (TMC5): Only when using cascade connection Note When using the functions of the TI5n and TO5n pins, refer to Table 4-14 Settings When Port Pins Are Used for Alternate Functions. Remark n = 0, 1 342 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 9 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 5 (1) 8-bit timer counter 5n (TM5n) The TM5n register is an 8-bit read-only register that counts the count pulses. The counter is incremented in synchronization with the rising edge of the count clock. Through cascade connection, the TM5n registers can be used as a 16-bit timer. When using the TM50 register and the TM51 register in cascade as a 16-bit timer, these registers can be read only in 16-bit units. Therefore, read these registers twice and compare the values, taking into consideration that the reading occurs during a count change. After reset: 00H 7 R Address: TM50 FFFFF5C0H, TM51 FFFFF5C1H 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TM5n (n = 0, 1) The count value is reset to 00H in the following cases. <1> Reset <2> When the TMC5n.TCE5n bit is cleared (0) <3> The TM5n register and CR5n register match in the mode in which clear & start occurs on a match between the TM5n register and the CR5n register Caution When connected in cascade, these registers become 0000H even when the TCE50 bit in the lowest timer (TM50) is cleared. Remark n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 343 CHAPTER 9 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 5 (2) 8-bit timer compare register 5n (CR5n) The CR5n register can be read and written in 8-bit units. In a mode other than the PWM mode, the value set to the CR5n register is always compared to the count value of the TM5n register, and if the two values match, an interrupt request signal (INTTM5n) is generated. In the PWM mode, TM5n register overflow causes the TO5n pin output to change to the active level, and when the values of the TM5n register and the CR5n register match, the TO5n pin output changes to the inactive level. The value of the CR5n register can be set in the range of 00H to FFH. When using the TM50 register and TM51 register in cascade as a 16-bit timer, the CR50 register and CR51 register operate as 16-bit timer compare register 5 (CR5). The counter value and register value are compared in 16-bit lengths, and if they match, an interrupt request signal (INTTM50) is generated. After reset: 00H 7 R/W 6 Address: CR50 FFFFF5C2H, CR51 FFFFF5C3H 5 4 3 2 1 0 CR5n (n = 0, 1) Cautions 1. In the mode in which clear & start occurs upon a match of the TM5n register and CR5n register (TMC5n.TMC5n6 bit = 0), do not write a different value to the CR5n register during the count operation. 2. In the PWM mode, set the CR5n register rewrite interval to three or more count clocks (clock selected with the TCL5n register). 3. Before changing the value of the CR5n register when using a cascade connection, be sure to stop the timer operation. Remark 344 n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 9 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 5 9.3 Registers The following two registers are used to control 8-bit timer/event counter 5n. * Timer clock selection register 5n (TCL5n) * 8-bit timer mode control register 5n (TMC5n) Remark To use the functions of the TI5n and TO5n pins, refer to Table 4-14 Settings When Port Pins Are Used for Alternate Functions. (1) Timer clock selection register 5n (TCL5n) The TCL5n register sets the count clock of 8-bit timer/event counter 5n and the valid edge of the TI5n pin input. The TCL5n register can be read or written in 8-bit units. Reset sets this register to 00H. After reset: 00H TCL5n R/W Address: TCL50 FFFFF5C4H, TCL51 FFFFF5C5H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 TCL5n2 TCL5n1 TCL5n0 (n = 0, 1) Count clock selectionNote TCL5n2 TCL5n1 TCL5n0 Clock fXX 20 MHz 10 MHz - - - - 0 0 0 Falling edge of TI5n 0 0 1 Rising edge of TI5n 0 1 0 fXX Setting prohibited 100 ns 0 1 1 fXX/2 100 ns 200 ns 1 0 0 fXX/4 200 ns 0.4 s 1 0 1 fXX/64 3.2 s 6.4 s 1 1 0 fXX/256 12.8 s 25.6 s 1 1 1 INTTM010 - - Note When the internal clock is selected, set so as to satisfy the following conditions. REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V: Count clock 10 MHz REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V: Count clock 5 MHz REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 4.0 V: Count clock 5 MHz Caution Before overwriting the TCL5n register with different data, stop the timer operation. Remark When the TM5n register is connected in cascade, the TCL51 register settings are invalid. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 345 CHAPTER 9 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 5 (2) 8-bit timer mode control register 5n (TMC5n) The TMC5n register performs the following six settings. * Controls counting by the TM5n register * Selects the operation mode of the TM5n register * Selects the individual mode or cascade connection mode * Sets the status of the timer output flip-flop * Controls the timer output flip-flop or selects the active level in the PWM (free-running timer) mode * Controls timer output The TMC5n register can be read or written in 8-bit or 1-bit units. Reset sets this register to 00H. 346 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 9 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 5 After reset: 00H <7> TMC5n TCE5n R/W Address: TMC50 FFFFF5C6H, TMC51 FFFFF5C7H 6 5 TMC5n6 0 4 TMC514 Note <3> <2> 1 <0> LVS5n LVR5n TMC5n1 TOE5n (n = 0, 1) TCE5n Control of count operation of 8-bit timer/event counter 5n 0 Counting is disabled after the counter is cleared to 0 (counter disabled) 1 Start count operation TMC5n6 Selection of operation mode of 8-bit timer/event counter 5n 0 Mode in which clear & start occurs on match between TM5n register and CR5n register 1 PWM (free-running timer) mode TMC514 Selection of individual mode or cascade connection mode for 8-bit timer/event counter 51 0 Individual mode 1 Cascade connection mode (connected with 8-bit timer/event counter 50) LVS5n LVR5n 0 0 Unchanged 0 1 Reset timer output F/F to 0 1 0 Set timer output F/F to 1 1 1 Setting prohibited Setting of status of timer output F/F TMC5n1 Other than PWM (free-running timer) PWM (free-running timer) mode mode (TMC5n6 bit = 0) (TMC5n6 bit = 1) Controls timer F/F Selects active level 0 Disable inversion operation High active 1 Enable inversion operation Low active TOE5n Timer output control 0 Disable output (TO5n pin is low level) 1 Enable output Note Bit 4 of the TMC50 register is fixed to 0. Cautions 1. Because the TO51 and TI51 are alternate functions of the same pin, only one can be used at one time. 2. The LVS5n and LVR5n bit settings are valid in modes other than the PWM mode. 3. Do not set <1> to <4> below at the same time. Set as follows. <1> Set the TMC5n1, TMC5n6, and TMC514Note bits: Setting of operation mode <2> Set the TOE5n bit for timer output enable: Timer output enable <3> Set the LVS5n and LVR5n bits (Caution 2): Setting of timer output F/F <4> Set the TCE5n bit Remarks 1. In the PWM mode, the PWM output is set to the inactive level by the TCE5n bit = 0. 2. When the LVS5n and LVR5n bits are read, 0 is read. 3. The values of the TMC5n6, LVS5n, LVR5n, TMC5n1, and TOE5n bits are reflected to the TO5n output regardless of the TCE5n bit value. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 347 CHAPTER 9 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 5 9.4 Operation 9.4.1 Operation as interval timer 8-bit timer/event counter 5n operates as an interval timer that repeatedly generates interrupts at the interval of the count value preset in the CR5n register. If the count value in the TM5n register matches the value set in the CR5n register, the value of the TM5n register is cleared to 00H and counting is continued, and at the same time, an interrupt request signal (INTTM5n) is generated. Setting method <1> Set each register. * TCL5n register: Selects the count clock (t). * CR5n register: Compare value (N) * TMC5n register: Stops count operation and selects the mode in which clear & start occurs on a match between the TM5n register and CR5n register (TMC5n register = 0000xx00B, x: don't care). <2> When the TMC5n.TCE5n bit is set to 1, the count operation starts. <3> When the values of the TM5n register and CR5n register match, the INTTM5n signal is generated (TM5n register is cleared to 00H). <4> Then, the INTTM5n signal is repeatedly generated at the same interval. To stop counting, set the TCE5n bit = 0. Interval time = (N + 1) x t: N = 00H to FFH Caution During interval timer operation, do not rewrite the value of the CR5n register. Remark n = 0, 1 Figure 9-2. Timing of Interval Timer Operation (1/2) Basic operation t Count clock TM5n count value 00H 01H Count start CR5n N N 00H 01H N 00H Clear Clear N N 01H N N TCE5n INTTM5n Interrupt acknowledgment Interrupt acknowledgment Interval time Remark 348 n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD Interval time CHAPTER 9 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 5 Figure 9-2. Timing of Interval Timer Operation (2/2) When CR5n register = 00H t Count clock TM5n count value 00H CR5n 00H 00H 00H 00H TCE5n INTTM5n Interval time Remark n = 0, 1 When CR5n register = FFH t Count clock TM5n count value 00H CR5n 01H FFH FEH FFH 00H FEH FFH FFH 00H FFH TCE5n INTTM5n Interrupt acknowledgment Interrupt acknowledgment Interval time Remark n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 349 CHAPTER 9 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 5 9.4.2 Operation as external event counter The external event counter counts the number of clock pulses input to the TI5n pin from an external source by using the TM5n register. Each time the valid edge specified by the TCL5n register is input to the TI5n pin, the TM5n register is incremented. Either the rising edge or the falling edge can be specified as the valid edge. When the count value of the TM5n register matches the value of the CR5n register, the TM5n register is cleared to 00H and an interrupt request signal (INTTM5n) is generated. Setting method <1> Set each register. * TCL5n register: Selects the TI5n pin input edge. Falling edge of TI5n pin TLC5n register = 00H Rising edge of TI5n pin TCL5n register = 01H * CR5n register: Compare value (N) * TMC5n register: Stops count operation, selects the mode in which clear & start occurs on a match between the TM5n register and CR5n register, disables timer output F/F inversion operation, and disables timer output. (TMC5n register = 0000xx00B, x: don't care) * For the alternate-function pin settings, refer to Table 4-14 Settings When Port Pins Are Used for Alternate Functions. <2> When the TMC5n.TCE5n bit is set to 1, the counter counts the number of pulses input from the TI5n pin. <3> When the values of the TM5n register and CR5n register match, the INTTM5n signal is generated (TM5n register is cleared to 00H). <4> Then, the INTTM5n signal is generated each time the values of the TM5n register and CR5n register match. INTTM5n signal is generated when the valid edge of TI5n pin is input N + 1 times: N = 00H to FFH Caution During external event counter operation, do not rewrite the value of the CR5n register. Remark n = 0, 1 Figure 9-3. Timing of External Event Counter Operation (with Rising Edge Specified) TI5n TM5n count value 00H 01H 02H 03H 04H N-1 05H Count start CR5n N TCE5n INTTM5n Remark 350 n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD N 00H 01H 02H 03H CHAPTER 9 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 5 9.4.3 Square-wave output operation A square wave with any frequency can be output at an interval determined by the value preset in the CR5n register. By setting the TMC5n.TOE5n bit to 1, the output status of the TO5n pin is inverted at an interval determined by the count value preset in the CR5n register. In this way, a square wave of any frequency can be output (duty = 50%) (n = 0, 1). Setting method <1> Set each register. * TCL5n register: Selects the count clock (t). * CR5n register: Compare value (N) * TMC5n register: Stops count operation, selects the mode in which clear & start occurs on a match between the TM5n register and CR5n register, sets initial value of timer output, enables timer output F/F inversion operation, and enables timer output. (TMC5n register = 00001011B or 00000111B) * For the alternate-function pin settings, refer to Table 4-14 Settings When Port Pins Are Used for Alternate Functions. <2> When the TMC5n.TCE5n bit is set to 1, counting starts. <3> When the values of the TM5n register and CR5n register match, the timer output F/F is inverted. Moreover, the INTTM5n signal is generated and the TM5n register is cleared to 00H. <4> Then, the timer output F/F is inverted during the same interval and a square wave is output from the TO5n pin. Frequency = 1/2t(N + 1): N = 00H to FFH Caution Do not rewrite the value of the CR5n register during square-wave output. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 351 CHAPTER 9 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 5 Figure 9-4. Timing of Square-Wave Output Operation t Count clock TM5n count value 00H 01H Count start CR5n N N 00H 01H N 00H Clear Clear N N 01H N N TCE5n INTTM5n Interrupt acknowledgment Interrupt acknowledgment TO5nNote Interval time Interval time Note The initial value of the TO5n pin output can be set using the TMC5n.LVS5n and TMC5n.LVR5n bits. Remark 352 n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 9 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 5 9.4.4 8-bit PWM output operation By setting the TMC5n.TMC5n6 bit to 1, 8-bit timer/event counter 5n performs PWM output. Pulses with a duty factor determined by the value set in the CR5n register are output from the TO5n pin. Set the width of the active level of the PWM pulse in the CR5n register. The active level can be selected using the TMC5n.TMC5n1 bit. The count clock can be selected using the TCL5n register. PWM output can be enabled/disabled by the TMC5n.TOE5n bit. Caution The CR5n register rewrite interval must be three or more operation clocks (set by the TCL5n register). Use method <1> Set each register. * TCL5n register: Selects the count clock (t). * CR5n register: Compare value (N) * TMC5n register: Stops count operation, selects PWM mode, and leave timer output F/F unchanged, sets active level, and enables timer output. (TMC5n register = 01000001B or 01000011B) * For the alternate-function pin settings, refer to Table 4-14 Settings When Port Pins Are Used for Alternate Functions. <2> When the TMC5n.TCE5n bit is set to 1, counting starts. PWM output operation <1> When counting starts, PWM output (output from the TO5n pin) outputs the inactive level until an overflow occurs. <2> When an overflow occurs, the active level set by setting method <1> is output. The active level is output until the value of the CR5n register and the count value of the TM5n register match. An interrupt request signal (INTTM5n) is generated. <3> When the value of the CR5n register and the count value of the TM5n register match, the inactive level is output and continues to be output until an overflow occurs again. <4> Then, steps <2> and <3> are repeated until counting is stopped. <5> When counting is stopped by clearing TCE5n bit to 0, PWM output becomes inactive. Cycle = 256t, active level width = Nt, duty = N/256: N = 00H to FFH Remarks 1. n = 0, 1 2. For the detailed timing, refer to Figure 9-5 Timing of PWM Output Operation and Figure 9-6 Timing of Operation Based on CR5n Register Transitions. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 353 CHAPTER 9 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 5 (a) Basic operation of PWM output Figure 9-5. Timing of PWM Output Operation Basic operation (active level = H) t Count clock TM5n count value 00H 01H CR5n FFH 00H 01H 02H N N+1 FFH 00H 01H 02H M 00H N TCE5n INTTM5n TO5n Active level Inactive level Active level When CR5n register = 00H t Count clock TM5n count value CR5n 00H 01H FFH 00H 01H 02H N N + 1N + 2 FFH 00H 01H 02H M 00H 00H TCE5n INTTM5n TO5n Inactive level Inactive level When CR5n register = FFH t Count clock TM5n count value CR5n 00H 01H FFH 00H 01H 02H N N + 1N + 2 FFH 00H 01H 02H M 00H FFH TCE5n INTTM5n TO5n Inactive level Remark 354 Active level n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD Inactive level Active level Inactive level CHAPTER 9 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 5 (b) Operation based on CR5n register transitions Figure 9-6. Timing of Operation Based on CR5n Register Transitions When the value of the CR5n register changes from N to M before the rising edge of the FFH clock The value of the CR5n register is transferred at the overflow that occurs immediately after. t Count clock TM5n count value N N+1 N+2 N CR5n TCE5n FFH 00H 01H 02H M M+1 M+2 FFH 00H 01H 02H M M+1 M+2 M H INTTM5n TO5n <2> <1> CR5n transition (N M) When the value of the CR5n register changes from N to M after the rising edge of the FFH clock The value of the CR5n register is transferred at the second overflow. t Count clock TM5n count value N N+1 N+2 N CR5n TCE5n FFH 00H 01H 02H 03H N N+1 N+2 FFH 00H 01H 02H N M M+1 M+2 M H INTTM5n TO5n <1> CR5n transition (N M) <2> Caution In the case of reload from the CR5n register between <1> and <2>, the value that is actually used differs (Read value: M; Actual value of CR5n register: N). Remark n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 355 CHAPTER 9 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 5 9.4.5 Operation as interval timer (16 bits) The 16-bit resolution timer/event counter mode is selected by setting the TMC51.TMC514 bit to 1. 8-bit timer/event counter 5n operates as an interval timer by repeatedly generating interrupts using the count value preset in 16-bit timer compare register 5 (CR5) as the interval. Setting method <1> Set each register. * TCL50 register: Selects the count clock (t) (The TCL51 register does not need to be set in cascade connection) * CR50 register: Compare value (N) ... Lower 8 bits (settable from 00H to FFH) * CR51 register: Compare value (N) ... Higher 8 bits (settable from 00H to FFH) * TMC50, TMC51 register: Selects the mode in which clear & start occurs on a match between TM5 register and CR5 register (x: don't care) TMC50 register = 0000xx00B TMC51 register = 0001xx00B <2> Set the TMC51.TCE51 bit to 1. Then set the TMC50.TCE50 bit to 1 to start the count operation. <3> When the values of the TM5 register and CR5 register connected in cascade match, the INTTM50 signal is generated (the TM5 register is cleared to 0000H). <4> The INTTM50 signal is then generated repeatedly at the same interval. Interval time = (N + 1) x t: N = 0000H to FFFFH Cautions 1. To write using 8-bit access during cascade connection, set the TCE51 bit to 1 at operation start and then set the TCE50 bit to 1. When operation is stopped, clear the TCE50 bit to 0 and then clear the TCE51 bit to 0. 2. During cascade connection, TI50 input, TO50 output, and the INTTM50 signal are used. Do not use TI51 input, TO51 output, and the INTTM51 signal; mask them instead (for details, refer to CHAPTER 19 INTERRUPT/EXCEPTION PROCESSING FUNCTION). Clear the LVS51, LVR51, TMC511, and TOE51 bits to 0. 3. Do not change the value of the CR5 register during timer operation. 356 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 9 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 5 Figure 9-7 shows a timing example of the cascade connection mode with 16-bit resolution. Figure 9-7. Cascade Connection Mode with 16-Bit Resolution t Count clock TM50 count value 00H 01H N N+1 TM51 count value 00H CR50 N CR51 M FFH 00H FFH 00H 01H 02H FFH 00H 01H M-1 M N 00H 01H A 00H 00H B 00H TCE50 TCE51 INTTM50 Interval time Operation enabled, count start Interrupt occurrence, counter cleared User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD Operation stopped 357 CHAPTER 9 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 5 9.4.6 Operation as external event counter (16 bits) The 16-bit resolution timer/event counter mode is selected by setting the TMC51.TMC514 bit to 1. The external event counter counts the number of clock pulses input to the TI50 pin from an external source using 16-bit timer counter 5 (TM5). Setting method <1> Set each register. * TCL50 register: Selects the TI50 pin input edge. (The TCL51 register does not have to be set during cascade connection.) Falling edge of TI50 pin TCL50 register = 00H Rising edge of TI50 pin TCL50 register = 01H * CR50 register: Compare value (N) ... Lower 8 bits (settable from 00H to FFH) * CR51 register: Compare value (N) ... Higher 8 bits (settable from 00H to FFH) * TMC50, TMC51 registers: Stops count operation, selects the clear & stop mode entered on a match between the TM5 register and CR5 register, disables timer output F/F inversion, and disables timer output. (x: don't care) TMC50 register = 0000xx00B TMC51 register = 0001xx00B * For the alternate-function pin settings, refer to Table 4-14 Settings When Port Pins Are Used for Alternate Functions. <2> Set the TMC51.TCE51 bit to 1. Then set the TMC50.TCE50 bit to 1 and count the number of pulses input from the TI50 pin. <3> When the values of the TM5 register and CR5 register connected in cascade match, the INTTM50 signal is generated (the TM5 register is cleared to 0000H). <4> The INTTM50 signal is then generated each time the values of the TM5 register and CR5 register match. INTTM50 signal is generated when the valid edge of TI50 pin is input N + 1 times: N = 0000H to FFFFH Cautions 1. During external event counter operation, do not rewrite the value of the CR5n register. 2. To write using 8-bit access during cascade connection, set the TCE51 bit to 1 and then set the TCE50 bit to 1. When operation is stopped, clear the TCE50 bit to 0 and then clear the TCE51 bit to 0 (n = 0, 1). 3. During cascade connection, TI50 input and the INTTM50 signal are used. Do not use TI51 input, TO51 output, and the INTTM51 signal; mask them instead (for details, refer to CHAPTER 19 INTERRUPT/EXCEPTION PROCESSING FUNCTION). Clear the LVS51, LVR51, TMC511, and TOE51 bits to 0. 4. Do not change the value of the CR5 register during external event counter operation. 358 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 9 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 5 9.4.7 Square-wave output operation (16-bit resolution) The 16-bit resolution timer/event counter mode is selected by setting the TMC51.TMC514 bit to 1. 8-bit timer/event counter 5n outputs a square wave of any frequency using the interval preset in 16-bit timer compare register 5 (CR5). Setting method <1> Set each register. * TCL50 register: Selects the count clock (t) (The TCL51 register does not have to be set in cascade connection) * CR50 register: Compare value (N) ... Lower 8 bits (settable from 00H to FFH) * CR51 register: Compare value (N) ... Higher 8 bits (settable from 00H to FFH) * TMC50, TCM51 registers: Stops count operation, selects the mode in which clear & start occurs on a match between the TM5 register and CR5 register. LVS50 LVR50 Timer Output F/F Status Settings 1 0 High-level output 0 1 Low-level output Enables timer output F/F inversion, and enables timer output. TMC50 register = 00001011B or 00000111B TMC51 register = 00010000B * For the alternate-function pin settings, refer to Table 4-14 Settings When Port Pins Are Used for Alternate Functions. <2> Set the TMC51.TCE51 bit to 1. Then set the TMC50.TCE50 bit to 1 to start the count operation. <3> When the values of the TM5 register and the CR5 register connected in cascade match, the TO50 timer output F/F is inverted. Moreover, the INTTM50 signal is generated and the TM5 register is cleared to 0000H. <4> Then, the timer output F/F is inverted during the same interval and a square wave is output from the TO50 pin. Frequency = 1/2t(N + 1): N = 0000H to FFFFH Caution Do not write a different value to the CR5 register during operation. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 359 CHAPTER 9 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 5 9.4.8 Cautions (1) Error on starting timer An error of up to 1 clock occurs before the match signal is generated after the timer has been started. This is because the TM5n register is started asynchronously to the count pulse. Figure 9-8. Count Start Timing of TM5n Register Count pulse TM5n count value 00H 01H 02H Timer start Remark 360 n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 03H 04H CHAPTER 10 8-BIT TIMER H In the V850ES/KF1, two channels of 8-bit timer H are provided. 10.1 Functions 8-bit timer Hn has the following functions (n = 0, 1). * Interval timer * Square ware output * PWM output * Carrier generator 10.2 Configuration 8-bit timer Hn includes the following hardware. Table 10-1. Configuration of 8-Bit Timer Hn Item Configuration Timer registers 8-bit timer counter Hn: 1 each Register 8-bit timer H compare register n0 (CMPn0): 1 each 8-bit timer H compare register n1 (CMPn1): 1 each Timer outputs TOHn, output controller Note Control registers 8-bit timer H mode register n (TMHMDn) 8-bit timer H carrier control register n (TMCYCn) Note To use the TOHn pin function, refer to Table 4-14 Settings When Port Pins Are Used for Alternate Functions. Remark n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 361 CHAPTER 10 8-BIT TIMER H The block diagram is shown below. Figure 10-1. Block Diagram of 8-Bit Timer Hn Internal bus 8-bit timer H mode register n (TMHMDn) TMHEn CKSHn2 CKSHn1 CKSHn0 TMMDn1TMMDn0 TOLEVn TOENn 3 8-bit timer H compare register n1 (CMPn1) 8-bit timer H compare register n0 (CMPn0) 8-bit timer H carrier control register n (TMCYCn) RMCn NRZBn NRZn Reload/ interrupt control 2 INTTM5n TOHn Decoder Selector Selector Match fXX fXX/2 fXX/22 fXX/24 fXX/26 Note Carrier generator mode signal F/F Interrupt generator Level inversion Output controller R 8-bit timer counter Hn Clear PWM mode signal 1 0 Timer H enable signal INTTMHn 10 Note fXX/2 when n = 0, fXT when n = 1 Remark n = 0, 1 (1) 8-bit timer H compare register n0 (CMPn0) <R> This register can be read or written in 8-bit units. This register is used in all of the timer operation modes. This register constantly compares the value set to the CMPn0 register with the count value of 8-bit timer counter Hn and, when the two values match, generates an interrupt request signal (INTTMHn) and inverts the output level of the TOHn pin. Rewrite the value of the CMPn0 register while the timer is stopped (TMHMDn.TMHEn bit = 0). Reset sets this register to 00H. After reset: 00H 7 R/W 6 Address: CMP00 FFFFF582H, CMP10 FFFFF592H 5 4 3 2 1 CMPn0 (n = 0, 1) Caution Rewriting the CMPn0 register during timer count operation is prohibited. 362 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 0 CHAPTER 10 8-BIT TIMER H (2) 8-bit timer H compare register n1 (CMPn1) <R> This register can be read or written in 8-bit units. This register is used in the PWM output mode and carrier generator mode. In the PWM output mode, this register constantly compares the value set to the CMPn1 register with the count value of 8-bit timer counter Hn and, when the two values match, inverts the output level of the TOHn pin. No interrupt request signal is generated. In the carrier generator mode, the CMPn1 register always compares the value set to the CMPn1 register with the count value of 8-bit timer counter Hn and, when the two values match, generates an interrupt request signal (INTTMHn). At the same time, the count value is cleared. The CMPn1 register can be rewritten during timer count operation. If the value of the CMPn1 register is rewritten while the timer is operating, the new value is latched and transferred to the CMPn1 register when the count value of the timer matches the old value of the CMPn1 register, and then the value of the CMPn1 register is changed to the new value. If matching of the count value and the CMPn1 register value and writing a value to the CMPn1 register conflict, the value of the CMPn1 register is not changed. Reset sets this register to 00H. After reset: 00H 7 R/W 6 Address: CMP01 FFFFF583H, CMP11 FFFFF593H 5 4 3 2 1 0 CMPn1 (n = 0, 1) The CMPn1 register can be rewritten during timer count operation. In the carrier generator mode, after the CMPn1 register is set, if the count value of 8-bit timer counter Hn and the set value of the CMPn1 register match, an interrupt request signal (INTTMHn) is generated. At the same time, the value of 8-bit timer counter Hn is cleared to 00H. If the set value of the CMPn1 register is rewritten during timer operation, the reload timing is when the count value of 8-bit timer counter Hn and the set value of the CMPn1 register match. If the transfer timing and write to the CMPn1 register from the CPU conflict, transfer is not performed. Caution In the PWM output mode and carrier generator mode, be sure to set the CMPn1 register when starting the timer count operation (TMHMDn.TMHEn bit = 1) after the timer count operation was stopped (TMHEn bit = 0) (be sure to set again even if setting the same value to the CMPn1 register). User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 363 CHAPTER 10 8-BIT TIMER H 10.3 Registers The registers that control 8-bit timer Hn are as follows. * 8-bit timer H mode register n (TMHMDn) * 8-bit timer H carrier control register n (TMCYCn) Remarks 1. To use the TOHn pin function, refer to Table 4-14 Alternate Functions. 2. n = 0, 1 (1) 8-bit timer H mode register n (TMHMDn) The TMHMDn register controls the mode of 8-bit timer Hn. TMHMDn register can be read or written in 8-bit or 1-bit units. Reset sets TMHMDn to 00H. Remark 364 n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD Settings When Port Pins Are Used for CHAPTER 10 8-BIT TIMER H (a) 8-bit timer H mode register 0 (TMHMD0) After reset: 00H <7> TMHMD0 TMHE0 R/W Address: FFFFF580H 6 5 4 3 2 <1> <0> CKSH02 CKSH01 CKSH00 TMMD01 TMMD00 TOLEV0 TMHE0 TOEN0 8-bit timer H0 operation enable 0 Stop timer count operation (8-bit timer counter H0 = 00H) 1 Enable timer count operation (Counting starts when clock is input) CKSH02 CKSH01 CKSH00 Selection of count clock Note Count clock 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 fXX = 20 MHz fXX = 16.0 MHz fXX = 10.0 MHz fXX Setting prohibited Setting prohibited 100 ns 1 fXX/2 100 ns 125 ns 200 ns 0 fXX/4 200 ns 250 ns 400 ns 1 1 fXX/16 800 ns 1 s 1.6 s 0 0 fXX/64 3.2 s 4 s 6.4 s 0 1 fXX/1024 51.2 s 64 s 102.4 s Setting prohibited Other than above TMMD01 TMMD00 8-bit timer H0 operation mode 0 0 Interval timer mode 0 1 Carrier generator mode 1 0 PWM output mode 1 1 Setting prohibited TOLEV0 Timer output level control (default) 0 Low level 1 High level TOEN0 Timer output control 0 Disable output 1 Enable output Note Set so as to satisfy the following conditions. REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V: Count clock 10 MHz REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V: Count clock 5 MHz REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 4.0 V: Count clock 5 MHz Cautions 1. When the TMHE0 bit = 1, setting bits other than those of the TMHMD0 register is prohibited. 2. In the PWM output mode and carrier generator mode, be sure to set the CMP01 register when starting the timer count operation (TMHE0 bit = 1) after the timer count operation was stopped (TMHE0 bit = 0) (be sure to set again even if setting the same value to the CMP01 register). 3. When using the carrier generator mode, set 8-bit timer H0 count clock frequency to six times 8-bit timer/event counter 50 count clock frequency or higher. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 365 CHAPTER 10 8-BIT TIMER H (b) 8-bit timer H mode register 1 (TMHMD1) After reset: 00H <7> TMHMD1 TMHE1 R/W Address: FFFFF590H 6 5 4 3 2 <1> <0> CKSH12 CKSH11 CKSH10 TMMD11 TMMD10 TOLEV1 TMHE1 TOEN1 8-bit timer H1 operation enable 0 Stop timer count operation (8-bit timer counter H1 = 00H) 1 Enable timer count operation (Counting starts when clock is input) CKSH12 CKSH11 CKSH10 Selection of count clock Note Count clock fXX = 20.0 MHz fXX = 16.0 MHz fXX = 10.0 MHz 0 0 0 fXX Setting prohibited Setting prohibited 100 ns 0 0 1 fXX/2 100 ns 125 ns 200 ns 0 1 0 fXX/4 200 ns 250 ns 400 ns 0 1 1 fXX/16 800 ns 1 s 1.6 s 1 0 0 fXX/64 3.2 s 4 s 6.4 s 1 0 1 fXT (subclock) Setting prohibited Other than above TMMD11 TMMD10 8-bit timer H1 operation mode 0 0 Interval timer mode 0 1 Carrier generator mode 1 0 PWM output mode 1 1 Setting prohibited TOLEV1 Timer output level control (default) 0 Low level 1 High level TOEN1 Timer output control 0 Disable output 1 Enable output Note Set so as to satisfy the following conditions. REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V: Count clock 10 MHz REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V: Count clock 5 MHz REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 4.0 V: Count clock 5 MHz Cautions 1. When the TMHE1 bit = 1, setting bits other than those of the TMHMD1 register is prohibited. 2. In the PWM output mode and carrier generator mode, be sure to set the CMP11 register when starting the timer count operation (TMHE1 bit = 1) after the timer count operation was stopped (TMHE1 bit = 0) (be sure to set again even if setting the same value to the CMP11 register). 3. When using the carrier generator mode, set 8-bit timer H1 count clock frequency to six times 8-bit timer/event counter 51 count clock frequency or higher. 366 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 10 8-BIT TIMER H (2) 8-bit timer H carrier control register n (TMCYCn) This register controls the 8-bit timer Hn remote control output and carrier pulse output status. TMCYCn register can be read or written in 8-bit or 1-bit units. The NRZn bit is a read-only bit. Reset sets TMCYCn to 00H. Remark n = 0, 1 After reset: 00H TMCYCn R/W Address: TMCYC0 FFFFF581H, TMCYC1 FFFFF591H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 <0> 0 0 0 0 0 RMCn NRZBn NRZn RMCn NRZBn 0 0 Low-level output 0 1 High-level output 1 0 Low-level output 1 1 Carrier pulse output (n = 0, 1) NRZn Remote control output Carrier pulse output status flag 0 Carrier output disabled status (low-level status) 1 Carrier output enable status User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 367 CHAPTER 10 8-BIT TIMER H 10.4 Operation 10.4.1 Operation as interval timer/square wave output When the count value of 8-bit timer counter Hn and the set value of the CMPn0 register match, an interrupt request signal (INTTMHn) is generated and 8-bit timer counter Hn is cleared to 00H. The CMPn1 register cannot be used in the interval timer mode. Even if the CMPn1 register is set, this has no effect on the timer output because matches between 8-bit timer counter Hn and the CMPn1 register are not detected. A square wave of the desired frequency (duty = 50%) is output from the TOHn pin, by setting the TMHMDn.TOENn bit to 1. Remarks 1. For the alternate-function pin (TOHn) settings, refer to Table 4-14 Settings When Port Pins Are Used for Alternate Functions. 2. For INTTMHn interrupt enable, refer to CHAPTER 19 INTERRUPT/EXCEPTION PROCESSING FUNCTION. Setting <1> Set each register. Figure 10-2. Register Settings in Interval Timer Mode (i) 8-bit timer H mode register n (TMHMDn) settings TMHEn TMHMDn 0 CKSHn2 CKSHn1 CKSHn0 TMMDn1 TMMDn0 TOLEVn 0/1 0/1 0/1 0 0 0/1 TOENn 0/1 Sets timer output Sets timer output default level Sets interval timer mode Selects count clock (fCNT) Stops count operation (ii) CMPn0 register settings The interval time is as follows if N is set as a comparison value. * Interval time = (N + 1)/fCNT <2> When the TMHEn bit is set to 1, counting starts. <3> When the count value of 8-bit timer counter Hn and the set value of the CMPn0 register match, the INTTMHn signal is generated and 8-bit timer counter Hn is cleared to 00H. <4> Then, the INTTMHn signal is generated in the same interval. To stop the count operation, clear the TMHEn bit to 0. 368 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 10 8-BIT TIMER H Figure 10-3. Timing of Interval Timer/Square Wave Output Operation (1/2) Basic operation (operation when 01H CMPn0 FEH) Count clock Count start 8-bit timer counter Hn count value 00H 01H N 00H 01H N Clear 00H 01H 00H Clear N CMPn0 TMHEn INTTMHn Interval time TOHn <1> <2> Level inversion, match interrupt occurrence, 8-bit timer counter clear <3> <2> Level inversion, match interrupt occurrence, 8-bit timer counter clear <1> When the TMHEn bit is set to 1, the count operation is enabled. The count clock starts counting no more than one clock after operation has been enabled. <2> When the count value of 8-bit timer counter Hn and the set value of the CMPn0 register match, the value of 8-bit timer counter Hn is cleared, the TOHn output level is inverted, and the INTTMHn signal is output at the rising edge of the count clock. <3> The INTTMHn signal and TOHn output are set to the default level when the TMHEn bit is cleared to 0 during 8-bit timer Hn operation. If the level is already at the default level before the TMHMDn.TMHEn bit is cleared to 0, that level is maintained. Remarks 1. n = 0, 1 2. 01H N FEH User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 369 CHAPTER 10 8-BIT TIMER H Figure 10-3. Timing of Interval Timer/Square Wave Output Operation (2/2) Operation when the CMPn0 register = FFH Count clock Count start 8-bit timer counter Hn count value 00H 01H FEH FFH 00H FEH Clear TMHEn Interval time INTTMHn TOHn Operation when the CMPn0 register = 00H Count clock Count start 8-bit timer counter Hn count value 00H CMPn0 00H TMHEn INTTMHnNote TOHn Interval time <R> Note The INTTMHn interrupt is generated only once. Remark 370 n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 00H Clear FFH CMPn0 FFH CHAPTER 10 8-BIT TIMER H 10.4.2 PWM output mode operation In the PWM output mode, a pulse of any duty and cycle can be output. The CMPn0 register controls the timer output (TOHn) cycle. Rewriting the CMPn0 register during timer operation is prohibited. The CMPn1 register controls the timer output (TOHn) duty. The CMPn1 register can be rewritten during timer operation. The operation in the PWM output mode is as follows. After timer counting starts, when the count value of 8-bit timer counter Hn and the set value of the CMPn0 register match, the TOHn output level is inverted and 8-bit timer counter Hn is cleared to 00H. When the count value of 8-bit timer counter Hn and the set value of the CMPn1 register match, the TOHn output level is inverted. Remarks 1. For the alternate-function pin (TOHn) settings, refer to Table 4-14 Settings When Port Pins Are Used for Alternate Functions. 2. For INTTMHn interrupt enable, refer to CHAPTER 19 INTERRUPT/EXCEPTION PROCESSING FUNCTION. Setting <1> Set each register. Figure 10-4. Register Settings in PWM Output Mode (i) 8-bit timer H mode register n (TMHMDn) settings TMHEn TMHMDn CKSHn2 CKSHn1 CKSHn0 TMMDn1 TMMDn0 TOLEVn 0 0/1 0/1 0/1 1 0 0/1 TOENn 1 Enables timer output Sets timer output default level Selects PWM output mode Selects count clock (fCNT) Stops count operation (ii) CMPn0 register setting * Compare value (N): Sets cycle (iii) CMPn1 register setting * Compare value (M): Sets duty Remarks 1. n = 0, 1 2. 00H CMPn1 (M) < CMPn0 (N) FFH <2> When the TMHEn bit is set to 1, counting starts. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 371 CHAPTER 10 8-BIT TIMER H <3> After the count operation is enabled, the first compare register to be compared is the CMPn0 register. When the count value of 8-bit timer counter Hn and the set value of the CMPn0 register match, 8-bit timer counter Hn is cleared, an interrupt request signal (INTTMHn) is generated, and the TOHn output level is inverted. At the same time, the register that is compared with 8-bit timer counter Hn changes from the CMPn0 register to the CMPn1 register. <4> When the count value of 8-bit timer counter Hn and the set value of the CMPn1 register match, the TOHn output level is inverted, and at the same time the register that is compared with 8-bit timer counter Hn changes from the CMPn1 register to the CMPn0 register. At this time, 8-bit timer counter Hn is not cleared and the INTTMHn signal is not generated. <5> A pulse of any duty can be obtained through the repetition of steps <3> and <4> above. <6> To stop the count operation, clear the TMHEn bit to 0. Designating the set value of the CMPn0 register as (N), the set value of the CMPn1 register as (M), and the count clock frequency as fCNT, the PWM pulse output cycle and duty are as follows. PWM pulse output cycle = (N + 1)/fCNT Duty = inactive width: Active width = (M + 1) : (N + 1) Cautions 1. The set value of the CMPn1 register can be changed while the timer counter is operating. However, this takes a duration of at least three operating clocks (signal selected by the CKSHn2 to CKSHn0 bits of the TMHMDn register) from when the value of the CMPn1 register is changed until the value is transferred to the register. 2. Be sure to set the CMPn1 register when starting the timer count operation (TMHEn bit = 1) after the timer count operation was stopped (TMHEn bit = 0) (be sure to set again even if setting the same value to the CMPn1 register). 3. Make sure that the CMPn1 register set value (M) and CMPn0 register set value (N) are within the following range. 00H CMPn1 (M) < CMPn0 (N) FFH 372 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 10 8-BIT TIMER H Figure 10-5. Operation Timing in PWM Output Mode (1/4) Basic operation Count clock 8-bit timer counter Hn count value 00H 01H A5H 00H 01H 02H CMPn0 A5H CMPn1 01H A5H 00H 01H 02H A5H 00H TMHEn INTTMHn TOHn (TOLEVn = 0) <1> <2> <3> <4> TOHn (TOLEVn = 1) <1> When the TMHEn bit is set to 1, counting starts. At this time TOHn output remains the default level. <2> When the count value of 8-bit timer counter Hn and the set value of the CMPn0 register match, the TOHn output level is inverted, 8-bit timer counter Hn is cleared, and the INTTMHn signal is output. <3> When the count value of 8-bit timer counter Hn and the set value of the CMPn1 register match, the TOHn output level is inverted. At this time, the value of 8-bit timer counter Hn is not cleared and the INTTMHn signal is not output. <4> When the TMHEn bit is cleared to 0 during 8-bit timer Hn operation, the INTTMHn signal and TOHn output are set to the default level. Remark n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 373 CHAPTER 10 8-BIT TIMER H Figure 10-5. Operation Timing in PWM Output Mode (2/4) Operation when the CMPn0 register = FFH, the CMPn1 register = 00H Count clock 8-bit timer counter Hn count value 00H 01H FFH 00H 01H 02H FFH 00H 01H 02H CMPn0 FFH CMPn1 00H FFH 00H TMHEn INTTMHn TOHn (TOLEVn = 0) Operation when the CMPn0 register = FFH, the CMPn1 register = FEH Count clock 8-bit timer counter Hn count value 00H 01H FEH FFH 00H 01H FEH FFH 00H 01H CMPn0 FFH CMPn1 FEH TMHEn INTTMHn TOHn (TOLEVn = 0) Remark 374 n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD FEH FFH 00H CHAPTER 10 8-BIT TIMER H Figure 10-5. Operation Timing in PWM Output Mode (3/4) Operation when the CMPn0 register = 01H, the CMPn1 register = 00H Count clock 8-bit timer counter Hn count value 00H 01H 00H 01H 00H 00H 01H 00H 01H CMPn0 01H CMPn1 00H TMHEn INTTMHn TOHn (TOLEVn = 0) Remark n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 375 CHAPTER 10 8-BIT TIMER H Figure 10-5. Operation Timing in PWM Output Mode (4/4) Operation by changing the CMPn1 register (CMPn1 register = 02H 03H, the CMPn0 register = A5H) Count clock 8-bit timer counter Hn 00H 01H 02H 80H A5H 00H 01H 02H 03H A5H 00H 01H 02H 03H A5H 00H A5H CMPn0 02H (03H) 02H CMPn1 <2> 03H <2>' TMHEn INTTMHn TOHn (TOLEVn = 0) <1> <3> <4> <5> <6> <1> When the TMHEn bit is set to 1, counting starts. At this time, the TOHn output remains the default level. <2> The set value of the CMPn1 register can be changed during count operation. This operation is asynchronous to the count clock. <3> When the count value of 8-bit timer counter Hn and the set value of the CMPn0 register match, 8-bit timer counter Hn is cleared, the TOHn output level is inverted, and the INTTMHn signal is generated. <4> Even if the value of the CMPn1 register is changed, that value is latched and not transferred to the register. When the count value of 8-bit timer counter Hn and the set value of the CMPn1 register prior to the change match, the changed value is transferred to the CMPn1 register and the value of the CMPn1 register is changed (<2>'). However, three or more count clocks are required from the time the value of the CMPn1 register is changed until it is transferred to the register. Even if a match signal is generated within three count clocks, the changed value cannot be transferred to the register. <5> When the count value of 8-bit timer counter Hn matches the changed set value of the CMPn1 register, the TOHn output level is inverted. 8-bit timer counter Hn is not cleared and the INTTMHn signal is not generated. <6> When the TMHEn bit is cleared to 0 during 8-bit timer Hn operation, the INTTMHn signal and TOHn output are set to the default level. 376 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 10 8-BIT TIMER H 10.4.3 Carrier generator mode operation The carrier clock generated by 8-bit timer Hn is output using the cycle set with 8-bit timer/event counter 5n. In the carrier generator mode, 8-bit timer/event counter 5n is used to control the extent to which the carrier pulse of 8-bit timer Hn is output, and the carrier pulse is output from the TOHn output. Remarks 1. For the alternate-function pin (TOHn) settings, refer to Table 4-14 Settings When Port Pins Are Used for Alternate Functions. 2. For INTTMHn interrupt enable, refer to CHAPTER 19 INTERRUPT/EXCEPTION PROCESSING FUNCTION. (1) Carrier generation In the carrier generator mode, the CMPn0 register generates a waveform with the low-level width of the carrier pulse and the CMPn1 register generates a waveform with the high-level width of the carrier pulse. During 8-bit timer Hn operation, the CMPn1 register can be rewritten, but rewriting of the CMPn0 register is prohibited. (2) Carrier output control Carrier output control is performed with the interrupt request signal (INTTM5n) of 8-bit timer/event counter 5n and the TMCYCn.NRZBn and TMCYCn.RMCn bits. The output relationships are as follows. RMCn Bit NRZBn Bit 0 0 Output Low level output 0 1 High level output 1 0 Low level output 1 1 Carrier pulse output Remark n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 377 CHAPTER 10 8-BIT TIMER H To control carrier pulse output during count operation, the TMCYCn.NRZn and TMCYCn.NRZBn bits have a master and slave bit configuration. The NRZn bit is read-only while the NRZBn bit can be read and written. The INTTM5n signal is synchronized with the 8-bit timer Hn clock and output as the INTTM5Hn signal. The INTTM5Hn signal becomes the data transfer signal of the NRZn bit and the value of the NRZBn bit is transferred to the NRZn bit. The transfer timing from the NRZBn bit to the NRZn bit is as follows. <R> Figure 10-6. Transfer Timing TMHEn 8-bit timer Hn count clock INTTM5n INTTM5Hn <1> NRZn 0 1 0 <2> NRZBn 1 0 1 <3> RMCn <1> The INTTM5n signal is synchronized with the count clock of 8-bit timer Hn and is output as the INTTM5Hn signal. <2> The value of the NRZBn bit is transferred to the NRZn bit at the second clock from the rising edge of the INTTM5Hn signal. <3> Write the next value to the NRZBn bit in the interrupt servicing programming that has been started by the INTTM5Hn interrupt or after timing has been checked by polling the interrupt request flag. Write data to count the next time to the CR5n register. Cautions 1. Do not rewrite the NRZBn bit again until at least the second clock after it has been rewritten, or else transfer from the NRZBn bit to the NRZn bit is not guaranteed. 2. When using 8-bit timer/event counter 5n in the carrier generator mode, an interrupt occurs at the timing of <1>. An interrupt occurs at a different timing when it is used in other than the carrier generator mode. Remark 378 n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 10 8-BIT TIMER H Setting <1> Set each register. Figure 10-7. Register Settings in Carrier Generator Mode * 8-bit timer H mode register n (TMHMDn) TMHEn TMHMDn 0 CKSHn2 CKSHn1 CKSHn0 TMMDn1 TMMDn0 TOLEVn 0/1 0/1 0/1 0 1 0/1 TOENn 1 Enables timer output Sets timer output default level Selects carrier generator mode Selects count clock (fCNT) Stops count operation * CMPn0 register: Compare value * CMPn1 register: Compare value * TMCYCn register: RMCn = 1 ... Remote control output enable bit NRZBn = 0/1 ... Carrier output enable bit * TCL5n, TMC5n registers: Refer to 9.3 Registers. Remark n = 0, 1 <2> When the TMHEn bit is set to 1, 8-bit timer Hn count operation starts. <3> When the TMC5n.TCE5n bit is set to 1, 8-bit timer/event counter 5n count operation starts. <4> After the count operation is enabled, the first compare register to be compared is the CMPn0 register. When the count value of 8-bit timer counter Hn and the set value of the CMPn0 register match, the INTTMHn signal is generated, 8-bit timer counter Hn is cleared, and at the same time, the register that is compared with 8-bit timer counter Hn changes from the CMPn0 register to the CMPn1 register. <5> When the count value of 8-bit timer counter Hn and the set value of the CMPn1 register match, the INTTMHn signal is generated, 8-bit timer counter Hn is cleared, and at the same time, the register that is compared with 8-bit timer counter Hn changes from the CMPn1 register to the CMPn0 register. <6> The carrier clock is obtained through the repetition of steps <4> and <5> above. <7> The INTTM5n signal is synchronized with 8-bit timer Hn and output as the INTTM5Hn signal. This signal becomes the data transfer signal of the NRZBn bit and the value of the NRZBn bit is transferred to the NRZn bit. <R> <8> Write the next value to the NRZBn bit in the interrupt servicing programming that has been started by the INTTM5Hn interrupt or after timing has been checked by polling the interrupt request flag. Write data to count the next time to the CR5n register. <9> When the NRZn bit becomes high level, the carrier clock is output from the TOHn pin. <10> Any carrier clock can be obtained through the repetition of the above steps. To stop the count operation, clear the TMHEn bit to 0. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 379 CHAPTER 10 8-BIT TIMER H Designating the set value of the CMPn0 register as (N), the set value of the CMPn1 register as (M), and the count clock frequency as fCNT, the carrier clock output cycle and duty are as follows. Carrier clock output cycle = (N + M + 2)/fCNT Duty = High level width: Carrier clock output width = (M + 1) : (N + M + 2) Cautions 1. Be sure to set the CMPn1 register when starting the timer count operation (TMHEn bit = 1) after the timer count operation was stopped (TMHEn bit = 0) (be sure to set again even if setting the same value to the CMPn1 register). 2. Set the values of the CMPn0 and CMPn1 registers in the range of 01H to FFH. 3. In the carrier generator mode, three operating clocks (signal selected by the TMHMDn.CKSHn0 to TMHMDn.CKSHn2 bits) are required for actual transfer of the new value to the register after the CMPn1 register has been rewritten. 4. Be sure to perform the TMCYCn.RMCn bit setting before the start of the count operation. 5. When using the carrier generator mode, set the 8-bit timer Hn count clock frequency to six times the 8-bit timer/event counter 5n count clock frequency or higher. 380 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 10 8-BIT TIMER H Figure 10-8. Carrier Generator Mode (1/3) Operation when the CMPn0 register = N, the CMPn1 register = N is set 8-bit timer Hn count clock 8-bit timer counter Hn count value 00H N 00H N 00H N 00H CMPn0 N CMPn1 N N 00H N 00H N TMHEn INTTMHn <3> <4> <1> <2> Carrier clock 8-bit timer 5n count clock TM5n count value 00H 01H K 00H 01H L K CR5n 00H 01H M 00H 01H L N 00H 01H M N <6> TCE5n <5> INTTM5n INTTM5Hn NRZBn 0 1 0 1 0 <6> NRZn 0 1 0 1 0 Carrier clock TOHn <7> <1> When the TMHEn bit = 0 and the TCE5n bit = 0, the operation of 8-bit timer Hn is stopped. <2> When the TMHEn bit is set to 1, 8-bit timer Hn starts counting. The carrier clock remains the default level. <3> When the count value of 8-bit timer counter Hn and the set value of the CMPn0 register match, the first INTTMHn signal is generated, the carrier clock signal is inverted, and the register that is compared with 8-bit timer counter Hn changes from the CMPn0 register to the CMPn1 register. 8-bit timer counter Hn is cleared to 00H. <4> When the count value of 8-bit timer counter Hn and the set value of the CMPn1 register match, the INTTMHn signal is generated, the carrier clock signal is inverted, and the register that is compared with 8-bit timer counter Hn changes from the CMPn1 register to the CMPn0 register. 8-bit timer counter Hn is cleared to 00H. A carrier clock with a duty of 50% is generated through the repetition of steps <3> and <4>. <5> The INTTM5n signal is synchronized with 8-bit timer Hn and output as the INTTM5Hn signal. <6> The INTTM5Hn signal becomes the data transfer signal of the NRZBn bit, and the value of the NRZBn bit is transferred to the NRZn bit. <7> The TOHn output is made low level by clearing the NRZn bit = 0. Remark n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 381 CHAPTER 10 8-BIT TIMER H Figure 10-8. Carrier Generator Mode (2/3) Operation when the CMPn0 register = N, the CMPn1 register = M is set 8-bit timer Hn count clock 8-bit timer counter Hn count value 00H N 00H 01H M 00H N 00H 01H CMPn0 N CMPn1 M M 00H N 00H TMHEn INTTMHn <3> <4> <1> <2> Carrier clock 8-bit timer 5n count clock TM5n count value 00H 01H K 00H 01H L K NRZBn 00H 01H M 00H 01H L N 00H 01H M N TCE5n <5> INTTM5n INTTM5Hn NRZBn NRZn 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 Carrier clock <6> TOHn <7> <1> When the TMHEn bit = 0 and the TCE5n bit = 0, the operation of 8-bit timer Hn is stopped. <2> When the TMHEn bit is set to 1, 8-bit timer Hn starts counting. The carrier clock remains the default level at this time. <3> When the count value of 8-bit timer counter Hn and the set value of the CMPn0 register match, the first INTTMHn signal is generated, the carrier clock signal is inverted, and the register that is compared with 8-bit timer counter Hn changes from the CMPn0 register to the CMPn1 register. 8-bit timer counter Hn is cleared to 00H. <4> When the count value of 8-bit timer counter Hn and the set value of the CMPn1 register match, the INTTMHn signal is generated, the carrier clock signal is inverted, and the register that is compared with 8-bit timer counter Hn changes from the CMPn1 register to the CMPn0 register. 8-bit timer counter Hn is cleared to 00H. A carrier clock with a fixed duty (other than 50%) is generated through the repetition of steps <3> and <4>. <5> The INTTM5n signal is generated. This signal is synchronized with 8-bit timer Hn and output as the INTTM5Hn signal. <6> The carrier is output from the rising edge of the first carrier clock by setting the NRZn bit = 1. <7> By setting the NRZn bit = 0, the TOHn output is also maintained high level while the carrier clock is high level, and does not change to low level (the high level width of the carrier waveform is guaranteed through steps <6> and <7>). Remark n = 0, 1 382 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 10 8-BIT TIMER H Figure 10-8. Carrier Generator Mode (3/3) Operation based on the CMPn1 register transitions 8-bit timer Hn count clock 8-bit timer counter Hn count value 00H 01H N 00H 01H M 00H N 00H 01H L 00H N CMPn0 <3> M CMPn1 <3>' M (L) L TMHEn INTTMHn <2> Carrier clock <4> <5> <1> <1> When the TMHEn bit is set to 1, counting starts. The carrier clock remains the default level at this time. <2> When the count value of the 8-bit timer counter Hn matches the value of the CMPn0 register, the INTTMHn signal is output, the carrier signal is inverted, and the 8-bit timer counter is cleared to 00H. At the same time, the compare register whose value is to be compared with that of the 8-bit timer counter Hn is changed from the CMPn0 register to the CMPn1 register. <3> The CMPn1 register is asynchronous to the count clock, and its value can be changed while the 8-bit timer Hn is operating. The new value (L) to which the value of the register is to be changed is latched. When the count value of the 8-bit timer counter Hn matches the value (M) of the CMPn1 register before the change, the CMPn1 register is changed (<3>'). However, it takes three count clocks or more since the value of the CMPn1 register has been changed until the value is transferred to the register. Even if a match signal is generated before the duration of three count clocks elapses, the new value is not transferred to the register. <4> When the count value of 8-bit timer counter Hn and the value (M) of the CMPn1 register match, the INTTMHn signal is output, the carrier signal is inverted, and 8-bit timer counter Hn is cleared to 00H. At the same time, the compare register whose value is to be compared with that of the 8-bit timer counter Hn is changed from the CMPn1 register to the CMPn0 register. <5> The timing at which the count value of 8-bit timer counter Hn and the value of the CMPn1 register match again is the changed value (L). Remark n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 383 CHAPTER 11 INTERVAL TIMER, WATCH TIMER The V850ES/KF1 includes interval timer BRG and a watch timer. Interval timer BRG can also be used as the source clock of the watch timer. The watch timer can also be used as interval timer WT. Two interval timer channels and one watch timer channel can be used at the same time. 11.1 Interval Timer BRG 11.1.1 Functions Interval timer BRG has the following functions. * Interval timer BRG: An interrupt request signal (INTBRG) is generated at a specified interval. * Generation of count clock for watch timer: When the main clock is used as the count clock for the watch timer, a count clock (fBRG) is generated. 11.1.2 Configuration The following shows the block diagram of interval timer BRG. Figure 11-1. Block Diagram of Interval Timer BRG Clock control 3-bit prescaler fX/8 fX/4 fX/2 fX Selector fX INTBRG fBGCS 8-bit counter Clear PRSCM register 2 BGCE TODIS BGCS1 Match BGCS0 PRSM register Internal bus Remark fX: Main clock oscillation frequency fBGCS: Interval timer BRG count clock frequency fBRG: Watch timer count clock frequency INTBRG: Interval timer BRG interrupt request signal 384 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD Output control 1/2 fBRG Count clock for watch timer CHAPTER 11 INTERVAL TIMER, WATCH TIMER (1) Clock control The clock control controls supply/stop of the operation clock of interval timer BRG. (2) 3-bit prescaler The 3-bit prescaler divides fX to generate fX/2, fX/4, and fX/8. (3) Selector The selector selects the count clock (fBGCS) for interval timer BRG from fX, fX/2, fX/4, and fX/8. (4) 8-bit counter The 8-bit counter counts the count clock (fBGCS). (5) Output control The output control controls supply of the count clock (fBRG) for the watch timer. (6) PRSCM register The PRSCM register is an 8-bit compare register that sets the interval time. (7) PRSM register The PRSM register controls the operation of interval timer BRG, the selector, and clock supply to the watch timer. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 385 CHAPTER 11 INTERVAL TIMER, WATCH TIMER 11.1.3 Registers Interval timer BRG includes the following registers. (1) Interval timer BRG mode register (PRSM) PRSM controls the operation of interval timer BRG, selection of count clock, and clock supply to the watch timer. This register can be read or written in 8-bit or 1-bit units. Reset sets PRSM to 00H. After reset: 00H R/W Address: FFFFF8B0H < > PRSM 0 0 0 BGCE BGCE 0 TODIS BGCS0 Control of interval timer operation 0 Operation stopped, 8-bit counter cleared to 01H 1 Operate TODIS Control of clock supply for watch timer 0 Clock for watch timer supplied 1 Clock for watch timer not supplied BGCS1 BGCS1 Selection of input clock (fBGCS)Note BGCS0 10 MHz 5 MHz 4 MHz 0 0 fX 100 ns 200 ns 250 ns 0 1 fX/2 200 ns 400 ns 500 ns 1 0 fX/4 400 ns 800 ns 1 s 1 1 fX/8 800 ns 1.6 s 2 s Note Set these bits so that the following conditions are satisfied. VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V: fBGCS 10 MHz VDD = 2.7 to 4.0 V: fBGCS 5 MHz Cautions 1. Do not change the values of the TODIS, BGCS1, and BGCS0 bits while interval timer BRG is operating (BGCE bit = 1). Set the TODIS, BGCS1, and BGCS0 bits before setting (1) the BGCE bit. 2. When the BGCE bit is cleared (to 0), the 8-bit counter is cleared. 386 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 11 INTERVAL TIMER, WATCH TIMER (2) Interval timer BRG compare register (PRSCM) PRSCM is an 8-bit compare register. This register can be read or written in 8-bit units. Reset sets PRSCM to 00H. After reset: 00H PRSCM R/W Address: FFFFF8B1H PRSCM7 PRSCM6 PRSCM5 PRSCM4 PRSCM3 PRSCM2 PRSCM1 PRSCM0 Caution Do not rewrite the PRSCM register while interval timer BRG is operating (PRSM.BGCE bit = 1). Set the PRSCM register before setting (1) the BGCE bit. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 387 CHAPTER 11 INTERVAL TIMER, WATCH TIMER 11.1.4 Operation (1) Operation of interval timer BRG Set the count clock by using the BGCS1 and BGCS0 bits of PRSM and the 8-bit compare value by using the PRSCM register. When the PRSM.BGCE bit is set (1), interval timer BRG starts operating. Each time the count value of the 8-bit counter and the set value in the PRSCM register match, an interrupt <R> request signal (INTBRG) is generated. At the same time, the 8-bit counter is cleared to 01H and counting is continued. The interval time can be obtained from the following equation. Interval time = 2m x N/fX Remark m: Division value (set values of BGCS1 and BGCS0 bits) = 0 to 3 N: Set value in PRSCM registerNote = 1 to 256 (when the set value in the PRSCM register is 00H, N = 256) fX: Main clock oscillation frequency <R> Note The INTBRG interrupt is generated only once when the set value in the PRSCM register = 01H. (2) Count clock supply for watch timer Set the count clock by using the BGCS1 and BGCS0 bits of PRSM and the 8-bit compare value by using the PRSCM register, so that the count clock frequency (fBRG) of the watch timer is 32.768 kHz. Clear (0) the PRSM.TODIS bit at the same time. When the PRSM.BGCE bit is set (1), fBRG is supplied to the watch timer. fBRG is obtained from the following equation. fBRG = fX/(2m+ 1 x N) To set fBRG to 32.768 kHz, perform the following calculation to set the BGCS1 and BGCS0 bits and the PRSCM register. <1> Set N = fX/65,536 (round off the decimal) to set m = 0. <2> If N is even, N = N/2 and m = m + 1 <3> Repeat step <2> until N is even or m = 3 <4> Set N to the PRSCM register and m to the BGCS1 and BGCS0 bits. Example: When fX = 4.00 MHz <1> N = 4,000,000/65,536 = 61 (round off the decimal), m = 0 <2>, <3> Since N is odd, the values remain as N = 61, m = 0 <4> The set value in the PRSCM register: 3DH (61), the set values in the BGCS1 and BGCS0 bits: 00 Remark m: Divided value (set value in the BGCS1 and BGCS0 bits) = 0 to 3 N: Set value in PRSCM register = 1 to 256 (when the set value in the PRSCM register is 00H, N = 256) fX: Main clock oscillation frequency 388 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 11 INTERVAL TIMER, WATCH TIMER 11.2 Watch Timer 11.2.1 Functions The watch timer has the following functions. * Watch timer: An interrupt request signal (INTWT) is generated at time intervals of 0.5 or 0.25 seconds by using the main clock or subclock. * Interval timer: An interrupt request signal (INTWTI) is generated at the preset time interval. The watch timer and interval timer functions can be used at the same time. 11.2.2 Configuration The following shows the block diagram of the watch timer. Clear Selector fBRG 11-bit prescaler INTWT Clear fW/24 fW/25 fW/26 fW/27 fW/28 fW/210 fW/211 fW/29 Selector fXT fW 5-bit counter Selector Selector Figure 11-2. Block Diagram of Watch Timer INTWTI 3 WTM7 WTM6 WTM5 WTM4 WTM3 WTM2 WTM1 WTM0 Watch timer operation mode register (WTM) Internal bus Remark fBRG: Frequency of count clock from interval timer BRG fXT: Subclock frequency fW: Watch timer clock frequency INTWT: Watch timer interrupt request signal INTWTI: Interval timer interrupt request signal User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 389 CHAPTER 11 INTERVAL TIMER, WATCH TIMER (1) 11-bit prescaler The 11-bit prescaler generates a clock of fW/24 to fW/211 by dividing fW. (2) 5-bit counter The 5-bit counter generates the watch timer interrupt request signal (INTWT) at intervals of 24/fW, 25/fW, 213/fW, or 214/fW by counting fW or fW/29. (3) Selectors The watch timer has the following four selectors. * Selector that selects the main clock (the clock from interval timer BRG (fBRG)) or the subclock (fXT) as the clock for the watch timer. * Selector that selects fW or fW/29 as the count clock frequency of the 5-bit counter * Selector that selects 24/fW or 213/fW, or 25/fW or 214/fW as the INTWT signal generation time interval. * Selector that selects the generation time interval of the interval timer WT interrupt request signal (INTWTI) from 24/fW to 211/fW. (4) 8-bit counter The 8-bit counter counts the count clock (fBGCS). (5) WTM register The WTM register is an 8-bit register that controls the operation of the watch timer/interval timer WT and sets the interval of interrupt request signal generation. 11.2.3 Registers The watch timer includes the following register. (1) Watch timer operation mode register (WTM) This register enables or disables the count clock and operation of the watch timer, sets the interval time of the 11-bit prescaler, controls the operation of the 5-bit counter, and sets the timer of watch timer interrupt request signal (INTWT) generation. The WTM register can be read or written in 8-bit or 1-bit units. Reset sets WTM to 00H. 390 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 11 INTERVAL TIMER, WATCH TIMER After reset: 00H WTM WTM7 R/W WTM6 Address: FFFFF680H WTM5 WTM4 WTM3 WTM2 < > < > WTM1 WTM0 WTM7 WTM6 WTM5 0 0 0 0 24/fW (488 s: fW = fXT) 0 0 0 1 25/fW (977 s: fW = fXT) 0 0 1 0 26/fW (1.95 ms: fW = fXT) 0 0 1 1 27/fW (3.91 ms: fW = fXT) 0 1 0 0 28/fW (7.81 ms: fW = fXT) 0 1 0 1 29/fW (15.6 ms: fW = fXT) 0 1 1 0 210/fW (31.3 ms: fW = fXT) 0 1 1 1 211/fW (62.5 ms: fW = fXT) 1 0 0 0 24/fW (488 s: fW = fBRG) 1 0 0 1 25/fW (977 s: fW = fBRG) 1 0 1 0 26/fW (1.95 ms: fW = fBRG) 1 0 1 1 27/fW (3.91 ms: fW = fBRG) 1 1 0 0 28/fW (7.81 ms: fW = fBRG) 1 1 0 1 29/fW (15.6 ms: fW = fBRG) 1 1 1 0 210/fW (31.3 ms: fW = fBRG) 1 1 1 1 211/fW (62.5 ms: fW = fBRG) WTM7 WTM3 WTM2 0 0 0 214/fW (0.5 s: fW = fXT) 0 0 1 213/fW (0.25 s: fW = fXT) 0 1 0 25/fW (977 s: fW = fXT) 0 1 1 24/fW (488 s: fW = fXT) 1 0 0 214/fW (0.5 s: fW = fBRG) 1 0 1 213/fW (0.25 s: fW = fBRG) 1 1 0 25/fW (977 s: fW = fBRG) 1 1 1 24/fW (488 s: fW = fBRG) WTM1 WTM4 Selection of interval timer interrupt (INTWTI) time Selection of watch timer interrupt (INTWT) time Control of 5-bit counter operation 0 Clear after operation stops 1 Start WTM0 Watch timer operation enable 0 Stop operation (clear both prescaler and 5-bit counter) 1 Enable operation Caution Rewrite the WTM2 to WTM7 bits while both the WTM0 and WTM1 bits are 0. Remarks 1. fW: Watch timer clock frequency 2. Values in parentheses apply when fW = 32.768 kHz User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 391 CHAPTER 11 INTERVAL TIMER, WATCH TIMER 11.2.4 Operation (1) Operation as watch timer The watch timer generates an interrupt request at fixed time intervals. The watch timer operates using time intervals of 0.25 or 0.5 seconds with the subclock (32.768 kHz). The count operation starts when the WTM.WTM0 and WTM.WTM1 bits are set to 11. When these bits are cleared to 00, the 10-bit prescaler and 5-bit counter are cleared and the count operation stops. The 5-bit counter can be cleared to synchronize the time by clearing the WTM1 bit to 0 when the watch timer and interval timer WT operate simultaneously. At this time, an error of up to 15.6 ms may occur in the watch timer, but interval timer WT is not affected. (2) Operation as interval timer The watch timer can also be used as an interval timer that repeatedly generates an interrupt request signal (INTWTI) at intervals specified by a count value set in advance. The interval time can be selected by the WTM.WTM4 to WTM.WTM7 bits. Table 11-1. Interval Time of Interval Timer WTM7 0 0 WTM5 0 WTM4 Interval Time 0 2 x 1/fW 488 s (operating at fW = fXT = 32.768 kHz) 4 0 0 0 1 2 x 1/fW 977 s (operating at fW = fXT = 32.768 kHz) 0 0 1 0 2 x 1/fW 1.95 ms (operating at fW = fXT = 32.768 kHz) 1 2 x 1/fW 3.91 ms (operating at fW = fXT = 32.768 kHz) 0 2 x 1/fW 7.81 ms (operating at fW = fXT = 32.768 kHz) 1 2 x 1/fW 15.6 ms (operating at fW = fXT = 32.768 kHz) 0 2 x 1/fW 31.3 ms (operating at fW = fXT = 32.768 kHz) 1 2 x 1/fW 62.5 ms (operating at fW = fXT = 32.768 kHz) 0 2 x 1/fW 488 s (operating at fW = fBRG = 32.768 kHz) 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 4 1 0 0 1 2 x 1/fW 977 s (operating at fW = fBRG = 32.768 kHz) 1 0 1 0 2 x 1/fW 1.95 ms (operating at fW = fBRG = 32.768 kHz) 1 2 x 1/fW 3.91 ms (operating at fW = fBRG = 32.768 kHz) 0 2 x 1/fW 7.81 ms (operating at fW = fBRG = 32.768 kHz) 1 2 x 1/fW 15.6 ms (operating at fW = fBRG = 32.768 kHz) 0 2 x 1/fW 31.3 ms (operating at fW = fBRG = 32.768 kHz) 1 2 x 1/fW 62.5 ms (operating at fW = fBRG = 32.768 kHz) 1 1 1 1 1 Remark 392 WTM6 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 fW: Watch timer clock frequency User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 11 INTERVAL TIMER, WATCH TIMER Figure 11-3. Operation Timing of Watch Timer/Interval Timer 5-bit counter 0H Overflow Start Overflow Count clock fW or fW/29 Watch timer interrupt INTWT Interrupt time of watch timer (0.5 s) Interrupt time of watch timer (0.5 s) Interval timer interrupt INTWTI Interval time (T) Interval time (T) nT nT Remarks 1. Assuming that the interrupt time of the watch timer is set to 0.5 seconds. 2. fW: Watch timer clock frequency Values in parentheses apply when count clock fW = 32.768 kHz. n: Number of interval timer WT operations 11.3 Cautions (1) Operation as watch timer Some time is required before the first watch timer interrupt request (INTWT) is generated after operation is enabled (WTM.WTM1 and WTM.WTM0 bits = 11). Figure 11-4. Example of Generation of Watch Timer Interrupt Request (INTWT) (When Interrupt Period = 0.5 s) It takes 0.515625 (max.) seconds for the first INTWT to be generated (29 x 1/32768 = 0.015625 (max.) s longer). INTWT is then generated every 0.5 seconds. WTM0, WTM1 0.515625 s 0.5 s 0.5 s INTWT User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 393 CHAPTER 11 INTERVAL TIMER, WATCH TIMER (2) When watch timer and interval timer BRG operate simultaneously When using the subclock as the count clock for the watch timer, the interval time of interval timer BRG can be set to any value. Changing the interval time does not affect the watch timer (before changing the interval time, stop operation). When using the main clock as the count clock for the watch timer, set the interval time of interval timer BRG to approximately 65.536 kHz. Do not change this value. (3) When interval timer BRG and interval timer WT operate simultaneously When using the subclock as the count clock for interval timer WT, the interval times of interval timers BRG and WT can be set to any values. They can also be changed later (before changing the value, stop operation). When using the main clock as the count clock for interval timer WT, the interval time of interval timer BRG can be set to any value, but cannot be changed later (it can be changed only when interval timer WT stops operation). The interval time of interval timer WT can be set to x 25 to x 212 of the set value of interval timer BRG. It can also be changed later. (4) When watch timer and interval timer WT operate simultaneously The interval time of interval timer WT can be set to a value between 488 s and 62.5 ms. It cannot be changed later. Do not stop interval timer WT (clear (0) the WTM.WTM0 bit) while the watch timer is operating. If the WTM0 bit is set (1) after it had been cleared (0), the watch timer will have a discrepancy of up to 0.5 or 0.25 seconds. (5) When watch timer, interval timer BRG, and interval timer WT operate simultaneously When using the subclock as the count clock for the watch timer, the interval times of interval timers BRG and WT can be set to any values. The interval time of interval timer BRG can be changed later (before changing the value, stop operation). When using the main clock as the count clock for the watch timer, set the interval time of interval timer BRG to approximately 65.536 kHz. It cannot be changed later. The interval time of interval timer WT can be set to a value between 488 s and 62.5 ms. It cannot be changed later. Do not stop interval timer BRG (clear (0) the PRSM.BGCE bit) or interval timer WT (clear (0) the WTM.WTM0 bit) while the watch timer is operating. 394 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 12 WATCHDOG TIMER FUNCTIONS 12.1 Watchdog Timer 1 12.1.1 Functions Watchdog timer 1 has the following operation modes. * Watchdog timer * Interval timer The following functions are realized from the above-listed operation modes. * Generation of non-maskable interrupt request signal (INTWDT1) upon overflow of watchdog timer 1Note * Generation of system reset signal (WDTRES1) upon overflow of watchdog timer 1 * Generation of maskable interrupt request signal (INTWDTM1) upon overflow of interval timer Note For non-maskable interrupt servicing due to non-maskable interrupt request signal (INTWDT1, INTWDT2), refer to 19.10 Cautions. Remark Select whether to use watchdog timer 1 in the watchdog timer 1 mode or the interval timer mode with the WDTM1 register. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 395 CHAPTER 12 WATCHDOG TIMER FUNCTIONS Figure 12-1. Block Diagram of Watchdog Timer 1 Internal bus Watchdog timer clock selection register (WDCS) Watchdog timer mode register 1 (WDTM1) RUN1 WDTM14 WDTM13 WDCS2 WDCS1 2 WDCS0 3 Clear fXW Prescaler fXW/221 fXW/219 fXW/217 fXW/216 fXW/2 15 fXW/2 14 Selector fXW/218 INTWDTM1 Output controller INTWDT1 WDTRES1 fXW/213 Remark INTWDTM1: Request signal for maskable interrupt through watchdog timer 1 overflow INTWDT1: Request signal for non-maskable interrupt through watchdog timer 1 overflow WDTRES1: Reset signal through watchdog timer 1 overflow fXW = fX: 396 Watchdog timer 1 clock frequency User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 12 WATCHDOG TIMER FUNCTIONS 12.1.2 Configuration Watchdog timer 1 includes the following hardware. Table 12-1. Configuration of Watchdog Timer 1 Item Configuration Watchdog timer clock selection register (WDCS) Control register Watchdog timer mode register 1 (WDTM1) 12.1.3 Registers The registers that control watchdog timer 1 are as follows. * Watchdog timer clock selection register (WDCS) * Watchdog timer mode register 1 (WDTM1) (1) Watchdog timer clock selection register (WDCS) This register sets the overflow time of watchdog timer 1 and the interval timer. The WDCS register can be read or written in 8-bit or 1-bit units. Reset sets WDCS to 00H. After reset: 00H WDCS R/W Address: FFFFF6C1H 0 0 0 WDCS2 WDCS1 WDCS0 0 0 WDCS2 WDCS1 WDCS0 Overflow time of watchdog timer 1/interval timer fXW 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 MHz 5 MHz 10 MHz 13 2.048 ms 1.638 ms 0.819 ms 14 4.096 ms 3.277 ms 1.638 ms 15 2 /fXW 2 /fXW 0 1 0 2 /fXW 8.192 ms 6.554 ms 3.277 ms 0 1 1 216/fXW 1 1 0 0 0 1 16.38 ms 13.11 ms 6.554 ms 17 32.77 ms 26.21 ms 13.11 ms 18 65.54 ms 52.43 ms 26.2 ms 19 2 /fXW 2 /fXW 1 1 0 2 /fXW 131.1 ms 104.9 ms 52.43 ms 1 1 1 221/fXW 524.3 ms 419.4 ms 209.7 ms Remark fXW = fX: Watchdog timer 1 clock frequency User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 397 CHAPTER 12 WATCHDOG TIMER FUNCTIONS (2) Watchdog timer mode register 1 (WDTM1) This register sets the watchdog timer 1 operation mode and enables/disables count operations. This register is a special register that can be written only in a special sequence (refer to 3.4.7 Special registers). The WDTM1 register can be read or written in 8-bit or 1-bit units. Reset sets WDTM1 to 00H. Caution When the main clock is stopped and the CPU is operating on the subclock, do not access the WDTM1 register. For details, refer to 3.4.8 (1) (b). After reset: 00H R/W Address: FFFFF6C2H < > WDTM1 RUN1 0 0 WDTM14 WDTM13 0 0 0 Selection of operation mode of watchdog timer 1Note 1 RUN1 0 Stop counting 1 Clear counter and start counting WDTM14 WDTM13 Selection of operation mode of watchdog timer 1Note 2 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 Interval timer mode (Upon overflow, maskable interrupt INTWDTM1 is generated.) Watchdog timer mode 1Note 3 (Upon overflow, non-maskable interrupt INTWDT1 is generated.) Watchdog timer mode 2 (Upon overflow, reset operation WDTRES1 is started.) Notes 1. Once the RUN1 bit is set (to 1), it cannot be cleared (to 0) by software. Therefore, when counting is started, it cannot be stopped except reset. 2. Once the WDTM13 and WDTM14 bits are set (to 1), they cannot be cleared (to 0) by software and can be cleared only by reset. 3. For non-maskable interrupt servicing due to non-maskable interrupt request signal (INTWDT1), refer to 19.10 Cautions. 398 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 12 WATCHDOG TIMER FUNCTIONS 12.1.4 Operation (1) Operation as watchdog timer 1 Watchdog timer 1 operation to detect a program loop is selected by setting the WDTM1.WDTM14 bit to 1. The count clock (program loop detection time interval) of watchdog timer 1 can be selected using the WDCS.WDCS0 to WDCS.WDCS2 bits. The count operation is started by setting the WDTM1.RUN1 bit to 1. When, after the count operation is started, the RUN1 bit is again set to 1 within the set program loop detection time interval, watchdog timer 1 is cleared and the count operation starts again. If the program loop detection time is exceeded without RUN1 bit being set to 1, reset signal (WDTRES1) through the value of the WDTM1.WDTM13 bit or a non-maskable interrupt request signal (INTWDT1) is generated. The count operation of watchdog timer 1 stops in the STOP mode and IDLE mode. Set the RUN1 bit to 1 before the STOP mode or IDLE mode is entered in order to clear watchdog timer 1. Because watchdog timer 1 operates in the HALT mode, make sure that an overflow will not occur during HALT. Cautions 1. When the subclock is selected for the CPU clock, the count operation of watchdog timer 1 is stopped (the value of watchdog timer 1 is maintained). 2. For non-maskable interrupt servicing due to the INTWDT1 signal, refer to 19.10 Cautions. Table 12-2. Program Loop Detection Time of Watchdog Timer 1 Clock Program Loop Detection Time fXW = 4 MHz fXW = 5 MHz fXW = 10 MHz 13 2.048 ms 1.638 ms 0.819 ms 14 4.096 ms 3.277 ms 1.683 ms 15 8.192 ms 6.554 ms 3.277 ms 16 16.38 ms 13.11 ms 6.554 ms 17 32.77 ms 26.21 ms 13.11 ms 18 65.54 ms 52.43 ms 26.21 ms 19 131.1 ms 104.9 ms 52.43 ms 21 524.3 ms 419.4 ms 209.7 ms 2 /fXW 2 /fXW 2 /fXW 2 /fXW 2 /fXW 2 /fXW 2 /fXW 2 /fXW Remark fXW = fX: Watchdog timer 1 clock frequency User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 399 CHAPTER 12 WATCHDOG TIMER FUNCTIONS (2) Operation as interval timer Watchdog timer 1 can be made to operate as an interval timer that repeatedly generates interrupts using the count value set in advance as the interval, by clearing the WDTM1.WDTM14 bit to 0. When watchdog timer 1 operates as an interval timer, the interrupt mask flag (WDTMK) and priority specification flags (WDTPR0 to WDTPR2) of the WDTIC register are valid and maskable interrupt request signals (INTWDTM1) can be generated. The default priority of the INTWDTM1 signal is set to the highest level among the maskable interrupt request signals. The interval timer continues to operate in the HALT mode, but it stops operating in the STOP mode and the IDLE mode. Cautions 1. Once the WDTM14 bit is set to 1 (thereby selecting the watchdog timer 1 mode), the interval timer mode is not entered as long as reset is not performed. 2. When the subclock is selected for the CPU clock, the count operation of the watchdog timer 1 stops (the value of the watchdog timer is maintained). Table 12-3. Interval Time of Interval Timer Clock Interval Time fXW = 4 MHz fXW = 10 MHz 2.048 ms 1.638 ms 0.819 ms 14 4.096 ms 3.277 ms 1.638 ms 15 8.192 ms 6.554 ms 3.277 ms 16 16.38 ms 13.11 ms 6.554 ms 17 32.77 ms 26.21 ms 13.11 ms 18 65.54 ms 52.43 ms 26.21 ms 19 131.1 ms 104.9 ms 52.43 ms 21 524.3 ms 419.4 ms 209.7 ms 2 /fXW 2 /fXW 2 /fXW 2 /fXW 2 /fXW 2 /fXW 2 /fXW 2 /fXW Remark 400 fXW = 5 MHz 13 fXW = fX: Watchdog timer 1 clock frequency User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 12 WATCHDOG TIMER FUNCTIONS 12.2 Watchdog Timer 2 12.2.1 Functions Watchdog timer 2 has the following functions. * Default start watchdog timerNote 1 Reset mode: Reset operation upon overflow of watchdog timer 2 (generation of WDTRES2 signal) Non-maskable interrupt request mode: NMI operation upon overflow of watchdog timer 2 (generation of INTWDT2 signal)Note 2 * Input selectable from main clock and subclock as the source clock Notes 1. Watchdog timer 2 automatically starts in the reset mode following reset release. When watchdog timer 2 is not used, either stop its operation before reset is executed through this function, or clear once watchdog timer 2 and stop it within the next interval time. Also, write to the WDTM2 register for verification purposes only once, even if the default settings (reset mode, interval time: fXX/225) need not be changed. 2. For non-maskable interrupt servicing due to a non-maskable interrupt request signal (INTWDT2), refer to 19.10 Cautions. Figure 12-2. Block Diagram of Watchdog Timer 2 fXX/29 fXT Clock input controller fXX/218 to fXX/225 16-bit Selector counter or fXT/29 to fXT/216 2 Watchdog timer enable register (WDTE) 3 Clear 0 Output controller INTWDT2 WDTRES2 (internal reset signal) 3 WDM21 WDM20 WDCS24 WDCS23 WDCS22 WDCS21 WDCS20 Watchdog timer mode register 2 (WDTM2) Internal bus Remark fXX: Main clock frequency fXT: Subclock frequency INTWDT2: Non-maskable interrupt request signal through watchdog timer 2 WDTRES2: Watchdog timer 2 reset signal User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 401 CHAPTER 12 WATCHDOG TIMER FUNCTIONS 12.2.2 Configuration Watchdog timer 2 includes the following hardware. Table 12-4. Configuration of Watchdog Timer 2 Item Configuration Watchdog timer mode register 2 (WDTM2) Control register Watchdog timer enable register (WDTE) 12.2.3 Registers (1) Watchdog timer mode register 2 (WDTM2) This register sets the overflow time and operation clock of watchdog timer 2. The WDTM2 register can be read or written in 8-bit units. This register can be read any number of times, but it can be written only once following reset release. Reset sets WDTM2 to 67H. Caution When the main clock is stopped and the CPU is operating on the subclock, do not access the WDTM2 register. For details, refer to 3.4.8 (1) (b). After reset: 67H WDTM2 R/W Address: FFFFF6D0H 0 WDM21 WDM20 WDCS24 WDCS23 WDCS22 WDCS21 WDCS20 WDM21 WDM20 0 0 Stops operation 0 1 Non-maskable interrupt request mode (generation of INTWDT2) 1 - Reset mode (generation of WDTRES2) Selection of operation mode of watchdog timer 2 Cautions 1. To stop the operation of watchdog timer 2, write "1FH" to the WDTM2 register. 2. For details about bits WDCS0 to WDCS4, refer to Table 12-5 Watchdog Timer 2 Clock Selection. 3. If the WDTM2 register is written twice after a reset, an overflow signal is forcibly output. <R> 4. To intentionally generate an overflow signal, write data to the WDTM2 register only twice, or write a value other than "ACH" to the WDTE register only once. 402 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 12 WATCHDOG TIMER FUNCTIONS Table 12-5. Watchdog Timer 2 Clock Selection WDCS24 0 WDCS23 WDCS22 0 0 WDCS21 0 WDCS20 0 Selected Clock 16.4 ms 26.2 ms 26.2 ms 32.8 ms 52.4 ms 20 52.4 ms 65.5 ms 104.9 ms 21 104.9 ms 131.1 ms 209.7 ms 22 209.7 ms 262.1 ms 419.4 ms 23 419.4 ms 524.3 ms 838.9 ms 24 838.9 ms 1048.6 ms 1677.7 ms 25 1677.7 ms 2097.2 ms 3355.4 ms 9 15.625 ms (fXT = 32.768 kHz) 10 31.25 ms (fXT = 32.768 kHz) 11 62.5 ms (fXT = 32.768 kHz) 12 125 ms (fXT = 32.768 kHz) 13 250 ms (fXT = 32.768 kHz) 14 500 ms (fXT = 32.768 kHz) 15 1000 ms (fXT = 32.768 kHz) 16 2000 ms (fXT = 32.768 kHz) 0 0 0 1 2 /fXX 0 0 1 0 2 /fXX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 2 /fXX 2 /fXX 2 /fXX 2 /fXX 2 /fXX 2 /fXT 0 1 0 0 1 2 /fXT 0 1 0 1 0 2 /fXT 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 fXX = 10 MHz 13.1 ms 0 0 fXX = 16 MHz 19 2 /fXX 0 0 fXX = 20 MHz 18 2 /fXT 2 /fXT 2 /fXT 2 /fXT 0 1 1 1 1 2 /fXT 1 x x x x Operation stopped (2) Watchdog timer enable register (WDTE) The counter of watchdog timer 2 is cleared and counting restarted by writing "ACH" to the WDTE register. The WDTE register can be read or written in 8-bit units. Reset sets WDTE to 9AH. After reset: 9AH R/W Address: FFFFF6D1H WDTE Cautions 1. When a value other than "ACH" is written to the WDTE register, an overflow signal is forcibly output. 2. When a 1-bit memory manipulation instruction is executed for the WDTE register, an overflow signal is forcibly output. 3. The read value of the WDTE register is always "9AH" (value that differs from written value "ACH"). <R> 4. To intentionally generate an overflow signal, write a value other than "ACH" to the WDTE register only once, or write data to the WDTM2 register only twice. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 403 CHAPTER 12 WATCHDOG TIMER FUNCTIONS 12.2.4 Operation Watchdog timer 2 automatically starts in the reset mode following reset release. The WDTM2 register can be written to only once following reset through byte access. To use watchdog timer 2, write the operation mode and the interval time to the WDTM2 register using 8-bit memory manipulation instructions. After this is done, the operation of watchdog timer 2 cannot be stopped. The watchdog timer 2 program loop detection time interval can be selected by the WDTM2.WDCS24 to WDTM2.WDCS20 bits. Writing ACH to the WDTE register clears the counter of watchdog timer 2 and starts the count operation again. After the count operation starts, write ACH to the WDTE register within the set program loop detection time interval. If the program loop detection time is exceeded without ACH being written to the WDTE register, a reset signal (WDTRES2) or non-maskable interrupt request signal (INTWDT2) is generated depending on the set value of the WDTM2.WDM21 and WDTM2.WDM20 bits. To not use watchdog timer 2, write 1FH to the WDTM2 register. For non-maskable interrupt servicing when the non-maskable interrupt request mode is set, refer to 19.10 Cautions. If the main clock is selected as the source clock of watchdog timer 2, the watchdog timer stops operation in the IDLE/STOP mode. Therefore, clear watchdog timer 2 by writing ACH to the WDTE register before the IDLE/STOP mode is set. Because watchdog timer 2 operates in the HALT mode or when the subclock is selected as its source clock in the IDLE/STOP mode, exercise care that the timer does not overflow in the HALT mode. 404 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 13 REAL-TIME OUTPUT FUNCTION (RTO) 13.1 Function The real-time output function (RTO) transfers preset data to the RTBL0 and RTBH0 registers, and then transfers this data with hardware to an external device via the real-time output latches, upon occurrence of a timer interrupt. The pins through which the data is output to an external device constitute a port called a real-time output port. Because RTO can output signal without jitter, it is suitable for controlling a stepping motor. In the V850ES/KF1, a 6-bit real-time output port channel is provided. The real-time output port can be set in the port mode or real-time output port mode in 1-bit units. The block diagram of RTO is shown below. Internal bus Figure 13-1. Block Diagram of RTO Real-time buffer register 0H (RTBH0) Real-time output latch 0H 2 Real-time buffer register 0L (RTBL0) Real-time output latch 0L 4 RTPOUT04, RTPOUT05 RTPOUT00 to RTPOUT03 INTTM000 Transfer trigger (H) INTTM50 Selector INTTM51 Transfer trigger (L) 2 RTPOE0 RTPEG0 BYTE0 EXTR0 4 RTPM05 RTPM04 RTPM03 RTPM02 RTPM01 RTPM00 Real-time output port control Real-time output port mode register 0 (RTPC0) register 0 (RTPM0) User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 405 CHAPTER 13 REAL-TIME OUTPUT FUNCTION (RTO) 13.2 Configuration RTO includes the following hardware. Table 13-1. Configuration of RTO Item Configuration Registers Real-time output buffer register 0 (RTBL0, RTBH0) Control registers Real-time output port mode register 0 (RTPM0) Real-time output port control register 0 (RTPC0) (1) Real-time output buffer register 0 (RTBL0, RTBH0) RTBL0 and RTBH0 are 4-bit registers that hold output data in advance. These registers are mapped to independent addresses in the peripheral I/O register area. They can be read or written in 8-bit or 1-bit units. If an operation mode of 4 bits x 1 channel or 2 bits x 1 channel is specified (RTPC0.BYTE0 bit = 0), data can be individually set to the RTBL0 and RTBH0 registers. The data of both these registers can be read at once by specifying the address of either of these registers. If an operation mode of 6 bits x 1 channel is specified (BYTE0 bit = 1), 8-bit data can be set to both the RTBL0 and RTBH0 registers by writing the data to either of these registers. Moreover, the data of both these registers can be read at once by specifying the address of either of these registers. Table 13-2 shows the operation when the RTBL0 and RTBH0 registers are manipulated. After reset: 00H R/W Address: RTBL0 FFFFF6E0H, RTBH0 FFFFF6E2H RTBL0 RTBH0 RTBL03 0 0 RTBL02 RTBL01 RTBL00 RTBH05 RTBH04 Cautions 1. When writing to bits 6 and 7 of the RTBH0 register, always write 0. 2. When the main clock is stopped and the CPU is operating on the subclock, do not access the RTBL0 and RTBH0 registers. For details, refer to 3.4.8 (1) (b). Table 13-2. Operation During Manipulation of RTBL0 and RTBH0 Registers Operation Mode Register to Be Manipulated Read Higher 4 Bits Write Lower 4 Bits Higher 4 Bits Note Lower 4 Bits 4 bits x 1 channel, 2 bits x RTBL0 RTBH0 RTBL0 Invalid RTBL0 1 channel RTBH0 RTBH0 RTBL0 RTBH0 Invalid 6 bits x 1 channel RTBL0 RTBH0 RTBL0 RTBH0 RTBL0 RTBH0 RTBH0 RTBL0 RTBH0 RTBL0 Note After setting the real-time output port, set output data to the RTBL0 and RTBH0 registers by the time a realtime output trigger is generated. 406 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 13 REAL-TIME OUTPUT FUNCTION (RTO) 13.3 Registers RTO is controlled using the following two types of registers. * Real-time output port mode register 0 (RTPM0) * Real-time output port control register 0 (RTPC0) (1) Real-time output port mode register 0 (RTPM0) This register selects the real-time output port mode or port mode in 1-bit units. The RTPM0 register can be read or written in 8-bit or 1-bit units. Reset sets RTPM0 to 00H. After reset: 00H RTPM0 R/W 0 0 Address: FFFFF6E4H RTPM05 RTPM04 RTPM03 RTPM02 RTPM01 RTPM00 RTPM0m Control of real-time output port (m = 0 to 5) 0 Real-time output disabled 1 Real-time output enabled Cautions 1. To reflect real-time output signals (RTPOUT00 to RTPOUT05) to the pins (RTP00 to RTP05), set them to the real-time output port with the PMC5 and PFC5 registers. 2. By enabling real-time output operation (RTPC0.RTPOE0 bit = 1), the bits specified as real-time output enabled perform real-time output, and the bits specified as real-time output disabled output 0. 3. If real-time output is disabled (RTPOE0 bit = 0), real-time output signals (RTPOUT00 to RTPOUT05) all output 0, regardless of the RTPM0 register setting. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 407 CHAPTER 13 REAL-TIME OUTPUT FUNCTION (RTO) (2) Real-time output port control register 0 (RTPC0) This register sets the operation mode and output trigger of the real-time output port. The relationship between the operation mode and output trigger of the real-time output port is as shown in Table 13-3. The RTPC0 register can be read or written in 8-bit or 1-bit units. Reset sets RTPC0 to 00H. After reset: 00H R/W Address: FFFFF6E5H < > RTPC0 BYTE0 EXTR0Note 1 RTPOE0 RTPEG0 RTPOE0 0 0 0 Control of real-time output operation 0 Disables operation 1 Enables operation Note 2 RTPEG0 Valid edge of INTTM000 signal 0 Falling edge 1 Rising edge BYTE0 0 Note 3 Specification of channel configuration for real-time output 0 4 bits x 1 channel, 2 bits x 1 channel 1 6 bits x 1 channel Notes 1. For the EXTR0 bit, refer to Table 13-3. 2. When real-time output operation is disabled (RTPOE0 bit = 0), real-time output signals (RTPOUT00 to RTPOUT05) all output 0. 3. The INTTM000 signal is output for 1 clock of the count clock selected with 16-bit timer/event counter 00. Caution Perform the settings for the RTPEG0, BYTE0, and EXTR0 bits only when the RTPOE0 bit = 0. Table 13-3. Operation Modes and Output Triggers of Real-Time Output Port BYTE0 EXTR0 0 0 1 RTBH0 (RTP04, RTP05) RTBL0 (RTP00 to RTP03) 4 bits x 1 channel, 2 bits x 1 channel INTTM51 INTTM50 1 INTTM50 INTTM000 0 6 bits x 1 channel INTTM50 1 408 Operation Mode INTTM000 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 13 REAL-TIME OUTPUT FUNCTION (RTO) 13.4 Operation If the real-time output operation is enabled by setting the RTPC0.RTPOE0 bit to 1, the data of the RTBH0 and RTBL0 registers is transferred to the real-time output latch in synchronization with the generation of the selected transfer trigger (set by the RTPC0.EXTR0 and RTPC0.BYTE0 bits). Of the transferred data, only the data of the bits specified as real-time output enabled by the RTPM0 register is output from bits RTPOUT00 to RTPOUT05. The bits specified as real-time output disabled by the RTPM0 register output 0. If the real-time output operation is disabled by clearing the RTPOE0 bit to 0, the RTPOUT00 to RTPOUT05 signals output 0 regardless of the setting of the RTPM0 register. Figure 13-2. Example of Operation Timing of RTO0 (When EXTR0 and BYTE0 Bits = 00) INTTM51 (internal) INTTM50 (internal) CPU operation A B RTBH0 D01 RTBL0 RT output latch 0 (H) RT output latch 0 (L) A B D02 A B D03 D11 D13 D02 D11 B D04 D12 D01 A D14 D03 D12 D04 D13 D14 A: Software processing by INTTM51 interrupt request signal (write to RTBH0 register) B: Software processing by INTTM50 interrupt request signal (write to RTBL0 register) Remark For the operation during standby, refer to CHAPTER 21 STANDBY FUNCTION. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 409 CHAPTER 13 REAL-TIME OUTPUT FUNCTION (RTO) 13.5 Usage (1) Disable real-time output. Clear the RTPC0.RTPOE0 bit to 0. (2) Perform initialization as follows. * Specify the real-time output port mode or port mode in 1-bit units. Set the RTPM0 register. * Channel configuration: Select the trigger and valid edge. Set the RTPC0.EXTR0, RTPC0.BYTE0, and RTPC0.RTPEG0 bits. * Set the initial values to the RTBH0 and RTBL0 registersNote 1. (3) Enable real-time output. Set the RTPOE0 bit to 1. (4) Set the next output value to the RTBH0 and RTBL0 registers by the time the selected transfer trigger is generatedNote 2. (5) Set the next real-time output value to the RTBH0 and RTBL0 registers through interrupt servicing corresponding to the selected trigger. Notes 1. If write to the RTBH0 and RTBL0 registers is performed when the RTPOE0 bit = 0, that value is transferred to real-time output latches 0H and 0L, respectively. 2. Even if write is performed to the RTBH0 and RTBL0 registers when the RTPOE0 bit = 1, data transfer to real-time output latches 0H and 0L is not performed. Caution To reflect the real-time output signals (RTPOUT00 to RTPOUT05) to the pins, set the real-time output ports (RTP00 to RTP05) with the PMC5 and PFC5 registers. 13.6 Cautions (1) Prevent the following conflicts by software. * Conflict between real-time output disable/enable switching (RTPOE0 bit) and selected real-time output trigger * Conflict between write to the RTBH0 and RTBL0 registers in the real-time output enabled status and the selected real-time output trigger. (2) Before performing initialization, disable real-time output (RTPOE0 bit = 0). (3) Once real-time output has been disabled (RTPOE0 bit = 0), be sure to initialize the RTBH0 and RTBL0 registers before enabling real-time output again (RTPOE0 bit = 0 1). 410 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 13 REAL-TIME OUTPUT FUNCTION (RTO) 13.7 Security Function A circuit that sets the pin outputs to high impedance as a security function for when malfunctions of a stepping motor controlled by RTO occur is provided on chip. It forcibly resets the pins allocated to RTP00 to RTP05 via external interrupt INTP0 pin edge detection, placing them in the high-impedance state. The ports (P50 to P55 pins) placed in high impedance by INTP0Note 1 pin are initializedNote 2, so settings for these ports must be performed again. Notes 1. Regardless of the port settings, P50 to P55 pins are all placed in high impedance via the INTP0 pin. 2. The bits that are initialized are all the bits corresponding to P50 to P55 pins of the following registers. * P5 register * PM5 register * PMC5 register * PU5 register * PFC5 register * PF5 register The block diagram of the security function is shown below. Figure 13-3. Block Diagram of Security Function INTP0 Edge detection INTC EVDD R RTOST0 RTPOUT00 to RTPOUT05 RTP00 to RTP05 6 This function is set with the PLLCTL.RTOST0 bit. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 411 CHAPTER 13 REAL-TIME OUTPUT FUNCTION (RTO) (1) PLL control register (PLLCTL) The PLLCTL register is an 8-bit register that controls the RTO security function and PLL. This register can be read or written in 8-bit or 1-bit units. Reset sets PLLCTL to 01H. After reset: 01H R/W Address: FFFFF806H < > PLLCTL 0 0 RTOST0 0 0 0 < > < > Note RTOST0 SELPLL PLLONNote Control of RTP00 to RTP05 security function 0 INTP0 pin is not used as trigger for security function 1 INTP0 pin is used as trigger for security function Note For details on the SELPLL and PLLON bits, refer to CHAPTER 6 CLOCK GENERATION FUNCTION. Cautions 1. Before outputting a value to the real-time output ports (RTP00 to RTP05), select the INTP0 pin interrupt edge detection and then set the RTOST0 bit. 2. To set again the ports (P50 to P55 pins) as real-time output ports after placing them in high impedance via the INTP0 pin, first cancel the security function. [Procedure to set ports again] <1> Cancel the security function and enable port setting by clearing the RTOST0 bit to 0. <2> Set the RTOST0 bit to 1 (only if required). <3> Set again as real-time output port. 3. Be sure to clear bits 4 to 7 to "0". operation. 412 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD Changing bit 3 does not affect the CHAPTER 14 A/D CONVERTER 14.1 Function The A/D converter converts analog input signals into digital values with a resolution of 10 bits and has an 8channel (ANI0 to ANI7) configuration. The A/D converter has the following functions. (1) 10-bit resolution A/D conversion 1 analog input channel is selected from ANI0 to ANI7, and an A/D conversion operation with resolution of 10 bits is repeatedly executed. Every time A/D conversion is completed, an interrupt request signal (INTAD) is generated. (2) Power fail detection function This is a function to detect low voltage in a battery. The results of A/D conversion (the value in the ADCRH register) and the PFT register are compared, and INTAD signal is generated only when the comparison conditions match. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 413 CHAPTER 14 A/D CONVERTER 14.2 Configuration The A/D converter consists of the following hardware. Figure 14-1. Block Diagram of A/D Converter AVREF0 ADCS bit ANI0 ANI1 ANI2 ANI3 ANI4 ANI5 ANI6 ANI7 Selector Sample & hold circuit Tap selector Voltage comparator AVSS Successive approximation register (SAR) AVSS INTAD Controller Comparator 3 ADS2 ADS1 Analog input channel specification register (ADS) Power fail comparison threshold register (PFT) A/D conversion result register (ADCR/ADCRH) ADS0 ADCS FR2 FR1 FR0 ADCS2 PFEN PFCM Power fail comparison mode register (PFM) A/D converter mode register (ADM) Internal bus Table 14-1. Registers of A/D Converter Used by Software Item Registers Configuration A/D conversion result register (ADCR) A/D conversion result register H (ADCRH): Only higher 8 bits can be read Power fail comparison threshold register (PFT) A/D converter mode register (ADM) Analog input channel specification register (ADS) Power fail comparison mode register (PFM) 414 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 14 A/D CONVERTER (1) ANI0 to ANI7 pins These are analog input pins for the 8 channels of the A/D converter. They are used to input analog signals to be converted into digital signals. Pins other than those selected as analog input by the ADS register can be used as input ports. (2) Sample & hold circuit The sample & hold circuit samples the analog input signals selected by the input circuit and sends the sampled data to the voltage comparator. This circuit holds the sampled analog input voltage during A/D conversion. (3) Series resistor string The series resistor string is connected between AVREF0 and AVSS and generates a voltage for comparison with the analog input signal. (4) Voltage comparator The voltage comparator compares the value that is sampled and held with the output voltage of the series resistor string. (5) Successive approximation register (SAR) This register compares the sampled analog voltage value with the voltage value from the series resistor string, and converts the comparison result starting from the most significant bit (MSB). When the least significant bit (LSB) has been converted to a digital value (end of A/D conversion), the contents of the SAR register are transferred to the ADCR register. The SAR register cannot be read or written directly. (6) A/D conversion result register (ADCR), A/D conversion result register H (ADCRH) Each time A/D conversion ends, the conversion results are loaded from the successive approximation register and the results of A/D conversion are held in the higher 10 bits of this register (the lower 6 bits are fixed to 0). (7) Controller The controller compares the A/D conversion results (the value of the ADCRH register) with the value of the PFT register when A/D conversion ends or the power fail detection function is used. It generates INTAD signal only when the comparison conditions match. (8) AVREF0 pin This is the analog power supply pin/reference voltage input pin of the A/D converter. Always use the same potential as the VDD pin even when not using the A/D converter. The signals input to the ANI0 to ANI7 pins are converted into digital signals based on the voltage applied across AVREF0 and AVSS. (9) AVSS pin This is the ground potential pin of the A/D converter. Always use the same potential as the VSS pin even when not using the A/D converter. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 415 CHAPTER 14 A/D CONVERTER (10) A/D converter mode register (ADM) This register sets the conversion time of the analog input to be converted to a digital signal and the conversion operation start/stop. (11) Analog input channel specification register (ADS) This register specifies the input port for the analog voltage to be converted to a digital signal. (12) Power fail comparison mode register (PFM) This register sets the power fail monitoring mode. (13) Power fail comparison threshold register (PFT) This register sets the threshold to be compared with the ADCR register. 14.3 Registers The A/D converter is controlled by the following registers. * A/D converter mode register (ADM) * Analog input channel specification register (ADS) * Power fail comparison mode register (PFM) * Power fail comparison threshold register (PFT) * A/D conversion result register, A/D conversion result register H (ADCR, ADCRH) 416 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 14 A/D CONVERTER <R> (1) A/D converter mode register (ADM) This register sets the conversion time of the analog input signal to be converted into a digital signal as well as conversion start and stop. The ADM register can be read or written in 8-bit or 1-bit units. After reset, ADM is cleared to 00H. After reset: 00H R/W Address: FFFFF200H < > ADM < > 0 ADCS FR2 ADCS FR1 FR0 0 0 ADCS2 Control of A/D conversion operation 0 Conversion operation stopped 1 Conversion operation enabled Selection of conversion time FR2 FR1 FR0 fXX Conversion timeNote 1 10 MHz 20 MHz 16 MHz AVREF0 4.5 V AVREF0 4.0 V AVREF0 2.7 V 0 0 0 288/fXX 14.4 s 18.0 s 28.8 s Setting prohibited 15.0 s 24.0 s Setting prohibited Setting prohibited 19.2 s 0 0 1 240/fXX 0 1 0 192/fXX 0 1 1 Setting prohibited Setting prohibited Setting prohibited Setting prohibited 1 0 0 144/fXX Setting prohibited Setting prohibited 14.4 s 1 0 1 120/fXX Setting prohibited Setting prohibited Setting prohibited 1 1 0 96/fXX Setting prohibited Setting prohibited Setting prohibited 1 1 1 Setting prohibited Setting prohibited Setting prohibited Setting prohibited ADCS2 Control of reference voltage generator for boosting operationNote 2 0 Reference voltage generator operation stopped 1 Reference voltage generator operation enabled Notes 1. Set the conversion time (time actually required for A/D conversion) as follows. 4.0 V AVREF0 5.5 V: 14 to 100 s 2.7 V AVREF0 < 4.0 V: 17 to 100 s 2. The operation of the reference voltage generator for boosting is controlled by the ADCS2 bit and it takes 17 s (14 s when AVREF0 4.0 V) after operation is started until it is stabilized. Therefore the ADCS bit is set to 1 (A/D conversion is started) at least 17 s (14 s when AVREF0 4.0 V) after if the ADCS2 bit was set to 1 (reference voltage generator for boosting is on), the first conversion result is valid. Cautions 1. Be sure to clear bits 6, 2, and 1 to "0". 2. In the PD703211, 703211Y, 70F3210H, 70F3210HY, 70F3211H, and 70F3211HY, writing of the ADM register other than the ADCS bit is prohibited while the ADCS bit = 1. In V850ES/KF1 products other than the above, if the same value is written to the ADM register while the ADCS bit = 1, A/D conversion is stopped and restarted from the top again. Rewriting the FR2 to FR0 bits is prohibited while the ADCS bit = 1. 3. When the main clock is stopped and the CPU is operating on the subclock, do not access the ADM register using an access method that causes a wait. For details, refer to 3.4.8 (1) (b). Remark fXX: Main clock frequency User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 417 CHAPTER 14 A/D CONVERTER Table 14-2. Setting of ADCS Bit and ADCS2 Bit ADCS ADCS2 A/D Conversion Operation 0 0 Stopped status (DC power consumption path does not exist) 0 1 Conversion standby mode (only the reference voltage generator for boosting consumes power) 1 0 Conversion mode (reference voltage generator stops operation 1 1 Conversion mode (reference voltage generator is operating) Note ) Note The data obtained by the first conversion must not be used. Figure 14-2. Operation Sequence Reference voltage generator for boosting: Operating ADCS2 Comparator control Conversion operation Conversion standby Conversion operation Conversion stop ADCS Note Note 17 s (14 s when AVREF0 4.0 V) or more are required for the operation of the reference voltage generator for boosting between when the ADCS2 bit is set (1) and when the ADCS bit is set (1). 418 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 14 A/D CONVERTER (2) Analog input channel specification register (ADS) This register specifies the analog voltage input port for A/D conversion. The ADS register can be read or written in 8-bit units. After reset, ADS is cleared to 00H. After reset: 00H ADS R/W Address: FFFFF201H 0 0 0 0 ADS2 ADS1 ADS0 0 0 0 ANI0 0 0 1 ANI1 0 1 0 ANI2 0 1 1 ANI3 1 0 0 ANI4 1 0 1 ANI5 1 1 0 ANI6 1 1 1 ANI7 0 ADS2 ADS1 ADS0 Specification of analog input channel Cautions 1. Be sure to clear bits 3 to 7 to "0". 2. When the main clock is stopped and the CPU is operating on the subclock, do not access the ADS register using an access method that causes a wait. For details, refer to 3.4.8 (1) (b). <R> 3. Writing to the ADS register is prohibited during A/D conversion (ADM.ADCS bit = 1) (only in the PD703211, 703211Y, 70F3210H, 70F3210HY, 70F3211H, and 70F3211HY). User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 419 CHAPTER 14 A/D CONVERTER (3) A/D conversion result register, A/D conversion result register H (ADCR, ADCRH) The ADCR and ADCRH registers store the A/D conversion results. These registers are read-only in 16-bit or 8-bit units. However, specify the ADCR register for 16-bit access, and the ADCRH register for 8-bit access. In the ADCR register, the 10 bits of conversion results are read in the higher 10 bits and 0 is read in the lower 6 bits. In the ADCRH register, the higher 8 bits of the conversion results are read. After reset, these registers are undefined. After reset: Undefined ADCR R AD9 AD8 AD7 AD6 AD5 AD4 AD3 AD2 AD1 AD0 After reset: Undefined ADCRH Address: FFFFF204H R 0 0 0 0 0 0 Address: FFFFF205H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 AD9 AD8 AD7 AD6 AD5 AD4 AD3 AD2 Caution When the main clock is stopped and the CPU is operating on the subclock, do not access the ADCR and ADCRH registers using an access method that causes a wait. For details, refer to 3.4.8 (1) (b). 420 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 14 A/D CONVERTER The following shows the relationship between the analog input voltage input to the analog input pins (ANI0 to ANI7) and A/D conversion results (ADCR register). SAR = INT ( VIN AVREF0 x 1024 + 0.5) ADCRNote = SAR x 64 Or, (SAR - 0.5) x AVREF0 1024 VIN < (SAR + 0.5) x AVREF0 1024 INT ( ): Function that returns the integer part of the value in parentheses VIN: Analog input voltage AVREF0: Voltage of AVREF0 pin ADCR: Value in the ADCR register Note The lower 6 bits of the ADCR register are fixed to 0. The following shows the relationship between the analog input voltage and A/D conversion results. Figure 14-3. Relationship Between Analog Input Voltage and A/D Conversion Results ADCR SAR A/D conversion results 1023 FFC0H 1022 FF80H 1021 FF40H 3 00C0H 2 0080H 1 0040H 0 0000H 1 1 3 2 5 3 2048 1024 2048 1024 2048 1024 2043 1022 2045 1023 2047 1 2048 1024 2048 1024 2048 Input voltage/AVREF0 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 421 CHAPTER 14 A/D CONVERTER (4) Power fail compare mode register (PFM) This register sets the power fail monitoring mode. The PFM register compares the value in the PFT register with the value of the ADCRH register. The PFM register can be read or written in 8-bit or 1-bit units. After reset, PFM is cleared to 00H. After reset: 00H PFM R/W < > < > PFEN PFCM PFEN Address: FFFFF202H 0 0 0 0 0 0 Selection of power fail comparison enable/disable 0 Power fail comparison disabled 1 Power fail comparison enabled PFCM Selection of power fail comparison mode 0 Interrupt request signal (INTAD) generated when ADCR PFT 1 Interrupt request signal (INTAD) generated when ADCR < PFT Cautions 1. When the main clock is stopped and the CPU is operating on the subclock, do not access the PFM register using an access method that causes a wait. For details, refer to 3.4.8 (1) (b). <R> 2. Writing to the PFM register is prohibited during the A/D conversion (ADM.ADCS bit = 1) (only in the PD703211, 703211Y, 70F3210H, 70F3210HY, 70F3211H, and 70F3211HY). (5) Power fail compare threshold register (PFT) The PFT register sets the comparison value in the power fail compare mode. The 8-bit data set in the PFT register is compared with the value of the ADCRH register. The PFT register can be read or written in 8-bit units. After reset, PFT is cleared to 00H. After reset: 00H 7 R/W 6 Address: FFFFF203H 5 4 3 2 1 0 PFT Cautions 1. When the main clock is stopped and the CPU is operating on the subclock, do not access the PFT register using an access method that causes a wait. For details, refer to 3.4.8 (1) (b). <R> 2. Writing to the PFT register is prohibited during the A/D conversion (ADM.ADCS bit = 1) (only in the PD703211, 703211Y, 70F3210H, 70F3210HY, 70F3211H, and 70F3211HY). 422 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 14 A/D CONVERTER 14.4 Operation 14.4.1 Basic operation <1> Select the channel whose analog signal is to be converted into a digital signal using the ADS register. <2> Set (1) the ADM.ADCS2 bit and wait 17 s (14 s when AVREF0 4.0 V) or longer. <3> Set the ADM.ADCS bit to 1 to start A/D conversion. (Steps <4> to <10> are executed by hardware.) <4> The sample & hold circuit samples the voltage input to the selected analog input channel. <5> After sampling for a specific time, the sample & hold circuit enters the hold status and holds the input analog voltage until it has been converted into a digital signal. <6> Set bit 9 of the successive approximation register (SAR). The tap selector sets the voltage tap of the series resistor string to (1/2) x AVREF0. <7> The voltage comparator compares the voltage difference between the voltage tap of the series resistor string and the analog input voltage. If the analog input voltage is greater than (1/2) x AVREF0, the MSB of the SAR register remains set. If the analog input voltage is less than (1/2) x AVREF0, the MSB is reset. <8> Next, bit 8 of the SAR register is automatically set and the next comparison starts. Depending on the value of bit 9 to which the result of the preceding comparison has been set, the voltage tap of the series resistor string is selected as follows. * Bit 9 = 1: (3/4) x AVREF0 * Bit 9 = 0: (1/4) x AVREF0 The analog input voltage is compared with one of these voltage taps and bit 8 of the SAR register is manipulated as follows depending on the result of the comparison. Analog input voltage voltage tap: Bit 8 = 1 Analog input voltage voltage tap: Bit 8 = 0 <9> The above steps are repeated until bit 0 of the SAR register has been manipulated. <10> When comparison of all 10 bits of the SAR register has been completed, the valid digital value remains in the SAR register, and the value of the SAR register is transferred and latched to the ADCR register. At the same time, an A/D conversion end interrupt request signal (INTAD) is generated. <11> Repeat steps <4> to <10> until the ADCS bit is cleared to 0. For another A/D conversion, start at <3>. However, when operating the A/D converter with the ADCS2 bit cleared to 0, start at <2>. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 423 CHAPTER 14 A/D CONVERTER 14.4.2 A/D conversion operation * Setting the ADM.ADCS bit to 1 starts conversion of the signal input to the channel specified by the ADS register. Upon completion of the conversion, the conversion result is stored in the ADCR register and a new conversion starts. <R> * The writing operation to the ADM, ADS, PFT, and PFM registers during A/D conversion operation differs depending on the products, as shown below. PD703211, 703211Y, 70F3210H, Writing to the ADM, ADS, PFT, and PFM registers during A/D conversion is 70F3210HY, 70F3211H, 70F3211HY prohibited. PD703208, 703208Y, 703209, 703209Y, Writing to the ADM, ADS, PFT, and PFM registers during A/D conversion is 703210, 703210Y, 70F3210, 70F3210Y enabled, however A/D conversion is stopped and restarted from the top again. * If the ADCS bit is cleared to 0 during conversion, conversion is interrupted and the conversion operation is stopped. * For whether or not the conversion end interrupt request signal (INTAD) is generated, refer to 14.4.3. 14.4.3 Power fail monitoring function The conversion end interrupt request signal (INTAD) can be controlled as follows using the PFM and PFT registers. * If the PFM.PFEN bit = 0, the INTAD signal is generated each time conversion ends. * If the PFEN bit = 1 and the PFM.PFCM bit = 0, the conversion result and the value of the PFT register are compared when conversion ends, and the INTAD signal is output only if ADCRH PFT. * If the PFEN and PFCM bits = 1, the conversion result and the value of the PFT register are compared when conversion ends and the INTAD signal is output only if ADCRH < PFT. * Because, when the PFEN bit = 1, the conversion result is overwritten after the INTAD signal has been output, unless the conversion result is read by the time the next conversion ends, in some cases it may appear as if the actual operation differs from the operation described above (refer to Figure 14-4). Figure 14-4. Power Fail Monitoring Function (PFCM Bit = 0) Conversion operation ANI0 80H ADCRH PFT ANI0 ANI0 7FH ANI0 80H 80H INTAD Note Note If reading is not performed during this interval, the conversion result changes to the next conversion result. 424 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 14 A/D CONVERTER 14.4.4 Setting procedure The following describes how to set registers. * When using the A/D converter for A/D conversion <1> Set (1) the ADM.ADCS2 bit. <2> Select the channel and conversion time by setting the ADS.ADS2 to ADS.ADS0 bits and the ADM.FR2 to ADM.FR0 bits. <3> Set (1) the ADM.ADCS bit. <4> Transfer the A/D conversion data to the ADCR register. <5> An interrupt request signal (INTAD) is generated. <Changing the channel> <6> Change the channel by setting the ADS2 to ADS0 bits. <7> Transfer the A/D conversion data to the ADCR register. <8> An interrupt request signal (INTAD) is generated. <Ending A/D conversion> <9> Clear (0) the ADCS bit. <10> Clear (0) the ADCS2 bit. Cautions 1. The time taken from <1> to <3> must be 17 s (14 s when AVREF0 4.0 V) or longer. 2. Steps <1> and <2> may be reversed. 3. Step <1> may be omitted. However, if omitted, do not use the first conversion result after <3>. 4. The time taken from <4> to <7> is different from the conversion time set by the FR2 to FR0 bits. The time taken for <6> and <7> is the conversion time set by the FR2 to FR0 bits. * When using the A/D converter for the power fail function <1> Set (1) the PFM.PFEN bit. <2> Set the power fail comparison conditions by using the PFM.PFCM bit. <3> Set (1) the ADM.ADCS2 bit. <4> Select the channel and conversion time by setting the ADS.ADS2 to ADS.ADS0 bits and the ADM.FR2 to ADM.FR0 bits. <5> Set the threshold value in the PFT register. <6> Set (1) the ADM.ADCS bit. <7> Transfer the A/D conversion data to the ADCR register. <8> Compare the ADCR register with the PFT register. An interrupt request signal (INTAD) is generated when the conditions match. <Changing the channel> <9> Change the channel by setting the ADS2 to ADS0 bits. <10> Transfer the A/D conversion data to the ADCR register. <11> The ADCR register is compared with the PFT register. When the conditions match, an INTAD signal is generated. <Ending A/D conversion> <12> Clear (0) the ADCS bit. <13> Clear (0) the ADCS2 bit. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 425 CHAPTER 14 A/D CONVERTER 14.5 Cautions (1) Power consumption in standby mode The operation of the A/D converter stops in the standby mode. At this time, the power consumption can be reduced by stopping the conversion operation (the ADM.ADCS bit = 0) or stopping the reference voltage circuit (the ADM.ADCS2 bit = 0). Figure 14-5 shows an example of how to reduce the power consumption in the standby mode. Figure 14-5. Example of How to Reduce Power Consumption in Standby Mode <R> AVREF0 ADCS P-ch Series resistor string ADCS2 AVSS Reference voltage circuit (2) Input range of ANI0 to ANI7 pins Use the A/D converter with the ANI0 to ANI7 pin input voltages within the specified range. If a voltage of AVREF0 or higher or AVSS or lower (even if within the absolute maximum ratings) is input to these pins, the conversion value of the channel is undefined. Also, this may affect the conversion value of other channels. (3) Conflicting operations (a) Conflict between writing to the ADCR register and reading from ADCR register upon the end of conversion Reading the ADCR register takes precedence. After the register has been read, a new conversion result is written to the ADCR register. (b) Conflict between writing to the ADCR register and writing to the ADM register or writing to the ADS register upon the end of conversion Writing to the ADM register or ADS register takes precedence. The ADCR register is not written, and neither is the conversion end interrupt request signal (INTAD) generated. 426 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 14 A/D CONVERTER (4) Measures against noise To keep a resolution of 10 bits, be aware of noise on the AVREF0 and ANI0 to ANI7 pins. The higher the output impedance of the analog input source, the greater the effect of noise. Therefore, it is recommended to connect external capacitors as shown in Figure 14-6 to reduce noise. Figure 14-6. Handling of Analog Input Pins If noise of AVREF0 or higher or AVSS or lower could be generated, clamp with a diode with a small VF (0.3 V or lower). Reference voltage input AVREF0 ANI0 to ANI7 C 0.1 F AVSS VSS (5) ANI0/P70 to ANI7/P77 pins The analog input pins (ANI0 to ANI7) function alternately as input port pins (P70 to P77). When performing A/D conversion by selecting any of the ANI0 to ANI7 pins, do not execute an input instruction to port 7 during conversion. This may decrease the conversion resolution. If digital pulses are applied to the pin adjacent to the pin subject to A/D conversion, the value of the A/D conversion may differ from the expected value because of coupling noise. Therefore, do not apply pulses to the pin adjacent to the pin subject to A/D conversion. (6) Input impedance of AVREF0 pin A series resistor string of tens of k is connected between the AVREF0 pin and AVSS pin. Therefore, if the output impedance of the reference voltage source is high, this will result in a series connection to the series resistor string between the AVREF0 pin and AVSS pin, resulting in a large reference voltage error. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 427 CHAPTER 14 A/D CONVERTER (7) Interrupt request flag (ADIC.ADIF bit) Even when the ADS register is changed, the ADIF bit is not cleared (0). Therefore, if the analog input pin is changed during A/D conversion, the ADIF bit may be set (1) because A/D conversion of the previous analog input pin ends immediately before the ADS register is rewritten. In a such case, note that if the ADIF bit is read immediately after the ADS register has been rewritten, the ADIF bit is set (1) even though A/D conversion of the analog input pin after the change has not been completed. When stopping A/D conversion once and resuming it, clear the ADIF bit (0) before resuming A/D conversion. Figure 14-7. A/D Conversion End Interrupt Request Occurrence Timing ADS rewrite (ANIn conversion start) A/D conversion ADCR ANIn ADS rewrite (ANIm conversion start) ANIn ANIn ANIm ANIn ANIm conversion is not complete even though ADIF is set. ANIm ANIm ANIm INTAD Remark n = 0 to 7 m = 0 to 7 (8) Conversion results immediately after A/D conversion start If the ADM.ADCS bit is set to 1 within 17 s (14 s when AVREF0 4.0 V) after the ADM.ADCS2 bit has been set to 1, or if the ADCS bit is set to 1 with the ADCS2 bit cleared to 0, the converted value immediately after the A/D conversion operation has started may not satisfy the rating. Take appropriate measures such as polling the A/D conversion end interrupt request signal (INTAD) and discarding the first conversion result. (9) Reading A/D conversion result register (ADCR) When the ADM or ADS register has been written, the contents of the ADCR register may become undefined. When the conversion operation is complete, read the conversion results before writing to the ADM or ADS register. A correct conversion result may not be able to be read at a timing other than the above. When the CPU is operating on the subclock and main clock oscillation (fX) is stopped, do not read the ADCR register. 428 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 14 A/D CONVERTER (10) A/D converter sampling time and A/D conversion start delay time The A/D converter sampling time differs depending on the set value of the ADM register. A delay time exists until actual sampling is started after A/D converter operation is enabled. When using a set in which the A/D conversion time must be strictly observed, care is required for the contents shown in Figure 14-8 and Table 14-3. Figure 14-8. Timing of A/D Converter Sampling and A/D Conversion Start Delay ADCS 1 or ADS rewrite ADCS Sampling timing INTAD Wait period Sampling A/D time conversion start delay time Sampling time Conversion time Conversion time Table 14-3. A/D Converter Sampling Time and A/D Conversion Start Delay Time (ADM Register Set Value) FR2 FR1 FR0 Conversion Time Sampling Time A/D Conversion Start Delay Time Note 2 MIN. Note 1 Note 3 MAX. MIN. MAX. 0 0 0 288/fXX 40/fXX 32/fXX 36/fXX 11/fXX 12/fXX 0 0 1 240/fXX 32/fXX 28/fXX 32/fXX 11/fXX 12/fXX 0 1 0 192/fXX 24/fXX 24/fXX 28/fXX 10/fXX 11/fXX 1 0 0 144/fXX 20/fXX 16/fXX 18/fXX 9/fXX 10/fXX 1 0 1 120/fXX 16/fXX 14/fXX 16/fXX 9/fXX 10/fXX 1 1 0 96/fXX 12/fXX 12/fXX 14/fXX 11/fXX 12/fXX Other than above Setting prohibited - - - - - Notes 1. The A/D conversion start delay time is the time after the wait period. For the wait function, refer to 3.4.8 (1) (b) Access to special on-chip peripheral I/O register. 2. PD703208, 703208Y, 703209, 703209Y, 703210, 703210Y, 70F3210, 70F3210Y 3. PD703211, 703211Y, 70F3210H, 70F3210HY, 70F3211H, 70F3211HY Remark fXX: Main clock frequency User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 429 CHAPTER 14 A/D CONVERTER (11) Internal equivalent circuit The following shows the equivalent circuit of the analog input block. Figure 14-9. Internal Equivalent Circuit of ANIn Pin RIN ANIn COUT CIN * PD703211, 703211Y, 70F3210H, 70F3210HY, 70F3211H, 70F3211HY AVREF0 RIN COUT CIN 4.5 V 3 k 8 pF 15 pF 2.7 V 60 k 8 pF 15 pF * PD703208, 703208Y, 703209, 703209Y, 703210, 703210Y, 70F3210, 70F3210Y AVREF0 RIN COUT CIN 4.5 V 6.7 k 8 pF 3.4 pF 2.7 V 20 k 8 pF 5 pF Remarks 1. The above values are reference values. 2. n = 0 to 7 <R> (12) Variation of A/D conversion results The results of the A/D conversion may vary depending on the fluctuation of the supply voltage, or may be affected by noise. To reduce the variation, take counteractive measures with the program such as averaging the A/D conversion results. <R> (13) A/D conversion result hysteresis characteristics The successive approximation type A/D converter holds the analog input voltage in the internal sample & hold capacitor and then performs A/D conversion. After the A/D conversion has finished, the analog input voltage remains in the internal sample & hold capacitor. As a result, the following phenomena may occur. * When the same channel is used for A/D conversions, if the voltage is higher or lower than the previous A/D conversion, then hysteresis characteristics may appear where the conversion result is affected by the previous value. Thus, even if the conversion is performed at the same potential, the result may vary. * When switching the analog input channel, hysteresis characteristics may appear where the conversion result is affected by the previous channel value. This is because one A/D converter is used for the A/D conversions. Thus, even if the conversion is performed at the same potential, the result may vary. Therefore, to obtain more accurate conversion result, perform A/D conversion twice successively for the same channel, and discard the first conversion result. 430 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 14 A/D CONVERTER <R> (14) Writing to register during A/D conversion The writing operation to the ADM, ADS, PFT, and PFM registers during A/D conversion (ADM.ADCS = 1) differs depending on the products, as shown below. PD703211, 703211Y, 70F3210H, Writing to the ADM, ADS, PFT, and PFM registers during A/D conversion is 70F3210HY, 70F3211H, 70F3211HY prohibited. PD703208, 703208Y, 703209, 703209Y, Writing to the ADM, ADS, PFT, and PFM registers during A/D conversion is 703210, 703210Y, 70F3210, 70F3210Y enabled, however A/D conversion is stopped and restarted from the top again. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 431 CHAPTER 14 A/D CONVERTER 14.6 How to Read A/D Converter Characteristics Table Here, special terms unique to the A/D converter are explained. (1) Resolution This is the minimum analog input voltage that can be identified. That is, the percentage of the analog input voltage per bit of digital output is called 1 LSB (Least Significant Bit). The percentage of 1 LSB with respect to the full scale is expressed by %FSR (Full Scale Range). %FSR indicates the ratio of analog input voltage that can be converted as a percentage, and is always represented by the following formula regardless of the resolution. 1 %FSR = (Max. value of analog input voltage that can be converted - Min. value of analog input voltage that can be converted)/100 = (AVREF0 - 0)/100 = AVREF0/100 1 LSB is as follows when the resolution is 10 bits. 1 LSB = 1/210 = 1/1024 = 0.098%FSR Accuracy has no relation to resolution, but is determined by overall error. (2) Overall error This shows the maximum error value between the actual measured value and the theoretical value. Zero-scale error, full-scale error, linearity error and errors that are combinations of these express the overall error. Note that the quantization error is not included in the overall error in the characteristics table. Figure 14-10. Overall Error 1......1 Digital output Ideal line Overall error 0......0 AVREF0 0 Analog input 432 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 14 A/D CONVERTER (3) Quantization error When analog values are converted to digital values, a 1/2 LSB error naturally occurs. In an A/D converter, an analog input voltage in a range of 1/2 LSB is converted to the same digital code, so a quantization error cannot be avoided. Note that the quantization error is not included in the overall error, zero-scale error, full-scale error, integral linearity error, and differential linearity error in the characteristics table. Figure 14-11. Quantization Error Digital output 1......1 Quantization error 1/2 LSB 1/2 LSB 0......0 0 AVREF0 Analog input (4) Zero-scale error This shows the difference between the actual measurement value of the analog input voltage and the theoretical value (1/2 LSB) when the digital output changes from 0......000 to 0......001. Figure 14-12. Zero-Scale Error Digital output (Lower 3 bits) 111 Ideal line 100 Zero-scale error 011 010 001 000 -1 0 1 2 3 AVREF0 Analog input (LSB) User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 433 CHAPTER 14 A/D CONVERTER (5) Full-scale error This shows the difference between the actual measurement value of the analog input voltage and the theoretical value (full scale - 3/2 LSB) when the digital output changes from 1......110 to 1......111. Figure 14-13. Full-Scale Error Digital output (Lower 3 bits) Full-scale error 111 100 011 010 000 AVREF0-3 AVREF0-2 AVREF0-1 AVREF0 0 Analog input (LSB) (6) Differential linearity error While the ideal width of code output is 1 LSB, this indicates the difference between the actual measurement value and the ideal value. This indicates the basic characteristics of the A/D conversion when the voltage applied to the analog input pins of the same channel is consistently increased bit by bit from AVSS to AVREF0. When the input voltage is increased or decreased, or when two or more channels are used, refer to 14.6 (2) Overall error. Figure 14-14. Differential Linearity Error 1......1 Digital output Ideal 1 LSB width Differential linearity error 0......0 AVREF0 0 Analog input 434 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 14 A/D CONVERTER (7) Integral linearity error This shows the degree to which the conversion characteristics deviate from the ideal linear relationship. It expresses the maximum value of the difference between the actual measurement value and the ideal straight line when the zero-scale error and full-scale error are 0. Figure 14-15. Integral Linearity Error 1......1 Digital output Ideal line Integral linearity error 0......0 AVREF0 0 Analog input (8) Conversion time This expresses the time from when the analog input voltage was applied to the time when the digital output was obtained. The sampling time is included in the conversion time in the characteristics table. (9) Sampling time This is the time the analog switch is turned on for the analog voltage to be sampled by the sample & hold circuit. Figure 14-16. Sampling Time Sampling time Conversion time User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 435 CHAPTER 15 ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL INTERFACE (UART) In the V850ES/KF1, two channels of asynchronous serial interface (UART) are provided. 15.1 Features * Maximum transfer speed: 312.5 kbps * Full-duplex communications On-chip RXBn register On-chip TXBn register * Two-pin configurationNote TXDn: Transmit data output pin RXDn: Receive data input pin * Reception error detection functions * Parity error * Framing error * Overrun error * Interrupt sources: 3 types * Reception error interrupt request signal (INTSREn): Interrupt is generated according to the logical * Reception completion interrupt request signal (INTSRn): Interrupt is generated when receive data is OR of the three types of reception errors transferred from the receive shift register to the RXBn register after serial transfer is completed during a reception enabled state * Transmission completion interrupt request signal (INTSTn): Interrupt is generated when the serial transmission of transmit data (8 or 7 bits) from the transmit shift register is completed * Character length: 7 or 8 bits * Parity functions: Odd, even, 0, or none * Transmission stop bits: 1 or 2 bits * On-chip dedicated baud rate generator Note The ASCK0 pin (external clock input) is available only for UART0. 436 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 15 ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL INTERFACE (UART) 15.2 Configuration Table 15-1. Configuration of UARTn Item Registers Configuration Receive buffer register n (RXBn) Transmit buffer register n (TXBn) Receive shift register Transmit shift register Asynchronous serial interface mode register n (ASIMM) Asynchronous serial interface status register n (ASISn) Asynchronous serial interface transmit status register n (ASIFn) Other Reception control parity check Addition of transmission control parity Remark n = 0, 1 Figure 15-1 shows the configuration of UARTn. (1) Asynchronous serial interface mode register n (ASIMn) The ASIMn register is an 8-bit register for specifying the operation of UARTn. (2) Asynchronous serial interface status register n (ASISn) The ASISn register consists of a set of flags that indicate the error contents when a reception error occurs. The various reception error flags are set (1) when a reception error occurs and are cleared (0) when the ASISn register is read. (3) Asynchronous serial interface transmit status register n (ASIFn) The ASIFn register is an 8-bit register that indicates the status when a transmit operation is performed. This register consists of a transmit buffer data flag, which indicates the hold status of the TXBn register data, and the transmit shift register data flag, which indicates whether transmission is in progress. (4) Reception control parity check The receive operation is controlled according to the contents set in the ASIMn register. A check for parity errors is also performed during a receive operation, and if an error is detected, a value corresponding to the error contents is set in the ASISn register. (5) Receive shift register This is a shift register that converts the serial data that was input to the RXDn pin to parallel data. One byte of data is received, and if a stop bit is detected, the receive data is transferred to the RXBn register. This register cannot be directly manipulated. (6) Receive buffer register n (RXBn) The RXBn register is an 8-bit buffer register for holding receive data. When 7 characters are received, 0 is stored in the MSB. During a reception enabled state, receive data is transferred from the receive shift register to the RXBn register, synchronized with the end of the shift-in processing of one frame. Also, the reception completion interrupt request signal (INTSRn) is generated by the transfer of data to the RXBn register. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 437 CHAPTER 15 ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL INTERFACE (UART) (7) Transmit shift register This is a shift register that converts the parallel data that was transferred from the TXBn register to serial data. When one byte of data is transferred from the TXBn register, the shift register data is output from the TXDn pin. The transmission completion interrupt request signal (INTSTn) is generated synchronized with the completion of transmission of one frame. This register cannot be directly manipulated. (8) Transmit buffer register n (TXBn) The TXBn register is an 8-bit buffer for transmit data. A transmit operation is started by writing transmit data to the TXBn register. (9) Addition of transmission control parity A transmit operation is controlled by adding a start bit, parity bit, or stop bit to the data that is written to the TXBn register, according to the contents that were set in the ASIMn register. Figure 15-1. Block Diagram of UARTn Internal bus Asynchronous serial interface mode register n (ASIMn) RXDn Receive buffer register n (RXBn) Transmit buffer register n (TXBn) Receive shift register Transmit shift register Reception control parity check Addition of transmission control parity TXDn INTSTn INTSRn Parity Framing Overrun INTSREn Baud rate generator n Remark 438 For the configuration of the baud rate generator, refer to Figure 15-12. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 15 ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL INTERFACE (UART) 15.3 Registers (1) Asynchronous serial interface mode register n (ASIMn) The ASIMn register is an 8-bit register that controls the UARTn transfer operation. This register can be read or written in 8-bit or 1-bit units. Reset sets this register to 01H. Cautions 1. When using UARTn, be sure to set the external pins related to UARTn functions to the control made before setting the CKSRn and BRGCn registers, and then set the UARTEn bit to 1. Then set the other bits. 2. Set the UARTEn and RXEn bits to 1 while a high level is input to the RXDn pin. If these bits are set to 1 while a low level is input to the RXDn pin, reception will be started. (1/2) After reset: 01H ASIMn R/W Address: ASIM0 FFFFFA00H, ASIM1 FFFFFA10H <7> <6> <5> 4 3 2 1 0 UARTEn TXEn RXEn PSn1 PSn0 CLn SLn ISRMn (n = 0, 1) Control of operating clock UARTEn 0 Stop clock supply to UARTn. 1 Supply clock to UARTn. * If the UARTEn bit is cleared to 0, UARTn is asynchronously reset Note . * If the UARTEn bit = 0, UARTn is reset. To operate UARTn, first set the UARTEn bit to 1. * If the UARTEn bit is cleared from 1 to 0, all the registers of UARTn are initialized. To set the UARTEn bit to 1 again, be sure to re-set the registers of UARTn. The output of the TXDn pin goes high when transmission is disabled, regardless of the setting of the UARTEn bit. Transmission enable/disable TXEn 0 Disable transmission 1 Enable transmission * Set the TXEn bit to 1 after setting the UARTEn bit to 1 at startup. Clear the UARTEn bit to 0 after clearing the TXEn bit to 0 to stop. * To initialize the transmission unit, clear (0) the TXEn bit, and after letting 2 Clock cycles (base clock) elapse, set (1) the TXEn bit again. If the TXEn bit is not set again, initialization may not be successful. (For details about the base clock, refer to 15.6.1 (1) Base clock.) Note The ASISn, ASIFn, and RXBn registers are reset. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 439 CHAPTER 15 ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL INTERFACE (UART) (2/2) Reception enable/disable RXEn Note 0 Disable reception 1 Enable reception * Set the RXEn bit to 1 after setting the UARTEn bit to 1 at startup. Clear the UARTEn bit to 0 after clearing the RXEn bit to 0 to stop. * To initialize the reception unit status, clear (0) the RXEn bit, and after letting 2 Clock cycles (base clock) elapse, set (1) the RXEn bit again. If the RXEn bit is not set again, initialization may not be successful. (For details about the base clock, refer to 15.6.1 (1) Base clock.) PSn1 PSn0 Transmit operation Receive operation 0 0 Don't output parity bit Receive with no parity 0 1 Output 0 parity Receive as 0 parity 1 0 Output odd parity Judge as odd parity 1 1 Output even parity Judge as even parity * To overwrite the PSn1 and PSn0 bits, first clear (0) the TXEn and RXEn bits. * If "0 parity" is selected for reception, no parity judgment is performed. Therefore, no error interrupt is generated because the ASISn.PEn bit is not set. CLn Specification of character length of 1 frame of transmit/receive data 0 7 bits 1 8 bits * To overwrite the CLn bit, first clear (0) the TXEn and RXEn bits. SLn Specification of stop bit length of transmit data 0 1 bit 1 2 bits * To overwrite the SLn bit, first clear (0) the TXEn bit. * Since reception is always done with a stop bit length of 1, the SLn bit setting does not affect receive operations. ISRMn 0 Enable/disable of generation of reception completion interrupt request signals when an error occurs Generate a reception error interrupt request signal (INTSREn) as an interrupt when an error occurs. In this case, no reception completion interrupt request signal (INTSRn) is generated. 1 Generate a reception completion interrupt request signal (INTSRn) as an interrupt when an error occurs. In this case, no reception error interrupt request signal (INTSREn) is generated. * To overwrite the ISRMn bit, first clear (0) the RXEn bit. Note When reception is disabled, the receive shift register does not detect a start bit. No shift-in processing or transfer processing to the RXBn register is performed, and the contents of the RXBn register are retained. When reception is enabled, the receive shift operation starts, synchronized with the detection of the start bit, and when the reception of one frame is completed, the contents of the receive shift register are transferred to the RXBn register. A reception completion interrupt request signal (INTSRn) is also generated in synchronization with the transfer to the RXBn register. 440 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 15 ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL INTERFACE (UART) (2) Asynchronous serial interface status register n (ASISn) The ASISn register, which consists of 3 error flag bits (PEn, FEn and OVEn), indicates the error status when UARTn reception is complete. The ASISn register is cleared to 00H by a read operation. When a reception error occurs, the RXBn register should be read and the error flag should be cleared after the ASISn register is read. This register is read-only in 8-bit units. Reset sets this register to 00H. Cautions 1. When the ASIMn.UARTEn bit or ASIMn.RXEn bit is cleared to 0, or when the ASISn register is read, the PEn, FEn, and OVEn bits are cleared (0). 2. Operation using a bit manipulation instruction is prohibited. 3. When the main clock is stopped and the CPU is operating on the subclock, do not access the ASISn register. For details, refer to 3.4.8 (1) (b). After reset: 00H ASISn R Address: ASIS0 FFFFFA03H, ASIS1 FFFFFA13H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 PEn FEn OVEn (n = 0, 1) Status flag indicating a parity error PEn 0 When the UARTEn or RXEn bit is cleared to 0, or after the ASISn register has been read 1 When reception was completed, the receive data parity did not match the parity bit * The operation of the PEn bit differs according to the settings of the ASIMn.PSn1 and ASIMn.PSn0 bits. Status flag indicating framing error FEn 0 When the UARTEn or RXEn bit is cleared to 0, or after the ASISn register has been read 1 When reception was completed, no stop bit was detected * For receive data stop bits, only the first bit is checked regardless of the stop bit length. Status flag indicating an overrun error OVEn 0 When the UARTEn or RXEn bit is cleared to 0, or after the ASISn register has been read. 1 UARTn completed the next receive operation before reading receive data of the RXBn register. * When an overrun error occurs, the next receive data value is not written to the RXBn register and the data is discarded. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 441 CHAPTER 15 ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL INTERFACE (UART) (3) Asynchronous serial interface transmit status register n (ASIFn) The ASIFn register, which consists of 2 status flag bits, indicates the status during transmission. By writing the next data to the TXBn register after data is transferred from the TXBn register to the transmit shift register, transmit operations can be performed continuously without suspension even during an interrupt interval. When transmission is performed continuously, data should be written after referencing the TXBFn bit to prevent writing to the TXBn register by mistake. This register is read-only in 8-bit or 1-bit units. Reset sets this register to 00H. After reset: 00H ASIFn R Address: ASIF0 FFFFFA05H, ASIF1 FFFFFA15H 7 6 5 4 3 2 <1> <0> 0 0 0 0 0 0 TXBFn TXSFn (n = 0, 1) TXBFn Transmission buffer data flag 0 Data to be transferred next to TXBn register does not exist (When the ASIMn.UARTEn or ASIMn.TXEn bit is cleared to 0, or when data has been transferred to the transmission shift register) 1 Data to be transferred next exists in TXBn register (Data exists in TXBn register when the TXBn register has been written to) * When transmission is performed continuously, data should be written to the TXBn register after confirming that this flag is 0. If writing to TXBn register is performed when this flag is 1, transmit data cannot be guaranteed. TXSFn 0 Transmit shift register data flag (indicates the transmission status of UARTn) Initial status or a waiting transmission (When the UARTEn or TXEn bit is cleared to 0, or when following transmission completion, the next data transfer from the TXBn register is not performed) 1 Transmission in progress (When data has been transferred from the TXBn register) * When the transmission unit is initialized, initialization should be executed after confirming that this flag is 0 following the occurrence of a transmission completion interrupt request signal (INTSTn). performed when this flag is 1, transmit data cannot be guaranteed. 442 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD If initialization is CHAPTER 15 ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL INTERFACE (UART) (4) Receive buffer register n (RXBn) The RXBn register is an 8-bit buffer register for storing parallel data that had been converted by the receive shift register. When reception is enabled (ASIMn.RXEn bit = 1), receive data is transferred from the receive shift register to the RXBn register, synchronized with the completion of the shift-in processing of one frame. Also, a reception completion interrupt request signal (INTSRn) is generated by the transfer to the RXBn register. For information about the timing for generating this interrupt request, refer to 15.5.4 Receive operation. If reception is disabled (ASIMn.RXEn bit = 0), the contents of the RXBn register are retained, and no processing is performed for transferring data to the RXBn register even when the shift-in processing of one frame is completed. Also, the INTSRn signal is not generated. When 7 bits is specified for the data length, bits 6 to 0 of the RXBn register are transferred for the receive data and the MSB (bit 7) is always 0. However, if an overrun error (ASISn.OVEn bit = 1) occurs, the receive data at that time is not transferred to the RXBn register. The RXBn register becomes FFH when a reset is input or ASIMn.UARTEn bit = 0. This register is read-only in 8-bit units. After reset: FFH RXBn R Address: RXB0 FFFFFA02H, RXB1 FFFFFA12H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 RXBn7 RXBn6 RXBn5 RXBn4 RXBn3 RXBn2 RXBn1 RXBn0 (n = 0, 1) User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 443 CHAPTER 15 ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL INTERFACE (UART) (5) Transmit buffer register n (TXBn) The TXBn register is an 8-bit buffer register for setting transmit data. When transmission is enabled (ASIMn.TXEn bit = 1), the transmit operation is started by writing data to TXBn register. When transmission is disabled (TXEn bit = 0), even if data is written to TXBn register, the value is ignored. The TXBn register data is transferred to the transmit shift register, and a transmission completion interrupt request signal (INTSTn) is generated, synchronized with the completion of the transmission of one frame from the transmit shift register. For information about the timing for generating this interrupt request, refer to 15.5.2 Transmit operation. When ASIFn.TXBFn bit = 1, writing must not be performed to TXBn register. This register can be read or written in 8-bit units. Reset sets this register to FFH. After reset: FFH TXBn R/W Address: TXB0 FFFFFA04H, TXB1 FFFFFA14H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TXBn7 TXBn6 TXBn5 TXBn4 TXBn3 TXBn2 TXBn1 TXBn0 (n = 0, 1) 444 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 15 ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL INTERFACE (UART) 15.4 Interrupt Requests The following three types of interrupt request signals are generated from UARTn. * Reception error interrupt request signal (INTSREn) * Reception completion interrupt request signal (INTSRn) * Transmission completion interrupt request signal (INTSTn) The default priorities among these three types of interrupt request signals are, from high to low, reception error interrupt, reception completion interrupt, and transmission completion interrupt. Table 15-2. Generated Interrupt Request Signals and Default Priorities Interrupt Request Signal Priority Reception error interrupt request signal (INTSREn) 1 Reception completion interrupt request signal (INTSRn) 2 Transmission completion interrupt request signal (INTSTn) 3 (1) Reception error interrupt request signal (INTSREn) When reception is enabled, the INTSREn signal is generated according to the logical OR of the three types of reception errors explained for the ASISn register. Whether the INTSREn signal or the INTSRn signal is generated when an error occurs can be specified according to the ASIMn.ISRMn bit. When reception is disabled, the INTSREn signal is not generated. (2) Reception completion interrupt request signal (INTSRn) When reception is enabled, the INTSRn signal is generated when data is shifted in to the receive shift register and transferred to the RXBn register. The INTSRn signal can be generated in place of the INTSREn signal according to the ASIMn.ISRMn bit even when a reception error has occurred. When reception is disabled, the INTSRn signal is not generated. (3) Transmission completion interrupt request signal (INTSTn) The INTSTn signal is generated when one frame of transmit data containing 7-bit or 8-bit characters is shifted out from the transmit shift register. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 445 CHAPTER 15 ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL INTERFACE (UART) 15.5 Operation 15.5.1 Data format Full-duplex serial data transmission and reception can be performed. The transmit/receive data format consists of one data frame containing a start bit, character bits, a parity bit, and stop bits as shown in Figure 15-2. The character bit length within one data frame, the type of parity, and the stop bit length are specified according to the ASIMn register. Also, data is transferred LSB first. Figure 15-2. Format of UARTn Transmit/Receive Data 1 data frame Start bit D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 Character bits * Start bit *** 1 bit * Character bits *** 7 bits or 8 bits * Parity bit *** Even parity, odd parity, 0 parity, or no parity * Stop bits *** 1 bit or 2 bits 446 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD D7 Parity bit Stop bits CHAPTER 15 ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL INTERFACE (UART) 15.5.2 Transmit operation When the ASIMn.UARTEn bit is set to 1, a high level is output from the TXDn pin. Then, when the ASIMn.TXEn bit is set to 1, transmission is enabled, and the transmit operation is started by writing transmit data to the TXBn register. (1) Transmission enabled state This state is set by the TXEn bit. * TXEn bit = 1: Transmission enabled state * TXEn bit = 0: Transmission disabled state Since UARTn does not have a CTS (transmission enabled signal) input pin, a port should be used to confirm whether the destination is in a reception enabled state. (2) Starting a transmit operation In the transmission enabled state, a transmit operation is started by writing transmit data to the TXBn register. When a transmit operation is started, the data in the TXBn register is transferred to the transmit shift register. Then, the transmit shift register outputs data to the TXDn pin (the transmit data is transferred sequentially starting with the start bit). The start bit, parity bit, and stop bits are added automatically. (3) Transmission interrupt When the transmit shift register becomes empty, a transmission completion interrupt request signal (INTSTn) is generated. The timing for generating the INTSTn signal differs according to the specification of the stop bit length. The INTSTn signal is generated at the same time that the last stop bit is output. If the data to be transmitted next has not been written to the TXBn register, the transmit operation is suspended. Caution Normally, when the transmit shift register becomes empty, the INTSTn signal is generated. However, the INTSTn signal is not generated if the transmit shift register becomes empty due to reset. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 447 CHAPTER 15 ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL INTERFACE (UART) Figure 15-3. UARTn Transmission Completion Interrupt Timing (a) Stop bit length: 1 TXDn (output) Start D0 D1 D2 D6 D7 Parity D6 D7 Parity Stop INTSTn (output) (b) Stop bit length: 2 TXDn (output) Start D0 D1 D2 INTSTn (output) 448 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD Stop CHAPTER 15 ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL INTERFACE (UART) 15.5.3 Continuous transmission operation UARTn can write the next transmit data to the TXBn register at the timing that the transmit shift register starts the shift operation. This enables an efficient transmission rate to be realized by continuously transmitting data even during the transmission completion interrupt service after the transmission of one data frame. In addition, reading the ASIFn.TXSFn bit after the occurrence of a transmission completion interrupt request signal (INTSTn) enables the TXBn register to be efficiently written twice (2 bytes) without waiting for the transmission of 1 data frame. When continuous transmission is performed, data should be written after referencing the ASIFn register to confirm the transmission status and whether or not data can be written to the TXBn register. Caution The values of the ASIF.TXBFn and ASIF.TXSFn bits change 10 11 01 in continuous transmission. Therefore, do not confirm the status based on the combination of the TXBFn and TXSFn bits. Read only the TXBFn bit during continuous transmission. TXBFn Whether or Not Writing to TXBn Register Is Enabled 0 Writing is enabled 1 Writing is not enabled Caution When transmission is performed continuously, write the first transmit data (first byte) to the TXBn register and confirm that the TXBFn bit is 0, and then write the next transmit data (second byte) to TXBn register. If writing to the TXBn register is performed when the TXBFn bit is 1, transmit data cannot be guaranteed. The communication status can be confirmed by referring to the TXSFn bit. TXSFn Transmission Status 0 Transmission is completed. 1 Under transmission. Cautions 1. When initializing the transmission unit when continuous transmission is completed, confirm that the TXSFn bit is 0 after the occurrence of the transmission completion interrupt, and then execute initialization. If initialization is performed when the TXSFn bit is 1, transmit data cannot be guaranteed. 2. While transmission is being performed continuously, an overrun error may occur if the next transmission is completed before the INTSTn interrupt servicing following the transmission of 1 data frame is executed. An overrun error can be detected by embedding a program that can count the number of transmit data and referencing TXSFn bit. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 449 CHAPTER 15 ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL INTERFACE (UART) Figure 15-4. Continuous Transmission Processing Flow Set registers Write transmit data to TXBn register No When reading ASIFn register, TXBFn = 0? Yes Write second byte transmit data to TXBn register Interrupt occurrence Required number of transfers performed? Yes No No When reading ASIFn register, TXSFn = 1? Yes When reading ASIFn register, TXSFn = 0? Yes Write transmit data to TXBn register Wait for interrupt 450 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD End of transmission processing No CHAPTER 15 ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL INTERFACE (UART) (1) Starting procedure The procedure to start continuous transmission is shown below. Figure 15-5. Continuous Transmission Starting Procedure Start bit TXDn (output) <1> Stop bit <3> Data (1) <2> Start bit Stop bit <5> Data (2) <4> INTSTn (output) TXBn register TXSn register ASIFn register (TXBFn, TXSFn bits) Data (1) FFH FFH 00 Data (2) Data (3) Data (1) 10 11Note 01 Data (2) 11 01 Data (3) 11 01 11 Note Refer to 15.7 Cautions (2). Transmission Starting Procedure Internal Operation * Set transmission mode <1> Start transmission unit * Write data (1) <2> Generate start bit ASIFn Register TXBFn TXSFn 0 0 1 0 1 Note 1 0 1 0 1 * Read ASIFn register (confirm that TXBFn bit = 0) 0 1 * Write data (2) 1 1 0 1 * Read ASIFn register (confirm that TXBFn bit = 0) 0 1 * Write data (3) 1 1 0 1 * Read ASIFn register (confirm that TXBFn bit = 0) 0 1 * Write data (4) 1 1 Start data (1) transmission <<Transmission in progress>> <3> INTSTn interrupt occurs <4> Generate start bit Start data (2) transmission <<Transmission in progress>> <5> INTSTn interrupt occurs Note Refer to 15.7 Cautions (2). User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 451 CHAPTER 15 ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL INTERFACE (UART) (2) Ending procedure The procedure for ending continuous transmission is shown below. Figure 15-6. Continuous Transmission End Procedure Start bit TXDn (output) <6> <7> Stop bit <9> Data (m - 1) <8> Start bit Stop bit Data (m) <10> <11> INTSTn (output) TXBn register Data (m - 1) Data (m - 1) TXSn register ASIFn register (TXBFn, TXSFn bits) Data (m) 11 01 Data (m) 11 FFH 01 00 UARTEn bit or TXEn bit Transmission End Procedure Internal Operation ASIFn Register TXBFn TXSFn 1 1 0 1 * Read ASIFn register (confirm that TXBFn bit = 0) 0 1 * Write data (m) 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 <6> Transmission of data (m - 2) is in progress <7> INTSTn interrupt occurs <8> Generate start bit Start data (m - 1) transmission <<Transmission in progress>> <9> INTSTn interrupt occurs * Read ASIFn register (confirm that TXSFn bit = 1) There is no write data <10> Generate start bit Start data (m) transmission <<Transmission in progress>> <11> Generate INTSTn interrupt * Read ASIFn register (confirm that TXSFn bit = 0) * Clear (0) the UARTEn bit or TXEn bit 452 Initialize internal circuits User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 15 ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL INTERFACE (UART) 15.5.4 Receive operation The awaiting reception state is set by setting the ASIMn.UARTEn bit to 1 and then setting the ASIMn.RXEn bit to 1. To start the receive operation, start sampling at the falling edge when the falling of the RXDn pin is detected. If the RXDn pin is low level at a start bit sampling point, the start bit is recognized. When the receive operation begins, serial data is stored sequentially in the receive shift register according to the baud rate that was set. A reception completion interrupt request signal (INTSRn) is generated each time the reception of one frame of data is completed. Normally, the receive data is transferred from the RXBn register to memory by this interrupt servicing. (1) Reception enabled state The receive operation is set to the reception enabled state by setting the RXEn bit to 1. * RXEn bit = 1: Reception enabled state * RXEn bit = 0: Reception disabled state In receive disabled state, the reception hardware stands by in the initial state. At this time, the contents of the RXBn register are retained, and no reception completion interrupt or reception error interrupt is generated. (2) Starting a receive operation A receive operation is started by the detection of a start bit. The RXDn pin is sampled using the serial clock from baud rate generator n (BRGn). (3) Reception completion interrupt When the RXEn bit = 1 and the reception of one frame of data is completed (the stop bit is detected), the INTSRn signal is generated and the receive data within the receive shift register is transferred to the RXBn register at the same time. Also, if an overrun error (ASISn.OVEn bit = 1) occurs, the receive data at that time is not transferred to the RXBn register, and either the INTSRn signal or a reception error interrupt request signal (INTSREn) is generated according to the ASIMn.ISRMn bit setting. Even if a parity error (ASISn.PEn bit = 1) or framing error (ASISn.FEn bit = 1) occurs during a reception operation, the receive operation continues until stop bit is received, and after reception is completed, either the INTSRn signal or the INTSREn signal is generated according to the ISRMn bit setting (the receive data within the receive shift register is transferred to the RXBn register). If the RXEn bit is cleared (0) during a receive operation, the receive operation is immediately stopped. The contents of the RXBn register and the ASISn register at this time do not change, and the INTSRn signal or the INTSREn signal is not generated. The INTSRn signal or the INTSREn signal is not generated when the RXEn bit = 0 (reception is disabled). User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 453 CHAPTER 15 ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL INTERFACE (UART) Figure 15-7. UARTn Reception Completion Interrupt Timing RXDn (input) Start D0 D1 D2 D6 D7 Parity Stop INTSRn (output) RXBn register Cautions 1. Be sure to read the RXBn register even when a reception error occurs. If the RXBn register is not read, an overrun error will occur at the next data reception and the reception error status will continue infinitely. 2. Reception is always performed assuming a stop bit length of 1. A second stop bit is ignored. 15.5.5 Reception error The three types of errors that can occur during a receive operation are a parity error, framing error, and overrun error. As a result of data reception, the various flags of the ASISn register are set (1), and a reception error interrupt request signal (INTSREn) or a reception completion interrupt request signal (INTSRn) is generated at the same time. The ASIMn.ISRMn bit specifies whether the INTSREn signal or the INTSRn signal is generated. The type of error that occurred during reception can be detected by reading the contents of the ASISn register during the INTSREn or INTSRn interrupt servicing. The contents of the ASISn register are cleared (0) by reading the ASISn register. Table 15-3. Reception Error Causes Error Flag Reception Error Cause PEn Parity error The parity specification during transmission did not match the parity of the reception data FEn Framing error No stop bit was detected OVEn Overrun error The reception of the next data was completed before data was read from the RXBn register 454 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 15 ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL INTERFACE (UART) (1) Separation of reception error interrupt request signal A reception error interrupt request signal can be separated from the INTSRn signal and generated as the INTSREn signal by clearing the ISRMn bit to 0. Figure 15-8. When Reception Error Interrupt Request Signal Is Separated from INTSRn Signal (ISRMn Bit = 0) (a) No error occurs during reception (b) An error occurs during reception INTSRn signal (Reception completion interrupt) INTSRn signal (Reception completion interrupt) INTSREn signal (Reception error interrupt) INTSREn signal (Reception error interrupt) INTSRn does not occur Figure 15-9. When Reception Error Interrupt Request Signal Is Included in INTSRn Signal (ISRMn Bit = 1) (a) No error occurs during reception (b) An error occurs during reception INTSRn signal (Reception completion interrupt) INTSRn signal (Reception completion interrupt) INTSREn signal (Reception error interrupt) INTSREn signal (Reception error interrupt) User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD INTSREn does not occur 455 CHAPTER 15 ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL INTERFACE (UART) 15.5.6 Parity types and corresponding operation A parity bit is used to detect a bit error in communication data. Normally, the same type of parity bit is used on the transmission and reception sides. (1) Even parity (i) During transmission The parity bit is controlled so that the number of bits with the value "1" within the transmit data including the parity bit is even. The parity bit value is as follows. * If the number of bits with the value "1" within the transmit data is odd: 1 * If the number of bits with the value "1" within the transmit data is even: 0 (ii) During reception The number of bits with the value "1" within the receive data including the parity bit is counted, and a parity error is generated if this number is odd. (2) Odd parity (i) During transmission In contrast to even parity, the parity bit is controlled so that the number of bits with the value "1" within the transmit data including the parity bit is odd. The parity bit value is as follows. * If the number of bits with the value "1" within the transmit data is odd: 0 * If the number of bits with the value "1" within the transmit data is even: 1 (ii) During reception The number of bits with the value "1" within the receive data including the parity bit is counted, and a parity error is generated if this number is even. (3) 0 parity During transmission the parity bit is set to "0" regardless of the transmit data. During reception, no parity bit check is performed. Therefore, no parity error is generated regardless of whether the parity bit is "0" or "1". (4) No parity No parity bit is added to the transmit data. During reception, the receive operation is performed as if there were no parity bit. Since there is no parity bit, no parity error is generated. 456 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 15 ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL INTERFACE (UART) 15.5.7 Receive data noise filter The RXDn signal is sampled at the rising edge of the prescaler output base clock (fUCLK). If the same sampling value is obtained twice, the match detector output changes, and this output is sampled as input data. Therefore, data not exceeding one clock width is judged to be noise and is not delivered to the internal circuit (refer to Figure 15-11). Refer to 15.6.1 (1) Base clock regarding the base clock. Also, since the circuit is configured as shown in Figure 15-10, internal processing during a receive operation is delayed by up to 2 clocks according to the external signal status. Figure 15-10. Noise Filter Circuit Base clock RXDn fUCLK In Internal signal A Q Match detector In Q Internal signal B LD_EN Figure 15-11. Timing of RXDn Signal Judged as Noise Base clock RXDn (input) Internal signal A Match Mismatch (judged as noise) Match Mismatch (judged as noise) Internal signal B User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 457 CHAPTER 15 ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL INTERFACE (UART) 15.6 Dedicated Baud Rate Generator n (BRGn) A dedicated baud rate generator, which consists of a source clock selector and an 8-bit programmable counter, generates serial clocks during transmission/reception by UARTn. The dedicated baud rate generator output can be selected as the serial clock for each channel. Separate 8-bit counters exist for transmission and for reception. 15.6.1 Baud rate generator n (BRGn) configuration Figure 15-12. Configuration of Baud Rate Generator n (BRGn) UARTEn fXX fXX/2 UARTEn and TXEn bits (or RXEn bit) fXX/4 fXX/8 fXX/16 fXX/32 Selector fXX/64 fUCLKNote 1 8-bit counter fXX/128 fXX/256 fXX/512 fXX/1,024 Match detector ASCK0Note 2 CKSRn: TPSn3 to TPSn0 Notes 1. 1/2 Baud rate BRGCn: MDLn7 to MDLn0 Set fUCLK so as to satisfy the following conditions. * VDD = REGC = 4.5 to 5.5 V: fUCLK 12 MHz * VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, REGC = 10 F: fUCLK 6 MHz * VDD = REGC = 2.7 to 4.5 V: fUCLK 6 MHz 2. Remark ASCK0 pin input can be used only by UART0. fXX: Main clock frequency fUCLK: Base clock (1) Base clock When the ASIMn.UARTEn bit = 1, the clock selected according to the CKSRn.TPSn3 to CKSRn.TPSn0 bits is supplied to the transmission/reception unit. This clock is called the base clock (fUCLK). When the UARTEn bit = 0, fUCLK is fixed to low level. 458 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 15 ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL INTERFACE (UART) 15.6.2 Serial clock generation A serial clock can be generated according to the settings of the CKSRn and BRGCn registers. The base clock to the 8-bit counter is selected by the CKSRn.TPSn3 to CKSRn.TPSn0 bits. The 8-bit counter divisor value can be set by the BRGCn.MDLn7 to BRGCn.MDLn0 bits. (1) Clock select register n (CKSRn) The CKSRn register is an 8-bit register for selecting the basic block using the TPSn3 to TPSn0 bits. The clock selected by the TPSn3 to TPSn0 bits becomes the base clock (fUCLK) of the transmission/reception module. This register can be read or written in 8-bit units. Reset sets this register to 00H. Caution Clear the ASIMn.UARTEn bit to 0 before rewriting the TPSn3 to TPSn0 bits. After reset: 00H CKSRn R/W Address: CKSR0 FFFFFA06H, CKSR1 FFFFFA16H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 TPSn3 TPSn2 TPSn1 TPSn0 (n = 0, 1) Note 1 TPSn3 TPSn2 TPSn1 TPSn0 0 0 0 0 fXX 0 0 0 1 fXX/2 0 0 1 0 fXX/4 0 0 1 1 fXX/8 0 1 0 0 fXX/16 0 1 0 1 fXX/32 0 1 1 0 fXX/64 0 1 1 1 fXX/128 1 0 0 0 fXX/256 1 0 0 1 fXX/512 1 0 1 0 fXX/1,024 1 0 1 1 External clock Other than above Base clock (fUCLK) Note 2 (ASCK0 pin) Setting prohibited Notes 1. Set fUCLK so as to satisfy the following conditions. * REGC = VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V: fUCLK 12 MHz * REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V: fUCLK 6 MHz * REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 4.5 V: fUCLK 6 MHz 2. ASCK0 pin input clock can be used only by UART0. Setting of UART1 and UART2 is prohibited. Remark fXX: Main clock frequency User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 459 CHAPTER 15 ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL INTERFACE (UART) (2) Baud rate generator control register n (BRGCn) The BRGCn register is an 8-bit register that controls the baud rate (serial transfer speed) of UARTn. This register can be read or written in 8-bit units. Reset sets this register to FFH. Caution If the MDLn7 to MDLn0 bits are to be overwritten, the ASIMn.TXEn and ASIMn.RXEn bits should be cleared to 0 first. After reset: FFH BRGCn R/W Address: BRGC0 FFFFFA07H, BRGC1 FFFFFA17H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MDLn7 MDLn6 MDLn5 MDLn4 MDLn3 MDLn2 MDLn1 MDLn0 (n = 0, 1) MDLn7 MDLn6 MDLn5 MDLn4 MDLn3 MDLn2 MDLn1 MDLn0 Set value Serial clock (k) fUCLK/8 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 9 fUCLK/9 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 10 fUCLK/10 ... Setting prohibited 8 ... - 0 ... x 0 ... x 0 ... x 1 ... 0 0 ... 0 0 ... 0 0 ... 0 0 ... 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 250 fUCLK/250 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 251 fUCLK/251 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 252 fUCLK/252 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 253 fUCLK/253 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 254 fUCLK/254 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 255 fUCLK/255 Remarks 1. fUCLK: Frequency [Hz] of base clock selected by CKSR0.TPSn3 to CKSR0.TPSn0 bits 2. k: Value set by MDLn7 to MDLn0 bits (k = 8, 9, 10, ..., 255) 3. The baud rate is the output clock for the 8-bit counter divided by 2. 4. x: don't care 460 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 15 ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL INTERFACE (UART) (3) Baud rate The baud rate is the value obtained by the following formula. Baud rate [bps] = fUCLK 2xk fUCLK = Frequency [Hz] of base clock selected by CKSRn.TPSn3 to CKSRn.TPSn0 bits. k = Value set by BRGCn.MDLn7 to BRGCn.MDLn0 bits (k = 8, 9, 10, ..., 255) (4) Baud rate error The baud rate error is obtained by the following formula. Error (%) = Actual baud rate (baud rate with error) Target baud rate (normal baud rate) -1 x 100 [%] Cautions 1. Make sure that the baud rate error during transmission does not exceed the allowable error of the reception destination. 2. Make sure that the baud rate error during reception is within the allowable baud rate range during reception, which is described in 15.6.4 Allowable baud rate range during reception. Example: Base clock frequency = 10 MHz = 10,000,000 Hz Setting of BRGCn.MDLn7 to BRGCn.MDLn0 bits = 00100001B (k = 33) Target baud rate = 153,600 bps Baud rate = 10,000,000/(2 x 33) = 151,515 [bps] Error = (151,515/153,600 - 1) x 100 = -1.357 [%] User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 461 CHAPTER 15 ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL INTERFACE (UART) 15.6.3 Baud rate setting example Table 15-4. Baud Rate Generator Setting Data fXX = 20 MHz Baud Rate (bps) fXX = 16 MHz fXX = 10 MHz fUCLK k ERR fUCLK k ERR fUCLK k ERR 300 fXX/512 41H (65) 0.16 fXX/1024 1AH (26) 0.16 fXX/256 41H (65) 0.16 600 fXX/256 41H (65) 0.16 fXX/1024 0DH (13) 0.16 fXX/128 41H (65) 0.16 1200 fXX/128 41H (65) 0.16 fXX/512 0DH (13) 0.16 fXX/64 41H (65) 0.16 2400 fXX/64 41H (65) 0.16 fXX/256 0DH (13) 0.16 fXX/32 41H (65) 0.16 4800 fXX/32 41H (65) 0.16 fXX/128 0DH (13) 0.16 fXX/16 41H (65) 0.16 9600 fXX/16 41H (65) 0.16 fXX/64 0DH (13) 0.16 fXX/8 41H (65) 0.16 10400 fXX/64 0FH (15) 0.16 fXX/64 0CH (12) 0.16 fXX/32 0FH (15) 0.16 19200 fXX/8 41H (65) 0.16 fXX/32 0DH (13) 0.16 fXX/4 41H (65) 0.16 24000 fXX/32 0DH (13) 0.16 fXX/2 A7H (167) -0.20 fXX/16 0DH (13) 0.16 31250 fXX/32 0AH (10) 0.00 fXX/32 08H (8) 0.00 fXX/16 0AH (10) 0 33600 fXX/2 95H (149) -0.13 fXX/2 77H (119) 0.04 fXX 95H (149) -0.13 38400 fXX/4 41H (65) 0.16 fXX/16 0DH (13) 0.16 fXX/2 41H (65) 0.16 48000 fXX/16 0DH (13) 0.16 fXX/2 53H (83) 0.40 fXX/8 0DH (13) 0.16 56000 fXX/2 59H (89) 0.32 fXX/2 47H (71) 0.60 fXX 59H (89) 0.32 62500 fXX/16 0AH (10) 0.00 fXX/16 08H (8) 0.00 fXX/8 0AH (10) 0.00 76800 fXX/2 41H (65) 0.16 fXX/8 0DH (13) 0.16 fXX 41H (65) 0.16 115200 fXX/2 2BH (43) 0.94 fXX/2 23H (35) -0.79 fXX 2BH (43) 0.94 153600 fXX/2 21H (33) -1.36 fXX/4 0DH (13) 0.16 fXX 21H (33) -1.36 312500 fXX/4 08H (8) 0 fXX/2 0DH (13) -1.54 fXX/2 08H (8) 0.00 Caution The allowable frequency of the base clock (fUCLK) is as follows. * REGC = VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V: fUCLK 12 MHz * REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V: fUCLK 6 MHz * REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 4.5 V: fUCLK 6 MHz Remark fXX: Main clock frequency fUCLK: Base clock frequency k: Set values of BRGCn.MDLn7 to BRGCn.MDLn0 bits ERR: Baud rate error [%] n = 0, 1 462 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 15 ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL INTERFACE (UART) 15.6.4 Allowable baud rate range during reception The degree to which a discrepancy from the transmission destination's baud rate is allowed during reception is shown below. Caution The equations described below should be used to set the baud rate error during reception so that it always is within the allowable error range. Figure 15-13. Allowable Baud Rate Range During Reception Latch timing UARTn transfer rate Start bit Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 7 Parity bit Stop bit FL 1 data frame (11 x FL) Minimum allowable transfer rate Start bit Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 7 Parity bit Stop bit FLmin Maximum allowable transfer rate Start bit Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 7 Parity bit Stop bit FLmax As shown in Figure 15-13, after the start bit is detected, the receive data latch timing is determined according to the counter that was set by the BRGCn register. If all data up to the final data (stop bit) is in time for this latch timing, the data can be received normally. If this is applied to 11-bit reception, the following is theoretically true. FL = (Brate)-1 Brate: UARTn baud rate k: BRGCn register set value FL: 1-bit data length When the latch timing margin is 2 base clocks, the minimum allowable transfer rate (FLmin) is as follows. FL min = 11x FL - k-2 2k x FL = 21k + 2 2k FL User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 463 CHAPTER 15 ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL INTERFACE (UART) Therefore, the transfer destination's maximum receivable baud rate (BRmax) is as follows. BRmax = (FLmin/11)-1 = 22k 21k + 2 Brate Similarly, the maximum allowable transfer rate (FLmax) can be obtained as follows. 10 k+2 21k - 2 x FL max = 11x FL - x FL = FL 11 2xk 2xk 21k - 2 FL max = FL x 11 20k Therefore, the transfer destination's minimum receivable baud rate (BRmin) is as follows. BRmin = (FLmax/11)-1 = 20k 21k - 2 Brate The allowable baud rate error of UARTn and the transfer destination can be obtained as follows from the expressions described above for computing the minimum and maximum baud rate values. Table 15-5. Maximum and Minimum Allowable Baud Rate Error Division Ratio (k) Maximum Allowable Minimum Allowable Baud Rate Error Baud Rate Error 8 +3.53% -3.61% 20 +4.26% -4.31% 50 +4.56% -4.58% 100 +4.66% -4.67% 255 +4.72% -4.73% Remarks 1. The reception precision depends on the number of bits in one frame, the base clock frequency, and the division ratio (k). The higher the base clock frequency and the larger the division ratio (k), the higher the precision. 2. k: BRGCn register set value 464 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 15 ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL INTERFACE (UART) 15.6.5 Transfer rate during continuous transmission During continuous transmission, the transfer rate from a stop bit to the next start bit is extended two clocks of the base clock longer than normal. However, on the reception side, the transfer result is not affected since the timing is initialized by the detection of the start bit. Figure 15-14. Transfer Rate During Continuous Transmission Start bit of second byte 1 data frame Start bit FL Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 7 FL FL FL Parity bit FL Stop bit FLstp Start bit FL Bit 0 FL Representing the 1-bit data length by FL, the stop bit length by FLstp, and the base clock frequency by fUCLK yields the following equation. FLstp = FL + 2/fUCLK Therefore, the transfer rate during continuous transmission is as follows (when the stop bit length = 1). Transfer rate = 11 x FL + (2/fUCLK) 15.7 Cautions Cautions to be observed when using UARTn are shown below. (1) When the supply of clocks to UARTn is stopped (for example, in IDLE or STOP mode), operation stops with each register retaining the value it had immediately before the supply of clocks was stopped. The TXDn pin output also holds and outputs the value it had immediately before the supply of clocks was stopped. However, operation is not guaranteed after the supply of clocks is restarted. Therefore, after the supply of clocks is restarted, the circuits should be initialized by clearing the ASIMn.UARTEn, ASIMn.RXEn, and ASIMn.TXEn bits to 000. (2) UARTn has a 2-stage buffer configuration consisting of the TXBn register and the transmission shift register, and has status flags (ASIFn.TXBFn and ASIFn.TXSFn bits) that indicate the status of each buffer. If the TXBFn and TXSFn bits are read in continuous transmission, the value changes 10 11 01. For the timing to write the next data to the TXBn register, read only the TXBFn bit during continuous transmission. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 465 CHAPTER 16 CLOCKED SERIAL INTERFACE 0 (CSI0) In the V850ES/KF1, two channels of clocked serial interface 0 (CSI0) are provided. 16.1 Features * * * * * * Maximum transfer speed: 5 Mbps Master mode/slave mode selectable Transmission data length: 8 bits or 16 bits can be set MSB/LSB-first selectable for transfer data Eight clock signals can be selected (7 master clocks and 1 slave clock) 3-wire type SO0n: SI0n: Serial transmit data output Serial receive data input SCK0n: Serial clock I/O * Interrupt sources: 1 type * Transmission/reception completion interrupt request signal (INTCSI0n) * Transmission/reception mode or reception-only mode selectable * Two transmission buffer registers (SOTBFn/SOTBFLn, SOTBn/SOTBLn) and two reception buffer registers (SIRBn/SIRBLn, SIRBEn/SIRBELn) are provided on chip * Single transfer mode/continuous transfer mode selectable Remark 466 n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 16 CLOCKED SERIAL INTERFACE 0 (CSI0) 16.2 Configuration CSI0n is controlled via the CSIM0n register. (1) Clocked serial interface mode register 0n (CSIM0n) The CSIM0n register is an 8-bit register that specifies the operation of CSI0n. (2) Clocked serial interface clock selection register n (CSICn) The CSICn register is an 8-bit register that controls the CSI0n serial transfer operation. (3) Serial I/O shift register 0n (SIO0n) The SIO0n register is a 16-bit shift register that converts parallel data into serial data. The SIO0n register is used for both transmission and reception. Data is shifted in (reception) and shifted out (transmission) from the MSB or LSB side. The actual transmission/reception operations are started up by accessing the buffer register. (4) Serial I/O shift register 0nL (SIO0nL) The SIO0nL register is an 8-bit shift register that converts parallel data into serial data. The SIO0nL register is used for both transmission and reception. Data is shifted in (reception) and shifted out (transmission) from the MSB or LSB side. The actual transmission/reception operations are started up by access of the buffer register . (5) Clocked serial interface receive buffer register n (SIRBn) The SIRBn register is a 16-bit buffer register that stores receive data. (6) Clocked serial interface receive buffer register nL (SIRBnL) The SIRBnL register is an 8-bit buffer register that stores receive data. (7) Clocked serial interface read-only receive buffer register n (SIRBEn) The SIRBEn register is a 16-bit buffer register that stores receive data. The SIRBEn register is the same as the SIRBn register. It is used to read the contents of the SIRBn register. (8) Clocked serial interface read-only receive buffer register nL (SIRBEnL) The SIRBEnL register is an 8-bit buffer register that stores receive data. The SIRBEnL register is the same as the SIRBnL register. It is used to read the contents of the SIRBnL register. (9) Clocked serial interface transmit buffer register n (SOTBn) The SOTBn register is a 16-bit buffer register that stores transmit data. (10) Clocked serial interface transmit buffer register nL (SOTBLnL) The SOTBnL register is an 8-bit buffer register that stores transmit data. (11) Clocked serial interface initial transmit buffer register n (SOTBFn) The SOTBFn register is a 16-bit buffer register that stores the initial transmit data in the continuous transfer mode. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 467 CHAPTER 16 CLOCKED SERIAL INTERFACE 0 (CSI0) (12) Clocked serial interface initial transmit buffer register nL (SOTBFnL) The SOTBFnL register is an 8-bit buffer register that stores initial transmit data in the continuous transfer mode. (13) Selector The selector selects the serial clock to be used. (14) Serial clock controller Controls the serial clock supply to the shift register. Also controls the clock output to the SCK0n pin when the internal clock is used. (15) Serial clock counter Counts the serial clock output or input during transmission/reception, and checks whether 8-bit or 16-bit data transmission/reception has been performed. (16) Interrupt controller Controls the interrupt request timing. Remark 468 n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 16 CLOCKED SERIAL INTERFACE 0 (CSI0) Figure 16-1. Block Diagram of Clocked Serial Interface fXX/26 Serial clock controller fXX/25 fXX/24 fXX/23 Clock start/stop control & clock phase control Selector fXX/22 fXX/2 TO50, TO51 SCK0n Interrupt controller INTCSI0n SCK0n Transmission control Transmission data control Initial transmit buffer register (SOTBFn/SOTBFnL) Control signal SO selection SO0n Transmit buffer register (SOTBn/SOTBnL) SI0n Shift register (SIOn/SIO0nL) SO latch Receive buffer register (SIRBn/SIRBnL) Remarks 1. n = 0, 1 2. fXX: Main clock User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 469 CHAPTER 16 CLOCKED SERIAL INTERFACE 0 (CSI0) 16.3 Registers (1) Clocked serial interface mode register 0n (CSIM0n) The CSIM0n register controls the CSI0n operation. This register can be read or written in 8-bit or 1-bit units (however, CSOTn bit is read-only). Reset sets CSIM0n to 00H. Caution Overwriting the CSIM0n.TRMDn, CSIM0n.CCLn, CSIM0n.DIRn, CSIM0n.CSITn, and CSIM0n.AUTOn bits can be done only when the CSOTn bit = 0. If these bits are overwritten at any other time, the operation cannot be guaranteed. 470 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 16 CLOCKED SERIAL INTERFACE 0 (CSI0) After reset: 00H CSIM0n R/W Address: CSIM00 FFFFFD00H, CSIM01 FFFFFD10H <7> <6> 5 <4> 3 2 1 <0> CSI0En TRMDn CCLn DIRn CSITn AUTOn 0 CSOTn (n = 0, 1) CSI0En CSI0n operation enable/disable 0 Disable CSI0n operation. 1 Enable CSI0n operation. The internal CSI0n circuit can be reset Note asynchronously by clearing the CSI0En bit to 0. For the SCK0n and SO0n pin output status when the CSI0En bit = 0, refer to 16.5 Output Pins. TRMDn Specification of transmission/reception mode 0 Receive-only mode 1 Transmission/reception mode When the TRMDn bit = 0, reception is performed and the SO0n pin outputs a low level. Data reception is started by reading the SIRBn register. When the TRMDn bit = 1, transmission/reception is started by writing data to the SOTBn register. CCLn Specification of data length 0 8 bits 1 16 bits DIRn Specification of transfer direction mode (MSB/LSB) 0 First bit of transfer data is MSB 1 First bit of transfer data is LSB CSITn Control of delay of interrupt request signal 0 No delay 1 Delay mode (interrupt request signal is delayed 1/2 cycle compared to the serial clock) The delay mode (CSITn bit = 1) is valid only in the master mode (CSICn.CKS0n2 to CSICn.CSK0n0 bits are not 111B). In the slave mode (CKS0n2 to CKS0n0 bits are 111B), do not set the delay mode. AUTOn Specification of single transfer mode or continuous transfer mode 0 Single transfer mode 1 Continuous mode CSOTn Communication status flag 0 Communication stopped 1 Communication in progress The CSOTn bit is cleared (0) by writing 0 to the CSI0En bit. Note The CSOTn bit and the SIRBn, SIRBnL, SIRBE, SIRBEnL, SIOn, and SIOnL registers are reset. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 471 CHAPTER 16 CLOCKED SERIAL INTERFACE 0 (CSI0) (2) Clocked serial interface clock selection register n (CSICn) The CSICn register is an 8-bit register that controls the CSI0n transfer operation. This register can be read or written in 8-bit or 1-bit units. Reset sets CSICn to 00H. Caution The CSICn register can be overwritten only when the CSIM0n.CSI0En bit = 0. After reset: 00H CSICn R/W Address: CSIC0 FFFFFD01H, CSIC1 FFFFFD11H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 CKPn DAPn CKS0n2 CKS0n1 CKS0n0 (n = 0, 1) CKPn DAPn 0 0 Specification of timing of transmitting/receiving data to/from SCK0n (Type 1) SCK0n (I/O) SO0n (output) DO7 DO6 DO5 DO4 DO3 DO2 DO1 DO0 SI0n (input) 0 1 (Type 2) DI7 DI7 (Type 3) (Type 4) 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 DI5 DI4 DI6 DI5 DI2 DI1 DI4 DI3 DI2 DI7 DI6 DI5 DI4 DI3 DI2 DI0 DI1 DI1 Serial clock DI0 fXX/2 Master mode fXX/2 2 Master mode fXX/2 3 Master mode fXX/2 4 Master mode fXX/2 5 Master mode 6 Master mode 0 1 fXX/2 1 1 0 Clock generated by TO5n Master mode 1 1 1 External clock (SCK0n pin) Slave mode * REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V: Serial clock 5 MHz * REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V: Serial clock 2.5 MHz * REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 4.0 V: Serial clock 2.5 MHz fXX: Main clock frequency User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD DI0 Mode 1 Remark DI0 DO7 DO6 DO5 DO4 DO3 DO2 DO1 DO0 Note Set the serial clock so as to satisfy the following conditions. 472 DI3 Note CKS0n2 CKS0n1 CKS0n0 0 DI1 SCK0n (I/O) SI0n (input) 0 DI6 DI7 SO0n (output) 0 DI2 DO7 DO6 DO5 DO4 DO3 DO2 DO1 DO0 SI0n (input) 1 DI3 SCK0n (I/O) SO0n (output) 1 DI4 DO7 DO6 DO5 DO4 DO3 DO2 DO1 DO0 SI0n (input) 0 DI5 SCK0n (I/O) SO0n (output) 1 DI6 CHAPTER 16 CLOCKED SERIAL INTERFACE 0 (CSI0) (3) Clocked serial interface receive buffer registers n, nL (SIRBn, SIRBnL) The SIRBn register is a 16-bit buffer register that stores receive data. When the receive-only mode is set (CSIM0n.TRMDn bit = 0), the reception operation is started by reading data from the SIRBn register. This register is read-only in 16-bit units. When the lower 8 bits are used as the SIRBnL register, this register is read-only in 8-bit units. In addition to reset input, this register can also be initialized by clearing (0) the CSIM0n.CSI0En bit. Cautions 1. Read the SIRBn register only when a 16-bit data length has been set (CSIM0n.CCLn bit = 1). Read the SIRBnL register only when an 8-bit data length has been set (CCLn bit = 0). 2. When the single transfer mode has been set (CSIM0n.AUTOn bit = 0), perform a read operation only in the idle state (CSIM0n.CSOTn bit = 0). If the SIRBn or SIRBnL register is read during data transfer, the data cannot be guaranteed. (a) SIRBn register After reset: 0000H 15 SIRBn (n = 0, 1) 14 R 13 Address: SIRB0 FFFFFD02H, SIRB1 FFFFFD12H 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SIRBn SIRBn SIRBn SIRBn SIRBn SIRBn SIRBn SIRBn SIRBn SIRBn SIRBn SIRBn SIRBn SIRBn SIRBn SIRBn 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (b) SIRBnL register After reset: 00H SIRBnL R Address: SIRB0L FFFFFD02H, SIRB1L FFFFFD12H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SIRBn7 SIRBn6 SIRBn5 SIRBn4 SIRBn3 SIRBn2 SIRBn1 SIRBn0 (n = 0, 1) User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 473 CHAPTER 16 CLOCKED SERIAL INTERFACE 0 (CSI0) (4) Clocked serial interface read-only receive buffer registers n, nL (SIRBEn, SIRBEnL) The SIRBEn register is a 16-bit buffer register that stores receive data. The SIRBEn register is the same as the SIRBn register. Even if the SIRBEn register is read, the next operation will not start. The SIRBEn register is used to read the contents of the SIRBn register when the serial reception is not continued. This register is read-only in 16-bit units. However, when the lower 8 bits are used as the SIRBEnL register, the register is read-only in 8-bit units. In addition to reset input, this register can also be initialized by clearing (0) the CSIM0n.CSI0En bit. Cautions 1. The receive operation is not started even if data is read from the SIRBEn and SIRBEnL registers. 2. The SIRBEn register can be read only if a 16-bit data length has been set (CSIM0n.CCLn bit = 1). The SIRBEnL register can be read only if an 8-bit data length has been set (CCLn bit = 0). (a) SIRBEn register After reset: 0000H 15 SIRBEn (n = 0, 1) R 14 13 Address: SIRBE0 FFFFFD06H, SIRBE1 FFFFFD16H 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 SIRBEn SIRBEn SIRBEn SIRBEn SIRBEn SIRBEn SIRBEn SIRBEn SIRBEn SIRBEn SIRBEn SIRBEn SIRBEn SIRBEn SIRBEn SIRBEn 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 R Address: SIRBE0L FFFFFD06H, SIRBE1L FFFFFD16H 1 (B) SIRBEnL register After reset: 00H 7 SIRBEnL 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SIRBEn7 SIRBEn6 SIRBEn5 SIRBEn4 SIRBEn3 SIRBEn2 SIRBEn1 SIRBEn0 (n = 0, 1) 474 0 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 0 CHAPTER 16 CLOCKED SERIAL INTERFACE 0 (CSI0) (5) Clocked serial interface transmit buffer registers n, nL (SOTBn, SOTBnL) The SOTBn register is a 16-bit buffer register that stores transmit data. When the transmission/reception mode is set (CSIM0n.TRMDn bit = 1), the transmission operation is started by writing data to the SOTBn register. This register can be read or written in 16-bit units. However, when the lower 8 bits are used as the SOTBnL register, the register is read-only in 8-bit units. After reset, this register is initialized. Cautions 1. Access the SOTBn register only when a 16-bit data length has been set (CSIM0n.CCLn bit = 1). Access the SOTBnL register only when an 8-bit data length has been set (CCLn bit = 0). 2. When the single transfer mode is set (CSIM0n.AUTOn bit = 0), perform access only in the idle state (CSIM0n.CSOTn bit = 0). If the SOTBn and SOTBnL registers are accessed during data transfer, the data cannot be guaranteed. (a) SOTBn register After reset: 0000H 15 SOTBn 14 R/W 13 Address: SOTB0 FFFFFD04H, SOTB1 FFFFFD14H 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SOTBn SOTBn SOTBn SOTBn SOTBn SOTBn SOTBn SOTBn SOTBn SOTBn SOTBn SOTBn SOTBn SOTBn SOTBn SOTBn (n = 0, 1) 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (b) SOTBnL register After reset: 00H 7 SOTBnL R/W 6 Address: SOTB0L FFFFFD04H, SOTB1L FFFFFD14H 5 4 3 2 1 0 SOTBn7 SOTBn6 SOTBn5 SOTBn4 SOTBn3 SOTBn2 SOTBn1 SOTBn0 (n = 0, 1) User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 475 CHAPTER 16 CLOCKED SERIAL INTERFACE 0 (CSI0) (6) Clocked serial interface initial transmit buffer registers n, nL (SOTBFn, SOTBFnL) The SOTBFn register is a 16-bit buffer register that stores initial transmission data in the continuous transfer mode. The transmission operation is not started even if data is written to the SOTBFn register. This register can be read or written in 16-bit units. However, when the lower 8 bits are used as the SOTBFnL register, the register can be read or written in 8-bit units. After reset, this register is initialized. Caution Access the SOTBFn register and SOTBFnL register only when a 16-bit data length has been set (CSIM0n.CCLn bit = 1), and only when an 8-bit data length has been set (CCLn bit = 0), respectively, and only in the idle state (CSIM0n.CSOTn bit = 0). If the SOTBFn and SOTBFnL registers are accessed during data transfer, the data cannot be guaranteed. (a) SOTBFn register After reset: 0000H 15 SOTBFn (n = 0, 1) R/W 14 13 Address: SOTBF0 FFFFFD08H, SOTBF1 FFFFFD18H 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 SOTBFn SOTBFn SOTBFn SOTBFn SOTBFn SOTBFn SOTBFn SOTBFn SOTBFn SOTBFn SOTBFn SOTBFn SOTBFn SOTBFn SOTBFn SOTBFn 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 (b) SOTBFnL register After reset: 00H 7 SOTBFnL R/W 6 Address: SOTBF0L FFFFFD08H, SOTBF1L FFFFFD18H 5 4 3 2 1 0 SOTBFn7 SOTBFn6 SOTBFn5 SOTBFn4 SOTBFn3 SOTBFn2 SOTBFn1 SOTBFn0 (n = 0, 1) 476 0 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 0 CHAPTER 16 CLOCKED SERIAL INTERFACE 0 (CSI0) (7) Serial I/O shift registers n, nL (SIO0n, SIO0nL) The SIO0n register is a 16-bit shift register that converts parallel data into serial data. The transfer operation is not started even if the SIO0n register is read. This register is read-only in 16-bit units. However, when the lower 8 bits are used as the SIO0nL register, the register is read-only in 8-bit units. In addition to reset input, this register can also be initialized by clearing (0) the CSIM0n.CSI0En bit. Caution Read the SIO0n register and SIO0nL register only when a 16-bit data length has been set (CSIM0n.CCLn bit = 1), and only when an 8-bit data length has been set (CCLn bit = 0), respectively, and only in the idle state (CSIM0n.CSOTn bit = 0). If the SIO0n and SIO0nL registers are read during data transfer, the data cannot be guaranteed. (a) SIO0n register After reset: 0000H 15 SIO0n 14 R 13 Address: SIO00 FFFFFD0AH, SIO01 FFFFFD1AH 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SIOn15 SIOn14 SIOn13 SIOn12 SIOn11 SIOn10 SIOn9 SIOn8 SIOn7 SIOn6 SIOn5 SIOn4 SIOn3 SIOn2 SIOn1 SIOn0 (n = 0, 1) (b) SIO0nL register After reset: 00H SIO0nL R Address: SIO00L FFFFFD0AH, SIO01L FFFFFD1AH 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SIOn7 SIOn6 SIOn5 SIOn4 SIOn3 SIOn2 SIOn1 SIOn0 (n = 0, 1) User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 477 478 Table 16-1. Use of Each Buffer Register Register Name SIRBn (SIRBnL) R/W Read SIO0n (SIO0nL) Read SOTBn (SOTBnL) Write Receive-Only Mode Storing received dataNote 2 * Reading starts reception * Storing received data Storing up to the (N - 1)th received data (other than the last)Note 2 * Reading starts reception * Storing up to the (N - 2)th data (other than the last two) Use method When transmission and reception are complete, read the received data from this register. * First, read dummy data and start transfer. * To perform reception of the next data after reception is complete, read the received data from this register. When reception is complete, read the received data from this register. Repeat this operation until the (N - 1)th data has been received. When reception is complete, read the received data from this register. Repeat this operation until the (N - 2)th data has been received. (Supplement) Do not read the (N - 1)th data from this register. If read, a reception operation starts and continuous transfer cannot be completed. - Function Use method Write Transmission/Reception Mode Function If reception of the next data will not be performed after reception is complete, read the received data from this register. Not used. Not used Use method Not used. Function * Starting transmission/reception when written * Storing the data to be transmitted Use method * When transmission/reception is complete, write the data to be transmitted next. - Not used - Not used Storing the (N - 1)th received dataNote 2 Not used Read the (N - 1)th received data from this register when the (N - 1)th or Nth (last) data has been received. Storing the Nth (last) received dataNote 2 Storing the Nth (last) received dataNote 2 When the Nth (last) transmission/reception is complete, read the Nth (last) data. When the Nth (last) data has been received, read the Nth (last) data. * Starting transmission/reception when written * Storing the data to be transmitted second and subsequently When transmission/reception is complete, write the data to be transmitted next to this register to start the next transmission/reception. Not used - Function Use method - - Function - Storing the data received lastNote 2 - Not used - Storing the data to be transmitted firstNote 2 Before starting transmission/reception (writing to SOTBn), write the data to be transmitted first. Not used Notes 1. It is assumed that the number of data to be transmitted is N. 2. Neither reading nor writing will start communication. Remark In the 16-bit mode, the registers not enclosed in parentheses are used; in the 8-bit mode, the registers in parentheses are used. CHAPTER 16 CLOCKED SERIAL INTERFACE 0 (CSI0) User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD SIRBEn (SIRBEnL) SOTBFn (SOTBFnL) Receive-Only Mode Transmission/Reception Mode Read Continuous TransferNote 1 Single Transfer CHAPTER 16 CLOCKED SERIAL INTERFACE 0 (CSI0) 16.4 Operation 16.4.1 Transmission/reception completion interrupt request signal (INTCSI0n) The INTCSI0n signal is set (1) upon completion of data transmission/reception. Writing to the CSIM0n register clears (0) the INTCSI0n signal. Caution The delay mode (CSIM0n.CSITn bit = 1) is valid only in the master mode (CSICn.CKS0n2 to CSICn.CKS0n0 bits are not 111B). The delay mode cannot be set when the slave mode is set (CKS0n2 to CKS0n0 bits = 111B). User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 479 CHAPTER 16 CLOCKED SERIAL INTERFACE 0 (CSI0) Figure 16-2. Timing Chart of INTCSI0n Signal Output in Delay Mode (a) Transmit/receive type 1 Input clock SCK0n (I/O) SI0n (input) DI7 DI6 DI5 DI4 DI3 DI2 DI1 DI0 SO0n (output) DO7 DO6 DO5 DO4 DO3 DO2 DO1 DO0 Reg_R/W INTCSI0n signal CSOTn bit Delay (b) Transmit/receive type 4 Input clock SCK0n (I/O) SI0n (input) DI7 DI6 DI5 DI4 DI3 DI2 DI1 DI0 SO0n (output) DO7 DO6 DO5 DO4 DO3 DO2 DO1 DO0 Reg_R/W INTCSI0n signal CSOTn bit Delay Remarks 1. Reg_R/W: Internal signal. This signal indicates that the SIRBn/SIRBnL register read or the SOTBn/SOTBnL register write was performed. 2. n = 0, 1 480 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 16 CLOCKED SERIAL INTERFACE 0 (CSI0) 16.4.2 Single transfer mode (1) Usage In the receive-only mode (CSIM0n.TRMDn bit = 0), communication is started by reading the SIRBn/SIRBnL register. In the transmission/reception mode (TRMDn bit = 1), communication is started by writing to the SOTBn/SOTBnL register. In the slave mode, the operation must be enabled beforehand (CSIM0n.CSI0En bit = 1). When communication is started, the value of the CSIM0n.CSOTn bit becomes 1 (transmission execution status). Upon communication completion, the transmission/reception completion interrupt request signal (INTCSI0n) is generated, and the CSOTn bit is cleared (0). The next data communication request is then waited for. Caution When the CSOTn bit = 1, do not manipulate the CSI0n register. Remark n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 481 CHAPTER 16 CLOCKED SERIAL INTERFACE 0 (CSI0) Figure 16-3. Timing Chart in Single Transfer Mode (1/2) (a) In transmission/reception mode, data length: 8 bits, transfer direction: MSB first, no interrupt delay, single transfer mode, when AAH is received and 55H is transmitted, transmit/receive type 1 SCK0n (I/O) SO0n (output) 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 (55H) SI0n (input) 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 (AAH) B5H 6AH D5H AAH Reg_R/W Write 55H to SOTBnL register SOTBnL register 55H (transmit data) SIO0nL register ABH 56H ADH 5AH SIRBnL register AAH CSOTn bit INTCSI0n signal Remarks 1. Reg_R/W: Internal signal. This signal indicates that the SIRBn/SIRBnL register read or the SOTBn/SOTBnL register write was performed. 2. For the transmit/receive types, refer to 16.3 (2) Clocked serial interface clock selection register n (CSICn). 3. n = 0, 1 482 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 16 CLOCKED SERIAL INTERFACE 0 (CSI0) Figure 16-3. Timing Chart in Single Transfer Mode (2/2) (b) In transmission/reception mode, data length: 8 bits, transfer direction: MSB first, no interrupt delay, single transfer mode, when AAH is received and 55H is transmitted, transmit/receive type 2 SCK0n (I/O) SO0n (output) 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 (55H) SI0n (input) 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 (AAH) B5H 6AH D5H Write 55H to SOTBnL register Reg_R/W SOTBnL register 55H (transmit data) SIO0nL register ABH 56H ADH 5AH SIRBnL register AAH AAH CSOTn bit INTCSI0n signal Remarks 1. Reg_R/W: Internal signal. This signal indicates that the SIRBn/SIRBnL register read or the SOTBn/SOTBnL register write was performed. 2. For the transmit/receive types, refer to 16.3 (2) Clocked serial interface clock selection register n (CSICn). 3. n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 483 CHAPTER 16 CLOCKED SERIAL INTERFACE 0 (CSI0) 16.4.3 Continuous transfer mode (1) Usage (receive-only: 8-bit data length) <1> Set the continuous transfer mode (CSIM0n.AUTOn bit = 1) and the receive-only mode (CSIM0n.TRMDn bit = 0). <2> Read the SIRBnL register (start transfer with dummy read). <3> When the transmission/reception completion interrupt request signal (INTCSI0n) has been generated, read the SIRBnL registerNote (reserve next transfer). <4> Repeat step <3> (N - 2) times. (N: Number of transfer data) Ignore the interrupt triggered by reception of the (N - 1)th data (at this time, the SIRBEnL register can be read). <5> Following generation of the last INTCSI0n signal, read the SIRBEnL register and the SIO0nL registerNote. Note When transferring N number of data, receive data is loaded by reading the SIRBnL register from the first data to the (N - 2)th data. The (N - 1)th data is loaded by reading the SIRBEnL register, and the Nth (last) data is loaded by reading the SIO0nL register (refer to Table 16-1 Use of Each Buffer Register). 484 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 16 CLOCKED SERIAL INTERFACE 0 (CSI0) Figure 16-4. Continuous Transfer (Receive-Only) Timing Chart * Transmit/receive type 1, 8-bit data length SCK0n (I/O) din-1 SI0n (input) din-2 din-3 din-4 din-5 SIO0nL register din-5 SIRBnL register din-2 din-1 Reg-RD SIRBn (dummy) din-3 SIRBn (1) din-4 SIRBn (d2) SIRBEn (d4) SIO0n (d5) SIRBn (d3) CSOTn bit INTCSI0n signal SO0n (output) L rq_clr trans_rq <1> <2> <3> <3> <3> <5> <4> Period during which next transfer can be reserved Remarks 1. Reg_RD: Internal signal. This signal indicates that the SIRBnL register has been read. rq_clr: Internal signal. Transfer request clear signal. trans_rq: Internal signal. Transfer request signal. 2. n = 0, 1 In the case of the continuous transfer mode, two transfer requests are set at the start of the first transfer. Following the INTCSI0n signal, transfer is continued if the SIRBnL register can be read within the next transfer reservation period. If the SIRBnL register cannot be read, transfer ends and the SIRBnL register does not receive the new value of the SIO0nL register. The last data can be obtained by reading the SIO0nL register following completion of the transfer. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 485 CHAPTER 16 CLOCKED SERIAL INTERFACE 0 (CSI0) (2) Usage (transmission/reception: 8-bit data length) <1> Set the continuous transfer mode (CSIM0n.AUTOn bit = 1) and the transmission/reception mode (CSIM0n.TRMDn bit = 1). <2> Write the first data to the SOTBFnL register. <3> Write the 2nd data to the SOTBnL register (start transfer). <4> When the transmission/reception completion interrupt request signal (INTCSI0n) has been generated, write the next data to the SOTBnL register (reserve next transfer). Read the SIRBnL register to load the receive data. <5> Repeat step <4> as long as data to be sent remains. <6> When the INTCSI0n signal is generated, read the SIRBnL register to load the (N - 1)th receive data (N: Number of transfer data). <7> Following the last INTCSI0n signal, read the SIO0nL register to load the Nth (last) receive data. 486 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 16 CLOCKED SERIAL INTERFACE 0 (CSI0) Figure 16-5. Continuous Transfer (Transmission/Reception) Timing Chart * Transmit/receive type 1, 8-bit data length SCK0n (I/O) SO0n (output) dout-1 dout-2 dout-3 dout-4 dout-5 SI0n (input) din-1 din-2 din-3 din-4 din-5 SOTBFnL register SOTBnL register SIO0nL register SIRBnL register dout-1 dout-2 dout-3 dout-5 dout-4 din-5 din-1 SOTBFn (d1) Reg_WR SOTBn (d2) din-2 SOTBn (d3) Reg_RD din-3 SOTBn (d4) SIRBn (d1) din-4 SOTBn (d5) SIRBn (d2) SIRBn (d3) SIRBn (d4) SIOn (d5) CSOTn bit INTCSI0n signal rq_clr trans_rq <3> <1> <2> <4> <5> <4> <5> <4> <5> <7> <8> <6> Period during which next transfer can be reserved Remarks 1. Reg_WR: Internal signal. This signal indicates that the SOTBnL register has been written. Reg_RD: Internal signal. This signal indicates that the SIRBnL register has been read. rq_clr: Internal signal. Transfer request clear signal. trans_rq: Internal signal. Transfer request signal. 2. n = 0, 1 In the case of the continuous transfer mode, two transfer requests are set at the start of the first transfer. Following the INTCSI0n signal, transfer is continued if the SOTBnL register can be written within the next transfer reservation period. If the SOTBnL register cannot be written, transfer ends and the SIRBnL register does not receive the new value of the SIO0nL register. The last receive data can be obtained by reading the SIO0nL register following completion of the transfer. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 487 CHAPTER 16 CLOCKED SERIAL INTERFACE 0 (CSI0) (3) Next transfer reservation period In the continuous transfer mode, the next transfer must be prepared with the period shown in Figure 16-6. Figure 16-6. Timing Chart of Next Transfer Reservation Period (1/2) (a) When data length: 8 bits, transmit/receive type 1 SCK0n (I/O) INTCSI0n signal Reservation period: 7 SCK0n cycles (b) When data length: 16 bits, transmit/receive type 1 SCK0n (I/O) INTCSI0n signal Reservation period: 15 SCK0n cycles Remark 488 n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 16 CLOCKED SERIAL INTERFACE 0 (CSI0) Figure 16-6. Timing Chart of Next Transfer Reservation Period (2/2) (c) When data length: 8 bits, transmit/receive type 2 SCK0n (I/O) INTCSI0n signal Reservation period: 6.5 SCK0n cycles (d) When data length: 16 bits, transmit/receive type 2 SCK0n (I/O) INTCSI0n signal Reservation period: 14.5 SCK0n cycles Remark n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 489 CHAPTER 16 CLOCKED SERIAL INTERFACE 0 (CSI0) (4) Cautions To continue continuous transfers, it is necessary to either read the SIRBn register or write to the SOTBn register during the transfer reservation period. If access is performed to the SIRBn register or the SOTBn register when the transfer reservation period is over, the following occurs. (i) In case of conflict between transfer request clear and register access Since transfer request clear has higher priority, the next transfer request is ignored. Therefore, transfer is interrupted, and normal data transfer cannot be performed. Figure 16-7. Transfer Request Clear and Register Access Conflict Transfer reservation period SCK0n (I/O) INTCSI0n signal rq_clr Reg_R/W Remarks 1. rq_clr: Internal signal. Transfer request clear signal. Reg_R/W: Internal signal. This signal indicates that the SIRBn/SIRBnL register read or the SOTBn/SOTBnL register write was performed. 2. n = 0, 1 490 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 16 CLOCKED SERIAL INTERFACE 0 (CSI0) (ii) In case of conflict between transmission/reception completion interrupt request signal (INTCSI0n) generation and register access Since continuous transfer has stopped once, executed as a new continuous transfer. In the slave mode, a bit phase error transfer error results (refer to Figure 16-8). In the transmission/reception mode, the value of the SOTBFn register is retransmitted, and illegal data is sent. Figure 16-8. Interrupt Request and Register Access Conflict Transfer reservation period SCK0n (I/O) 0 1 2 3 4 INTCSI0n signal rq_clr Reg_R/W Remarks 1. rq_clr: Internal signal. Transfer request clear signal. Reg_R/W: Internal signal. This signal indicates that the SIRBn/SIRBnL register read or the SOTBn/SOTBnL register write was performed. 2. n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 491 CHAPTER 16 CLOCKED SERIAL INTERFACE 0 (CSI0) 16.5 Output Pins The following describes the output pins. For the setting of each pin, refer to Table 4-14 Settings When Port Pins Are Used for Alternate Functions. (1) SCK0n pin When the CSI0n operation is disabled (CSIM0n.CSI0En bit = 0), the SCK0n pin output status is as follows. Table 16-2. SCK0n Pin Output Status CKPn CKS0n2 CKS0n1 CKS0n0 0 Don't care Don't care Don't care 1 1 1 1 SCK0n Pin Output Fixed to high level High impedance Other than above Remark Fixed to low level n = 0, 1 (2) SO0n pin When the CSI0n operation is disabled (CSI0En bit = 0), the SO0n pin output status is as follows. Table 16-3. SO0n Pin Output Status TRMDn DAPn AUTOn CCLn DIRn 0 Don't care Don't care Don't care Don't care Fixed to low level 1 0 Don't care Don't care Don't care SO latch value (low level) 1 0 0 0 SOTBn7 bit value 1 SOTBn0 bit value 0 SOTBn15 bit value 1 SOTBn0 bit value 0 SOTBFn7 bit value 1 SOTBFn0 bit value 0 SOTBFn15 bit value 1 SOTBFn0 bit value 1 1 0 1 Remark 492 n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD SO0n Pin Output CHAPTER 17 CLOCKED SERIAL INTERFACE A (CSIA) WITH AUTOMATIC TRANSMIT/RECEIVE FUNCTION In the V850ES/KF1, one channel of CSIA is provided. 17.1 Functions CSIA0 has the following two modes. * 3-wire serial I/O mode * 3-wire serial I/O mode with automatic transmit/receive function (1) 3-wire serial I/O mode This mode is used to transfer 8-bit data using three lines: a serial clock pin (SCKA0) and two serial data pins (SIA0 and SOA0). In addition, whether 8-bit data is transferred MSB or LSB first can be specified, so this interface can be connected to any device. (2) 3-wire serial I/O mode with automatic transmit/receive function This mode is used to transfer 8-bit data using three lines: a serial clock pin (SCKA0) and two serial data pins (SIA0 and SOA0). In addition, whether 8-bit data is transferred MSB or LSB first can be specified, so this interface can be connected to any device. Data can be transferred to/from a display driver etc. without using software since a 32-byte buffer RAM is incorporated for automatic transfer. * Maximum transfer speed: 2 Mbps (in master mode) * Master mode/slave mode selectable * Transfer data length: 8 bits * MSB/LSB-first selectable for transfer data * Automatic transmit/receive function: Number of transfer bytes can be specified between 1 and 32 Transfer interval can be specified (0 to 63 clocks) Single transfer/repeat transfer selectable * On-chip dedicated baud rate generator (6/8/16/32 divisions) * 3-wire SOA0: SIA0: Serial data output Serial data input SCKA0: Serial clock I/O * Transmission/reception completion interrupt request signal: INTCSIA0 * Internal 32-byte buffer RAM User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 493 CHAPTER 17 CLOCKED SERIAL INTERFACE A (CSIA) WITH AUTOMATIC TRANSMIT/RECEIVE FUNCTION 17.2 Configuration CSIA0 includes the following hardware. Table 17-1. Configuration of CSIA0 Item Registers Configuration Serial I/O shift register A0 (SIOA0) Automatic data transfer address count register 0 (ADTC0) CSIA0 buffer RAM (CSIA0Bm, CSIA0BmL, CSIA0BmH) (m = 0 to F) Control registers Serial operation mode specification register 0 (CSIMA0) Serial status register 0 (CSIS0) Serial trigger register 0 (CSIT0) Divisor selection register 0 (BRGCA0) Automatic data transfer address point specification register 0 (ADTP0) Automatic data transfer interval specification register 0 (ADTI0) Remark For the alternate-function pin settings, refer to Table 4-14 Settings When Port Pins Are Used for Alternate Functions. 494 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD Figure 17-1. Block Diagram of CSIA0 Automatic data transfer address point specification register 0 (ADTP0) Automatic data transfer address count register 0 (ADTC0) Internal bus Serial trigger register 0 (CSIT0) DIRA0 ATM0 SIA0 Serial I/O shift register A0 (SIOA0) Divisor selection register 0 (BRGCA0) ATSTP0 ATSTA0 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD RXEA0 Serial status register 0 (CSIS0) SOA0 CKSA01 CKSA00 TSF0 TXEA0 2 2 Serial clock counter Interrupt generator INTCSIA0 Serial transfer controller SCKA0 Selector Automatic data transfer interval specification register 0 (ADTI0) 6-bit counter MASTER0 fXX/6 to fXX/256 Selector fXX CHAPTER 17 CLOCKED SERIAL INTERFACE A (CSIA) WITH AUTOMATIC TRANSMIT/RECEIVE FUNCTION Buffer RAM 495 CHAPTER 17 CLOCKED SERIAL INTERFACE A (CSIA) WITH AUTOMATIC TRANSMIT/RECEIVE FUNCTION (1) Serial I/O shift register A0 (SIOA0) This is an 8-bit register used to store transmit/receive data in 1-byte transfer mode (CSIMA0.ATE0 bit = 0). Writing transmit data to the SIOA0 register starts the transfer. In addition, after a transfer completion interrupt request signal (INTCSIA0) is generated (CSIS0.TSF0 bit = 0), data can be received by reading data from the SIOA0 register. This register can be read or written in 8-bit units. However, writing to the SIOA0 register is prohibited when the TSF0 bit = 1. Reset sets this register to 00H. Cautions 1. A transfer operation is started by writing to the SIOA0 register. Consequently, when transmission is disabled (CSIMA0.TXEA0 bit = 0), write dummy data to the SIOA0 register to start the transfer operation, and then perform a receive operation. 2. Do not write data to the SIOA0 register while the automatic transmit/receive function is operating. After reset: 00H SIOA0 R/W Address: FFFFFD46H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SIOA07 SIOA06 SIOA05 SIOA04 SIOA03 SIOA02 SIOA01 SIOA00 (2) Automatic data transfer address count register 0 (ADTC0) This is a register used to indicate buffer RAM addresses during automatic transfer. When automatic transfer is stopped, the data position when transfer stopped can be ascertained by reading ADTC0 register value. This register is read-only in 8-bit units. However, reading from the ADTC0 register is prohibited when the CSIS0.TSF0 bit = 1. Reset sets this register to 00H. After reset: 00H 7 ADTC0 R Address: FFFFFD47H 6 5 4 3 1 0 ADTC07 ADTC06 ADTC05 ADTC04 ADTC03 ADTC02 ADTC01 ADTC00 17.3 Registers Serial interface CSIA0 is controlled by the following six registers. * Serial operation mode specification register 0 (CSIMA0) * Serial status register 0 (CSIS0) * Serial trigger register 0 (CSIT0) * Divisor selection register 0 (BRGCA0) * Automatic data transfer address point specification register 0 (ADTP0) * Automatic data transfer interval specification register 0 (ADTI0) 496 2 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 17 CLOCKED SERIAL INTERFACE A (CSIA) WITH AUTOMATIC TRANSMIT/RECEIVE FUNCTION (1) Serial operation mode specification register 0 (CSIMA0) This is an 8-bit register used to control the serial transfer operation. This register can be read or written in 8-bit or 1-bit units. Reset sets this register to 00H. After reset: 00H R/W <7> 6 5 4 <3> <2> <1> 0 CSIAE0 ATE0 ATM0 MASTER0 TXEA0 RXEA0 DIRA0 0 CSIMA0 Address: FFFFFD40H CSIAE0 CSIA0 operation enable/disable control 0 Disable CSIA0 operation (SOA0: Low level, SCKA0: High level) 1 Enable CSIA0 operation * When the CSIAE0 bit is cleared to 0, the CSIA0 unit is resetNote asynchronously. * When the CSIAE0 bit = 0, the CSIA0 unit is reset, so to operate CSIA0, first set the CSIAE0 bit to 1. * If the CSIAE0 bit is cleared from 1 to 0, all the registers in the CSIA0 unit are initialized. Before the CSIAE0 bit is set to 1 again, first re-set the registers of the CSIA0 unit. * If the CSIAE0 bit is cleared from 1 to 0, the buffer RAM value is not held. Also, when the CSIAE0 bit = 0, the buffer RAM cannot be accessed. ATE0 Automatic transfer operation enable/disable control 0 1-byte transfer mode 1 Automatic transfer mode ATM0 Specification of automatic transfer mode 0 Single transfer mode (stops at address specified with ADTP0 register) 1 Repeat transfer mode (Following transfer completion, the ADTC0 register is cleared to 00H and transmission starts again.) MASTER0 Specification of CSIA0 master/slave mode 0 Slave mode (synchronized with SCKA0 input clock) 1 Master mode (synchronized with internal clock) TXEA0 Transmission enable/disable control 0 Disable transmission (SOA0: Low level) 1 Enable transmission RXEA0 Reception enable/disable control 0 Disable reception 1 Enable reception DIRA0 Specification of transfer data direction 0 MSB first 1 LSB first Note The ADTC0, CSIT0, and SIOA0 registers and the CSIS0.TSF0 bit are reset. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 497 CHAPTER 17 CLOCKED SERIAL INTERFACE A (CSIA) WITH AUTOMATIC TRANSMIT/RECEIVE FUNCTION (2) Serial status register 0 (CSIS0) This is an 8-bit register used to select the serial clock and to indicate the transfer status of CSIA0. This register can be read or written in 8-bit or 1-bit units. Reset sets this register to 00H. However, rewriting the CSIS0 register is prohibited when the TSF0 bit is 1. After reset: 00H Address: FFFFFD41H 6 7 CSIS0 R/W CKSA01 CKSA00 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 TSF0 Serial clock (fSCKA) selectionNote CKSA01 CKSA00 20 MHz 16 MHz 10 MHz 0 0 fXX 0 1 fXX/2 100 ns 125 ns 200 ns 1 0 fXX/4 200 ns 250 ns 400 ns 1 1 fXX/8 400 ns 500 ns 800 ns Setting prohibited Setting prohibited 100 ns Rewriting CSIS0 is prohibited when the CSIMA0.CSIAE0 bit is 1. TSF0 Transfer status 0 CSIAE0 bit = 0 At reset input At completion of specified transfer When transfer has been suspended by setting the CSIT0.ATSTP0 bit to 1 1 From transfer start to completion of specified transfer Note Set fSCKA so as to satisfy the following conditions. * VDD = REGC = 4.0 to 5.5 V: fSCKA 12 MHz * VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, REGC = 10 F: fSCKA 6 MHz * VDD = REGC = 2.7 to 4.0 V: fSCKA 6 MHz Cautions 1. The TSF0 bit is read-only. 2. When the TSF0 bit = 1, rewriting the CSIMA0, CSIS0, BRGCA0, ADTP0, ADTI0, and SIOA0 registers is prohibited. However, the transfer buffer RAM can be rewritten. 3. Be sure to clear bits 1 to 5 to "0". 498 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 17 CLOCKED SERIAL INTERFACE A (CSIA) WITH AUTOMATIC TRANSMIT/RECEIVE FUNCTION (3) Serial trigger register 0 (CSIT0) The CSIT0 register between the buffer RAM and shift register is an 8-bit register used to control execution/stop of automatic data transfer. This register can be read or written in 8-bit or 1-bit units. However, manipulate only when the CSIMA0.ATE0 bit is 1 (manipulation prohibited when ATE0 bit = 0). Reset sets this register to 00H. After reset: 00H CSIT0 R/W Address: FFFFFD42H 7 6 5 4 3 2 <1> <0> 0 0 0 0 0 0 ATSTP0 ATSTA0 ATSTP0 Automatic data transfer suspension 0 - 1 Stop automatic data transfer Even when the ATSTP0 bit is set to 1, transfer does not stop until 1 byte has been transferred. 1 is held until immediately before the transmission/reception completion interrupt request signal (INTCSIA0) is generated, and ATSTP0 is automatically cleared to 0 after that. After automatic transfer has been suspended, the data address at the point of suspension is stored in the ADTC0 register. A function to resume automatic data transfer is not provided, so if transfer has been interrupted by setting the ATSTP0 bit to 1, set each register again, and set the ATSTA0 bit to 1 to start automatic data transfer. ATSTA0 Automatic data transfer start 0 1 - Start automatic data transfer Even when the ATSTA0 bit is set to 1, automatic data transfer does not start until 1 byte has been transferred. 1 is held until immediately before the INTCSIA0 signal is generated, and ATSTA0 is automatically cleared to 0 after that. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 499 CHAPTER 17 CLOCKED SERIAL INTERFACE A (CSIA) WITH AUTOMATIC TRANSMIT/RECEIVE FUNCTION (4) Divisor selection register 0 (BRGCA0) This is an 8-bit register used to control the serial transfer speed (divisor of CSIA clock). This register can be read or written in 8-bit units. However, when the CSIS0.TSF0 bit is 1, rewriting the BRGCA0 register is prohibited. Reset sets this register to 03H. After reset: 03H BRGCA0 R/W Address: FFFFFD43H 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 BRGC01 BRGC00 0 BRGC01 BRGC00 Selection of CSIA0 serial clock (fSCKA division ratio) 0 6 (fSCKA/6) 0 1 8 (fSCKA/8) 1 0 16 (fSCKA/16) 1 1 32 (fSCKA/32) 0 1 (5) Automatic data transfer address point specification register 0 (ADTP0) This is an 8-bit register used to specify the buffer RAM address that ends transfer during automatic data transfer (CSIMA0.ATE0 bit = 1). This register can be read or written in 8-bit units. However, when the CSIS0.TSF0 bit is 1, rewriting the ADTP0 register is prohibited. Reset sets this register to 00H. In the V850ES/KF1, 00H to 1FH can be specified because 32 bytes of buffer RAM are incorporated. Example When the ADTP0 register is set to 07H 8 bytes of FFFFFE00H to FFFFFE07H are transferred. In repeat transfer mode (CSIMA0.ATM0 bit = 1), transfer is performed repeatedly up to the address value specified by the ADTP0 register. Example When the ADTP0 register is set to 07H (repeat transfer mode) Transfer is repeated as FFFFFE00H to FFFFFE07H, ... . After reset: 00H ADTP0 Address: FFFFFD44H 7 6 5 4 0 0 0 ADTP04 Caution 500 R/W 3 2 ADTP03 ADTP02 Be sure to clear bits 5 to 7 to "0". User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 1 0 ADTP01 ADTP00 CHAPTER 17 CLOCKED SERIAL INTERFACE A (CSIA) WITH AUTOMATIC TRANSMIT/RECEIVE FUNCTION The relationship between buffer RAM address values and the ADTP0 register setting values is shown below. Table 17-2. Relationship Between Buffer RAM Address Values and ADTP0 Register Setting Values Buffer RAM Address Value ADTP0 Register Setting Value Buffer RAM Address Value ADTP0 Register Setting Value FFFFFE00H 00H FFFFFE10H 10H FFFFFE01H 01H FFFFFE11H 11H FFFFFE02H 02H FFFFFE12H 12H FFFFFE03H 03H FFFFFE13H 13H FFFFFE04H 04H FFFFFE14H 14H FFFFFE05H 05H FFFFFE15H 15H FFFFFE06H 06H FFFFFE16H 16H FFFFFE07H 07H FFFFFE17H 17H FFFFFE08H 08H FFFFFE18H 18H FFFFFE09H 09H FFFFFE19H 19H FFFFFE0AH 0AH FFFFFE1AH 1AH FFFFFE0BH 0BH FFFFFE1BH 1BH FFFFFE0CH 0CH FFFFFE1CH 1CH FFFFFE0DH 0DH FFFFFE1DH 1DH FFFFFE0EH 0EH FFFFFE1EH 1EH FFFFFE0FH 0FH FFFFFE1FH 1FH User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 501 CHAPTER 17 CLOCKED SERIAL INTERFACE A (CSIA) WITH AUTOMATIC TRANSMIT/RECEIVE FUNCTION (6) Automatic data transfer interval specification register 0 (ADTI0) This is an 8-bit register used to specify the interval period between 1-byte transfers during automatic data transfer (CSIMA0.ATE0 bit = 1). Set this register when in master mode (CSIMA0.MASTER0 bit = 1) (setting is unnecessary in slave mode). Setting in 1-byte transfer mode (ATE0 bit = 0) is also valid. When the interval time specified by the ADTI0 register after the end of 1-byte transfer has elapsed, a transmission/reception completion interrupt request signal (INTCSIA0) is output. The number of clocks for the interval can be set to between 0 and 63 clocks. This register can be read or written in 8-bit units. However, when the CSIS0.TSF0 bit is 1, rewriting the ADTI0 register is prohibited. Reset sets this register to 00H. After reset: 00H ADTI0 R/W Address: FFFFFD45H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 ADTI05 ADTI04 ADTI03 ADTI02 ADTI01 ADTI00 The specified interval time is the transfer clock (specified by the BRGCA0 register) multiplied by an integer value. Example When ADTI0 register = 03H SCKA0 Interval time of 3 clocks (7) CSIA0 buffer RAM (CSIA0Bm) This area holds transmit/receive data (up to 32 bytes) in automatic transfer mode in 1-byte units. This register can be read or written in 16-bit units. However, when the higher 8 bits and the lower 8 bits of the CSIA0Bm register are used as the CSIA0BmH register and CSIA0BmL register, respectively, these registers can be read or written in 8-bit units. After automatic transfer is started, only data equal to one byte more than the number of bytes stored in the ADTP0 register is transmitted/received in sequence from the CSIA0B0L register. Cautions 1. To read the value of the CSIA0Bm register after data is written to the register, wait for the duration of more than six clocks of fSCKA (serial clock set by the CSIS0.CKSA01 and CSIS0.CKSA00 bits) or until data is written to the buffer RAM at another address. 2. When the main clock stops and the CPU operates on the subclock, do not access the CSIA0Bm register. For details, refer to 3.4.8 (1) (b). Remark 502 m = 0 to F User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 17 CLOCKED SERIAL INTERFACE A (CSIA) WITH AUTOMATIC TRANSMIT/RECEIVE FUNCTION Table 17-3. CSIA0 Buffer RAM Address Symbol R/W Manipulatable Bits 8 FFFFFE00H FFFFFE00H FFFFFE01H CSIA0B0 R/W CSIA0B0L R/W After Reset 16 Undefined Undefined CSIA0B0H R/W CSIA0B1 R/W FFFFFE02H CSIA0B1L R/W Undefined FFFFFE03H CSIA0B1H R/W Undefined FFFFFE02H FFFFFE04H FFFFFE04H FFFFFE05H CSIA0B2 R/W CSIA0B2L R/W CSIA0B2H R/W CSIA0B3 R/W FFFFFE06H CSIA0B3L R/W FFFFFE07H CSIA0B3H R/W CSIA0B4 R/W CSIA0B4L R/W FFFFFE06H FFFFFE08H FFFFFE08H FFFFFE09H Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined CSIA0B4H R/W CSIA0B5 R/W FFFFFE0AH CSIA0B5L R/W Undefined FFFFFE0BH CSIA0B5H R/W Undefined FFFFFE0AH FFFFFE0CH FFFFFE0CH FFFFFE0DH FFFFFE0EH CSIA0B6 R/W CSIA0B6L R/W CSIA0B6H R/W CSIA0B7 R/W CSIA0B7L R/W FFFFFE0FH CSIA0B7H R/W CSIA0B8 R/W CSIA0B8L R/W FFFFFE10H FFFFFE11H Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined FFFFFE0EH FFFFFE10H Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined CSIA0B8H R/W CSIA0B9 R/W FFFFFE12H CSIA0B9L R/W Undefined FFFFFE13H CSIA0B9H R/W Undefined FFFFFE12H FFFFFE14H CSIA0BA R/W FFFFFE14H CSIA0BAL R/W FFFFFE15H CSIA0BAH R/W CSIA0BB R/W FFFFFE16H CSIA0BBL R/W FFFFFE17H CSIA0BBH R/W CSIA0BC R/W CSIA0BCL R/W FFFFFE18H FFFFFE19H Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined FFFFFE16H FFFFFE18H Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined CSIA0BCH R/W CSIA0BD R/W FFFFFE1AH CSIA0BDL R/W Undefined FFFFFE1BH CSIA0BDH R/W Undefined FFFFFE1AH FFFFFE1CH FFFFFE1CH FFFFFE1DH FFFFFE1EH Undefined CSIA0BE R/W CSIA0BEL R/W CSIA0BEH R/W CSIA0BF R/W Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined FFFFFE1EH CSIA0BFL R/W Undefined FFFFFE1FH CSIA0BFH R/W Undefined User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 503 CHAPTER 17 CLOCKED SERIAL INTERFACE A (CSIA) WITH AUTOMATIC TRANSMIT/RECEIVE FUNCTION 17.4 Operation CSIA0 can be used in the following two modes. * 3-wire serial I/O mode * 3-wire serial I/O mode with automatic transmit/receive function 17.4.1 3-wire serial I/O mode The one-byte data transmission/reception is executed in the mode in which the CSIMA0.ATE0 bit is cleared to 0. In this mode, communication is executed by using three lines: serial clock (SCKA0), serial data output (SOA0), and serial data input (SIA0) pins. The 3-wire serial I/O mode is controlled by the following three registers. * Serial operation mode specification register 0 (CSIMA0) * Serial status register 0 (CSIS0) * Divisor selection register 0 (BRGCA0) Remark For the alternate-function pin settings, refer to Table 4-14 Settings When Port Pins Are Used for Alternate Functions. 504 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 17 CLOCKED SERIAL INTERFACE A (CSIA) WITH AUTOMATIC TRANSMIT/RECEIVE FUNCTION (1) 1-byte transmission/reception communication operation (a) 1-byte transmission/reception When the CSIMA0.CSIAE0 bit and the CSIMA0.ATE0 bit = 1, 0, respectively, if transfer data is written to the SIOA0 register, the data is output via the SOA0 pin in synchronization with the SCKA0 pin falling edge, and then input via the SIA0 pin in synchronization with the falling edge of the SCKA0 pin, and stored in the SIOA0 register in synchronization with the rising edge 1 clock later. Data transmission and data reception can be performed simultaneously. If only reception is to be performed, transfer can only be started by writing a dummy value to the SIOA0 register. When transfer of 1 byte is complete, a transmission/reception completion interrupt request signal (INTCSIA0) is generated. In 1-byte transmission/reception, the setting of the CSIMA0.ATM0 bit is invalid. Be sure to read data after confirming that the CSIS0.TSF0 bit = 0. Caution Determine the setting procedure of alternate-function pins considering the relationship with the communication partner. Figure 17-2. 3-Wire Serial I/O Mode Timing SCKA0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SIA0 DI7 DI6 DI5 DI4 DI3 DI2 DI1 SOA0 DO7 DO6 DO5 DO4 DO3 DO2 DO1 DI0 DO0 INTCSIA0 Transfer starts at falling edge of SCKA0 pin End of transfer TSF0 SIOA0 write Caution The SOA0 pin becomes low level by the SIOA0 register write. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 505 CHAPTER 17 CLOCKED SERIAL INTERFACE A (CSIA) WITH AUTOMATIC TRANSMIT/RECEIVE FUNCTION (b) Data format In the data format, data is changed in synchronization with the SCKA0 pin falling edge as shown in Figure 17-3. The data length is fixed to 8 bits and the data transfer direction can be switched by the specification of the CSIMA0.DIRA0 bit. Figure 17-3. Format of Transmit/Receive Data (a) MSB-first (DIRA0 bit = 0) SCKA0 SIA0 DO7 DO6 DO5 DO4 DO3 DO2 DO1 DO0 SOA0 DI7 DI6 DI5 DI4 DI3 DI2 DI1 DI0 (b) LSB-first (DIRA0 bit = 1) SCKA0 506 SIA0 DO0 DO1 DO2 DO3 DO4 DO5 DO6 DO7 SOA0 DI0 DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 17 CLOCKED SERIAL INTERFACE A (CSIA) WITH AUTOMATIC TRANSMIT/RECEIVE FUNCTION (c) Switching MSB/LSB as start bit Figure 17-4 shows the configuration of the SIOA0 register and the internal bus. As shown in the figure, MSB/LSB can be read or written in reverse form. Switching MSB/LSB as the start bit can be specified using the CSIMA0.DIRA0 bit. Start bit switching is realized by switching the bit order for data written to the SIOA0 register. The SIOA0 register shift order remains unchanged. Thus, switching between MSB-first and LSB-first must be performed before writing data to the SIOA0 register. Figure 17-4. Transfer Bit Order Switching Circuit 7 6 Internal bus 1 0 LSB-first MSB-first Read/write gate Read/write gate SOA0 latch SIA0 Shift register 0 (SIOA0) D Q SOA0 SCKA0 (d) Transfer start Serial transfer is started by setting transfer data to the SIOA0 register when the following two conditions are satisfied. * CSIA0 operation control bit (CSIMA0.CSIAE0) = 1 * Other than during serial communication Caution If the CSIAE0 bit is set to 1 after data is written to the SIOA0 register, communication does not start. Upon termination of 8-bit communication, serial communication automatically stops and the transmission/reception completion interrupt request signal (INTCSIA0) is generated. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 507 CHAPTER 17 CLOCKED SERIAL INTERFACE A (CSIA) WITH AUTOMATIC TRANSMIT/RECEIVE FUNCTION 17.4.2 3-wire serial I/O mode with automatic transmit/receive function Up to 32 bytes of data can be transmitted/received without using software in the mode in which the CSIMA0.ATE0 bit is set to 1. After communication is started, only data of the set number of bytes stored in RAM in advance can be transmitted, and only data of the set number of bytes can be received and stored in RAM. The 3-wire serial I/O mode with automatic transmit/receive function is controlled by the following registers. * Serial operation mode specification register 0 (CSIMA0) * Serial status register 0 (CSIS0) * Serial trigger register 0 (CSIT0) * Divisor selection register 0 (BRGCA0) * Automatic data transfer address point specification register 0 (ADTP0) * Automatic data transfer interval specification register 0 (ADTI0) Remark For the alternate-function pin settings, refer to Table 4-14 Settings When Port Pins Are Used for Alternate Functions. (1) Automatic transmit/receive data setting (a) Transmit data setting <1> Write transmit data from the least significant address FFFFFE00H of buffer RAM (up to FFFFFE1FH at maximum). The transmit data should be in the order from lower address to higher address. <2> Set the ADTP0 register to the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the number of transmit data bytes. (b) Automatic transmission/reception mode setting <1> Set the CSIMA0.CSIAE0 bit and the CSIMA0.ATE0 bit to 11. <2> Set the CSIMA0.RXEA0 bit and the CSIMA0.TXEA0 bit to 11. <3> Set a data transfer interval in the ADTI0 register. <4> Set the CSIT0.ATSTA0 bit to 1. The following operations are automatically carried out when (a) and (b) are carried out. * After the buffer RAM data indicated by the ADTC0 register (initial value: 00H) is transferred to the SIOA0 register, transmission is carried out (start of automatic transmission/reception). * The received data is written to the buffer RAM address indicated by the ADTC0 register. * The ADTC0 register is incremented and the next data transmission/reception is carried out. Data transmission/reception continues until the ADTC0 register incremental output matches the set value of the ADTP0 register (end of automatic transmission/reception). However, if the CSIMA0.ATM0 bit is set to 1 (continuous transfer mode), the ADTC0 register is cleared after a match between the ADTP0 and ADTC0 registers, and then repeated transmission/reception is started. * When automatic transmission/reception is terminated, the CSIS0.TSF0 bit is cleared to 0. Caution Determine the setting procedure of alternate-function pins considering the relationship with the communication partner. 508 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 17 CLOCKED SERIAL INTERFACE A (CSIA) WITH AUTOMATIC TRANSMIT/RECEIVE FUNCTION (2) Automatic transmission/reception communication operation (a) Automatic transmission/reception mode Automatic transmission/reception can be performed using buffer RAM. The data stored in the buffer RAM is output from the SOA0 pin via the SIOA0 register in synchronization with the SCKA0 pin falling edge by performing (a) and (b) in (1) Automatic transmit/receive data setting. The data is then input from the SIA0 pin via the SIOA0 register in synchronization with the falling edge of the SCKA0 pin and the receive data is stored in the buffer RAM in synchronization with the rising edge 1 clock later. Data transfer ends if the CSIS0.TSF0 bit is cleared to 0 when any of the following conditions is met. * Reset by clearing the CSIMA0.CSIAE0 bit to 0 * Transfer of 1 byte is complete by setting the CSIT0.ATSTP0 bit to 1 * Transfer of the range specified by the ADTP0 register is complete At this time, a transmission/reception completion interrupt request signal (INTCSIA0) is generated except when the CSIAE0 bit = 0. If a transfer is terminated in the middle, transfer starting from the remaining data is not possible. Read the ADTC0 register to confirm how much of the data has already been transferred, set the transfer data again, and perform (a) and (b) in (1) Automatic transmit/receive data setting. Figure 17-5 shows the operation timing in automatic transmission/reception mode and Figure 17-6 shows the operation flowchart. Figure 17-7 shows the operation of the buffer RAM when 6 bytes of data are transmitted/received. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 509 CHAPTER 17 CLOCKED SERIAL INTERFACE A (CSIA) WITH AUTOMATIC TRANSMIT/RECEIVE FUNCTION Figure 17-5. Automatic Transmission/Reception Mode Operation Timings Interval Interval SCKA0 SOA0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 SIA0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 INTCSIA0 TSF0 Cautions 1. Because, in the automatic transmission/reception mode, the automatic transmit/receive function reads/writes data from/to the buffer RAM after 1-byte transmission/reception, an interval is inserted until the next transmission/reception. As the buffer RAM read/write is performed at the same time as CPU processing, the interval is dependent upon the value of the ADTI0 register. 2. When the TSF0 bit is cleared, the SOA0 pin becomes low level. 3. If CPU access to the buffer RAM conflicts with CSIA0 read/write during the interval time, the interval time becomes longer. 510 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 17 CLOCKED SERIAL INTERFACE A (CSIA) WITH AUTOMATIC TRANSMIT/RECEIVE FUNCTION Figure 17-6. Automatic Transmission/Reception Mode Flowchart Start Write transmit data in buffer RAM Set ADTP0 register to the value (pointer value) obtained by subtracting 1 from the number of transmit data bytes Software execution Set automatic transmission/ reception mode Set CSIT0.ATSTA0 bit to 1 Write transmit data from buffer RAM to SIOA0 register Transmission/reception operation Increment pointer value Hardware execution Write receive data from SIOA0 register to buffer RAM ADTP0 register = ADTC0 register No Yes TSF0 bit = 0 No Software execution Yes End User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 511 CHAPTER 17 CLOCKED SERIAL INTERFACE A (CSIA) WITH AUTOMATIC TRANSMIT/RECEIVE FUNCTION In 6-byte transmission/reception (CSIMA0.ATM0 bit = 0, CSIMA0.RXEA0 bit = 1, CSIMA0.TXEA0 bit = 1) in automatic transmission/reception mode, buffer RAM operates as follows. (i) When transmission/reception operation is started (refer to Figure 17-7 (a).) When the CSIT0.ATSTA0 bit is set to 1, transmit data 1 (T1) is transferred from the buffer RAM to the SIOA0 register. When transmission of the first byte is completed, receive data 1 (R1) is transferred from the SIOA0 register to the buffer RAM, and the ADTC0 register is incremented. Then transmit data 2 (T2) is transferred from the buffer RAM to the SIOA0 register. (ii) 4th byte transmission/reception point (refer to Figure 17-7 (b).) Transmission/reception of the third byte is completed, and transmit data 4 (T4) is transferred from the buffer RAM to the SIOA0 register. When transmission of the fourth byte is completed, the receive data 4 (R4) is transferred from the SIOA0 register to the buffer RAM, and the value of the ADTC0 register is incremented. (iii) Completion of transmission/reception (refer to Figure 17-7 (c).) When transmission of the sixth byte is completed, receive data 6 (R6) is transferred from the SIOA0 register to the buffer RAM, and the transmission/reception completion interrupt request signal (INTCSIA0) is generated. Figure 17-7. Buffer RAM Operation in 6-Byte Transmission/Reception (in Automatic Transmission/Reception Mode) (1/2) (a) When transmission/reception operation is started FFFFFE1FH FFFFFE05H Transmit data 6 (T6) Receive data 1 (R1) SIOA0 register 5 ADTP0 register 0 ADTC0 register Not generated INTCSIA0 signal Transmit data 5 (T5) Transmit data 4 (T4) Transmit data 3 (T3) Transmit data 2 (T2) FFFFFE00H 512 +1 Transmit data 1 (T1) User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 17 CLOCKED SERIAL INTERFACE A (CSIA) WITH AUTOMATIC TRANSMIT/RECEIVE FUNCTION Figure 17-7. Buffer RAM Operation in 6-Byte Transmission/Reception (in Automatic Transmission/Reception Mode) (2/2) (b) 4th byte transmission/reception FFFFFE1FH FFFFFE05H Transmit data 6 (R6) Receive data 4 (R4) SIOA0 register 5 ADTP0 register 3 ADTC0 register Not generated INTCSIA0 signal Transmit data 5 (R5) Transmit data 4 (R4) Receive data 3 (T3) Receive data 2 (T2) FFFFFE00H +1 Receive data 1 (T1) (c) Completion of transmission/reception FFFFFE1FH FFFFFE05H Receive data 6 (R6) SIOA0 register Receive data 5 (R5) Receive data 4 (R4) Receive data 3 (R3) 5 ADTP0 register 5 ADTC0 register Generated INTCSIA0 signal Receive data 2 (R2) FFFFFE00H Receive data 1 (R1) User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 513 CHAPTER 17 CLOCKED SERIAL INTERFACE A (CSIA) WITH AUTOMATIC TRANSMIT/RECEIVE FUNCTION (b) Automatic transmission mode In this mode, the specified number of 8-bit unit data are transmitted. Serial transfer is started when the CSIT0.ATSTA0 bit is set to 1 while the CSIMA0.CSIAE0, CSIMA0.ATE0, and CSIMA0.TXEA0 bits are set to 1. When the final byte has been transmitted, an interrupt request signal (INTCSIA0) is generated. Figure 17-8 shows the automatic transmission mode operation timing, and Figure 17-9 shows the operation flowchart. Figure 17-10 shows the operation of the buffer RAM when 6 bytes of data are transmitted. Figure 17-8. Automatic Transmission Mode Operation Timing Interval Interval SCKA0 SOA0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 INTCSIA0 TSF0 Cautions 1. Because, in the automatic transmission mode, the automatic transmit/receive function reads data from the buffer RAM after 1-byte transmission, an interval is inserted until the next transmission. As the buffer RAM read is performed at the same time as CPU processing, the interval is dependent upon the value of the ADTI0 register. 2. When the TSF0 bit is cleared, the SOA0 pin becomes low level. 3. If CPU access to the buffer RAM conflicts with CSIA0 read/write during the interval time, the interval time becomes longer. 514 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 17 CLOCKED SERIAL INTERFACE A (CSIA) WITH AUTOMATIC TRANSMIT/RECEIVE FUNCTION Figure 17-9. Automatic Transmission Mode Flowchart Start Write transmit data in buffer RAM Set ADTP0 register to the value (pointer value) obtained by subtracting 1 from the number of transmit data bytes Software execution Set automatic transmission mode Set CSIT0.ATSTA0 bit to 1 Write transmit data from buffer RAM to SIOA0 register Increment pointer value Transmission operation Hardware execution ADTP0 register = ADTC0 register No Yes TSF0 bit = 0 No Software execution Yes End User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 515 CHAPTER 17 CLOCKED SERIAL INTERFACE A (CSIA) WITH AUTOMATIC TRANSMIT/RECEIVE FUNCTION In 6-byte transmission (CSIMA0.ATM0 bit = 0, CSIMA0.RXEA0 bit = 0, CSIMA0.TXEA0 bit = 1, CSIMA0.ATE0 bit = 1) in automatic transmission mode, buffer RAM operates as follows. (i) When transmission is started (refer to Figure 17-10 (a).) When the CSIT0.ATSTA0 bit is set to 1, transmit data 1 (T1) is transferred from the buffer RAM to the SIOA0 register. When transmission of the first byte is completed, the ADTC0 register is incremented. Then transmit data 2 (T2) is transferred from the buffer RAM to the SIOA0 register. (ii) 4th byte transmission point (refer to Figure 17-10 (b).) Transmission of the third byte is completed, and transmit data 4 (T4) is transferred from the buffer RAM to the SIOA0 register. When transmission of the fourth byte is completed, the value of the ADTC0 register is incremented. (iii) Completion of transmission (refer to Figure 17-10 (c).) When transmission of the sixth byte is completed, the interrupt request signal (INTCSIA0) is generated, and the TFS0 flag is cleared to 0. Figure 17-10. Buffer RAM Operation in 6-Byte Transmission (in Automatic Transmission Mode) (1/2) (a) When transmission is started FFFFFE1FH FFFFFE05H Transmit data 6 (T6) SIOA0 register Transmit data 5 (T5) Transmit data 4 (T4) Transmit data 3 (T3) Transmit data 2 (T2) FFFFFE00H 516 5 ADTP0 register 0 ADTC0 register Not generated INTCSIA0 signal +1 Transmit data 1 (T1) User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 17 CLOCKED SERIAL INTERFACE A (CSIA) WITH AUTOMATIC TRANSMIT/RECEIVE FUNCTION Figure 17-10. Buffer RAM Operation in 6-Byte Transmission (in Automatic Transmission Mode) (2/2) (b) 4th byte transmission point FFFFFE1FH FFFFFE05H Transmit data 6 (T6) SIOA0 register Transmit data 5 (T5) 5 ADTP0 register 3 ADTC0 register Not generated INTCSIA0 signal Transmit data 4 (T4) Transmit data 3 (T3) Transmit data 2 (T2) FFFFFE00H +1 Transmit data 1 (T1) (c) Completion of transmission FFFFFE1FH FFFFFE05H Transmit data 6 (T6) SIOA0 register Transmit data 5 (T5) Transmit data 4 (T4) Transmit data 3 (T3) 5 ADTP0 register 5 ADTC0 register Generated INTCSIA0 signal Transmit data 2 (T2) FFFFFE00H Transmit data 1 (T1) User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 517 CHAPTER 17 CLOCKED SERIAL INTERFACE A (CSIA) WITH AUTOMATIC TRANSMIT/RECEIVE FUNCTION (c) Repeat transmission mode In this mode, data stored in the buffer RAM is transmitted repeatedly. Serial transfer is started when the CSIT0.ATSTA0 bit is set to 1 while the CSIMA0.CSIAE0, CSIMA0.ATE0, CSIMA0.ATM0, and CSIMA0.TXEA0 bits are set to 1. Unlike the basic transmission mode, after the specified number of bytes has been transmitted, the transmission/reception completion interrupt request signal (INTCSIA0) is not generated, the ADTC0 register is reset to 0, and the buffer RAM contents are transmitted again. The repeat transmission mode operation timing is shown in Figure 17-11, and the operation flowchart in Figure 17-12. Figure 17-13 shows the operation of the buffer RAM when 6 bytes of data are transmitted in the repeat transmission mode. Figure 17-11. Repeat Transmission Mode Operation Timing Interval Interval SCKA0 SOA0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D7 D6 D5 Cautions 1. Because, in the repeat transmission mode, a read is performed on the buffer RAM after the transmission of one byte, the interval is included in the period up to the next transmission. As the buffer RAM read is performed at the same time as CPU processing, the interval is dependent upon the value of the ADTI0 register. 2. If CPU access to the buffer RAM conflicts with CSIA0 read/write during the interval time, the interval time becomes longer. 518 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 17 CLOCKED SERIAL INTERFACE A (CSIA) WITH AUTOMATIC TRANSMIT/RECEIVE FUNCTION Figure 17-12. Repeat Transmission Mode Flowchart Start Write transmit data in buffer RAM Set ADTP0 register to the value (pointer value) obtained by subtracting 1 from the number of transmit data bytes Software execution Set repeat transmission mode Set CSIT0.ATSTA0 bit to 1 Write transmit data from buffer RAM to SIOA0 register Increment pointer value Transmission operation Hardware execution No ADTP0 register = ADTC0 register Yes Reset ADTC0 register to 0 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 519 CHAPTER 17 CLOCKED SERIAL INTERFACE A (CSIA) WITH AUTOMATIC TRANSMIT/RECEIVE FUNCTION In 6-byte transmission (CSIMA0.ATM0 bit = 1, CSIMA0.RXEA0 bit = 0, CSIMA0.TXEA0 bit = 1, CSIMA0.ATE0 bit = 1) in repeat transmission mode, buffer RAM operates as follows. (i) When transmission is started (refer to Figure 17-13 (a).) When the CSIT0.ATSTA0 bit is set to 1, transmit data 1 (T1) is transferred from the buffer RAM to the SIOA0 register. When transmission of the first byte is completed, the value of the ADTC0 register is incremented. Then transmit data 2 (T2) is transferred from the buffer RAM to the SIOA0 register. (ii) Upon completion of transmission of 6 bytes (refer to Figure 17-13 (b).) When transmission of the sixth byte is completed, the interrupt request signal (INTCSIA0) is not generated. The ADTC0 register is reset to 0. (iii) 7th byte transmission point (refer to Figure 17-13 (c).) Transmit data 1 (T1) is transferred from the buffer RAM to the SIOA0 register again. When transmission of the first byte is completed, the value of the ADTC0 register is incremented. Then transmit data 2 (T2) is transferred from the buffer RAM to the SIOA0 register. Figure 17-13. Buffer RAM Operation in 6-Byte Transmission (in Repeat Transmission Mode) (1/2) (a) When transmission is started FFFFFE1FH FFFFFE05H Transmit data 6 (T6) SIOA0 register Transmit data 5 (T5) Transmit data 4 (T4) Transmit data 3 (T3) Transmit data 2 (T2) FFFFFE00H 520 +1 Transmit data 1 (T1) User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 5 ADTP0 register 0 ADTC0 register Not generated INTCSIA0 signal CHAPTER 17 CLOCKED SERIAL INTERFACE A (CSIA) WITH AUTOMATIC TRANSMIT/RECEIVE FUNCTION Figure 17-13. Buffer RAM Operation in 6-Byte Transmission (in Repeat Transmission Mode) (2/2) (b) Upon completion of transmission of 6 bytes FFFFFE1FH FFFFFE05H Transmit data 6 (T6) SIOA0 register Transmit data 5 (T5) 5 ADTP0 register 5 ADTC0 register Not generated INTCSIA0 signal Transmit data 4 (T4) Transmit data 3 (T3) Transmit data 2 (T2) FFFFFE00H Transmit data 1 (T1) (c) 7th byte transmission point FFFFFE1FH FFFFFE05H Transmit data 6 (T6) SIOA0 register Transmit data 5 (T5) Transmit data 4 (T4) Transmit data 3 (T3) Transmit data 2 (T2) FFFFFE00H 5 ADTP0 register 0 ADTC0 register Not generated INTCSIA0 signal +1 Transmit data 1 (T1) User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 521 CHAPTER 17 CLOCKED SERIAL INTERFACE A (CSIA) WITH AUTOMATIC TRANSMIT/RECEIVE FUNCTION (d) Data format In the data format, data is changed in synchronization with the SCKA0 pin falling edge as shown in Figure 17-14. The data length is fixed to 8 bits and the data transfer direction can be switched by the specification of the CSIMA0.DIRA0 bit. Figure 17-14. Format of CSIA0 Transmit/Receive Data (a) MSB-first (DIRA0 bit = 0) SCKA0 SIA0 DO7 DO6 DO5 DO4 DO3 DO2 DO1 DO0 SOA0 DI7 DI6 DI5 DI4 DI3 DI2 DI1 DI0 (b) LSB-first (DIRA0 bit = 1) SCKA0 522 SIA0 DO0 DO1 DO2 DO3 DO4 DO5 DO6 DO7 SOA0 DI0 DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 17 CLOCKED SERIAL INTERFACE A (CSIA) WITH AUTOMATIC TRANSMIT/RECEIVE FUNCTION (e) Automatic transmission/reception suspension and restart Automatic transmission/reception can be temporarily suspended by setting the CSIT0.ATSTP0 bit to 1. During 8-bit data transfer, the transmission/reception is not suspended. It is suspended upon completion of 8-bit data transfer. When suspended, the CSIS0.TSF0 bit is cleared to 0 after transfer of the 8th bit. To restart automatic transmission/reception, set the CSIT0.ATSTA0 bit to 1. The remaining data can be transmitted in this way. Cautions 1. If the IDLE instruction is executed during automatic transmission/reception, transfer is suspended and the IDLE mode is set if during 8-bit data transfer. When the IDLE mode is cleared, automatic transmission/reception is restarted from the suspended point. 2. When suspending automatic transmission/reception, do not change the operating mode to 3-wire serial I/O mode while the TSF0 bit = 1. Figure 17-15. Automatic Transmission/Reception Suspension and Restart ATSTP0 bit = 1 (Suspend command) Suspend Restart command ATSTA0 bit = 1 SCKA0 SOA0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 SIA0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 523 CHAPTER 18 I2C BUS To use the I2C bus function, use the P38/SDA0 and P39/SCL0 pins as the serial transmit/receive data I/O pin (SDA0) and serial clock I/O pin (SCL0), respectively, and set them to N-ch open-drain output. In the V850ES/KF1, one channel of I2C bus is provided. The products with an on-chip I2C bus are shown below. PD703208Y, 703209Y, 703210Y, 703211Y, 70F3210Y, 70F3210HY, 70F3211HY 18.1 Features The I2C0 has the following two modes. * Operation stop mode * I2C (Inter IC) bus mode (multimaster supported) (1) Operation stop mode This mode is used when serial transfers are not performed. It can therefore be used to reduce power consumption. (2) I2C bus mode (multimaster supported) This mode is used for 8-bit data transfers with several devices via two lines: a serial clock (SCL0) line and a serial data bus (SDA0) line. This mode complies with the I2C bus format and the master device can generate "start condition", "address", "transfer direction specification", "data", and "stop condition" data to the slave device, via the serial data bus. The slave device automatically detects these received state and data by hardware. This function can simplify the part of application program that controls the I2C bus. Since the SCL0 and SDA0 pins are used for N-ch open drain outputs, I2C0 requires pull-up resistors for the serial clock line and the serial data bus line. 524 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS Figure 18-1. Block Diagram of I2C0 <R> Internal bus IIC status register 0 (IICS0) MSTS0 ALD0 EXC0 COI0 TRC0 ACKD0 STD0 SPD0 IIC control register 0 (IICC0) IICE0 LREL0 WREL0 SPIE0 WTIM0 ACKE0 STT0 SPT0 Slave address register 0 (SVA0) SDA0 IIC shift register 0 (IIC0) DFC0 Set Match signal Noise eliminator D Q Stop condition generator SO latch CL01, CL00 Data retention time correction circuit TRC0 N-ch open-drain output Start condition generator Clear ACK generator Output control Wakeup controller ACK detector Start condition detector Stop condition detector SCL0 Noise eliminator DFC0 Interrupt request signal generator Serial clock counter Serial clock controller IICS0.MSTS0, EXC0, COI0 Serial clock wait controller N-ch open-drain output IIC shift register 0 (IIC0) IICC0.STT0, SPT0 IICS0.MSTS0, EXC0, COI0 fxx INTIIC0 Bus status detector Prescaler CLD0 DAD0 SMC0 DFC0 CL01 CL00 CLX0 IIC clock select register 0 (IICCL0) STCF0 IICBSY0 STCEN0 IICRSV0 IIC function expansion register 0 (IICX0) IIC flag register 0 (IICF0) Internal bus User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 525 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS A serial bus configuration example is shown below. Figure 18-2. Serial Bus Configuration Example Using I2C Bus +VDD +VDD Master CPU1 SDA Slave CPU1 Address 1 526 SCL Serial data bus Serial clock User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD SDA Master CPU2 Slave CPU2 SCL Address 2 SDA Slave CPU3 SCL Address 3 SDA Slave IC SCL Address 4 SDA Slave IC SCL Address N 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS 18.2 Configuration I2C0 includes the following hardware. Table 18-1. Configuration of I2C0 Item Registers Configuration IIC shift register 0 (IIC0) Slave address register 0 (SVA0) Control registers IIC control register 0 (IICC0) IIC status register 0 (IICS0) IIC flag register 0 (IICCF0) IIC clock selection register 0 (IICCL0) IIC function expansion register 0 (IICX0) (1) IIC shift register 0 (IIC0) The IIC0 register is used to convert 8-bit serial data to 8-bit parallel data and to convert 8-bit parallel data to 8bit serial data. The IIC0 register can be used for both transmission and reception. Write and read operations to the IIC0 register are used to control the actual transmit and receive operations. The IIC0 register can be read or written in 8-bit units. Reset sets IIC0 to 00H. (2) Slave address register 0 (SVA0) The SVA0 register sets local addresses when in slave mode. The SVA0 register can be read or written in 8-bit units. Reset sets SVA0 to 00H. (3) SO latch The SO latch is used to retain the SDA0 pin's output level. (4) Wakeup controller This circuit generates an interrupt request signal (INTIIC0) when the address received by this register matches the address value set to the SVA0 register or when an extension code is received. (5) Prescaler This selects the sampling clock to be used. (6) Serial clock counter This counter counts the serial clocks that are output and the serial clocks that are input during transmit/receive operations and is used to verify that 8-bit data was sent or received. (7) Interrupt request signal generator This circuit controls the generation of interrupt request signals (INTIIC0). An I2C interrupt is generated following either of two triggers. * Falling of the eighth or ninth clock of the serial clock (set by IICC0.WTIM0 bit) * Interrupt request generated when a stop condition is detected (set by IICC0.SPIE0 bit) User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 527 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS (8) Serial clock controller In master mode, this circuit generates the clock output via the SCL0 pin from a sampling clock. (9) Serial clock wait controller This circuit controls the wait timing. (10) ACK generator, stop condition detector, start condition detector, and ACK detector These circuits are used to generate and detect various statuses. (11) Data hold time correction circuit This circuit generates the hold time for data corresponding to the falling edge of the serial clock. (12) Start condition generator This circuit generates a start condition when the IICC0.STT0 bit is set. However, in the communication reservation disabled status (IICF0.IICRSV0 bit = 1), when the bus is not released (IICF0.IICBSY0 bit = 1), start condition requests are ignored and the IICF0.STCF0 bit is set to 1. (13) Stop condition generator A stop condition is generated when the IIC0.SPT0 bit is set (1). (14) Bus status detector This circuit detects whether or not the bus is released by detecting start conditions and stop conditions. However, as the bus status cannot be detected immediately following operation, the initial status is set by the IICF0.STCEN0 bit. 528 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS 18.3 Registers I2C0 is controlled by the following registers. * IIC control register 0 (IICC0) * IIC status register 0 (IICS0) * IIC flag register 0 (IICF0) * IIC clock selection register 0 (IICCL0) * IIC function expansion register 0 (IICX0) The following registers are also used. * IIC shift register 0 (IIC0) * Slave address register 0 (SVA0) Remark For the alternate-function pin settings, refer to Table 4-14 Settings When Port Pins Are Used for Alternate Functions. (1) IIC control register 0 (IICC0) The IICC0 register is used to enable/stop I2C0 operations, set wait timing, and set other I2C operations. <R> The IICC0 register can be read or written in 8-bit or 1-bit units. However, set the SPIE0, WTIM0, and ACKE0 bits when the IICE0 bit is 0 or during the wait period. When setting the IICE0 bit from "0" to "1", these bits can also be set at the same time. Reset sets this register to 00H. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 529 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS (1/4) After reset: 00H IICC0 R/W Address: IICC0 FFFFFD82H <7> <6> <5> <4> <3> <2> <1> <0> IICE0 LREL0 WREL0 SPIE0 WTIM0 ACKE0 STT0 SPT0 2 IICE0 <R> I C0 operation enable/disable specification Note 1 0 Stop operation. Reset the IICS0 register 1 Enable operation. . Stop internal operation. Be sure to set this bit to 1 when the SCL0 and SDA0 lines are high level. Condition for clearing (IICE0 bit = 0) Condition for setting (IICE0 bit = 1) * Cleared by instruction * Set by instruction * Reset Note 2 LREL0 Exit from communications 0 Normal operation 1 This exits from the current communications and sets standby mode. This setting is automatically cleared to 0 after being executed. Its uses include cases in which a locally irrelevant extension code has been received. The SCL0 and SDA0 lines are set to high impedance. The STT0, SPT0, IICS0.MSTS0, IICS0.EXC0, IICS0.COI0, IICS0.TRC0, IICS0.ACKD0, and IICS0.STD0 bits are cleared to 0. The standby mode following exit from communications remains in effect until the following communications entry conditions are met. * After a stop condition is detected, restart is in master mode. * An address match or extension code reception occurs after the start condition. Condition for clearing (LREL0 bit = 0) Condition for setting (LREL0 bit = 1) * Automatically cleared after execution * Set by instruction * Reset WREL0 Note 2 Wait cancellation control 0 Do not cancel wait 1 Cancel wait. This setting is automatically cleared to 0 after wait is canceled. Condition for clearing (WREL0 bit = 0) Condition for setting (WREL0 bit = 1) * Automatically cleared after execution * Set by instruction * Reset Notes 1. The IICS0 register, and the IICF0.STCF0, IICF0.IICBSY0, IICCL0.CLD0, and IICCL0.DAD0 bits are reset. 2. <R> Caution This flag's signal is invalid when the IICE0 bit = 0. If the I2C0 operation is enabled (IICE0 bit = 1) when the SCL0 line is high level and the SDA0 line is low level, the start condition is detected immediately. To avoid this, after enabling the I2C0 operation, immediately set the LREL0 bit to 1 with a bit manipulation instruction. 530 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS (2/4) SPIE0 Note Enable/disable generation of interrupt request when stop condition is detected 0 Disable 1 Enable Condition for clearing (SPIE0 bit = 0) Condition for setting (SPIE0 bit = 1) * Cleared by instruction * Set by instruction * Reset Note WTIM0 0 Control of wait and interrupt request generation Interrupt request is generated at the eighth clock's falling edge. Master mode: After output of eight clocks, clock output is set to low level and wait is set. Slave mode: After input of eight clocks, the clock is set to low level and wait is set for master device. 1 Interrupt request is generated at the ninth clock's falling edge. Master mode: After output of nine clocks, clock output is set to low level and wait is set. Slave mode: After input of nine clocks, the clock is set to low level and wait is set for master device. An interrupt is generated at the falling of the 9th clock during address transfer independently of the setting of this bit. The setting of this bit is valid when the address transfer is completed. When in master mode, a wait is inserted at the falling edge of the ninth clock during address transfers. For a slave device that has received a local address, a wait is inserted at the falling edge of the ninth clock after ACK is issued. However, when the slave device has received an extension code, a wait is inserted at the falling edge of the eighth clock. Condition for clearing (WTIM0 bit = 0) Condition for setting (WTIM0 bit = 1) * Cleared by instruction * Set by instruction * Reset <R> Note ACKE0 Acknowledgment control 0 Disable acknowledgment. 1 Enable acknowledgment. During the ninth clock period, the SDA0 line is set to low level. The ACKE0 bit setting is invalid for address reception. In this case, ACK is generated when the addresses match. However, the ACKE0 bit setting is valid for address reception of the extension code. Condition for clearing (ACKE0 bit = 0) Condition for setting (ACKE0 bit = 1) * Cleared by instruction * Set by instruction * Reset Note This flag's signal is invalid when the IICE0 bit = 0. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 531 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS (3/4) STT0 Start condition trigger 0 Do not generate a start condition. 1 When bus is released (in STOP mode): Generate a start condition (for starting as master). The SDA0 line is changed from high level to low level while the SCL0 line is high level and then the start condition is generated. Next, after the rated amount of time has elapsed, the SCL0 line is changed to low level (wait status). When a third party is communicating * When communication reservation function is enabled (IICF0.IICRSV0 bit = 0) Functions as the start condition reservation flag. When set to 1, automatically generates a start condition after the bus is released. * When communication reservation function is disabled (IICRSV0 bit = 1) The IICF0.STCF0 bit is set to 1 and the information set (1) to the STT0 bit is cleared. No start condition is generated. In the wait state (when master device): Generates a restart condition after releasing the wait. Cautions concerning set timing For master reception: Cannot be set to 1 during transfer. Can be set to 1 only when the ACKE0 bit has been cleared to 0 and slave has been notified of final reception. For master transmission: A start condition may not be generated normally during the ACK period. Set to 1 during the wait period that follows output of the ninth clock. * Cannot be set to 1 at the same time as the SPT0 bit. <R> * When the STT0 bit is set to 1, setting the STT0 bit to 1 again is disabled until the setting is cleared to 0. Condition for clearing (STT0 bit = 0) Condition for setting (STT0 bit = 1) * When the STT0 bit is set to 1 in the communication * Set by instruction reservation disabled status * Cleared by loss in arbitration * Cleared when start condition is generated by master device * When the LREL0 bit = 1 (exit from communications) * When the IICE0 bit = 0 (operation stop) * Reset Remark 532 The STT0 bit is 0 if it is read after data setting. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS (4/4) SPT0 Stop condition trigger 0 Stop condition is not generated. 1 Stop condition is generated (termination of master device's transfer). After the SDA0 line goes to low level, either set the SCL0 line to high level or wait until the SCL0 pin goes to high level. Next, after the rated amount of time has elapsed, the SDA0 line is changed from low level to high level and a stop condition is generated. Cautions concerning setting timing For master reception: Cannot be set to 1 during transfer. Can be set to 1 only when the ACKE0 bit has been cleared to 0 and during the wait period after slave has been notified of final reception. For master transmission: A stop condition may not be generated normally during the ACK period. Set to 1 during the wait period that follows output of the ninth clock. * Cannot be set to 1 at the same time as the STT0 bit. * The SPT0 bit can be set to 1 only when in master mode Note . * When the WTIM0 bit has been cleared to 0, if the SPT0 bit is set to 1 during the wait period that follows output of eight clocks, note that a stop condition will be generated during the high-level period of the ninth clock. The WTIM0 bit should be changed from 0 to 1 during the wait period following output of eight clocks, and the SPT0 bit should be set to 1 during the wait period that follows output of the ninth clock. <R> * When the SPT0 bit is set to 1, setting the SPT0 bit to 1 again is disabled until the setting is cleared to 0. Condition for clearing (SPT0 bit = 0) Condition for setting (SPT0 bit = 1) * Cleared by loss in arbitration * Set by instruction * Automatically cleared after stop condition is detected * When the LREL0 bit = 1 (exit from communications) * When the IICE0 bit = 0 (operation stop) * Reset Note Set the SPT0 bit to 1 only in master mode. However, the SPT0 bit must be set to 1 and a stop condition generated before the first stop condition is detected following the switch to operation enable status. For details, refer to 18.14 Cautions. Caution When the IICS0.TRC0 bit is set to 1, the WREL0 bit is set to 1 during the ninth clock and wait is canceled, after which the TRC0 bit is cleared to 0 and the SDA0 line is set to high impedance. Remark The SPT0 bit is 0 if it is read after data setting. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 533 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS (2) IIC status register 0 (IICS0) The IICS0 register indicates the status of the I2C0 bus. The IICS0 register is read-only, in 8-bit or 1-bit units. However, the IICS0 register can only be read when the IICC0.STT0 bit is 1 or during the wait period. <R> Reset sets this register to 00H. Caution When the main clock is stopped and the CPU is operating on the subclock, do not access the IICS0 register. For details, refer to 3.4.8 (1) (b). (1/3) After reset: 00H IICS0 R Address: IICS0 FFFFFD86H <7> <6> <5> <4> <3> <2> <1> <0> MSTS0 ALD0 EXC0 COI0 TRC0 ACKD0 STD0 SPD0 MSTS0 Master device status 0 Slave device status or communication standby status 1 Master device communication status Condition for clearing (MSTS0 bit = 0) Condition for setting (MSTS0 bit = 1) * When a stop condition is detected * When a start condition is generated * When the ALD0 bit = 1 (arbitration loss) * Cleared by the IICC0.LREL0 bit = 1 (exit from communications) * When the IICC0.IICE0 bit changes from 1 to 0 (operation stop) * Reset ALD0 Detection of arbitration loss 0 This status means either that there was no arbitration or that the arbitration result was a "win". 1 This status indicates the arbitration result was a "loss". The MSTS0 bit is cleared to 0. Condition for clearing (ALD0 bit = 0) Condition for setting (ALD0 bit = 1) * Automatically cleared after the IICS0 register is read Note * When the arbitration result is a "loss". * When the IICE0 bit changes from 1 to 0 (operation stop) * Reset Note This bit is also cleared when a bit manipulation instruction is executed for another bit in the IICS0 register. 534 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS (2/3) EXC0 Detection of extension code reception 0 Extension code was not received. 1 Extension code was received. Condition for clearing (EXC0 bit = 0) Condition for setting (EXC0 bit = 1) * When a start condition is detected * When the higher four bits of the received address data * When a stop condition is detected is either "0000" or "1111" (set at the rising edge of the * Cleared by the LREL0 bit = 1 (exit from communications) eighth clock). * When the IICE0 bit changes from 1 to 0 (operation stop) * Reset COI0 Detection of matching addresses 0 Addresses do not match. 1 Addresses match. Condition for clearing (COI0 bit = 0) Condition for setting (COI0 bit = 1) * When a start condition is detected * When the received address matches the local address * When a stop condition is detected (SVA0 register) (set at the rising edge of the eighth * Cleared by the LREL0 bit = 1 (exit from communications) clock). * When the IICE0 bit changes from 1 to 0 * Reset TRC0 0 Detection of transmit/receive status Receive status (other than transmit status). The SDA0 line is set for high impedance. 1 Transmit status. The value in the SO latch is enabled for output to the SDA0 line (valid starting at the rising edge of the first byte's ninth clock). <R> Condition for clearing (TRC0 bit = 0) Condition for setting (TRC0 bit = 1) * When a stop condition is detected Master * Cleared by the LREL0 bit = 1 (exit from communications) * When a start condition is generated * When the IICE0 bit changes from 1 to 0 (operation stop) * When "0" is output to the first byte's LSB (transfer * Cleared by the IICC0.WREL0 bit = 1 Note (wait release) direction specification bit) * When the ALD0 bit changes from 0 to 1 (arbitration loss) Slave * Reset * When "1" is input in the first byte's LSB (transfer Master direction specification bit) * When "1" is output to the first byte's LSB (transfer direction specification bit) Slave * When a start condition is detected When not used for communication Note The IICS0.TRC0 bit is cleared to 0 and the SDA0 line become high impedance when the IICC0.WREL0 bit is set to 1 and wait state is released at the ninth clock with the TRC0 bit = 1. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 535 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS (3/3) ACKD0 Detection of ACK 0 ACK was not detected. 1 ACK was detected. Condition for clearing (ACKD0 bit = 0) Condition for setting (ACKD0 bit = 1) * When a stop condition is detected * After the SDA0 pin is set to low level at the rising edge of * At the rising edge of the next byte's first clock the SCL0 pin's ninth clock * Cleared by the LREL0 bit = 1 (exit from communications) * When the IICE0 bit changes from 1 to 0 (operation stop) * Reset STD0 Detection of start condition 0 Start condition was not detected. 1 Start condition was detected. This indicates that the address transfer period is in effect Condition for clearing (STD0 bit = 0) Condition for setting (STD0 bit = 1) * When a stop condition is detected * When a start condition is detected * At the rising edge of the next byte's first clock following address transfer * Cleared by the LREL0 bit = 1 (exit from communications) * When the IICE0 bit changes from 1 to 0 (operation stop) * Reset SPD0 Detection of stop condition 0 Stop condition was not detected. 1 Stop condition was detected. The master device's communication is terminated and the bus is released. Condition for clearing (SPD0 bit = 0) Condition for setting (SPD0 bit = 1) * At the rising edge of the address transfer byte's first * When a stop condition is detected clock following setting of this bit and detection of a start condition * When the IICE0 bit changes from 1 to 0 (operation stop) * Reset 536 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS (3) IIC flag register 0 (IICF0) IICF0 is a register that set the operation mode of I2C0 and indicate the status of the I2C bus. These registers can be read or written in 8-bit or 1-bit units. However, the STCF0 and IICBSY0 bits are readonly. The IICRSV0 bit can be used to enable/disable the communication reservation function (refer to 18.13 Communication Reservation). The STCEN0 bit can be used to set the initial value of the IICBSY0 bit (refer to 18.14 Cautions). The IICRSV0 and STCEN0 bits can be written only when the operation of I2C0 is disabled (IICC0.IICE0 bit = 0). When operation is enabled, the IICF0 register can be read. Reset sets this register to 00H. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 537 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS R/WNote After reset: 00H IICF0 Address: IICF0 FFFFFD8AH <7> <6> 5 4 3 2 STCF0 IICBSY0 0 0 0 0 STCEN0 IICRSV0 0 Generate start condition 1 Start condition generation unsuccessful: clear STT0 flag Condition for clearing (STCF0 bit = 0) Condition for setting (STCF0 bit = 1) * Clearing by setting the STT0 bit = 1 * When the IICE0 bit changes from 1 to 0 (operation stop) * Reset * Generating start condition unsuccessful and the STT0 bit cleared to 0 when communication reservation is disabled (IICRSV0 bit = 1). I2C0 bus status flag IICBSY0 <R> <0> IICC0.STT0 clear flag STCF0 <R> <1> 0 Bus release status (initial communication status when STCEN0 bit = 1) 1 Bus communication status (initial communication status when STCEN0 bit = 0) Condition for clearing (IICBSY0 bit = 0) Condition for setting (IICBSY0 bit = 1) * Detection of stop condition * When the IICE0 bit changes from 1 to 0 (operation stop) * Reset * Detection of start condition * Setting of the IICE0 bit when the STCEN0 bit = 0 STCEN0 Initial start enable trigger 0 After operation is enabled (IICE0 bit = 1), enable generation of a start condition upon detection of a stop condition. 1 After operation is enabled (IICE0 bit = 1), enable generation of a start condition without detecting a stop condition. Condition for clearing (STCEN0 bit = 0) Condition for setting (STCEN0 bit = 1) * Detection of start condition * Reset * Setting by instruction IICRSV0 Communication reservation function disable bit 0 Enable communication reservation 1 Disable communication reservation Condition for clearing (IICRSV0 bit = 0) Condition for setting (IICRSV0 bit = 1) * Clearing by instruction * Reset * Setting by instruction Note Bits 6 and 7 are read-only bits. Cautions 1. Write to the STCEN0 bit only when the operation is stopped (IICE0 bit = 0). 2. As the bus release status (IICBSY0 bit = 0) is recognized regardless of the actual bus status when the STCEN0 bit = 1, when generating the first start condition (STT0 bit = 1), it is necessary to verify that no third party communications are in progress in order to prevent such communications from being destroyed. 3. Write to the IICRSV0 bit only when the operation is stopped (IICE0 bit = 0). 538 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS (4) IIC clock selection register 0 (IICCL0) The IICCL0 register is used to set the transfer clock for the I2C0 bus. The IICCL0 register can be read or written in 8-bit or 1-bit units. However, the CLD0 and DAD0 bits are readonly. The SMC0, CL01 and CL00 bits are set in combination with the IICX0.CLX0 bit (refer to 18.3 (6) I2C0 transfer clock setting method). <R> Set the IICCL0 register when the IICC0.IICE0 bit = 0. Reset sets this register to 00H. After reset: 00H IICCL0 R/W Note Address: IICCL0 FFFFFD84H 7 6 <5> <4> 3 2 1 0 0 0 CLD0 DAD0 SMC0 DFC0 CL01 CL00 CLD0 Detection of SCL0 pin level (valid only when IICC0.IICE0 bit = 1) 0 The SCL0 pin was detected at low level. 1 The SCL0 pin was detected at high level. Condition for clearing (CLD0 bit = 0) Condition for setting (CLD0 bit = 1) * When the SCL0 pin is at low level * When the SCL0 pin is at high level * When the IICE0 bit changes from 1 to 0 (operation stop) * Reset DAD0 Detection of SDA0 pin level (valid only when IICE0 bit = 1) 0 The SDA0 pin was detected at low level. 1 The SDA0 pin was detected at high level. Condition for clearing (DAD0 bit = 0) Condition for setting (DAD0 bit = 1) * When the SDA0 pin is at low level * When the SDA0 pin is at high level * When IICE0 bit changes from 1 to 0 (operation stop) * Reset SMC0 Operation mode switching 0 Operates in standard mode. 1 Operates in high-speed mode. DFC0 Digital filter operation control 0 Digital filter off. 1 Digital filter on. Digital filter can be used only in high-speed mode. In high-speed mode, the transfer clock does not vary regardless of DFC0 bit set/clear. The digital filter is used for noise elimination in high-speed mode. Note Bits 4 and 5 are read-only bits. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 539 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS (5) IIC function expansion register 0 (IICX0) These registers set the function expansion of I2C0 (valid only in high-speed mode). These registers can be read or written in 8-bit or 1-bit units. The CLX0 bit is set in combination with the IICCL0.SMC0, IICCL0.CL01, and IICCL0.CL00 bits (refer to 18.3 (6) I2C0 transfer clock setting method). Set the IICX0 register when the IICC0.IICE0 bit = 0. <R> Reset sets this register to 00H. After reset: 00H IICX0 R/W Address: IICX0 FFFFFD85H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 <0> 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CLX0 (6) I2C0 transfer clock setting method The I2C0 transfer clock frequency (fSCL) is calculated using the following expression. fSCL = 1/(m x T + tR + tF) m = 12, 24, 48, 54, 86, 88, 172, 198 (refer to Table 18-2 Selection Clock Setting.) T: 1/fXX tR: SCL0 rise time tF: SCL0 fall time For example, the I2C0 transfer clock frequency (fSCL) when fXX = 20 MHz, m = 54, tR = 200 ns, and tF = 50 ns is calculated using following expression. fSCL = 1/(54 x 50 ns + 200 ns + 50 ns) 339 kHz m x T + t R + tF tR m/2 x T tF m/2 x T SCL0 SCL0 inversion SCL0 inversion SCL0 inversion The selection clock is set using a combination of the IICCL0.SMC0, IICCL0.CL01, and IICCL0.CL00 bits and the IICX0.CLX0 bit. 540 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS Table 18-2. Selection Clock Setting IICX0 IICCL0 Selection Clock Transfer Clock Settable Internal System (fXX/m) Clock Frequency (fXX) Bit 0 Bit 3 Bit 1 Bit 0 CLX0 SMC0 CL01 CL00 0 0 0 0 fXX/2 fXX/88 4.0 MHz to 8.38 MHz 0 0 0 1 fXX/2 fXX/172 8.38 MHz to 16.76 MHz 0 0 1 0 fXX fXX/86 4.19 MHz to 8.38 MHz 0 0 1 1 fXX/3 fXX/198 16.0 MHz to 19.8 MHz 0 1 0 x fXX/2 fXX/48 8 MHz to 16.76 MHz 0 1 1 0 fXX fXX/24 4 MHz to 8.38 MHz 0 1 1 1 fXX/3 fXX/54 16 MHz to 20 MHz 1 0 x x Setting prohibited 1 1 0 x fXX/2 fXX/24 8.00 MHz to 8.38 MHz 1 1 1 0 fXX fXX/12 4.00 MHz to 4.19 MHz 1 1 1 1 Setting prohibited Remark x: Operation Mode Range Normal mode (SMC0 bit = 0) High-speed mode (SMC0 bit = 1) High-speed mode (SMC0 bit = 1) don't care User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 541 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS (7) IIC shift register 0 (IIC0) The IIC0 shift register is used for serial transmission/reception (shift operations) that is synchronized with the serial clock. The IIC0 shift register can be read or written in 8-bit units, but data should not be written to the IIC0 shift register during a data transfer. Access (read/write) the IIC0 shift register only during the wait period. Accessing this register in communication <R> states other than the wait period is prohibited. However, for the master device, the IIC0 shift register can be written once only after the transmission trigger bit (IICC0.STT0 bit) has been set to 1. When the IIC0 shift register is written during wait, the wait is cancelled and data transfer is started. Reset sets this register to 00H. After reset: 00H R/W 7 Address: IIC0 FFFFFD80H 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 IIC0 (8) Slave address register 0 (SVA0) The SVA0 register holds the I2C bus's slave addresses. <R> However, rewriting these registers is prohibited when the IICS0.STD0 bit = 1 (start condition detection). The SVA0 register can be read or written in 8-bit units, but bit 0 is fixed to 0. Reset sets this register to 00H. After reset: 00H R/W 7 Address: SVA0 FFFFFD83H 6 5 4 3 SVA0 542 2 1 0 0 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS 18.4 Functions 18.4.1 Pin configuration The serial clock pin (SCL0) and serial data bus pin (SDA0) are configured as follows. SCL0 .............. This pin is used for serial clock input and output. This pin is an N-ch open-drain output for both master and slave devices. Input is Schmitt input. SDA0 .............. This pin is used for serial data input and output. This pin is an N-ch open-drain output for both master and slave devices. Input is Schmitt input. Since outputs from the serial clock line and the serial data bus line are N-ch open-drain outputs, an external pull-up resistor is required. Figure 18-3. Pin Configuration Diagram VDD Slave device Master device SCL0 SCL0 Clock output (Clock output) VDD (Clock input) Clock input SDA0 SDA0 Data output Data output Data input Data input User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 543 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS 18.5 I2C Bus Definitions and Control Methods The following section describes the I2C bus's serial data communication format and the status generated by the I2C bus. The transfer timing for the "start condition", "address", "transfer direction specification", "data", and "stop condition" generated via the I2C bus's serial data bus is shown below. Figure 18-4. I2C Bus's Serial Data Transfer Timing SCL0 1 to 7 8 9 1 to 8 9 1 to 8 9 R/W ACK Data ACK Data ACK SDA0 Start Address condition Stop condition The master device generates the start condition, slave address, and stop condition. ACK can be generated by either the master or slave device (normally, it is generated by the device that receives 8bit data). The serial clock (SCL0) is continuously output by the master device. However, in the slave device, the SCL0's lowlevel period can be extended and a wait can be inserted. 18.5.1 Start condition A start condition is met when the SCL0 pin is at high level and the SDA0 pin changes from high level to low level. The start conditions for the SCL0 pin and SDA0 pin are generated when the master device starts a serial transfer to the slave device. Start conditions can be detected when the device is used as a slave. Figure 18-5. Start Conditions H SCL0 SDA0 A start condition is generated when the IICC0.STT0 bit is set to 1 after a stop condition has been detected (IICS0.SPD0 bit = 1). When a start condition is detected, IICS0.STD0 bit is set to 1. 544 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS 18.5.2 Addresses The 7 bits of data that follow the start condition are defined as an address. An address is a 7-bit data segment that is output in order to select one of the slave devices that are connected to the master device via bus lines. Therefore, each slave device connected via the bus lines must have a unique address. The slave devices include hardware that detects the start condition and checks whether or not the 7-bit address data matches the data values stored in the SVA0 register. If the address data matches the SVA0 values, the slave device is selected and communicates with the master device until the master device generates a start condition or stop condition. Figure 18-6. Address SCL0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SDA0 AD6 AD5 AD4 AD3 AD2 AD1 AD0 R/W Address 9 Note INTIIC0 Note The interrupt request signal (INTIIC0) is generated if a local address or extension code is received during slave device operation. The slave address and the eighth bit, which specifies the transfer direction as described in 18.5.3 Transfer direction specification below, are together written to the IIC0 register and are then output. Received addresses are written to the IIC0 register. The slave address is assigned to the higher 7 bits of the IIC0 register. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 545 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS 18.5.3 Transfer direction specification In addition to the 7-bit address data, the master device sends 1 bit that specifies the transfer direction. When this transfer direction specification bit has a value of 0, it indicates that the master device is transmitting data to a slave device. When the transfer direction specification bit has a value of 1, it indicates that the master device is receiving data from a slave device. Figure 18-7. Transfer Direction Specification SCL0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SDA0 AD6 AD5 AD4 AD3 AD2 AD1 AD0 R/W 9 Transfer direction specification Note INTIIC0 Note The interrupt request signal (INTIIC0) is generated if a local address or extension code is received during slave device operation. 546 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS <R> 18.5.4 ACK ACK is used to confirm the serial data status of the transmitting and receiving devices. The receiving device returns ACK for every 8 bits of data it receives. The transmitting device normally receives ACK after transmitting 8 bits of data. When ACK is returned from the receiving device, the reception is judged as normal and processing continues. The detection of ACK is confirmed with the IICS0.ACKD0 bit. When the master device is the receiving device, after receiving the final data, it does not return ACK and generates the stop condition. When the slave device is the receiving device and does not return ACK, the master device generates either a stop condition or a restart condition, and then stops the current transmission. Failure to return ACK may be caused by the following factors. (a) Reception was not performed normally. (b) The final data was received. (c) The receiving device (slave) does not exist for the specified address. When the receiving device sets the SDA0 line to low level during the ninth clock, ACK is generated (normal reception). When the IICC0.ACKE0 bit is set to 1, automatic ACK generation is enabled. Transmission of the eighth bit following the 7 address data bits causes the IICS0.TRC0 bit to be set. Normally, set the ACKE0 bit to 1 for reception (TRC0 bit = 0). When the slave device is receiving (when TRC0 bit = 0), if the slave device cannot receive data or does not need to receive any more data, clear the ACKE0 bit to 0 to indicate to the master that no more data can be received. Similarly, when the master device is receiving (when TRC0 bit = 0) and the subsequent data is not needed, clear the ACKE0 bit to 0 to prevent ACK from being generated. This notifies the slave device (transmitting device) of the end of the data transmission (transmission stopped). Figure 18-8. ACK SCL0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 SDA0 AD6 AD5 AD4 AD3 AD2 AD1 AD0 8 9 R/W ACK When the local address is received, ACK is automatically generated regardless of the value of the ACKE0 bit. No ACK is generated if the received address is not a local address (NACK). When receiving the extension code, set the ACKE0 bit to 1 in advance to generate ACK. The ACK generation method during data reception is based on the wait timing setting, as described by the following. * When 8-clock wait is selected (IICC0.WTIM0 bit = 0): ACK is generated at the falling edge of the SCL0n pin's eighth clock if the ACKE0 bit is set to 1 before the wait state cancellation. * When 9-clock wait is selected (IICC0.WTIM0 bit = 1): ACK is generated if the ACKE0 bit is set to 1 in advance. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 547 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS 18.5.5 Stop condition When the SCL0 pin is at high level, changing the SDA0 pin from low level to high level generates a stop condition. A stop condition is generated when serial transfer from the master device to the slave device has been completed. Stop conditions can be detected when the device is used as a slave. Figure 18-9. Stop Condition H SCL0 SDA0 A stop condition is generated when the IICC0.SPT0 bit is set to 1. When the stop condition is detected, the IICS0.SPD0 bit is set to 1 and the interrupt request signal (INTIIC0) is generated when the IICC0.SPIE0 bit is set to 1. 548 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS 18.5.6 Wait state The wait state is used to notify the communication partner that a device (master or slave) is preparing to transmit or receive data (i.e., is in a wait state). Setting the SCL0 pin to low level notifies the communication partner of the wait status. When wait status has been canceled for both the master and slave devices, the next data transfer can begin. Figure 18-10. Wait State (1/2) (a) When master device has a nine-clock wait and slave device has an eight-clock wait (master: transmission, slave: reception, and IICC0.ACKE0 bit = 1) Master Master returns to high Wait after output impedance but slave is in wait state (low level). of ninth clock. IIC0 data write (cancel wait) IIC0 6 SCL0 7 8 1 9 2 3 Slave Wait after output of eighth clock. FFH is written to IIC0 register or IICC0.WREL0 bit is set to 1. IIC0 SCL0 ACKE0 H Transfer lines Wait state from slave SCL0 6 7 8 SDA0 D2 D1 D0 Wait state from master 9 ACK User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 1 2 3 D7 D6 D5 549 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS Figure 18-10. Wait State (2/2) (b) When master and slave devices both have a nine-clock wait (master: transmission, slave: reception, and ACKE0 = 1) Master and slave both wait after output of ninth clock. IIC0 data write (cancel wait) Master IIC0 6 SCL0 7 8 1 9 2 3 Slave FFH is written to IIC0 register or WREL0 bit is set to 1. IIC0 SCL0 ACKE0 H Wait state from master and slave Transfer lines SCL0 6 7 8 9 SDA0 D2 D1 D0 ACK Wait state from slave 1 D7 2 3 D6 D5 Generated according to previously set ACKE0 bit value A wait state is automatically generated after a start condition is generated. Moreover, a wait state is automatically generated depending on the setting of the IICC0.WTIM0 bit. Normally, when the IICC0.WREL0 bit is set to 1 or when FFH is written to the IIC0 register, the wait status is canceled and the transmitting side writes data to the IIC0 register to cancel the wait status. The master device can also cancel the wait status via either of the following methods. * By setting the IICC0.STT0 bit to 1 * By setting the IICC0.SPT0 bit to 1 550 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS <R> 18.5.7 Wait state cancellation method In the case of I2C0, wait state can be canceled normally in the following ways. * By writing data to the IIC0 register * By setting the IICC0.WREL0 bit to 1 (wait state cancellation) * By setting the IICC0.STT0 bit to 1 (start condition generation)Note * By setting the IICC0.SPT0 bit to 1 (stop condition generation)Note Note Master only If any of these wait state cancellation actions is performed, I2C0 will cancel wait state and restart communication. When canceling wait state and sending data (including address), write data to the IIC0 register. To receive data after canceling wait state, or to complete data transmission, set the WREL0 bit to 1. To generate a restart condition after canceling wait state, set the STT0 bit to 1. To generate a stop condition after canceling wait state, set the SPT0 bit to 1. Execute cancellation only once for each wait state. For example, if data is written to the IIC0 register following wait state cancellation by setting the WREL0 bit to 1, conflict between the SDA0 line change timing and IIC0 register write timing may result in the data output to the SDA0 line may be incorrect. Even in other operations, if communication is stopped halfway, clearing the IICC0.IICE0 bit to 0 will stop communication, enabling wait state to be cancelled. If the I2C bus dead-locks due to noise, etc., setting the IICC0.LREL0 bit to 1 causes the communication operation to be exited, enabling wait state to be cancelled. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 551 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS <R> 18.6 I2C Interrupt Request Signals (INTIIC0) The following shows the value of the IICS0 register at the INTIIC0 interrupt request signal generation timing and at the INTIIC0 signal timing. Remark ST: Start condition AD6 to AD0: Address 552 R/W: Transfer direction specification ACK: Acknowledge D7 to D0: Data SP: Stop condition User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS 18.6.1 Master device operation (1) Start ~ Address ~ Data ~ Data ~ Stop (normal transmission/reception) <1> When IICC0.WTIM0 bit = 0 IICC0.SPT0 bit = 1 ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 S1 ACK D7 to D0 S2 ACK S3 SP S4 5 S1: IICS0 register = 1000X110B S2: IICS0 register = 1000X000B S3: IICS0 register = 1000X000B (WTIM0 bit = 1 Note ) S4: IICS0 register = 1000XX00B 5: IICS0 register = 00000001B Note To generate a stop condition, set the WTIM0 bit to 1 and change the timing of the generation of the interrupt request signal (INTIIC0). Remark S: Always generated : Generated only when IICC0.SPIE0 bit = 1 X: don't care <2> When WTIM0 bit = 1 SPT0 bit = 1 ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 S1 ACK D7 to D0 S2 ACK SP S3 4 S1: IICS0 register = 1000X110B S2: IICS0 register = 1000X100B S3: IICS0 register = 1000XX00B 4: IICS0 register = 00000001B Remark S: Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 bit = 1 X: don't care User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 553 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS (2) Start ~ Address ~ Data ~ Start ~ Address ~ Data ~ Stop (restart) <1> When WTIM0 bit = 0 IICC0.STT0 bit = 1 SPT0 bit = 1 ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 S1 ACK S2 ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK S3 D7 to D0 S4 ACK S5 SP S6 7 S1: IICS0 register = 1000X110B S2: IICS0 register = 1000X000B (WTIM0 bit = 1 Note 1 ) S3: IICS0 register = 1000XX00B (WTIM0 bit = 0 Note 2 ) S4: IICS0 register = 1000X110B S5: IICS0 register = 1000X000B (WTIM0 bit = 1 Note 3 ) S6: IICS0 register = 1000XX00B 7: IICS0 register = 00000001B Notes 1. To generate a start condition, set the WTIM0 bit to 1 and change the timing of the generation of the interrupt request signal (INTIIC0). 2. Clear the WTIM0 bit to 0 to make the settings original. 3. To generate a stop condition, set the WTIM0 bit to 1 and change the timing of the generation of the interrupt request signal (INTIIC0). Remark S: Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 bit = 1 X: don't care <2> When WTIM0 bit = 1 STT0 bit = 1 SPT0 bit = 1 ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 ACK S1 ST AD6 to AD0 S2 S1: IICS0 register = 1000X110B S2: IICS0 register = 1000XX00B S3: IICS0 register = 1000X110B S4: IICS0 register = 1000XX00B 5: IICS0 register = 00000001B Remark S: Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 bit = 1 X: 554 don't care User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD R/W ACK D7 to D0 S3 ACK SP S4 5 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS (3) Start ~ Code ~ Data ~ Data ~ Stop (extension code transmission) <1> When WTIM0 bit = 0 SPT0 bit = 1 ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 S1 ACK D7 to D0 S2 ACK S3 SP S4 5 S1: IICS0 register = 1010X110B S2: IICS0 register = 1010X000B S3: IICS0 register = 1010X000B (WTIM0 bit = 1 Note ) S4: IICS0 register = 1010XX00B 5: IICS0 register = 00000001B Note To generate a stop condition, set the WTIM0 bit to 1 and change the timing of the generation of the interrupt request signal (INTIIC0). Remark S: Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 bit = 1 X: don't care <2> When WTIM0 bit = 1 SPT0 bit = 1 ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 S1 ACK D7 to D0 S2 ACK SP S3 4 S1: IICS0 register = 1010X110B S2: IICS0 register = 1010X100B S3: IICS0 register = 1010XX00B 4: IICS0 register = 00000001B Remark S: Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 bit = 1 X: don't care User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 555 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS 18.6.2 Slave device operation (when receiving slave address data (address match)) (1) Start ~ Address ~ Data ~ Data ~ Stop <1> When IICC0.WTIM0 bit = 0 ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 S1 ACK D7 to D0 S2 ACK SP 4 S3 S1: IICS0 register = 0001X110B S2: IICS0 register = 0001X000B S3: IICS0 register = 0001X000B 4: IICS0 register = 00000001B Remark S: Always generated : Generated only when IICC0.SPIE0 bit = 1 X: don't care <2> When WTIM0 bit = 1 ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 S1 ACK D7 to D0 S2 S1: IICS0 register = 0001X110B S2: IICS0 register = 0001X100B S3: IICS0 register = 0001XX00B 4: IICS0 register = 00000001B Remark S: Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 bit = 1 X: 556 don't care User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD ACK SP S3 4 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS (2) Start ~ Address ~ Data ~ Start ~ Address ~ Data ~ Stop <1> When WTIM0 bit = 0 (after restart, address match) ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 S1 ACK ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK S2 D7 to D0 S3 ACK SP 5 S4 S1: IICS0 register = 0001X110B S2: IICS0 register = 0001X000B S3: IICS0 register = 0001X110B S4: IICS0 register = 0001X000B 5: IICS0 register = 00000001B Remark S: Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 bit = 1 X: don't care <2> When WTIM0 bit = 1 (after restart, address match) ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 ACK S1 ST AD6 to AD0 S2 R/W ACK D7 to D0 S3 ACK SP S4 5 S1: IICS0 register = 0001X110B S2: IICS0 register = 0001XX00B S3: IICS0 register = 0001X110B S4: IICS0 register = 0001XX00B 5: IICS0 register = 00000001B Remark S: Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 bit = 1 X: don't care User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 557 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS (3) Start ~ Address ~ Data ~ Start ~ Code ~ Data ~ Stop <1> When WTIM0 bit = 0 (after restart, address mismatch (extension code)) ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 S1 ACK ST AD6 to AD0 R/W S2 ACK D7 to D0 S3 ACK SP 5 S4 S1: IICS0 register = 0001X110B S2: IICS0 register = 0001X000B S3: IICS0 register = 0010X010B S4: IICS0 register = 0010X000B 5: IICS0 register = 00000001B Remark S: Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 bit = 1 X: don't care <2> When WTIM0 bit = 1 (after restart, address mismatch (extension code)) ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 ACK S1 ST AD6 to AD0 S2 S1: IICS0 register = 0001X110B S2: IICS0 register = 0001XX00B S3: IICS0 register = 0010X010B S4: IICS0 register = 0010X110B S5: IICS0 register = 0010XX00B 6: IICS0 register = 00000001B Remark S: Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 bit = 1 X: 558 don't care User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD R/W ACK S3 D7 to D0 S4 ACK SP S5 6 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS (4) Start ~ Address ~ Data ~ Start ~ Address ~ Data ~ Stop <1> When WTIM0 bit = 0 (after restart, address mismatch (= not extension code)) ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 S1 ACK ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK S2 D7 to D0 ACK SP 4 S3 S1: IICS0 register = 0001X110B S2: IICS0 register = 0001X000B S3: IICS0 register = 00000110B 4: IICS0 register = 00000001B Remark S: Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 bit = 1 X: don't care <2> When WTIM0 bit = 1 (after restart, address mismatch (= not extension code)) ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 ACK S1 ST AD6 to AD0 S2 R/W ACK D7 to D0 S3 ACK SP 4 S1: IICS0 register = 0001X110B S2: IICS0 register = 0001XX00B S3: IICS0 register = 00000110B 4: IICS0 register = 00000001B Remark S: Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 bit = 1 X: don't care User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 559 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS 18.6.3 Slave device operation (when receiving extension code) Always under communication when receiving the extension code. (1) Start ~ Code ~ Data ~ Data ~ Stop <1> When IICC0.WTIM0 bit = 0 ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 S1 ACK D7 to D0 S2 ACK SP 4 S3 S1: IICS0 register = 0010X010B S2: IICS0 register = 0010X000B S3: IICS0 register = 0010X000B 4: IICS0 register = 00000001B Remark S: Always generated : Generated only when IICC0.SPIE0 bit = 1 X: don't care <2> When WTIM0 bit = 1 ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK S1 D7 to D0 S2 ACK D7 to D0 S3 S1: IICS0 register = 0010X010B S2: IICS0 register = 0010X110B S3: IICS0 register = 0010X100B S4: IICS0 register = 0010XX00B 5: IICS0 register = 00000001B Remark S: Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 bit = 1 X: 560 don't care User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD ACK SP S4 5 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS (2) Start ~ Code ~ Data ~ Start ~ Address ~ Data ~ Stop <1> When WTIM0 bit = 0 (after restart, address match) ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 ACK S1 ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK S2 D7 to D0 S3 ACK SP 5 S4 S1: IICS0 register = 0010X010B S2: IICS0 register = 0010X000B S3: IICS0 register = 0001X110B S4: IICS0 register = 0001X000B 5: IICS0 register = 00000001B Remark S: Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 bit = 1 X: don't care <2> When WTIM0 bit = 1 (after restart, address match) ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK S1 D7 to D0 ACK S2 ST AD6 to AD0 S3 R/W ACK D7 to D0 S4 ACK SP S5 6 S1: IICS0 register = 0010X010B S2: IICS0 register = 0010X110B S3: IICS0 register = 0010XX00B S4: IICS0 register = 0001X110B S5: IICS0 register = 0001XX00B 6: IICS0 register = 00000001B Remark S: Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 bit = 1 X: don't care User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 561 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS (3) Start ~ Code ~ Data ~ Start ~ Code ~ Data ~ Stop <1> When WTIM0 bit = 0 (after restart, extension code reception) ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 S1 ACK ST AD6 to AD0 R/W S2 ACK D7 to D0 S3 ACK SP 5 S4 S1: IICS0 register = 0010X010B S2: IICS0 register = 0010X000B S3: IICS0 register = 0010X010B S4: IICS0 register = 0010X000B 5: IICS0 register = 00000001B Remark S: Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 bit = 1 X: don't care <2> When WTIM0 bit = 1 (after restart, extension code reception) ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK S1 D7 to D0 ACK S2 ST AD6 to AD0 S3 S1: IICS0 register = 0010X010B S2: IICS0 register = 0010X110B S3: IICS0 register = 0010XX00B S4: IICS0 register = 0010X010B S5: IICS0 register = 0010X110B S6: IICS0 register = 0010XX00B 7: IICS0 register = 00000001B Remark S: Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 bit = 1 X: 562 don't care User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD R/W ACK S4 D7 to D0 S5 ACK SP S6 7 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS (4) Start ~ Code ~ Data ~ Start ~ Address ~ Data ~ Stop <1> When WTIM0 bit = 0 (after restart, address mismatch (= not extension code)) ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 S1 ACK ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK S2 D7 to D0 ACK SP 4 S3 S1: IICS0 register = 0010X010B S2: IICS0 register = 0010X000B S3: IICS0 register = 00000110B 4: IICS0 register = 00000001B Remark S: Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 bit = 1 X: don't care <2> When WTIM0 bit = 1 (after restart, address mismatch (= not extension code)) ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK S1 D7 to D0 ACK S2 ST AD6 to AD0 S3 R/W ACK D7 to D0 S4 ACK SP 5 S1: IICS0 register = 0010X010B S2: IICS0 register = 0010X110B S3: IICS0 register = 0010XX00B S4: IICS0 register = 00000110B 5: IICS0 register = 00000001B Remark S: Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 bit = 1 X: don't care User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 563 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS 18.6.4 Operation without communication (1) Start ~ Code ~ Data ~ Data ~ Stop ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 ACK D7 to D0 ACK SP 1 1: IICS0 register = 00000001B Remark 564 : Generated only when IICC0.SPIE0 bit = 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS 18.6.5 Arbitration loss operation (operation as slave after arbitration loss) When used as master in the multi-master system, check the arbitration result by reading the IICS0.MSTS0 bit for checking arbitration result by each INTIIC0 interrupt occurrence. (1) When arbitration loss occurs during transmission of slave address data <1> When IICC0.WTIM0 bit = 0 ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 S1 ACK D7 to D0 S2 ACK SP 4 S3 S1: IICS0 register = 0101X110B S2: IICS0 register = 0001X000B S3: IICS0 register = 0001X000B 4: IICS0 register = 00000001B Remark S: Always generated : Generated only when IICC0.SPIE0 bit = 1 X: don't care <2> When WTIM0 bit = 1 ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 S1 ACK D7 to D0 S2 ACK SP S3 4 S1: IICS0 register = 0101X110B S2: IICS0 register = 0001X100B S3: IICS0 register = 0001XX00B 4: IICS0 register = 00000001B Remark S: Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 bit = 1 X: don't care User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 565 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS (2) When arbitration loss occurs during transmission of extension code <1> When WTIM0 bit = 0 ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 S1 ACK D7 to D0 S2 ACK SP 4 S3 S1: IICS0 register = 0110X010B S2: IICS0 register = 0010X000B S3: IICS0 register = 0010X000B 4: IICS0 register = 00000001B Remark S: Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 bit = 1 X: don't care <2> When WTIM0 bit = 1 ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK S1 D7 to D0 S2 ACK D7 to D0 S3 S1: IICS0 register = 0110X010B S2: IICS0 register = 0010X110B S3: IICS0 register = 0010X100B S4: IICS0 register = 0010XX00B 5: IICS0 register = 00000001B Remark S: Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 bit = 1 X: 566 don't care User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD ACK SP S4 5 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS 18.6.6 Operation when arbitration loss occurs (no communication after arbitration loss) When used as master in the multi-master system, check the arbitration result by reading the IICS0.MSTS0 bit for checking arbitration result by each INTIIC0 interrupt occurrence. (1) When arbitration loss occurs during transmission of slave address data ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 ACK D7 to D0 ACK SP 2 S1 S1: IICS0 register = 01000110B 2: IICS0 register = 00000001B Remark S: Always generated : Generated only when IICC0.SPIE0 bit = 1 (2) When arbitration loss occurs during transmission of extension code ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 ACK D7 to D0 SP 2 S1 S1: ACK IICS0 register = 0110X010B IICC0.LREL0 bit is set to 1 by software 2: IICS0 register = 00000001B Remark S: Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 bit = 1 X: don't care User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 567 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS (3) When arbitration loss occurs during data transfer <1> When IICC0.WTIM0 bit = 0 ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 S1 ACK D7 to D0 ACK SP 3 S2 S1: IICS0 register = 10001110B S2: IICS0 register = 01000000B 3: IICS0 register = 00000001B Remark S: Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 bit = 1 <2> When WTIM0 bit = 1 ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 S1 ACK D7 to D0 S2 S1: IICS0 register = 10001110B S2: IICS0 register = 01000100B 3: IICS0 register = 00000001B Remark S: Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 bit = 1 568 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD ACK SP 3 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS (4) When arbitration loss occurs due to restart condition during data transfer <1> Not extension code (Example: Address mismatch) ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to Dn ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK S1 D7 to D0 ACK SP 3 S2 S1: IICS0 register = 1000X110B S2: IICS0 register = 01000110B 3: IICS0 register = 00000001B Remarks 1. S: Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 bit = 1 X: don't care 2. Dn = D6 to D0 <2> Extension code ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to Dn ST AD6 to AD0 S1 R/W ACK D7 to D0 S2 ACK SP 3 S1: IICS0 register = 1000X110B S2: IICS0 register = 0110X010B IICC0.LREL0 bit is set to 1 by software 3: IICS0 register = 00000001B Remarks 1. S: Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 bit = 1 X: don't care 2. Dn = D6 to D0 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 569 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS (5) When arbitration loss occurs due to stop condition during data transfer ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to Dn SP 2 S1 S1: IICS0 register = 1000X110B 2: IICS0 register = 01000001B Remarks 1. S: Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 bit = 1 X: don't care 2. Dn = D6 to D0 570 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS (6) When arbitration loss occurs due to low level of SDA0n pin when attempting to generate a restart condition <1> When WTIM0 bit = 0 IICC0.STT0 bit = 1 ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 S1 ACK S2 D7 to D0 S3 ACK D7 to D0 ACK SP 5 S4 S1: IICS0 register = 1000X110B S2: IICS0 register = 1000X000B (WTIM0 bit = 1) S3: IICS0 register = 1000X100B (WTIM0 bit = 0) S4: IICS0 register = 01000000B 5: IICS0 register = 00000001B Remark S: Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 bit = 1 X: don't care <2> When WTIM0 bit = 1 IICC0.STT0 bit = 1 ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 S1 ACK D7 to D0 S2 ACK D7 to D0 S3 ACK SP 4 S1: IICS0 register = 1000X110B S2: IICS0 register = 1000X100B S3: IICS0 register = 01000100B 4: IICS0 register = 00000001B Remark S: Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 bit = 1 X: don't care User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 571 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS (7) When arbitration loss occurs due to a stop condition when attempting to generate a restart condition <1> When WTIM0 bit = 0 STT0 bit = 1 ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 S1 ACK S2 SP 4 S3 S1: IICS0 register = 1000X110B S2: IICS0 register = 1000X000B (WTIM0 bit = 1) S3: IICS0 register = 1000XX00B 4: IICS0 register = 01000001B Remark S: Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 bit = 1 X: don't care <2> When WTIM0 bit = 1 STT0 bit = 1 ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 S1 ACK SP S2 3 S1: IICS0 register = 1000X110B S2: IICS0 register = 1000XX00B 3: IICS0 register = 01000001B Remark S: Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 bit = 1 X: 572 don't care User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS (8) When arbitration loss occurs due to low level of SDA0n pin when attempting to generate a stop condition <1> When WTIM0 bit = 0 IICC0.SPT0 bit = 1 ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 S1 ACK S2 D7 to D0 ACK S3 D7 to D0 ACK SP 5 S4 S1: IICS0 register = 1000X110B S2: IICS0 register = 1000X000B (WTIM0 bit = 1) S3: IICS0 register = 1000X100B (WTIM0 bit = 0) S4: IICS0 register = 01000100B 5: IICS0 register = 00000001B Remark S: Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 bit = 1 X: don't care <2> When WTIM0 bit = 1 IICC0.SPT0 bit = 1 ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 S1 ACK D7 to D0 S2 ACK D7 to D0 S3 ACK SP 4 S1: IICS0 register = 1000X110B S2: IICS0 register = 1000X100B S3: IICS0 register = 01000100B 4: IICS0 register = 00000001B Remark S: Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 bit = 1 X: don't care User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 573 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS 18.7 Interrupt Request Signal (INTIIC0) Generation Timing and Wait Control The setting of the IICC0.WTIM0 bit determines the timing by which the INTIIC0 signal is generated and the corresponding wait control, as shown below. Table 18-3. INTIIC0 Signal Generation Timing and Wait Control WTIM0 Bit During Slave Device Operation Address 0 1 Notes 1. 9 Notes 1, 2 9 Notes 1, 2 Data Reception 8 Note 2 9 Note 2 During Master Device Operation Data Transmission Address Data Reception Data Transmission 8 Note 2 9 8 8 9 Note 2 9 9 9 The slave device's INTIIC0 signal and wait period occurs at the falling edge of the ninth clock only when there is a match with the address set to the SVA0 register. At this point, ACK is generated regardless of the value set to the IICC0.ACKE0 bit. For a slave device that has received an extension code, the INTIIC0 signal occurs at the falling edge of the eighth clock. When the address does not match after restart, the INTIIC0 signal is generated at the falling edge of the ninth clock, but no wait occurs. 2. If the received address does not match the contents of the SVA0 register and extension codes have not been received, neither the INTIIC0 signal nor a wait occurs. Remark The numbers in the table indicate the number of the serial clock's clock signals. Interrupt requests and wait control are both synchronized with the falling edge of these clock signals. (1) During address transmission/reception * Slave device operation: Interrupt and wait timing are determined depending on the conditions in Notes 1 and 2 above regardless of the WTIM0 bit. * Master device operation: Interrupt and wait timing occur at the falling edge of the ninth clock regardless of the WTIM0 bit. (2) During data reception * Master/slave device operation: Interrupt and wait timing are determined according to the WTIM0 bit. (3) During data transmission * Master/slave device operation: Interrupt and wait timing are determined according to the WTIM0 bit. 574 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS (4) Wait cancellation method The four wait cancellation methods are as follows. * By writing data to the IIC0 register * By setting the IICC0.WREL0 bit (canceling wait state) * By setting the IICC0.STT0 bit (generating start condition)Note * By setting the IICC0.SPT0 bit (generating stop condition)Note Note Master only When an 8-clock wait has been selected (WTIM0 bit = 0), whether or not ACK has been generated must be determined prior to wait cancellation. (5) Stop condition detection The INTIIC0 signal is generated when a stop condition is detected. 18.8 Address Match Detection Method When in I2C bus mode, the master device can select a particular slave device by transmitting the corresponding slave address. Address match detection is performed automatically by hardware. An INTIIC0 interrupt request signal occurs when a local address has been set to the SVA0 register and when the address set to the SVA0 register matches the slave address sent by the master device, or when an extension code has been received. 18.9 Error Detection In I2C bus mode, the status of the serial data bus (SDA0) during data transmission is captured by the IIC0 register of the transmitting device, so the IIC0 register data prior to transmission can be compared with the transmitted IIC0 register data to enable detection of transmission errors. A transmission error is judged as having occurred when the compared data values do not match. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 575 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS 18.10 Extension Code (1) When the higher 4 bits of the receive address are either 0000 or 1111, the extension code flag (EXC0) is set for extension code reception and an interrupt request signal (INTIIC0) is issued at the falling edge of the eighth clock. The local address stored in the SVA0 register is not affected. (2) If 11110xx0 is set to the SVA0 register by a 10-bit address transfer and 11110xx0 is transferred from the master device, the results are as follows. Note that the INTIIC0 signal occurs at the falling edge of the eighth clock. * Higher 4 bits of data match: IICS0.EXC0 bit = 1 * 7 bits of data match: IICS0.COI0 bit = 1 (3) <R> Since the processing after the INTIIC0 signal occurs differs according to the data that follows the extension code, such processing is performed by software. The slave that has received an extension code is always under communication, even if the addresses mismatch. For example, when operation as a slave is not desired after the extension code is received, set the IICC0.LREL0 bit to 1 and the CPU will enter the next communication wait state. Table 18-4. Extension Code Bit Definitions Slave Address 576 R/W Bit Description 0000 000 0 General call address 0000 000 1 Start byte 0000 001 X CBUS address 0000 010 X Address that is reserved for different bus format 1111 0xx X 10-bit slave address specification User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS 18.11 Arbitration When several master devices simultaneously generate a start condition (when the IICC0.STT0 bit is set to 1 before the IICS0.STD0 bit is set to 1), communication among the master devices is performed as the number of clocks is adjusted until the data differs. This kind of operation is called arbitration. When one of the master devices loses in arbitration, an arbitration loss flag (IICS0.ALD0 bit) is set (1) via the timing by which the arbitration loss occurred, and the SCL0 and SDA0 lines are both set for high impedance, which releases the bus. The arbitration loss is detected based on the timing of the next interrupt request signal (INTIIC0) (the eighth or ninth clock, when a stop condition is detected, etc.) and the ALD0 bit = 1 setting that has been made by software. For details of interrupt request timing, refer to 18.6 I2C Interrupt Request Signals (INTIIC0). Figure 18-11. Arbitration Timing Example Master 1 Hi-Z SCL0 Hi-Z SDA0 Master 1 loses arbitration Master 2 SCL0 SDA0 Transfer lines SCL0 SDA0 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 577 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS Table 18-5. Status During Arbitration and Interrupt Request Generation Timing Status During Arbitration Interrupt Request Generation Timing During address transmission At falling edge of eighth or ninth clock following byte transfer Note 1 Read/write data after address transmission During extension code transmission Read/write data after extension code transmission During data transmission During ACK transfer period after data reception When restart condition is detected during data transfer Note 2 When stop condition is detected during data transfer When stop condition is generated (when IICC0.SPIE0 bit = 1) When the SDA0 pin is at low level while attempting to At falling edge of eighth or ninth clock following byte transfer Note 1 generate a restart condition Note 2 When stop condition is detected while attempting to When stop condition is generated (when SPIE0 bit = 1) generate a restart condition When the SDA0 pin is at low level while attempting to Note 1 At falling edge of eighth or ninth clock following byte transfer generate a stop condition When the SCL0 pin is at low level while attempting to generate a restart condition Notes 1. When the IICC0.WTIM0 bit = 1, an interrupt request occurs at the falling edge of the ninth clock. When the WTIM0 bit = 0 and the extension code's slave address is received, an interrupt request occurs at the falling edge of the eighth clock. 2. When there is a possibility that arbitration will occur, set the SPIE0 bit = 1 for master device operation. 18.12 Wakeup Function The I2C bus slave function is a function that generates an interrupt request signal (INTIIC0) when a local address or extension code has been received. This function makes processing more efficient by preventing unnecessary interrupt requests from occurring when addresses do not match. When a start condition is detected, wakeup standby mode is set. This wakeup standby mode is in effect while addresses are transmitted due to the possibility that an arbitration loss may change the master device (which has generated a start condition) to a slave device. However, when a stop condition is detected, the IICC0.SPIE0 bit is set regardless of the wake up function, and this determines whether interrupt requests are enabled or disabled. 578 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS 18.13 Communication Reservation 18.13.1 When communication reservation function is enabled (IICF0.IICRSV0 bit = 0) To start master device communications when not currently using a bus, a communication reservation can be made to enable transmission of a start condition when the bus is released. There are two modes under which the bus is not used. * When arbitration results in neither master nor slave operation * When an extension code is received and slave operation is disabled (ACK is not returned and the bus was released when the IICC0.LREL0 bit was set to "1"). If the IICC0.STT0 bit is set (1) while the bus is not used, a start condition is automatically generated and wait status is set after the bus is released (after a stop condition is detected). <R> A communication is automatically started as the master by setting the IICC0.SPIE0 bit to 1, detecting the bus release due to an interrupt request (INTIIC0) occurrence (detecting a stop condition), and then writing the address to the IIC0 register. Before detecting a stop condition, data written to the IIC0 register is set to invalid. When the STT0 bit has been set (1), the operation mode (as start condition or as communication reservation) is determined according to the bus status. If the bus has been released.............................................. a start condition is generated If the bus has not been released (standby mode) .............. communication reservation To detect which operation mode has been determined for the STT0 bit, set the STT0 bit (1), wait for the wait period, then check the IICS0.MSTS0 bit. Wait periods, which should be set via software, are listed in Table 18-6. These wait periods can be set via the settings for the IICX0.CLX0, IICCL0.SMC0, IICCL0.CL01, and IICCL0.CL00 bits. <R> Table 18-6. Wait Periods CLX0 SMC0 CL01 CL00 Selected Clock 0 0 0 0 fXX/2 46 clocks 0 0 0 1 fXX/2 86 clocks 0 0 1 0 fXX 43 clocks 0 0 1 1 fXX/3 102 clocks 0 1 0 1/0 fXX/2 30 clocks 0 1 1 0 fXX 15 clocks 0 1 1 1 fXX/3 36 clocks 1 1 0 1/0 fXX/2 18 clocks 1 1 1 0 fXX 9 clocks User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD Wait Period 579 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS The communication reservation timing is shown below. Figure 18-12. Communication Reservation Timing Write to IIC0 Program processing STT0=1 Hardware processing SCL0 1 2 3 Set SPD0 and INTIIC0 Communication reservation 4 5 6 7 8 9 Set STD0 1 2 3 4 5 6 SDA0 Generated by master with bus access IIC0: IIC shift register 0 STT0: Bit 1 of IIC control register 0 (IICC0) STD0: Bit 1 of IIC status register 0 (IICS0) SPD0: Bit 0 of IIC status register 0 (IICS0) Communication reservations are accepted via the following timing. After the IICS0.STD0 bit is set to 1, a communication reservation can be made by setting the IICC0.STT0 bit to 1 before a stop condition is detected. Figure 18-13. Timing for Accepting Communication Reservations SCL0 SDA0 STD0 SPD0 Standby mode 580 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS The communication reservation flowchart is illustrated below. Figure 18-14. Communication Reservation Flowchart DI STT0 = 1 Define communication reservation Wait ; Sets STT0 flag (communication reservation). ; Defines that communication reservation is in effect (defines and sets user flag to any part of RAM). ; Gets wait period set by software (refer to Table 18-6). Note (Communication reservation) MSTS0 = 0? Yes ; Confirmation of communication reservation No (Generate start condition) Cancel communication reservation IIC0 xxH ; Clear user flag. ; IIC0 write operation EI Note The communication reservation operation executes a write to the IIC0 register when a stop condition interrupt request occurs. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 581 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS 18.13.2 When communication reservation function is disabled (IICF0.IICRSV0 bit = 1) When the IICC0.STT0 bit is set when the bus is not used in a communication during bus communication, this request is rejected and a start condition is not generated. The following two statuses are included in the status where bus is not used. * When arbitration results in neither master nor slave operation * When an extension code is received and slave operation is disabled (ACK is not returned and the bus was released when the IICC0.LREL0 bit was set to 1) To confirm whether the start condition was generated or request was rejected, check the IICF0.STCF0 flag. The time shown in Table 18-7 is required until the STCF0 flag is set after setting the STT0 bit = 1. Therefore, secure the time by software. <R> Table 18-7. Wait Periods 582 CL01 CL00 Selected Clock 0 0 fXX/2 6 clocks 0 1 fXX/2 6 clocks 1 0 fXX 3 clocks 1 1 fXX/3 9 clocks User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD Wait Period 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS 18.14 Cautions (1) When IICF0.STCEN0 bit = 0 Immediately after I2C0 operation is enabled, the bus communication status (IICF0.IICBSY0 bit = 1) is recognized regardless of the actual bus status. To execute master communication in the status where a stop condition has not been detected, generate a stop condition and then release the bus before starting the master communication. Use the following sequence for generating a stop condition. <1> Set the IICCL0 register. <2> Set the IICC0.IICE0 bit. <3> Set the IICC0.SPT0 bit. (2) When IICF0.STCEN0 bit = 1 Immediately after I2C0 operation is enabled, the bus released status (IICBSY0 bit = 0) is recognized regardless of the actual bus status. To generate the first start condition (IICC0.STT0 bit = 1), it is necessary to confirm that the bus has been released, so as to not disturb other communications. <R> (3) When the IICC0.IICE0 bit of the V850ES/KF1 is set to 1 while communications with other devices are in progress, the start condition may be detected depending on the status of the communication line. Be sure to set the IICC0.IICE0 bit to 1 when the SCL0 and SDA0 lines are high level. <R> (4) Determine the operation clock frequency by the IICCL0 and IICX0 registers before enabling the operation (IICC0.IICE0 bit = 1). To change the operation clock frequency, clear the IICC0.IICE0 bit to 0 once. <R> (5) After the IICC0.STT0 and IICC0.SPT0 bits have been set to 1, they must not be re-set without being cleared to 0 first. <R> (6) If transmission has been reserved, set the IICC0.SPIE0 bit to 1 so that an interrupt request is generated by the detection of a stop condition. After an interrupt request has been generated, the wait state will be released by writing communication data to I2C0, then transferring will begin. If an interrupt is not generated by the detection of a stop condition, transmission will halt in the wait state because an interrupt request was not generated. However, it is not necessary to set the SPIE0 bit to 1 for the software to detect the IICS0.MSTS0 bit. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 583 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS <R> 18.15 Communication Operations The following shows three operation procedures with the flowchart. (1) Master operation in single master system The flowchart when using the V850ES/KF1 as the master in a single master system is shown below. This flowchart is broadly divided into the initial settings and communication processing. Execute the initial settings at startup. If communication with the slave is required, prepare the communication and then execute communication processing. (2) Master operation in multimaster system In the I2C0 bus multimaster system, whether the bus is released or used cannot be judged by the I2C bus specifications when the bus takes part in a communication. Here, when data and clock are at a high level for a certain period (1 frame), the V850ES/KF1 takes part in a communication with bus released state. This flowchart is broadly divided into the initial settings, communication waiting, and communication processing. The processing when the V850ES/KF1 loses in arbitration and is specified as the slave is omitted here, and only the processing as the master is shown. Execute the initial settings at startup to take part in a communication. Then, wait for the communication request as the master or wait for the specification as the slave. The actual communication is performed in the communication processing, and it supports the transmission/reception with the slave and the arbitration with other masters. (3) Slave operation An example of when the V850ES/KF1 is used as the slave is shown below. When used as the slave, operation is started by an interrupt. Execute the initial settings at startup, then wait for the INTIIC0 interrupt occurrence (communication waiting). When the INTIIC0 interrupt occurs, the communication status is judged and its result is passed as a flag over to the main processing. By checking the flags, necessary communication processing is performed. 584 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS 18.15.1 Master operation in single master system Figure 18-15. Master Operation in Single Master System START Initialize I2C busNote Refer to Table 4-14 Settings When Port Pins Are Used for Alternate Functions to set the I2C mode before this function is used. Initial settings Set ports IICX0 0XH IICCL0 XXH Transfer clock selection SVA0 XXH Local address setting IICF0 0XH Set STCEN0, IICRSV0 = 0 Start condition setting IICC0 XXH ACKE0 = WTIM0 = SPIE0 = 1 IICE0 = 1 STCEN0 = 1? Yes No SPT0 = 1 INTIIC0 interrupt occurred? Communication start preparation (stop condition generation) No Waiting for stop condition detection Yes STT0 = 1 Communication start preparation (start condition generation) Write IIC0 Communication start (address, transfer direction specification) INTIIC0 interrupt occurred? No Waiting for ACK detection Yes No ACKD0 = 1? Yes Communication processing TRC0 = 1? No ACKE0 = 1 WTIM0 = 0 Yes Write IIC0 INTIIC0 interrupt occurred? Transmission start No Waiting for data transmission WREL0 = 1 INTIIC0 interrupt occurred? Yes Yes ACKD0 = 1? No Reception start No Waiting for data reception Read IIC0 Yes No Transfer completed? No Transfer completed? Yes Yes Restarted? Yes ACKE0 = 0 WTIM0 = WREL0 = 1 No SPT0 = 1 INTIIC0 interrupt occurred? No Waiting for ACK detection Yes END 2 Note Release the I C0 bus (SCL0, SDA0 pins = high level) in conformity with the specifications of the product in communication. For example, when the EEPROMTM outputs a low level to the SDA0 pin, set the SCL0 pin to the output port and output clock pulses from that output port until when the SDA0 pin is constantly high level. Remark For the transmission and reception formats, conform to the specifications of the product in communication. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 585 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS 18.15.2 Master operation in multimaster system Figure 18-16. Master Operation in Multimaster System (1/3) START Refer to Table 4-14 Settings When Port Pins Are Used for Alternate Functions to set the I2C mode before this function is used. Set ports IICX0 0XH IICCL0 XXH Transfer clock selection SVA0 XXH Local address setting IICF0 0XH Set STCEN0, IICRSV0 = 0 Start condition setting Initial settings IICC0 XXH ACKE0 = WTIM0 = SPIE0 = 1 IICE0 = 1 Confirm bus statusNote Bus release status for a certain period Confirmation of bus status is in progress No INTIIC0 interrupt occurred? No STCEN0 = 1? Communication start preparation (stop condition generation) SPT0 = 1 Yes Yes SPD0 = 1? INTIIC0 interrupt occurred? No Yes Yes Slave operation SPD0 = 1? No Waiting for stop condition detection No Yes Waiting for communication Slave operation * Waiting for slave specification from another master * Waiting for communication start request (depending on user program) 1 Master operation started? No (no communication start request) Yes (communication start request issued) SPIE0 = 0 INTIIC0 interrupt occurred? SPIE0 = 1 No Waiting for communication request Yes IICRSV0 = 0? No Slave operation Yes A B Communication Communication reservation enable reservation disable Note Confirm that the bus release status (IICCL0.CLD0 bit = 1, IICCL0.DAD0 bit = 1) has been maintained for a certain period (1 frame, for example). When the SDA0 pin is constantly low level, determine whether to release the I2C0 bus (SCL0, SDA0 pins = high level) by referring to the specifications of the product in communication. 586 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS Figure 18-16. Master Operation in Multimaster System (2/3) A Communication reservation enabled STT0 = 1 Securing wait time by software (refer to Table 18-6) Wait Communication processing Communication start preparation (start condition generation) MSTS0 = 1? No Yes INTIIC0 interrupt occurred? Yes No Wait status after stop condition detection and start condition generation by communication reservation function C EXC0 = 1 or COI0 =1? Yes Slave operation B Communication reservation disabled IICBSY0 = 0? No Yes D Communication processing No Waiting for bus release (communication reserved) STT0 = 1 Wait STCF0 = 0? Yes Communication start preparation (start condition generation) Securing wait time by software (refer to Table 18-7) No INTIIC0 interrupt occurred? No Waiting for bus release Yes C EXC0 = 1 or COI0 =1? No D User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD Yes Stop condition detection Slave operation 587 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS Figure 18-16. Master Operation in Multimaster System (3/3) C Write IIC0 INTIIC0 interrupt occurred? Communication start (address, transfer direction specification) No Waiting for ACK detection Yes MSTS0 = 1? No Yes No 2 ACKD0 = 1? Yes Communication processing TRC0 = 1? No ACKE0 = 1 WTIM0 = 0 Yes WTIM0 = 1 WREL0 = 1 Write IIC0 Transmission start INTIIC0 interrupt occurred? INTIIC0 interrupt occurred? No Waiting for data transmission Yes MSTS0 = 1? Yes MSTS0 = 1? No Waiting for data transmission No No Yes Yes ACKD0 = 1? Reception start 2 2 Read IIC0 No Transfer completed? No Yes Yes No WTIM0 = WREL0 = 1 ACKE0 = 0 Transfer completed? Yes INTIIC0 interrupt occurred? Restarted? No No Waiting for ACK detection Yes SPT0 = 1 Yes MSTS0 = 1? STT0 = 1 END Yes No 2 Communication processing C 2 EXC0 = 1 or COI0 = 1? No Yes Slave operation 1 Not in communication Remarks 1. Conform the transmission and reception formats to the specifications of the product in communication. 2. When using the V850ES/KF1 as the master in the multimaster system, read the IICS0.MSTS0 bit for each INTIIC0 interrupt occurrence to confirm the arbitration result. 3. When using the V850ES/KF1 as the slave in the multimaster system, confirm the status using the IICS0 and IICF0 registers for each INTIIC0 interrupt occurrence to determine the next processing. 588 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS 18.15.3 Slave operation The following shows the processing procedure of the slave operation. Basically, the operation of the slave device is event-driven. Therefore, processing by an INTIIC0 interrupt (processing requiring a significant change of the operation status, such as stop condition detection during communication) is necessary. The following description assumes that data communication does not support extension codes. Also, it is assumed that the INTIIC0 interrupt servicing performs only status change processing and that the actual data communication is performed during the main processing. Figure 18-17. Software Outline During Slave Operation Flag INTIIC0 Interrupt servicing Setting, etc. Main processing I2C Data Setting, etc. Therefore, the following three flags are prepared so that the data transfer processing can be performed by transmitting these flags to the main processing instead of the INTIIC0 signal. (1) Communication mode flag This flag indicates the following communication statuses. Clear mode: Data communication not in progress Communication mode: Data communication in progress (valid address detection stop condition detection, ACK from master not detected, address mismatch) (2) Ready flag This flag indicates that data communication is enabled. This is the same status as an INTIIC0 interrupt during normal data transfer. This flag is set in the interrupt processing block and cleared in the main processing block. The ready flag for the first data for transmission is not set in the interrupt processing block, so the first data is transmitted without clearance processing (the address match is regarded as a request for the next data). (3) Communication direction flag This flag indicates the direction of communication and is the same as the value of the IICS0.TRC0 bit. The following shows the operation of the main processing block during slave operation. Start I2C0 and wait for the communication enabled status. When communication is enabled, perform transfer using the communication mode flag and ready flag (the processing of the stop condition and start condition is performed by interrupts, conditions are confirmed by flags). For transmission, repeat the transmission operation until the master device stops returning ACK. When the master device stops returning ACK, transfer is complete. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 589 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS For reception, receive the required number of data and do not return ACK for the next data immediately after transfer is complete. After that, the master device generates the stop condition or restart condition. This causes exit from communications. Figure 18-18. Slave Operation Flowchart (1) <R> START Refer to Table 4-14 Settings When Port Pins Are Used for Alternate Functions to set the I2C mode before this function is used. Set ports Initial settings IICX0 0XH Transfer clock selection IICCL0 XXH SVA0 XXH Local address setting IICF0 0XH Start condition setting Set IICRSV0 IICC0 XXH ACKE0 = WTIM0 = 1 SPIE0 = 0, IICE0 = 1 No Communication mode flag = 1? Yes No Communication direction flag = 1? Yes WREL0 = 1 Transmission start Communication processing Write IIC0 No Communication mode flag = 1? Communication mode flag = 1? Communication direction flag = 1? Communication direction flag = 1? Yes No Yes No Ready flag = 1? Ready flag = 1? Yes Yes Read IIC0 Clear ready flag Yes ACKD0 = 1? No Clear communication mode flag WREL0 = 1 590 No Yes Yes No Reception start User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD Clear ready flag No 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS The following shows an example of the processing of the slave device by an INTIIC0 interrupt (it is assumed that no extension codes are used here). During an INTIIC0 interrupt, the status is confirmed and the following steps are executed. <1> When a stop condition is detected, communication is terminated. <2> When a start condition is detected, the address is confirmed. If the address does not match, communication is terminated. If the address matches, the communication mode is set and wait is released, and operation returns from the interrupt (the ready flag is cleared). <3> For data transmission/reception, when the ready flag is set, operation returns from the interrupt while the I2C0 bus remains in the wait status. Remark <1> to <3> in the above correspond to <1> to <3> in Figure 18-19 Slave Operation Flowchart (2). <R> Figure 18-19. Slave Operation Flowchart (2) INTIIC0 occurred Yes <1> Yes <2> SPD0 = 1? No STD0 = 1? No No <3> COI0 = 1? Yes Set ready flag Communication direction flag TRC0 Set communication mode flag Clear ready flag Clear communication direction flag, ready flag, and communication mode flag Interrupt servicing completed User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 591 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS 18.16 Timing of Data Communication When using I2C bus mode, the master device generates an address via the serial bus to select one of several slave devices as its communication partner. After outputting the slave address, the master device transmits the IICS0.TRC0 bit that specifies the data transfer direction and then starts serial communication with the slave device. The IIC0 register's shift operation is synchronized with the falling edge of the serial clock (SCL0 pin). The transmit data is transferred to the SO latch and is output (MSB first) via the SDA0 pin. Data input via the SDA0 pin is captured by the IIC0 register at the rising edge of the SCL0 pin. The data communication timing is shown below. 592 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS <R> Figure 18-20. Example of Master to Slave Communication (When 9-Clock Wait Is Selected for Both Master and Slave) (1/3) (a) Start condition ~ address Processing by master device IIC0 address IIC0 IIC0 data ACKD0 STD0 SPD0 WTIM0 H ACKE0 H MSTS0 STT0 SPT0 L WREL0 L INTIIC0 TRC0 H Transmit Transfer lines 1 SCL0 2 3 4 5 6 7 AD6 AD5 AD4 AD3 AD2 AD1 AD0 SDA0 8 9 1 2 3 4 W ACK D7 D6 D5 D4 Start condition Processing by slave device IIC0 FFH IIC0 Note ACKD0 STD0 SPD0 WTIM0 H ACKE0 H MSTS0 L STT0 L SPT0 L Note WREL0 INTIIC0 (when EXC0 = 1) TRC0 L Receive Note To cancel slave wait, write FFH to IIC0 or set WREL0. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 593 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS <R> Figure 18-20. Example of Master to Slave Communication (When 9-Clock Wait Is Selected for Both Master and Slave) (2/3) (b) Data Processing by master device IIC0 data IIC0 IIC0 data ACKD0 STD0 L SPD0 L WTIM0 H ACKE0 H MSTS0 H STT0 L SPT0 L WREL0 L INTIIC0 TRC0 H Transmit Transfer lines SCL0 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 SDA0 D0 ACK D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 ACK 1 2 3 D7 D6 D5 Processing by slave device IIC0 FFH Note IIC0 IIC0 FFH Note ACKD0 STD0 L SPD0 L WTIM0 H ACKE0 H MSTS0 L STT0 L SPT0 L Note WREL0 Note INTIIC0 TRC0 L Receive Note To cancel slave wait, write FFH to IIC0 or set WREL0. 594 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS <R> Figure 18-20. Example of Master to Slave Communication (When 9-Clock Wait Is Selected for Both Master and Slave) (3/3) (c) Stop condition Processing by master device IIC0 data IIC0 IIC0 address ACKD0 STD0 SPD0 WTIM0 H ACKE0 H MSTS0 STT0 SPT0 WREL0 L INTIIC0 (when SPIE0 = 1) TRC0 H Transmit Transfer lines SCL0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 SDA0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 ACK IIC0 FFH Note 2 AD6 AD5 Stop condition Processing by slave device IIC0 1 Start condition IIC0 FFH Note ACKD0 STD0 SPD0 WTIM0 H ACKE0 H MSTS0 L STT0 L SPT0 L Note WREL0 Note INTIIC0 (when SPIE0 = 1) TRC0 L Receive Note To cancel slave wait, write FFH to IIC0 or set WREL0. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 595 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS <R> Figure 18-21. Example of Slave to Master Communication (When 8-Clock Wait for Master and 9-Clock Wait for Slave Are Selected) (1/3) (a) Start condition ~ address Processing by master device IIC0 address IIC0 IIC0 FFH Note ACKD0 STD0 SPD0 WTIM0 L ACKE0 H MSTS0 STT0 L SPT0 Note WREL0 INTIIC0 TRC0 Transfer lines 1 SCL0 2 3 4 5 6 7 AD6 AD5 AD4 AD3 AD2 AD1 AD0 SDA0 8 9 R ACK 1 D7 2 3 4 5 6 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 Start condition Processing by slave device IIC0 data IIC0 ACKD0 STD0 SPD0 WTIM0 H ACKE0 H MSTS0 L STT0 L SPT0 L WREL0 L INTIIC0 TRC0 Note To cancel master wait, write FFH to IIC0 or set WREL0. 596 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS <R> Figure 18-21. Example of Slave to Master Communication (When 8-Clock Wait for Master and 9-Clock Wait for Slave Are Selected) (2/3) (b) Data Processing by master device IIC0 FFH Note IIC0 IIC0 FFH Note ACKD0 STD0 L SPD0 L WTIM0 L ACKE0 H MSTS0 H STT0 L SPT0 L Note WREL0 Note INTIIC0 TRC0 L Receive Transfer lines SCL0 8 9 SDA0 D0 ACK 1 D7 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 ACK 1 D7 2 3 D6 D5 Processing by slave device IIC0 data IIC0 IIC0 data ACKD0 STD0 L SPD0 L WTIM0 H ACKE0 H MSTS0 L STT0 L SPT0 L WREL0 L INTIIC0 TRC0 H Transmit Note To cancel master wait, write FFH to IIC0 or set WREL0. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 597 2 CHAPTER 18 I C BUS <R> Figure 18-21. Example of Slave to Master Communication (When 8-Clock Wait for Master and 9-Clock Wait for Slave Are Selected) (3/3) (c) Stop condition Processing by master device IIC0 address IIC0 FFH Note IIC0 ACKD0 STD0 SPD0 WTIM0 ACKE0 MSTS0 STT0 SPT0 Note WREL0 INTIIC0 (when SPIE0 = 1) TRC0 Transfer lines SCL0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SDA0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 9 1 NACK Stop condition Processing by slave device AD6 Start condition IIC0 data IIC0 ACKD0 STD0 SPD0 WTIM0 H ACKE0 H MSTS0 L STT0 L SPT0 L WREL0 INTIIC0 (when SPIE0 = 1) TRC0 Note To cancel master wait, write FFH to IIC0 or set WREL0. 598 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 19 INTERRUPT/EXCEPTION PROCESSING FUNCTION 19.1 Overview The V850ES/KF1 is provided with a dedicated interrupt controller (INTC) for interrupt servicing and realize an interrupt function that can service interrupt requests from a total of 33 to 37 sources. An interrupt is an event that occurs independently of program execution, and an exception is an event whose occurrence is dependent on program execution. The V850ES/KF1 can process interrupt requests from the on-chip peripheral hardware and external sources. Moreover, exception processing can be started by the TRAP instruction (software exception) or by generation of an exception event (fetching of an illegal op code) (exception trap). 19.1.1 Features Interrupt Source V850ES/KF1 Interrupt Non-maskable External 1 channel (NMI pin) function interrupt Internal 2 channels (WDT1, WDT2) Maskable interrupt External 7 channels (all edge detection interrupts) Internal WDT1 TMP Note 1 3 channels TM0 4 channels TMH 2 channels TM5 2 channels WT 2 channels BRG 1 channel UART 6 channels CSI0 2 channels CSIA 1 channel Note 2 Exception 1 channel IIC 1 channel KR 1 channel AD 1 channel Total 27 channels Software exception 16 channels (TRAP00H to TRAP0FH) function 16 channels (TRAP10H to TRAP1FH) Exception trap 2 channels (ILGOP/DBG0) Notes 1. Only in the PD703211, 703211Y, 70F3211H, 70F3211HY 2. Only in products with an I2C bus (Y products) Table 19-1 lists the interrupt/exception sources. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 599 CHAPTER 19 INTERRUPT/EXCEPTION PROCESSING FUNCTION Table 19-1. Interrupt Source List (1/2) Type Classification Default Priority Name Trigger Interrupt Exception Handler Source Address Code Restored Interrupt PC Control Register Reset Non- Interrupt Interrupt maskable - RESET RESET pin input Pin Internal reset input from WDT1 WDT1, WDT2 WDT2 0000H 00000000H Undefined - - NMI NMI pin valid edge input Pin 0010H 00000010H nextPC - - INTWDT1 WDT1 overflow (when non- WDT1 0020H 00000020H Note 1 - WDT2 0030H 00000030H Note 1 - Note 2 00000040H nextPC - Note 2 maskable interrupt selected) - INTWDT2 WDT2 overflow (when nonmaskable interrupt selected) Software Exception - TRAP0n Note 2 Note 2 exception - TRAP1n Exception Exception - trap Maskable Interrupt 0 TRAP instruction - 004nH TRAP instruction - 005nH 00000050H nextPC - ILGOP/ Illegal op code/DBTRAP - 0060H 00000060H nextPC - DBG0 instruction 0080H 00000080H nextPC INTWDTM1 WDT1 overflow (when interval WDT1 WDT1IC timer selected) 1 INTP0 INTP0 pin valid edge input Pin 0090H 00000090H nextPC PIC0 2 INTP1 INTP1 pin valid edge input Pin 00A0H 000000A0H nextPC PIC1 3 INTP2 INTP2 pin valid edge input Pin 00B0H 000000B0H nextPC PIC2 4 INTP3 INTP3 pin valid edge input Pin 00C0H 000000C0H nextPC PIC3 5 INTP4 INTP4 pin valid edge input Pin 00D0H 000000D0H nextPC PIC4 6 INTP5 INTP5 pin valid edge input Pin 00E0H 000000E0H nextPC PIC5 7 INTP6 INTP6 pin valid edge input Pin 00F0H 000000F0H nextPC PIC6 8 INTTM000 TM00 and CR000 match TM00 0100H 00000100H TM0IC00 nextPC 9 INTTM001 TM00 and CR001 match TM00 0110H 00000110H nextPC TM0IC01 10 INTTM010 TM01 and CR010 match TM01 0120H 00000120H nextPC TM0IC10 11 INTTM011 TM01 and CR011 match TM01 0130H 00000130H nextPC TM0IC11 12 INTTM50 TM50 and CR50 match TM50 0140H 00000140H nextPC TM5IC0 13 INTTM51 TM51 and CR51 match TM51 0150H 00000150H nextPC TM5IC1 14 INTCSI00 CSI00 transfer completion CSI00 0160H 00000160H nextPC CSI0IC0 15 INTCSI01 CSI01 transfer completion CSI01 0170H 00000170H nextPC CSI0IC1 16 INTSRE0 UART0 reception error UART0 0180H 00000180H nextPC SREIC0 occurrence 17 INTSR0 UART0 reception completion UART0 0190H 00000190H nextPC SRIC0 18 INTST0 UART0 transmission UART0 01A0H 000001AH nextPC STIC0 UART1 01B0H 000001B0H nextPC SREIC1 completion 19 INTSRE1 UART1 reception error occurrence 20 INTSR1 UART1 reception completion UART1 01C0H 000001C0H nextPC SRIC1 21 INTST1 UART1 transmission UART1 01D0H 000001D0H nextPC STIC1 completion Notes 1. For restoration in the case of INTWDT1 and INTWDT2, refer to 19.10 Cautions. 2. n = 0 to FH 600 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 19 INTERRUPT/EXCEPTION PROCESSING FUNCTION Table 19-1. Interrupt Source List (2/2) Type Classification Default Priority Name Trigger Interrupt Exception Handler Source Address Code Restored Interrupt PC Control Register Maskable Interrupt 22 INTTMH0 TMH0 and CMP00/CMP01 TMH0 01E0H 000001E0H nextPC TMHIC0 TMH1 01F0H 000001F0H nextPC TMHIC1 CSIA0 0200H 00000200H nextPC CSIAIC0 match 23 INTTMH1 TMH1 and CMP10/CMP11 match 24 INTCSIA0 25 INTIIC0 26 Note 1 CSIA0 transfer completion 2 2 I C0 transfer completion I C0 0210H 00000210H nextPC IICIC0 INTAD A/D conversion completion A/D 0220H 00000220H nextPC ADIC 27 INTKR Key return interrupt KR 0230H 00000230H nextPC KRIC 28 INTWTI Watch timer interval WT 0240H 00000240H nextPC WTIIC 29 INTWT Watch timer reference time WT 0250H 00000250H nextPC WTIC 30 INTBRG 8-bit counter of prescaler 3 Prescaler 3 0260H 00000260H nextPC BRGIC and PRSCM match Note 2 TMP0 overflow TMP0 03A0H 000003A0H nextPC TP0OVIC Note 2 TP0CCR0 capture/ TMP0 03B0H 000003B0H nextPC TP0CCIC0 TMP0 03C0H 000003C0H nextPC TP0CCIC1 45 INTTP0OV 46 INTTP0CC0 TMP0 and TP0CCR0 match 47 INTTP0CC1 Note 2 TP0CCR1 capture/ TMP0 and TP0CCR1 match Notes 1. Only in the PD703208Y, 703209Y, 703210Y, 703211Y, 70F3210Y, 70F3210HY, 70F3211HY 2. Only in the PD703211, 703211Y, 70F3211H, 70F3211HY Remarks 1. Default priority: The priority order when two or more maskable interrupt requests with the same priority level are generated at the same time. The highest priority is 0. The priority of non-maskable interrupt request is as follows. INTWDT2 > INTWDT1 > NMI Restored PC: The value of the program counter (PC) saved to EIPC, FEPC, or DBPC when interrupt/exception processing is started. The restored PC when a non-maskable or maskable interrupt is acknowledged while either of the following instructions is being executed does not become nextPC (when an interrupt is acknowledged during the execution of an instruction, the execution of that instruction is stopped and is resumed following completion of interrupt servicing). * Load instructions (SLD.B, SLD.BU, SLD.H, SLD.HU, SLD.W) * Divide instructions (DIV, DIVH, DIVU, DIVHU) * PREPARE, DISPOSE instructions (only when an interrupt occurs before stack pointer update) nextPC: The PC value at which processing is started following interrupt/exception processing. 2. The execution address of the illegal op code when an illegal op code exception occurs is calculated with (Restored PC - 4). User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 601 CHAPTER 19 INTERRUPT/EXCEPTION PROCESSING FUNCTION 19.2 Non-Maskable Interrupts Non-maskable interrupt request signals are acknowledged unconditionally, even when interrupts are disabled (DI state). Non-maskable interrupts (NMI) are not subject to priority control and take precedence over all other interrupt request signals. The following three types of non-maskable interrupt request signals are available in the V850ES/KF1. * NMI pin input (NMI) * Non-maskable interrupt request signal (INTWDT1) due to overflow of watchdog timer 1 * Non-maskable interrupt request signal (INTWDT2) due to overflow of watchdog timer 2 There are four choices for the valid edge of an NMI pin, namely: rising edge, falling edge, both edges, and no edge detection. The non-maskable interrupt request signal (INTWDT1) due to overflow of watchdog timer 1 functions by setting the WDTM1.WDTM14 and WDTM1.WDTM13 bits to 10. The non-maskable interrupt request signal (INTWDT2) due to overflow of watchdog timer 2 functions by setting the WDTM2.WDM21 and WDTM2.WDM20 bits to 01. When two or more non-maskable interrupts occur simultaneously, they are processed in a sequence determined by the following priority order (the interrupt request signals with low priority level are ignored). INTWDT2 > INTWDT1 > NMI If during NMI processing, an NMI, INTWDT1, or INTWDT2 request signal newly occurs, processing is performed as follows. (1) If an NMI request signal newly occurs during NMI processing The new NMI request signal is held pending regardless of the value of the PSW.NP bit. The NMI request signal held pending is acknowledged upon completion of processing of the NMI currently being executed (following RETI instruction execution). (2) If an INTWDT1 request signal newly occurs during NMI processing If the NP bit remains set (to 1) during NMI processing, the new INTWDT1 request signal is held pending. The INTWDT1 request signal held pending is acknowledged upon completion of processing of the NMI currently being executed (following RETI instruction execution). If the NP bit is cleared (to 0) during NMI processing, a newly generated INTWDT1 request signal is executed (NMI processing is interrupted). (3) If an INTWDT2 request signal newly occurs during NMI processing A newly generated INTWDT2 request signal is executed regardless of the value of the NP bit (NMI processing is interrupted). Caution For non-maskable interrupt servicing from non-maskable interrupt request signals (INTWDT1, INTWDT2), refer to 19.10 Cautions. 602 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 19 INTERRUPT/EXCEPTION PROCESSING FUNCTION Figure 19-1. Acknowledging Non-Maskable Interrupt Request Signals (1/2) (a) If two or more NMI request signals are simultaneously generated * NMI and INTWDT1 requests simultaneously generated * NMI and INTWDT2 requests simultaneously generated Main routine Main routine INTWDT1 processing NMI, INTWDT1 request (simultaneously generated) System reset * INTWDT1 and INTWDT2 requests simultaneously generated INTWDT2 processing NMI, INTWDT2 request (simultaneously generated) * NMI, INTWDT1, and INTWDT2 requests simultaneously generated Main routine Main routine INTWDT2 processing INTWDT2 processing INTWDT1, INTWDT2 request (simultaneously generated) System reset System reset NMI, INTWDT1, INTWDT2 requests (simultaneously generated) User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD System reset 603 CHAPTER 19 INTERRUPT/EXCEPTION PROCESSING FUNCTION Figure 19-1. Acknowledging Non-Maskable Interrupt Request Signals (2/2) (b) If a new non-maskable interrupt request signal is generated during a non-maskable interrupt servicing Non-maskable interrupt currently being serviced NMI Non-maskable interrupt request newly generated during non-maskable interrupt servicing NMI INTWDT1 * Generation of NMI request during NMI processing INTWDT2 * Generation of INTWDT1 request during NMI processing * Generation of INTWDT2 request during NMI processing (NP = 1 state prior to INTWDT1 request is maintained) Main routine NMI processing NMI request Main routine Main routine (Held pending) NMI processing NMI processing NMI processing NMI request(Hold pending) NMI request INTWDT1 request (Hold pending) NMI request INTWDT2 request INTWDT2 processing System reset INTWDT1 processing System reset * Generation of INTWDT1 request during NMI processing (Set NP = 0 before INTWDT1 request) Main routine NMI processing NP = 0 INTWDT1 processing NMI request INTWDT1 request System reset * Generation of INTWDT1 request during NMI processing (Set NP = 0 after INTWDT1 request) NMI processing Main routine NMI request INTWDT1(Hold pending) request NP = 0 INTWDT1 processing System reset INTWDT1 * Generation of NMI request during INTWDT1 processing * Generation of INTWDT1 request during INTWDT1 processing * Generation of INTWDT2 request during INTWDT1 processing Main routine Main routine INTWDT1 processing INTWDT1 request NMI request(Invalid) INTWDT1 processing INTWDT1 request System reset INTWDT1(Invalid) request System reset Main routine INTWDT1 request INTWDT1 processing INTWDT2 processing INTWDT2 request System reset INTWDT2 * Generation of NMI request during INTWDT2 processing Main routine * Generation of INTWDT1 request during INTWDT2 processing * Generation of INTWDT2 request during INTWDT2 processing Main routine INTWDT2 processing INTWDT2 request NMI request(Invalid) System reset 604 INTWDT2 request Main routine INTWDT2 processing INTWDT1(Invalid) request System reset User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD INTWDT2 request INTWDT2 processing INTWDT2(Invalid) request System reset CHAPTER 19 INTERRUPT/EXCEPTION PROCESSING FUNCTION 19.2.1 Operation Upon generation of a non-maskable interrupt request signal, the CPU performs the following processing and transfers control to a handler routine. <1> Saves the restored PC to FEPC. <2> Saves the current PSW to FEPSW. <3> Writes the exception code (0010H, 0020H, 0030H) to the higher halfword (FECC) of ECR. <4> Sets the PSW.NP and PSW.ID bits to 1 and clears the PSW.EP bit to 0. <5> Loads the handler address (00000010H, 00000020H, 00000030H) of the non-maskable interrupt to the PC and transfers control. Figure 19-2 shows the servicing flow for non-maskable interrupts. Figure 19-2. Non-Maskable Interrupt Servicing NMI input INTC acknowledged Non-maskable interrupt request CPU processing PSW. NP 1 0 FEPC FEPSW ECR. FECC PSW. NP PSW. EP PSW. ID PC Restored PC PSW Exception code 1 0 1 Handler address Interrupt request held pending Interrupt servicing User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 605 CHAPTER 19 INTERRUPT/EXCEPTION PROCESSING FUNCTION 19.2.2 Restore Execution is restored from non-maskable interrupt servicing by the RETI instruction. (1) In case of NMI Restore from NMI processing is done with the RETI instruction. When the RETI instruction is executed, the CPU performs the following processing and transfers control to the address of the restored PC. (i) Loads the values of the restored PC and PSW from FEPC and FEPSW, respectively, because the PSW.EP bit and the PSW.NP bit are 0 and 1, respectively. (ii) Transfers control back to the loaded address of the restored PC and PSW. Figure 19-3 shows the processing flow of the RETI instruction. Figure 19-3. RETI Instruction Processing RETI instruction 1 PSW.EP 0 PSW.NP 1 0 PC PSW EIPC EIPSW PC PSW FEPC FEPSW Original processing restored Caution When the EP bit and the NP bit are changed by the LDSR instruction during non-maskable interrupt servicing, in order to restore the PC and PSW correctly during restoring by the RETI instruction, it is necessary to clear the EP bit back to 0 and set the NP bit back to 1 using the LDSR instruction immediately before the RETI instruction. Remark The solid line shows the CPU processing flow. (2) In case of INTWDT1 and INTWDT2 signals For non-maskable interrupt servicing by the non-maskable interrupt request signals (INTWDT1, INTWDT2), refer to 19.10 Cautions. 606 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 19 INTERRUPT/EXCEPTION PROCESSING FUNCTION 19.2.3 NP flag The NP flag is a status flag that indicates that non-maskable interrupt servicing is in progress. This flag is set when a non-maskable interrupt request has been acknowledged, and masks all non-maskable requests to prevent multiple interrupts. After reset: 00000020H PSW 0 NP NP EP ID SAT CY OV S Z NMI servicing status 0 No non-maskable interrupt servicing 1 Non-maskable interrupt serving in progress User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 607 CHAPTER 19 INTERRUPT/EXCEPTION PROCESSING FUNCTION 19.3 Maskable Interrupts Maskable interrupt request signals can be masked by interrupt control registers. The V850ES/KF1 has 35 maskable interrupt sources (refer to 19.1.1 Features). If two or more maskable interrupt request signals are generated at the same time, they are acknowledged according to the default priority. In addition to the default priority, eight levels of interrupt priorities can be specified by using the interrupt control registers, allowing programmable priority control. When an interrupt request signal has been acknowledged, the interrupt disabled (DI) status is set and the acknowledgment of other maskable interrupt request signals is disabled. When the EI instruction is executed in an interrupt servicing routine, the interrupt enabled (EI) status is set, which enables acknowledgment of interrupt request signals having a priority higher than that of the interrupt request signal currently in progress. Note that only interrupt request signals with a higher priority have this capability; interrupt request signals with the same priority level cannot be nested. To use multiple interrupts, it is necessary to save EIPC and EIPSW to memory or a register before executing the EI instruction, and restore EIPC and EIPSW to the original values by executing the DI instruction before the RETI instruction. When the WDTM1.WDTM14 bit is cleared to 0, the watchdog timer 1 overflow interrupt functions as a maskable interrupt (INTWDTM1). 19.3.1 Operation If a maskable interrupt request signal is generated, the CPU performs the following processing and transfers control to a handler routine. <1> Saves the restored PC to EIPC. <2> Saves the current PSW to EIPSW. <3> Writes an exception code to the lower halfword of ECR (EICC). <4> Sets the PSW.ID bit to 1 and clears the PSW.EP bit to 0. <5> Loads the corresponding handler address to the PC and transfers control. The maskable interrupt request signal masked by INTC and the maskable interrupt request signal that occurs while another interrupt is being serviced (when PSW.NP bit = 1 or ID bit = 1) are held pending internally. When the interrupts are unmasked, or when the NP bit = 0 and the ID bit = 0 by using the RETI and LDSR instructions, a new maskable interrupt servicing is started in accordance with the priority of the pending maskable interrupt request signal. Figure 19-4 shows the servicing flow for maskable interrupts. 608 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 19 INTERRUPT/EXCEPTION PROCESSING FUNCTION Figure 19-4. Maskable Interrupt Servicing INT input Interrupt mask released? No Yes INTC acknowledged Priority higher than that of interrupt currently being serviced? No Yes Priority higher than that of other interrupt requests? No Yes Highest default priority of interrupt requests with the same priority? No Yes Maskable interrupt request Interrupt request pending 1 PSW. NP 0 1 PSW. ID CPU processing 0 EIPC EIPSW ECR. EICC PSW. EP PSW. ID ISPR. correspondingbitNote PC Restored PC PSW Exception code 0 1 Interrupt request pending 1 Handler address Interrupt servicing Note For the ISPR register, refer to 19.3.6 In-service priority register (ISPR). User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 609 CHAPTER 19 INTERRUPT/EXCEPTION PROCESSING FUNCTION 19.3.2 Restore Execution is restored from maskable interrupt servicing by the RETI instruction. When the RETI instruction is executed, the CPU performs the following processing and transfers control to the address of the restored PC. (1) Loads the values of the restored PC and PSW from EIPC and EIPSW because the PSW.EP bit and the PSW.NP bit are both 0. (2) Transfers control to the loaded address of the restored PC and PSW. Figure 19-5 shows the processing flow of the RETI instruction. Figure 19-5. RETI Instruction Processing RETI instruction 1 PSW. EP 0 1 PSW. NP 0 PC PSW ISPR. corresponding -bitNote EIPC EIPSW PC PSW FEPC FEPSW 0 Original processing restored Note For the ISPR register, refer to 19.3.6 In-service priority register (ISPR). Caution When the EP bit and the NP bit are changed by the LDSR instruction during maskable interrupt servicing, in order to restore the PC and PSW correctly during restoring by the RETI instruction, it is necessary to clear the EP bit back to 0 and the NP bit back to 0 using the LDSR instruction immediately before the RETI instruction. Remark 610 The solid line shows the CPU processing flow. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 19 INTERRUPT/EXCEPTION PROCESSING FUNCTION 19.3.3 Priorities of maskable interrupts INTC provides a multiple interrupt servicing in which an interrupt can be acknowledged while another interrupt is being serviced. Multiple interrupts can be controlled by priority levels. There are two types of priority level control: control based on the default priority levels, and control based on the programmable priority levels specified by the interrupt priority level specification bit (xxICn.xxPRn bit). When two or more interrupts having the same priority level specified by xxPRn are generated at the same time, interrupts are serviced in order depending on the priority level allocated to each interrupt request (default priority level) beforehand. For more information, refer to Table 19-1 Interrupt Source List. Programmable priority control divides interrupt requests into eight levels by setting the priority level specification flag. Note that when an interrupt request signal is acknowledged, the PSW.ID flag is automatically set (1). Therefore, when multiple interrupts are to be used, clear (0) the ID flag beforehand (for example, by placing the EI instruction into the interrupt service program) to enable interrupts. Remark xx: Identifying name of each peripheral unit (refer to Table 19-2 Interrupt Control Registers (xxICn)) n: Peripheral unit number (refer to Table 19-2 Interrupt Control Registers (xxICn)) User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 611 CHAPTER 19 INTERRUPT/EXCEPTION PROCESSING FUNCTION Figure 19-6. Example of Interrupt Nesting (1/2) Main routine Servicing of a EI Interrupt request a (level 3) Servicing of b EI Interrupt request b (level 2) Interrupt request b is acknowledged because the priority of b is higher than that of a and interrupts are enabled. Servicing of c Interrupt request c (level 3) Interrupt request d (level 2) Servicing of d Although the priority of interrupt request d is higher than that of c, d is held pending because interrupts are disabled. Servicing of e EI Interrupt request e (level 2) Interrupt request f (level 3) Interrupt request f is held pending even if interrupts are enabled because its priority is lower than that of e. Servicing of f Servicing of g EI Interrupt request g (level 1) Interrupt request h (level 1) Servicing of h Interrupt request h is held pending even if interrupts are enabled because its priority is the same as that of g. Caution The values of EIPC and EIPSW must be saved before executing multiple interrupts. Remarks 1. a to u in the figure are the names of interrupt request signals shown for the sake of explanation. 2. The default priority in the figure indicates the relative priority between two interrupt request signals. 612 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 19 INTERRUPT/EXCEPTION PROCESSING FUNCTION Figure 19-6. Example of Interrupt Nesting (2/2) Main routine Servicing of i EI Interrupt request i (level 2) Servicing of k EI Interrupt request j (level 3) Interrupt request k (level 1) Interrupt request j is held pending because its priority is lower than that of i. k that occurs after j is acknowledged because it has the higher priority. Servicing of j Servicing of l Interrupt request l (level 2) Interrupt requests m and n are held pending because servicing of l is performed in the interrupt disabled status. Interrupt request m (level 3) Interrupt request n (level 1) Servicing of n Pending interrupt requests are acknowledged after servicing of interrupt request l. At this time, interrupt request n is acknowledged first even though m has occurred first because the priority of n is higher than that of m. Servicing of m Interrupt request o (level 3) Servicing of o Servicing of p EI Servicing of q EI Servicing of r EI Interrupt request p Interrupt request q EI (level 2) Interrupt request r (level 1) (level 0) If levels 3 to 0 are acknowledged Servicing of s Interrupt request s (level 1) Pending interrupt requests t and u are acknowledged after processing of s. Because the priorities of t and u are the same, u is acknowledged first because it has the higher default priority, regardless of the order in which the interrupt requests have been generated. Interrupt request t (level 2)Note 1 Interrupt request u (level 2)Note 2 Servicing of u Servicing of t Notes 1. Lower default priority 2. Higher default priority User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 613 CHAPTER 19 INTERRUPT/EXCEPTION PROCESSING FUNCTION Figure 19-7. Example of Servicing Simultaneously Generated Interrupt Request Signals Main routine EI Interrupt request a (level 2) Interrupt request b (level 1)Note 1 Interrupt request c (level 1)Note 2 Servicing of interrupt request b Servicing of interrupt request c Servicing of interrupt request a Notes 1. Higher default priority 2. Lower default priority 614 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD *Interrupt requests b and c are acknowledged first according to their priorities. *Because the priorities of b and c are the same, b is acknowledged first because it has the higher default priority. CHAPTER 19 INTERRUPT/EXCEPTION PROCESSING FUNCTION 19.3.4 Interrupt control register (xxlCn) An interrupt control register is assigned to each maskable interrupt and sets the control conditions for each maskable interrupt request. The interrupt control registers can be read or written in 8-bit or 1-bit units. Reset sets xxICn to 47H. Caution Be sure to read the xxICn.xxIFn bit while interrupts are disabled (DI). If the xxIFn bit is read while interrupts are enabled (EI), an incorrect value may be read if there is a conflict between acknowledgment of the interrupt and reading of the bit. After reset: 47H xxICn R/W < > < > xxIFn xxMKn Address: FFFFF110H to FFFFF168H 0 0 0 xxPRn2 xxPRn1 xxPRn0 Interrupt request flagNote xxIFn 0 Interrupt request not generated 1 Interrupt request generated xxMKn Interrupt mask flag 0 Enables interrupt servicing 1 Disables interrupt servicing (pending) xxPRn2 xxPRn1 xxPRn0 Interrupt priority specification bit 0 0 0 Specifies level 0 (highest) 0 0 1 Specifies level 1 0 1 0 Specifies level 2 0 1 1 Specifies level 3 1 0 0 Specifies level 4 1 0 1 Specifies level 5 1 1 0 Specifies level 6 1 1 1 Specifies level 7 (lowest) Note Automatically reset by hardware when interrupt request is acknowledged. Remark xx: Identifying name of each peripheral unit (refer to Table 19-2 Interrupt Control Registers (xxICn)) n: Peripheral unit number (refer to Table 19-2 Interrupt Control Registers (xxICn)) Following tables list the addresses and bits of the interrupt control registers. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 615 CHAPTER 19 INTERRUPT/EXCEPTION PROCESSING FUNCTION Table 19-2. Interrupt Control Registers (xxlCn) Address Register Bits <6> 5 4 3 FFFFF110H WDT1IC WDT1IF <7> WDT1MK 0 0 0 WDT1PR2 WDT1PR1 WDT1PR0 2 1 0 FFFFF112H PIC0 PIF0 PMK0 0 0 0 PPR02 PPR01 PPR00 FFFFF114H PIC1 PIF1 PMK1 0 0 0 PPR12 PPR11 PPR10 FFFFF116H PIC2 PIF2 PMK2 0 0 0 PPR22 PPR21 PPR20 FFFFF118H PIC3 PIF3 PMK3 0 0 0 PPR32 PPR31 PPR30 FFFFF11AH PIC4 PIF4 PMK4 0 0 0 PPR42 PPR41 PPR40 FFFFF11CH PIC5 PIF5 PMK5 0 0 0 PPR52 PPR51 PPR50 FFFFF11EH PIC6 PIF6 PMK6 0 0 0 PPR62 PPR61 PPR60 FFFFF120H TM0IC00 TM0IF00 TM0MK00 0 0 0 TM0PR002 TM0PR001 TM0PR000 FFFFF122H TM0IC01 TM0IF01 TM0MK01 0 0 0 TM0PR012 TM0PR011 TM0PR010 FFFFF124H TM0IC10 TM0IF10 TM0MK10 0 0 0 TM0PR102 TM0PR101 TM0PR100 FFFFF126H TM0IC11 TM0IF11 TM0MK11 0 0 0 TM0PR112 TM0PR111 TM0PR110 FFFFF128H TM5IC0 TM5IF0 TM5MK0 0 0 0 TM5PR02 TM5PR01 TM5PR00 FFFFF12AH TM5IC1 TM5IF1 TM5MK1 0 0 0 TM5PR12 TM5PR11 TM5PR10 FFFFF12CH CSI0IC0 CSI0IF0 CSI0MK0 0 0 0 CSI0PR02 CSI0PR01 CSI0PR00 FFFFF12EH CSI0IC1 CSI0IF1 CSI0MK1 0 0 0 CSI0PR12 CSI0PR11 CSI0PR10 FFFFF130H SREIC0 SREIF0 SREMK0 0 0 0 SREPR02 SREPR01 SREPR00 FFFFF132H SRIC0 SRIF0 SRMK0 0 0 0 SRPR02 SRPR01 SRPR00 FFFFF134H STIC0 STIF0 STMK0 0 0 0 STPR02 STPR01 STPR00 FFFFF136H SREIC1 SREIF1 SREMK1 0 0 0 SREPR12 SREPR11 SREPR10 FFFFF138H SRIC1 SRIF1 SRMK1 0 0 0 SRPR12 SRPR11 SRPR10 FFFFF13AH STIC1 STIF1 STMK1 0 0 0 STPR12 STPR11 STPR10 FFFFF13CH TMHIC0 TMHIF0 TMHMK0 0 0 0 TMHPR02 TMHPR01 TMHPR00 FFFFF13EH TMHIC1 TMHIF1 TMHMK1 0 0 0 TMHPR12 TMHPR11 TMHPR10 FFFFF140H CSIAIC0 CSIAIF0 CSIAMK0 0 0 0 CSIAPR02 CSIAPR01 CSIAPR00 FFFFF142H IICIC0 IICIF0 IICMK0 0 0 0 IICPR02 IICPR01 IICPR00 FFFFF144H ADIC ADIF ADMK 0 0 0 ADPR2 ADPR1 ADPR0 FFFFF146H KRIC KRIF KRMK 0 0 0 KRPR2 KRPR1 KRPR0 FFFFF148H WTIIC WTIIF WTIMK 0 0 0 WTIPR2 WTIPR1 WTIPR0 Note 1 FFFFF14AH WTIC WTIF WTMK 0 0 0 WTPR2 WTPR1 WTPR0 FFFFF14CH BRGIC BRGIF BRGMK 0 0 0 BRGPR2 BRGPR1 BRGPR0 Note 2 TP0OVIF TP0OVMK 0 0 0 TP0OVPR2 TP0OVPR1 TP0OVPR0 TP0CCIC0 Note 2 TP0CCIF0 TP0CCMK0 0 0 0 TP0CCPR02 TP0CCPR01 TP0CCPR00 TP0CCIC1 Note 2 TO0CCIF1 TP0CCMK1 0 0 0 TP0CCPR12 TP0CCPR11 TP0CCPR10 FFFFF174H FFFFF176H FFFFF178H TP0OVIC Notes 1. Only in the PD703208Y, 703209Y, 703210Y, 703211Y, 70F3210Y, 70F3210HY, 70F3211HY 2. Only in the PD703211, 703211Y, 70F3211H, 70F3211HY 616 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 19 INTERRUPT/EXCEPTION PROCESSING FUNCTION 19.3.5 Interrupt mask registers 0, 1, 3 (IMR0, IMR1, IMR3) These registers set the interrupt mask status for maskable interrupts. The xxMKn bit of the IMR0, IMR1, and IMR3 registers and the xxMKn bit of the xxlCn register are respectively linked. The IMRm register can be read or written in 16-bit units (m = 0, 1, 3). When the higher 8 bits of the IMRk register are used as the IMRkH register and the lower 8 bits of the IMRk register as the IMRkL register, they can be read or written in 8-bit or 1-bit units (k = 0, 1). Caution In the device file, the xxMKn bit of the xxICn register is defined as a reserved word. Therefore, if bit manipulation is performed using the name xxMKn, the xxICn register, not the IMRm register, is rewritten (as a result, the IMRm register is also rewritten). After reset: FFFFH 15 IMR0 (IMR0H Note 1 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PMK6 PMK5 PMK4 PMK3 PMK2 PMK1 PMK0 WDT1MK After reset: FFFFH IMR1 (IMR1H Address: IMR0 FFFFF100H, IMR0L FFFFF100H, IMR0H FFFFF101H ) CSI0MK1 CSI0MK0 TM5MK1 TM5MK0 TM0MK11 TM0MK10 TM0MK01 TM0MK00 (IMR0L) Note 1 R/W ) R/W 15 14 13 12 11 10 1 BRGMK WTMK WTIMK KRMK ADMK 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 STMK1 SRMK1 SREMK1 STMK0 SRMK0 SREMK0 (IMR1L) TMHMK1 TMHMK0 After reset: FFFFH Note 2 IMR3 (IMR3L) Address: IMR1 FFFFF102H, IMR1L FFFFF102H, IMR1H FFFFF103H R/W 9 8 IICMK0 CSIAMK0 Address: IMR3, IMR3L FFFFF106H 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 TP0CCMK1 TP0CCMK0 TP0OVMK Interrupt mask flag setting xxMKn 0 Enables interrupt servicing 1 Disables interrupt servicing Notes 1. When reading from or writing to bits 8 to 15 of the IMR0 and IMR1 registers in 8-bit or 1-bit units, specify these bits as bits 0 to 7 of the IMR0H and IMR1H registers. 2. Only in the PD703211, 703211Y, 70F3211H, 70F3211HY Caution Set bit 15 of the IMR1 register and bits 15 to 5, 1, and 0 of the IMR3 register to 1. The operation is not guaranteed if their value is changed. Remark xx: Identifying name of each peripheral unit (refer to Table 19-2 Interrupt Control Registers (xxICn)) n: Peripheral unit number (refer to Table 19-2 Interrupt Control Registers (xxICn)) User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 617 CHAPTER 19 INTERRUPT/EXCEPTION PROCESSING FUNCTION 19.3.6 In-service priority register (ISPR) This register holds the priority level of the maskable interrupt currently being acknowledged. When the interrupt request signal is acknowledged, the bit of this register corresponding to the priority level of that interrupt request signal is set (1) and remains set while the interrupt is being serviced. When the RETI instruction is executed, the bit among those that are set (1) in the ISPR register that corresponds to the interrupt request signal having the highest priority is automatically cleared (0) by hardware. However, it is not cleared (0) when execution is returned from non-maskable interrupt servicing or exception processing. This register is read-only in 8-bit or 1-bit units. Reset sets ISPR to 00H. Caution If an interrupt is acknowledged while the ISPR register is being read in the interrupt enabled (EI) status, the value of the ISPR register after the bits of the register have been set to 1 by acknowledging the interrupt may be read. To accurately read the value of the ISPR register before an interrupt is acknowledged, read the register while interrupts are disabled (DI status). After reset: 00H ISPR 618 Address: FFFFF1FAH < > < > < > < > < > < > < > < > ISPR7 ISPR6 ISPR5 ISPR4 ISPR3 ISPR2 ISPR1 ISPR0 ISPRn Remark R Priority of interrupt currently being acknowledged 0 Interrupt request with priority n is not acknowledged 1 Interrupt request with priority n is being acknowledged n = 0 to 7 (priority level) User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 19 INTERRUPT/EXCEPTION PROCESSING FUNCTION 19.3.7 ID flag The interrupt disable flag (ID) is allocated to the PSW and controls the maskable interrupt's operating state, and stores control information regarding enabling/disabling reception of interrupt request signals. Reset sets this flag to 00000020H. After reset: 00000020H PSW 0 NP EP ID SAT CY OV S Z Maskable interrupt servicing specificationNote ID 0 Maskable interrupt request signal acknowledgment enabled 1 Maskable interrupt request signal acknowledgment disabled Note Interrupt disable flag (ID) function ID is set (1) by the DI instruction and cleared (0) by the EI instruction. Its value is also modified by the RETI instruction or LDSR instruction when referencing the PSW. Non-maskable interrupt request signals and exceptions are acknowledged regardless of this flag. When a maskable interrupt request signal is acknowledged, the ID flag is automatically set (1) by hardware. An interrupt request signal generated during the acknowledgment disabled period (ID flag = 1) can be acknowledged when the xxICn.xxIFn bit is set (1), and the ID flag is cleared (0). User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 619 CHAPTER 19 INTERRUPT/EXCEPTION PROCESSING FUNCTION 19.3.8 Watchdog timer mode register 1 (WDTM1) This register is a special register that can be written to only in a special sequence. To generate a maskable interrupt (INTWDT1), clear the WDTM14 bit to 0. This register can be read or written in 8-bit or 1-bit units (for details, refer to CHAPTER 12 WATCHDOG TIMER FUNCTIONS). After reset: 00H R/W Address: FFFFF6C2H < > WDTM1 RUN1 0 0 WDTM14 WDTM13 0 0 0 Watchdog timer operation mode selectionNote 1 RUN1 0 Stop count operation 1 Clear counter and start count operation WDTM14 WDTM13 Watchdog timer operation mode selectionNote 2 0 0 0 1 1 0 Watchdog timer mode 1Note 3 (Generate non-maskable interrupt INTWDT1 when overflow occurs) 1 1 Watchdog timer mode 2 (Start WDTRES2 reset operation when overflow occurs) Interval timer mode (Generate maskable interrupt INTWDTM1 when overflow occurs) Notes 1. Once the RUN1 bit has been set (1), it cannot be cleared (0) by software. Therefore, once counting starts, it cannot be stopped except by reset. 2. Once the WDTM14 and WDTM13 bits have been set (1), they cannot be cleared (0) by software. Reset is the only way to clear these bits. 3. For non-maskable interrupt servicing due to a non-maskable interrupt request signal (INTWDT1), refer to 19.10 Cautions. 620 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 19 INTERRUPT/EXCEPTION PROCESSING FUNCTION 19.4 External Interrupt Request Input Pins (NMI, INTP0 to INTP6) 19.4.1 Noise elimination (1) Noise elimination for NMI pin The NMI pin includes a noise eliminator that operates using analog delay. Therefore, a signal input to the NMI pin is not detected as an edge unless it maintains its input level for a certain period. The edge is detected only after a certain period has elapsed. The NMI pin is used for releasing the STOP mode. In the STOP mode, noise elimination using the system clock is not performed because the internal system clock is stopped. (2) Noise elimination for INTP0 to INTP6 pins The INTP0 to INTP6 pins include a noise eliminator that operates using analog delay. Therefore, a signal input to each pin is not detected as an edge unless it maintains its input level for a certain period. The edge is detected only after a certain period has elapsed. 19.4.2 Edge detection The valid edges of the NMI and INTP0 to INTP6 pins can be selected from the following four types for each pin. * Falling edge * Rising edge * Both edges * No edge detection After reset, the edge detection for the NMI pin is set to "no edge detection". Therefore, interrupt requests cannot be acknowledged (the NMI pin functions as a normal port) unless a valid edge is specified by the INTR0, INTF0, INTR9H, and INTF9H registers. When using the P02/NMI pin as an output port, set the NMI pin valid edge to "no edge detection". User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 621 CHAPTER 19 INTERRUPT/EXCEPTION PROCESSING FUNCTION (1) External interrupt rising and falling edge specification registers 0 (INTR0, INTF0) These are 8-bit registers that specify detection of the rising and falling edges of the NMI and INTP0 to INTP3 pins. These registers can be read or written in 8-bit or 1-bit units. After reset, these registers are cleared to 00H. Caution When switching to the port function from the external interrupt function (alternate function), edge detection may be performed. Therefore, set the port mode after setting the INTF0n and INTR0n bits = 00. After reset: 00H INTR0 0 INTF0 0 Remark R/W Address: INTR0 FFFFFC20H, INTF0 FFFFFC00H INTR06 INTR05 INTR04 INTR03 INTR02 INTP3 INTP2 INTP1 INTP0 NMI INTF06 INTF05 INTF04 INTF03 INTF02 INTP3 INTP2 INTP1 INTP0 NMI 0 0 0 0 For specification of the valid edge, refer to Table 19-3. Table 19-3. NMI and INTP0 to INTP3 Pins Valid Edge Specification INTF0n INTR0n 0 0 No edge detection 0 1 Rising edge 1 0 Falling edge 1 1 Both edges Remark n = 2: Valid edge specification (n = 2 to 6) Control of NMI pin n = 3 to 6: Control of INTP0 to INTP3 pins 622 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 19 INTERRUPT/EXCEPTION PROCESSING FUNCTION (2) External interrupt rising and falling edge specification registers 9H (INTR9H, INTF9H) These are 8-bit registers that specify detection of the rising edge of the INTP4 to INTP6 pins. These registers can be read or written in 8-bit or 1-bit units. After reset, these registers are cleared to 00H. Caution When switching to the port function from the external interrupt function (alternate function), edge detection may be performed. Therefore, set the port mode after setting the INTF9n and INTR9n bits = 00. After reset: 00H INTR9H R/W Address: INTR9H FFFFFC33H, INTF9H FFFFFC13H INTR915 INTR914 INTR913 INTP6 INTF9H INTP5 Remark INTP5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 INTP4 INTF915 INTF914 INTF913 INTP6 0 INTP4 For specification of the valid edge, refer to Table 19-4. Table 19-4. INTP4 to INTP6 Pins Valid Edge Specification INTF9n INTR9n Valid edge specification (n = 13 to 15) 0 0 No edge detection 0 1 Rising edge 1 0 Falling edge 1 1 Both edges Remark n = 13 to 15: Control of INTP4 to INTP6 pins User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 623 CHAPTER 19 INTERRUPT/EXCEPTION PROCESSING FUNCTION 19.5 Software Exceptions A software exception is generated when the CPU executes the TRAP instruction. Software exceptions can always be acknowledged. 19.5.1 Operation If a software exception occurs, the CPU performs the following processing and transfers control to a handler routine. <1> Saves the restored PC to EIPC. <2> Saves the current PSW to EIPSW. <3> Writes an exception code to the lower 16 bits (EICC) of ECR (interrupt source). <4> Sets the PSW.EP and PSW.ID bits to 1. <5> Loads the handler address (00000040H or 00000050H) for the software exception routine to the PC and transfers control. Figure 19-8 shows the software exception processing flow. Figure 19-8. Software Exception Processing TRAP instructionNote CPU processing EIPC EIPSW ECR.EICC PSW.EP PSW.ID PC Restored PC PSW Exception code 1 1 Handler address Exception processing Note TRAP instruction format: TRAP vector (However, vector = 00H to 1FH) The handler address is determined by the operand (vector) of the TRAP instruction. If the vector is 00H to 1FH, the handler address is 00000040H, and if the vector is 10H to 1FH, the handler address is 00000050H. 624 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 19 INTERRUPT/EXCEPTION PROCESSING FUNCTION 19.5.2 Restore Execution is restored from software exception processing by the RETI instruction. When the RETI instruction is executed, the CPU performs the following processing and transfers control to the address of the restored PC. <1> Loads the restored PC and PSW from EIPC and EIPSW because the PSW.EP bit is 1. <2> Transfers control to the address of the restored PC and PSW. Figure 19-9 shows the processing flow of the RETI instruction. Figure 19-9. RETI Instruction Processing RETI instruction 1 PSW.EP 0 PSW.NP 1 0 PC PSW EIPC EIPSW PC PSW FEPC FEPSW Original processing restored Caution When the EP bit and the NP bit are changed by the LDSR instruction during software exception processing, in order to restore the PC and PSW correctly during restoring by the RETI instruction, it is necessary to set the EP bit back to 1 using the LDSR instruction immediately before the RETI instruction. Remark The solid line shows the CPU processing flow. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 625 CHAPTER 19 INTERRUPT/EXCEPTION PROCESSING FUNCTION 19.5.3 EP flag The EP flag is a status flag that indicates that exception processing is in progress. It is set when an exception occurs. After reset: 00000020H PSW 0 EP 626 NP EP Exception processing status 0 Exception processing not in progress 1 Exception processing in progress User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD ID SAT CY OV S Z CHAPTER 19 INTERRUPT/EXCEPTION PROCESSING FUNCTION 19.6 Exception Trap The exception trap is an interrupt that is requested when the illegal execution of an instruction takes place. In the V850ES/KF1, an illegal opcode trap (ILGOP) is considered as an exception trap. 19.6.1 Illegal opcode An illegal opcode is defined as an instruction with instruction opcode (bits 10 to 5) = 111111B, sub-opcode (bits 26 to 23) = 0111B to 1111B, and sub-opcode (bit 16) = 0B. When such an instruction is executed, an exception trap is generated. 15 11 10 5 4 0 31 27 26 23 22 16 0 1 1 1 X X X X X 1 1 1 1 1 1 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 0 1 1 1 1 X: don't care Caution It is recommended not to use illegal opcode because instructions may newly be assigned in the future. (1) Operation Upon generation of an exception trap, the CPU performs the following processing and transfers control to a handler routine. <1> Saves the restored PC to DBPC. <2> Saves the current PSW to DBPSW. <3> Sets the PSW.NP, PSW.EP, and PSW.ID bits. <4> Loads the handler address (00000060H) for the exception trap routine to the PC and transfers control. Figure 19-10 shows the exception trap processing flow. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 627 CHAPTER 19 INTERRUPT/EXCEPTION PROCESSING FUNCTION Figure 19-10. Exception Trap Processing Exception trap (ILGOP) occurs DBPC DBPSW PSW.NP PSW.EP PSW.ID PC CPU processing Restored PC PSW 1 1 1 00000060H Exception processing (2) Restore Execution is restored from exception trap processing by the DBRET instruction. When the DBRET instruction is executed, the CPU performs the following processing and transfers control to the address of the restored PC. <1> Loads the restored PC and PSW from DBPC and DBPSW. <2> Transfers control to the loaded address of the restored PC and PSW. Figure 19-11 shows the processing flow for restore from exception trap processing. Figure 19-11. Processing Flow for Restore from Exception Trap DBRET instruction PC PSW DBPC DBPSW Jump to restored PC address 628 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 19 INTERRUPT/EXCEPTION PROCESSING FUNCTION 19.6.2 Debug trap A debug trap is an exception that occurs upon execution of the DBTRAP instruction and that can be acknowledged at all times. When a debug trap occurs, the CPU performs the following processing. (1) Operation <1> Saves the restored PC to DBPC. <2> Saves the current PSW to DBPSW. <3> Sets the PSW.NP, PSW.EP, and PSW.ID bits to 1. <4> Sets the handler address (00000060H) for the debug trap routine to the PC and transfers control. Figure 19-12 shows the debug trap processing flow. Figure 19-12. Debug Trap Processing DBTRAP instruction CPU processing DBPC DBPSW PSW.NP PSW.EP PSW.ID PC Restored PC PSW 1 1 1 00000060H Debug monitor routine processing User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 629 CHAPTER 19 INTERRUPT/EXCEPTION PROCESSING FUNCTION (2) Restore Execution is restored from debug trap processing by the DBRET instruction. When the DBRET instruction is executed, the CPU performs the following processing and transfers control to the address of the restored PC. <1> Loads the restored PC and PSW from DBPC and DBPSW. <2> Transfers control to the loaded address of the restored PC and PSW. Figure 19-13 shows the processing flow for restore from debug trap processing. Figure 19-13. Processing Flow for Restore from Debug Trap DBRET instruction PC PSW DBPC DBPSW Jump to restored PC address 630 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 19 INTERRUPT/EXCEPTION PROCESSING FUNCTION 19.7 Multiple Interrupt Servicing Control Multiple interrupt servicing control is a function that stops an interrupt service routine currently in progress if a higher priority interrupt request signal is generated, and processes the acknowledgment operation of the higher priority interrupt request signal. If an interrupt request signal with a lower or equal priority is generated and a service routine is currently in progress, the later interrupt request signal will be held pending. Multiple interrupt servicing control is performed when interrupts are enabled (PSW.ID bit = 0). Even in an interrupt servicing routine, multiple interrupt control must be performed while interrupts are enabled (ID bit = 0). If a maskable interrupt or software exception is generated in a maskable interrupt or software exception service program, EIPC and EIPSW must be saved. The following example illustrates the procedure. (1) To acknowledge maskable interrupt request signals in service program Service program for maskable interrupt or exception ... ... * EIPC saved to memory or register * EIPSW saved to memory or register * EI instruction (enables interrupt acknowledgment) ... ... Acknowledges maskable interrupt ... ... * DI instruction (disables interrupt acknowledgment) * Saved value restored to EIPSW * Saved value restored to EIPC * RETI instruction User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 631 CHAPTER 19 INTERRUPT/EXCEPTION PROCESSING FUNCTION (2) To generate exception in service program Service program for maskable interrupt or exception ... ... * EIPC saved to memory or register * EIPSW saved to memory or register ... * TRAP instruction ... Acknowledges exceptions such as TRAP instruction. * Saved value restored to EIPSW * Saved value restored to EIPC * RETI instruction Priorities 0 to 7 (0 is the highest) can be set for each maskable interrupt request in multiple interrupt servicing control by software. To set a priority level, write values to the xxICn.xxPRn0 to xxICn.xxPRn2 bits corresponding to each maskable interrupt request. After reset, interrupt requests are masked by the xxICn.xxMKn bit, and the priority is set to level 7 by the xxPRn0 to xxPRn2 bits. Priorities of maskable interrupts are as follows. (High) Level 0 > Level 1 > Level 2 > Level 3 > Level 4 > Level 5 > Level 6 > Level 7 (Low) Interrupt servicing that has been suspended as a result of multiple interrupt servicing control is resumed after the interrupt servicing of the higher priority has been completed and the RETI instruction has been executed. A pending interrupt request signal is acknowledged after the current interrupt servicing has been completed and the RETI instruction has been executed. Caution In a non-maskable interrupt servicing routine (in the time until the RETI instruction is executed), maskable interrupts are not acknowledged and held pending. 632 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 19 INTERRUPT/EXCEPTION PROCESSING FUNCTION 19.8 Interrupt Response Time Except in the following cases, the CPU interrupt response time is a minimum of 4 clocks. If inputting consecutive interrupt request signals, at least 4 clocks must be placed between each interrupt request signal. * IDLE/STOP mode * External bus access * Consecutive interrupt request non-sample instruction (refer to 19.9 Periods in Which Interrupts Are Not Acknowledged by CPU) * Access to interrupt control register * Access to peripheral I/O register Figure 19-14. Pipeline Operation During Interrupt Request Signal Acknowledgment (Outline) (1) Minimum interrupt response time 4 system clocks Internal clock Interrupt request Instruction 1 IF Instruction 2 EX MEM WB ID IFX IDX INT1 INT2 INT3 INT4 Interrupt acknowledgment operation IF Instruction (first instruction of interrupt servicing routine) ID EX (2) Maximum interrupt response time 6 system clocks Internal clock Interrupt request Instruction 1 IF Instruction 2 ID EX MEM MEM MEM WB IFX IDX INT1 INT2 INT3 INT3 INT3 INT4 Interrupt acknowledgment operation IF Instruction (first instruction of interrupt servicing routine) Remark ID EX INT1 to INT4: Interrupt acknowledgment processing IFX: Invalid instruction fetch IDX: Invalid instruction decode Interrupt response time (internal system clock) Condition Internal interrupt External interrupt Min. 4 4 + analog delay The following cases are excluded. Max. 6 6 + analog delay * IDLE/STOP mode * External bus access * Consecutive interrupt request non-sample instruction * Access to interrupt control register * Access to peripheral I/O register User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 633 CHAPTER 19 INTERRUPT/EXCEPTION PROCESSING FUNCTION 19.9 Periods in Which Interrupts Are Not Acknowledged by CPU Interrupts are acknowledged by the CPU while an instruction is being executed. However, no interrupt is acknowledged between an interrupt request non-sample instruction and the next instruction (interrupts are held pending). The following instructions are interrupt request non-sample instructions. * EI instruction * DI instruction * LDSR reg2, 0x5 instructions (vs. PSW) * Store instruction for the PRCMD register * Store instruction and SET1, NOT1, and CLR1 instructions for the following registers * Interrupt-related registers: Interrupt control register (xxlCn), interrupt mask registers 0, 1, 3 (IMR0, IMR1, IMR3) * Power save control register (PSC) 19.10 Cautions Design the system so that restoring by the RETI instruction is as follows after a non-maskable interrupt triggered by a non-maskable interrupt request signal (INTWDT1/INTWDT2) is serviced. Figure 19-15. Restoring by RETI Instruction Generation of INTWDT1/INTWDT2 FEPC software reset processing address FEPSW value to set NP bit = 1, EP bit = 1 INTWDT1/INTWDT2 servicing routine RETI Ten RETI instructions (FEPC and FEPSWNote must be set) Software reset processing routine PSW initial set value of PSW Initialization processing Note FEPSW value to set NP bit = 1, EP bit = 0 634 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 20 KEY INTERRUPT FUNCTION 20.1 Function A key interrupt request signal (INTKR) can be generated by inputting a falling edge to the eight key input pins (KR0 to KR7) by setting the KRM register. Caution If any of the KR0 to KR7 pins is at low level, the INTKR signal is not generated even if a falling edge is input to another pin. Table 20-1. Assignment of Key Return Detection Pins Flag Pin Description KRM0 Controls KR0 signal in 1-bit units KRM1 Controls KR1 signal in 1-bit units KRM2 Controls KR2 signal in 1-bit units KRM3 Controls KR3 signal in 1-bit units KRM4 Controls KR4 signal in 1-bit units KRM5 Controls KR5 signal in 1-bit units KRM6 Controls KR6 signal in 1-bit units KRM7 Controls KR7 signal in 1-bit units Figure 20-1. Key Return Block Diagram KR7 KR6 KR5 KR4 INTKR KR3 KR2 KR1 KR0 KRM7 KRM6 KRM5 KRM4 KRM3 KRM2 KRM1 KRM0 Key return mode register (KRM) User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 635 CHAPTER 20 KEY INTERRUPT FUNCTION 20.2 Register (1) Key return mode register (KRM) The KRM register controls the KRM0 to KRM7 bits using the KR0 to KR7 signals. This register can be read or written in 8-bit or 1-bit units. Reset sets this register to 00H. After reset: 00H KRM KRM7 R/W KRM6 Address: FFFFF300H KRM5 KRM4 KRMn KRM3 KRM2 KRM1 KRM0 Key return mode control 0 Does not detect key return signal 1 Detects key return signal Caution If the KRM register is changed, an interrupt request signal (INTKR) may be generated. To prevent this, change the KRM register after disabling interrupts (DI), and then enable interrupts (EI) after clearing the interrupt request flag (KRIC.KRIF bit) to 0. Remark For the alternate-function pin settings, refer to Table 4-14 Settings When Port Pins Are Used for Alternate Functions. 636 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 21 STANDBY FUNCTION 21.1 Overview The power consumption of the system can be effectively reduced by using the standby modes in combination and selecting the appropriate mode for the application. The available standby modes are listed in Table 21-1. Table 21-1. Standby Modes Mode Functional Outline HALT mode Mode to stop only the operating clock of the CPU IDLE mode Mode to stop all the operations of the internal circuits except the oscillator STOP mode Mode to stop all the operations of the internal circuits except the subclock oscillator Subclock operation mode Mode to use the subclock as the internal system clock Sub-IDLE mode Mode to stop all the operations of the internal circuits, except the oscillator, in the subclock Note 1 Note 2 operation mode Notes 1. The PLL does not stop. To realize low power consumption, stop the PLL and then shift to the IDLE mode. 2. Change to the clock-through mode, stop the PLL, then shift to the STOP mode. For details, refer to CHAPTER 6 CLOCK GENERATION FUNCTION. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 637 CHAPTER 21 STANDBY FUNCTION Figure 21-1. Status Transition (1/2) Normal operation mode (operation with main clock) End of oscillation stabilization time count End of oscillation stabilization time count Interrupt requestNote 3 Setting of HALT mode Wait for stabilization of oscillation End of oscillation stabilization time count Interrupt request Note 2 Wait for stabilization of oscillation Setting of IDLE mode Setting of STOP mode ResetNote 1 ResetNote 5 Wait for stabilization of oscillation Interrupt requestNote 4 ResetNote 5 HALT mode IDLE mode STOP mode Notes 1. Reset by RESET pin input, watchdog timer 1 overflow (WDTRES1), or watchdog timer 2 overflow (WDTRES2). 2. Non-maskable interrupt request signal (NMI, INTWDT1, INTWDT2) or unmasked maskable interrupt request signal. 3. Non-maskable interrupt request signal (NMI pin input, INTWDT2 (when the CPU is operating on the subclock)), unmasked external interrupt request signal (INTP0 to INTP6 pin input), or unmasked internal interrupt request signal from peripheral functions operable in IDLE mode. 4. Non-maskable interrupt request signal (NMI pin input, INTWDT2 (when the CPU is operating on the subclock)), unmasked external interrupt request signal (INTP0 to INTP6 pin input), or unmasked internal interrupt request signal from peripheral functions operable in STOP mode. 5. Reset by RESET pin input or watchdog timer 2 (when the CPU is operating on the subclock) overflow (WDTRES2). 638 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 21 STANDBY FUNCTION Figure 21-1. Status Transition (2/2) Normal operation mode (operation with main clock) End of oscillation stabilization time count End of oscillation stabilization time count Setting of subclock operation mode Wait for stabilization of oscillation Wait for stabilization of oscillation Setting of normal operation mode ResetNote 1 ResetNote 1 Interrupt requestNote 2 Subclock operation mode (operation with subclock) Sub-IDLE mode Setting of IDLE mode Notes 1. Reset by RESET pin input or watchdog timer 2 overflow (WDTRES2). 2. Non-maskable interrupt request signal (NMI pin input, INTWDT2 (when the CPU is operating on the subclock)), unmasked external interrupt request signal (INTP0 to INTP6 pin input), or unmasked internal interrupt request signal from peripheral functions operable in sub-IDLE mode. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 639 CHAPTER 21 STANDBY FUNCTION 21.2 Registers (1) Power save control register (PSC) This is an 8-bit register that controls the standby function. The STP bit of this register is used to specify the standby mode. The PSC register is a special register that can be written to only in a special sequence (refer to 3.4.7 Special registers). This register can be read or written in 8-bit or 1-bit units. Reset sets PSC to 00H. After reset: 00H R/W Address: FFFFF1FEH < > PSC NMI2M NMI2M 0 < > < > NMI0M INTM < > 0 0 STP Control of releasing standby modeNote by INTWDT2 signal 0 Releasing standby modeNote by INTWDT2 signal enabled 1 Releasing standby modeNote by INTWDT2 signal disabled NMI0M 0 Control of releasing standby modeNote by NMI pin input 0 Releasing standby modeNote by NMI pin input enabled 1 Releasing standby modeNote by NMI pin input disabled INTM Control of releasing standby modeNote by maskable interrupt request signals 0 Releasing standby modeNote by maskable interrupt request signals enabled 1 Releasing standby modeNote by maskable interrupt request signals disabled STP Standby modeNote setting 0 Normal mode 1 Standby modeNote Note In this case, standby mode means the IDLE/STOP mode; it does not include the HALT mode. Cautions 1. If the NMI2M, NMI0M, and INTM bits, and the STP bit are set to 1 at the same time, the setting of NMI2M, NMI0M, and INTM bits becomes invalid. If there is an unmasked interrupt request signal being held pending when the IDLE/STOP mode is set, set the bit corresponding to the interrupt request signal (NMI2M, NMI0M, or INTM) to 1, and then set the STP bit to 1. 2. When the IDLE/STOP mode is set, set the PSMR.PSM bit and then set the STP bit. 640 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 21 STANDBY FUNCTION (2) Power save mode register (PSMR) This is an 8-bit register that controls the operation status in the standby mode and the clock operation. This register can be read or written in 8-bit or 1-bit units. Reset sets PSMR to 00H. After reset: 00H R/W After reset: FFFFF820H < > PSMR XTSTP 0 0 XTSTP 0 0 0 0 PSM Specification of subclock oscillator use 0 Subclock oscillator used 1 Subclock oscillator not used PSM Specification of operation in standby mode 0 IDLE mode 1 STOP mode Cautions 1. Be sure to clear the XTSTP bit to 0 during subclock resonator connection. 2. Be sure to clear bits 1 to 6 of the PSMR register to 0. 3. The PSM bit is valid only when the PSC.STP bit is 1. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 641 CHAPTER 21 STANDBY FUNCTION (3) Oscillation stabilization time selection register (OSTS) The wait time until the oscillation stabilizes after the STOP mode is released is controlled by the OSTS register. The OSTS register can be read or written in 8-bit units. Reset sets OSTS to 01H. After reset: 01H OSTS R/W Address: FFFFF6C0H 0 0 0 OSTS2 OSTS1 OSTS0 0 0 OSTS2 OSTS1 OSTS0 Selection of oscillation stabilization time fX 4 MHz 13 5 MHz 10 MHz 0 0 0 2 /fX 2.048 ms 1.638 ms 0.819 ms 0 0 1 215/fX 8.192 ms 6.554 ms 3.277 ms 16 16.38 ms 13.11 ms 6.554 ms 17 32.77 ms 26.21 ms 13.11 ms 18 0 1 0 2 /fX 0 1 1 1 0 0 2 /fX 65.54 ms 52.43 ms 26.21 ms 1 0 1 219/fX 131.1 ms 104.9 ms 52.43 ms 20 262.1 ms 209.7 ms 104.9 ms 21 524.3 ms 419.4 ms 209.7 ms 1 1 1 0 1 1 2 /fX 2 /fX 2 /fX Cautions 1. The wait time following release of the STOP mode does not include the time until the clock oscillation starts ("a" in the figure below) following release of the STOP mode, regardless of whether the STOP mode is released by reset or the occurrence of an interrupt request signal. STOP mode release Voltage waveform of X1 pin a VSS 2. Be sure to clear bits 3 to 7 to "0". 3. The oscillation stabilization time following reset release is 215/fX (because the initial value of the OSTS register = 01H). 4. The oscillation stabilization time is also inserted during external clock input. Remark 642 fX: Main clock oscillation frequency User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 21 STANDBY FUNCTION 21.3 HALT Mode 21.3.1 Setting and operation status The HALT mode is set when a dedicated instruction (HALT) is executed in the normal operation mode. In the HALT mode, the clock oscillator continues operating. Only clock supply to the CPU is stopped; clock supply to the other on-chip peripheral functions continues. As a result, program execution is stopped, and the internal RAM retains the contents before the HALT mode was set. The on-chip peripheral functions that are independent of instruction processing by the CPU continue operating. Table 21-3 shows the operation status in the HALT mode. The average power consumption of the system can be reduced by using the HALT mode in combination with the normal operation mode for intermittent operation. Cautions 1. Insert five or more NOP instructions after the HALT instruction. 2. If the HALT instruction is executed with an unmasked interrupt request signal held pending, the system shift to the HALT mode, but the HALT mode is immediately released by the pending interrupt request signal. 21.3.2 Releasing HALT mode The HALT mode is released by a non-maskable interrupt request signal (NMI pin input, INTWDT1, INTWDT2 signal), an unmasked maskable interrupt request signal, and reset signal (RESET pin input, WDTRES1, WDTRES2 signal). After the HALT mode has been released, the normal operation mode is restored. (1) Releasing HALT mode by non-maskable interrupt request signal or unmasked maskable interrupt request signal The HALT mode is released by a non-maskable interrupt request signal or an unmasked maskable interrupt request signal, regardless of the priority of the interrupt request. If the HALT mode is set in an interrupt servicing routine, however, an interrupt request that is issued later is serviced as follows. (a) If an interrupt request signal with a priority lower than that of the interrupt request currently being serviced is issued, only the HALT mode is released, and that interrupt request signal is not acknowledged. The interrupt request signal itself is retained. (b) If an interrupt request with a priority higher than that of the interrupt request signal currently being serviced is issued (including a non-maskable interrupt request signal), the HALT mode is released and that interrupt request signal is acknowledged. Table 21-2. Operation After Releasing HALT Mode by Interrupt Request Signal Release Source Interrupt Enabled (EI) Status Non-maskable interrupt request signal Execution branches to the handler address Maskable interrupt request signal Execution branches to the handler Interrupt Disabled (DI) Status The next instruction is executed address or the next instruction is executed (2) Releasing HALT mode by reset The same operation as the normal reset operation is performed. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 643 CHAPTER 21 STANDBY FUNCTION Table 21-3. Operation Status in HALT Mode Setting of HALT Mode Item When CPU Is Operating with Main Clock When Subclock Is Not Used CPU Stops operation ROM correction Stops operation Main clock oscillator Oscillation enabled - Subclock oscillator Interrupt controller Timer P (TMP0) When Subclock Is Used Oscillation enabled Operable Note 1 Operable 16-bit timers (TM00, TM01) Operable 8-bit timers (TM50, TM51) Operable Timer H (TMH0, TMH1) Operable Watch timer Operable when main clock output is Operable selected as count clock Watchdog timer 1 Operable Watchdog timer 2 Operable when main clock is selected as Operable count clock Serial interface CSI00, CSI01 Operable CSIA0 Operable 2 I C0 Note 2 UART0, UART1 Key interrupt function <R> Operable Operable Operable A/D converter Operable Regulator Operation continues Real-time output Operable Port function Retains status before HALT mode was set. External bus interface Refer to 2.2 Pin Status. Internal data The CPU registers, statuses, data, and all other internal data such as the contents of the internal RAM are retained as they were before the HALT mode was set. Notes 1. 2. 644 Only in the PD703211, 703211Y, 70F3211H, 70F3211HY Only in the PD703208Y, 703209Y, 703210Y, 703211Y, 70F3210Y, 70F3210HY, 70F3211HY User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 21 STANDBY FUNCTION 21.4 IDLE Mode 21.4.1 Setting and operation status The IDLE mode is set by clearing the PSMR.PSM bit to 0 and setting the PSC.STP bit to 1 in the normal operation mode. In the IDLE mode, the clock oscillator continues operation but clock supply to the CPU and other on-chip peripheral functions stops. As a result, program execution stops and the contents of the internal RAM before the IDLE mode was set are retained. The CPU and other on-chip peripheral functions stop operating. However, the on-chip peripheral functions that can operate with the subclock or an external clock continue operating. Table 21-5 shows the operation status in the IDLE mode. The IDLE mode can reduce the power consumption more than the HALT mode because it stops the operation of the on-chip peripheral functions. The main clock oscillator does not stop, so the normal operation mode can be restored without waiting for the oscillation stabilization time after the IDLE mode has been released, in the same manner as when the HALT mode is released. Caution Insert five or more NOP instructions after the instruction that stores data in the PSC register to set the IDLE mode. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 645 CHAPTER 21 STANDBY FUNCTION 21.4.2 Releasing IDLE mode The IDLE mode is released by a non-maskable interrupt request signal (NMI pin input, INTWDT2 signal (when the CPU is operating on the subclock)), unmasked external interrupt request signal (INTP0 to INTP6 pin input), unmasked internal interrupt request signal from the peripheral functions operable in the IDLE mode, or reset (RESET pin input, WDTRES2 signal (when the CPU is operating on the subclock)). After the IDLE mode has been released, the normal operation mode is restored. (1) Releasing IDLE mode by non-maskable interrupt request signal or unmasked maskable interrupt request signal The IDLE mode is released by a non-maskable interrupt request signal or an unmasked maskable interrupt request signal, regardless of the priority of the interrupt request. If the IDLE mode is set in an interrupt servicing routine, however, an interrupt request that is issued later is processed as follows. (a) If an interrupt request signal with a priority lower than that of the interrupt request currently being serviced is issued, only the IDLE mode is released, and that interrupt request signal is not acknowledged. The interrupt request signal itself is retained. (b) If an interrupt request signal with a priority higher than that of the interrupt request currently being serviced is issued (including a non-maskable interrupt request signal), the IDLE mode is released and that interrupt request signal is acknowledged. Table 21-4. Operation After Releasing IDLE Mode by Interrupt Request Signal Release Source Interrupt Enabled (EI) Status Non-maskable interrupt request signal Execution branches to the handler address Maskable interrupt request signal Execution branches to the handler Interrupt Disabled (DI) Status The next instruction is executed address or the next instruction is executed Caution The interrupt request signal that is disabled by setting the PSC.NMI2M, PSC.NMI0M, and PSC.INTM bits to 1 (interrupt disabled) becomes invalid and the IDLE mode is not released. (2) Releasing IDLE mode by reset The same operation as the normal reset operation is performed. 646 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 21 STANDBY FUNCTION Table 21-5. Operation Status in IDLE Mode Setting of IDLE Mode Item When CPU Is Operating with Main Clock When Subclock Is Not Used CPU Stops operation ROM correction Stops operation Main clock oscillator Oscillation enabled - Subclock oscillator Interrupt controller Timer P (TMP0) When Subclock Is Used Oscillation enabled Stops operation Note 1 Stops operation 16-bit timers (TM00, TM01) TM00: Stop operation TM00: Stop operation TM01: Operable when INTWT is selected TM01: Operable when INTWT is selected as count clock and fBRG is selected as count as count clock clock of WT 8-bit timers (TM50, TM51) * Operable when TI5n is selected as count clock * Operable when INTTM010 is selected as count clock and TM01 is enabled in IDLE mode Timer H (TMH0) Stops operation Timer H (TMH1) Stops operation Operable when fXT is selected as count clock Watch timer Operable when main clock is selected as Operable count clock Watchdog timer 1 Stops operation Watchdog timer 2 Stops operation Serial interface CSI00, CSI01 Operable when SCK0n input clock is selected as operation clock CSIA0 Stops operation 2 <R> Operable when fXT is selected as count clock Note 2 I C0 Stops operation UART0 Operable when ASCK0 is selected as count clock UART1 Stops operation Key interrupt function Operable A/D converter Stops operation Regulator Operation continues Real-time output Operable when INTTM5n is selected as real-time output trigger and TM5n is enabled in Note 3 IDLE mode. However, the RTBH0 and RTBL0 registers cannot be updated because the CPU is stopped. Port function Retains status before IDLE mode was set. External bus interface Refer to 2.2 Pin Status. Internal data The CPU registers, statuses, data, and all other internal data such as the contents of the internal RAM are retained as they were before the IDLE mode was set. Notes 1. Only in the PD703211, 703211Y, 70F3211H, 70F3211HY 2. Only in the PD703208Y, 703209Y, 703210Y, 703211Y, 70F3210Y, 70F3210HY, 70F3211HY 3. Set the ADM.ADCS and ADM.ADCS2 bits to 00B. Remark n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 647 CHAPTER 21 STANDBY FUNCTION 21.5 STOP Mode 21.5.1 Setting and operation status The STOP mode is set when the PSMR.PSM bit is set to 1 and the PSC.STP bit is set to 1 in the normal operation mode. In the STOP mode, the subclock oscillator continues operating but the main clock oscillator stops. Clock supply to the CPU and the on-chip peripheral functions is stopped. As a result, program execution is stopped, and the contents of the internal RAM before the STOP mode was set are retained. The on-chip peripheral functions that operate with the clock oscillated by the subclock oscillator or an external clock continue operating. Table 21-7 shows the operation status in the STOP mode. Because the STOP stops operation of the main clock oscillator, it reduces the power consumption to a level lower than the IDLE mode. If the subclock oscillator and external clock are not used, the power consumption can be minimized with only leakage current flowing. Caution Insert five or more NOP instructions after the instruction that stores data in the PSC register to set the STOP mode. 648 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 21 STANDBY FUNCTION 21.5.2 Releasing STOP mode The STOP mode is released by a non-maskable interrupt request signal (NMI pin input, INTWDT2 signal (when the CPU is operating on the subclock)), unmasked external interrupt request signal (INTP0 to INTP6 pin input), unmasked internal interrupt request signal from the peripheral functions operable in the STOP mode, or reset (RESET pin input, WDTRES2 signal (when the CPU is operating on the subclock)). After the STOP mode has been released, the normal operation mode is restored after the oscillation stabilization time has been secured. (1) Releasing STOP mode by non-maskable interrupt request signal or unmasked maskable interrupt request signal The STOP mode is released by a non-maskable interrupt request signal or an unmasked maskable interrupt request signal, regardless of the priority of the interrupt request. If the software STOP mode is set in an interrupt servicing routine, however, an interrupt request that is issued later is serviced as follows. (a) If an interrupt request signal with a priority lower than that of the interrupt request currently being serviced is issued, only the STOP mode is released, and that interrupt request signal is not acknowledged. The interrupt request signal itself is retained. (b) If an interrupt request signal with a priority higher than that of the interrupt request currently being serviced is issued (including a non-maskable interrupt request signal), the STOP mode is released and that interrupt request signal is acknowledged. Table 21-6. Operation After Releasing STOP Mode by Interrupt Request Signal Release Source Interrupt Enabled (EI) Status Non-maskable interrupt request signal Execution branches to the handler address Maskable interrupt request signal Execution branches to the handler Interrupt Disabled (DI) Status The next instruction is executed address or the next instruction is executed Caution The interrupt request signal that is disabled by setting the PSC.NMI2M, PSC.NMI0M, and PSC.INTM bits to 1 (interrupt disabled) becomes invalid and the STOP mode is not released. (2) Releasing STOP mode by reset The same operation as the normal reset operation is performed. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 649 CHAPTER 21 STANDBY FUNCTION Table 21-7. Operation Status in STOP Mode Setting of STOP Mode When CPU Is Operating with Main Clock Item When Subclock Is Not Used CPU Stops operation ROM correction Stops operation Main clock oscillator Oscillation stops - Subclock oscillator Interrupt controller Timer P (TMP0) When Subclock Is Used Oscillation enabled Stops operation Note 1 Stops operation 16-bit timers (TM00, TM01) TM00: Stop operation Stops operation TM01: Operable when INTWT is selected as count clock and fXT is selected as count clock of WT 8-bit timers (TM50, TM51) Operable when TI5n is selected as count Operable when TI5n is selected as count clock clock or when INTTM010 is selected as count clock and TM01 is enabled in STOP mode Timer H (TMH0) Stops operation Timer H (TMH1) Stops operation Operable when fXT is selected as count clock Watch timer Stops operation Operable when fXT is selected as count clock Watchdog timer 1 Stops operation Watchdog timer 2 Stops operation Serial interface CSI00, CSI01 Operable when SCK0n input clock is selected as operation clock CSIA0 Stops operation 2 Note 2 I C0 Stops operation UART0 Operable when ASCK0 is selected as count clock UART1 <R> Operable when fXT is selected as count clock Stops operation Key interrupt function Operable A/D converter Stops operation Regulator Stops operation Real-time output Operable when INTTM5n is selected as real-time output trigger and TM5n is enabled in Note 3 STOP mode. However, the RTBH0 and RTBL0 registers cannot be updated because the CPU is stopped. Port function Retains status before STOP mode was set. External bus interface Refer to 2.2 Pin Status. Internal data The CPU registers, statuses, data, and all other internal data such as the contents of the internal RAM are retained as they were before the STOP mode was set. Notes 1. <R> Only in the PD703211, 703211Y, 70F3211H, 70F3211HY 2. Only in the PD703208Y, 703209Y, 703210Y, 703211Y, 70F3210Y, 70F3210HY, 70F3211HY 3. Set the ADM.ADCS and ADM.ADCS2 bits to 00B. Remark n = 0, 1 650 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 21 STANDBY FUNCTION 21.5.3 Securing oscillation stabilization time when STOP mode is released When the STOP mode is released, only the oscillation stabilization time set by the OSTS register elapses. If the STOP mode has been released by reset, however, the reset value of the OSTS register, 215/fX (8.192 ms at fX = 4 MHz) elapses. The operation performed when the STOP mode is released by an interrupt request signal is shown below. Figure 21-2. Oscillation Stabilization Time Oscillated waveform Main clock STOP mode status Interrupt request Main clock oscillator stops Oscillation stabilization time count Caution For details of the OSTS register, refer to 21.2 (3) Oscillation stabilization time selection register (OSTS). User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 651 CHAPTER 21 STANDBY FUNCTION 21.6 Subclock Operation Mode 21.6.1 Setting and operation status The subclock operation mode is set when the PCC.CK3 bit is set to 1 in the normal operation mode. When the subclock operation mode is set, the internal system clock is changed from the main clock to the subclock. When the PCC.MCK bit is set to 1, the operation of the main clock oscillator is stopped. As a result, the system operates only with the subclock. Table 21-8 shows the operation status in subclock operation mode. In the subclock operation mode, the power consumption can be reduced to a level lower than in the normal operation mode because the subclock is used as the internal system clock. In addition, the power consumption can be further reduced to the level of the STOP mode by stopping the operation of the main clock oscillator. Cautions 1. When manipulating the CK3 bit, do not change the set values of the PCC.CK2 to PCC.CK0 bits (using a bit manipulation instruction to manipulate the bit is recommended). For details, refer to 6.3 (1) Processor clock control register (PCC). 2. If the following conditions are not satisfied, change the CK2 to CK0 bits so that the conditions are satisfied and set the subclock operation mode. Internal system clock (fCLK) > Subclock (fXT: 32.768 kHz) x 4 Remark Internal system clock (fCLK): Clock generated from the main clock (fXX) by setting bits CK2 to CK0 21.6.2 Releasing subclock operation mode The subclock operation mode is released when the CK3 bit is cleared to 0 or by reset (RESET pin input, WDTRES1, WDTRES2 signal). If the main clock is stopped (MCK bit = 1), set the MCK bit to 1, secure the oscillation stabilization time of the main clock by software, and clear the CK3 bit to 0. The normal operation mode is restored when the subclock operation mode is released. Caution When manipulating the CK3 bit, do not change the set values of the CK2 to CK0 bits (using a bit manipulation instruction to manipulate the bit is recommended). For details, refer to 6.3 (1) Processor clock control register (PCC). 652 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 21 STANDBY FUNCTION Table 21-8. Operation Status in Subclock Operation Mode Setting of Subclock Operation Item Mode Operation Status When Main Clock Is Oscillating CPU Operable ROM correction Operable Subclock oscillator Oscillation enabled Interrupt controller Operable Timer P (TMP0) Note 1 16-bit timers (TM00, TM01) When Main Clock Is Stopped Operable Stops operation Operable TM00: Stop operation TM01: Operable when INTWT is selected as count clock and fXT is selected as count clock of WT 8-bit timers (TM50, TM51) Operable * Operable when TI5n is selected as count clock * Operable when INTTM010 is selected as count clock and when TM01 is enabled in subclock operation mode Timer H (TMH0) Operable Timer H (TMH1) Operable Stops operation Operable when fXT is selected as count clock Watch timer Operable Operable when fXT is selected as count clock Watchdog timer 1 Operable Watchdog timer 2 Operable Stops operation Operable when fXT is selected as count clock Serial interface CSI00, CSI01 Operable Operable when SCK0n input clock is selected as operation clock CSIA0 Operable Stops operation Note 2 Operable Stops operation UART0 Operable Operable when ASCK0 is selected as 2 I C0 count clock UART1 <R> Operable Key interrupt function Operable A/D converter Operable Regulator Operation continues Real-time output Operable Stops operation Stops operation Operable when INTTM5n is selected as real-time output trigger and TI5n is selected as count clock of TM5n Port function Settable External bus interface Operable Internal data Settable Notes 1. 2. Only in the PD703211, 703211Y, 70F3211H, 70F3211HY Only in the PD703208Y, 703209Y, 703210Y, 703211Y, 70F3210Y, 70F3210HY, 70F3211HY Remark n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 653 CHAPTER 21 STANDBY FUNCTION 21.7 Sub-IDLE Mode 21.7.1 Setting and operation status The sub-IDLE mode is set when the PSMR.PSM bit is cleared to 0 and the PSC.STP bit is set to 1 in the subclock operation mode. In this mode, the clock oscillator continues operation but clock supply to the CPU and the other on-chip peripheral functions is stopped. As a result, program execution is stopped and the contents of the internal RAM before the sub-IDLE mode was set are retained. The CPU and the other on-chip peripheral functions are stopped. However, the on-chip peripheral functions that can operate with the subclock or an external clock continue operating. Table 21-10 shows the operation status in the sub-IDLE mode. Because the sub-IDLE mode stops operation of the CPU and other on-chip peripheral functions, it can reduce the power consumption more than the subclock operation mode. If the sub-IDLE mode is set after the main clock has been stopped, the power consumption can be reduced to a level as low as that in the STOP mode. <R> Caution Following the store instruction to the PSC register to set the sub-IDLE mode, insert five or more NOP instructions. 654 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 21 STANDBY FUNCTION 21.7.2 Releasing sub-IDLE mode The sub-IDLE mode is released by a non-maskable interrupt request signal (NMI pin input, INTWDT2 signal (when the CPU is operating on the subclock)), unmasked external interrupt request signal (INTP0 to INTP6 pin input), unmasked internal interrupt request signal from the peripheral functions operable in the sub-IDLE mode, or reset (RESET pin input, WDTRES2 signal (when the CPU is operating on the subclock)). When the sub-IDLE mode is released by an interrupt request signal, the subclock operation mode is set. If it is released by reset, the normal operation mode is restored. (1) Releasing sub-IDLE mode by non-maskable interrupt request signal or unmasked maskable interrupt request signal The sub-IDLE mode is released by a non-maskable interrupt request signal or an unmasked maskable interrupt request signal, regardless of the priority of the interrupt request. If the sub-IDLE mode is set in an interrupt servicing routine, however, an interrupt request signal that is issued later is serviced as follows. (a) If an interrupt request signal with a priority lower than that of the interrupt request currently being serviced is issued, only the sub-IDLE mode is released, and that interrupt request signal is not acknowledged. The interrupt request signal itself is retained. (b) If an interrupt request signal with a priority higher than that of the interrupt request currently being serviced is issued (including a non-maskable interrupt request signal), the sub-IDLE mode is released and that interrupt request signal is acknowledged. Table 21-9. Operation After Releasing Sub-IDLE Mode by Interrupt Request Signal Release Source Interrupt Enabled (EI) Status Non-maskable interrupt request signal Execution branches to the handler address Maskable interrupt request signal Execution branches to the handler Interrupt Disabled (DI) Status The next instruction is executed address or the next instruction is executed Caution The interrupt request signal that is disabled by setting the PSC.NMI2M, PSC.NMI0M, and PSC.INTM bits to 1 (interrupt disabled) becomes invalid and the sub-IDLE mode is not released. (2) Releasing sub-IDLE mode by reset The same operation as the normal reset operation is performed. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 655 CHAPTER 21 STANDBY FUNCTION Table 21-10. Operation Status in Sub-IDLE Mode Setting of Sub-IDLE Item Mode Operation Status When Main Clock Is Oscillating CPU Stops operation ROM correction Stops operation Subclock oscillator Oscillation enabled Interrupt controller Stops operation Timer P (TMP0) Note 1 When Main Clock Is Stopped Stops operation 16-bit timers (TM00, TM01) TM00: Stop operation TM00: Stop operation TM01: Operable when INTWT is selected TM01: Operable when INTWT is selected as count clock as count clock and fXT is selected as count clock of WT <R> 8-bit timers (TM50, TM51) * Operable when TI5n is selected as count clock * Operable when INTTM010 is selected as count clock and when TM01 is enabled in sub-IDLE mode Timer H (TMH0) Stops operation Timer H (TMH1) Operable when fXT is selected as count clock <R> Watch timer Operable Operable when fXT is selected as count clock <R> Watchdog timer 1 Stops operation Stops operation Watchdog timer 2 Operable when fXT is selected as count clock <R> Serial interface CSI00, CSI01 Operable when SCK0n input clock is selected as operation clock CSIA0 Stops operation 2 I C0 <R> Note 2 Stops operation UART0 Operable when ASCK0 is selected as count clock UART1 Stops operation Key interrupt function Operable A/D converter Stops operation Regulator Stops operation Real-time output Operable when INTTM5n is selected as real-time output trigger and TI5n is selected as Note 3 count clock of TM5n Port function Retains status before sub-IDLE mode was set. External bus interface Refer to 2.2 Pin Status. Internal data The CPU registers, statuses, data, and all other internal data such as the contents of the internal RAM are retained as they were before the sub-IDLE mode was set. Notes 1. <R> Only in the PD703211, 703211Y, 70F3211H, 70F3211HY 2. Only in the PD703208Y, 703209Y, 703210Y, 703211Y, 70F3210Y, 70F3210HY, 70F3211HY 3. Set the ADM.ADCS and ADM.ADCS2 bits to 00B. Remark n = 0, 1 656 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 22 RESET FUNCTION 22.1 Overview The following reset functions are available. * Reset function by RESET pin input * Reset function by overflow of watchdog timer 1 (WDTRES1) * Reset function by overflow of watchdog timer 2 (WDTRES2) If the RESET pin goes high, the reset status is released, and the CPU starts executing the program. Initialize the contents of each register in the program as necessary. The RESET pin has a noise eliminator that operates by analog delay to prevent malfunction caused by noise. 22.2 Configuration Figure 22-1. Reset Block Diagram RESET Analog delay circuit Reset signal to CPU WDTRES1 issued due to overflow Count clock Watchdog timer 1 Reset signal to CG Reset controller Reset signal to other peripheral macros Count clock Watchdog timer 2 WDTRES2 issued due to overflow User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 657 CHAPTER 22 RESET FUNCTION 22.3 Operation The system is reset, initializing each hardware unit, when a low level is input to the RESET pin or if watchdog timer 1 or watchdog timer 2 overflows (WDTRES1 or WDTRES2). While a low level is being input to the RESET pin, the main clock oscillator stops. Therefore, the overall power consumption of the system can be reduced. If the RESET pin goes high or if the WDTRES1 or WDTRES2 signal is received, the reset status is released. If the reset status is released by RESET pin input or the WDTRES2 signal, the oscillation stabilization time elapses (reset value of OSTS register: 215/fXX) and then the CPU starts program execution. If the reset status is released by the WDTRES1 signal, the oscillation stabilization time is not inserted because the main system clock oscillator does not stop. 658 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 22 RESET FUNCTION <R> Table 22-1. Hardware Status on RESET Pin Input or Occurrence of WDTRES2 Signal Item During Reset Main clock oscillator (fX) Oscillation stops Subclock oscillator (fXT) Oscillation continues Peripheral clock (fXX to fXX/1024) Operation stops After Reset Oscillation starts Operation starts after securing oscillation stabilization time Internal system clock (fCLK) Operation stops Operation starts after securing oscillation stabilization time (initialized to fXX/8) CPU clock (fCPU) Operation stops Operation starts after securing oscillation Watchdog timer 1 clock (fXW) Operation stops Operation starts CPU Initialized Program execution starts after securing stabilization time (initialized to fXX/8) oscillation stabilization time Undefined if power-on reset or writing data to RAM (by CPU) and reset input conflict Internal RAM (data is damaged). Otherwise value immediately before reset input is retained. I/O lines High impedance On-chip peripheral I/O registers Initialized to specified status Watchdog timer 2 Operation stops Operation starts after securing oscillation stabilization time Other on-chip peripheral functions Operation stops Operation can be started after securing oscillation stabilization time Table 22-2. Hardware Status on Occurrence of WDTRES1 Signal <R> Item During Reset After Reset Main clock oscillator (fX) Oscillation continues Subclock oscillator (fXT) Oscillation continues Peripheral clock (fXX to fXX/1024) Operation stops Internal system clock (fCLK) Oscillation continues (initialized to fXX/8) CPU clock (fCPU) Oscillation continues (initialized to fXX/8) Watchdog timer 1 clock (fXW) Operation continues Internal RAM Undefined if writing data to RAM (by CPU) and reset input conflict (data is damaged). Operation starts Otherwise value immediately before reset input is retained. I/O lines High impedance On-chip peripheral I/O registers Initialized to specified status Watchdog timer 2 Operation stops Operation starts Other on-chip peripheral functions Operation stops Operation can be started User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 659 CHAPTER 22 RESET FUNCTION Figure 22-2. Hardware Status on RESET Input fX fCLK Initialized to fXX/8 operation RESET Analog delay (eliminated as noise) Analog Analog delay Analog delay (eliminated as noise) delay Internal system reset signal Oscillation stabilization time count Overflow of timer for oscillation stabilization Figure 22-3. Operation on Power Application VDD fX fCLK Initialized to fXX/8 operation RESET Analog delay Internal system reset signal Oscillation stabilization time count Overflow of timer for oscillation stabilization 660 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 22 RESET FUNCTION <R> Figure 22-4. Timing of Reset Operation by Watchdog Timer 1 fX fCLK Initialized to fXX/8 operation WDTRES1 signal (active low) Internal system reset signal (active low) fCLK: 12-clock width <R> Figure 22-5. Timing of Reset Operation by Watchdog Timer 2 fX fCLK Initialized to fXX/8 operation WDTRES2 signal (active low) Analog delay Internal system reset signal (active low) Oscillation stabilization time count Overflow of oscillation stabilization time counter User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 661 CHAPTER 23 REGULATOR 23.1 Overview The V850ES/KF1 includes a regulator to reduce the power consumption and noise. This regulator supplies a stepped-down VDD power supply voltage to the oscillator block and internal logic circuits (except the A/D converter and output buffer). The regulator output voltage is set to 3.6 V (TYP.). <R> Caution When using the regulator (REGC = 10 F), the external clock cannot be input to the main clock oscillator or subclock oscillator. Figure 23-1. Regulator A/D converter 2.7 to 5.5 V AVREF0 Bidirectional level shifter VPP VDD Regulator Flash memory REGC Main/sub oscillator EVDD Internal digital circuits 3.6 V (TYP.) EVDD I/O buffer (normal port) 2.7 to 5.5 V Caution Use the regulator with a setting of VDD = EVDD = AVREF0. 23.2 Operation The regulator stops operating in the following modes and the supply voltage to the oscillator is VDD (but only when REGC = 10 F). * During reset * In STOP mode * In sub-IDLE mode When using the regulator, be sure to connect a capacitor (10 F) to the REGC pin to stabilize the regulator output. A diagram of the regulator pin connections is shown below. 662 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 23 REGULATOR Figure 23-2. REGC Pin Connection (a) When REGC = VDD VDD Input voltage = 2.7 to 5.5 V REG REGC Voltage supply to oscillator/internal logic = 2.7 to 5.5 V (b) When connecting REGC pin to VSS via a capacitor VDD Input voltage = 4.0 to 5.5 V REG REGC Voltage supply to oscillator/internal logic = 3.6 V 10 F User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 663 CHAPTER 24 ROM CORRECTION FUNCTION 24.1 Overview The ROM correction function is used to replace part of the program in the internal ROM with the program of an external memory or the internal RAM. By using this function, program bugs found in the internal ROM can be corrected. Up to four address can be specified for correction. Figure 24-1. Block Diagram of ROM Correction Instruction address bus Correction address register n (CORADn) Comparator Correction control register (CORENn bit) Remark 664 DBTRAP instruction generation block ROM Block replacing bug with DBTRAP instruction n = 0 to 3 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD Data bus CHAPTER 24 ROM CORRECTION FUNCTION 24.2 Registers (1) Correction address registers 0 to 3 (CORAD0 to CORAD3) These registers are used to set the first address of the program to be corrected. The program can be corrected at up to four places because four CORADn registers are provided. The CORADn register can be read or written in 32-bit units. If the higher 16 bits of the CORADn register are used as the CORADnH register, and the lower 16 bits as the CORADnL register, these registers can be read or written in 16-bit units. After reset, CORADn is cleared to 00000000H. Because the ROM capacity differs depending on the product, set correction addresses in the following ranges. PD703208, 703208Y (64 KB): PD703209, 703209Y (96 KB): PD703210, 703210Y, 70F3210, 70F3210Y, 70F3210H, 70F3210HY (128 KB): PD703211, 703211Y, 70F3211H, 70F3211HY (256 KB): 0000000H to 000FFFFH 0000000H to 0017FFEH 0000000H to 001FFFEH 0000000H to 003FFFEH Bits 0 and 20 to 31 are fixed to 0. After reset: 00000000H R/W (a) 64 KB Address: CORAD0 FFFFF840H, CORAD0L FFFFF840H, CORAD0H FFFFF842H, CORAD1 FFFFF844H, CORAD1L FFFFF844H, CORAD1H FFFFF846H, CORAD2 FFFFF848H, CORAD2L FFFFF848H, CORAD2H FFFFF84AH, CORAD3 FFFFF84CH, CORAD3L FFFFF84CH, CORAD3H FFFFF84EH 20 19 31 16 15 1 0 CORADn Fixed to 0 Note Correction address 0 (n = 0 to 3) (b) 96 KB, 128 KB 20 19 31 17 16 1 0 CORADn Fixed to 0 Note Correction address 0 (n = 0 to 3) (c) 256 KB 31 20 19 18 17 1 0 CORADn Fixed to 0 Note Correction address 0 (n = 0 to 3) Note Be sure to clear these bits to 0. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 665 CHAPTER 24 ROM CORRECTION FUNCTION (2) Correction control register (CORCN) This register disables or enables the correction operation at the address specified by the CORADn register. Each channel can be enabled or disabled by this register. This register can be read or written in 8-bit or 1-bit units. After reset, CORCN is cleared to 00H. After reset: 00H R/W Address: FFFFF880H < > CORCN 0 0 0 CORENn < > < > < > COREN3 COREN2 COREN1 COREN0 Correction operation enable/disable 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Remark 0 n = 0 to 3 Table 24-1. Correspondence Between CORCN Register Bits and CORADn Registers CORCN Register Bit Corresponding CORADn Register COREN3 CORAD3 COREN2 CORAD2 COREN1 CORAD1 COREN0 CORAD0 24.3 ROM Correction Operation and Program Flow <1> If the address to be corrected and the fetch address of the internal ROM match, the fetch code is replaced by the DBTRAP instruction. <2> When the DBTRAP instruction is executed, execution branches to address 00000060H. <3> Software processing after branching causes the result of ROM correction to be judged (the fetch address and ROM correction operation are confirmed) and execution to branch to the correction software. <4> After the correction software has been executed, the return address is set, and return processing is started by the DBRET instruction. Cautions 1. The software that performs <3> and <4> must be executed in the external memory or internal RAM. 2. When setting an address to be corrected to the CORADn register, clear the higher bits to 0 in accordance with the capacity of the internal ROM. 3. The ROM correction function cannot be used to correct the data of the internal ROM. It can only be used to correct instruction codes. If ROM correction is used to correct data, that data is replaced with the DBTRAP instruction code. 666 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 24 ROM CORRECTION FUNCTION Figure 24-2. ROM Correction Operation and Program Flow Reset & start Perform initial settings of microcontroller Set CORADn register Read data for setting ROM correction from external memory Load program for judgment of ROM correction and correction codes Set CORCN register CORENn bit = 1? No Yes Fetch address = CORADn? Execute fetch code No Execute fetch code Yes Change fetch code to DBTRAP instruction Execute DBTRAP instruction Jump to address 00000060H Branch to ROM correction judgment address CORADn = DBPC - 2? No Yes ILGOP processing Branch to correction code address of corresponding channel n Execute correction code Write return address to DBPC. Write value of PSW to DBPSW as necessary. Execute DBRET instruction Remarks 1. : Processing by user program (software) : Processing by ROM correction (hardware) 2. n = 0 to 3 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 667 CHAPTER 25 FLASH MEMORY (SINGLE POWER) The following products are the flash memory versions (single power) of the V850ES/KF1. Caution There are differences in noise immunity and noise radiation between the flash memory and mask ROM versions. When pre-producing and application set with the flash memory version and then mass-producing it with the mask ROM version, be sure to conduct sufficient evaluation for the commercial samples (not engineering samples) of the mask ROM version. For the electrical specifications related to the flash memory rewriting, refer to CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (MASK ROM VERSION OF 256 KB AND SINGLE-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION). * PD70F3210H, 70F3210HY: 128 KB flash memory * PD70F3211H, 70F3211HY: 256 KB flash memory Flash memory versions are commonly used in the following development environments and mass production applications. { For altering software after the V850ES/KF1 is soldered onto the target system. { For data adjustment when starting mass production. { For differentiating software according to the specification in small scale production of various models. { For facilitating inventory management. { For updating software after shipment. 25.1 Features { 4-byte/1-clock access (when instruction is fetched) { Capacity: 256/128 KB { Write voltage: Erase/write with a single power supply { Rewriting method * Rewriting by communication with dedicated flash programmer via serial interface (on-board/off-board programming) * Rewriting flash memory by user program (self programming) { Flash memory write prohibit function supported (security function) { Safe rewriting of entire flash memory area by self programming using boot swap function { Interrupts can be acknowledged during self programming. Cautions 1. When writing/erasing the flash memory using a flash programmer, a single-power flash memory differs from a two-power flash memory in the following points. * A flash programming mode setting pin (FLMD1 pin) must be connected in addition to the pins connected in a two-power flash memory. * The pin used as a handshake signal differs when writing/erasing the flash memory with CSI + HS communication. Two-power flash memory: PCS1/CS1 Single-power flash memory: PCM0/WAIT 2. While self programming is executed, TM50 and TM51 (interrupts, including INTTM50 and INTTM51) cannot be used. For details, refer to 25.5.6 Internal resources used. 668 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 25 FLASH MEMORY (SINGLE POWER) 25.2 Memory Configuration The 256/128 KB internal flash memory area is divided into 128/64 blocks and can be programmed/erased in block units. All the blocks can also be erased at once. When the boot swap function is used, the physical memory (blocks 0 to 3) located at the addresses of boot area 0 is replaced by the physical memory (blocks 4 to 7) located at the addresses of boot area 1. For details of the boot swap function, refer to 25.5 Rewriting by Self Programming. Figure 25-1. Flash Memory Mapping 003FFFFH Block 127 (2 KB) 003F800H 003F7FFH Block 126 (2 KB) 3FFFFFFH On-chip peripheral I/O area (4 KB) 3FEC000H 3FEBFFFH 003F000H 003EFFFH Block 125 (2 KB) Internal RAM area (60 KB) 003E800H 003E7FFH 3FF0000H 3FEFFFFH 0020000H 001FFFFH Block 63 (2 KB) Block 63 (2 KB) 001F800H 001F7FFH Use prohibited 0004800H 00047FFH Block 8 (2 KB) Block 8 (2 KB) 0004000H 0003FFFH 1000000H 0FFFFFFH Block 7 (2 KB) Block 7 (2 KB) 0003800H 00037FFH Block 6 (2 KB) Block 6 (2 KB) 0003000H 0002FFFH External memory area (14 MB) Block 5 (2 KB) Boot area 1Note (8 KB) Block 5 (2 KB) 0002800H 00027FFH Block 4 (2 KB) Block 4 (2 KB) 0002000H 0001FFFH 0200000H 01FFFFFH 0100000H 00FFFFFH Block 3 (2 KB) Block 3 (2 KB) 0001800H 00017FFH External memory area (1 MB) Block 2 (2 KB) Block 2 (2 KB) 0001000H 0000FFFH Use prohibited Block 1 (2 KB) Boot area 0Note (8 KB) Block 1 (2 KB) 0000800H 00007FFH Internal flash memory area (256/128 KB) Block 0 (2 KB) Block 0 (2 KB) 0000000H 0000000H Note Boot area 0 (blocks 0 to 3): Boot area Boot area 1 (blocks 4 to 7): Area to be replaced with the boot area by the boot swap function User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 669 CHAPTER 25 FLASH MEMORY (SINGLE POWER) 25.3 Functional Outline The internal flash memory of the V850ES/KF1 can be rewritten by using the rewrite function of the dedicated flash programmer, regardless of whether the V850ES/KF1 has already been mounted on the target system or not (onboard/off-board programming). In addition, a security function that prohibits rewriting the user program written to the internal flash memory is also supported, so that the program cannot be changed by an unauthorized person. The rewrite function using the user program (self programming) is ideal for an application where it is assumed that the program is changed after production/shipment of the target system. A boot swap function that rewrites the entire flash memory area safely is also supported. In addition, interrupt servicing is supported during self programming, so that the flash memory can be rewritten under various conditions, such as while communicating with an external device. Table 25-1. Rewrite Method Rewrite Method On-board programming Off-board programming Functional Outline Flash memory can be rewritten after the device is mounted on the target system, by using a dedicated flash programmer. Operation Mode Flash memory programming mode Flash memory can be rewritten before the device is mounted on the target system, by using a dedicated flash programmer and a dedicated program adapter board (FA series). Self programming Flash memory can be rewritten by executing a user program that has been written to the flash memory in advance by means of on-board/offboard programming. (During self-programming, instructions cannot be fetched from or data access cannot be made to the internal flash memory area. Therefore, the rewrite program must be transferred to the internal RAM or external memory in advance). Remark 670 The FA series is a product of Naito Densei Machida Mfg. Co., Ltd. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD Normal operation mode CHAPTER 25 FLASH MEMORY (SINGLE POWER) Table 25-2. Basic Functions Function Block erasure Chip erasure Functional Outline Support ({: Supported, x: Not supported) On-Board/Off-Board Programming Self Programming The contents of specified memory blocks are erased. { { The contents of the entire memory area { x { { are erased all at once. Write Writing to specified addresses, and a verify check to see if write level is secured are performed. Verify/checksum { Data read from the flash memory is compared with data transferred from the flash programmer. Blank check x (Can be read by user program) { The erasure status of the entire memory is { checked. <R> Security setting { Use of the block erase command, chip erase command, program command, and x (Supported only when setting read command can be prohibited, and rewriting boot area can be prohibited. is changed from enable to disable) The following table lists the security functions. The block erase command prohibit, chip erase command prohibit, and program command prohibit functions are enabled by default after shipment, and security can be set by rewriting via on-board/off-board programming. Each security function can be used in combination with the others at the same time. <R> Table 25-3. Security Functions Function Block erase command prohibit Function Outline Execution of a block erase command on all blocks is prohibited. Setting of prohibition can be initialized by execution of a chip erase command. Chip erase command prohibit Execution of block erase and chip erase commands on all the blocks is prohibited. Once prohibition is set, setting of prohibition cannot be initialized because the chip erase command cannot be executed. Program command prohibit Program and block erase commands on all the blocks are prohibited. Setting of prohibition can be initialized by execution of the chip erase command. Read command prohibit Execution of a read command on all the blocks is prohibited. Setting of prohibition can be initialized by execution of the chip erase command. Boot area rewrite prohibit A boot area can be protected from block 0 to the specified last block. If the boot area is protected, the protected boot area can no longer rewritten (erased or written). The setting of prohibition cannot be initialized even if the chip erase command is executed. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 671 CHAPTER 25 FLASH MEMORY (SINGLE POWER) Table 25-4. Security Setting <R> Function Erase, Write, Read Operations When Each Security Is Set Notes on Security Setting (: Executable, x: Not Executable, -: Not Supported) On-Board/ Off-Board Programming Self Programming On-Board/ Off-Board Programming Self Programming Block erase Block erase command: x Block erasure (FlashBlockErase): Setting of Supported only command prohibit Chip erase command: Chip erasure: - prohibition can when setting is Program command: Read command: Write (FlashWordWrite): Read (FlashWordRead): be initialized by changed from chip erase command. enable to prohibit Chip erase Block erase command: x Block erasure (FlashBlockErase): Setting of command prohibit Chip erase command: x Chip erasure: - prohibition Program command: Read command: Write (FlashWordWrite): Read (FlashWordRead): cannot be initialized. Program Block erase command: x Block erasure (FlashBlockErase): Setting of command prohibit Chip erase command: Chip erasure: - prohibition can Program command: x Read command: Write (FlashWordWrite): Read (FlashWordRead): be initialized by Note 1 chip erase command. Read Block erase command: Block erasure (FlashBlockErase): Setting of command prohibit Chip erase command: Chip erasure: - prohibition can Program command: Read command: x Write (FlashWordWrite): Read (FlashWordRead): be initialized by chip erase command. Boot area Block erase command: Block erasure (FlashBlockErase): Setting of rewrite prohibit Chip erase command: x Chip erasure: - prohibition Program command: Read command: Write (FlashWordWrite): Read (FlashWordRead): cannot be initialized. Note 2 Note 2 Notes 1. In this case, since the erase command is invalid, data different from the data already written in the flash memory cannot be written. 2. The boot area for which rewriting is prohibited is invalid. 672 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 25 FLASH MEMORY (SINGLE POWER) <R> (1) Security setting by PG-FP4 (Security flag settings) When disabling the read command (Disable Read), to raise the security level, it is recommended to also disable the block erase command (Disable Block Erase) and program command (Disable Program). Furthermore, when rewriting program is not necessary similarly to the mask ROM products, additionally disable the chip erase command (Disable Chip Erase). Note 1 Note 2 Notes 1. Set "Supply voltage", "Program download/upload", and "Command potions" in broken lines in accordance with the use conditions. 2. To disable rewriting the boot area (Boot block cluster setting), select "Disable Boot block cluster reprogramming" in "Security flag settings" and select the last block of the boot area for which rewriting is to be disabled. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 673 CHAPTER 25 FLASH MEMORY (SINGLE POWER) 25.4 Rewriting by Dedicated Flash Programmer The flash memory can be rewritten by using a dedicated flash programmer after the V850ES/KF1 is mounted on the target system (on-board programming). The flash memory can also be rewritten before the device is mounted on the target system (off-board programming) by using a dedicated program adapter (FA series). 25.4.1 Programming environment The following shows the environment required for writing programs to the flash memory of the V850ES/KF1. Figure 25-2. Environment Required for Writing Programs to Flash Memory FLMD0 RS-232C FLMD1 XXXXXX XXXX STATVE PG-FP4 (Flash Pro4) VDD XXXXX XXX YYY XXXX YYYY Axxxx Bxxxxx Cxxxxxx USB VSS Dedicated flash programmer Host machine RESET V850ES/KF1 UART0/CSI00 A host machine is required for controlling the dedicated flash programmer. UART0 or CSI00 is used for the interface between the dedicated flash programmer and the V850ES/KF1 to perform writing, erasing, etc. A dedicated program adapter (FA series) is required for off-board writing. Remark 674 The FA series is a product of Naito Densei Machida Mfg. Co., Ltd. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 25 FLASH MEMORY (SINGLE POWER) 25.4.2 Communication mode Communication between the dedicated flash programmer and the V850ES/KF1 is performed by serial communication using the UART0 or CSI00 interfaces of the V850ES/KF1. (1) UART0 Transfer rate: 9,600 to 153,600 bps Figure 25-3. Communication with Dedicated Flash Programmer (UART0) XXXXXX FLMD0 FLMD1 FLMD1 VDD VDD GND VSS XXXX Cxxxxxx STATVE PG-FP4 (Flash Pro4) XXXXX XXX YYY XXXX YYYY Axxxx Bxxxxx FLMD0 Dedicated flash programmer RESET RESET RxD TXD0 TxD RXD0 CLK X1 V850ES/KF1 X2 (2) CSI00 Serial clock: 2.4 kHz to 2.5 MHz (MSB first) Figure 25-4. Communication with Dedicated Flash Programmer (CSI00) XXXXXX XXXX STATVE PG-FP4 (Flash Pro4) FLMD0 FLMD1 FLMD1 VDD VDD GND VSS XXXXX XXX YYY XXXX YYYY Axxxx Bxxxxx Cxxxxxx FLMD0 RESET Dedicated flash programmer RESET SI SO00 SO SI00 SCK SCK00 CLK X1 V850ES/KF1 X2 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 675 CHAPTER 25 FLASH MEMORY (SINGLE POWER) (3) CSI00 + HS Serial clock: 2.4 kHz to 2.5 MHz (MSB first) Figure 25-5. Communication with Dedicated Flash Programmer (CSI00 + HS) XXXXXX XXXX STATVE PG-FP4 (Flash Pro4) FLMD0 FLMD1 FLMD1 VDD VDD GND VSS RESET XXXXX XXX YYY XXXX YYYY Axxxx Bxxxxx Cxxxxxx FLMD0 Dedicated flash programmer RESET SI SO00 SO SI00 SCK SCK00 CLK X1 V850ES/KF1 X2 HS PCM0 The dedicated flash programmer outputs the transfer clock, and the V850ES/KF1 operates as a slave. When the PG-FP4 is used as the dedicated flash programmer, it generates the following signals to the V850ES/KF1. For details, refer to the PG-FP4 User's Manual (U15260E). Table 25-5. Signal Connections of Dedicated Flash Programmer (PG-FP4) PG-FP4 Signal Name I/O V850ES/KF1 Pin Function Pin Name FLMD0 Output Write enable/disable FLMD0 FLMD1 Output Write enable/disable FLMD1 VDD - VDD voltage generation/voltage monitor VDD GND - Ground VSS Processing for Connection UART0 CSI00 Note 1 x Note 2 CLK Output Clock output to V850ES/KF1 X1, X2 RESET Output Reset signal RESET SI/RxD Input Receive signal SO00 SO/TxD Output Transmit signal SI00 SCK Output Transfer clock SCK00 x HS Input Handshake signal for CSI00 + HS PCM0 x CSI00 + HS Note 1 x Note 2 Note 1 x Note 2 x communication Notes 1. Wire the pin as shown in Figure 25-6, or connect it to GND on board via a pull-down resistor. 2. Connect these pins to supply a clock from the PG-FP4 (wire as shown in Figure 25-6, or create an oscillator on board and supply the clock). Remark : Must be connected. x: Does not have to be connected. 676 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 25 FLASH MEMORY (SINGLE POWER) Table 25-6. Wiring Between PD70F3210H, 70F3210HY, 70F3211H, 70F3211HY and PG-FP4 Pin Configuration of Flash Programmer (PG-FP4) Signal Name SI/RXD I/O Input Pin Name on With CSI00-HS FA Board Pin Function Pin Name Pin No. With CSI00 Pin Name Pin No. With UART0 Pin Name Pin No. Receive signal SI P41/SO00 20 P41/SO00 20 P30/TXD0 22 19 P40/SI00 19 P31/RXD0 23 SO/TXD Output Transmit signal SO P40/SI00 SCK Output Transfer clock SCK P42/SCK00 21 P42/SCK00 21 Not needed Not needed CLK Output Clock to V850ES/KF1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X2 X2 Note 1 12 13 X2 Note 1 12 13 X2 Note 1 12 13 /RESET Output Reset signal /RESET RESET 14 RESET 14 RESET 14 FLMD0 Input Write voltage FLMD0 FLMD0 8 FLMD0 8 FLMD0 8 FLMD1 Input Write voltage FLMD1 PDL5/AD5/ 62 PDL5/AD5/ 62 PDL5/AD5/ 62 FLMD1 FLMD1 FLMD1 HS Input Handshake signal for CSI00 RESERVE/HS PCM0/ VDD - VDD voltage generation/ VDD voltage monitor GND - Ground 49 Not needed Not needed Not needed Not needed WAITNote 2 + HS communication GND VDD 9 VDD 9 VDD 9 EVDD 31 EVDD 31 EVDD 31 AVREF0 1 AVREF0 1 AVREF0 1 VSS 11 VSS 11 VSS 11 AVSS 2 AVSS 2 AVSS 2 EVSS 30 EVSS 30 EVSS 30 Notes 1. When using the clock out of the flash programmer, connect CLK of the programmer to X1, and connect its inverse signal to X2. 2. The pin differs when it is used in a two-power flash memory. Cautions 1. Be sure to connect the REGC pin in either of the following ways. * Connect to GND via a 10 F capacitor * Directly connect to VDD 2. When connecting the REGC pin to GND via a 10 F capacitor, the clock cannot be supplied from the CLK pin of the flash programmer. Supply the clock by creating an oscillator on the board. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 677 CHAPTER 25 FLASH MEMORY (SINGLE POWER) <R> Figure 25-6. Wiring Example of V850ES/KF1 Flash Writing Adapter (FA-80GC-8BT-A, FA-80GK-9EU-A) (1/2) G N D VD D N G D VD D 49 62 Note 1 PD70F3210H, PD70F3210HY, PD70F3211H, PD70F3211HY 31 30 Connect to GND. Connect to VDD. 23 Note 4 22 Note 2 1 2 8 9 10 11 Note 3 12 13 21 19 14 20 G D N N D VD D G D VD J1 VDD2 CLKIN SI SO SCK X1 X2 /RESET VPP RESERVE/HS SI 678 RFU-3 RFU-2 SO SCK User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD RFU-1 VDE FLMD1Note 5 FLMD0 CLKOUT /RESET VPP RESERVE/HSNote 6 VDD CHAPTER 25 FLASH MEMORY (SINGLE POWER) <R> Figure 25-6. Wiring Example of V850ES/KF1 Flash Writing Adapter (FA-80GC-8BT-A, FA-80GK-9EU-A) (2/2) Notes 1. Wire the FLMD1 pin as shown in the figure, or connect it to GND on board via a pull-down resistor. 2. Be sure to connect the REGC pin in either of the following ways. * Connect to GND via a 10 F capacitor. * Directly connect to VDD. When connecting the REGC pin to GND via a 10 F capacitor, the clock cannot be supplied from the CLK pin of the flash programmer. Supply the clock by creating an oscillator on the board. 3. The above figure shows an example of wiring when the clock is supplied from the PG-FP4. Be sure to set and connect as follows when the clock is supplied from the PG-FP4. * Set J1 of the flash adapter (FA) to the VDD side. * Connect CLKOUT of FA to CLKIN of FA. * Connect X1 of FA to X1 of the device. * Connect X2 of FA to X2 of the device. If an oscillator is created on the flash adapter and a clock is supplied, the above setting and connections will not necessary. The following shows a circuit example. X1 X2 4. Corresponding pin when using UART0 5. Unlike a two-power flash memory, a flash programming mode setting pin is required in a single-power flash memory. 6. The pin differs when it is used in a two-power flash memory. Remarks 1. Handle the pins not described above in accordance with the specified handling of unused pins (refer to 2.3 Pin I/O Circuits and Recommended Connection of Unused Pins). When connecting to VDD via a resistor, use of a resistor of 1 k to 10 k is recommended. 2. This adapter is for an 80-pin plastic QFP and 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) packages. 3. This diagram shows the wiring when using a handshake-supporting CSI. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 679 CHAPTER 25 FLASH MEMORY (SINGLE POWER) 25.4.3 Flash memory control The following shows the procedure for manipulating the flash memory. Figure 25-7. Procedure for Manipulating Flash Memory Start Supplies FLMD0 pulse Switch to flash memory programming mode Select communication system Manipulate flash memory End? Yes End 680 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD No CHAPTER 25 FLASH MEMORY (SINGLE POWER) 25.4.4 Selection of communication mode In the V850ES/KF1, the communication mode is selected by inputting pulses (12 pulses max.) to the FLMD0 pin after switching to the flash memory programming mode. The FLMD0 pulse is generated by the dedicated flash programmer. The following shows the relationship between the number of pulses and the communication mode. Figure 25-8. Selection of Communication Mode VDD VDD VSS VDD RESET (input) VSS VDD FLMD1 (input) VSS VDD FLMD0 (input) VSS (Note) VDD RXD0 (input) VSS VDD TXD0 (output) Oscillation stabilized VSS Power on Communication mode selected Flash control command communication (erasure, write, etc.) Reset released Note The number of clocks is as follows depending on the communication mode. FLMD0 Pulse Communication Mode Remarks 0 UART0 Communication rate: 9600 bps (after reset), LSB first 8 CSI00 V850ES/KF1 performs slave operation, MSB first 11 CSI00 + HS V850ES/KF1 performs slave operation, MSB first Other RFU Setting prohibited Caution When UART0 is selected, the receive clock is calculated based on the reset command sent from the dedicated flash programmer after receiving the FLMD0 pulse. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 681 CHAPTER 25 FLASH MEMORY (SINGLE POWER) 25.4.5 Communication commands The V850ES/KF1 communicates with the dedicated flash programmer by means of commands. The signals sent from the dedicated flash programmer to the V850ES/KF1 are called "commands". The response signals sent from the V850ES/KF1 to the dedicated flash programmer are called "response commands". Figure 25-9. Communication Commands Command XXXXXX XXXX STATVE PG-FP4 (Flash Pro4) XXXXX XXX YYY XXXX YYYY Axxxx Bxxxxx Cxxxxxx Response command Dedicated flash programmer V850ES/KF1 The following shows the commands for flash memory control in the V850ES/KF1. All of these commands are issued from the dedicated flash programmer, and the V850ES/KF1 performs the processing corresponding to the commands. Table 25-7. Flash Memory Control Commands Classification Blank check Command Name Block blank check Support Function CSI00 CSI00 + HS UART0 { { { Erase Checks if the contents of the memory in the specified block have been correctly erased. command Chip erase command { { { Erases the contents of the entire memory. Block erase command { { { Erases the contents of the memory of the specified block. <R> Write Program command { { { Writes the specified address range, and executes a contents verify check. Verify Verify command { { { Compares the contents of memory in the specified address range with data transferred from the flash programmer. Checksum command { { { Reads the checksum in the specified address range. System setting, Silicon signature control command <R> Security setting { { { Reads silicon signature information. { { { Disables the chip erase command, block command erase command, program command, and read command. 682 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 25 FLASH MEMORY (SINGLE POWER) 25.4.6 Pin connection When performing on-board writing, mount a connector on the target system to connect to the dedicated flash programmer. Also, incorporate a function on-board to switch from the normal operation mode to the flash memory programming mode. In the flash memory programming mode, all the pins not used for flash memory programming become the same status as that immediately after reset. Therefore, pin handling is required when the external device does not acknowledge the status immediately after a reset. (1) FLMD0 pin In the normal operation mode, input a voltage of VSS level to the FLMD0 pin. In the flash memory programming mode, supply a write voltage of VDD level to the FLMD0 pin. Because the FLMD0 pin serves as a write protection pin in the self programming mode, a voltage of VDD level must be supplied to the FLMD0 pin via port control, etc., before writing to the flash memory. For details, refer to 25.5.5 (1) FLMD0 pin. Figure 25-10. FLMD0 Pin Connection Example V850ES/KF1 Dedicated flash programmer connection pin FLMD0 Pull-down resistor (RFLMD0) User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 683 CHAPTER 25 FLASH MEMORY (SINGLE POWER) (2) FLMD1 pin When 0 V is input to the FLMD0 pin, the FLMD1 pin does not function. When VDD is supplied to the FLMD0 pin, the flash memory programming mode is entered, so 0 V must be input to the FLMD1 pin. The following shows an example of the connection of the FLMD1 pin. Figure 25-11. FLMD1 Pin Connection Example V850ES/KF1 FLMD1 Other device Pull-down resistor (RFLMD1) Caution If the VDD signal is input to the FLMD1 pin from another device during on-board writing and immediately after reset, isolate this signal. Table 25-8. Relationship Between FLMD0 and FLMD1 Pins and Operation Mode When Reset Is Released 684 FLMD0 FLMD1 0 don't care VDD 0 VDD VDD Operation Mode Normal operation mode Flash memory programming mode Setting prohibited User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 25 FLASH MEMORY (SINGLE POWER) (3) Serial interface pin The following shows the pins used by each serial interface. Table 25-9. Pins Used by Serial Interfaces Serial Interface Pins Used UART0 TXD0, RXD0 CSI00 SO00, SI00, SCK00 CSI00 + HS SO00, SI00, SCK00, PCM0 When connecting a dedicated flash programmer to a serial interface pin that is connected to another device on-board, care should be taken to avoid conflict of signals and malfunction of the other device. (a) Conflict of signals When the dedicated flash programmer (output) is connected to a serial interface pin (input) that is connected to another device (output), a conflict of signals occurs. To avoid the conflict of signals, isolate the connection to the other device or set the other device to the output high-impedance status. Figure 25-12. Conflict of Signals (Serial Interface Input Pin) V850ES/KF1 Conflict of signals Dedicated flash programmer connection pins Input pin Other device Output pin In the flash memory programming mode, the signal that the dedicated flash programmer sends out conflicts with signals another device outputs. Therefore, isolate the signals on the other device side. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 685 CHAPTER 25 FLASH MEMORY (SINGLE POWER) (b) Malfunction of other device When the dedicated flash programmer (output or input) is connected to a serial interface pin (input or output) that is connected to another device (input), the signal is output to the other device, causing the device to malfunction. To avoid this, isolate the connection to the other device. Figure 25-13. Malfunction of Other Device V850ES/KF1 Dedicated flash programmer connection pin Pin Other device Input pin In the flash memory programming mode, if the signal the V850ES/KF1 outputs affects the other device, isolate the signal on the other device side. V850ES/KF1 Dedicated flash programmer connection pin Pin Other device Input pin In the flash memory programming mode, if the signal the dedicated flash programmer outputs affects the other device, isolate the signal on the other device side. 686 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 25 FLASH MEMORY (SINGLE POWER) (4) RESET pin When the reset signals of the dedicated flash programmer are connected to the RESET pin that is connected to the reset signal generator on-board, a conflict of signals occurs. To avoid the conflict of signals, isolate the connection to the reset signal generator. When a reset signal is input from the user system in the flash memory programming mode, the programming operation will not be performed correctly. Therefore, do not input signals other than the reset signals from the dedicated flash programmer. Figure 25-14. Conflict of Signals (RESET Pin) V850ES/KF1 Conflict of signals Dedicated flash programmer connection pin RESET Reset signal generator Output pin In the flash memory programming mode, the signal the reset signal generator outputs conflicts with the signal the dedicated flash programmer outputs. Therefore, isolate the signals on the reset signal generator side. (5) Port pins (including NMI) When the system shifts to the flash memory programming mode, all the pins that are not used for flash memory programming are in the same status as that immediately after reset. If the external device connected to each port does not recognize the status of the port immediately after reset, pins require appropriate processing, such as connecting to VDD via a resistor or connecting to VSS via a resistor. (6) Other signal pins Connect X1, X2, XT1, XT2, and REGC in the same status as that in the normal operation mode. (7) Power supply Supply the same power (VDD, VSS, EVDD, EVSS, AVSS, AVREF0) as in normal operation mode. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 687 CHAPTER 25 FLASH MEMORY (SINGLE POWER) 25.5 Rewriting by Self Programming 25.5.1 Overview The V850ES/KF1 supports a flash macro service that allows the user program to rewrite the internal flash memory by itself. By using this interface and a self programming library that is used to rewrite the flash memory with a user application program, the flash memory can be rewritten by a user application transferred in advance to the internal RAM or external memory. Consequently, the user program can be upgraded and constant data can be rewritten in the field. Figure 25-15. Concept of Self Programming Application program Self programming library Flash function execution Flash information Flash macro service Erase, write Flash memory 688 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 25 FLASH MEMORY (SINGLE POWER) 25.5.2 Features (1) Secure self programming (boot swap function) The V850ES/KF1 supports a boot swap function that can exchange the physical memory (blocks 0 to 3) of boot area 0 with the physical memory (blocks 4 to 7) of boot area 1. By writing the start program to be rewritten to boot area 1 in advance and then swapping the physical memory, the entire area can be safely rewritten even if a power failure occurs during rewriting because the correct user program always exists in boot area 0. Figure 25-16. Rewriting Entire Memory Area (Boot Swap) Block N Block N Block 8 Block 8 Block 7 Block 7 Block 7 Block 6 Block 6 Block 6 Block 5 Block 5 Block 5 Block 4 Block 4 Block 3 Block 3 Block 3 Block 2 Block 2 Block 2 Block 1 Block 1 Block 1 Block 0 Block 0 Block 0 Block 4 Remark Rewriting boot areas 0 and 1 Block N Boot swap Block 8 256 KB products: N = 127 128 KB products: N = 63 <R> (2) Interrupt support Instructions cannot be fetched from the flash memory during self programming. Conventionally, therefore, a user handler written to the flash memory could not be used even if an interrupt occurred. Therefore, in the V850ES/KF1, to use an interrupt during self programming, processing transits to the specific addressNote in the internal RAM. Allocate the jump instruction that transits processing to the user interrupt servicing at the specific addressNote in the internal RAM. Note NMI interrupt: Start address of internal RAM Maskable interrupt: Start address of internal RAM + 4 addresses User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 689 CHAPTER 25 FLASH MEMORY (SINGLE POWER) 25.5.3 Standard self programming flow The entire processing to rewrite the flash memory by flash self programming is illustrated below. Figure 25-17. Standard Self Programming Flow <R> (a) Rewriting at once (b) Rewriting in block units Flash memory manipulation Flash memory manipulation Flash environment initialization processing Flash environment initialization processing Erase processing * Disable accessing flash area * Disable setting of STOP mode * Disable stopping clock Write processing Internal verify processing Flash information setting processingNote 1 * Disable accessing flash area * Disable setting of STOP mode * Disable stopping clock Erase processing Write processing Internal verify processing All blocks end? No Yes Boot area swapping processingNote 2 Flash information setting processingNote 1 Flash environment end processing Boot area swapping processingNote 2 End of processing Flash environment end processing End of processing Notes 1. If a security setting is not performed, flash information setting processing does not have to be executed. 2. If boot swap is not used, flash information setting processing and boot area swap processing do not have to be executed. 690 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 25 FLASH MEMORY (SINGLE POWER) 25.5.4 Flash functions Table 25-10. Main Flash Function List Function Name Outline Support FlashEnv Initialization of flash control macro FlashBlockErase Erasure of only specified one block FlashWordWrite Writing from specified address FlashBlockIVerify Internal verification of specified block FlashBlockBlankCheck Blank check of specified block FlashFLMDCheck Check of FLMD pin FlashGetInfo Reading of flash information FlashSetInfo Setting of flash information FlashBootSwap Swapping of boot area FlashWordRead Reading data from specified address Remark For details, refer to the V850 Series Flash Memory Self Programming (Single Power Supply Flash Memory) User's Manual. Contact an NEC Electronics sales representative for the above manual. 25.5.5 Pin processing (1) FLMD0 pin The FLMD0 pin is used to set the operation mode when reset is released and to protect the flash memory from being written during self rewriting. It is therefore necessary to keep the voltage applied to the FLMD0 pin at 0 V when reset is released and a normal operation is executed. It is also necessary to apply a voltage of VDD level to the FLMD0 pin during the self programming mode period via port control before the memory is rewritten. When self programming has been completed, the voltage on the FLMD0 pin must be returned to 0 V. Figure 25-18. Mode Change Timing RESET signal VDD 0V Self programming mode VDD FLMD0 pin 0V Normal operation mode Caution Normal operation mode Make sure that the FLMD0 pin is at 0 V when reset is released. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 691 CHAPTER 25 FLASH MEMORY (SINGLE POWER) <R> 25.5.6 Internal resources used The following table lists the internal resources used for self programming. These internal resources can also be used freely for purposes other than self programming. Table 25-11. Internal Resources Used Resource Name Description Entry RAM area Routines and parameters used for the flash macro service are located in this area. The (internal RAM/external RAM size: 136 bytes) entry program and default parameters are copied by calling a library initialization function. Stack area (stack size: 600 bytes) An extension of the stack used by the user is used by the library (can be used in both the internal RAM and external RAM). Library code (code size: Program entity of library (can be used anywhere other than the flash memory block to be Approx. 1600 bytes) manipulated). Application program Executed as user application. Calls flash functions. Maskable interrupt Can be used in user application execution status or self programming status. To use this interrupt in the self-programming status, since the processing transits to the address of Note 1 the internal RAM start address + 4 addresses , allocate the jump instruction that transits the processing to the user interrupt servicing at the address of the internal RAM Note 1 start address + 4 addresses in advance. NMI interrupt Can be used in user application execution status or self programming status. To use this interrupt in the self-programming status, since the processing transits to the address of Note 2 the internal RAM start address , allocate the jump instruction that transits the Note 2 processing to the user interrupt servicing at the internal RAM start address advance. TM50, TM51 in Because TM50 and TM51 are used in the flash macro service, do not use them in the self programming status. When using TM50 and TM51 after self programming, set them again. Notes 1. PD70F3211H, 70F3211HY: 3FFC004H PD70F3210H, 70F3210HY: 3FFD804H 2. PD70F3211H, 70F3211HY: 3FFC000H PD70F3210H, 70F3210HY: 3FFD800H Remark For details, refer to the V850 Series Flash Memory Self Programming (Single Power Supply Flash Memory) User's Manual. Contact an NEC Electronics sales representative for the above manual. 692 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 26 FLASH MEMORY (TWO POWER) The following products are the on-chip flash memory versions (two power) of the V850ES/KF1. Caution There are differences in noise immunity and noise radiation between the flash memory and mask ROM versions. When pre-producing and application set with the flash memory version and then mass-producing it with the mask ROM version, be sure to conduct sufficient evaluation for the commercial samples (not engineering samples) of the mask ROM version. For the electrical specifications related to the flash memory rewriting, refer to CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS (MASK ROM VERSION OF 128 KB OR LESS AND TWO-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION), (A) GRADE PRODUCTS). * PD70F3210, 70F3210Y: Products with 128 KB flash memory When an instruction is fetched from this flash memory, 4 bytes can be accessed with 1 clock, in the same manner as the mask ROM versions. Data can be written to the flash memory with the flash memory mounted on the target system (on-board). Connect a dedicated flash programmer to the target system to write the flash memory. The following are the assumed environments and applications of flash memory. { Changing software after soldering the V850ES/KF1 onto the target system { Producing many variations of a product in small quantities by changing the software { Adjusting data when mass production is started 26.1 Features * 4-byte/1-clock access (during instruction fetch access) * Erasing all areas at once * Communication with dedicated flash programmer via serial interface * Erase/write voltage: VPP = 10 V * On-board programming Remark For the differences between a two-power flash memory and single-power flash memory, refer to Caution in 25.1 Features. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 693 CHAPTER 26 FLASH MEMORY (TWO POWER) 26.2 Writing with Flash Programmer Data can be written to the flash memory on-board or off-board, by using a dedicated flash programmer. (1) On-board programming The contents of the flash memory can be rewritten after the V850ES/KF1 has been mounted on the target system. The connectors that connect the dedicated flash programmer must be mounted on the target system. (2) Off-board programming Data can be written to the flash memory with a dedicated program adapter (FA series) before the V850ES/KF1 is mounted on the target system. Remark The FA series is a product of Naito Densei Machida Mfg. Co., Ltd. Table 26-1. Wiring Between PD70F3210 and 70F3210Y, and PG-FP4 Pin Configuration of Flash Programmer (PG-FP4) Signal Name SI/RXD I/O Input Pin Function Pin Name on FA Board With CSI00-HS Pin Name Pin No. With CSI00 Pin Name Pin No. With UART0 Pin Name Pin No. Receive signal SI P41/SO00 20 P41/SO00 20 P30/TXD0 22 19 P40/SI00 19 P31/RXD0 23 SO/TXD Output Transmit signal SO P40/SI00 SCK Output Transfer clock SCK P42/SCK00 21 P42/SCK00 21 Not needed Not needed CLK Output Clock to V850ES/KF1 X1 X1 X1 X1 Note 1 12 Note 1 12 Note 1 12 X2 X2 13 X2 13 X2 13 /RESET Output Reset signal /RESET RESET 14 RESET 14 RESET 14 VPP Output Write voltage VPP VPP 8 VPP 8 VPP 8 HS Input Handshake signal for RESERVE PCS1/ 48 Not needed Not needed Not needed Not needed CSI00 + HS /HS CS1Note 2 VDD VDD 9 VDD 9 VDD 9 EVDD 31 EVDD 31 EVDD 31 communication VDD VDD voltage I/O generation/voltage monitor GND - Ground GND AVREF0 1 AVREF0 1 AVREF0 1 VSS 11 VSS 11 VSS 11 AVSS 2 AVSS 2 AVSS 2 EVSS 30 EVSS 30 EVSS 30 Notes 1. When using the clock out of the flash programmer, connect CLK of the programmer to X1, and connect its inverse signal to X2. 2. The pin differs when it is used in a single-power flash memory. Cautions 1. Be sure to connect the REGC pin in either of the following ways. * Connect to GND via a 10 F capacitor * Directly connect to VDD 2. When connecting the REGC pin to GND via a 10 F capacitor, the clock cannot be supplied from the CLK pin of the flash programmer. Supply the clock by creating an oscillator on the board. 694 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 26 FLASH MEMORY (TWO POWER) <R> Figure 26-1. Wiring Example of V850ES/KF1 Flash Writing Adapter (FA-80GC-8BT-A, FA-80GK-9EU-A) (1/2) D VD D N G D VD D N G 48 62 31 PD70F3210, PD70F3210Y 30 Connect to GND. Connect to VDD. 23 Note 3 22 Note 1 1 2 8 9 10 11 Note 2 12 13 21 19 14 20 G D N N D VD D G D VD J1 VDD2 VDD CLKIN SI SO SCK X1 X2 /RESET VPP RESERVE/HS SI RFU-3 RFU-2 SO SCK User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD RFU-1 VDE CLKOUT /RESET FLMD1 FLMD0 VPP RESERVE/HSNote 4 695 CHAPTER 26 FLASH MEMORY (TWO POWER) <R> Figure 26-1. Wiring Example of V850ES/KF1 Flash Writing Adapter (FA-80GC-8BT-A, FA-80GK-9EU-A) (2/2) Notes 1. Be sure to connect the REGC pin in either of the following ways. * Connect to GND via a 10 F capacitor. * Directly connect to VDD. When connecting the REGC pin to GND via a 10 F capacitor, the clock cannot be supplied from the CLK pin of the flash programmer. Supply the clock by creating an oscillator on the board. 2. The above figure shows an example of wiring when the clock is supplied from the PG-FP4. Be sure to set and connect as follows when the clock is supplied from the PG-FP4. * Set J1 of the flash adapter (FA) to the VDD side. * Connect CLKOUT of FA to CLKIN of FA. * Connect X1 of FA to X1 of the device. * Connect X2 of FA to X2 of the device. If an oscillator is created on the flash adapter and a clock is supplied, the above setting and connections will not necessary. The following shows a circuit example. X1 X2 3. Corresponding pin when using UART0 4. The pin differs when it is used in a single-power flash memory. Remarks 1. Handle the pins not described above in accordance with the specified handling of unused pins (refer to 2.3 Pin I/O Circuits and Recommended Connection of Unused Pins). When connecting to VDD via a resistor, use of a resistor of 1 k to 10 k is recommended. 2. This adapter is for an 80-pin plastic QFP package. 3. This diagram shows the wiring when using a handshake-supporting CSI. 696 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 26 FLASH MEMORY (TWO POWER) 26.3 Programming Environment The environment required for writing a program to the flash memory of the V850ES/KF1 is illustrated below. Figure 26-2. Environment for Writing Program to Flash Memory VPP XXXXXX XXXX XXXX YYYY Bxxxxx Cxxxxxx STATVE PG-FP4 (Flash Pro4) VSS XXXXX USB VDD Axxxx XXX YYY RS-232-C RESET Dedicated flash programmer UART0/CSI00 V850ES/KF1 Host machine A host machine that controls the dedicated flash programmer is necessary. To interface between the flash programmer and the V850ES/KF1, UART0 or CSI00 is used for manipulation such as writing and erasing. To write the flash memory off-board, a dedicated program adapter (FA series) is necessary. 26.4 Communication Mode Communication between the dedicated flash programmer and the V850ES/KF1 is established by serial communication via UART0 or CSI00 of the V850ES/KF1. (1) UART0 Transfer rate: 9600 to 153600 bps (LSB first) Figure 26-3. Communication with Dedicated Flash Programmer (UART0) XXXXXX XXXX Cxxxxxx STATVE PG-FP4 (Flash Pro4) VPP VDD GND VSS XXXXX XXX YYY XXXX YYYY Axxxx Bxxxxx VPP VDD RESET Dedicated flash programmer RESET TXD RXD0 RXD TXD0 CLK X1 V850ES/KF1 X2 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 697 CHAPTER 26 FLASH MEMORY (TWO POWER) (2) CSI00 Transfer rate: 2.4 kHz to 2.5 MHz (MSB first) Figure 26-4. Communication with Dedicated Flash Programmer (CSI00) XXXXXX STATVE XXX YYY VPP VDD GND VSS XXXX Cxxxxxx PG-FP4 (Flash Pro4) RESET XXXXX XXXX YYYY Axxxx Bxxxxx VPP VDD Dedicated flash programmer RESET SI SO00 SO SI00 SCK SCK00 CLK X1 V850ES/KF1 X2 (3) CSI communication mode supporting handshake Transfer rate: 2.4 kHz to 2.5 MHz (MSB first) Figure 26-5. Communication with Flash Programmer (CSI00 + H/S) VPP VDD GND VSS XXXXXX XXXX Bxxxxx Cxxxxxx STATVE PG-FP4 (Flash Pro4) RESET XXXXX XXX YYY XXXX YYYY Axxxx VPP VDD Dedicated flash programmer RESET SI SO00 SO SI00 SCK SCK00 CLK X1 X2 H/S 698 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD PCS1 V850ES/KF1 CHAPTER 26 FLASH MEMORY (TWO POWER) If the PG-FP4 is used as the flash programmer, the PG-FP4 generates the following signals for the V850ES/KF1. For details, refer to the PG-FP4 User's Manual (U15260E). Table 26-2. Signals Generated by Dedicated Flash Programmer (PG-FP4) PG-FP4 Signal Name I/O Pin Function V850ES/KF1 Connection Pin Name CSI00 UART0 VPP Output Write voltage VPP VDD I/O VDD voltage generation/voltage monitor VDD Ground VSS Clock output to V850ES/KF1 X1, X2 - GND Note { { CLK Output RESET Output Reset signal RESET SI/RxD Input Receive signal SO00/TXD0 SO/TxD Output Transmit signal SI00/RXD0 SCK Output Transfer clock SCK00 x H/S Input Handshake signal of CSI00 + HS communication PCS1 x Note For off-board writing only: connect the clock output of the flash programmer to X1 and its inverse signal to X2. Remark : Be sure to connect the pin. {: The pin does not have to be connected if the signal is generated on the target board. x: The pin does not have to be connected. : In handshake mode User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 699 CHAPTER 26 FLASH MEMORY (TWO POWER) 26.5 Pin Processing To write the flash memory on-board, connectors that connect the flash programmer must be provided on the target system. First provide a function that selects the normal operation mode or flash memory programming mode on the board. When the flash memory programming mode is set, all the pins not used for programming the flash memory are in the same status as immediately after reset. Therefore, if the external device does not recognize the state immediately after reset, the pins must be processed as described below. 26.5.1 VPP pin In the normal operation mode, connect the VPP pin to VSS. In the flash memory programming mode, a write voltage of 10 V is supplied to the VPP pin. An example of connection of the VPP pin is illustrated below. Figure 26-6. Example of Connection of VPP Pin V850ES/KF1 Flash programmer connection pin VPP Pull-down resistor (RVPP) 700 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 26 FLASH MEMORY (TWO POWER) 26.5.2 Serial interface pins The pins used by each serial interface are listed below. Table 26-3. Pins Used by Each Serial Interface Serial Interface Pins Used CSI00 SO00, SI00, SCK00 CSI00 + HS SO00, SI00, SCK00, PCS1 UART0 TXD0, RXD0 To connect the dedicated flash programmer to the pins of a serial interface that is connected to another device on the board, care must be exercised so that signals do not collide or that the other device does not malfunction. (1) Signal collision If the flash programmer (output) is connected to a pin (input) of a serial interface connected to another device (output), signal collision takes place. To avoid this collision, either isolate the connection with the other device, or make the other device go into an output high-impedance state. Figure 26-7. Signal Collision (Input Pin of Serial Interface) V850ES/KF1 Signal collision Input pin Flash programmer connection pin Other device Output pin In the flash memory programming mode, the signal output by the device collides with the signal sent from the flash programmer. Therefore, isolate the signal of the other device. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 701 CHAPTER 26 FLASH MEMORY (TWO POWER) (2) Malfunction of other device If the dedicated flash programmer (output or input) is connected to a pin (input or output) of a serial interface connected to another device (input), a signal may be output to the other device, causing the device to malfunction. To avoid this malfunction, isolate the connection with the other device. Figure 26-8. Malfunction of Other Device V850ES/KF1 Flash programmer connection pin Pin Other device Input pin If the signal output by the V850ES/KF1 in the flash memory programming mode affects the other device, isolate the signal of the other device. V850ES/KF1 Pin Flash programmer connection pin Other device Input pin If the signal output by the flash programmer in the flash memory programming mode affects the other device, isolate the signal of the other device. 702 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 26 FLASH MEMORY (TWO POWER) 26.5.3 RESET pin If the reset signal of the flash programmer is connected to the RESET pin that is connected to the reset signal generator on the board, signal collision takes place. To prevent this collision, isolate the connection with the reset signal generator. If the reset signal is input from the user system while the flash memory programming mode is set, the flash memory will not be correctly programmed. Do not input any signal other than the reset signal of the flash programmer. Figure 26-9. Signal Collision (RESET Pin) V850ES/KF1 Signal collision RESET Flash programmer connection signal Reset signal generator Output pin In the flash memory programming mode, the signal output by the reset signal generator collides with the signal output by the flash programmer. Therefore, isolate the signal of the reset signal generator. 26.5.4 Port pins When the system shifts to the flash memory programming mode, all the pins that are not used for flash memory programming are in the same status as that immediately after reset. If the external device connected to each port does not recognize the status of the port immediately after reset, pins require appropriate processing, such as connecting to VDD via a resistor or connecting to VSS via a resistor. 26.5.5 Other signal pins Connect the X1, X2, XT1, XT2, and REGC pins in the same status as in the normal operation mode. To input the operating clock from the programmer, however, connect the clock out of the programmer to X1, and its inverse signal to X2. 26.5.6 Power supply Supply the same power as in the normal operation mode for the power supply (VDD, VSS, AVREF0, AVSS, EVDD, and EVSS). User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 703 CHAPTER 26 FLASH MEMORY (TWO POWER) 26.6 Programming Method 26.6.1 Controlling flash memory The following figure illustrates the procedure to manipulate the flash memory. Figure 26-10. Flash Memory Manipulation Procedure Start VPP pulse supply Flash memory programming mode is set Selecting communication mode Manipulate flash memory End? Yes End 704 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD No CHAPTER 26 FLASH MEMORY (TWO POWER) 26.6.2 Flash memory programming mode To rewrite the contents of the flash memory by using the dedicated flash programmer, set the V850ES/KF1 in the flash memory programming mode. To set the mode, set the VPP pin and clear the reset signal. Change the mode by using a jumper when writing the flash memory on-board. Figure 26-11. Flash Memory Programming Mode Flash memory programming mode 10 V VPP 1 2 *** n VDD VSS RESET VPP Operation mode VSS Normal operation mode 10 V Flash memory programming mode 26.6.3 Selecting communication mode In the V850ES/KF1 a communication mode is selected by inputting pulses (up to 8 pulses) to the VPP pin after the flash memory programming mode is entered. These VPP pulses are generated by the flash programmer. The following table shows the relationship between the number of pulses and communication modes. Table 26-4. Communication Modes VPP Pulse Communication Mode Remark 0 CSI00 V850ES/KF1 operates as slave with MSB first. 3 CSI00 + HS V850ES/KF1 operates as slave with MSB first. 8 UART0 Communication rate: 9600 bps (after reset), LSB first Other RFU Setting prohibited Caution When UART0 is selected, the receive clock is calculated based on the reset command sent from the dedicated flash programmer after the VPP pulse has been received. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 705 CHAPTER 26 FLASH MEMORY (TWO POWER) 26.6.4 Communication commands The V850ES/KF1 communicates with the flash programmer by using commands. The signals sent from the flash programmer to the V850ES/KF1 are called "commands", and the commands sent from the V850ES/KF1 to the flash programmer are called "response commands". Figure 26-12. Communication Commands Command XXXXXX XXXX STATVE PG-FP4 (Flash Pro4) XXXXX XXX YYY XXXX YYYY Axxxx Bxxxxx Cxxxxxx Response command V850ES/KF1 Flash programmer The flash memory control commands of the V850ES/KF1 are listed in the table below. All these commands are issued from the programmer and the V850ES/KF1 performs processing corresponding to the respective commands. Table 26-5. Flash Memory Control Commands Classification Command Name Verify Function Compares the contents of the entire memory Batch verify command with the input data. Erase Batch erase command Erases the contents of the entire memory. Blank check Batch blank check command Checks the erasure status of the entire memory. Data write High-speed write command Writes data by specifying the write address and number of bytes to be written, and executes a verify check. Writes data from the address following that of Successive write command the high-speed write command executed immediately before, and executes a verify check. System setting, control Status read command Obtains the operation status Oscillation frequency setting command Sets the oscillation frequency Erase time setting command Sets the erase time for batch erase Write time setting command Sets the write time for writing data Baud rate setting command Sets the baud rate when UART is used Silicon signature command Reads the silicon signature information Reset command Escapes from each status The V850ES/KF1 returns a response command for the command issued by the dedicated flash programmer. The response commands sent from the V850ES/KF1 are listed below. Table 26-6. Response Commands Command Name 706 Function ACK Acknowledges command/data. NAK Acknowledges illegal command/data. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD <R> CHAPTER 27 ON-CHIP DEBUG FUNCTION The V850ES/KF1 is not provided with an on-chip debug function. However, a pseudo on-chip debug function can be realized by using the on-chip debug emulator (MINICUBE(R)) and debug adapter (QB-V850ESKX1-DA). 27.1 ROM Security Function 27.1.1 Security ID The flash memory versions of the V850ES/KF1 perform authentication using a 10-byte ID code to prevent the contents of the flash memory from being read by an unauthorized person during on-chip debugging by the on-chip debug emulator. Set the ID code in the 10-byte on-chip flash memory area from 0000070H to 0000079H to allow the debugger perform ID authentication. If the IDs match, the security is released and reading flash memory and using the on-chip debug emulator are enabled. * Set the 10-byte ID code to 0000070H to 0000079H. * Bit 7 of 0000079H is the on-chip debug emulator enable flag. (0: Disable, 1: Enable) * When the on-chip debug emulator is started, the debugger requests ID input. When the ID code input on the debugger and the ID code set in 0000070H to 0000079H match, the debugger starts. * Debugging cannot be performed if the on-chip debug emulator enable flag is 0, even if the ID codes match. 0000079H Security ID (10 bytes) 0000070H 0000000H Caution When the data in the flash memory has been deleted, all the bits are set to 1. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 707 CHAPTER 27 ON-CHIP DEBUG FUNCTION 27.1.2 Setting The following shows how to set the ID code as shown in Table 27-1. When the ID code is set as shown in Table 27-1, the ID code input in the configuration dialog box of the ID850QB is "123456789ABCDEF123D4" (not case-sensitive). Table 27-1. ID Code Address Value 0x70 0x12 0x71 0x34 0x72 0x56 0x73 0x78 0x74 0x9A 0x75 0xBC 0x76 0xDE 0x77 0XF1 0x78 0x23 0x79 0xD4 The ID code can be specified for the device file that supports the CA850 Ver. 2.60 or later and the security ID by the PM+ linker option setting. 708 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 27 ON-CHIP DEBUG FUNCTION [Program example (when using CA850 Ver. 2.60 or later)] #-------------------------------------# SECURITYID (continue ILGOP handler) #-------------------------------------.section "SECURITY_ID" --Interrupt handler address 0x70 .word 0x78563412 --0-3 byte code .word 0xF1DEBC9A --4-7 byte code .hword 0xD423 --8-9 byte code Remark Add the above program example to the startup files. 27.2 Cautions (1) If a reset signal is input (from the target system or a reset signal from an internal reset source) during RUN (program execution), the break function may malfunction. (2) Even if the reset signal is masked by the mask function, the I/O buffer (port pin) may be reset if a reset signal is input from a pin. (3) Because a software breakpoint set in the internal flash memory is realized by the ROM correction function, it is made temporarily invalid by target reset or internal reset generated by watchdog timer 2. The breakpoint becomes valid again when a hardware break or forced break occurs, but a software break does not occur until then. (4) Pin reset during a break is masked and the CPU and peripheral I/O are not reset. If pin reset or internal reset is generated as soon as the flash memory is read by the RAM monitor function while the user program is being executed, the CPU and peripheral I/O may not be correctly reset. (5) ROM correction cannot be emulated. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 709 <R> CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (256 KB MASK ROM VERSION, SINGLE-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION) Mask ROM versions of 256 KB are as follows. PD703211, 703211Y Single-power flash memory versions are as follows. PD70F3210H, 70F3210HY, 70F3211H, 70F3211HY Absolute Maximum Ratings (TA = 25C) (1/2) Parameter Supply voltage Input voltage Symbol Conditions Ratings Unit VDD VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 -0.3 to +6.5 V AVREF0 VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 -0.3 to +6.5 V EVDD VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 -0.3 to +6.5 V VSS VSS = EVSS = AVSS -0.3 to +0.3 V AVSS VSS = EVSS = AVSS -0.3 to +0.3 V EVSS VSS = EVSS = AVSS -0.3 to +0.3 VI1 P00 to P06, P30 to P35, P38, P39, P40 to P42, V -0.3 to EVDD + 0.3 Note V P50 to P55, P90, P91, P96 to P99, P913 to P915, PCM0 to PCM3, PCS0, PCS1, PCT0, PCT1, PCT4, PCT6, PDL0 to PDL15, RESET, FLMD0 VI2 Analog input voltage VIAN X1, X2, XT1, XT2 P70 to P77 -0.3 to VDD + 0.3 Note -0.3 to AVREF0 + 0.3 Note V V Note Be sure not to exceed the absolute maximum ratings (MAX. value) of each supply voltage. Cautions 1. Do not directly connect the output (or I/O) pins of IC products to each other, or to VDD, VCC, and GND. Open-drain pins or open-collector pins, however, can be directly connected to each other. Direct connection of the output pins between an IC product and an external circuit is possible, if the output pins can be set to the high-impedance state and the output timing of the external circuit is designed to avoid output conflict. 2. Product quality may suffer if the absolute maximum rating is exceeded even momentarily for any parameter. That is, the absolute maximum ratings are rated values at which the product is on the verge of suffering physical damage, and therefore the product must be used under conditions that ensure that the absolute maximum ratings are not exceeded. The ratings and conditions indicated for DC characteristics and AC characteristics represent the quality assurance range during normal operation. 710 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (256 KB MASK ROM VERSION, SINGLE-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION) Absolute Maximum Ratings (TA = 25C) (2/2) Parameter Symbol Output current, low IOL Conditions Ratings Unit 20 mA 30 mA Total of all pins: 70 mA 35 mA Note Per pin -10 P00 to P06, P30 to P35, P40 to P42 Total of all pins: -60 mA -30 Per pin Note P38, P39 P00 to P06, P30 to P35, P38, P39, P40 to P42 P50 to P55, P90, P91, P96 to P99, P913 to P915, PCM0 to PCM3, PCS0, PCS1, PCT0, PCT1, PCT4, PCT6, PDL0 to PDL15 Output current, high IOH P50 to P55, P90, P91, P96 to P99, P913 to P915, PCM0 to PCM3, PCS0, PCS1, PCT0, PCT1, PCT4, PCT6, PDL0 to PDL15 Operating ambient temperature TA Storage temperature Tstg 35 mA -30 mA Normal operation mode -40 to +85 C Flash memory programming mode -40 to +85 C Mask ROM versions -65 to +150 C Flash memory versions -40 to +125 C Note P00 to P06, P30 to P35, P40 to P42, P50 to P55, P90, P91, P96 to P99, P913 to P915, PCM0 to PCM3, PCS0, PCS1, PCT0, PCT1, PCT4, PCT6, PDL0 to PDL15 Cautions 1. Do not directly connect the output (or I/O) pins of IC products to each other, or to VDD, VCC, and GND. Open-drain pins or open-collector pins, however, can be directly connected to each other. Direct connection of the output pins between an IC product and an external circuit is possible, if the output pins can be set to the high-impedance state and the output timing of the external circuit is designed to avoid output conflict. 2. Product quality may suffer if the absolute maximum rating is exceeded even momentarily for any parameter. That is, the absolute maximum ratings are rated values at which the product is on the verge of suffering physical damage, and therefore the product must be used under conditions that ensure that the absolute maximum ratings are not exceeded. The ratings and conditions indicated for DC characteristics and AC characteristics represent the quality assurance range during normal operation. Capacitance (TA = 25C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V) Parameter Symbol Input capacitance CI I/O capacitance CIO Conditions fX = 1 MHz Unmeasured pins returned to 0 V MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit P70 to P77 15 pF Note 15 pF P38, P39 20 pF Note P00 to P06, P30 to P35, P40 to P42, P50 to P55, P90, P91, P96 to P99, P913 to P915, PCM0 to PCM3, PCS0, PCS1, PCT0, PCT1, PCT4, PCT6, PDL0 to PDL15 Remark fX: Main clock oscillation frequency User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 711 CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (256 KB MASK ROM VERSION, SINGLE-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION) PLL Characteristics (TA = -40 to +85C, VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V) Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit Input frequency fX 2 5 MHz Output frequency fXX 8 20 MHz Lock time tPLL 200 s MAX. Unit After VDD reaches 2.7 V (MIN.) Operating Conditions (TA = -40 to +85C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V, CL = 50 pF) Parameter Symbol Internal system clock fCLK Conditions In PLL mode frequency MIN. TYP. REGC = VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V 0.25 20 MHz REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 0.25 16 MHz REGC = 10 F, 0.25 16 MHz 0.25 10 MHz 0.0625 10 MHz 10 MHz VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V In clock-through REGC = 10 F, mode VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V Operating with 0.0625 Note 32.768 kHz subclock Note REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V or REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V Internal System Clock Frequency vs. Supply Voltage 100 Internal system clock frequency fCLK [MHz] When REGC = 10 F 20.0 16.0 10.0 1.0 0.1 0.032 0.01 2.0 2.5 2.7 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 Supply voltage VDD [V] 712 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 5.0 5.5 6.0 CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (256 KB MASK ROM VERSION, SINGLE-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION) Operating Conditions for EEPROM Emulation (TA = -40 to +85C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V, CL = 50 pF) Parameter Symbol Internal system clock fCLK Conditions In PLL mode MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit REGC = VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V 0.25 16 MHz REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 0.25 12 MHz REGC = 10 F, 0.25 6 MHz REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V 0.25 6 MHz In clock-through REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 0.0625 10 MHz mode REGC = 10 F, 0.0625 6 MHz 0.0625 6 MHz frequency VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V Operating with Notes 1, 2 32.768 kHz subclock Notes 1. REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V or REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 2. Do not stop the main clock. Internal System Clock Frequency vs. Supply Voltage 100 Internal system clock frequency fCLK [MHz] When REGC = 10 F 20.0 16.0 10.0 6.0 1.0 0.1 0.032 0.01 2.0 2.5 2.7 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 Supply voltage VDD [V] User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 713 CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (256 KB MASK ROM VERSION, SINGLE-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION) Main Clock Oscillator Characteristics (1) Crystal resonator, ceramic resonator (TA = -40 to +85C, VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V) Recommended Circuit Parameter Oscillation Conditions In PLL mode frequency (fX) X1 Note 1 MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit REGC = VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V 2 5 MHz REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 2 4 MHz REGC = 10 F, 2 4 MHz VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V X2 REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V 2 2.5 MHz In clock REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V 2 10 MHz through mode REGC = 10 F, 2 10 MHz VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V Oscillation After reset is stabilization released 15 OSTS0 = 1 2 /fX s Note 3 s Note 2 time After STOP mode is released Notes 1. Indicates only oscillator characteristics. 2. Time required to stabilize the resonator after reset or STOP mode is released. 3. The value differs depending on the OSTS register settings. (2) External clock (TA = -40 to +85C, REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V) Recommended Circuit Parameter Input X1 X2 Conditions In PLL mode frequency (fX) Note In clock External clock MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit REGC = VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V 2 5 MHz REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 2 4 MHz REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V 2 2.5 MHz REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V 2 10 MHz through mode Note The duty ratio of the input waveform must be within 50% 5%. Cautions 1. When using the main clock oscillator, wire as follows in the area enclosed by the broken lines in the above figures to avoid an adverse effect from wiring capacitance. * Keep the wiring length as short as possible. * Do not cross the wiring with the other signal lines. * Do not route the wiring near a signal line through which a high fluctuating current flows. * Always make the ground point of the oscillator capacitor the same potential as VSS. * Do not ground the capacitor to a ground pattern through which a high current flows. * Do not fetch signals from the oscillator. 2. When the main clock is stopped and the device is operating on the subclock, wait until the oscillation stabilization time has been secured by the program before switching back to the main clock. 3. When REGC = 10 F, the supply voltage to the oscillator is the on-chip regulator output (3.6 V (TYP.)). However, the supply voltage to the oscillator is VDD in the following modes. * After reset (except during WDTRES1 and oscillation stabilization time) * In STOP mode * In Sub-IDLE mode 714 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (256 KB MASK ROM VERSION, SINGLE-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION) Subclock Oscillator Characteristics (1) Crystal resonator (TA = -40 to +85C, VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V) Recommended Circuit Parameter Conditions Oscillation XT1 XT2 MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit 32 32.768 35 kHz frequency Note 1 (fXT) Oscillation 10 s stabilization time Note 2 Notes 1. Indicates only oscillator characteristics. 2. Time required from when VDD reaches oscillation voltage range (2.7 V (MIN.)) to when the crystal resonator stabilizes. (2) External clock (TA = -40 to +85C, REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V) Recommended Circuit XT1 XT2 Parameter Input Conditions REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V MIN. TYP. 32 MAX. Unit 35 kHz frequency Note (fXT) External clock Note The duty ratio of the input waveform must be within 50% 5%. Cautions 1. When using the subclock oscillator, wire as follows in the area enclosed by the broken lines in the above figures to avoid an adverse effect from wiring capacitance. * Keep the wiring length as short as possible. * Do not cross the wiring with the other signal lines. * Do not route the wiring near a signal line through which a high fluctuating current flows. * Always make the ground point of the oscillator capacitor the same potential as VSS. * Do not ground the capacitor to a ground pattern through which a high current flows. * Do not fetch signals from the oscillator. 2. The subclock oscillator is designed as a low-amplitude circuit for reducing power consumption, and is more prone to malfunction due to noise than the main clock oscillator. Particular care is therefore required with the wiring method when the subclock is used. 3. When REGC = 10 F, the supply voltage to the oscillator is the on-chip regulator output (3.6 V (TYP.)). However, the supply voltage to the oscillator is VDD in the following modes. * After reset (except during WDTRES1 and oscillation stabilization time) * In STOP mode * In Sub-IDLE mode User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 715 CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (256 KB MASK ROM VERSION, SINGLE-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION) DC Characteristics (TA = -40 to +85C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V) (1/5) Parameter Output current, Symbol Conditions MIN. Per pin for P00 to P06, P30 to P35, P40 to P42, P50 to IOH1 high TYP. MAX. Unit -5.0 mA P55, P90, P91, P96 to P99, P913 to P915, PCM0 to PCM3, PCS0, PCS1, PCT0, PCT1, PCT4, PCT6, PDL0 to PDL15 Total of P00 to P06, P30 to P35, EVDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V -30 mA P40 to P42 EVDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V -15 mA Total of P50 to P55, P90, P91, P96 EVDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V -30 mA to P99, P913 to P915, PCM0 to EVDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V -15 mA 10 mA EVDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 15 mA EVDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V 8 mA PCM3, PCS0, PCS1, PCT0, PCT1, PCT4, PCT6, PDL0 to PDL15 Output current, Per pin for P00 to P06, P30 to P35, P40 to P42, P50 to IOL1 low P55, P90, P91, P96 to P99, P913 to P915, PCM0 to PCM3, PCS0, PCS1, PCT0, PCT1, PCT4, PCT6, PDL0 to PDL15 Per pin for P38, P39 Total of P00 to P06, P30 to P35, P40 to P42 30 mA Total of P38, P39, P50 to P55, P90, P91, P96 to P99, 30 mA P913 to P915, PCM0 to PCM3, PCS0, PCS1, PCT0, PCT1, PCT4, PCT6, PDL0 to PDL15 Input voltage, VIH1 Note 1 0.7EVDD EVDD V high VIH2 Note 2 0.8EVDD EVDD V VIH3 P70 to P77 0.7AVREF0 AVREF0 V VIH4 X1, X2, XT1, XT2 VDD - 0.5 VDD V Input voltage, VIL1 Note 1 EVSS 0.3EVDD V low VIL2 Note 2 EVSS 0.2EVDD V P70 to P77 AVSS 0.3AVREF0 V VSS 0.4 V Note 3 VIL3 Note 3 VIL4 X1, X2, XT1, XT2 Notes 1. P00, P01, P30, P41, P98, PCM0 to PCM3, PCS0, PCS1, PCT0, PCT1, PCT4, PCT6, PDL0 to PDL15 and their alternate-function pins. 2. RESET, FLMD0, P02 to P06, P31 to P35, P38, P39, P40, P42, P50 to P55, P90, P91, P96, P97, P99, P913 to P915 and their alternate-function pins. 3. When the external clock is used. 716 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (256 KB MASK ROM VERSION, SINGLE-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION) DC Characteristics (TA = -40 to +85C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V) (2/5) Parameter Output voltage, high Symbol VOH1 Conditions MAX. Unit EVDD - 1.0 EVDD V EVDD - 0.5 EVDD V 0 0.8 V 0 2.0 V 0 1.0 V 0 1.0 V VIN = VDD 3.0 A Note 1 MIN. IOH = -2.0 mA, TYP. EVDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V Note 2 IOH = -0.1 mA, EVDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V Output voltage, low VOL1 Note 3 VOL2 P38, P39 IOL = 2.0 mA Note 4 IOL = 15 mA, EVDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V IOL = 8 mA, EVDD = 3.0 to 5.5 V IOL = 5 mA, EVDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V Input leakage current, high ILIH Input leakage current, low ILIL VIN = 0 V -3.0 A Output leakage current, high ILOH VO = VDD 3.0 A Output leakage current, low ILOL VO = 0 V -3.0 A Pull-up resistor RL VIN = 0 V 100 k 10 30 Notes 1. Total of P00 to P06, P30 to P35, P40 to P42 and their alternate-function pins: IOH = -30 mA, total of P50 to P55, P90, P91, P96 to P99, P913 to P915, PCM0 to PCM3, PCS0, PCS1, PCT0, PCT1, PCT4, PCT6, PDL0 to PDL15 and their alternate-function pins: IOH = -30 mA. 2. Total of P00 to P06, P30 to P35, P40 to P42 and their alternate-function pins: IOH = -15 mA, total of P50 to P55, P90, P91, P96 to P99, P913 to P915, PCM0 to PCM3, PCS0, PCS1, PCT0, PCT1, PCT4, PCT6, PDL0 to PDL15 and their alternate-function pins: IOH = -15 mA. 3. Total of P00 to P06, P30 to P35, P40 to P42 and their alternate-function pins: IOL = 30 mA, total of P38, P39, P50 to P55, P90, P91, P96 to P99, P913 to P915, PCM0 to PCM3, PCS0, PCS1, PCT0, PCT1, PCT4, PCT6, PDL0 to PDL15 and their alternate-function pins: IOL = 30 mA. 4. Refer to IOL1 for IOL of P38 and P39. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 717 CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (256 KB MASK ROM VERSION, SINGLE-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION) DC Characteristics (TA = -40 to +85C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V) (3/5) Parameter Supply current Symbol Note 1 IDD1 Conditions MIN. TYP. Note 2 MAX. Unit 55 75 mA 34 50 mA 18 37 mA 29 43 mA 17 31 mA 10 17 mA 2.1 3.3 mA 1.5 2.7 mA 1.5 2.7 mA 250 420 A 20 75 A Subclock oscillating 15 60 A Subclock stopped (XT1 = VSS, PSMR.XTSTP bit 0.1 30 A 55 75 mA 34 50 mA 18 37 mA Normal operation mode (all peripheral functions operating) (PD70F3211H, fXX = 20 MHz (fX = 5 MHz) (in PLL mode) PD70F3211HY) REGC = VDD = 5 V 10% fXX = 16 MHz (fX = 4 MHz) (in PLL mode) VDD = 5 V 10%, REGC = 10 F fXX = 10 MHz (in clock-through mode) REGC = VDD = 3 V 10% IDD2 HALT mode (all peripheral functions operating) fXX = 20 MHz (fX = 5 MHz) (in PLL mode) REGC = VDD = 5 V 10% fXX = 16 MHz (fX = 4 MHz) (in PLL mode) VDD = 5 V 10%, REGC = 10 F fXX = 10 MHz (in clock-through mode) REGC = VDD = 3 V 10% IDD3 IDLE mode (watch timer operating) fX = 5 MHz (when PLL mode off) REGC = VDD = 5 V 10% fX = 4 MHz (when PLL mode off) VDD = 5 V 10%, REGC = 10 F fX = 10 MHz (in clock-through mode) REGC = VDD = 3 V 10% IDD4 Subclock operation mode (fXT = 32.768 kHz) Main oscillation stopped IDD5 Sub-IDLE mode (fXT = 32.768 kHz) Watch timer operating, main oscillation stopped IDD6 STOP mode = 1) IDD7 Flash memory erase/write (TA = -40 to +85C) fXX = 20 MHz (fX = 5 MHz) (in PLL mode) REGC = VDD = 5 V 10% fXX = 16 MHz (fX = 4 MHz) (in PLL mode) VDD = 5 V 10%, REGC = 10 F fXX = 10 MHz (in clock-through mode) REGC = VDD = 3 V 10% Notes 1. Total current of VDD and EVDD (all ports stopped). AVREF0 is not included. 2. TYP. values are formed using the following voltage. VDD = 5.0 V when VDD = 5 V 10% VDD = 3.0 V when VDD = 3 V 10% Remark fXX: Main clock frequency fX: Main clock oscillation frequency fXT: Subclock frequency 718 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (256 KB MASK ROM VERSION, SINGLE-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION) DC Characteristics (TA = -40 to +85C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V) (4/5) Parameter Supply current Symbol Note 1 IDD1 Conditions MIN. TYP. Note 2 MAX. Unit 51 70 mA 32 47 mA 17 34 mA 25 38 mA 15 28 mA 9 15 mA 1.8 2.9 mA 1.4 2.4 mA 1.4 2.4 mA 240 400 A 20 75 A Subclock oscillating 15 60 A Subclock stopped (XT1 = VSS, PSMR.XTSTP bit 0.1 30 A 51 70 mA 32 47 mA 17 34 mA Normal operation mode (all peripheral functions operating) (PD70F3210H, fXX = 20 MHz (fX = 5 MHz) (in PLL mode) PD70F3210HY) REGC = VDD = 5 V 10% fXX = 16 MHz (fX = 4 MHz) (in PLL mode) VDD = 5 V 10%, REGC = 10 F fXX = 10 MHz (in clock-through mode) REGC = VDD = 3 V 10% IDD2 HALT mode (all peripheral functions operating) fXX = 20 MHz (fX = 5 MHz) (in PLL mode) REGC = VDD = 5 V 10% fXX = 16 MHz (fX = 4 MHz) (in PLL mode) VDD = 5 V 10%, REGC = 10 F fXX = 10 MHz (in clock-through mode) REGC = VDD = 3 V 10% IDD3 IDLE mode (watch timer operating) fX = 5 MHz (when PLL mode off) REGC = VDD = 5 V 10% fX = 4 MHz (when PLL mode off) VDD = 5 V 10%, REGC = 10 F fX = 10 MHz (in clock-through mode) REGC = VDD = 3 V 10% IDD4 Subclock operation mode (fXT = 32.768 kHz) Main oscillation stopped IDD5 Sub-IDLE mode (fXT = 32.768 kHz) Watch timer operating, main oscillation stopped IDD6 STOP mode = 1) IDD7 Flash memory erase/write (TA = -40 to +85C) fXX = 20 MHz (fX = 5 MHz) (in PLL mode) REGC = VDD = 5 V 10% fXX = 16 MHz (fX = 4 MHz) (in PLL mode) VDD = 5 V 10%, REGC = 10 F fXX = 10 MHz (in clock-through mode) REGC = VDD = 3 V 10% Notes 1. Total current of VDD and EVDD (all ports stopped). AVREF0 is not included. 2. TYP. values are formed using the following voltage. VDD = 5.0 V when VDD = 5 V 10% VDD = 3.0 V when VDD = 3 V 10% Remark fXX: Main clock frequency fX: Main clock oscillation frequency fXT: Subclock frequency User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 719 CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (256 KB MASK ROM VERSION, SINGLE-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION) DC Characteristics (TA = -40 to +85C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V) (5/5) Parameter Supply current Symbol Note 1 IDD1 Conditions MIN. TYP. Note 2 MAX. Unit 44 65 mA 26 44 mA 13 26 mA 29 40 mA 16 29 mA 8 16 mA 1.7 2.7 mA 1.2 2.0 mA 1.2 2.0 mA 100 220 A 20 75 A Subclock oscillating 15 60 A Subclock stopped (XT1 = VSS, PSMR.XTSTP bit 0.1 30 A Normal operation mode (all peripheral functions operating) (PD703211, fXX = 20 MHz (fX = 5 MHz) (in PLL mode) PD703211Y) REGC = VDD = 5 V 10% fXX = 16 MHz (fX = 4 MHz) (in PLL mode) VDD = 5 V 10%, REGC = 10 F fXX = 10 MHz (in clock-through mode) REGC = VDD = 3 V 10% IDD2 HALT mode (all peripheral functions operating) fXX = 20 MHz (fX = 5 MHz) (in PLL mode) REGC = VDD = 5 V 10% fXX = 16 MHz (fX = 4 MHz) (in PLL mode) VDD = 5 V 10%, REGC = 10 F fXX = 10 MHz (in clock-through mode) REGC = VDD = 3 V 10% IDD3 IDLE mode (watch timer operating) fX = 5 MHz (when PLL mode off) REGC = VDD = 5 V 10% fX = 4 MHz (when PLL mode off) VDD = 5 V 10%, REGC = 10 F fX = 10 MHz (in clock-through mode) REGC = VDD = 3 V 10% IDD4 Subclock operation mode (fXT = 32.768 kHz) Main oscillation stopped IDD5 Sub-IDLE mode (fXT = 32.768 kHz) Watch timer operating, main oscillation stopped IDD6 STOP mode = 1) Notes 1. Total current of VDD and EVDD (all ports stopped). AVREF0 is not included. 2. TYP. values are formed using the following voltage. VDD = 5.0 V when VDD = 5 V 10% VDD = 3.0 V when VDD = 3 V 10% Remark fXX: Main clock frequency fX: Main clock oscillation frequency fXT: Subclock frequency 720 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (256 KB MASK ROM VERSION, SINGLE-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION) Data Retention Characteristics STOP Mode (TA = -40 to +85C) Parameter Symbol Data retention voltage VDDDR STOP release signal input time tDREL Conditions MIN. STOP mode TYP. 2.0 MAX. Unit 5.5 V s 0 Caution Shifting to STOP mode and restoring from STOP mode must be performed within the rated operating range. STOP mode setting Operating voltage lower limit VDD STOP release signal input VDDDR tDREL RESET (input) STOP mode release interrupt (NMI, etc.) (Released by falling edge) STOP mode release interrupt (NMI, etc.) (Released by rising edge) User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 721 CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (256 KB MASK ROM VERSION, SINGLE-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION) AC Characteristics AC Test Input Measurement Points (VDD, AVREF0, EVDD) VDD VIH VIH Measurement points 0V VIL VIL AC Test Output Measurement Points VOH VOH Measurement points VOL VOL Load Conditions DUT (Device under measurement) CL = 50 pF Caution If the load capacitance exceeds 50 pF due to the circuit configuration, bring the load capacitance of the device to 50 pF or less by inserting a buffer or by some other means. 722 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (256 KB MASK ROM VERSION, SINGLE-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION) CLKOUT Output Timing (TA = -40 to +85C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V, CL = 50 pF) Parameter Symbol Output cycle tCYK <1> High-level width tWKH <2> Low-level width Rise time Fall time tWKL <3> tKR <4> tKF <5> Conditions MIN. MAX. 50 ns 30.6 s Unit VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V tCYK/2 - 17 ns VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V tCYK/2 - 26 ns VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V tCYK/2 - 17 ns VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V tCYK/2 - 26 ns VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 17 ns VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V 26 ns VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 17 ns VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V 26 ns Clock Timing <1> <2> <3> CLKOUT (output) <4> User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD <5> 723 CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (256 KB MASK ROM VERSION, SINGLE-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION) Bus Timing (1) In read/write cycle (a) Read/write cycle (CLKOUT asynchronous) (TA = -40 to +85C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 4.0 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V, CL = 50 pF) (1/2) Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. MAX. Unit Address setup time (to ASTB) tSAST <6> (0.5 + tASW)T - 23 ns Address hold time (from ASTB) tHSTA <7> (0.5 + tAHW)T - 15 ns Delay time from RD to address float tFRDA <8> 16 Data input setup time from address tSAID <9> (2 + n + tASW + tAHW)T - 40 ns Data input setup time from RD tSRID <10> (1 + n)T - 25 ns Delay time from ASTB to RD, WRm tDSTRDWR <11> (0.5 + tAHW)T - 20 ns Data input hold time (from RD) tHRDID <12> 0 ns Address output time from RD tDRDA <13> (1 + i)T - 16 ns Delay time from RD, WRm to ASTB tDRDWRST <14> 0.5T - 10 ns Delay time from RD to ASTB tDRDST <15> (1.5 + i + tASW)T - 10 ns RD, WRm low-level width tWRDWRL <16> (1 + n)T - 10 ns (1 + i + tASW)T - 25 ns ASTB high-level width tWSTH <17> Data output time from WRm tDWROD <18> Data output setup time (to WRm) tSODWR <19> (1 + n)T - 25 ns Data output hold time (from WRm) tHWROD <20> T - 15 ns WAIT setup time (to address) tSAWT1 <21> tSAWT2 <22> tHAWT1 <23> tHAWT2 <24> WAIT hold time (from address) WAIT setup time (to ASTB) WAIT hold time (from ASTB) tSSTWT1 <25> tSSTWT2 <26> tHSTWT1 <27> tHSTWT2 <28> ns 20 n1 n1 (1.5 + tASW + tAHW)T - 45 ns (1.5 + n + tASW + tAHW)T - 45 ns (0.5 + n + tASW + tAHW)T ns (1.5 + n + tASW + tAHW)T ns n1 n1 ns (1 + tAHW)T - 32 ns (1 + n + tAHW)T - 32 ns (n + tAHW)T ns (1 + n + tAHW)T ns Remarks 1. tASW: Number of address setup wait clocks (0 or 1) tAHW: Number of address hold wait clocks (0 or 1) 2. T = 1/fCPU (fCPU: CPU operating clock frequency) 3. n: Number of wait clocks inserted in the bus cycle The sampling timing changes when a programmable wait is inserted. 4. m = 0, 1 5. i: Number of idle states inserted after a read cycle (0 or 1) 6. The values in the above specifications are values for when clocks with a 1:1 duty ratio are input from X1. 724 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (256 KB MASK ROM VERSION, SINGLE-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION) (TA = -40 to +85C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V, CL = 50 pF) (2/2) Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. MAX. Unit Address setup time (to ASTB) tSAST <6> (0.5 + tASW)T - 42 ns Address hold time (from ASTB) tHSTA <7> (0.5 + tAHW)T - 30 ns Delay time from RD to address float tFRDA <8> 32 Data input setup time from address tSAID <9> (2 + n + tASW + tAHW)T - 72 ns Data input setup time from RD tSRID <10> (1 + n)T - 40 ns Delay time from ASTB to RD, WRm tDSTRDWR <11> (0.5 + tAHW)T - 35 ns Data input hold time (from RD) tHRDID <12> 0 ns Address output time from RD tDRDA <13> (1 + i)T - 32 ns Delay time from RD, WRm to ASTB tDRDWRST <14> 0.5T - 20 ns Delay time from RD to ASTB tDRDST <15> (1.5 + i + tASW)T - 20 ns RD, WRm low-level width tWRDWRL <16> (1 + n)T - 20 ns (1 + i + tASW)T - 50 ns ASTB high-level width tWSTH <17> Data output time from WRm tDWROD <18> Data output setup time (to WRm) tSODWR <19> (1 + n)T - 40 ns Data output hold time (from WRm) tHWROD <20> T - 30 ns WAIT setup time (to address) tSAWT1 <21> tSAWT2 <22> tHAWT1 <23> tHAWT2 <24> WAIT hold time (from address) WAIT setup time (to ASTB) WAIT hold time (from ASTB) tSSTWT1 <25> tSSTWT2 <26> tHSTWT1 <27> tHSTWT2 <28> ns 35 n1 n1 (1.5 + tASW + tAHW)T - 80 ns (1.5 + n + tASW + tAHW)T - 80 ns (0.5 + n + tASW + tAHW)T ns (1.5 + n + tASW + tAHW)T ns n1 n1 ns (1 + tAHW)T - 60 ns (1 + n + tAHW)T - 60 ns (n + tAHW)T ns (1 + n + tAHW)T ns Caution Set the following in accordance with the usage conditions of the CPU operating clock frequency (k = 0, 1). * 70 ns < 1/fCPU < 84 ns Set an address setup wait (AWC.ASWk bit = 1). * 62.5 ns < 1/fCPU < 70 ns Set an address setup wait (ASWk bit = 1) and address hold wait (AWC.AHWk bit = 1). Remarks 1. tASW: Number of address setup wait clocks (0 or 1) tAHW: Number of address hold wait clocks (0 or 1) 2. T = 1/fCPU (fCPU: CPU operating clock frequency) 3. n: Number of wait clocks inserted in the bus cycle The sampling timing changes when a programmable wait is inserted. 4. m = 0, 1 5. i: Number of idle states inserted after a read cycle (0 or 1) 6. The values in the above specifications are values for when clocks with a 1:1 duty ratio are input from X1. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 725 CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (256 KB MASK ROM VERSION, SINGLE-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION) Read Cycle (CLKOUT Asynchronous) T1 T2 TW T3 CLKOUT (output) CS0, CS1 (output) <9> AD0 to AD15 (I/O) Hi-Z Address <6> Data <7> <12> ASTB (output) <17> <14> <8> <11> <10> <13> <15> RD (output) <16> <25> <27> <26> <28> WAIT (input) <21> <23> <22> <24> Remark WR0 and WR1 are high level. 726 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (256 KB MASK ROM VERSION, SINGLE-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION) Write Cycle (CLKOUT Asynchronous) T1 T2 TW T3 CLKOUT (output) CS0, CS1 (output) AD0 to AD15 (I/O) Address <6> ASTB (output) Data <7> <17> <18> <11> <14> <19> <20> WR0 (output), WR1 (output) <16> <25> <27> <26> <28> WAIT (input) <21> <23> <22> <24> Remark RD is high level. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 727 CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (256 KB MASK ROM VERSION, SINGLE-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION) (b) Read/write cycle (CLKOUT synchronous) (TA = -40 to +85C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 4.0 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V, CL = 50 pF) (1/2) Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. MAX. Unit Delay time from CLKOUT to address tDKA <29> 0 19 ns Delay time from CLKOUT to address tFKA <30> 0 14 ns Delay time from CLKOUT to ASTB tDKST <31> 0 23 ns Delay time from CLKOUT to RD, WRm tDKRDWR <32> -22 0 Data input setup time (to CLKOUT) tSIDK <33> 15 ns Data input hold time (from CLKOUT) tHKID <34> 0 ns Data output delay time from CLKOUT tDKOD <35> WAIT setup time (to CLKOUT) tSWTK <36> 15 ns WAIT hold time (from CLKOUT) tHKWT <37> 0 ns float 19 ns ns Remarks 1. m = 0, 1 2. The values in the above specifications are values for when clocks with a 1:1 duty ratio are input from X1. (TA = -40 to +85C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V, CL = 50 pF) (2/2) Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. MAX. Unit Delay time from CLKOUT to address tDKA <29> 0 19 ns Delay time from CLKOUT to address tFKA <30> 0 18 ns Delay time from CLKOUT to ASTB tDKST <31> 0 55 ns Delay time from CLKOUT to RD, WRm tDKRDWR <32> -22 0 ns Data input setup time (to CLKOUT) tSIDK <33> 30 Data input hold time (from CLKOUT) tHKID <34> 0 Data output delay time from CLKOUT tDKOD <35> WAIT setup time (to CLKOUT) tSWTK <36> 25 ns WAIT hold time (from CLKOUT) tHKWT <37> 0 ns float ns ns 19 ns Remarks 1. m = 0, 1 2. The values in the above specifications are values for when clocks with a 1:1 duty ratio are input from X1. 728 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (256 KB MASK ROM VERSION, SINGLE-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION) Read Cycle (CLKOUT Synchronous) T1 T2 TW T3 CLKOUT (output) <29> CS0, CS1 (output) <33> <34> <30> AD0 to AD15 (I/O) Hi-Z Address Data <31> <31> ASTB (output) <32> <32> RD (output) WAIT (input) <36> Remark <37> <36> <37> WR0 and WR1 are high level. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 729 CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (256 KB MASK ROM VERSION, SINGLE-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION) Write Cycle (CLKOUT Synchronous) T1 T2 TW T3 CLKOUT (output) <29> CS0, CS1 (output) <35> AD0 to AD15 (I/O) Address Data <31> <31> ASTB (output) WR0 (output), WR1 (output) <32> <32> WAIT (input) <36> Remark 730 <37> <36> RD is high level. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD <37> CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (256 KB MASK ROM VERSION, SINGLE-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION) (2) Bus hold (a) CLKOUT asynchronous (TA = -40 to +85C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 4.0 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V, CL = 50 pF) (1/2) Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. MAX. Unit HLDRQ high-level width tWHQH <78> T + 10 ns HLDAK low-level width tWHAL <79> T - 15 ns Delay time from HLDAK to bus output tDHAC <80> -40 ns Delay time from HLDRQ to HLDAK tDHQHA1 <81> Delay time from HLDRQ to HLDAK tDHQHA2 <82> 0.5T (2n + 7.5)T + 40 ns 1.5T + 40 ns Remarks 1. T = 1/fCPU (fCPU: CPU operating clock frequency) 2. n: Number of wait clocks inserted in the bus cycle The sampling timing changes when a programmable wait is inserted. 3. The values in the above specifications are values for when clocks with a 1:1 duty ratio are input from X1. (TA = -40 to +85C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V, CL = 50 pF) (2/2) Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. MAX. Unit HLDRQ high-level width tWHQH <78> T + 10 ns HLDAK low-level width tWHAL <79> T - 15 ns Delay time from HLDAK to bus output tDHAC <80> -80 Delay time from HLDRQ to HLDAK tDHQHA1 <81> Delay time from HLDRQ to HLDAK tDHQHA2 <82> 0.5T ns (2n + 7.5)T + 70 ns 1.5T + 70 ns Remarks 1. T = 1/fCPU (fCPU: CPU operating clock frequency) 2. n: Number of wait clocks inserted in the bus cycle The sampling timing changes when a programmable wait is inserted. 3. The values in the above specifications are values for when clocks with a 1:1 duty ratio are input from X1. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 731 CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (256 KB MASK ROM VERSION, SINGLE-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION) Bus Hold (CLKOUT Asynchronous) TI TH TH TH TI CLKOUT (output) <78> HLDRQ (input) <82> <81> HLDAK (output) <79> Address bus (output) Data bus (I/O) Hi-Z Hi-Z CS0, CS1 (output) Hi-Z ASTB (output) Hi-Z RD (output), WR0 (output), WR1 (output) 732 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD <80> CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (256 KB MASK ROM VERSION, SINGLE-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION) (b) CLKOUT synchronous (TA = -40 to +85C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 4.0 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V, CL = 50 pF) (1/2) Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. MAX. Unit HLDRQ setup time (to CLKOUT) tSHQK <83> 15 ns HLDRQ hold time (from CLKOUT) tHKHQ <84> 0 ns Delay time from CLKOUT to bus float tDKF <85> 20 ns Delay time from CLKOUT to HLDAK tDKHA <86> 20 ns Remark The values in the above specifications are values for when clocks with a 1:1 duty ratio are input from X1. (TA = -40 to +85C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V, CL = 50 pF) (2/2) Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. MAX. Unit HLDRQ setup time (to CLKOUT) tSHQK <83> 25 ns HLDRQ hold time (from CLKOUT) tHKHQ <84> 0 ns Delay time from CLKOUT to bus float tDKF <85> 40 ns Delay time from CLKOUT to HLDAK tDKHA <86> 40 ns Remark The values in the above specifications are values for when clocks with a 1:1 duty ratio are input from X1. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 733 CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (256 KB MASK ROM VERSION, SINGLE-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION) Bus Hold (CLKOUT Synchronous) T2 T3 TI TH TH TH TI CLKOUT (output) <83> <83> <84> HLDRQ (input) <86> <86> HLDAK (output) <85> Address bus (output) Data bus (I/O) Hi-Z Hi-Z CS0, CS1 (output) Hi-Z ASTB (output) Hi-Z RD (output), WR0 (output), WR1 (output) 734 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (256 KB MASK ROM VERSION, SINGLE-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION) Basic Operation (1) Reset/external interrupt timing (TA = -40 to +85C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V, CL = 50 pF) Parameter RESET low-level width Symbol tWRSL1 <87> tWRSL2 <88> Conditions Reset in power-on status MAX. Unit 2 s 2 s tVR > 150 s 10 s tVR 150 s 40 s Power-on reset when REGC = VDD Note MIN. NMI high-level width tWNIH <89> Analog noise elimination 1 s NMI low-level width tWNIL <90> Analog noise elimination 1 s INTPn high-level width tWITH <91> n = 0 to 6 (analog noise elimination) 600 ns INTPn low-level width tWITL <92> n = 0 to 6 (analog noise elimination) 600 ns Note Power-on reset when REGC = 10 F Remarks 1. tVR: Time required for VDD to rise from 0 V to 4.0 V (= operation lower-limit voltage) 2. The above specification shows the pulse width that is accurately detected as a valid edge. If a pulse narrower than the above specification is input, therefore, it may also be detected as a valid edge. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 735 CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (256 KB MASK ROM VERSION, SINGLE-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION) Reset/Interrupt VDD tVR <88> <87> RESET (input) <89>/<91> NMI (input) INTPn (input) Remark n = 0 to 6 736 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD <90>/<92> CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (256 KB MASK ROM VERSION, SINGLE-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION) Timer Timing (TA = -40 to +85C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V, CL = 50 pF) Parameter TI0n high-level width Symbol tTI0H <93> Conditions REGC = VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, MIN. MAX. Unit 2Tsmp0 + 100 Note 1 ns 2Tsmp0 + 200 Note 1 ns 2Tsmp0 + 100 Note 1 ns 2Tsmp0 + 200 Note 1 ns REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V TI0n low-level width tTI0L <94> REGC = VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V TI5m high-level width tTI5H <95> REGC = VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V 50 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 100 ns REGC = VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V 50 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 100 ns REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V TI5m low-level width tTI5L <96> REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V TIP0m high-level width tTIPH <97> REGC = VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V np x Tsmpp + 100 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, np x Tsmpp + 200 ns REGC = VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V np x Tsmpp + 100 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, np x Tsmpp + 200 ns Note 2 Note 2 REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V TIP0m low-level width tTIPL <98> Note 2 Note 2 REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V Notes 1. Tsmp0: Timer 0 count clock cycle However, Tsmp0 = 4/fXX when TI0n is used as an external event count input. 2. np: Number of sampling clocks set by the PmNFC.PmNFSTS bit Tsmpp: Digital noise elimination sampling clock cycle of TIP0m pin If TIP00 is used as an external event count input or an external trigger input, however, Tsmpp = 0 (digital noise is not eliminated). Remarks 1. n = 00, 01, 10, 11 m = 0, 1 2. The above specification shows the pulse width that is accurately detected as a valid edge. If a pulse narrower than the above specification is input, therefore, it may also be detected as a valid edge. Timer Input Timing <93>/<95>/<97> <94>/<96>/<98> TI0n (input) TI5m (input) TIP0m (input) Remark n = 00, 01, 10, 11 m = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 737 CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (256 KB MASK ROM VERSION, SINGLE-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION) UART Timing (TA = -40 to +85C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V, CL = 50 pF) Parameter Symbol Conditions MAX. Unit 312.5 kbps REGC = VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V 12 MHz REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 6 MHz Transmit rate ASCK0 frequency REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V 738 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD MIN. CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (256 KB MASK ROM VERSION, SINGLE-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION) CSI0 Timing (1) Master mode (TA = -40 to +85C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V, CL = 50 pF) Parameter SCK0n cycle time Symbol tKCY1 Conditions <99> MIN. MAX. Unit REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 200 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 400 ns tKCY1/2 - 30 ns REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 30 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 50 ns REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 30 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 50 ns REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V SCK0n high-/low-level width tKH1, tKL1 <100> SI0n setup time (to SCK0n) tSIK1 <101> REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V SI0n hold time (from SCK0n) tKSI1 <102> REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V Delay time from SCK0n to SO0n tKSO1 <103> output REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 30 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 60 ns MAX. Unit REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V Remark n = 0, 1 (2) Slave mode (TA = -40 to +85C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V, CL = 50 pF) Parameter SCK0n cycle time Symbol tKCY2 Conditions <99> MIN. REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 200 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 400 ns REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 45 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 90 ns REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 30 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 60 ns REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 30 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 60 ns REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V SCK0n high-/low-level width tKH2, tKL2 <100> REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V SI0n setup time (to SCK0n) tSIK2 <101> REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V SI0n hold time (from SCK0n) tKSI2 <102> REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V Delay time from SCK0n to SO0n output tKSO2 <103> REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 50 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 100 ns REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V Remark n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 739 CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (256 KB MASK ROM VERSION, SINGLE-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION) (a) CSICn.CKPn, DAPn bits = 00 or 11 <99> <100> <100> SCK0n (I/O) <101> <102> Hi-Z SI0n (input) Hi-Z Input data <103> Output data SO0n (output) (b) CSICn.CKPn, DAPn bits = 01 or 10 <99> <100> <100> SCK0n (I/O) <101> <102> Hi-Z SI0n (input) Hi-Z Input data <103> SO0n (output) Remark 740 Output data n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (256 KB MASK ROM VERSION, SINGLE-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION) CSIA Timing (1) Master mode (TA = -40 to +85C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V, CL = 50 pF) Parameter SCKA0 cycle time Symbol tKCY3 Conditions <104> MIN. MAX. Unit REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 500 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 1000 ns tKCY3/2 - 30 ns REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 30 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 60 ns REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 30 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 60 ns REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V SCKA0 high-/low-level width tKH3, <105> tKL3 SIA0 setup time (to SCKA0) tSIK3 <106> REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V SIA0 hold time (from SCKA0) tKSI3 <107> REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V Delay time from SCKA0 to SOA0 tKSO3 <108> output REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 30 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 60 ns MAX. Unit REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V (2) Slave mode (TA = -40 to +85C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V, CL = 50 pF) Parameter SCKA0 cycle time Symbol tKCY4 Conditions <104> MIN. REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 840 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 1700 ns tKCY4/2 - 30 ns REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 50 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 100 ns REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V SCKA0 high-/low-level width tKH4, tKL4 <105> SIA0 setup time (to SCKA0) tSIK4 <106> REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V SIA0 hold time (from SCKA0) tKSI4 <107> REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V tCY x 2 + 15 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, tCY x 2 + 30 ns Note Note REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V Delay time from SCKA0 to SOA0 output tKSO4 <108> REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V tCY x 2 + 30 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, tCY x 2 + 60 ns Note Note REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V Note tCY: fSCKA cycle User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 741 CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (256 KB MASK ROM VERSION, SINGLE-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION) <104> <105> <105> SCKA0 (I/O) <106> <107> Hi-Z Hi-Z SIA0 (input) Input data <108> Output data SOA0 (output) 742 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (256 KB MASK ROM VERSION, SINGLE-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION) I2C Bus Mode (Y Products (Products with On-Chip I2C) Only) (TA = -40 to +85C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V, CL = 50 pF) Parameter Symbol Normal Mode High-Speed Mode Unit MIN. MAX. MIN. MAX. 0 100 0 400 kHz SCL0 clock frequency fCLK Bus free time tBUF <109> 4.7 - 1.3 - s tHD:STA <110> 4.0 - 0.6 - s SCL0 clock low-level width tLOW <111> 4.7 - 1.3 - s SCL0 clock high-level width tHIGH <112> 4.0 - 0.6 - s Setup time for start/restart tSU:STA <113> 4.7 - 0.6 - s tHD:DAT <114> 5.0 - - - s (Between start and stop conditions) Hold time Note 1 conditions CBUS compatible Data hold time master 2 I C mode Data setup time SDA0 and SCL0 signal rise time 0 tSU:DAT tR - Note 2 <115> 250 <116> - 0 - 1000 Note 2 0.9 Note 3 s - ns Note 5 300 ns Note 5 300 ns Note 4 100 20 + 0.1Cb SDA0 and SCL0 signal fall time tF <117> - 300 Stop condition setup time tSU:STO <118> 4.0 - 0.6 - s Pulse width of spike suppressed by tSP <119> - - 0 50 ns - 400 - 400 pF 20 + 0.1Cb input filter Capacitance load of each bus line Cb Notes 1. At the start condition, the first clock pulse is generated after the hold time. 2. The system requires a minimum of 300 ns hold time internally for the SDA0 signal (at VIHmin. of SCL0 signal) in order to occupy the undefined area at the falling edge of SCL0. 3. If the system does not extend the SCL0 signal low hold time (tLOW), only the maximum data hold time (tHD:DAT) needs to be satisfied. 4. The high-speed mode I2C bus can be used in the normal-mode I2C bus system. In this case, set the highspeed mode I2C bus so that it meets the following conditions. * If the system does not extend the SCL0 signal's low state hold time: tSU:DAT 250 ns * If the system extends the SCL0 signal's low state hold time: Transmit the following data bit to the SDA0 line prior to the SCL0 line release (tRmax. + tSU:DAT = 1000 + 250 = 1250 ns: Normal mode I2C bus specification). 5. Cb: Total capacitance of one bus line (unit: pF) User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 743 CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (256 KB MASK ROM VERSION, SINGLE-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION) I2C Bus Mode (Y Products (Products with On-Chip I2C) Only) <111> <112> SCL0 (I/O) <117> <116> <114> <115> <113> <110> <119> <118> <110> SDA0 (I/O) <109> Stop condition 744 <116> <117> Start condition Restart condition User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD Stop condition CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (256 KB MASK ROM VERSION, SINGLE-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION) A/D Converter (TA = -40 to +85C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V) Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit 10 10 10 bit 4.0 AVREF0 5.5 V 0.2 0.4 %FSR 2.7 AVREF0 4.0 V 0.3 0.6 %FSR Resolution Note 1 Overall error AINL Conversion time tCONV Note 1 Zero-scale error Full-scale error Ezs Note 1 Non-linearity error Efs Note 2 Differential linearity error ILE Note 2 DLE Analog input voltage VIAN AVREF0 current IAREF0 4.0 AVREF0 5.5 V 14.0 100 s 2.7 AVREF0 4.0 V 17.0 100 s 4.0 AVREF0 5.5 V 0.4 %FSR 2.7 AVREF0 4.0 V 0.6 %FSR 4.0 AVREF0 5.5 V 0.4 %FSR 2.7 AVREF0 4.0 V 0.6 %FSR 4.0 AVREF0 5.5 V 2.5 LSB 2.7 AVREF0 4.0 V 4.5 LSB 4.0 AVREF0 5.5 V 1.5 LSB 2.7 AVREF0 4.0 V 2.0 LSB AVREF0 V 1.3 2.5 mA 1.0 10 A 0 When using A/D converter Note 3 When not using A/D converter Notes 1. Excluding quantization error (0.05 %FSR). 2. Excluding quantization error (0.5 LSB). 3. ADM.ADCS bit = 0, ADM.ADCS2 bit = 0 Remark LSB: Least Significant Bit FSR: Full Scale Range User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 745 CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (256 KB MASK ROM VERSION, SINGLE-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION) Flash Memory Programming Characteristics (TA = -40 to +85C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V, CL = 50 pF) (1) Basic characteristics Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit Programming operation REGC = VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V 2 20 MHz frequency REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 2 16 MHz REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 2 16 MHz REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V 2 10 MHz 2.7 5.5 V Supply voltage VDD Number of rewrites CERWR Programming temperature tPRG Note 100 -40 Times +85 C Note When writing initially to shipped products, it is counted as one rewrite for both "erase to write" and "write only". Example (P: Write, E: Erase) PEPEP: 3 rewrites Shipped product Shipped product E PEPEP: 3 rewrites (2) Serial write operation characteristics Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. Setup time from VDD to FLMD0 tDP <120> 10 ms Time from RESET to FLMD0 pulse tRP <121> 66611.2/fX FLMD0 pulse high-/low-level width tPW <122> 10 FLMD0 pulse rise time tR FLMD0 pulse fall time tF TYP. MAX. Unit 3s s input start 100 s <123> 50 ns <124> 50 ns Serial Write Operation Timing VDD FLMD0 <120> FLMD1 <122> <122> <123> <124> 0V RESET <121> 746 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS (MASK ROM VERSION OF 128 KB OR LESS AND TWOPOWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION), (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) Standard products are as follows. PD703208, 703208Y, 703209, 703209Y, 703210, 703210Y, 70F3210, 70F3210Y (A) grade products are as follows. PD703208(A), 703208Y(A), 703209(A), 703209Y(A), 703210(A), 703210Y(A), 70F3210(A) , 70F3210Y(A) User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 747 CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS (MASK ROM VERSION OF 128 KB OR LESS AND TWO-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION), (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) Absolute Maximum Ratings (TA = 25C) (1/2) Parameter Symbol Supply voltage Conditions Ratings Unit VDD VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 -0.3 to +6.5 V VPP Flash memory version, Note 1 -0.3 to +10.5 V VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 -0.3 to +6.5 V EVDD VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 -0.3 to +6.5 V VSS VSS = EVSS = AVSS -0.3 to +0.3 V AVSS VSS = EVSS = AVSS -0.3 to +0.3 V EVSS VSS = EVSS = AVSS -0.3 to +0.3 AVREF0 Input voltage VI1 V -0.3 to EVDD + 0.3 P00 to P06, P30 to P35, P38, P39, P40 to P42, Note 2 V P50 to P55, P90, P91, P96 to P99, P913 to P915, PCM0 to PCM3, PCS0, PCS1, PCT0, PCT1, PCT4, PCT6, PDL0 to PDL15, RESET VI2 Analog input voltage VIAN -0.3 to VDD + 0.3 Note 2 X1, X2, XT1, XT2 -0.3 to AVREF0 + 0.3 Note 2 P70 to P77 V V Notes 1. Make sure that the following conditions of the VPP voltage application timing are satisfied when the flash memory is written. * When supply voltage rises VPP must exceed VDD 15 s or more after VDD has reached the lower-limit value (2.7 V) of the operating voltage range (see a in the figure below). * When supply voltage drops VDD must be lowered 10 s or more after VPP falls below the lower-limit value (2.7 V) of the operating voltage range of VDD (see b in the figure below). VDD 2.7 V 0V a b VPP 2.7 V 0V 2. Be sure not to exceed the absolute maximum ratings (MAX. value) of each supply voltage. 748 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS (MASK ROM VERSION OF 128 KB OR LESS AND TWO-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION), (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) Absolute Maximum Ratings (TA = 25C) (2/2) Parameter Symbol Output current, low IOL Conditions Per pin Note P38, P39 Ratings Unit 20 mA 30 mA 35 mA P00 to P06, P30 to P35, P38, P39, Total of all P40 to P42 pins: P50 to P55, P90, P91, P96 to P99, 70 mA 35 mA Note Per pin -10 mA P00 to P06, P30 to P35, P40 to P42 Total of all -30 mA P50 to P55, P90, P91, P96 to P99, pins: mA -60 mA -30 P913 to P915, PCM0 to PCM3, -40 to +85 C Mask ROM version -65 to +150 C Flash memory version -40 to +125 C P913 to P915, PCM0 to PCM3, PCS0, PCS1, PCT0, PCT1, PCT4, PCT6, PDL0 to PDL15 Output current, high IOH PCS0, PCS1, PCT0, PCT1, PCT4, PCT6, PDL0 to PDL15 Operating ambient TA temperature Storage temperature Tstg Note P00 to P06, P30 to P35, P40 to P42, P50 to P55, P90, P91, P96 to P99, P913 to P915, PCM0 to PCM3, PCS0, PCS1, PCT0, PCT1, PCT4, PCT6, PDL0 to PDL15 Cautions 1. Do not directly connect the output (or I/O) pins of IC products to each other, or to VDD, VCC, and GND. Open-drain pins or open-collector pins, however, can be directly connected to each other. Direct connection of the output pins between an IC product and an external circuit is possible, if the output pins can be set to the high-impedance state and the output timing of the external circuit is designed to avoid output conflict. 2. Product quality may suffer if the absolute maximum rating is exceeded even momentarily for any parameter. That is, the absolute maximum ratings are rated values at which the product is on the verge of suffering physical damage, and therefore the product must be used under conditions that ensure that the absolute maximum ratings are not exceeded. The ratings and conditions indicated for DC characteristics and AC characteristics represent the quality assurance range during normal operation. Capacitance (TA = 25C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V) Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit Input capacitance CI fX = 1 MHz P70 to P77 15 pF I/O capacitance CIO Unmeasured pins Note 15 pF P38, P39 20 pF returned to 0 V Note P00 to P06, P30 to P35, P40 to P42, P50 to P55, P90, P91, P96 to P99, P913 to P915, PCM0 to PCM3, PCS0, PCS1, PCT0, PCT1, PCT4, PCT6, PDL0 to PDL15 Remark fX: Main clock oscillation frequency User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 749 CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS (MASK ROM VERSION OF 128 KB OR LESS AND TWO-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION), (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) PLL Characteristics (TA = -40 to +85C, VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V) Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit Input frequency fX 2 5 MHz Output frequency fXX 8 20 MHz Lock time tPLL 200 s MAX. Unit After VDD reaches 2.7 V (MIN.) Operating Conditions (TA = -40 to +85C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V, CL = 50 pF) Parameter Symbol Internal system clock fCLK Conditions In PLL mode frequency MIN. TYP. REGC = VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V 0.25 20 MHz REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 0.25 16 MHz REGC = 10 F, 0.25 16 MHz 0.25 10 MHz 0.0625 10 MHz 10 MHz VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V In clock-through REGC = 10 F, mode VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V Operating with 0.0625 Note 32.768 kHz subclock Note REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V or REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V Internal System Clock Frequency vs. Supply Voltage 100 Internal system clock frequency fCLK [MHz] When REGC = 10 F 20.0 16.0 10.0 1.0 0.1 0.032 0.01 2.0 2.5 2.7 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 Supply voltage VDD [V] 750 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 5.0 5.5 6.0 CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS (MASK ROM VERSION OF 128 KB OR LESS AND TWO-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION), (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) Main Clock Oscillator Characteristics (1) Crystal resonator, ceramic resonator (TA = -40 to +85C, VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V) Recommended Circuit Parameter Oscillation Conditions PLL mode MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit REGC = VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V 2 5 MHz REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 2 4 MHz REGC = 10 F 2 4 MHz REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V 2 2.5 MHz Clock-through mode REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V 2 10 MHz 2 10 MHz Note 1 frequency (fX) X1 VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V X2 REGC = 10 F VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V Oscillation After reset is stabilization released time 15 When OSTS0 = 1 2 /fX s Note 3 s Note 2 After STOP mode is released Notes 1. Indicates only oscillator characteristics. 2. Time required to stabilize the resonator after reset or STOP mode is released. 3. The value differs depending on the OSTS register settings. (2) External clock (TA = -40 to +85C, REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V) Recommended Circuit X1 X2 Parameter Input frequency (fX) Conditions PLL mode MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit REGC = VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V 2 5 MHz REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 2 4 MHz REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V 2 2.5 MHz Clock-through mode REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V 2 10 MHz Note External clock Note Make sure that the duty ratio of the input waveform is within 50% 5%. Cautions 1. When using the main clock oscillator, wire as follows in the area enclosed by the broken lines in the above figures to avoid an adverse effect from wiring capacitance. * Keep the wiring length as short as possible. * Do not cross the wiring with the other signal lines. * Do not route the wiring near a signal line through which a high fluctuating current flows. * Always make the ground point of the oscillator capacitor the same potential as VSS. * Do not ground the capacitor to a ground pattern through which a high current flows. * Do not fetch signals from the oscillator. 2. When the main clock is stopped and the device is operating on the subclock, wait until the oscillation stabilization time has been secured by the program before switching back to the main clock. 3. When REGC = 10 F, the supply voltage to the oscillator is the on-chip regulator output (3.6 V (TYP.)). However, the supply voltage to the oscillator is VDD in the following modes. * After reset (except during WDTRES1 and oscillation stabilization time) * In STOP mode * In Sub-IDLE mode User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 751 CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS (MASK ROM VERSION OF 128 KB OR LESS AND TWO-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION), (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) (i) Murata Manufacturing Co., Ltd.: Ceramic resonator (TA = -40 to +85C) Manufacturer Product Name Type Oscillation Recommended Circuit Constant Oscillation Voltage Frequency Range fXX (MHz) C1 (pF) C2 (pF) Rd (k) MIN. (V) MAX. (V) Murata Mfg. CSTCC2M00G56-R0 SMD 2.000 47 47 0 2.7 5.5 Co., Ltd. CSTCC3M00G56-R0 SMD 3.000 47 47 0 2.7 5.5 CSTCR4M00G55-R0 SMD 4.000 39 39 0 2.7 5.5 47 47 0 2.7 5.5 39 39 0 2.7 5.5 47 47 0 2.7 5.5 10 10 0 2.7 5.5 15 15 0 2.7 5.5 CSTLS4M00G56-B0 CSTCR5M00G55-R0 SMD 5.000 CSTLS5M00G56-B0 CSTCE10M0G52-R0 SMD 10.000 CSTLS10M0G53-B0 CSTCC2M00G56A-R0 SMD 2.000 47 47 0 2.7 5.5 CSTCC3M00G56A-R0 SMD 3.000 47 47 0 2.7 5.5 CSTCR4M00G55A-R0 SMD 4.000 39 39 0 2.7 5.5 CSTCR5M00G55A-R0 SMD 5.000 39 39 0 2.7 5.5 CSTCE10M0G52A-R0 SMD 10.000 10 10 0 2.7 5.5 Caution This oscillator constant is a reference value based on evaluation under a specific environment by the resonator manufacturer. If optimization of oscillator characteristics is necessary in the actual application, apply to the resonator manufacturer for evaluation on the implementation circuit. The oscillation voltage and oscillation frequency indicate only oscillator characteristics. Use the V850ES/KF1 so that the internal operating conditions are within the specifications of the DC and AC characteristics. 752 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS (MASK ROM VERSION OF 128 KB OR LESS AND TWO-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION), (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) Subclock Oscillator Characteristics (1) Crystal resonator (TA = -40 to +85C, VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V) Recommended Circuit XT1 XT2 Parameter Conditions Oscillation MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit 32 32.768 35 kHz Note 1 frequency (fXT) Oscillation 10 s stabilization time Note 2 Notes 1. Indicates only oscillator characteristics. 2. Time required from when VDD reaches oscillation voltage range (2.7 V (MIN.)) to when the crystal resonator stabilizes. (2) External clock (TA = -40 to +85C, REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V) Recommended Circuit XT1 XT2 Parameter Input frequency Conditions REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V MIN. 32 TYP. MAX. Unit 35 kHz Note (fXT) External clock Note The duty ratio of the input waveform must be within 50% 5%. Cautions 1. When using the subclock oscillator, wire as follows in the area enclosed by the broken lines in the above figures to avoid an adverse effect from wiring capacitance. * Keep the wiring length as short as possible. * Do not cross the wiring with the other signal lines. * Do not route the wiring near a signal line through which a high fluctuating current flows. * Always make the ground point of the oscillator capacitor the same potential as VSS. * Do not ground the capacitor to a ground pattern through which a high current flows. * Do not fetch signals from the oscillator. 2. The subclock oscillator is designed as a low-amplitude circuit for reducing power consumption, and is more prone to malfunction due to noise than the main clock oscillator. Particular care is therefore required with the wiring method when the subclock is used. 3. When REGC = 10 F, the supply voltage to the oscillator is the on-chip regulator output (3.6 V (TYP.)). However, the supply voltage to the oscillator is VDD in the following modes. * After reset (except during WDTRES1 and oscillation stabilization time) * In STOP mode * In Sub-IDLE mode User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 753 CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS (MASK ROM VERSION OF 128 KB OR LESS AND TWO-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION), (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) DC Characteristics (TA = -40 to +85C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V) (1/4) Parameter Output current, high Symbol Conditions MIN. Per pin for P00 to P06, P30 to P35, P40 to IOH1 TYP. MAX. Unit -5.0 mA P42, P50 to P55, P90, P91, P96 to P99, P913 to P915, PCM0 to PCM3, PCS0, PCS1, PCT0, PCT1, PCT4, PCT6, PDL0 to PDL15 Total of P00 to P06, P30 EVDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V -30 mA to P35, P40 to P42 EVDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V -15 mA Total of P50 to P55, EVDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V -30 mA P90, P91, P96 to P99, EVDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V -15 mA 10 mA EVDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 15 mA EVDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V 8 mA Total of P00 to P06, P30 to P35, P40 to P42 30 mA Total of P38, P39, P50 to P55, P90, P91, P96 30 mA P913 to P915, PCM0 to PCM3, PCS0, PCS1, PCT0, PCT1, PCT4, PCT6, PDL0 to PDL15 Output current, low Per pin for P00 to P06, P30 to P35, P40 to IOL1 P42, P50 to P55, P90, P91, P96 to P99, P913 to P915, PCM0 to PCM3, PCS0, PCS1, PCT0, PCT1, PCT4, PCT6, PDL0 to PDL15 Per pin for P38, P39 to P99, P913 to P915, PCM0 to PCM3, PCS0, PCS1, PCT0, PCT1, PCT4, PCT6, PDL0 to PDL15 Input voltage, high VIH1 Note 1 0.7EVDD EVDD V VIH2 Note 2 0.8EVDD EVDD V VIH3 P70 to P77 0.7AVREF0 AVREF0 V VIH4 X1, X2, XT1, XT2 VDD - 0.5 VDD V VIL1 Note 1 EVSS 0.3EVDD V VIL2 Note 2 EVSS 0.2EVDD V P70 to P77 AVSS 0.3AVREF0 V VSS 0.4 V Note 3 Input voltage, low VIL3 Note 3 VIL4 X1, X2, XT1, XT2 Notes 1. P00, P01, P30, P41, P98, PCM0 to PCM3, PCS0, PCS1, PCT0, PCT1, PCT4, PCT6, PDL0 to PDL15 and their alternate-function pins. 2. RESET, P02 to P06, P31 to P35, P38, P39, P40, P42, P50 to P55, P90, P91, P96, P97, P99, P913 to P915 and their alternate-function pins. 3. When the external clock is used 754 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS (MASK ROM VERSION OF 128 KB OR LESS AND TWO-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION), (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) DC Characteristics (TA = -40 to +85C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V) (2/4) Parameter Output voltage, high Symbol VOH1 Conditions MAX. Unit EVDD - 1.0 EVDD V EVDD - 0.5 EVDD V 0 0.8 V 0 2.0 V 0 1.0 V 0 1.0 V VIN = VDD 3.0 A Note 1 MIN. IOH = -2.0 mA, TYP. EVDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V Note 2 IOH = -0.1 mA, EVDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V Output voltage, low VOL1 Note 3 VOL2 P38, P39 IOL = 2.0 mA Note 4 IOL = 15 mA, EVDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V IOL = 8 mA, EVDD = 3.0 to 5.5 V IOL = 5 mA, EVDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V Input leakage current, high ILIH Input leakage current, low ILIL VIN = 0 V -3.0 A Output leakage current, high ILOH VO = VDD 3.0 A Output leakage current, low ILOL VO = 0 V -3.0 A Pull-up resistor RL VIN = 0 V 100 k 10 30 Notes 1. Total of P00 to P06, P30 to P35, P40 to P42 and their alternate-function pins: IOH = -30 mA, total of P50 to P55, P90, P91, P96 to P99, P913 to P915, PCM0 to PCM3, PCS0, PCS1, PCT0, PCT1, PCT4, PCT6, PDL0 to PDL15 and their alternate-function pins: IOH = -30 mA. 2. Total of P00 to P06, P30 to P35, P40 to P42 and their alternate-function pins: IOH = -15 mA, total of P50 to P55, P90, P91, P96 to P99, P913 to P915, PCM0 to PCM3, PCS0, PCS1, PCT0, PCT1, PCT4, PCT6, PDL0 to PDL15 and their alternate-function pins: IOH = -15 mA. 3. Total of P00 to P06, P30 to P35, P40 to P42 and their alternate-function pins: IOL = 30 mA, total of P38, P39, P50 to P55, P90, P91, P96 to P99, P913 to P915, PCM0 to PCM3, PCS0, PCS1, PCT0, PCT1, PCT4, PCT6, PDL0 to PDL15 and their alternate-function pins: IOL = 30 mA. 4. Refer to IOL1 for IOL of P38 and P39. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 755 CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS (MASK ROM VERSION OF 128 KB OR LESS AND TWO-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION), (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) DC Characteristics (TA = -40 to +85C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V) (3/4) Parameter Supply current Note Symbol IDD1 (flash memory version) Conditions Normal fXX = 20 MHz (fX = 5 MHz) operation (in PLL mode) MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit 43 60 mA 27 40 mA 14 29 mA 18 28 mA 11 20 mA 6 11 mA 1200 2000 A 900 1600 A 900 1600 A 190 320 A 15 60 A 0.1 30 A REGC = VDD = 5 V 10% fXX = 16 MHz (fX = 4 MHz) (in PLL mode) REGC = 10 F VDD = 5 V 10% fXX = 10 MHz (fX = 10 MHz) REGC = VDD = 3 V 10% IDD2 HALT fXX = 20 MHz (fX = 5 MHz) mode (in PLL mode) REGC = VDD = 5 V 10% fXX = 16 MHz (fX = 4 MHz) (in PLL mode) REGC = 10 F VDD = 5 V 10% fXX = 10 MHz (fX = 10 MHz) REGC = VDD = 3 V 10% IDD3 IDLE mode fX = 5 MHz (when PLL mode off) REGC = VDD = 5 V 10% fX = 4 MHz (when PLL mode off) REGC = 10 F VDD = 5 V 10% fX = 10 MHz (when PLL mode off) REGC = VDD = 3 V 10% IDD4 Subclock fXT = 32.768 kHz operating Main clock stopped mode IDD5 Subclock fXT = 32.768 kHz IDLE mode Main clock stopped, watch timer operating IDD6 STOP Subclock stopped (XT1 = VSS, mode when PSMR.XTSTP bit = 1) Note Total current of VDD and EVDD (all ports stopped). AVREF0 is not included. Remark fXX: Main clock frequency fX: Main clock oscillation frequency fXT: Subclock frequency 756 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS (MASK ROM VERSION OF 128 KB OR LESS AND TWO-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION), (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) DC Characteristics (TA = -40 to +85C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V) (4/4) Parameter Supply current Note 1 Symbol IDD1 (mask ROM version) Conditions MIN. Normal fXX = 20 MHz (fX = 5 MHz) operation (in PLL mode) TYP. MAX. Unit 30 45 mA 18 30 mA 9 18 mA 17 25 mA 10 18 mA 5 10 mA 900 1400 A 600 1000 A 600 1000 A 70 160 A 15 60 A 0.1 30 A REGC = VDD = 5 V 10% fXX = 16 MHz (fX = 4 MHz) (in PLL mode) REGC = 10 F VDD = 5 V 10% fXX = 10 MHz (fX = 10 MHz) REGC = VDD = 3 V 10% IDD2 fXX = 20 MHz (fX = 5 MHz) HALT mode (in PLL mode) REGC = VDD = 5 V 10% fXX = 16 MHz (fX = 4 MHz) (in PLL mode) REGC = 10 F VDD = 5 V 10% fXX = 10 MHz (fX = 10 MHz) REGC = VDD = 3 V 10% IDD3 fX = 5 MHz IDLE mode (when PLL mode off) REGC = VDD = 5 V 10% Note 2 fX = 4 MHz (when PLL mode off) REGC = 10 F VDD = 5 V 10% fX = 10 MHz (when PLL mode off) REGC = VDD = 3 V 10% IDD4 IDD5 Subclock fXT = 32.768 kHz operating mode Main clock stopped Subclock IDLE fXT = 32.768 kHz mode Main clock stopped, watch timer operating IDD6 Subclock stopped (XT1 = VSS, STOP mode when PSMR.XTSTP bit = 1) Notes 1. Total current of VDD and EVDD (all ports stopped). AVREF0 is not included. 2. When the capacitance of the capacitor in the oscillator is 15 pF. Remark fXX: Main clock frequency fX: Main clock oscillation frequency fXT: Subclock frequency User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 757 CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS (MASK ROM VERSION OF 128 KB OR LESS AND TWO-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION), (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) Data Retention Characteristics STOP Mode (TA = -40 to +85C) Parameter Symbol Data retention voltage VDDDR STOP release signal input time tDREL Conditions MIN. STOP mode TYP. 2.0 MAX. Unit 5.5 V s 0 Caution Shifting to STOP mode and restoring from STOP mode must be performed within the rated operating range. STOP mode setting Operating voltage lower limit VDD VDDDR RESET (input) STOP mode release interrupt (NMI, etc.) (Released by falling edge) STOP mode release interrupt (NMI, etc.) (Released by rising edge) 758 STOP release signal input User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD tDREL CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS (MASK ROM VERSION OF 128 KB OR LESS AND TWO-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION), (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) AC Characteristics AC Test Input Measurement Points (VDD, AVREF0, EVDD) VDD VIH VIH Measurement points 0V VIL VIL AC Test Output Measurement Points VOH VOH Measurement points VOL VOL Load Conditions DUT (Device under measurement) CL = 50 pF Caution If the load capacitance exceeds 50 pF due to the circuit configuration, bring the load capacitance of the device to 50 pF or less by inserting a buffer or by some other means. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 759 CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS (MASK ROM VERSION OF 128 KB OR LESS AND TWO-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION), (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) CLKOUT Output Timing (TA = -40 to +85C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V, CL = 50 pF) Parameter Symbol Output cycle tCYK <1> High-level width tWKH <2> Low-level width Rise time Fall time tWKL <3> tKR <4> tKF <5> Conditions MIN. MAX. 50 ns 30.6 s VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V tCYK/2 - 17 ns VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V tCYK/2 - 26 ns VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V tCYK/2 - 17 ns VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V tCYK/2 - 26 ns VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 17 ns VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V 26 ns VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 17 ns VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V 26 ns Clock Timing <1> <2> <3> CLKOUT (output) <4> 760 Unit User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD <5> CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS (MASK ROM VERSION OF 128 KB OR LESS AND TWO-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION), (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) Bus Timing (1) Read/write cycle (a) Read/write cycle (CLKOUT asynchronous) (TA = -40 to +85C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 4.0 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V, CL = 50 pF) (1/2) Parameter <R> <R> Symbol Conditions MIN. MAX. Unit Address setup time (to ASTB) tSAST <6> (0.5 + tASW)T - 23 ns Address hold time (from ASTB) tHSTA <7> (0.5 + tAHW)T - 15 ns Delay time from RD to address float tFRDA <8> 16 Data input setup time from address tSAID <9> (2 + n + tASW + tAHW)T - 40 ns Data input setup time from RD tSRID <10> (1 + n)T - 25 ns Delay time from ASTB to RD, WRm tDSTRDWR <11> (0.5 + tAHW)T - 20 ns Data input hold time (from RD) tHRDID <12> 0 ns Address output time from RD tDRDA <13> (1 + i)T - 16 ns Delay time from RD, WRm to ASTB tDRDWRST <14> 0.5T - 10 ns Delay time from RD to ASTB tDRDST <15> (1.5 + i + tASW)T - 10 ns RD, WRm low-level width tWRDWRL <16> (1 + n)T - 10 ns (1 + tASW)T - 25 ns ASTB high-level width tWSTH <17> Data output time from WRm tDWROD <18> Data output setup time (to WRm) tSODWR <19> (1 + n)T - 25 ns Data output hold time (from WRm) tHWROD <20> T - 15 ns WAIT setup time (to address) tSAWT1 <21> tSAWT2 <22> tHAWT1 <23> tHAWT2 <24> WAIT hold time (from address) WAIT setup time (to ASTB) WAIT hold time (from ASTB) tSSTWT1 <25> tSSTWT2 <26> tHSTWT1 <27> tHSTWT2 <28> ns 20 n1 n1 (1.5 + tASW + tAHW)T - 45 ns (1.5 + n + tASW + tAHW)T - 45 ns (0.5 + n + tASW + tAHW)T ns (1.5 + n + tASW + tAHW)T ns n1 n1 ns (1 + tAHW)T - 32 ns (1 + n + tAHW)T - 32 ns (n + tAHW)T ns (1 + n + tAHW)T ns Remarks 1. tASW: Number of address setup wait clocks (0 or 1) tAHW: Number of address hold wait clocks (0 or 1) 2. T = 1/fCPU (fCPU: CPU operating clock frequency) 3. n: Number of wait clocks inserted in the bus cycle The sampling timing changes when a programmable wait is inserted. 4. m = 0, 1 5. i: Number of idle states inserted after a read cycle (0 or 1) 6. The values in the above specifications are values for when clocks with a 1:1 duty ratio are input from X1. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 761 CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS (MASK ROM VERSION OF 128 KB OR LESS AND TWO-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION), (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) (TA = -40 to +85C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V, CL = 50 pF) (2/2) Parameter <R> <R> Symbol Conditions MIN. MAX. Unit Address setup time (to ASTB) tSAST <6> (0.5 + tASW)T - 42 ns Address hold time (from ASTB) tHSTA <7> (0.5 + tAHW)T - 30 ns Delay time from RD to address float tFRDA <8> 32 Data input setup time from address tSAID <9> (2 + n + tASW + tAHW)T - 72 ns Data input setup time from RD tSRID <10> (1 + n)T - 40 ns Delay time from ASTB to RD, WRm tDSTRDWR <11> (0.5 + tAHW)T - 35 ns Data input hold time (from RD) tHRDID <12> 0 ns Address output time from RD tDRDA <13> (1 + i)T - 32 ns Delay time from RD, WRm to ASTB tDRDWRST <14> 0.5T - 20 ns Delay time from RD to ASTB tDRDST <15> (1.5 + i + tASW)T - 20 ns RD, WRm low-level width tWRDWRL <16> (1 + n)T - 20 ns (1 + tASW)T - 50 ns ASTB high-level width tWSTH <17> Data output time from WRm tDWROD <18> Data output setup time (to WRm) tSODWR <19> (1 + n)T - 40 ns Data output hold time (from WRm) tHWROD <20> T - 30 ns WAIT setup time (to address) tSAWT1 <21> tSAWT2 <22> tHAWT1 <23> tHAWT2 <24> WAIT hold time (from address) WAIT setup time (to ASTB) WAIT hold time (from ASTB) tSSTWT1 <25> tSSTWT2 <26> tHSTWT1 <27> tHSTWT2 <28> ns 35 n1 n1 (1.5 + tASW + tAHW)T - 80 ns (1.5 + n + tASW + tAHW)T - 80 ns (0.5 + n + tASW + tAHW)T ns (1.5 + n + tASW + tAHW)T ns n1 n1 ns (1 + tAHW)T - 60 ns (1 + n + tAHW)T - 60 ns (n + tAHW)T ns (1 + n + tAHW)T ns Caution Set the following in accordance with the usage conditions of the CPU operating clock frequency (k = 0, 1). * 70 ns < 1/fCPU < 84 ns Set an address setup wait (AWC.ASWk bit = 1). * 62.5 ns < 1/fCPU < 70 ns Set an address setup wait (ASWk bit = 1) and address hold wait (AWC.AHWk bit = 1). Remarks 1. tASW: Number of address setup wait clocks (0 or 1) tAHW: Number of address hold wait clocks (0 or 1) 2. T = 1/fCPU (fCPU: CPU operating clock frequency) 3. n: Number of wait clocks inserted in the bus cycle The sampling timing changes when a programmable wait is inserted. 4. m = 0, 1 5. i: Number of idle states inserted after a read cycle (0 or 1) 6. The values in the above specifications are values for when clocks with a 1:1 duty ratio are input from X1. 762 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS (MASK ROM VERSION OF 128 KB OR LESS AND TWO-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION), (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) Read Cycle (CLKOUT Asynchronous) T1 T2 TW T3 CLKOUT (output) CS0, CS1 (output) <9> AD0 to AD15 (I/O) Hi-Z Address <6> Data <7> <12> ASTB (output) <17> <14> <8> <11> <10> <13> <15> RD (output) <16> <25> <27> <26> <28> WAIT (input) <21> <23> <22> <24> Remark WR0 and WR1 are high level. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 763 CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS (MASK ROM VERSION OF 128 KB OR LESS AND TWO-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION), (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) Write Cycle (CLKOUT Asynchronous) T1 T2 TW T3 CLKOUT (output) CS0, CS1 (output) AD0 to AD15 (I/O) Address <6> ASTB (output) Data <7> <17> <18> <11> <14> <19> WR0 (output), WR1 (output) <16> <25> <27> <26> <28> WAIT (input) <21> <23> <22> <24> Remark 764 RD is high level. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD <20> CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS (MASK ROM VERSION OF 128 KB OR LESS AND TWO-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION), (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) (b) Read/write cycle (CLKOUT synchronous) (TA = -40 to +85C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 4.0 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V, CL = 50 pF) (1/2) Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. MAX. Unit Delay time from CLKOUT to address tDKA <29> 0 19 ns Delay time from CLKOUT to address tFKA <30> 0 14 ns Delay time from CLKOUT to ASTB tDKST <31> 0 23 ns Delay time from CLKOUT to RD, WRm tDKRDWR <32> -22 0 Data input setup time (to CLKOUT) tSIDK <33> 15 ns Data input hold time (from CLKOUT) tHKID <34> 0 ns Data output delay time from CLKOUT tDKOD <35> WAIT setup time (to CLKOUT) tSWTK <36> 15 ns WAIT hold time (from CLKOUT) tHKWT <37> 0 ns float 19 ns ns Remarks 1. m = 0, 1 2. The values in the above specifications are values for when clocks with a 1:1 duty ratio are input from X1. (TA = -40 to +85C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V, CL = 50 pF) (2/2) Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. MAX. Unit Delay time from CLKOUT to address tDKA <29> 0 19 ns Delay time from CLKOUT to address tFKA <30> 0 18 ns Delay time from CLKOUT to ASTB tDKST <31> 0 55 ns Delay time from CLKOUT to RD, WRm tDKRDWR <32> -22 0 Data input setup time (to CLKOUT) tSIDK <33> 30 ns Data input hold time (from CLKOUT) tHKID <34> 0 ns Data output delay time from CLKOUT tDKOD <35> WAIT setup time (to CLKOUT) tSWTK <36> 25 ns WAIT hold time (from CLKOUT) tHKWT <37> 0 ns float 19 ns ns Remarks 1. m = 0, 1 2. The values in the above specifications are values for when clocks with a 1:1 duty ratio are input from X1. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 765 CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS (MASK ROM VERSION OF 128 KB OR LESS AND TWO-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION), (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) Read Cycle (CLKOUT Synchronous) T1 T2 TW T3 CLKOUT (output) <29> CS0, CS1 (output) <33> <34> <30> AD0 to AD15 (I/O) Hi-Z Address Data <31> <31> ASTB (output) <32> <32> RD (output) WAIT (input) <36> Remark 766 <37> <36> WR0 and WR1 are high level. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD <37> CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS (MASK ROM VERSION OF 128 KB OR LESS AND TWO-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION), (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) Write Cycle (CLKOUT Synchronous) T1 T2 TW T3 CLKOUT (output) <29> CS0, CS1 (output) <35> AD0 to AD15 (I/O) Address Data <31> <31> ASTB (output) WR0 (output), WR1 (output) <32> <32> WAIT (input) <36> Remark <37> <36> <37> RD is high level. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 767 CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS (MASK ROM VERSION OF 128 KB OR LESS AND TWO-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION), (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) (2) Bus hold (a) CLKOUT asynchronous (TA = -40 to +85C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 4.0 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V, CL = 50 pF) (1/2) Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. MAX. Unit HLDRQ high-level width tWHQH <78> T + 10 ns HLDAK low-level width tWHAL <79> T - 15 ns Delay time from HLDAK to bus output tDHAC <80> -40 ns Delay time from HLDRQ to HLDAK tDHQHA1 <81> Delay time from HLDRQ to HLDAK tDHQHA2 <82> 0.5T (2n + 7.5)T + 40 ns 1.5T + 40 ns Remarks 1. T = 1/fCPU (fCPU: CPU operating clock frequency) 2. n: Number of wait clocks inserted in the bus cycle The sampling timing changes when a programmable wait is inserted. 3. The values in the above specifications are values for when clocks with a 1:1 duty ratio are input from X1. (TA = -40 to +85C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V, CL = 50 pF) (2/2) Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. MAX. Unit HLDRQ high-level width tWHQH <78> T + 10 ns HLDAK low-level width tWHAL <79> T - 15 ns Delay time from HLDAK to bus output tDHAC <80> -80 Delay time from HLDRQ to HLDAK tDHQHA1 <81> Delay time from HLDRQ to HLDAK tDHQHA2 <82> 0.5T ns (2n + 7.5)T + 70 ns 1.5T + 70 ns Remarks 1. T = 1/fCPU (fCPU: CPU operating clock frequency) 2. n: Number of wait clocks inserted in the bus cycle The sampling timing changes when a programmable wait is inserted. 3. The values in the above specifications are values for when clocks with a 1:1 duty ratio are input from X1. 768 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS (MASK ROM VERSION OF 128 KB OR LESS AND TWO-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION), (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) Bus Hold (CLKOUT Asynchronous) TI TH TH TH TI CLKOUT (output) <78> HLDRQ (input) <82> <81> HLDAK (output) <79> <80> Hi-Z AD0 to AD15 (I/O) Hi-Z CS0, CS1 (output) Hi-Z ASTB (output) Hi-Z RD (output), WR0 (output), WR1 (output) User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 769 CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS (MASK ROM VERSION OF 128 KB OR LESS AND TWO-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION), (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) (b) CLKOUT synchronous (TA = -40 to +85C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 4.0 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V, CL = 50 pF) (1/2) Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. MAX. Unit HLDRQ setup time (to CLKOUT) tSHQK <83> 15 ns HLDRQ hold time (from CLKOUT) tHKHQ <84> 0 ns Delay time from CLKOUT to bus float tDKF <85> 20 ns Delay time from CLKOUT to HLDAK tDKHA <86> 20 ns Remark The values in the above specifications are values for when clocks with a 1:1 duty ratio are input from X1. (TA = -40 to +85C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V, CL = 50 pF) (2/2) Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. MAX. Unit HLDRQ setup time (to CLKOUT) tSHQK <83> 25 ns HLDRQ hold time (from CLKOUT) tHKHQ <84> 0 ns Delay time from CLKOUT to bus float tDKF <85> 40 ns Delay time from CLKOUT to HLDAK tDKHA <86> 40 ns Remark The values in the above specifications are values for when clocks with a 1:1 duty ratio are input from X1. Bus Hold (CLKOUT Synchronous) T2 T3 TI TH TH TH TI CLKOUT (output) <83> <83> <84> HLDRQ (input) <86> <86> HLDAK (output) <85> Hi-Z AD0 to AD15 (I/O) Hi-Z CS0, CS1 (output) Hi-Z ASTB (output) Hi-Z RD (output), WR0 (output), WR1 (output) 770 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS (MASK ROM VERSION OF 128 KB OR LESS AND TWO-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION), (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) Basic Operation (1) Reset/external interrupt timing (TA = -40 to +85C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V, CL = 50 pF) Parameter Symbol RESET low-level width Conditions tWRSL1 <87> tWRSL2 <88> MIN. Reset in power-on status Unit 2 s 2 s tVR > 150 s 10 s tVR 150 s 40 s Power-on-reset when REGC = VDD Note MAX. NMI high-level width tWNIH <89> Analog noise elimination 1 s NMI low-level width tWNIL <90> Analog noise elimination 1 s INTPn high-level width tWITH <91> n = 0 to 6 (analog noise elimination) 600 ns INTPn low-level width tWITL <92> n = 0 to 6 (analog noise elimination) 600 ns Note Power-on-reset when REGC = 10 F Remarks 1. tVR: Time required for VDD to reach 0 V to 4.0 V (= operation lower-limit voltage) 2. The above specification shows the pulse width that is accurately detected as a valid edge. If a pulse narrower than the above specification is input, therefore, it may also be detected as a valid edge. Reset/Interrupt VDD <88> <87> tVR RESET (input) <89> <90> <91> <92> NMI (input) INTPn (input) Remark n = 0 to 6 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 771 CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS (MASK ROM VERSION OF 128 KB OR LESS AND TWO-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION), (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) <R> Timer Timing (TA = -40 to +85C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V, CL = 50 pF) Parameter TI0n high-level width Symbol tTI0H <93> Conditions REGC = VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, MIN. MAX. Unit 2Tsmp0 + 100 Note ns 2Tsmp0 + 200 Note ns 2Tsmp0 + 100 Note ns 2Tsmp0 + 200 Note ns REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V TI0n low-level width tTI0L <94> REGC = VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V TI5m high-level width tTI5H <95> REGC = VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V 50 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 100 ns REGC = VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V 50 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 100 ns REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V TI5m low-level width tTI5L <96> REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V Note Tsmp0: Timer 0 count clock cycle However, Tsmp0 = fXX/4 when TI0n is used as an external event count input. Remarks 1. n = 00, 01, 10, 11 m = 0, 1 2. The above specification shows the pulse width that is accurately detected as a valid edge. If a pulse narrower than the above specification is input, therefore, it may also be detected as a valid edge. Timer Input Timing <93>/<95> <94>/<96> TI0n (input) TI5m (input) Remark n = 00, 01, 10, 11 m = 0, 1 UART Timing (TA = -40 to +85C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V, CL = 50 pF) Parameter Symbol Conditions MAX. Unit 312.5 kbps REGC = VDD = 5 V 10% 12 MHz REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 6 MHz Transmit rate ASCK0 frequency REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V 772 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD MIN. CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS (MASK ROM VERSION OF 128 KB OR LESS AND TWO-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION), (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) CSI0 Timing (1) Master mode (TA = -40 to +85C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V, CL = 50 pF) Parameter SCK0n cycle time Symbol tKCY1 Conditions <99> MIN. MAX. Unit REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 200 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 400 ns tKCY1/2 - 30 ns REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 30 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 50 ns REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 30 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 50 ns REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V SCK0n high-/low-level width tKH1, tKL1 <100> SI0n setup time (to SCK0n) tSIK1 <101> REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V SI0n hold time (from SCK0n) tKSI1 <102> REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V Delay time from SCK0n to SO0n tKSO1 <103> output REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 30 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 60 ns MAX. Unit REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V Remark n = 0, 1 (2) Slave mode (TA = -40 to +85C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V, CL = 50 pF) Parameter SCK0n cycle time Symbol tKCY2 Conditions <99> MIN. REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 200 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 400 ns REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 45 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 90 ns REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 30 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 60 ns REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 30 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 60 ns REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V SCK0n high-/low-level width tKH2, tKL2 <100> REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V SI0n setup time (to SCK0n) tSIK2 <101> REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V SI0n hold time (from SCK0n) tKSI2 <102> REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V Delay time from SCK0n to SO0n output tKSO2 <103> REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 50 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 100 ns REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V Remark n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 773 CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS (MASK ROM VERSION OF 128 KB OR LESS AND TWO-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION), (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) (a) CSICn.CKPn, DAPn bits = 00 or 11 <99> <100> <100> SCK0n (I/O) <101> <102> Hi-Z SI0n (input) Hi-Z Input data <103> Output data SO0n (output) (b) CSICn.CKPn, DAPn bits = 01 or 10 <99> <100> <100> SCK0n (I/O) <101> <102> Hi-Z SI0n (input) Hi-Z Input data <103> SO0n (output) Remark 774 Output data n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS (MASK ROM VERSION OF 128 KB OR LESS AND TWO-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION), (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) CSIA Timing (1) Master mode (TA = -40 to +85C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V, CL = 50 pF) Parameter SCKA0 cycle time Symbol tKCY3 Conditions <104> MIN. MAX. Unit REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 500 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 1000 ns tKCY3/2 - 30 ns REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 30 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 60 ns REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 30 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 60 ns REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V SCKA0 high-/low-level width tKH3, <105> tKL3 SIA0 setup time (to SCKA0) tSIK3 <106> REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V SIA0 hold time (from SCKA0) tKSI3 <107> REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V Delay time from SCKA0 to SOA0 tKSO3 <108> output REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 30 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 60 ns MAX. Unit REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V (2) Slave mode (TA = -40 to +85C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V, CL = 50 pF) Parameter SCKA0 cycle time Symbol tKCY4 Conditions <104> MIN. REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 840 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 1700 ns tKCY4/2 - 30 ns REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 50 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 100 ns REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V SCKA0 high-/low-level width tKH4, tKL4 <105> SIA0 setup time (to SCKA0) tSIK4 <106> REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V <R> SIA0 hold time (from SCKA0) tKSI4 <107> <R> REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V tCY x 2 + 15 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, tCY x 2 + 30 ns Note Note REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V Delay time from SCKA0 to SOA0 output tKSO4 <108> REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V tCY x 2 + 30 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, tCY x 2 + 60 ns Note Note REGC = VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V Note tCY: fSCKA cycle User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 775 CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS (MASK ROM VERSION OF 128 KB OR LESS AND TWO-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION), (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) <104> <105> <106> SCKA0 (I/O) <106> <107> Hi-Z Hi-Z SIA0 (input) Input data <108> Output data SOA0 (output) 776 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS (MASK ROM VERSION OF 128 KB OR LESS AND TWO-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION), (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) I2C Bus Mode (Y Products (Products with On-Chip I2C) Only) (TA = -40 to +85C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V, CL = 50 pF) Parameter Symbol Normal Mode High-Speed Mode Unit MIN. MAX. MIN. MAX. 0 100 0 400 kHz SCL0 clock frequency fCLK Bus free time tBUF <109> 4.7 - 1.3 - s tHD:STA <110> 4.0 - 0.6 - s SCL0 clock low-level width tLOW <111> 4.7 - 1.3 - s SCL0 clock high-level width tHIGH <112> 4.0 - 0.6 - s Setup time for start/restart tSU:STA <113> 4.7 - 0.6 - s tHD:DAT <114> 5.0 - - - s (Between start and stop conditions) Hold time Note 1 conditions CBUS compatible Data hold time master 2 I C mode 0 - Note 2 Data setup time tSU:DAT <115> 250 - SDA0 and SCL0 signal rise time tR <116> - 1000 Note 2 0 100 Note 4 20 + 0.1Cb SDA0 and SCL0 signal fall time tF <117> - 0.1Cb Note 3 s - ns 300 ns 300 ns Note 5 20 + 300 0.9 Note 5 Stop condition setup time tSU:STO <118> 4.0 - 0.6 - s Pulse width of spike suppressed by tSP <119> - - 0 50 ns - 400 - 400 pF input filter Capacitance load of each bus line Cb Notes 1. At the start condition, the first clock pulse is generated after the hold time. 2. The system requires a minimum of 300 ns hold time internally for the SDA0 signal (at VIHmin. of SCL0 signal) in order to occupy the undefined area at the falling edge of SCL0. 3. If the system does not extend the SCL0 signal low hold time (tLOW), only the maximum data hold time (tHD:DAT) needs to be satisfied. 4. The high-speed mode I2C bus can be used in the normal-mode I2C bus system. In this case, set the highspeed mode I2C bus so that it meets the following conditions. * If the system does not extend the SCL0 signal's low state hold time: tSU:DAT 250 ns * If the system extends the SCL0 signal's low state hold time: Transmit the following data bit to the SDA0 line prior to the SCL0 line release (tRmax. + tSU:DAT = 1000 + 250 = 1250 ns: Normal mode I2C bus specification). 5. Cb: Total capacitance of one bus line (unit: pF) User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 777 CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS (MASK ROM VERSION OF 128 KB OR LESS AND TWO-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION), (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) I2C Bus Mode (Y Products (Products with On-Chip I2C) Only) <111> <112> SCL0 (I/O) <117> <116> <114> <115> <113> <110> <119> <118> <110> SDA0 (I/O) <109> Stop condition 778 <116> <117> Start condition Restart condition User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD Stop condition CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS (MASK ROM VERSION OF 128 KB OR LESS AND TWO-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION), (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) A/D Converter (TA = -40 to +85C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V) Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit 10 10 10 bit 4.0 AVREF0 5.5 V 0.2 0.4 %FSR 2.7 AVREF0 4.0 V 0.3 0.6 %FSR Resolution Note 1 Overall error AINL Conversion time tCONV Note 1 Zero-scale error Full-scale error Note 1 Non-linearity error Note 2 Differential linearity error Ezs Efs ILE DLE Note 2 Analog input voltage VIAN AVREF0 current IAREF0 4.0 AVREF0 5.5 V 14 100 s 2.7 AVREF0 4.0 V 17 100 s 4.0 AVREF0 5.5 V 0.4 %FSR 2.7 AVREF0 4.0 V 0.6 %FSR 4.0 AVREF0 5.5 V 0.4 %FSR 2.7 AVREF0 4.0 V 0.6 %FSR 4.0 AVREF0 5.5 V 2.5 LSB 2.7 AVREF0 4.0 V 4.5 LSB 4.0 AVREF0 5.5 V 1.5 LSB 2.7 AVREF0 4.0 V 2.0 LSB AVREF0 V 1.0 2.0 mA 1.0 10 A 0 When using A/D converter Note 3 When not using A/D converter Notes 1. Excluding quantization error (0.05 %FSR). 2. Excluding quantization error (0.5 LSB). 3. ADM.ADCS bit = 0, ADM.ADCS2 bit = 0 Remark LSB: Least Significant Bit FSR: Full Scale Range User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 779 CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS (MASK ROM VERSION OF 128 KB OR LESS AND TWO-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION), (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) Flash Memory Programming Characteristics (TA = 10 to 40C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V) (1) Basic characteristics Parameter Symbol Conditions Programming operation MIN. TYP. 2 MAX. Unit 10 MHz 10.3 V 60 mA 100 mA 0.204 s 20 s/area 5.1 ms 100 Times 16 Times 51 s 510 s/word frequency VPP supply voltage VPP2 During flash memory programming VDD supply current IDD When VPP = VPP2, fXX = 10 MHz, VDD = 9.7 10.0 5.5 V VPP supply current IPP When VPP = VPP2 Step erase time tER Note 1 Overall erase time tERA When step erase time = 0.2 s, Note 2 Writeback time tWB Note 3 Number of writebacks CWB When writeback time = 1 ms, Note 4 Number of erases/writebacks CERWB Step write time tWR Overall write time per word tWRW 0.196 4.9 Note 5 49 When step write time = 50 s (1 word = 49 0.2 5.0 50 4 bytes), Note 6 Number of rewrites per area CERWR 1 erase + 1 write after erase = 1 rewrite, 20 Count/area Note 7 Notes 1. The recommended setting value of the step erase time is 0.2 s. 2. The prewrite time prior to erasure and the erase verify time (writeback time) are not included. 3. The recommended setting value of the writeback time is 5.0 ms. 4. Writeback is executed once by the issuance of the writeback command. Therefore, the retry count must be the maximum value minus the number of commands issued. 5. The recommended setting value of the step writing time is 50 s. 6. 100 s is added to the actual writing time per word. The internal verify time during and after the writing is not included. 7. When writing initially to shipped products, it is counted as one rewrite for both "erase to write" and "write only". Example (P: Write, E: Erase) Shipped product PEPEP: 3 rewrites Shipped product E PEPEP: 3 rewrites 780 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS (MASK ROM VERSION OF 128 KB OR LESS AND TWO-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION), (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) (2) Serial write operation characteristics Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit Setup time from VDD to VPP tDPRSR 15 s Setup time from VPP to RESET tPSRRF 10 s Count start time from RESET to VPPH tRFOF 2 s Count complete time tCOUNT VPP counter high-/low-level width tCH/tCL VPP pulse low-level input voltage VPPL 0.8VDD VPP pulse high-level input voltage VPPH 9.7 20 ms s 8 10.0 1.2VDD V 10.3 V Flash Write Mode Setting Timing VDD VDD 0V tRFCF tDRPSR tCH VPPH VPP VDD tCL VPPL tPSRRF tCOUNT EVDD RESET (input) 0V User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 781 CHAPTER 30 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A1) GRADE PRODUCTS) (A1) grade products are as follows. PD703208(A1), 703208Y(A1), 703209(A1), 703209Y(A1), 703210(A1), 703210Y(A1) Absolute Maximum Ratings (TA = 25C) (1/2) Parameter Supply voltage Input voltage Symbol Conditions Ratings Unit VDD VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 -0.3 to +6.5 V EVDD VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 -0.3 to +6.5 V AVREF0 VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 -0.3 to +6.5 V VSS VSS = EVSS = AVSS -0.3 to +0.3 V AVSS VSS = EVSS = AVSS -0.3 to +0.3 V EVSS VSS = EVSS = AVSS -0.3 to +0.3 VI1 P00 to P06, P30 to P35, P38, P39, P40 to P42, V -0.3 to EVDD + 0.3 Note V P50 to P55, P90, P91, P96 to P99, P913 to P915, PCM0 to PCM3, PCS0, PCS1, PCT0, PCT1, PCT4, PCT6, PDL0 to PDL15, RESET Analog input voltage VI2 X1, X2, XT1, XT2 VIAN P70 to P77 -0.3 to VDD + 0.3 -0.3 to AVREF0 + 0.3 Note Be sure not to exceed the absolute maximum ratings (MAX. value) of each supply voltage. 782 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD Note Note V V CHAPTER 30 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A1) GRADE PRODUCTS) Absolute Maximum Ratings (TA = 25C) (2/2) Parameter Symbol Output current, low IOL Conditions Per pin Note P38, P39 Ratings Unit 16 mA 24 mA 28 mA P00 to P06, P30 to P35, P38, P39, Total of all P40 to P42 pins: P50 to P55, P90, P91, P96 to P99, 56 mA 28 mA Note Per pin -8 mA P00 to P06, P30 to P35, P40 to P42 Total of all -24 mA P50 to P55, P90, P91, P96 to P99, pins: mA -48 mA -24 P913 to P915, PCM0 to PCM3, TA -40 to +110 C Tstg -65 to +150 C P913 to P915, PCM0 to PCM3, PCS0, PCS1, PCT0, PCT1, PCT4, PCT6, PDL0 to PDL15 Output current, high IOH PCS0, PCS1, PCT0, PCT1, PCT4, PCT6, PDL0 to PDL15 Operating ambient temperature Storage temperature Note P00 to P06, P30 to P35, P40 to P42, P50 to P55, P90, P91, P96 to P99, P913 to P915, PCM0 to PCM3, PCS0, PCS1, PCT0, PCT1, PCT4, PCT6, PDL0 to PDL15 Cautions 1. Do not directly connect the output (or I/O) pins of IC products to each other, or to VDD, VCC, and GND. Open-drain pins or open-collector pins, however, can be directly connected to each other. Direct connection of the output pins between an IC product and an external circuit is possible, if the output pins can be set to the high-impedance state and the output timing of the external circuit is designed to avoid output conflict. 2. Product quality may suffer if the absolute maximum rating is exceeded even momentarily for any parameter. That is, the absolute maximum ratings are rated values at which the product is on the verge of suffering physical damage, and therefore the product must be used under conditions that ensure that the absolute maximum ratings are not exceeded. The ratings and conditions indicated for DC characteristics and AC characteristics represent the quality assurance range during normal operation. Capacitance (TA = 25C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V) Parameter Input capacitance I/O capacitance Symbol Conditions CI fX = 1 MHz CIO Unmeasured pins returned to 0 V MIN. P70 to P77 TYP. MAX. Unit 15 pF Note 15 pF P38, P39 20 pF Note P00 to P06, P30 to P35, P40 to P42, P50 to P55, P90, P91, P96 to P99, P913 to P915, PCM0 to PCM3, PCS0, PCS1, PCT0, PCT1, PCT4, PCT6, PDL0 to PDL15 Remark fX: Main clock oscillation frequency User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 783 CHAPTER 30 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A1) GRADE PRODUCTS) PLL Characteristics (TA = -40 to +110C, VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V) Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit Input frequency fX 2 5 MHz Output frequency fXX 8 20 MHz Lock time tPLL 200 s MAX. Unit After VDD reaches 3.5 V (MIN.) Operating Conditions (TA = -40 to +110C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 3.5 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V, CL = 50 pF) Parameter Symbol Internal system clock fCLK Conditions In PLL mode MIN. TYP. REGC = VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V 0.25 20 MHz REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 0.25 16 MHz REGC = 10 F, 0.25 16 MHz REGC = VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V 0.25 12 MHz In clock-through REGC = VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V 0.0625 10 MHz mode REGC = 10 F, 0.0625 10 MHz frequency VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V Operating with REGC = VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V 32.768 kHz subclock Remark fX: Main clock oscillation frequency Internal System Clock Frequency vs. Supply Voltage 100 Internal system clock frequency fCLK [MHz] When REGC = 10 F 20.0 16.0 12.0 10.0 1.0 0.1 0.032 0.01 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 Supply voltage VDD [V] 784 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 5.0 5.5 6.0 CHAPTER 30 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A1) GRADE PRODUCTS) Main Clock Oscillator Characteristics (1) Crystal resonator, ceramic resonator (TA = -40 to +110C, VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V) Recommended Circuit Parameter Oscillation Conditions In PLL mode frequency (fX) X1 Note 1 MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit REGC = VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V 2 5 MHz REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 2 4 MHz REGC = 10 F, 2 4 MHz VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V X2 REGC = VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V 2 2.5 MHz In clock- REGC = VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V 2 10 MHz through mode REGC = 10 F, 2 10 MHz VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V Oscillation After reset is stabilization released 15 OSTS0 = 1 2 /fX s Note 3 s Note 2 time After STOP mode is released Notes 1. Indicates only oscillator characteristics. 2. Time required to stabilize the resonator after reset or STOP mode is released. 3. The value differs depending on the OSTS register settings. (2) External clock (TA = -40 to +110C, REGC = VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V) Recommended Circuit Parameter Input X1 X2 Conditions In PLL mode frequency (fX) Note In clock- External clock MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit REGC = VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V 2 5 MHz REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 2 4 MHz REGC = VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V 2 2.5 MHz REGC = VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V 2 10 MHz through mode Note The duty ratio of the input waveform must be within 50% 5%. Cautions 1. When using the main clock oscillator, wire as follows in the area enclosed by the broken lines in the above figures to avoid an adverse effect from wiring capacitance. * Keep the wiring length as short as possible. * Do not cross the wiring with the other signal lines. * Do not route the wiring near a signal line through which a high fluctuating current flows. * Always make the ground point of the oscillator capacitor the same potential as VSS. * Do not ground the capacitor to a ground pattern through which a high current flows. * Do not fetch signals from the oscillator. 2. When the main clock is stopped and the device is operating on the subclock, wait until the oscillation stabilization time has been secured by the program before switching back to the main clock. 3. When REGC = 10 F, the supply voltage to the oscillator is the on-chip regulator output (3.6 V (TYP.)). However, the supply voltage to the oscillator is VDD in the following modes. * After reset (except during WDTRES1 and oscillation stabilization time) * In STOP mode * In Sub-IDLE mode User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 785 CHAPTER 30 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A1) GRADE PRODUCTS) Subclock Oscillator Characteristics (1) Crystal resonator (TA = -40 to +110C, VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V) Recommended Circuit XT1 XT2 Parameter Conditions Oscillation MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit 32 32.768 35 kHz frequency Note 1 (fXT) Oscillation 10 s stabilization time Note 2 Notes 1. Indicates only oscillator characteristics. 2. Time required from when VDD reaches oscillation voltage range (3.5 V (MIN.)) to when the crystal resonator stabilizes. (2) External clock (TA = -40 to +110C, REGC = VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V) Recommended Circuit XT1 XT2 Parameter Input Conditions REGC = VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V MIN. TYP. 32 MAX. Unit 35 kHz frequency Note (fXT) External clock Note The duty ratio of the input waveform must be within 50% 5%. Cautions 1. When using the subclock oscillator, wire as follows in the area enclosed by the broken lines in the above figures to avoid an adverse effect from wiring capacitance. * Keep the wiring length as short as possible. * Do not cross the wiring with the other signal lines. * Do not route the wiring near a signal line through which a high fluctuating current flows. * Always make the ground point of the oscillator capacitor the same potential as VSS. * Do not ground the capacitor to a ground pattern through which a high current flows. * Do not fetch signals from the oscillator. 2. The subclock oscillator is designed as a low-amplitude circuit for reducing power consumption, and is more prone to malfunction due to noise than the main clock oscillator. Particular care is therefore required with the wiring method when the subclock is used. 3. When REGC = 10 F, the supply voltage to the oscillator is the on-chip regulator output (3.6 V (TYP.)). However, the supply voltage to the oscillator is VDD in the following modes. * After reset (except during WDTRES1 and oscillation stabilization time) * In STOP mode * In Sub-IDLE mode 786 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 30 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A1) GRADE PRODUCTS) DC Characteristics (TA = -40 to +110C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 3.5 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V) (1/3) Parameter Output current, high Symbol Conditions MIN. Per pin for P00 to P06, P30 to P35, P40 to IOH1 TYP. MAX. Unit -4.0 mA P42, P50 to P55, P90, P91, P96 to P99, P913 to P915, PCM0 to PCM3, PCS0, PCS1, PCT0, PCT1, PCT4, PCT6, PDL0 to PDL15 Total of P00 to P06, EVDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V -24 mA P30 to P35, P40 to P42 EVDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V -12 mA Total of P50 to P55, EVDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V -24 mA P90, P91, P96 to P99, EVDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V -12 mA 8 mA EVDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 12 mA EVDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V 6.4 mA P913 to P915, PCM0 to PCM3, PCS0, PCS1, PCT0, PCT1, PCT4, PCT6, PDL0 to PDL15 Output current, low Per pin for P00 to P06, P30 to P35, P40 to IOL1 P42, P50 to P55, P90, P91, P96 to P99, P913 to P915, PCM0 to PCM3, PCS0, PCS1, PCT0, PCT1, PCT4, PCT6, PDL0 to PDL15 Per pin for P38, P39 Total of P00 to P06, P30 to P35, P40 to P42 24 mA Total of P38, P39, P50 to P55, P90, P91, P96 24 mA to P99, P913 to P915, PCM0 to PCM3, PCS0, PCS1, PCT0, PCT1, PCT4, PCT6, PDL0 to PDL15 Input voltage, high VIH1 Note 1 0.7EVDD EVDD V VIH2 Note 2 0.8EVDD EVDD V VIH3 P70 to P77 0.7AVREF0 AVREF0 V VIH4 X1, X2, XT1, XT2 VDD - 0.5 VDD V VIL1 Note 1 EVSS 0.3EVDD V VIL2 Note 2 EVSS 0.2EVDD V P70 to P77 AVSS 0.3AVREF0 V VSS 0.4 V Note 3 Input voltage, low VIL3 Note 3 VIL4 X1, X2, XT1, XT2 Notes 1. P00, P01, P30, P41, P98, PCM0 to PCM3, PCS0, PCS1, PCT0, PCT1, PCT4, PCT6, PDL0 to PDL15 and their alternate-function pins. 2. RESET, P02 to P06, P31 to P35, P38, P39, P40, P42, P50 to P55, P90, P91, P96, P97, P99, P913 to P915 and their alternate-function pins. 3. When the external clock is used. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 787 CHAPTER 30 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A1) GRADE PRODUCTS) DC Characteristics (TA = -40 to +110C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 3.5 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V) (2/3) Parameter Output voltage, high Symbol VOH1 Conditions Note 1 MIN. IOH = -1.6 mA, TYP. MAX. Unit EVDD - 1.0 EVDD V EVDD - 0.5 EVDD V 0 0.8 V 0 2.0 V 0 1.0 V EVDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V Note 2 IOH = -0.08 mA, EVDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V Output voltage, low VOL1 Note 3 VOL2 P38, P39 IOL = 1.6 mA Note 4 IOL = 12 mA, EVDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V IOL = 6.4 mA, EVDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V Input leakage current, high ILIH VIN = VDD 10.0 A Input leakage current, low ILIL VIN = 0 V -10.0 A Output leakage current, high ILOH VO = VDD 10.0 A Output leakage current, low ILOL VO = 0 V -10.0 A Pull-up resistor RL VIN = 0 V 120 k 10 30 Notes 1. Total of P00 to P06, P30 to P35, P40 to P42 and their alternate-function pins: IOH = -24 mA, total of P50 to P55, P90, P91, P96 to P99, P913 to P915, PCM0 to PCM3, PCS0, PCS1, PCT0, PCT1, PCT4, PCT6, PDL0 to PDL15 and their alternate-function pins: IOH = -24 mA. 2. Total of P00 to P06, P30 to P35, P40 to P42 and their alternate-function pins: IOH = -12 mA, total of P50 to P55, P90, P91, P96 to P99, P913 to P915, PCM0 to PCM3, PCS0, PCS1, PCT0, PCT1, PCT4, PCT6, PDL0 to PDL15 and their alternate-function pins: IOH = -12 mA. 3. Total of P00 to P06, P30 to P35, P40 to P42 and their alternate-function pins: IOL = 24 mA, total of P38, P39, P50 to P55, P90, P91, P96 to P99, P913 to P915, PCM0 to PCM3, PCS0, PCS1, PCT0, PCT1, PCT4, PCT6, PDL0 to PDL15 and their alternate-function pins: IOL = 24 mA. 4. Refer to IOL1 for IOL of P38 and P39. 788 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 30 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A1) GRADE PRODUCTS) DC Characteristics (TA = -40 to +110C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 3.5 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V) (3/3) Parameter Supply current Note Symbol IDD1 Conditions Normal fXX = 20 MHz (fX = 5 MHz) operation (in PLL mode) All peripheral REGC = VDD = 5 V 10% functions fXX = 16 MHz (fX = 4 MHz) operating (in PLL mode) MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit 30 47 mA 18 32 mA 17 27 mA 10 20 mA 900 3300 A 600 2300 A 70 1460 A 15 1360 A 0.1 1330 A REGC = 10 F VDD = 5 V 10% IDD2 HALT mode fXX = 20 MHz (fX = 5 MHz) All peripheral (in PLL mode) functions REGC = VDD = 5 V 10% operating fXX = 16 MHz (fX = 4 MHz) (in PLL mode) REGC = 10 F VDD = 5 V 10% IDD3 IDLE mode fX = 5 MHz Watch timer (when PLL mode off) operating REGC = VDD = 5 V 10% fX = 4 MHz (when PLL mode off) REGC = 10 F VDD = 5 V 10% IDD4 Subclock fXT = 32.768 kHz operating Main clock stopped mode IDD5 Subclock IDLE fXT = 32.768 kHz mode Main clock stopped, watch timer operating IDD6 STOP mode Subclock stopped (XT1 = VSS, when PSMR.XTSTP bit = 1) Note Total current of VDD and EVDD (all ports stopped). AVREF0 is not included. Remark fXX: Main clock frequency fX: Main clock oscillation frequency fXT: Subclock frequency User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 789 CHAPTER 30 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A1) GRADE PRODUCTS) Data Retention Characteristics STOP Mode (TA = -40 to +110C) Parameter Symbol Data retention voltage VDDDR STOP release signal input time tDREL Conditions MIN. STOP mode TYP. 2.0 MAX. Unit 5.5 V s 0 Caution Shifting to STOP mode and restoring from STOP mode must be performed within the rated operating range. STOP mode setting Operating voltage lower limit VDD VDDDR RESET (input) STOP mode release interrupt (NMI, etc.) (Released by falling edge) STOP mode release interrupt (NMI, etc.) (Released by rising edge) 790 STOP release signal input User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD tDREL CHAPTER 30 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A1) GRADE PRODUCTS) AC Characteristics AC Test Input Measurement Points (VDD, AVREF0, EVDD) VDD VIH VIH Measurement points 0V VIL VIL AC Test Output Measurement Points VOH VOH Measurement points VOL VOL Load Conditions DUT (Device under measurement) CL = 50 pF Caution If the load capacitance exceeds 50 pF due to the circuit configuration, bring the load capacitance of the device to 50 pF or less by inserting a buffer or by some other means. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 791 CHAPTER 30 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A1) GRADE PRODUCTS) CLKOUT Output Timing (TA = -40 to +110C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 3.5 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V, CL = 50 pF) Parameter Symbol Output cycle tCYK <1> High-level width tWKH <2> Low-level width Rise time Fall time tWKL <3> tKR <4> tKF <5> Conditions MIN. MAX. 50 ns 30.6 s VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V tCYK/2 - 18 ns VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V tCYK/2 - 26 ns VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V tCYK/2 - 18 ns VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V tCYK/2 - 26 ns VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 18 ns VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V 26 ns VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 18 ns VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V 26 ns Clock Timing <1> <2> <3> CLKOUT (output) <4> 792 Unit User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD <5> CHAPTER 30 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A1) GRADE PRODUCTS) Basic Operation (1) Reset/external interrupt timing (TA = -40 to +110C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 3.5 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V, CL = 50 pF) Parameter Symbol RESET low-level width Conditions MIN. MAX. Unit tWRSL1 <87> Reset in power-on status 2 s tWRSL2 <88> Power-on-reset when REGC = VDD 2 s tVR > 150 s 10 s tVR 150 s Note 45 s NMI high-level width tWNIH <89> Analog noise elimination 1 s NMI low-level width tWNIL <90> Analog noise elimination 1 s INTPn high-level width tWITH <91> n = 0 to 6 (analog noise elimination) 600 ns INTPn low-level width tWITL <92> n = 0 to 6 (analog noise elimination) 600 ns Note Power-on-reset when REGC = 10 F Remarks 1. tVR: Time required for VDD to reach 0 V to 4.0 V (= operation lower-limit voltage) 2. The above specification shows the pulse width that is accurately detected as a valid edge. If a pulse narrower than the above specification is input, therefore, it may also be detected as a valid edge. Reset/Interrupt VDD <88> <87> tVR RESET (input) <89> <90> <91> <92> NMI (input) INTPn (input) Remark n = 0 to 6 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 793 CHAPTER 30 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A1) GRADE PRODUCTS) Timer Timing (TA = -40 to +110C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 3.5 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V, CL = 50 pF) Parameter TI0n high-level width Symbol tTI0H <93> Conditions REGC = VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, MIN. MAX. Unit 2Tsmp0 + 100 Note ns 2Tsmp0 + 200 Note ns 2Tsmp0 + 100 Note ns 2Tsmp0 + 200 Note ns REGC = VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V TI0n low-level width tTI0L <94> REGC = VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, REGC = VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V TI5m high-level width tTI5H <95> REGC = VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V 50 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 100 ns REGC = VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V 50 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 100 ns REGC = VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V TI5m low-level width tTI5L <96> REGC = VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V Note Tsmp0: Timer 0 count clock cycle However, Tsmp0 = fXX/4 when TI0n is used as an external event count input. Remarks 1. n = 00, 01, 10, 11 m = 0, 1 2. The above specification shows the pulse width that is accurately detected as a valid edge. If a pulse narrower than the above specification is input, therefore, it may also be detected as a valid edge. Timer Input Timing <93>/<95> <94>/<96> TI0n (input) TI5m (input) Remark n = 00, 01, 10, 11 m = 0, 1 UART Timing (TA = -40 to +110C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 3.5 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V, CL = 50 pF) Parameter Symbol Conditions MAX. Unit 312.5 kbps REGC = VDD = 5 V 10% 12 MHz REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 6 MHz Transmit rate ASCK0 frequency REGC = VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V 794 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD MIN. CHAPTER 30 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A1) GRADE PRODUCTS) CSI0 Timing (1) Master mode (TA = -40 to +110C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 3.5 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V, CL = 50 pF) Parameter SCK0n cycle time Symbol tKCY1 Conditions <99> MIN. MAX. Unit REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 200 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 400 ns tKCY1/2 - 30 ns REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 33 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 58 ns REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 30 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 50 ns REGC = VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V SCK0n high-/low-level width tKH1, tKL1 <100> SI0n setup time (to SCK0n) tSIK1 <101> REGC = VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V SI0n hold time (from SCK0n) tKSI1 <102> REGC = VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V Delay time from SCK0n to SO0n tKSO1 <103> output REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 30 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 60 ns MAX. Unit REGC = VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V Remark n = 0, 1 (2) Slave mode (TA = -40 to +110C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 3.5 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V, CL = 50 pF) Parameter SCK0n cycle time Symbol tKCY2 Conditions <99> MIN. REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 200 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 400 ns REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 45 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 90 ns REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 30 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 60 ns REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 30 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 60 ns REGC = VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V SCK0n high-/low-level width tKH2, tKL2 <100> REGC = VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V SI0n setup time (to SCK0n) tSIK2 <101> REGC = VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V SI0n hold time (from SCK0n) tKSI2 <102> REGC = VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V Delay time from SCK0n to SO0n output tKSO2 <103> REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 50 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 100 ns REGC = VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V Remark n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 795 CHAPTER 30 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A1) GRADE PRODUCTS) (a) CSICn.CKPn, CSICn.DAPn bits = 00 or 11 <99> <100> <100> SCK0n (I/O) <101> <102> Hi-Z Hi-Z SI0n (input) Input data <103> Output data SO0n (output) (b) CSICn.CKPn, CSICn.DAPn bits = 10 or 01 <99> <100> <100> SCK0n (I/O) <101> <102> Hi-Z SI0n (input) Hi-Z Input data <103> SO0n (output) Remark 796 Output data n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 30 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A1) GRADE PRODUCTS) CSIA Timing (1) Master mode (TA = -40 to +110C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 3.5 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V, CL = 50 pF) Parameter SCKA0 cycle time Symbol tKCY3 Conditions <104> MIN. MAX. Unit REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 500 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 1000 ns tKCY3/2 - 30 ns REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 39 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 68 ns REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 30 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 60 ns REGC = VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V SCKA0 high-/low-level width tKH3, <105> tKL3 SIA0 setup time (to SCKA0) tSIK3 <106> REGC = VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V SIA0 hold time (from SCKA0) tKSI3 <107> REGC = VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V Delay time from SCKA0 to SOA0 tKSO3 <108> output REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 30 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 60 ns MAX. Unit REGC = VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V (2) Slave mode (TA = -40 to +110C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 3.5 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V, CL = 50 pF) Parameter SCKA0 cycle time Symbol tKCY4 Conditions <104> MIN. REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 840 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 1700 ns tKCY4/2 - 30 ns REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 50 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 100 ns REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V tCY x 2 + 15 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, tCY x 2 + 30 ns REGC = VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V SCKA0 high-/low-level width tKH4, tKL4 <105> SIA0 setup time (to SCKA0) tSIK4 <106> REGC = VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V <R> SIA0 hold time (from SCKA0) tKSI4 <107> <R> REGC = VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V Delay time from SCKA0 to SOA0 output tKSO4 <108> REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V tCY x 2 + 30 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, tCY x 2 + 60 ns Note Note REGC = VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V Note tCY: fSCKA cycle User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 797 CHAPTER 30 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A1) GRADE PRODUCTS) <104> <105> <105> SCKA0 (I/O) <106> <107> Hi-Z Hi-Z SIA0 (input) Input data <108> Output data SOA0 (output) 798 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 30 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A1) GRADE PRODUCTS) I2C Bus Mode (Y Products (Products with On-Chip I2C) Only) (TA = -40 to +110C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 3.5 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V, CL = 50 pF) Parameter Symbol Normal Mode High-Speed Mode Unit MIN. MAX. MIN. MAX. 0 100 0 400 kHz SCL0 clock frequency fCLK Bus free time tBUF <109> 4.7 - 1.3 - s tHD:STA <110> 4.0 - 0.6 - s SCL0 clock low-level width tLOW <111> 4.7 - 1.3 - s SCL0 clock high-level width tHIGH <112> 4.0 - 0.6 - s Setup time for start/restart tSU:STA <113> 4.7 - 0.6 - s tHD:DAT <114> 5.0 - - - s (Between start and stop conditions) Hold time Note 1 conditions CBUS compatible Data hold time master 2 I C mode Data setup time SDA0 and SCL0 signal rise time 0 tSU:DAT tR - Note 2 <115> 250 <116> - Note 2 0 - 1000 0.9 Note 3 s - ns 20 + 0.1Cb Note 5 300 ns 20 + 0.1Cb Note 5 300 ns Note 4 100 SDA0 and SCL0 signal fall time tF <117> - 300 Stop condition setup time tSU:STO <118> 4.0 - 0.6 - s Pulse width of spike suppressed by tSP <119> - - 0 50 ns - 400 - 400 pF input filter Capacitance load of each bus line Cb Notes 1. At the start condition, the first clock pulse is generated after the hold time. 2. The system requires a minimum of 300 ns hold time internally for the SDA0 signal (at VIHmin. of SCL0 signal) in order to occupy the undefined area at the falling edge of SCL0. 3. If the system does not extend the SCL0 signal low hold time (tLOW), only the maximum data hold time (tHD:DAT) needs to be satisfied. 4. The high-speed mode I2C bus can be used in the normal-mode I2C bus system. In this case, set the highspeed mode I2C bus so that it meets the following conditions. * If the system does not extend the SCL0 signal's low state hold time: tSU:DAT 250 ns * If the system extends the SCL0 signal's low state hold time: Transmit the following data bit to the SDA0 line prior to the SCL0 line release (tRmax. + tSU:DAT = 1000 + 250 = 1250 ns: Normal mode I2C bus specification). 5. Cb: Total capacitance of one bus line (unit: pF) User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 799 CHAPTER 30 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A1) GRADE PRODUCTS) I2C Bus Mode (Y Products (Products with On-Chip I2C) Only) <111> <112> SCL0 (I/O) <117> <116> <114> <115> <113> <110> <119> <118> <110> SDA0 (I/O) <109> Stop condition 800 <116> <117> Start condition Restart condition User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD Stop condition CHAPTER 30 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A1) GRADE PRODUCTS) A/D Converter (TA = -40 to +110C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 3.5 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V) Parameter Symbol Conditions Resolution Note 1 Overall error AINL Conversion time tCONV MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit 10 10 10 bit 0.2 0.6 %FSR 0.3 4.0 AVREF0 5.5 V 3.5 AVREF0 4.0 V Note 1 Zero-scale error Full-scale error Note 1 Non-linearity error Note 2 Differential linearity error 0.8 %FSR 4.0 AVREF0 5.5 V 14 60 s 3.5 AVREF0 4.0 V 17 60 s 4.0 AVREF0 5.5 V 0.6 %FSR 3.5 AVREF0 4.0 V 0.8 %FSR Efs 4.0 AVREF0 5.5 V 0.6 %FSR 3.5 AVREF0 4.0 V 0.8 %FSR ILE 4.0 AVREF0 5.5 V 4.5 LSB 3.5 AVREF0 4.0 V 6.5 LSB 4.0 AVREF0 5.5 V 2.0 LSB 3.5 AVREF0 4.0 V 2.5 LSB AVREF0 V 1.0 2.0 mA 1.0 10 A Ezs DLE Note 2 Analog input voltage VIAN AVREF0 current IAREF0 0 When using A/D converter Note 3 When not using A/D converter Notes 1. Excluding quantization error (0.05 %FSR). 2. Excluding quantization error (0.5 LSB). 3. ADM.ADCS bit = 0, ADM.ADCS2 bit = 0 Remark LSB: Least Significant Bit FSR: Full Scale Range User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 801 CHAPTER 31 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS) (A2) grade products are as follows. PD703208(A2), 703208Y(A2), 703209(A2), 703209Y(A2), 703210(A2), 703210Y(A2) Absolute Maximum Ratings (TA = 25C) (1/2) Parameter Supply voltage Input voltage Symbol Conditions Ratings Unit VDD VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 -0.3 to +6.5 V EVDD VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 -0.3 to +6.5 V AVREF0 VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 -0.3 to +6.5 V VSS VSS = EVSS = AVSS -0.3 to +0.3 V AVSS VSS = EVSS = AVSS -0.3 to +0.3 V EVSS VSS = EVSS = AVSS -0.3 to +0.3 VI1 P00 to P06, P30 to P35, P38, P39, P40 to P42, V -0.3 to EVDD + 0.3 Note V P50 to P55, P90, P91, P96 to P99, P913 to P915, PCM0 to PCM3, PCS0, PCS1, PCT0, PCT1, PCT4, PCT6, PDL0 to PDL15, RESET Analog input voltage VI2 X1, X2, XT1, XT2 VIAN P70 to P77 -0.3 to VDD + 0.3 -0.3 to AVREF0 + 0.3 Note Be sure not to exceed the absolute maximum ratings (MAX. value) of each supply voltage. 802 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD Note Note V V CHAPTER 31 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS) Absolute Maximum Ratings (TA = 25C) (2/2) Parameter Symbol Output current, low IOL Conditions Per pin Note P38, P39 Ratings Unit 14 mA 21 mA 24.5 mA P00 to P06, P30 to P35, P38, P39, Total of all P40 to P42 pins: P50 to P55, P90, P91, P96 to P99, 49 mA 24.5 mA Note Per pin -7 mA P00 to P06, P30 to P35, P40 to P42 Total of all -21 mA P50 to P55, P90, P91, P96 to P99, pins: mA -42 mA -21 P913 to P915, PCM0 to PCM3, TA -40 to +125 C Tstg -65 to +150 C P913 to P915, PCM0 to PCM3, PCS0, PCS1, PCT0, PCT1, PCT4, PCT6, PDL0 to PDL15 Output current, high IOH PCS0, PCS1, PCT0, PCT1, PCT4, PCT6, PDL0 to PDL15 Operating ambient temperature Storage temperature Note P00 to P06, P30 to P35, P40 to P42, P50 to P55, P90, P91, P96 to P99, P913 to P915, PCM0 to PCM3, PCS0, PCS1, PCT0, PCT1, PCT4, PCT6, PDL0 to PDL15 Cautions 1. Do not directly connect the output (or I/O) pins of IC products to each other, or to VDD, VCC, and GND. Open-drain pins or open-collector pins, however, can be directly connected to each other. Direct connection of the output pins between an IC product and an external circuit is possible, if the output pins can be set to the high-impedance state and the output timing of the external circuit is designed to avoid output conflict. 2. Product quality may suffer if the absolute maximum rating is exceeded even momentarily for any parameter. That is, the absolute maximum ratings are rated values at which the product is on the verge of suffering physical damage, and therefore the product must be used under conditions that ensure that the absolute maximum ratings are not exceeded. The ratings and conditions indicated for DC characteristics and AC characteristics represent the quality assurance range during normal operation. Capacitance (TA = 25C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V) Parameter Input capacitance I/O capacitance Symbol Conditions CI fX = 1 MHz CIO Unmeasured pins returned to 0 V MIN. P70 to P77 TYP. MAX. Unit 15 pF Note 15 pF P38, P39 20 pF Note P00 to P06, P30 to P35, P40 to P42, P50 to P55, P90, P91, P96 to P99, P913 to P915, PCM0 to PCM3, PCS0, PCS1, PCT0, PCT1, PCT4, PCT6, PDL0 to PDL15 Remark fX: Main clock oscillation frequency User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 803 CHAPTER 31 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS) PLL Characteristics (TA = -40 to +125C, VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V) Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit Input frequency fX 2 4 MHz Output frequency fXX 8 16 MHz Lock time tPLL 200 s MAX. Unit After VDD reaches 3.5 V (MIN.) Operating Conditions (TA = -40 to +125C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 3.5 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V, CL = 50 pF) Parameter Symbol Internal system clock fCLK Conditions In PLL mode MIN. TYP. REGC = VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V 0.25 16 MHz REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 0.25 16 MHz REGC = 10 F, 0.25 16 MHz REGC = VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V 0.25 12 MHz In clock-through REGC = VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V 0.0625 10 MHz mode REGC = 10 F, 0.0625 10 MHz frequency VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V Operating with REGC = VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V 32.768 kHz subclock Remark fX: Main clock oscillation frequency Internal System Clock Frequency vs. Supply Voltage 100 Internal system clock frequency fCLK [MHz] When REGC = 10 F 20.0 16.0 12.0 10.0 1.0 0.1 0.032 0.01 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 Supply voltage VDD [V] 804 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 5.0 5.5 6.0 CHAPTER 31 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS) Main Clock Oscillator Characteristics (1) Crystal resonator, ceramic resonator (TA = -40 to +125C, VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V) Recommended Circuit Parameter Oscillation Conditions In PLL mode frequency (fX) X1 Note 1 MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit REGC = VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V 2 5 MHz REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 2 4 MHz REGC = 10 F, 2 4 MHz VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V X2 REGC = VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V 2 2.5 MHz In clock- REGC = VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V 2 10 MHz through mode REGC = 10 F, 2 10 MHz VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V Oscillation After reset is stabilization released 15 OSTS0 = 1 2 /fX s Note 3 s Note 2 time After STOP mode is released Notes 1. Indicates only oscillator characteristics. 2. Time required to stabilize the resonator after reset or STOP mode is released. 3. The value differs depending on the OSTS register settings. (2) External clock (TA = -40 to +125C, REGC = VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V) Recommended Circuit Parameter Input X1 X2 Conditions In PLL mode frequency (fX) Note In clock- External clock MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit REGC = VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V 2 5 MHz REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 2 4 MHz REGC = VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V 2 2.5 MHz REGC = VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V 2 10 MHz through mode Note The duty ratio of the input waveform must be within 50% 5%. Cautions 1. When using the main clock oscillator, wire as follows in the area enclosed by the broken lines in the above figures to avoid an adverse effect from wiring capacitance. * Keep the wiring length as short as possible. * Do not cross the wiring with the other signal lines. * Do not route the wiring near a signal line through which a high fluctuating current flows. * Always make the ground point of the oscillator capacitor the same potential as VSS. * Do not ground the capacitor to a ground pattern through which a high current flows. * Do not fetch signals from the oscillator. 2. When the main clock is stopped and the device is operating on the subclock, wait until the oscillation stabilization time has been secured by the program before switching back to the main clock. 3. When REGC = 10 F, the supply voltage to the oscillator is the on-chip regulator output (3.6 V (TYP.)). However, the supply voltage to the oscillator is VDD in the following modes. * After reset (except during WDTRES1 and oscillation stabilization time) * In STOP mode * In Sub-IDLE mode User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 805 CHAPTER 31 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS) Subclock Oscillator Characteristics (1) Crystal resonator (TA = -40 to +125C, VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V) Recommended Circuit XT1 XT2 Parameter Conditions Oscillation MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit 32 32.768 35 kHz frequency Note 1 (fXT) Oscillation 10 s stabilization time Note 2 Notes 1. Indicates only oscillator characteristics. 2. Time required from when VDD reaches oscillation voltage range (3.5 V (MIN.)) to when the crystal resonator stabilizes. (2) External clock (TA = -40 to +125C, REGC = VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V) Recommended Circuit XT1 XT2 Parameter Input Conditions REGC = VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V MIN. TYP. 32 MAX. Unit 35 kHz frequency Note (fXT) External clock Note The duty ratio of the input waveform must be within 50% 5%. Cautions 1. When using the subclock oscillator, wire as follows in the area enclosed by the broken lines in the above figures to avoid an adverse effect from wiring capacitance. * Keep the wiring length as short as possible. * Do not cross the wiring with the other signal lines. * Do not route the wiring near a signal line through which a high fluctuating current flows. * Always make the ground point of the oscillator capacitor the same potential as VSS. * Do not ground the capacitor to a ground pattern through which a high current flows. * Do not fetch signals from the oscillator. 2. The subclock oscillator is designed as a low-amplitude circuit for reducing power consumption, and is more prone to malfunction due to noise than the main clock oscillator. Particular care is therefore required with the wiring method when the subclock is used. 3. When REGC = 10 F, the supply voltage to the oscillator is the on-chip regulator output (3.6 V (TYP.)). However, the supply voltage to the oscillator is VDD in the following modes. * After reset (except during WDTRES1 and oscillation stabilization time) * In STOP mode * In Sub-IDLE mode 806 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 31 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS) DC Characteristics (TA = -40 to +125C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 3.5 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V) (1/3) Parameter Output current, high Symbol Conditions MIN. Per pin for P00 to P06, P30 to P35, P40 to IOH1 TYP. MAX. Unit -3.5 mA P42, P50 to P55, P90, P91, P96 to P99, P913 to P915, PCM0 to PCM3, PCS0, PCS1, PCT0, PCT1, PCT4, PCT6, PDL0 to PDL15 Total of P00 to P06, P30 EVDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V -21 mA to P35, P40 to P42 EVDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V -10.5 mA Total of P50 to P55, P90, EVDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V -21 mA P91, P96 to P99, P913 to EVDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V -10.5 mA 7 mA EVDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 10.5 mA EVDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V 5.6 mA P915, PCM0 to PCM3, PCS0, PCS1, PCT0, PCT1, PCT4, PCT6, PDL0 to PDL15 Output current, low Per pin for P00 to P06, P30 to P35, P40 to IOL1 P42, P50 to P55, P90, P91, P96 to P99, P913 to P915, PCM0 to PCM3, PCS0, PCS1, PCT0, PCT1, PCT4, PCT6, PDL0 to PDL15 Per pin for P38, P39 Total of P00 to P06, P30 to P35, P40 to P42 21 mA Total of P38, P39, P50 to P55, P90, P91, P96 21 mA to P99, P913 to P915, PCM0 to PCM3, PCS0, PCS1, PCT0, PCT1, PCT4, PCT6, PDL0 to PDL15 Input voltage, high VIH1 Note 1 0.7EVDD EVDD V VIH2 Note 2 0.8EVDD EVDD V VIH3 P70 to P77 0.7AVREF0 AVREF0 V VIH4 X1, X2, XT1, XT2 VDD - 0.5 VDD V VIL1 Note 1 EVSS 0.3EVDD V VIL2 Note 2 EVSS 0.2EVDD V P70 to P77 AVSS 0.3AVREF0 V VSS 0.4 V Note 3 Input voltage, low VIL3 Note 3 VIL4 X1, X2, XT1, XT2 Notes 1. P00, P01, P30, P41, P98, PCM0 to PCM3, PCS0, PCS1, PCT0, PCT1, PCT4, PCT6, PDL0 to PDL15 and their alternate-function pins. 2. RESET, P02 to P06, P31 to P35, P38, P39, P40, P42, P50 to P55, P90, P91, P96, P97, P99, P913 to P915 and their alternate-function pins. 3. When the external clock is used. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 807 CHAPTER 31 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS) DC Characteristics (TA = -40 to +125C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 3.5 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V) (2/3) Parameter Output voltage, high Symbol VOH1 Conditions MIN. IOH = -1.4 mA, Note 1 TYP. MAX. Unit EVDD - 1.0 EVDD V EVDD - 0.5 EVDD V 0 0.8 V 0 2.0 V 0 1.0 V EVDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V IOH = -0.07 mA, Note 2 EVDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V Output voltage, low VOL1 Note 3 VOL2 P38, P39 IOL = 1.4 mA Note 4 IOL = 10.5 mA, EVDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V IOL = 5.6 mA, EVDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V Input leakage current, high ILIH VIN = VDD 10.0 A Input leakage current, low ILIL VIN = 0 V -10.0 A Output leakage current, high ILOH VO = VDD 10.0 A Output leakage current, low ILOL VO = 0 V -10.0 A Pull-up resistor RL VIN = 0 V 120 k 10 30 Notes 1. Total of P00 to P06, P30 to P35, P40 to P42 and their alternate-function pins: IOH = -21 mA, total of P50 to P55, P90, P91, P96 to P99, P913 to P915, PCM0 to PCM3, PCS0, PCS1, PCT0, PCT1, PCT4, PCT6, PDL0 to PDL15 and their alternate-function pins: IOH = -21 mA. 2. Total of P00 to P06, P30 to P35, P40 to P42 and their alternate-function pins: IOH = -10.5 mA, total of P50 to P55, P90, P91, P96 to P99, P913 to P915, PCM0 to PCM3, PCS0, PCS1, PCT0, PCT1, PCT4, PCT6, PDL0 to PDL15 and their alternate-function pins: IOH = -10.5 mA. 3. Total of P00 to P06, P30 to P35, P40 to P42 and their alternate-function pins: IOL = 21 mA, total of P38, P39, P50 to P55, P90, P91, P96 to P99, P913 to P915, PCM0 to PCM3, PCS0, PCS1, PCT0, PCT1, PCT4, PCT6, PDL0 to PDL15 and their alternate-function pins: IOL = 21 mA. 4. Refer to IOL1 for IOL of P38 and P39. 808 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 31 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS) DC Characteristics (TA = -40 to +125C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 3.5 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V) (3/3) Parameter Supply current Note Symbol IDD1 Conditions Normal fXX = 16 MHz (fX = 4 MHz) operation (in PLL mode) All peripheral REGC = VDD = 5 V 10% functions fXX = 16 MHz (fX = 4 MHz) operating (in PLL mode) MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit 30 43 mA 18 33 mA 17 26 mA 10 21 mA 900 3700 A 600 2900 A 70 2060 A 15 1960 A 0.1 1930 A REGC = 10 F VDD = 5 V 10% IDD2 HALT mode fXX = 16 MHz (fX = 4 MHz) All peripheral (in PLL mode) functions REGC = VDD = 5 V 10% operating fXX = 16 MHz (fX = 4 MHz) (in PLL mode) REGC = 10 F VDD = 5 V 10% IDD3 IDLE mode fX = 4 MHz Watch timer (when PLL mode off) operating REGC = VDD = 5 V 10% fX = 4 MHz (when PLL mode off) REGC = 10 F VDD = 5 V 10% IDD4 Subclock fXT = 32.768 kHz operating Main clock stopped mode IDD5 Subclock IDLE fXT = 32.768 kHz mode Main clock stopped, STOP mode Subclock stopped watch timer operating IDD6 (XT1 = VSS, when PSMR.XTSTP bit = 1) Note Total current of VDD and EVDD (all ports stopped). AVREF0 is not included. Remark fXX: Main clock frequency fX: Main clock oscillation frequency fXT: Subclock frequency User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 809 CHAPTER 31 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS) Data Retention Characteristics STOP Mode (TA = -40 to +125C) Parameter Symbol Data retention voltage VDDDR STOP release signal input time tDREL Conditions MIN. STOP mode TYP. 2.0 MAX. Unit 5.5 V s 0 Caution Shifting to STOP mode and restoring from STOP mode must be performed within the rated operating range. STOP mode setting Operating voltage lower limit VDD VDDDR RESET (input) STOP mode release interrupt (NMI, etc.) (Released by falling edge) STOP mode release interrupt (NMI, etc.) (Released by rising edge) 810 STOP release signal input User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD tDREL CHAPTER 31 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS) AC Characteristics AC Test Input Measurement Points (VDD, AVREF0, EVDD) VDD VIH VIH Measurement points 0V VIL VIL AC Test Output Measurement Points VOH VOH Measurement points VOL VOL Load Conditions DUT (Device under measurement) CL = 50 pF Caution If the load capacitance exceeds 50 pF due to the circuit configuration, bring the load capacitance of the device to 50 pF or less by inserting a buffer or by some other means. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 811 CHAPTER 31 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS) CLKOUT Output Timing (TA = -40 to +125C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 3.5 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V, CL = 50 pF) Parameter Symbol Output cycle tCYK <1> High-level width tWKH <2> Low-level width Rise time Fall time tWKL <3> tKR <4> tKF <5> Conditions MIN. MAX. 62.5 ns 30.6 s VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V tCYK/2 - 18 ns VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V tCYK/2 - 26 ns VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V tCYK/2 - 18 ns VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V tCYK/2 - 26 ns VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 18 ns VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V 26 ns VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 18 ns VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V 26 ns Clock Timing <1> <2> <3> CLKOUT (output) <4> 812 Unit User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD <5> CHAPTER 31 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS) Basic Operation (1) Reset/external interrupt timing (TA = -40 to +125C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 3.5 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V, CL = 50 pF) Parameter Symbol RESET low-level width Conditions MIN. MAX. Unit tWRSL1 <87> Reset in power-on status 2 s tWRSL2 <88> Power-on-reset when REGC = VDD 2 s tVR > 150 s 10 s tVR 150 s Note 45 s NMI high-level width tWNIH <89> Analog noise elimination 1 s NMI low-level width tWNIL <90> Analog noise elimination 1 s INTPn high-level width tWITH <91> n = 0 to 6 (analog noise elimination) 600 ns INTPn low-level width tWITL <92> n = 0 to 6 (analog noise elimination) 600 ns Note Power-on-reset when REGC = 10 F Remarks 1. tVR: Time required for VDD to reach 0 V to 4.0 V (= operation lower-limit voltage) 2. The above specification shows the pulse width that is accurately detected as a valid edge. If a pulse narrower than the above specification is input, therefore, it may also be detected as a valid edge. Reset/Interrupt VDD <88> <87> tVR RESET (input) <89> <90> <91> <92> NMI (input) INTPn (input) Remark n = 0 to 6 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 813 CHAPTER 31 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS) Timer Timing (TA = -40 to +125C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 3.5 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V, CL = 50 pF) Parameter TI0n high-level width Symbol tTI0H <93> Conditions REGC = VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, MIN. MAX. Unit 2Tsmp0 + 100 Note ns 2Tsmp0 + 200 Note ns 2Tsmp0 + 100 Note ns 2Tsmp0 + 200 Note ns REGC = VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V TI0n low-level width tTI0L <94> REGC = VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, REGC = VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V TI5m high-level width tTI5H <95> REGC = VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V 50 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 100 ns REGC = VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V 50 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 100 ns REGC = VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V TI5m low-level width tTI5L <96> REGC = VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V Note Tsmp0: Timer 0 count clock cycle However, Tsmp0 = fXX/4 when TI0n is used as an external event count input. Remarks 1. n = 00, 01, 10, 11 m = 0, 1 2. The above specification shows the pulse width that is accurately detected as a valid edge. If a pulse narrower than the above specification is input, therefore, it may also be detected as a valid edge. Timer Input Timing <93>/<95> <94>/<96> TI0n (input) TI5m (input) Remark n = 00, 01, 10, 11 m = 0, 1 UART Timing (TA = -40 to +125C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 3.5 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V, CL = 50 pF) Parameter Symbol Conditions MAX. Unit 312.5 kbps REGC = VDD = 5 V 10% 12 MHz REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 6 MHz Transmit rate ASCK0 frequency REGC = VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V 814 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD MIN. CHAPTER 31 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS) CSI0 Timing (1) Master mode (TA = -40 to +125C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 3.5 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V, CL = 50 pF) Parameter SCK0n cycle time Symbol tKCY1 Conditions <99> MIN. MAX. Unit REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 200 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 400 ns tKCY1/2 - 30 ns REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 33 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 58 ns REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 30 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 50 ns REGC = VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V SCK0n high-/low-level width tKH1, tKL1 <100> SI0n setup time (to SCK0n) tSIK1 <101> REGC = VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V SI0n hold time (from SCK0n) tKSI1 <102> REGC = VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V Delay time from SCK0n to SO0n tKSO1 <103> output REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 30 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 60 ns MAX. Unit REGC = VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V Remark n = 0, 1 (2) Slave mode (TA = -40 to +125C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 3.5 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V, CL = 50 pF) Parameter SCK0n cycle time Symbol tKCY2 Conditions <99> MIN. REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 200 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 400 ns REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 45 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 90 ns REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 30 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 60 ns REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 30 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 60 ns REGC = VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V SCK0n high-/low-level width tKH2, tKL2 <100> REGC = VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V SI0n setup time (to SCK0n) tSIK2 <101> REGC = VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V SI0n hold time (from SCK0n) tKSI2 <102> REGC = VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V Delay time from SCK0n to SO0n output tKSO2 <103> REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 50 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 100 ns REGC = VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V Remark n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 815 CHAPTER 31 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS) (a) CSICn.CKPn, CSICn.DAPn bits = 00 or 11 <99> <100> <100> SCK0n (I/O) <101> <102> Hi-Z Hi-Z SI0n (input) Input data <103> Output data SO0n (output) (b) CSICn.CKPn, CSICn.DAPn bits = 10 or 01 <99> <100> <100> SCK0n (I/O) <101> <102> Hi-Z SI0n (input) Hi-Z Input data <103> SO0n (output) Remark 816 Output data n = 0, 1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 31 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS) CSIA Timing (1) Master mode (TA = -40 to +125C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 3.5 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V, CL = 50 pF) Parameter SCKA0 cycle time Symbol tKCY3 Conditions <104> MIN. MAX. Unit REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 500 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 1000 ns tKCY3/2 - 30 ns REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 39 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 68 ns REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 30 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 60 ns REGC = VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V SCKA0 high-/low-level width tKH3, tKL3 <105> SIA0 setup time (to SCKA0) tSIK3 <106> REGC = VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V SIA0 hold time (from SCKA0) tKSI3 <107> REGC = VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V Delay time from SCKA0 to SOA0 tKSO3 <108> output REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 30 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 60 ns MAX. Unit REGC = VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V (2) Slave mode (TA = -40 to +125C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 3.5 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V, CL = 50 pF) Parameter SCKA0 cycle time Symbol tKCY4 Conditions <104> MIN. REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 840 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 1700 ns tKCY4/2 - 30 ns REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V 50 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 100 ns REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V tCY x 2 + 15 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, tCY x 2 + 30 ns REGC = VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V SCKA0 high-/low-level width tKH4, tKL4 <105> SIA0 setup time (to SCKA0) tSIK4 <106> REGC = VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V <R> SIA0 hold time (from SCKA0) tKSI4 <107> <R> REGC = VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V Delay time from SCKA0 to SOA0 output tKSO4 <108> REGC = VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V tCY x 2 + 30 ns REGC = 10 F, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, tCY x 2 + 60 ns Note Note REGC = VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V Note tCY: fSCKA cycle User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 817 CHAPTER 31 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS) <104> <105> <105> SCKA0 (I/O) <106> <107> Hi-Z Hi-Z SIA0 (input) Input data <108> Output data SOA0 (output) 818 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 31 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS) I2C Bus Mode (Y Products (Products with On-Chip I2C) Only) (TA = -40 to +125C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 3.5 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V, CL = 50 pF) Parameter Symbol Normal Mode High-Speed Mode Unit MIN. MAX. MIN. MAX. 0 100 0 400 kHz SCL0 clock frequency fCLK Bus free time tBUF <109> 4.7 - 1.3 - s tHD:STA <110> 4.0 - 0.6 - s SCL0 clock low-level width tLOW <111> 4.7 - 1.3 - s SCL0 clock high-level width tHIGH <112> 4.0 - 0.6 - s Setup time for start/restart tSU:STA <113> 4.7 - 0.6 - s tHD:DAT <114> 5.0 - - - s (Between start and stop conditions) Hold time Note 1 conditions CBUS compatible Data hold time master 2 I C mode Data setup time SDA0 and SCL0 signal rise time 0 tSU:DAT tR - Note 2 <115> 250 <116> - Note 2 0 - 1000 0.9 Note 3 s - ns 20 + 0.1Cb Note 5 300 ns 20 + 0.1Cb Note 5 300 ns Note 4 100 SDA0 and SCL0 signal fall time tF <117> - 300 Stop condition setup time tSU:STO <118> 4.0 - 0.6 - s Pulse width of spike suppressed by tSP <119> - - 0 50 ns - 400 - 400 pF input filter Capacitance load of each bus line Cb Notes 1. At the start condition, the first clock pulse is generated after the hold time. 2. The system requires a minimum of 300 ns hold time internally for the SDA0 signal (at VIHmin. of SCL0 signal) in order to occupy the undefined area at the falling edge of SCL0. 3. If the system does not extend the SCL0 signal low hold time (tLOW), only the maximum data hold time (tHD:DAT) needs to be satisfied. 4. The high-speed mode I2C bus can be used in the normal-mode I2C bus system. In this case, set the highspeed mode I2C bus so that it meets the following conditions. * If the system does not extend the SCL0 signal's low state hold time: tSU:DAT 250 ns * If the system extends the SCL0 signal's low state hold time: Transmit the following data bit to the SDA0 line prior to the SCL0 line release (tRmax. + tSU:DAT = 1000 + 250 = 1250 ns: Normal mode I2C bus specification). 5. Cb: Total capacitance of one bus line (unit: pF) User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 819 CHAPTER 31 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS) I2C Bus Mode (Y Products (Products with On-Chip I2C) Only) <111> <112> SCL0 (I/O) <117> <116> <114> <115> <113> <110> <119> <118> <110> SDA0 (I/O) <109> Stop condition 820 <116> <117> Start condition Restart condition User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD Stop condition CHAPTER 31 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS) A/D Converter (TA = -40 to +125C, VDD = EVDD = AVREF0 = 3.5 to 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V) Parameter Symbol Conditions Resolution MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit 10 10 10 bit 0.2 0.7 %FSR 0.3 4.0 AVREF0 5.5 V Note 1 Overall error 3.5 AVREF0 4.0 V Conversion time tCONV Note 1 Zero-scale error Full-scale error Note 1 Non-linearity error Note 2 Differential linearity error Note 2 Analog input voltage VIAN AVREF0 current IAREF0 0.9 %FSR 4.0 AVREF0 5.5 V 14 60 s 3.5 AVREF0 4.0 V 17 60 s 4.0 AVREF0 5.5 V 0.7 %FSR 3.5 AVREF0 4.0 V 0.9 %FSR 4.0 AVREF0 5.5 V 0.7 %FSR 3.5 AVREF0 4.0 V 0.9 %FSR 4.0 AVREF0 5.5 V 5.5 LSB 3.5 AVREF0 4.0 V 7.5 LSB 4.0 AVREF0 5.5 V 2.5 LSB 3.5 AVREF0 4.0 V 3.0 LSB AVREF0 V 1.0 2.0 mA 1.0 10 A 0 When using A/D converter Note 3 When not using A/D converter Notes 1. Excluding quantization error (0.05 %FSR). 2. Excluding quantization error (0.5 LSB). 3. ADM.ADCS bit = 0, ADM.ADCS2 bit = 0 Remark LSB: Least Significant Bit FSR: Full Scale Range User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 821 CHAPTER 32 PACKAGE DRAWINGS 80-PIN PLASTIC QFP (14x14) A B 60 61 41 40 detail of lead end S C D R Q 80 1 21 20 F J G I H M P K S N S L M NOTE Each lead centerline is located within 0.13 mm of its true position (T.P.) at maximum material condition. ITEM MILLIMETERS A 17.200.20 B 14.000.20 C 14.000.20 D 17.200.20 F 0.825 G 0.825 H I 0.320.06 0.13 J 0.65 (T.P.) K 1.600.20 L 0.800.20 M 0.17 +0.03 -0.07 N P 0.10 1.400.10 Q 0.1250.075 R 3 +7 -3 S 1.70 MAX. P80GC-65-8BT-1 822 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 32 PACKAGE DRAWINGS 80-PIN PLASTIC TQFP (FINE PITCH) (12x12) A B 60 41 61 40 detail of lead end S C D P T 80 R 21 1 20 U Q F G L H I J M K S N S M NOTE ITEM Each lead centerline is located within 0.08 mm of its true position (T.P.) at maximum material condition. A MILLIMETERS 14.00.2 B 12.00.2 C 12.00.2 D F 14.00.2 1.25 G 1.25 H 0.220.05 I 0.08 J 0.5 (T.P.) K L 1.00.2 0.5 M 0.1450.05 N 0.08 P 1.0 Q 0.10.05 R 3 +4 -3 S 1.10.1 T 0.25 U 0.60.15 P80GK-50-9EU-1 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 823 CHAPTER 33 RECOMMENDED SOLDERING CONDITIONS The V850ES/KF1 should be soldered and mounted under the following recommended conditions. For soldering methods and conditions other than those recommended below, contact an NEC Electronics sales representative. For technical information, see the following website. Semiconductor Device Mount Manual (http://www.necel.com/pkg/en/mount/index.html) Table 33-1. Surface Mounting Type Soldering Conditions (1/7) (1) PD703208GK-xxx-9EU: PD703208YGK-xxx-9EU: PD703209GK-xxx-9EU: PD703209YGK-xxx-9EU: PD703210GK-xxx-9EU: PD703210YGK-xxx-9EU: PD70F3210GK-9EU: PD70F3210YGK-9EU: Soldering Method 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) Soldering Conditions Recommended Condition Symbol Infrared reflow Package peak temperature: 235C, Time: 30 seconds max. (at 210C or higher), Count: Two times or less, Exposure limit: 7 days Note IR35-107-2 (after that, prebake at 125C for 10 to 72 hours) Package peak temperature: 215C, Time: 25 to 40 seconds (at 200C or higher), VPS Count: Two times or less, Exposure limit: 7 days Note VP15-107-2 (after that, prebake at 125C for 10 to 72 hours) Partial heating Pin temperature: 350C max., Time: 3 seconds max. (per pin row) - Note After opening the dry pack, store it at 25C or less and 65% RH or less for the allowable storage period. Caution Do not use different soldering methods together (except for partial heating). Remark Soldering conditions for the special grade (A), (A1), and (A2) products are the same as for the standard grade products. 824 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 33 RECOMMENDED SOLDERING CONDITIONS Table 33-1. Surface Mounting Type Soldering Conditions (2/7) (2) PD703208GC-xxx-8BT: PD703208YGC-xxx-8BT: PD703209GC-xxx-8BT: PD703209YGC-xxx-8BT: PD703210GC-xxx-8BT: PD703210YGC-xxx-8BT: PD70F3210GC-8BT: PD70F3210YGC-8BT: 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) Soldering Method Soldering Conditions Recommended Condition Symbol Infrared reflow Package peak temperature: 235C, Time: 30 seconds max. (at 210C or higher), Count: Two times or less, Exposure limit: 7 days Note IR35-107-2 (after that, prebake at 125C for 10 to 72 hours) Package peak temperature: 215C, Time: 25 to 40 seconds (at 200C or higher), VPS Count: Two times or less, Exposure limit: 7 days Note VP15-107-2 (after that, prebake at 125C for 10 to 72 hours) Wave soldering Solder bath temperature: 260C max., Time: 10 seconds max., Count: Once, WS60-107-1 Preheating temperature: 120C max. (package surface temperature), Note Exposure limit: 7 days Partial heating (after that, prebake at 125C for 10 hours) Pin temperature: 350C max., Time: 3 seconds max. (per pin row) - Note After opening the dry pack, store it at 25C or less and 65% RH or less for the allowable storage period. Caution Do not use different soldering methods together (except for partial heating). Remark Soldering conditions for the special grade (A1) and (A2) products are the same as for the standard grade products. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 825 CHAPTER 33 RECOMMENDED SOLDERING CONDITIONS Table 33-1. Surface Mounting Type Soldering Conditions (3/7) <R> (3) PD703208(A)GC-xxx-8BT: PD703208Y(A)GC-xxx-8BT: PD703209(A)GC-xxx-8BT: PD703209Y(A)GC-xxx-8BT: PD703210(A)GC-xxx-8BT: PD703210Y(A)GC-xxx-8BT: PD70F3210(A)GC-8BT: PD70F3210Y(A)GC-8BT: Soldering Method 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) Soldering Conditions Recommended Condition Symbol Infrared reflow Package peak temperature: 260C, Time: 60 seconds max. (at 220C or higher), Count: Three times or less, Exposure limit: 3 days Note IR60-203-3 (after that, prebake at 125C for 20 to 72 hours) Wave soldering Supported. For details, contact an NEC Electronics sales representative. - Partial heating Pin temperature: 350C max., Time: 3 seconds max. (per pin row) - Note After opening the dry pack, store it at 25C or less and 65% RH or less for the allowable storage period. Caution Do not use different soldering methods together (except for partial heating). 826 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 33 RECOMMENDED SOLDERING CONDITIONS Table 33-1. Surface Mounting Type Soldering Conditions (4/7) <R> (4) PD703208GK-xxx-9EU-A: PD703208YGK-xxx-9EU-A: PD703209GK-xxx-9EU-A: PD703209YGK-xxx-9EU-A: PD703210GK-xxx-9EU-A: PD703210YGK-xxx-9EU-A: PD703208(A)GK-xxx-9EU-A: PD703208Y(A)GK-xxx-9EU-A: PD703209(A)GK-xxx-9EU-A: PD703209Y(A)GK-xxx-9EU-A: PD703210(A)GK-xxx-9EU-A: PD703210Y(A)GK-xxx-9EU-A: 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) Soldering Method Soldering Conditions Recommended Condition Symbol Infrared reflow Package peak temperature: 260C, Time: 60 seconds max. (at 220C or higher), Count: Three times or less, Exposure limit: 3 days Note IR60-203-3 (after that, prebake at 125C for 20 to 72 hours) Partial heating Pin temperature: 350C max., Time: 3 seconds max. (per pin row) - Note After opening the dry pack, store it at 25C or less and 65% RH or less for the allowable storage period. Caution Do not use different soldering methods together (except for partial heating). Remarks 1. Products with -A at the end of the part number are lead-free products. 2. For soldering methods and conditions other than those recommended above, please contact an NEC Electronics sales representative. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 827 CHAPTER 33 RECOMMENDED SOLDERING CONDITIONS Table 33-1. Surface Mounting Type Soldering Conditions (5/7) <R> (5) PD703208GC-xxx-8BT-A: PD703208YGC-xxx-8BT-A: PD703209GC-xxx-8BT-A: PD703209YGC-xxx-8BT-A: PD703210GC-xxx-8BT-A: PD703210YGC-xxx-8BT-A: PD70F3210GC-8BT-A: PD70F3210YGC-8BT-A: PD703208(A)GC-xxx-8BT-A: PD703208Y(A)GC-xxx-8BT-A: PD703209(A)GC-xxx-8BT-A: PD703209Y(A)GC-xxx-8BT-A: PD703210(A)GC-xxx-8BT-A: PD703210Y(A)GC-xxx-8BT-A: PD70F3210(A)GC-8BT-A: PD70F3210Y(A)GC-8BT-A: 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) Soldering Method Soldering Conditions Recommended Condition Symbol Infrared reflow Package peak temperature: 260C, Time: 60 seconds max. (at 220C or higher), Count: Three times or less, Exposure limit: 7 days Note IR60-207-3 (after that, prebake at 125C for 20 to 72 hours) Wave soldering Supported. For details, contact an NEC Electronics sales representative. - Partial heating Pin temperature: 350C max., Time: 3 seconds max. (per pin row) - Note After opening the dry pack, store it at 25C or less and 65% RH or less for the allowable storage period. Caution Do not use different soldering methods together (except for partial heating). Remarks 1. Products with -A at the end of the part number are lead-free products. 2. For soldering methods and conditions other than those recommended above, please contact an NEC Electronics sales representative. 828 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD CHAPTER 33 RECOMMENDED SOLDERING CONDITIONS Table 33-1. Surface Mounting Type Soldering Conditions (6/7) <R> (6) PD70F3210GK-9EU-A: PD70F3210YGK-9EU-A: PD70F3210(A)GK-9EU-A: PD70F3210Y(A)GK-9EU-A: 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) Soldering Method Soldering Conditions Recommended Condition Symbol Infrared reflow Package peak temperature: 260C, Time: 60 seconds max. (at 220C or higher), Count: Three times or less, Exposure limit: 7 days Note IR60-207-3 (after that, prebake at 125C for 20 to 72 hours) Partial heating Pin temperature: 350C max., Time: 3 seconds max. (per pin row) - Note After opening the dry pack, store it at 25C or less and 65% RH or less for the allowable storage period. Caution Do not use different soldering methods together (except for partial heating). Remarks 1. Products with -A at the end of the part number are lead-free products. 2. For soldering methods and conditions other than those recommended below, please contact an NEC Electronics sales representative. <R> (7) PD70F3210HGC-8BT-A: PD70F3210HYGC-8BT-A: PD70F3211HGC-8BT-A: PD70F3211HYGC-8BT-A: 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) Soldering Method Soldering Conditions Recommended Condition Symbol Infrared reflow Package peak temperature: 260C, Time: 60 seconds max. (at 220C or higher), Count: Three times or less, Exposure limit: 7 days Note IR60-207-3 (after that, prebake at 125C for 20 to 72 hours) Wave soldering Supported. For details, contact an NEC Electronics sales representative. - Partial heating Pin temperature: 350C max., Time: 3 seconds max. (per pin row) - Note After opening the dry pack, store it at 25C or less and 65% RH or less for the allowable storage period. Caution Do not use different soldering methods together (except for partial heating). Remarks 1. Products with -A at the end of the part number are lead-free products. 2. For soldering methods and conditions other than those recommended above, please contact an NEC Electronics sales representative. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 829 CHAPTER 33 RECOMMENDED SOLDERING CONDITIONS Table 33-1. Surface Mounting Type Soldering Conditions (7/7) <R> (8) PD70F3210HGK-9EU-A: PD70F3210HYGK-9EU-A: 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) PD70F3211HGK-9EU-A: PD70F3211HYGK-9EU-A: 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) Soldering Method Soldering Conditions Recommended Condition Symbol Infrared reflow Package peak temperature: 260C, Time: 60 seconds max. (at 220C or higher), Count: Three times or less, Exposure limit: 7 days Note IR60-207-3 (after that, prebake at 125C for 20 to 72 hours) Partial heating Pin temperature: 350C max., Time: 3 seconds max. (per pin row) - Note After opening the dry pack, store it at 25C or less and 65% RH or less for the allowable storage period. Caution Do not use different soldering methods together (except for partial heating). Remarks 1. Products with -A at the end of the part number are lead-free products. 2. For soldering methods and conditions other than those recommended above, please contact an NEC Electronics sales representative. (9) PD703211GC-xxx-8BT-A: PD703211YGC-xxx-8BT-A: PD703211GK-xxx-9EU-A: PD703211YGK-xxx-9EU-A: 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) 80-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14) 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 x 12) Undefined 830 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD APPENDIX A DEVELOPMENT TOOLS The following development tools are available for the development of systems that employ the V850ES/KF1. Figure A-1 shows the development tool configuration. * Support for PC98-NX series Unless otherwise specified, products supported by IBM PC/ATTM compatibles are compatible with PC98-NX series computers. When using PC98-NX series computers, refer to the explanation for IBM PC/AT compatibles. * WindowsTM Unless otherwise specified, "Windows" means the following OSs. * Windows 98 * Windows 2000 * Windows Me * Windows XP * Windows NTTM Ver. 4.0 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 831 APPENDIX A DEVELOPMENT TOOLS Figure A-1. Development Tool Configuration (1/2) (1) When using in-circuit emulator (IE-V850ES-G1, IE-V850ESK1-ET, QB-V850ESKX1H) Software package Debugging software Language processing software * C compiler package * Integrated debugger * Device file * System simulator Control software * Project manager Embedded software (Windows only)Note 1 * Real-time OS * Network library * File system Host machine (PC or EWS) Interface adapterNote 2 Power supply unit Flash memory write environment In-circuit emulator (IE-V850ES-G1)Note 3 (IE-V850ESK1-ET)Note 4 (QB-V850ESKX1H)Note 5 Flash programmer Flash memory write adapter Flash memory Conversion socket or conversion adapter Target system Notes 1. The project manager PM+ is included in the C compiler package. PM+ is only used for Windows. 2. QB-V850ESKX1H supports USB only. 3. Products other than in-circuit emulator IE-V850ES-G1 are all sold separately. 4. In-circuit emulator IE-V850ESK1-ET is supplied with integrated debugger ID850, a device file, power supply unit, PCI bus interface adapter IE-70000-PCI-IF-A, and emulation probe. Any other products are sold separately. 5. In-circuit emulator QB-V850ESKX1H is supplied with integrated debugger ID850QB, flash memory programmer (PG-FPL), power supply unit, and USB interface adapter. Any other products are sold separately. 832 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD APPENDIX A DEVELOPMENT TOOLS Figure A-1. Development Tool Configuration (2/2) <R> (2) When using MINICUBE (QB-V850MINI) Software package Debugging software Language processing software * C compiler package * Integrated debugger * Device file * System simulator Control software * Project manager Embedded software (Windows only)Note 1 * Real-time OS * Network library * File system Host machine (PC or EWS) Interface adapterNote 2 Flash memory write environment MINICUBE (QB-V850MINI)Note 3 Flash programmer Flash memory write adapter Debug adapter (QB-V850ESKX1-DA) Flash memory Conversion socket or conversion adapter Target system Notes 1. The project manager PM+ is included in the C compiler package. PM+ is only used for Windows. 2. QB-V850MINI supports USB interface only. 3. QB-V850MINI is supplied with integrated debugger ID850QB, USB interface cable, OCD cable, selfcheck board, KEL adapter, and KEL connector. Any other products are sold separately. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 833 APPENDIX A DEVELOPMENT TOOLS A.1 Software Package SP850 Development tools (software) common to the V850 Series are combined in this package. V850 Series software package Part number: SxxxxSP850 Remark xxxx in the part number differs depending on the host machine and OS used. SxxxxSP850 xxxx Host Machine OS AB17 PC-9800 series, Windows (Japanese version) BB17 IBM PC/AT compatibles Windows (English version) Supply Medium CD-ROM A.2 Language Processing Software CA850 This compiler converts programs written in C language into object codes executable with C compiler package a microcontroller. This compiler is started from project manager PM+. Part number: SxxxxCA703000 DF703218 This file contains information peculiar to the device. Device file This device file should be used in combination with a tool (CA850, SM850, and ID850). The corresponding OS and host machine differ depending on the tool to be used. Remark xxxx in the part number differs depending on the host machine and OS used. SxxxxCA703000 xxxx Host Machine OS AB17 PC-9800 series, Windows (Japanese version) BB17 IBM PC/AT compatibles Windows (English version) 3K17 SPARCstation TM SunOS TM TM Solaris Supply Medium CD-ROM (Rel. 4.1.4), (Rel. 2.5.1) A.3 Control Software PM+ This is control software designed to enable efficient user program development in the Project manager Windows environment. All operations used in development of a user program, such as starting the editor, building, and starting the debugger, can be performed from PM+. <Caution> PM+ is included in the C compiler package CA850. It can only be used in Windows. 834 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD APPENDIX A DEVELOPMENT TOOLS A.4 Debugging Tools (Hardware) A.4.1 When using in-circuit emulator IE-V850ES-G1 IE-V850ES-G1 The in-circuit emulator serves to debug hardware and software when developing In-circuit emulator application systems using a V850 Series product. It corresponds to the integrated debugger ID850. This emulator should be used in combination with a power supply unit, emulation probe, and the interface adapter required to connect this emulator to the host machine. IE-70000-CD-IF-A This is PC card and interface cable required when using a notebook-type computer PC card interface as the host machine (PCMCIA socket compatible). IE-70000-PCI-IF-A This adapter is required when using a computer with a PCI bus as the host machine. Interface adapter IE-703210-G1-EM1 This board emulates the operations of the peripheral hardware peculiar to a device. It Emulation board should be used in combination with an in-circuit emulator. GXP-CABLE This probe is used to connect the in-circuit emulator and target system. This is Emulation probe supplied with emulation board IE-703210-G1-EM1. Remark EV-703210GC This conversion adapter is used to connect the emulation probe and target system Conversion adapter board on which an 80-pin plastic QFP (GC-8BT type) can be mounted. EV-703210GK This conversion adapter is used to connect the emulation probe and target system Conversion adapter board on which an 80-pin plastic TQFP (GK-9EU type) can be mounted. EV-703210GC and EV-703210GK are products of Application Corporation. TEL: +81-42-732-1377 Application Corporation A.4.2 When using in-circuit emulator IE-V850ESK1-ET IE-V850ESK1-ET Note The in-circuit emulator serves to debug hardware and software when developing In-circuit emulator application systems using a V850ES/KF1 product. It corresponds to the integrated debugger ID850. This emulator should be used in combination with a power supply unit, emulation probe, and the interface adapter required to connect this emulator to the host machine. IE-70000-PCI-IF-A This adapter is required when using a computer with a PCI bus as the host machine. Interface adapter This is supplied with IE-V850ESK1-ET. Emulation probe This probe is used to connect the in-circuit emulator and target system. This is supplied with IE-V850ESK1-ET. EV-703210GC This conversion adapter is used to connect the emulation probe and target system Conversion adapter board on which an 80-pin plastic QFP (GC-8BT type) can be mounted. EV-703210GK This conversion adapter is used to connect the emulation probe and target system Conversion adapter board on which an 80-pin plastic TQFP (GK-9EU type) can be mounted. Note IE-V850ESK1-ET is supplied with a power supply unit and PCI bus interface adapter IE-70000-PCI-IF-A. It is also supplied with integrated debugger ID850 and a device file as control software. Remark EV-703210GC and EV-703210GK are products of Application Corporation. TEL: +81-42-732-1377 Application Corporation User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 835 APPENDIX A DEVELOPMENT TOOLS (R) <R> A.4.3 When using IECUBE QB-V850ESKX1H The system configuration when connecting the QB-V850ESKX1H to the host machine (PC-9821 series, PC/AT compatible) is shown below. If no option products are prepared, connection is possible. Figure A-2. System Configuration (QB-V850ESKX1H Used) (1/2) <3> <4> <1> <5> <2> <6> <7> <8> : Option products <9> <11> <10> <12> <13> <1> Host machine (PC-9821 series, IBM-PC/AT compatibles) <2> Debugger, USB driver, manuals, etc. (ID850QB Disk, Accessory DiskNote 1) <3> USB interface cable <4> AC adapter <5> In-circuit emulator (QB-V850ESKX1H) <6> Extension probe coaxial type (QB-144-EP-01S) (option) <7> Extension probe flexible typeNote 2 (QB-144-EP-02S) (option) <8> Exchange adapterNote 3 (QB-80GK-EA-01S (for GK package), QB-80GC-EA-02S (for GC package)) <9> Check pin adapterNote 4 (QB-80-CA-01S) (option) <10> Space adapterNote 4 (QB-80-SA-01S) (option) <11> Mount adapter (QB-80GK-MA-01S (for GK package), QB-80GC-MA-01S (for GC package)) (option) <12> Target connectorNote 3 (QB-80GK-TC-01S (for GK package), QB-80GC-TC-01S (for GC package)) <13> Target system 836 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD APPENDIX A DEVELOPMENT TOOLS Figure A-2. System Configuration (QB-V850ESKX1H Used) (2/2) Notes 1. Obtain the device file from the NEC Electronics website. http://www.necel.com/micro/ods/eng/index.html 2. 3. Under development Depending on the ordering number, supplied with the device. * When QB-V850ESKX1H-ZZZ is ordered The exchange adapter and the target connector are not supplied. * When QB-V850ESKX1H-S80GK is ordered The QB-80GK-EA-01S and QB-80GK-TC-01S are supplied. * When QB-V850ESKX1H-S80GC is ordered The QB-80GC-EA-02S and QB-80GC-TC-01S are supplied. 4. When using both <9> and <10>, the order between <9> and <10> is not cared. Note <5> QB-V850ESKX1H In-circuit emulator The in-circuit emulator serves to debug hardware and software when developing application systems using a V850ES/KF1 product. It corresponds to the integrated debugger ID850QB. This emulator should be used in combination with a power supply unit and emulation probe. Use USB to connect this emulator to the host machine. <3> USB interface cable Cable to connect the host machine and the QB-V850ESKX1H. <4> AC adapter 100 to 240 V can be supported by replacing the AC plug. <8> QB-80GK-EA-01S, Adapter to perform pin conversion. QB-80GC-EA-02S * QB-80GK-EA-01S: 80-pin plastic TQFP (GK-9EU type) Exchange adapter * QB-80GC-EA-02S: 80-pin plastic QFP (GC-8BT type) <9> QB-80-CA-01S Adapter used in waveform monitoring using the oscilloscope, etc. Check pin adapter <10> QB-80-SA-01S Adapter to adjust the height. Space adapter <11> QB-80GK-MA-01S, Adapter to mount the V850ES/KF1 with socket. QB-80GC-MA-01S * QB-80GK-MA-01S: 80-pin plastic TQFP (GK-9EU type) Mount adapter * QB-80GC-MA-01S: 80-pin plastic QFP (GC-8BT type) <12> QB-80GK-TC-01S, Connector to solder on the target system. QB-80GC-TC-01S * QB-80GK-TC-01S: 80-pin plastic TQFP (GK-9EU type) Target connector * QB-80GC-TC-01S: 80-pin plastic QFP (GC-8BT type) Note QB-V850ESKX1H is supplied with a power supply unit, USB interface cable, and flash memory programmer (PG-FPL). It is also supplied with integrated debugger ID850QB as control software. Remark The numbers in the square brackets correspond to the numbers in Figure A-2. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 837 APPENDIX A DEVELOPMENT TOOLS <R> A.4.4 When using MINICUBE QB-V850MINI (1) Debug emulation by using MINICUBE and QB-V850ESKX1-DA The system configuration when connecting the MINICUBE and the debug adapter QB-V850ESKX1-DA to the host machine (PC-9821 series, PC/AT compatible) is shown below. If no option products are prepared, connection is possible. Figure A-3. System Configuration by Using QB-V850ESKX1-DA (Option Products Used) <1> <3> <4> STATUS TARGET POWER <2> <5> <6> : Option products <7> <12> <8> V850ES/KF1 <9> <12> <10> <11> Target system 838 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD APPENDIX A DEVELOPMENT TOOLS Figure A-4. System Configuration by Using QB-V850ESKX1-DA (Option Products Not Used) <1> <3> <4> <5> TARGET <6> POWER STATUS <2> <9> <11> Target system <1> Host machine Note <2> CD-ROM PC with USB ports The integrated debugger ID850QB, N-Wire Checker, device driver, documents and so on in the CD-ROM format are included. It is supplied with the MINICUBE. <3> USB interface cable Cable for USB to connect the host machine and the MINICUBE. It is supplied with the MINICUBE. The cable length is approximately 2 m. <4> MINICUBE On-chip debug emulator This on-chip debug emulator serves to debug hardware and software when developing application systems using a V850ES/KF1 product. It corresponds to the integrated debugger ID850QB. <5> OCD cable Cable to connect the MINICUBE and the target system. It is supplied with the MINICUBE. The cable length is approximately 20 cm. <6> QB-V850ESKX1-DA Debug adapter <7> QB-144-CA-01S (option) This operates as an in-circuit emulator by using in combination with the MINICUBE. It is supplied with the MINICUBE. Adapter used in waveform monitoring using the oscilloscope, etc. Check pin adapter <8> QB-144-EP-01S (option) Extension probe coaxial type <9> QB-80GC-EA-02S, Probe to connect the QB-V850ESKX1-DA and the exchange adapter. The cable length is approximately 40 cm. Adapter to perform pin conversion. QB-80GK-EA-01S * QB-80GC-EA-02S: 80-pin plastic QFP (GC-8BT type) Exchange adapter * QB-80GK-EA-01S: 80-pin plastic TQFP (GK-9EU type) <10> QB-80-SA-01S (option) Adapter to adjust the height. Space adapter <11> QB-80GC-TC-01S, Connector to solder on the target system. QB-80GK-TC-01S * QB-80GC-TC-01S: 80-pin plastic QFP (GC-8BT type) Target connector * QB-80GK-TC-01S: 80-pin plastic TQFP (GK-9EU type) <12> QB-80GC-MA-01S (option), Adapter to mount the V850ES/KF1 with socket. QB-80GK-MA-01S (option) * QB-80GC-MA-01S: 80-pin plastic QFP (GC-8BT type) Mount adapter * QB-80GK-MA-01S: 80-pin plastic TQFP (GK-9EU type) Note Obtain the device file from the NEC Electronics website. http://www.necel.com/micro/ods/eng/index.html Remark The numbers in the square brackets correspond to the numbers in Figures A-3 and A-4. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 839 APPENDIX A DEVELOPMENT TOOLS A.5 Debugging Tools (Software) Note This is a system simulator for the V850 Series. The SM850 is Windows-based software. System simulator It is used to perform debugging at the C source level or assembler level while simulating SM850 the operation of the target system on a host machine. Use of the SM850 allows the execution of application logical testing and performance testing on an independent basis from hardware development, thereby providing higher development efficiency and software quality. It should be used in combination with the device file (sold separately). Part number: SxxxxSM703000 (SM850) ID850 This debugger supports the in-circuit emulators for the V850 Series. The ID850 and Integrated debugger ID850QB are Windows-based software. (supporting in-circuit emulators It has improved C-compatible debugging functions and can display the results of tracing IE-V850ES-G1 and IE-V850ESK1-ET) with the source program using an integrating window function that associates the source ID850QB program, disassemble display, and memory display with the trace result. Integrated debugger It should be used in combination with the device file (sold separately). (supporting in-circuit emulator Part number: SxxxxID703000 (ID850), SxxxxID703000-QB (ID850QB) QB-V850ESKX1H) Note Under development Remark xxxx in the part number differs depending on the host machine and OS used. SxxxxSM703000 SxxxxID703000 SxxxxID703000-QB xxxx 840 Host Machine OS AB17 PC-9800 series, Windows (Japanese version) BB17 IBM PC/AT compatibles Windows (English version) User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD Supply Medium CD-ROM APPENDIX A DEVELOPMENT TOOLS A.6 Embedded Software RX850, RX850 Pro The RX850 and RX850 Pro are real-time OSs conforming to ITRON 3.0 specifications. Real-time OS A tool (configurator) for generating multiple information tables is supplied. RX850 Pro has more functions than RX850. Part number: SxxxxRX703000- (RX850) SxxxxRX703100- (RX850 Pro) V850mini-NET (provisional name) This is a network library conforming to RFC. (Network library) It is a lightweight TCP/IP of compact design, requiring only a small memory. In addition to the TCP/IP standard set, an HTTP server, SMTP client, and POP client are also supported. RX-FS850 This is a FAT file system function. (File system) It is a file system that supports the CD-ROM file system function. This file system is used with the real-time OS RX850 Pro. Caution To purchase the RX850 or RX850 Pro, first fill in the purchase application form and sign the user agreement. Remark xxxx and in the part number differ depending on the host machine and OS used. SxxxxRX703000- SxxxxRX703100- Maximum Number for Use in Mass Production 001 Evaluation object Do not use for mass-produced product. 100K Mass-production object 0.1 million units 001M 1 million units 010M 10 million units S01 xxxx Product Outline Source program Object source program for mass production Host Machine OS AB17 PC-9800 series, Windows (Japanese version) BB17 IBM PC/AT compatibles Windows (English version) 3K17 SPARCstation Solaris (Rel. 2.5.1) Supply Medium CD-ROM A.7 Flash Memory Writing Tools Flashpro IV Flash programmer dedicated to microcontrollers with on-chip flash memory. (part number: PG-FP4) Flash programmer FA-80GC-8BT-A Flash memory writing adapter used connected to Flashpro IV. Flash memory writing adapter * FA-80GC-8BT-A: For 80-pin plastic QFP (GC-8BT type) FA-80GK-9EU-A Flash memory writing adapter used connected to Flashpro IV. Flash memory writing adapter * FA-80GK-9EU-A: For 80-pin plastic TQFP (GK-9EU type) Remark FA-80GC-8BT-A and FA-80GK-9EU-A are products of Naito Densei Machida Mfg. Co., Ltd. TEL: +81-45-475-4191 Naito Densei Machida Mfg. Co., Ltd. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 841 APPENDIX B INSTRUCTION SET LIST B.1 Conventions (1) Register symbols used to describe operands Register Symbol Explanation reg1 General-purpose registers: Used as source registers. reg2 General-purpose registers: Used mainly as destination registers. Also used as source register in some instructions. reg3 General-purpose registers: Used mainly to store the remainders of division results and the higher 32 bits of multiplication results. bit#3 3-bit data for specifying the bit number immX X bit immediate data dispX X bit displacement data regID System register number vector 5-bit data that specifies the trap vector (00H to 1FH) cccc 4-bit data that shows the condition codes sp Stack pointer (r3) ep Element pointer (r30) listX X item register list (2) Register symbols used to describe opcodes Register Symbol Explanation R 1-bit data of a code that specifies reg1 or regID r 1-bit data of the code that specifies reg2 w 1-bit data of the code that specifies reg3 d 1-bit displacement data I 1-bit immediate data (indicates the higher bits of immediate data) i 1-bit immediate data cccc 4-bit data that shows the condition codes CCCC 4-bit data that shows the condition codes of Bcond instruction bbb 3-bit data for specifying the bit number L 1-bit data that specifies a program register in the register list 842 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD APPENDIX B INSTRUCTION SET LIST (3) Register symbols used in operations Register Symbol Explanation Input for GR [ ] General-purpose register SR [ ] System register zero-extend (n) Expand n with zeros until word length. sign-extend (n) Expand n with signs until word length. load-memory (a, b) Read size b data from address a. store-memory (a, b, c) Write data b into address a in size c. load-memory-bit (a, b) Read bit b of address a. store-memory-bit (a, b, c) Write c to bit b of address a. saturated (n) Execute saturated processing of n (n is a 2's complement). If, as a result of calculations, n 7FFFFFFFH, let it be 7FFFFFFFH. n 80000000H, let it be 80000000H. result Reflects the results in a flag. Byte Byte (8 bits) Halfword Halfword (16 bits) Word Word (32 bits) + Addition - Subtraction ll Bit concatenation x Multiplication / Division % Remainder from division results AND Logical product OR Logical sum XOR Exclusive OR NOT Logical negation logically shift left by Logical shift left logically shift right by Logical shift right arithmetically shift right by Arithmetic shift right (4) Register symbols used in execution clock Register Symbol i Explanation If executing another instruction immediately after executing the first instruction (issue). r If repeating execution of the same instruction immediately after executing the first instruction (repeat). l If using the results of instruction execution in the instruction immediately after the execution (latency). User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 843 APPENDIX B INSTRUCTION SET LIST (5) Register symbols used in flag operations Identifier Explanation (Blank) No change 0 Clear to 0 X Set or cleared in accordance with the results. R Previously saved values are restored. (6) Condition codes Condition Code Condition Formula Explanation (cccc) 0 0 0 0 OV = 1 Overflow 1 0 0 0 OV = 0 No overflow 0 0 0 1 CY = 1 Carry Lower (Less than) 1 0 0 1 No carry CY = 0 Not lower (Greater than or equal) 0 0 1 0 Z=1 Zero 1 0 1 0 Z=0 Not zero 0 0 1 1 (CY or Z) = 1 Not higher (Less than or equal) 1 0 1 1 (CY or Z) = 0 Higher (Greater than) 0 1 0 0 S=1 Negative 1 1 0 0 S=0 Positive - 0 1 0 1 844 Always (Unconditional) 1 1 0 1 SAT = 1 Saturated 0 1 1 0 (S xor OV) = 1 Less than signed 1 1 1 0 (S xor OV) = 0 Greater than or equal signed 0 1 1 1 ((S xor OV) or Z) = 1 Less than or equal signed 1 1 1 1 ((S xor OV) or Z) = 0 Greater than signed User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD APPENDIX B INSTRUCTION SET LIST B.2 Instruction Set (in Alphabetical Order) (1/6) Mnemonic Operand Opcode Operation Execution Flags Clock ADD ADDI i r l CY OV S Z SAT r r rr r0 01 11 0 RRRRR GR[reg2]GR[reg2]+GR[reg1] 1 1 1 x x x x imm5,reg2 rrrrr010010iiiii GR[reg2]GR[reg2]+sign-extend(imm5) 1 1 1 x x x x imm16,reg1,reg2 r r rr r1 10 00 0 RRRRR GR[reg2]GR[reg1]+sign-extend(imm16) 1 1 1 x x x x reg1,reg2 i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i AND reg1,reg2 r r rr r0 01 01 0 RRRRR GR[reg2]GR[reg2]AND GR[reg1] 1 1 1 0 x x ANDI imm16,reg1,reg2 r r rr r1 10 11 0 RRRRR GR[reg2]GR[reg1]AND zero-extend(imm16) 1 1 1 0 x x 2 2 2 i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i Bcond disp9 ddddd1011dddcccc if conditions are satisfied Note 1 then PCPC+sign-extend(disp9) When conditions are satisfied When conditions Note 2 Note 2 Note 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 x 0 x x 1 1 1 x 0 x x 4 4 4 3 3 3 are not satisfied BSH reg2,reg3 rrrrr11111100000 GR[reg3]GR[reg2] (23 : 16) ll GR[reg2] (31 : 24) ll wwwww01101000010 GR[reg2] (7 : 0) ll GR[reg2] (15 : 8) BSW reg2,reg3 rrrrr11111100000 GR[reg3]GR[reg2] (7 : 0) ll GR[reg2] (15 : 8) ll GR wwwww01101000000 [reg2] (23 : 16) ll GR[reg2] (31 : 24) CALLT imm6 0000001000iiiiii CTPCPC+2(return PC) CTPSWPSW adrCTBP+zero-extend(imm6 logically shift left by 1) PCCTBP+zero-extend(Load-memory(adr,Halfword)) CLR1 bit#3,disp16[reg1] 10bbb111110RRRRR adrGR[reg1]+sign-extend(disp16) dddddddddddddddd Z flagNot(Load-memory-bit(adr,bit#3)) x Note 3 Note 3 Note 3 Store-memory-bit(adr,bit#3,0) reg2,[reg1] r r rr r1 11 11 1 RRRRR adrGR[reg1] 0000000011100100 Z flagNot(Load-memory-bit(adr,reg2)) 3 3 x 3 Note 3 Note 3 Note 3 Store-memory-bit(adr,reg2,0) CMOV cccc,imm5,reg2,reg3 r r r r r 1 1 1 1 1 1 i i i i i wwwww011000cccc0 if conditions are satisfied 1 1 1 1 1 1 then GR[reg3]sign-extended(imm5) else GR[reg3]GR[reg2] cccc,reg1,reg2,reg3 r r rr r1 11 11 1 RRRR if conditions are satisfied wwwww011001cccc0 then GR[reg3]GR[reg1] else GR[reg3]GR[reg2] CMP CTRET DBRET reg1,reg2 r r rr r0 01 11 1 RRRRR resultGR[reg2]-GR[reg1] 1 1 1 x x x x imm5,reg2 rrrrr010011iiiii resultGR[reg2]-sign-extend(imm5) 1 1 1 x x x x 0000011111100000 PCCTPC 3 3 3 R R R R R 0000000101000100 PSWCTPSW 0000011111100000 PCDBPC 3 3 3 R R R R R 0000000101000110 PSWDBPSW User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 845 APPENDIX B INSTRUCTION SET LIST (2/6) Mnemonic Operand Opcode Operation Execution Flags Clock DBTRAP 1111100001000000 DBPCPC+2 (restored PC) i r l 3 3 3 1 1 1 CY OV S Z SAT DBPSWPSW PSW.NP1 PSW.EP1 PSW.ID1 PC00000060H DI 0000011111100000 PSW.ID1 0000000101100000 DISPOSE imm5,list12 0000011001iiiiiL spsp+zero-extend(imm5 logically shift left by 2) n+1 n+1 n+1 LLLLLLLLLLL00000 GR[reg in list12]Load-memory(sp,Word) Note 4 Note 4 Note 4 spsp+4 repeat 2 steps above until all regs in list12 is loaded imm5,list12,[reg1] 0000011001iiiiiL spsp+zero-extend(imm5 logically shift left by 2) LLLLLLLLLLLRRRRR GR[reg in list12]Load-memory(sp,Word) n+3 n+3 n+3 Note 4 Note 4 Note 4 Note 5 spsp+4 repeat 2 steps above until all regs in list12 is loaded PCGR[reg1] DIV reg1,reg2,reg3 r r rr r1 11 11 1 RRRRR GR[reg2]GR[reg2]/GR[reg1] 35 35 35 x x x wwwww01011000000 GR[reg3]GR[reg2]%GR[reg1] DIVH reg1,reg2 reg1,reg2,reg3 r r rr r0 00 01 0 RRRRR GR[reg2]GR[reg2]/GR[reg1]Note 6 35 35 35 x x x r r rr r1 11 11 1 RRRRR Note 6 35 35 35 x x x 34 34 34 x x x 34 34 34 x x x 0 x x GR[reg2]GR[reg2]/GR[reg1] wwwww01010000000 GR[reg3]GR[reg2]%GR[reg1] DIVHU reg1,reg2,reg3 r r rr r1 11 11 1 RRRRR GR[reg2]GR[reg2]/GR[reg1]Note 6 wwwww01010000010 GR[reg3]GR[reg2]%GR[reg1] DIVU reg1,reg2,reg3 r r rr r1 11 11 1 RRRRR GR[reg2]GR[reg2]/GR[reg1] wwwww01011000010 GR[reg3]GR[reg2]%GR[reg1] EI 1000011111100000 PSW.ID0 1 1 1 Stop 1 1 1 GR[reg3]GR[reg2](15 : 0) ll GR[reg2] (31 : 16) 1 1 1 rrrrr11110dddddd GR[reg2]PC+4 2 2 2 ddddddddddddddd0 PCPC+sign-extend(disp22) 0000000101100000 HALT 0000011111100000 0000000100100000 HSW reg2,reg3 rrrrr11111100000 wwwww01101000100 JARL disp22,reg2 Note 7 JMP [reg1] 00000000011RRRRR PCGR[reg1] 3 3 3 JR disp22 0000011110dddddd PCPC+sign-extend(disp22) 2 2 2 1 1 Note 1 1 Note ddddddddddddddd0 Note 7 LD.B LD.BU disp16[reg1],reg2 disp16[reg1],reg2 r r rr r1 11 00 0 RRRRR adrGR[reg1]+sign-extend(disp16) dddddddddddddddd GR[reg2]sign-extend(Load-memory(adr,Byte)) r r rr r1 11 10 b RRRRR adrGR[reg1]+sign-extend(disp16) dddddddddddddd1 GR[reg2]zero-extend(Load-memory(adr,Byte)) Notes 8, 10 846 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 11 11 x APPENDIX B INSTRUCTION SET LIST (3/6) Mnemonic Operand Opcode Operation Execution Flags Clock LD.H disp16[reg1],reg2 rrrrr111001RRRRR adrGR[reg1]+sign-extend(disp16) ddddddddddddddd0 GR[reg2]sign-extend(Load-memory(adr,Halfword)) i r l 1 1 Note CY OV S Z SAT 11 Note 8 LDSR reg2,regID rrrrr111111RRRRR SR[regID]GR[reg2] 0000000000100000 Other than regID = PSW 1 1 1 regID = PSW 1 1 1 1 1 Note x x x x 0 x x x Note 12 LD.HU disp16[reg1],reg2 r r rr r1 11 11 1 RRRRR adrGR[reg1]+sign-extend(disp16) ddddddddddddddd1 GR[reg2]zero-extend(Load-memory(adr,Halfword) 11 Note 8 LD.W disp16[reg1],reg2 r r rr r1 11 00 1 RRRRR adrGR[reg1]+sign-extend(disp16) ddddddddddddddd1 GR[reg2]Load-memory(adr,Word) 1 1 Note 11 Note 8 MOV reg1,reg2 r r rr r0 00 00 0 RRRRR GR[reg2]GR[reg1] 1 imm5,reg2 rrrrr010000iiiii GR[reg2]sign-extend(imm5) imm32,reg1 00000110001RRRRR GR[reg1]imm32 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 GR[reg2]GR[reg1]+sign-extend(imm16) 1 1 1 GR[reg2]GR[reg1]+(imm16 ll 016) 1 1 1 GR[reg3] ll GR[reg2]GR[reg2]xGR[reg1] 1 4 5 GR[reg3] ll GR[reg2]GR[reg2]xsign-extend(imm9) 1 4 5 GR[reg2]GR[reg2]Note 6xGR[reg1]Note 6 i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i IIIIIIIIIIIIIIII MOVEA imm16,reg1,reg2 r r rr r1 10 00 1 RRRRR i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i MOVHI imm16,reg1,reg2 r r rr r1 10 01 0 RRRRR i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i MUL reg1,reg2,reg3 r r rr r1 11 11 1 RRRRR wwwww01000100000 Note 14 imm9,reg2,reg3 rrrrr111111iiiii wwwww01001IIII 00 Note 13 MULH reg1,reg2 imm5,reg2 MULHI imm16,reg1,reg2 r r rr r0 00 11 1 RRRRR rrrrr010111iiiii r r rr r1 10 11 1 RRRRR 1 1 2 GR[reg2]GR[reg2] Note 6 1 1 2 GR[reg2]GR[reg1] Note 6 1 1 2 1 4 5 1 4 5 xsign-extend(imm5) ximm16 i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i MULU reg1,reg2,reg3 r r rr r1 11 11 1 RRRRR GR[reg3] ll GR[reg2]GR[reg2]xGR[reg1] wwwww01000100010 Note 14 imm9,reg2,reg3 rrrrr111111iiiii GR[reg3] ll GR[reg2]GR[reg2]xzero-extend(imm9) wwwww01001IIII 10 Note 13 NOP NOT reg1,reg2 NOT1 bit#3,disp16[reg1] 0000000000000000 Pass at least one clock cycle doing nothing. 1 1 1 r r rr r0 00 00 1 RRRRR 1 1 1 3 3 3 GR[reg2]NOT(GR[reg1]) 01bbb111110RRRRR adrGR[reg1]+sign-extend(disp16) dddddddddddddddd Z flagNot(Load-memory-bit(adr,bit#3)) x Note 3 Note 3 Note 3 Store-memory-bit(adr,bit#3,Z flag) reg2,[reg1] r r rr r1 11 11 1 RRRRR adrGR[reg1] 0000000011100010 Z flagNot(Load-memory-bit(adr,reg2)) 3 3 3 x Note 3 Note 3 Note 3 Store-memory-bit(adr,reg2,Z flag) User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 847 APPENDIX B INSTRUCTION SET LIST (4/6) Mnemonic Operand Opcode Operation Execution Flags Clock OR reg1,reg2 ORI imm16,reg1,reg2 i r l CY OV S Z SAT r r rr r0 01 00 0 RRRRR GR[reg2]GR[reg2]OR GR[reg1] 1 1 1 0 x x r r rr r1 10 10 0 RRRRR GR[reg2]GR[reg1]OR zero-extend(imm16) 1 1 1 0 x x i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i PREPARE list12,imm5 0000011110iiiiiL Store-memory(sp-4,GR[reg in list12],Word) LLLLLLLLLLL00001 spsp-4 n+1 n+1 n+1 Note 4 Note 4 Note 4 repeat 1 step above until all regs in list12 is stored spsp-zero-extend(imm5) list12,imm5, 0000011110iiiiiL Store-memory(sp-4,GR[reg in list12],Word) sp/immNote 15 LLLLLLLLLLLff011 spsp+4 imm16/imm32 repeat 1 step above until all regs in list12 is stored Note 16 spsp-zero-extend (imm5) epsp/imm RETI 0000011111100000 if PSW.EP=1 0000000101000000 then PC n+2 n+2 n+2 Note 4 Note 4 Note 4 Note17 Note17 Note17 3 3 3 R R R R 1 1 1 x 0 x x 1 1 1 x 0 x x 1 1 1 R EIPC PSW EIPSW else if PSW.NP=1 then PC FEPC PSW FEPSW else PC EIPC PSW EIPSW SAR reg1,reg2 imm5,reg2 r r rr r1 11 11 1 RRRRR GR[reg2]GR[reg2]arithmetically shift right 0000000010100000 by GR[reg1] rrrrr010101iiiii GR[reg2]GR[reg2]arithmetically shift right by zero-extend (imm5) SASF cccc,reg2 rrrrr1111110cccc if conditions are satisfied 0000001000000000 then GR[reg2](GR[reg2]Logically shift left by 1) OR 00000001H else GR[reg2](GR[reg2]Logically shift left by 1) OR 00000000H reg1,reg2 r r rr r0 00 11 0 RRRRR GR[reg2]saturated(GR[reg2]+GR[reg1]) 1 1 1 x x x x x imm5,reg2 rrrrr010001iiiii GR[reg2]saturated(GR[reg2]+sign-extend(imm5)) 1 1 1 x x x x x SATSUB reg1,reg2 r r rr r0 00 10 1 RRRRR GR[reg2]saturated(GR[reg2]-GR[reg1]) 1 1 1 x x x x x SATSUBI imm16,reg1,reg2 r r rr r1 10 01 1 RRRRR GR[reg2]saturated(GR[reg1]-sign-extend(imm16)) 1 1 1 x x x x x x x x x x SATADD i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i SATSUBR reg1,reg2 r r rr r0 00 10 0 RRRRR GR[reg2]saturated(GR[reg1]-GR[reg2]) 1 1 1 SETF rrrrr1111110cccc If conditions are satisfied 1 1 1 0000000000000000 then GR[reg2]00000001H cccc,reg2 else GR[reg2]00000000H 848 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD APPENDIX B INSTRUCTION SET LIST (5/6) Mnemonic Operand Opcode Operation Execution Flags Clock SET1 bit#3,disp16[reg1] 00bbb111110RRRRR adrGR[reg1]+sign-extend(disp16) dddddddddddddddd Z flagNot (Load-memory-bit(adr,bit#3)) i r l 3 3 3 CY OV S Z SAT x Note 3 Note 3 Note 3 Store-memory-bit(adr,bit#3,1) reg2,[reg1] r r rr r1 11 11 1 RRRRR adrGR[reg1] 0000000011100000 Z flagNot(Load-memory-bit(adr,reg2)) 3 3 x 3 Note 3 Note 3 Note 3 Store-memory-bit(adr,reg2,1) SHL reg1,reg2 r r rr r1 11 11 1 RRRRR GR[reg2]GR[reg2] logically shift left by GR[reg1] 1 1 1 x 0 x x GR[reg2]GR[reg2] logically shift left 1 1 1 x 0 x x GR[reg2]GR[reg2] logically shift right by GR[reg1] 1 1 1 x 0 x x GR[reg2]GR[reg2] logically shift right 1 1 1 x 0 x x 1 1 Note 9 1 1 Note 9 1 1 Note 9 1 1 Note 9 1 1 Note 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0000000011000000 imm5,reg2 rrrrr010110iiiii by zero-extend(imm5) SHR reg1,reg2 r r rr r1 11 11 1 RRRRR 0000000010000000 imm5,reg2 rrrrr010100iiiii by zero-extend(imm5) SLD.B disp7[ep],reg2 rrrrr0110ddddddd adrep+zero-extend(disp7) GR[reg2]sign-extend(Load-memory(adr,Byte)) SLD.BU disp4[ep],reg2 r r r r r 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 d d d d adrep+zero-extend(disp4) Note 18 GR[reg2]zero-extend(Load-memory(adr,Byte)) SLD.H disp8[ep],reg2 r r r r r 1 0 0 0 d d d d d d d adrep+zero-extend(disp8) Note 19 GR[reg2]sign-extend(Load-memory(adr,Halfword)) SLD.HU disp5[ep],reg2 r r r r r 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 d d d d adrep+zero-extend(disp5) Notes 18, 20 GR[reg2]zero-extend(Load-memory(adr,Halfword)) SLD.W disp8[ep],reg2 r r r r r 1 0 1 0 d d d d d d 0 adrep+zero-extend(disp8) Note 21 GR[reg2]Load-memory(adr,Word) SST.B reg2,disp7[ep] rrrrr0111ddddddd adrep+zero-extend(disp7) Store-memory(adr,GR[reg2],Byte) SST.H reg2,disp8[ep] r r r r r 1 0 0 1 d d d d d d d adrep+zero-extend(disp8) Note 19 Store-memory(adr,GR[reg2],Halfword) SST.W reg2,disp8[ep] r r r r r 1 0 1 0 d d d d d d 1 adrep+zero-extend(disp8) Note 21 Store-memory(adr,GR[reg2],Word) ST.B ST.H reg2,disp16[reg1] reg2,disp16[reg1] r r rr r1 11 01 0 RRRRR adrGR[reg1]+sign-extend(disp16) dddddddddddddddd Store-memory(adr,GR[reg2],Byte) r r rr r1 11 01 1 RRRRR adrGR[reg1]+sign-extend(disp16) ddddddddddddddd0 Store-memory (adr,GR[reg2], Halfword) Note 8 ST.W reg2,disp16[reg1] rrrrr111011RRRRR adrGR[reg1]+sign-extend(disp16) ddddddddddddddd1 Store-memory (adr,GR[reg2], Word) Note 8 STSR regID,reg2 r r rr r1 11 11 1 RRRRR GR[reg2]SR[regID] 0000000001000000 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 849 APPENDIX B INSTRUCTION SET LIST (6/6) Mnemonic Operand Opcode Operation Execution Flags Clock SUB reg1,reg2 r r rr r0 01 10 1 RRRRR GR[reg2]GR[reg2]-GR[reg1] SUBR reg1,reg2 r r rr r0 01 10 0 RRRRR GR[reg2]GR[reg1]-GR[reg2] SWITCH reg1 00000000010RRRRR adr(PC+2) + (GR [reg1] logically shift left by 1) i r l 1 1 1 x x x x x x x x 0 x x 1 1 1 5 5 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 1 1 1 3 3 3 CY OV S Z SAT PC(PC+2) + (sign-extend (Load-memory (adr,Halfword)) logically shift left by 1 SXB reg1 00000000101RRRRR GR[reg1]sign-extend (GR[reg1] (7 : 0)) SXH reg1 00000000111RRRRR GR[reg1]sign-extend (GR[reg1] (15 : 0)) TRAP vector 00000111111iiiii EIPC PC+4 (Restored PC) 0000000100000000 EIPSW PSW ECR.EICC Interrupt code PSW.EP 1 PSW.ID 1 PC 00000040H (when vector is 00H to 0FH) 00000050H (when vector is 10H to 1FH) TST reg1,reg2 TST1 bit#3,disp16[reg1] reg2, [reg1] r r rr r0 01 01 1 RRRRR resultGR[reg2] AND GR[reg1] 11bbb111110RRRRR adrGR[reg1]+sign-extend(disp16) dddddddddddddddd Z flagNot (Load-memory-bit (adr,bit#3)) r r rr r1 11 11 1 RRRRR adrGR[reg1] 0000000011100110 Z flagNot (Load-memory-bit (adr,reg2)) x Note 3 Note 3 Note 3 3 3 x 3 Note 3 Note 3 Note 3 XOR reg1,reg2 r r rr r0 01 00 1 RRRRR GR[reg2]GR[reg2] XOR GR[reg1] 1 1 1 0 x x XORI imm16,reg1,reg2 r r rr r1 10 10 1 RRRRR GR[reg2]GR[reg1] XOR zero-extend (imm16) 1 1 1 0 x x i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i ZXB reg1 00000000100RRRRR GR[reg1]zero-extend (GR[reg1] (7 : 0)) 1 1 1 ZXH reg1 00000000110RRRRR GR[reg1]zero-extend (GR[reg1] (15 : 0)) 1 1 1 Notes 1. 2. dddddddd: Higher 8 bits of disp9. 3 if there is an instruction that rewrites the contents of the PSW immediately before. 3. If there is no wait state (3 + the number of read access wait states). 4. n is the total number of list12 load registers. (According to the number of wait states. Also, if there 5. RRRRR: other than 00000. are no wait states, n is the total number of list12 registers. If n = 0, same operation as when n = 1) 6. The lower halfword data only are valid. 7. ddddddddddddddddddddd: The higher 21 bits of disp22. 8. ddddddddddddddd: The higher 15 bits of disp16. 9. According to the number of wait states (1 if there are no wait states). 10. b: bit 0 of disp16. 11. According to the number of wait states (2 if there are no wait states). 850 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD APPENDIX B INSTRUCTION SET LIST Notes 12. In this instruction, for convenience of mnemonic description, the source register is made reg2, but the reg1 field is used in the opcode. Therefore, the meaning of register specification in the mnemonic description and in the opcode differs from other instructions. rrrrr = regID specification RRRRR = reg2 specification 13. i i i i i : Lower 5 bits of imm9. I I I I : Higher 4 bits of imm9. 14. Do not specify the same register for general-purpose registers reg1 and reg3. 15. sp/imm: specified by bits 19 and 20 of the sub-opcode. 16. ff = 00: Load sp in ep. 01: Load sign expanded 16-bit immediate data (bits 47 to 32) in ep. 10: Load 16-bit logically left shifted 16-bit immediate data (bits 47 to 32) in ep. 11: Load 32-bit immediate data (bits 63 to 32) in ep. 17. If imm = imm32, n + 3 clocks. 18. r r r r r : Other than 00000. 19. ddddddd: Higher 7 bits of disp8. 20. dddd: Higher 4 bits of disp5. 21. dddddd: Higher 6 bits of disp8. User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 851 APPENDIX C REGISTER INDEX (1/6) Symbol ADCR Name A/D conversion result register Unit ADC Page 420 ADIC Interrupt control register INTC 615 ADM A/D converter mode register ADC 417 ADS Analog input channel specification register ADC 419 ADTC0 Automatic data transfer address count register 0 CSI 496 ADTI0 Automatic data transfer interval specification register 0 CSI 502 ADTP0 Automatic data transfer address point specification register 0 CSI 500 ASIF0 Asynchronous serial interface transmit status register 0 UART 442 ASIF1 Asynchronous serial interface transmit status register 1 UART 442 ASIM0 Asynchronous serial interface mode register 0 UART 439 ASIM1 Asynchronous serial interface mode register 1 UART 439 ASIS0 Asynchronous serial interface status register 0 UART 441 ASIS1 Asynchronous serial interface status register 1 UART 441 AWC Address wait control register BCU 165 BCC Bus cycle control register BCU 166 BRGC0 Baud rate generator control register 0 UART 460 BRGC1 Baud rate generator control register 1 UART 460 BRGCA0 Divisor selection register 0 CSI 500 BRGIC Interrupt control register INIC 615 BSC Bus size configuration register BCU 155 CKSR0 Clock select register 0 UART 459 CKSR1 Clock select register 1 UART 459 CMP00 8-bit timer H compare register 00 Timer 362 CMP01 8-bit timer H compare register 01 Timer 363 CMP10 8-bit timer H compare register 10 Timer 362 CMP11 8-bit timer H compare register 11 Timer 363 CORAD0 Correction address register 0 ROMC 665 CORAD1 Correction address register 1 ROMC 665 CORAD2 Correction address register 2 ROMC 665 CORAD3 Correction address register 3 ROMC 665 CORCN Correction control register ROMC 666 CR000 16-bit timer capture/compare register 000 Timer 274 CR001 16-bit timer capture/compare register 001 Timer 275 CR010 16-bit timer capture/compare register 010 Timer 274 CR011 16-bit timer capture/compare register 011 Timer 275 CR5 16-bit timer compare register 5 Timer 344, 350, 353 CR50 8-bit timer compare register 50 Timer 344 CR51 8-bit timer compare register 51 Timer 344 852 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD APPENDIX C REGISTER INDEX (2/6) Symbol Name Unit Page CRC00 Capture/compare control register 00 Timer 280 CRC01 Capture/compare control register 01 Timer 280 CSI0IC0 Interrupt control register INTC 615 CSI0IC1 Interrupt control register INTC 615 CSIA0Bn CSIA0 buffer RAMn (n = 0 to F) CSI 502 CSIAIC0 Interrupt control register INTC 615 CSIC0 Clocked serial interface clock selection register 0 CSI 472 CSIC1 Clocked serial interface clock selection register 1 CSI 472 CSIM00 Clocked serial interface mode register 00 CSI 470 CSIM01 Clocked serial interface mode register 01 CSI 470 CSIMA0 Serial operation mode specification register 0 CSI 497 CSIS0 Serial status register 0 CSI 498 CSIT0 Serial trigger register 0 CSI 499 CTPC CALLT execution status saving register CPU 56 CTPSW CALLT execution status saving register CPU 56 DBPC Exception/debug trap status saving register CPU 57 DBPSW Exception/debug trap status saving register CPU 57 DWC0 Data wait control register 0 BCU 163 ECR Interrupt source register CPU 54 EIPC Interrupt status saving register CPU 53 EIPSW Interrupt status saving register CPU 53 FEPC NMI status saving register CPU 54 FEPSW NMI status saving register CPU 54 IIC0 IIC shift register 0 IC IICC0 IICCL0 IIC control register 0 2 542 2 529 2 539 2 IC IIC clock selection register 0 IC IICF0 IIC flag register 0 IC 537 IICIC0 Interrupt control register INTC 615 IICS0 IIC status register 0 2 534 2 IC IICX0 IIC function expansion register 0 IC 540 IMR0 Interrupt mask register 0 INTC 617 IMR1 Interrupt mask register 1 INTC 617 IMR3 Interrupt mask register 3 INTC 617 INTF0 External interrupt falling edge specification register 0 INTC 622 INTF9H External interrupt falling edge specification register 9H INTC 623 INTR0 External interrupt rising edge specification register 0 INTC 622 INTR9H External interrupt rising edge specification register 9H INTC 623 ISPR In-service priority register INTC 618 KRIC Interrupt control register INTC 615 KRM Key return mode register KR 636 OSTS Oscillation stabilization time selection register Standby 642 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 853 APPENDIX C REGISTER INDEX (3/6) Symbol Name Unit Page P0 Port 0 register Port 93 P0NFC TIP00 noise elimination control register Timer 296 P1NFC TIP01 noise elimination control register Timer 296 P3 Port 3 register Port 96 P4 Port 4 register Port 100 P5 Port 5 register Port 102 P7 Port 7 register Port 105 P9 Port 9 register Port 107 PC Program counter CPU 51 PCC Processor clock control register CG 177 PCM Port CM register Port 112 PCS Port CS register Port 114 PCT Port CT register Port 115 PDL Port DL register Port 118 PF3H Port 3 function register H Port 98 PF4 Port 4 function register Port 101 PF5 Port 5 function register Port 103 PF9H Port 9 function register H Port 109 PFC3 Port 3 function control register Port 98 PFC5 Port 5 function control register Port 104 PFC9 Port 9 function control register Port 109 PFCE3 Port 3 function control expansion register Port 99 PFM Power fail comparison mode register ADC 442 PFT Power fail comparison threshold register ADC 442 PIC0 Interrupt control register INTC 615 PIC1 Interrupt control register INTC 615 PIC2 Interrupt control register INTC 615 PIC3 Interrupt control register INTC 615 PIC4 Interrupt control register INTC 615 PIC5 Interrupt control register INTC 615 PIC6 Interrupt control register INTC 615 PLLCTL PLL control register CG 182, 412 PM0 Port 0 mode register Port 93 PM3 Port 3 mode register Port 96 PM4 Port 4 mode register Port 100 PM5 Port 5 mode register Port 102 PM9 Port 9 mode register Port 107 PMC0 Port 0 mode control register Port 94 PMC3 Port 3 mode control register Port 97 PMC4 Port 4 mode control register Port 101 PMC5 Port 5 mode control register Port 103 854 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD APPENDIX C REGISTER INDEX (4/6) Symbol Name Unit Page PMC9 Port 9 mode control register Port 108 PMCCM Port CM mode control register Port 113 PMCCS Port CS mode control register Port 114 PMCCT Port CT mode control register Port 116 PMCDL Port DL mode control register Port 119 PMCM Port CM mode register Port 112 PMCS Port CS mode register Port 114 PMCT Port CT mode register Port 115 PMDL Port DL mode register Port 118 PRCMD Command register CPU 80 PRM00 Prescaler mode register 00 Timer 283 PRM01 Prescaler mode register 01 Timer 283 PRSCM Interval timer BRG compare register Timer 387 PRSM Interval timer BRG mode register Timer 386 PSC Power save control register Standby 640 PSMR Power save mode register Standby 641 PU0 Pull-up resistor option register 0 Port 94 PU3 Pull-up resistor option register 3 Port 99 PU4 Pull-up resistor option register 4 Port 101 PU5 Pull-up resistor option register 5 Port 104 PU9 Pull-up resistor option register 9 Port 111 r0 to r31 General-purpose registers CPU 51 RTBH0 Real-time output buffer register H0 RTP 406 RTBL0 Real-time output buffer register L0 RTP 406 RTPC0 Real-time output port control register 0 RTP 408 RTPM0 Real-time output port mode register 0 RTP 407 RXB0 Receive buffer register 0 UART 443 RXB1 Receive buffer register 1 UART 443 SIO00 Serial I/O shift register 0 CSI 477 SIO01 Serial I/O shift register 1 CSI 477 SIOA0 Serial I/O shift register A0 CSI 496 SIOA1 Serial I/O shift register A1 CSI 496 SIRB0 Clocked serial interface receive buffer register 0 CSI 473 SIRB0L Clocked serial interface receive buffer register 0L CSI 473 SIRB1 Clocked serial interface receive buffer register 1 CSI 473 SIRB1L Clocked serial interface receive buffer register 1L CSI 473 SIRBE0 Clocked serial interface read-only receive buffer register 0 CSI 474 SIRBE0L Clocked serial interface read-only receive buffer register 0L CSI 474 SIRBE1 Clocked serial interface read-only receive buffer register 1 CSI 474 SIRBE1L Clocked serial interface read-only receive buffer register 1L CSI 474 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 855 APPENDIX C REGISTER INDEX (5/6) Symbol Name Unit Page SOTB0 Clocked serial interface transmit buffer register 0 CSI 475 SOTB0L Clocked serial interface transmit buffer register 0L CSI 475 SOTB1 Clocked serial interface transmit buffer register 1 CSI 475 SOTB1L Clocked serial interface transmit buffer register 1L CSI 475 SOTBF0 Clocked serial interface initial transmit buffer register 0 CSI 476 SOTBF0L Clocked serial interface initial transmit buffer register 0L CSI 476 SOTBF1 Clocked serial interface initial transmit buffer register 1 CSI 476 SOTBF1L Clocked serial interface initial transmit buffer register 1L CSI 476 SREIC0 Interrupt control register INTC 615 SREIC1 Interrupt control register INTC 615 SRIC0 Interrupt control register INTC 615 SRIC1 Interrupt control register INTC 615 STIC0 Interrupt control register INTC 615 STIC1 Interrupt control register INTC SVA0 Slave address register 0 IC 542 SYS System status register CPU 80 TCL50 Timer clock selection register 50 Timer 345 TCL51 Timer clock selection register 51 Timer 345 TM00 16-bit timer counter 00 Timer 274 TM01 16-bit timer counter 01 Timer 274 TM0IC00 Interrupt control register INTC 615 TM0IC01 Interrupt control register INTC 615 TM0IC10 Interrupt control register INTC 615 TM0IC11 Interrupt control register INTC 615 TM5 16-bit timer counter 5 Timer 343 TM50 8-bit timer counter 50 Timer 343 TM51 8-bit timer counter 51 Timer 343 TM5IC0 Interrupt control register INTC 615 TM5IC1 Interrupt control register INTC 615 TMC00 16-bit timer mode control register 00 Timer 278 TMC01 16-bit timer mode control register 01 Timer 278 TMC50 8-bit timer mode control register 50 Timer 346 TMC51 8-bit timer mode control register 51 Timer 346 TMCYC0 8-bit timer H carrier control register 0 Timer 367 TMCYC1 8-bit timer H carrier control register 1 Timer 367 TMHIC0 Interrupt control register INTC 615 TMHIC1 Interrupt control register INTC 615 TMHMD0 8-bit timer H mode register 0 Timer 365 TMHMD1 8-bit timer H mode register 1 Timer 366 TOC00 16-bit timer output control register 00 Timer 281 TOC01 16-bit timer output control register 01 Timer 281 856 2 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 615 APPENDIX C REGISTER INDEX (6/6) Symbol Name Unit Page TP0CCIC0 Interrupt control register INTC 615 TP0CCIC1 Interrupt control register INTC 615 TP0CCR0 TMP0 capture/compare register 0 Timer 193 TP0CCR1 TMP0 capture/compare register 1 Timer 195 TP0CNT TMP0 counter read buffer register Timer 197 TP0CTL0 TMP0 control register 0 Timer 187 TP0CTL1 TMP0 control register 1 Timer 188 TP0IOC0 TMP0 I/O control register 0 Timer 189 TP0IOC1 TMP0 I/O control register 1 Timer 190 TP0IOC2 TMP0 I/O control register 2 Timer 191 TP0OPT0 TMP0 option register 0 Timer 192 TP0OVIC Interrupt control register INTC 615 TXB0 Transmit buffer register 0 UART 444 TXB1 Transmit buffer register 1 UART 444 VSWC System wait control register CPU 82 WDCS Watchdog timer clock selection register WDT 397 WDT1IC Interrupt control register INTC 615 WDTE Watchdog timer enable register WDT 403 WDTM1 Watchdog timer mode register 1 WDT 398, 620 WDTM2 Watchdog timer mode register 2 WDT 402 WTIC Interrupt control register INTC 615 WTIIC Interrupt control register INTC 615 WTM Watch timer operation mode register WT 390 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 857 APPENDIX D REVISION HISTORY D.1 Major Revisions in This Edition (1/3) Page Description Throughout Modification of oscillation frequency p. 26 Modification of 1.4 Ordering Information p. 45 Modification of 2.3 Pin I/O Circuits and Recommended Connection of Unused Pins p. 48 Modification of 2.4 Pin I/O Circuits p. 52 Modification of Table 3-2 System Register Numbers p. 82 Modification of 3.4.8 (1) (a) System wait control register (VSWC) p. 83 Modification of 3.4.8 (1) (b) Access to special on-chip peripheral I/O register p. 85 Modification of 3.4.8 (2) Restriction on conflict between sld instruction and interrupt request p. 88 Modification of Table 4-3 Reading to/Writing from Pn Register p. 191 Addition of Caution to 7.4 (5) TMP0 I/O control register 2 (TP0IOC2) p. 200 Modification of Figure 7-4 Register Setting for Interval Timer Mode Operation p. 209 Modification of Figure 7-10 Basic Timing in External Event Count Mode p. 213 Addition of Caution to 7.5.2 (2) Operation timing in external event count mode p. 218 Modification of Figure 7-17 Basic Timing in External Trigger Pulse Output Mode p. 218 Addition of description to 7.5.3 External trigger pulse output mode (TP0MD2 to TP0MD0 bits = 010) p. 225 Modification of figure in 7.5.3 (2) (b) 0%/100% output of PWM waveform p. 233 Modification of Figure 7-23 Software Processing Flow in One-Shot Pulse Output Mode p. 243 Modification of figure in 7.5.5 (2) (b) 0%/100% output of PWM waveform p. 263 Modification of 7.5.7 Pulse width measurement mode (TP0MD2 to TP0MD0 bits = 110) pp. 272 to 340 Modification of expression in CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER 0 p. 362 Modification of 10.2 (1) 8-bit timer H compare register n0 (CMPn0) p. 363 Modification of 10.2 (2) 8-bit timer H compare register n1 (CMPn1) p. 370 Addition of Note to Figure 10-3 Timing of Interval Timer/Square Wave Output Operation p. 378 Modification of Figure 10-6 Transfer Timing p. 379 Modification of 10.4.3 (2) Setting p. 388 Modification of 11.1.4 (1) Operation of interval timer BRG p. 402 Addition of Caution to 12.2.3 (1) Watchdog timer mode register 2 (WDTM2) p. 403 Addition of Caution to 12.2.3 (2) Watchdog timer enable register (WDTE) p. 417 Modification of 14.3 (1) A/D converter mode register (ADM) p. 419 Addition of Caution to 14.3 (2) Analog input channel specification register (ADS) p. 422 Addition of Caution to 14.3 (4) Power fail comparison mode register (PFM) p. 422 Addition of Caution to 14.3 (5) Power fail comparison threshold register (PFT) p. 424 Modification of 14.4.2 A/D conversion operation p. 426 Modification of Figure 14-5 Example of How to Reduce Power Consumption in Standby Mode 858 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD APPENDIX D REVISION HISTORY (2/3) Page Description p. 430 Addition of 14.5 (12) Variation of A/D conversion results p. 430 Addition of 14.5 (13) A/D conversion result hysteresis characteristics p. 431 Addition of 14.5 (14) Writing to register during A/D conversion p. 525 Modification of Figure 18-1 Block Diagram of I C0 pp. 529 to 533 Modification of 18.3 (1) IIC control register 0 (IICC0) 2 pp. 534, 535 Modification of 18.3 (2) IIC status register 0 (IICS0) p. 538 Modification of 18.3 (3) IIC flag register 0 (IICF0) p. 539 Modification of 18.3 (4) IIC clock selection register 0 (IICCL0) p. 540 Modification of 18.3 (5) IIC function expansion register 0 (IICX0) p. 542 Modification of 18.3 (7) IIC shift register 0 (IIC0) p. 542 Modification of 18.3 (8) Slave address register 0 (SVA0) p. 547 Modification of 18.5.4 ACK p. 551 Addition of 18.5.7 Wait state cancellation method pp. 552 to 573 Modification of 18.6 I C Interrupt Request Signals (INTIIC0) p. 576 Modification of 18.10 Extension Code p. 579 Modification of 18.13.1 When communication reservation function is enabled (IICF0.IICRSV0 bit = 0) p. 579 Modification of Table 18-6 Wait Periods p. 582 Modification of Table 18-7 Wait Periods p. 583 Addition of 18.14 Cautions pp. 584 to 591 Modification of 18.15 Communication Operations p. 590 Modification of Figure 18-18 Slave Operation Flowchart (1) p. 591 Modification of Figure 18-19 Slave Operation Flowchart (2) pp. 593 to 595 Modification of Figure 19-20 Example of Master to Slave Communication pp. 596 to 598 Modification of Figure 19-21 Example of Slave to Master Communication p. 644 Modification of Table 21-3 Operation Status in HALT Mode p. 647 Modification of Table 21-5 Operation Status in IDLE Mode p. 650 Modification of Table 21-7 Operation Status in STOP Mode p. 653 Modification of Table 21-8 Operation Status in Subclock Operation Mode p. 654 Addition of Caution to 21.7.1 Setting and operation status p. 656 Modification of Table 21-10 Operation Status in Sub-IDLE Mode p. 659 Modification of Table 22-1 Hardware Status on RESET Pin Input or Occurrence of WDTRES2 Signal p. 659 Modification of Table 22-2 Hardware Status on Occurrence of WDTRES1 Signal p. 661 Addition of Figure 22-4 Timing of Reset Operation by Watchdog Timer 1 p. 661 Addition of Figure 22-5 Timing of Reset Operation by Watchdog Timer 2 p. 662 Addition of Caution to 23.1 Overview p. 671 Modification of Table 25-2 Basic Functions p. 671 Modification of Table 25-3 Security Functions p. 672 Addition of Table 25-4 Security Setting p. 673 Addition of 25.3 (1) Security setting by PG-FP4 (Security flag settings) pp. 678, 679 Modification of Figure 25-6 Wiring Example of V850ES/KF1 Flash Writing Adapter (FA-80GC-8BT-A, FA- 2 80GK-9EU-A) User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 859 APPENDIX D REVISION HISTORY (3/3) Page Description p. 682 Modification of Table 25-7 Flash Memory Control Commands p. 689 Modification of 25.5.2 (2) Interrupt support p. 690 Modification of Figure 25-17 Standard Self Programming Flow p. 692 Modification of 25.5.6 Internal resources used pp. 695, 696 Modification of Figure 26-1 Wiring Example of V850ES/KF1 Flash Writing Adapter (FA-80GC-8BT-A, FA80GK-9EU-A) pp. 707 to 709 Addition of CHAPTER 27 ON-CHIP DEBUG FUNCTION pp. 710 to 746 Modification of CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (256 KB MASK ROM VERSION, SINGLEPOWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION) pp. 761, 762, Modification of CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS (MASK ROM 772, 775 VERSION OF 128 KB OR LESS AND TWO-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION), (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) p. 797 Modification of CHAPTER 30 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A1) GRADE PRODUCTS) p. 817 Modification of CHAPTER 31 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS) pp. 826 to 830 Modification of CHAPTER 33 RECOMMENDED SOLDERING CONDITIONS p. 833 Modification of Figure A-1 Development Tool Configuration pp. 836, 837 Modification of A.4.3 When using IECUBE QB-V850ESKX1H pp. 838, 839 Addition of A.4.4 When using MINICUBE QB-V850MINI 860 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD APPENDIX D REVISION HISTORY D.2 Modifications from Document Number U15862EJ4V1UD00 (1/2) Edition 1st Description * Extraction of only descriptions concerning V850ES/KF1 Applied to: Throughout * Addition of following products PD703211, 703211Y, 70F3210H, 70F3210HY, 70F3211H, 70F3211HY * Addition of pins supporting added products * Addition of internal ROM, RAM, and flash memory capacities of added products Modification of description in 1.7 Overview of Functions CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION Modification of description in 3.3 (2) Flash memory programming mode CHAPTER 3 CPU FUNCTIONS Addition of 3.4.4 (1) (a) Internal ROM (256 KB) Addition of 3.4.4 (2) (a) Internal RAM (12 KB) Modification of description in 3.4.6 Peripheral I/O registers Modification of description in 3.4.8 (1) (a) System wait control register (VSWC) and (b) Access to special on-chip peripheral I/O register Addition of 3.4.8 (2) Restriction on conflict between sld instruction and interrupt request Addition of 4.3 (5) Port n function control expansion register (PFCEn) CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Modification of description in Figure 4-1 Register Settings and Pin Functions Modification of description in 4.3.2 (5) Port 3 function control register (PFC3) Addition of 4.3.2 (6) Port 3 function control expansion register (PFCE3) Addition of 4.3.2 (8) Specifying alternate-function pins of port 3 Modification of Figures 4-3 to 4-26 (partial addition) Modification of description in Table 4-14 Settings When Port Pins Are Used for Alternate Functions Addition of CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) CHAPTER 7 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER P (TMP) Addition of Caution 1 in 17.3 (7) CSIA0 buffer RAM (CSIA0Bm) CHAPTER 17 CLOCKED SERIAL INTERFACE A (CSIA) WITH AUTOMATIC TRANSMIT/RECEIVE FUNCTION Modification of description in 19.9 Periods in Which Interrupts Are Not CHAPTER 19 Acknowledged by CPU INTERRUPT/EXCEPTION PROCESSING FUNCTION Modification of bit 7 in 21.2 (2) Power save mode register (PSMR) CHAPTER 21 STANDBY FUNCTION Addition of CHAPTER 25 FLASH MEMORY (SINGLE POWER) CHAPTER 25 FLASH MEMORY (SINGLE POWER) Addition of CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (256 KB MASK CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL ROM VERSION, SINGLE-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION) (TARGET) SPECIFICATIONS (SINGLEPOWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION) (TARGET) User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD 861 APPENDIX D REVISION HISTORY (2/2) Edition 1st Description Applied to: Modification of bus timing, basic operation, and timer timing in CHAPTER 28 CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD PRODUCTS (MASK ROM SPECIFICATIONS (STANDARD VERSION OF 128 KB OR LESS AND TWO-POWER FLASH MEMORY PRODUCTS (MASK ROM VERSION), (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) VERSION OF 128 KB OR LESS AND TWO-POWER FLASH MEMORY VERSION), (A) GRADE PRODUCTS) Modification of basic operation and timer timing in CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A1) GRADE PRODUCTS) (TARGET) SPECIFICATIONS ((A1) GRADE PRODUCTS) (TARGET) Modification of basic operation and timer timing in CHAPTER 30 ELECTRICAL CHAPTER 30 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS) (TARGET) SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS) (TARGET) Addition of APPENDIX A DEVELOPMENT TOOLS APPENDIX A DEVELOPMENT TOOLS Addition of APPENDIX B INSTRUCTION SET LIST APPENDIX B INSTRUCTION SET LIST 862 User's Manual U16891EJ2V0UD For further information, please contact: NEC Electronics Corporation 1753, Shimonumabe, Nakahara-ku, Kawasaki, Kanagawa 211-8668, Japan Tel: 044-435-5111 http://www.necel.com/ [America] [Europe] [Asia & Oceania] NEC Electronics America, Inc. 2880 Scott Blvd. Santa Clara, CA 95050-2554, U.S.A. Tel: 408-588-6000 800-366-9782 http://www.am.necel.com/ NEC Electronics (Europe) GmbH Arcadiastrasse 10 40472 Dusseldorf, Germany Tel: 0211-65030 http://www.eu.necel.com/ NEC Electronics (China) Co., Ltd 7th Floor, Quantum Plaza, No. 27 ZhiChunLu Haidian District, Beijing 100083, P.R.China Tel: 010-8235-1155 http://www.cn.necel.com/ Hanover Office Podbielskistrasse 166 B 30177 Hannover Tel: 0 511 33 40 2-0 Munich Office Werner-Eckert-Strasse 9 81829 Munchen Tel: 0 89 92 10 03-0 Stuttgart Office Industriestrasse 3 70565 Stuttgart Tel: 0 711 99 01 0-0 United Kingdom Branch Cygnus House, Sunrise Parkway Linford Wood, Milton Keynes MK14 6NP, U.K. Tel: 01908-691-133 Succursale Francaise 9, rue Paul Dautier, B.P. 52180 78142 Velizy-Villacoublay Cedex France Tel: 01-3067-5800 Sucursal en Espana Juan Esplandiu, 15 28007 Madrid, Spain Tel: 091-504-2787 NEC Electronics Shanghai Ltd. Room 2509-2510, Bank of China Tower, 200 Yincheng Road Central, Pudong New Area, Shanghai P.R. China P.C:200120 Tel: 021-5888-5400 http://www.cn.necel.com/ NEC Electronics Hong Kong Ltd. 12/F., Cityplaza 4, 12 Taikoo Wan Road, Hong Kong Tel: 2886-9318 http://www.hk.necel.com/ Seoul Branch 11F., Samik Lavied'or Bldg., 720-2, Yeoksam-Dong, Kangnam-Ku, Seoul, 135-080, Korea Tel: 02-558-3737 NEC Electronics Taiwan Ltd. 7F, No. 363 Fu Shing North Road Taipei, Taiwan, R. O. C. Tel: 02-8175-9600 http://www.tw.necel.com/ NEC Electronics Singapore Pte. Ltd. 238A Thomson Road, #12-08 Novena Square, Singapore 307684 Tel: 6253-8311 http://www.sg.necel.com/ Tyskland Filial Taby Centrum Entrance S (7th floor) 18322 Taby, Sweden Tel: 08 638 72 00 Filiale Italiana Via Fabio Filzi, 25/A 20124 Milano, Italy Tel: 02-667541 Branch The Netherlands Steijgerweg 6 5616 HS Eindhoven The Netherlands Tel: 040 265 40 10 G06.8A